This document has been produced from the texinfo file zsh.texi
,
included in the Doc
sub-directory of the Zsh distribution.
The texinfo source may be converted into several formats:
The Info format allows searching for topics, commands, functions, etc.
from the many Indices. The command ‘makeinfo zsh.texi
’ is used to
produce the Info documentation.
The command ‘texi2dvi zsh.texi
’ will output zsh.dvi
which can
then be processed with dvips and optionally gs (Ghostscript) to
produce a nicely formatted printed manual.
An HTML version of this manual is available at the Zsh web site via:
https://zsh.sourceforge.io/Doc/
.
(The HTML version is produced with texi2html, which may be obtained
from http://www.nongnu.org/texi2html/
. The command is
‘texi2html --output . --ifinfo --split=chapter --node-files zsh.texi
’.
If necessary, upgrade to version 1.78 of texi2html.)
For those who do not have the necessary tools to process texinfo,
precompiled documentation (PostScript, dvi, PDF, info and HTML formats)
is available from the zsh archive site or its mirrors, in the file
zsh-doc.tar.gz
. (See Availability for a list of sites.)
Zsh is a UNIX command interpreter (shell) usable as an interactive login shell and as a shell script command processor. Of the standard shells, zsh most closely resembles ksh but includes many enhancements. It does not provide compatibility with POSIX or other shells in its default operating mode: see the section Compatibility.
Zsh has command line editing, builtin spelling correction, programmable command completion, shell functions (with autoloading), a history mechanism, and a host of other features.
Zsh was originally written by Paul Falstad. Zsh is now maintained by
the members of the zsh-workers mailing list <zsh-workers@zsh.org>
.
The development is currently coordinated by Peter Stephenson
<pws@zsh.org>
. The coordinator can be contacted at
<coordinator@zsh.org>
, but matters relating to the code should
generally go to the mailing list.
Zsh is available from the following HTTP and anonymous FTP site.
ftp://ftp.zsh.org/pub/
https://www.zsh.org/pub/
The up-to-date source code is available via Git from Sourceforge. See
https://sourceforge.net/projects/zsh/
for details. A summary of
instructions for the archive can be found at
https://zsh.sourceforge.io/
.
Zsh has several mailing lists:
<zsh-announce@zsh.org>
Announcements about releases, major changes in the shell and the monthly posting of the Zsh FAQ. (moderated)
<zsh-users@zsh.org>
User discussions.
<zsh-workers@zsh.org>
Hacking, development, bug reports and patches.
<zsh-security@zsh.org>
Private mailing list (the general public cannot subscribe to it) for discussing bug reports with security implications, i.e., potential vulnerabilities.
If you find a security problem in zsh itself, please mail this address.
To subscribe or unsubscribe, send mail to the associated administrative address for the mailing list.
<zsh-announce-subscribe@zsh.org>
<zsh-users-subscribe@zsh.org>
<zsh-workers-subscribe@zsh.org>
<zsh-announce-unsubscribe@zsh.org>
<zsh-users-unsubscribe@zsh.org>
<zsh-workers-unsubscribe@zsh.org>
YOU ONLY NEED TO JOIN ONE OF THE MAILING LISTS AS THEY ARE NESTED. All submissions to zsh-announce are automatically forwarded to zsh-users. All submissions to zsh-users are automatically forwarded to zsh-workers.
If you have problems subscribing/unsubscribing to any of the mailing
lists, send mail to <listmaster@zsh.org>
.
The mailing lists are archived; the archives can be accessed via the
administrative addresses listed above. There is also a hypertext
archive available at
https://www.zsh.org/mla/
.
Zsh has a list of Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), maintained by
Peter Stephenson <pws@zsh.org>
. It is regularly posted to the
newsgroup comp.unix.shell and the zsh-announce mailing list.
The latest version can be found at any of the Zsh FTP sites, or at
https://www.zsh.org/FAQ/
. The contact address for FAQ-related matters
is <faqmaster@zsh.org>
.
Zsh has a web page which is located at https://www.zsh.org/
.
The contact address for web-related matters is <webmaster@zsh.org>
.
A userguide is currently in preparation. It is intended to complement the
manual, with explanations and hints on issues where the manual can be
cabbalistic, hierographic, or downright mystifying (for example, the word
‘hierographic’ does not exist). It can be viewed in its current state at
https://zsh.sourceforge.io/Guide/
. At the time of writing, chapters
dealing with startup files and their contents and the new completion system
were essentially complete.
sh(1), csh(1), tcsh(1), rc(1), bash(1), ksh(1)
IEEE Standard for information Technology - Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX) - Part 2: Shell and Utilities, IEEE Inc, 1993, ISBN 1-55937-255-9.
The Zsh Manual, like the shell itself, is large and often complicated. This section of the manual provides some pointers to areas of the shell that are likely to be of particular interest to new users, and indicates where in the rest of the manual the documentation is to be found.
When it starts, the shell reads commands from various files. These can be created or edited to customize the shell. See Files.
If no personal initialization files exist for the current user, a function
is run to help you change some of the most common settings. It won’t
appear if your administrator has disabled the zsh/newuser
module.
The function is designed to be self-explanatory. You can run it by hand
with ‘autoload -Uz zsh-newuser-install; zsh-newuser-install -f
’.
See also
User Configuration Functions.
Interaction with the shell uses the builtin Zsh Line Editor, ZLE. This is described in detail in Zsh Line Editor.
The first decision a user must make is whether to use the Emacs or Vi
editing mode as the keys for editing are substantially different. Emacs
editing mode is probably more natural for beginners and can be selected
explicitly with the command bindkey -e
.
A history mechanism for retrieving previously typed lines (most simply
with the Up or Down arrow keys) is available; note that, unlike other
shells, zsh will not save these lines when the shell exits unless you
set appropriate variables, and the number of history lines retained by
default is quite small (30 lines). See the description of the shell
variables (referred to in the documentation as parameters) HISTFILE
,
HISTSIZE
and SAVEHIST
in Parameters Used By The Shell. Note that it’s
currently only possible to read and write files saving history
when the shell is interactive, i.e. it does not work from scripts.
The shell now supports the UTF-8 character set (and also others if
supported by the operating system). This is (mostly) handled transparently
by the shell, but the degree of support in terminal emulators is variable.
There is some discussion of this in the shell FAQ,
https://www.zsh.org/FAQ/
. Note in particular that for combining
characters to be handled the option COMBINING_CHARS
needs to be set.
Because the shell is now more sensitive to the definition of the
character set, note that if you are upgrading from an older version of
the shell you should ensure that the appropriate variable, either
LANG
(to affect all aspects of the shell’s operation) or
LC_CTYPE
(to affect only the handling of character sets) is set to
an appropriate value. This is true even if you are using a
single-byte character set including extensions of ASCII such as
ISO-8859-1
or ISO-8859-15
. See the description of LC_CTYPE
in
Parameters.
Completion is a feature present in many shells. It allows the user to
type only a part (usually the prefix) of a word and have the shell fill
in the rest. The completion system in zsh is programmable. For
example, the shell can be set to complete email addresses in
arguments to the mail command from your ~/.abook/addressbook
;
usernames, hostnames, and even remote paths in arguments to scp, and so
on. Anything that can be written in or glued together with zsh can be
the source of what the line editor offers as possible completions.
Zsh has two completion systems, an old, so called compctl
completion
(named after the builtin command that serves as its complete and only
user interface), and a new one, referred to as compsys
,
organized as library of builtin and user-defined functions.
The two systems differ in their interface for specifying the completion
behavior. The new system is more customizable and is supplied with
completions for many commonly used commands; it is therefore to be
preferred.
The completion system must be enabled explicitly when the shell starts. For more information see Completion System.
Apart from completion, the line editor is highly extensible by means of shell functions. Some useful functions are provided with the shell; they provide facilities such as:
insert-composed-char
composing characters not found on the keyboard
match-words-by-style
configuring what the line editor considers a word when moving or deleting by word
history-beginning-search-backward-end
, etc.alternative ways of searching the shell history
replace-string
, replace-pattern
functions for replacing strings or patterns globally in the command line
edit-command-line
edit the command line with an external editor.
See ZLE Functions for descriptions of these.
The shell has a large number of options for changing its behaviour. These cover all aspects of the shell; browsing the full documentation is the only good way to become acquainted with the many possibilities. See Options.
The shell has a rich set of patterns which are available for file matching (described in the documentation as ‘filename generation’ and also known for historical reasons as ‘globbing’) and for use when programming. These are described in Filename Generation.
Of particular interest are the following patterns that are not commonly supported by other systems of pattern matching:
**
for matching over multiple directories
|
for matching either of two alternatives
~
, ^
the ability to exclude patterns from matching when the EXTENDED_GLOB
option is set
(
...)
glob qualifiers, included in parentheses at the end of the pattern, which select files by type (such as directories) or attribute (such as size).
Although the syntax of zsh is in ways similar to the Korn shell, and therefore more remotely to the original UNIX shell, the Bourne shell, its default behaviour does not entirely correspond to those shells. General shell syntax is introduced in Shell Grammar.
One commonly encountered difference is that variables substituted onto the
command line are not split into words. See the description of the shell option
SH_WORD_SPLIT
in
Parameter Expansion.
In zsh, you can either explicitly request the splitting (e.g. ${=foo}
)
or use an array when you want a variable to expand to more than one word. See
Array Parameters.
The most convenient way of adding enhancements to the shell is typically by writing a shell function and arranging for it to be autoloaded. Functions are described in Functions. Users changing from the C shell and its relatives should notice that aliases are less used in zsh as they don’t perform argument substitution, only simple text replacement.
A few general functions, other than those for the line editor described above, are provided with the shell and are described in User Contributions. Features include:
promptinit
a prompt theme system for changing prompts easily, see Prompt Themes
zsh-mime-setup
a MIME-handling system which dispatches commands according to the suffix of a file as done by graphical file managers
zcalc
a calculator
zargs
a version of xargs
that makes the find
command redundant
zmv
a command for renaming files by means of shell patterns.
The following flags are interpreted by the shell when invoked to determine where the shell will read commands from:
-c
Take the first argument as a command to execute, rather than reading commands
from a script or standard input. If any further arguments are given, the
first one is assigned to $0
, rather than being used as a positional
parameter.
-i
Force shell to be interactive. It is still possible to specify a script to execute.
-s
Force shell to read commands from the standard input.
If the -s
flag is not present and an argument is given,
the first argument is taken to be the pathname of a script to
execute.
If there are any remaining arguments after option processing, and neither
of the options -c
or -s
was supplied, the first argument is taken
as the file name of a script containing shell commands to be executed. If
the option PATH_SCRIPT
is set, and the file name does not contain a
directory path (i.e. there is no ‘/
’ in the name), first the current
directory and then the command path given by the variable PATH
are
searched for the script. If the option is not set or the file name
contains a ‘/
’ it is used directly.
After the first one or two arguments have been appropriated as described above, the remaining arguments are assigned to the positional parameters.
For further options, which are common to invocation and the set
builtin, see
Options.
The long option ‘-
-emulate
’ followed (in a separate word) by an
emulation mode may be passed to the shell.
The emulation modes are those described for the emulate
builtin,
see
Shell Builtin Commands.
The ‘-
-emulate
’ option must precede any other options (which might
otherwise be overridden), but following options are honoured, so
may be used to modify the requested emulation mode. Note that certain
extra steps are taken to ensure a smooth emulation when this option
is used compared with the emulate
command within the shell: for
example, variables that conflict with POSIX usage such as path
are
not defined within the shell.
Options may be specified by name using the -o
option. -o
acts like
a single-letter option, but takes a following string as the option name.
For example,
zsh -x -o shwordsplit scr
runs the script scr
, setting the XTRACE
option by the corresponding
letter ‘-x
’ and the SH_WORD_SPLIT
option by name.
Options may be turned off by name by using +o
instead of -o
.
-o
can be stacked up with preceding single-letter options, so for example
‘-xo shwordsplit
’ or ‘-xoshwordsplit
’ is equivalent to
‘-x -o shwordsplit
’.
Options may also be specified by name in GNU long option style,
‘-
-
option-name’. When this is done, ‘-
’ characters in the
option name are permitted: they are translated into ‘_
’, and thus ignored.
So, for example, ‘zsh -
-sh-word-split
’ invokes zsh with the
SH_WORD_SPLIT
option turned on. Like other option syntaxes, options can
be turned off by replacing the initial ‘-
’ with a ‘+
’; thus
‘+-sh-word-split
’ is equivalent to ‘-
-no-sh-word-split
’.
Unlike other option syntaxes, GNU-style long options cannot be stacked with
any other options, so for example ‘-x-shwordsplit
’ is an error,
rather than being treated like ‘-x -
-shwordsplit
’.
The special GNU-style option ‘-
-version
’ is handled; it sends to
standard output the shell’s version information, then exits successfully.
‘-
-help
’ is also handled; it sends to standard output a list of
options that can be used when invoking the shell, then exits successfully.
Option processing may be finished, allowing following arguments that start with
‘-
’ or ‘+
’ to be treated as normal arguments, in two ways.
Firstly, a lone ‘-
’ (or ‘+
’) as an argument by itself ends
option processing. Secondly, a special option ‘-
-
’ (or
‘+-
’), which may be specified on its own (which is the standard
POSIX usage) or may be stacked with preceding options (so ‘-x-
’ is
equivalent to ‘-x -
-
’). Options are not permitted to be stacked
after ‘-
-
’ (so ‘-x-f
’ is an error), but note the GNU-style
option form discussed above, where ‘-
-shwordsplit
’ is permitted
and does not end option processing.
Except when the sh/ksh emulation single-letter options are in effect,
the option ‘-b
’ (or ‘+b
’) ends option processing.
‘-b
’ is like ‘-
-
’, except that further single-letter options
can be stacked after the ‘-b
’ and will take effect as normal.
Zsh tries to emulate sh or ksh when it is invoked as
sh
or ksh
respectively; more precisely, it looks at the first
letter of the name by which it was invoked, excluding any initial ‘r
’
(assumed to stand for ‘restricted’), and if that is ‘b
’, ‘s
’ or ‘k
’ it
will emulate sh or ksh. Furthermore, if invoked as su
(which
happens on certain systems when the shell is executed by the su
command), the shell will try to find an alternative name from the SHELL
environment variable and perform emulation based on that.
In sh and ksh compatibility modes the following
parameters are not special and not initialized by the shell:
ARGC
,
argv
,
cdpath
,
fignore
,
fpath
,
HISTCHARS
,
mailpath
,
MANPATH
,
manpath
,
path
,
prompt
,
PROMPT
,
PROMPT2
,
PROMPT3
,
PROMPT4
,
psvar
,
status
.
The usual zsh startup/shutdown scripts are not executed. Login shells
source /etc/profile
followed by $HOME/.profile
. If the
ENV
environment variable is set on invocation, $ENV
is sourced
after the profile scripts. The value of ENV
is subjected to
parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic expansion
before being interpreted as a pathname. Note that the PRIVILEGED
option also affects the execution of startup files.
The following options are set if the shell is invoked as sh
or
ksh
:
NO_BAD_PATTERN
,
NO_BANG_HIST
,
NO_BG_NICE
,
NO_EQUALS
,
NO_FUNCTION_ARGZERO
,
GLOB_SUBST
,
NO_GLOBAL_EXPORT
,
NO_HUP
,
INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
,
KSH_ARRAYS
,
NO_MULTIOS
,
NO_NOMATCH
,
NO_NOTIFY
,
POSIX_BUILTINS
,
NO_PROMPT_PERCENT
,
RM_STAR_SILENT
,
SH_FILE_EXPANSION
,
SH_GLOB
,
SH_OPTION_LETTERS
,
SH_WORD_SPLIT
.
Additionally the BSD_ECHO
and IGNORE_BRACES
options are set if zsh is invoked as sh
.
Also, the
KSH_OPTION_PRINT
,
LOCAL_OPTIONS
,
PROMPT_BANG
,
PROMPT_SUBST
and
SINGLE_LINE_ZLE
options are set if zsh is invoked as ksh
.
Please note that, whilst reasonable efforts are taken to address
incompatibilities when they arise, zsh does not guarantee complete
emulation of other shells, nor POSIX compliance. For more information on
the differences between zsh and other shells, please refer to chapter 2
of the shell FAQ, https://www.zsh.org/FAQ/
.
When the basename of the command used to invoke zsh starts with the letter
‘r
’ or the ‘-r
’ command line option is supplied at invocation, the
shell becomes restricted. Emulation mode is determined after stripping the
letter ‘r
’ from the invocation name. The following are disabled in
restricted mode:
cd
builtin
EGID
, EUID
, GID
,
HISTFILE
, HISTSIZE
, IFS
, LD_AOUT_LIBRARY_PATH
,
LD_AOUT_PRELOAD
, LD_LIBRARY_PATH
, LD_PRELOAD
,
MODULE_PATH
, module_path
, PATH
, path
, SHELL
,
UID
and USERNAME
parameters
/
hash
exec
builtin command to replace the shell with another
command
jobs -Z
to overwrite the shell process’ argument and
environment space
ARGV0
parameter to override argv[0]
for external
commands
set +r
or unsetopt
RESTRICTED
These restrictions are enforced after processing the startup files. The
startup files should set up PATH
to point to a directory of commands
which can be safely invoked in the restricted environment. They may also
add further restrictions by disabling selected builtins.
Restricted mode can also be activated any time by setting the
RESTRICTED
option. This immediately enables all the restrictions
described above even if the shell still has not processed all startup
files.
A shell Restricted Mode is an outdated way to restrict what users may do: modern systems have better, safer and more reliable ways to confine user actions, such as chroot jails, containers and zones.
A restricted shell is very difficult to implement safely. The feature may be removed in a future version of zsh.
It is important to realise that the restrictions only apply to the shell,
not to the commands it runs (except for some shell builtins). While a
restricted shell can only run the restricted list of commands accessible
via the predefined ‘PATH
’ variable, it does not prevent those
commands from running any other command.
As an example, if ‘env
’ is among the list of allowed commands,
then it allows the user to run any command as ‘env
’ is not a shell
builtin command and can run arbitrary executables.
So when implementing a restricted shell framework it is important to be fully aware of what actions each of the allowed commands or features (which may be regarded as modules) can perform.
Many commands can have their behaviour affected by environment variables. Except for the few listed above, zsh does not restrict the setting of environment variables.
If a ‘perl
’, ‘python
’, ‘bash
’, or other general purpose
interpreted script it treated as a restricted
command, the user can work around the restriction by
setting specially crafted ‘PERL5LIB
’, ‘PYTHONPATH
’,
‘BASHENV
’ (etc.) environment variables. On GNU systems, any
command can be made to run arbitrary code when performing character set
conversion (including zsh itself) by setting a ‘GCONV_PATH
’
environment variable. Those are only a few examples.
Bear in mind that, contrary to some other shells, ‘readonly
’ is not a
security feature in zsh as it can be undone and so cannot be used to
mitigate the above.
A restricted shell only works if the allowed commands are few
and carefully written so as not to grant more access to users than
intended. It is also important to restrict what zsh module the user may
load as some of them, such as ‘zsh/system
’, ‘zsh/mapfile
’ and
‘zsh/files
’, allow bypassing most of the restrictions.
Commands are first read from /etc/zshenv
; this cannot be overridden.
Subsequent behaviour is modified by the RCS
and
GLOBAL_RCS
options; the former affects all startup files, while the
second only affects global startup files (those shown here with an
path starting with a /
). If one of the options
is unset at any point, any subsequent startup file(s)
of the corresponding
type will not be read. It is also possible for a file in $ZDOTDIR
to
re-enable GLOBAL_RCS
. Both RCS
and GLOBAL_RCS
are set by
default.
Commands are then read from $ZDOTDIR/.zshenv
.
If the shell is a login shell, commands
are read from /etc/zprofile
and then $ZDOTDIR/.zprofile
.
Then, if the shell is interactive,
commands are read from /etc/zshrc
and then $ZDOTDIR/.zshrc
.
Finally, if the shell is a login shell, /etc/zlogin
and
$ZDOTDIR/.zlogin
are read.
When a login shell exits, the files $ZDOTDIR/.zlogout
and then
/etc/zlogout
are read. This happens with either an explicit exit
via the exit
or logout
commands, or an implicit exit by reading
end-of-file from the terminal. However, if the shell terminates due
to exec
’ing another process, the logout files are not read.
These are also affected by the RCS
and GLOBAL_RCS
options.
Note also that the RCS
option affects the saving of history files,
i.e. if RCS
is unset when the shell exits, no history file will be
saved.
If ZDOTDIR
is unset, HOME
is used instead.
Files listed above as being in /etc
may be in another
directory, depending on the installation.
As /etc/zshenv
is run for all instances of zsh, it is important that
it be kept as small as possible. In particular, it is a good idea to
put code that does not need to be run for every single shell behind
a test of the form ‘if [[ -o rcs ]]; then ...
’ so that it will not
be executed when zsh is invoked with the ‘-f
’ option.
$ZDOTDIR/.zshenv
$ZDOTDIR/.zprofile
$ZDOTDIR/.zshrc
$ZDOTDIR/.zlogin
$ZDOTDIR/.zlogout
${TMPPREFIX}*
(default is /tmp/zsh*)/etc/zshenv
/etc/zprofile
/etc/zshrc
/etc/zlogin
/etc/zlogout
(installation-specific - /etc
is the default)Any of these files may be pre-compiled with the zcompile
builtin
command (Shell Builtin Commands). If a compiled file exists (named for the original file plus the
.zwc
extension) and it is newer than the original file, the compiled
file will be used instead.
A simple command is a sequence of optional parameter assignments followed by blank-separated words, with optional redirections interspersed. For a description of assignment, see the beginning of Parameters.
The first word is the command to be executed, and the remaining words, if any, are arguments to the command. If a command name is given, the parameter assignments modify the environment of the command when it is executed. The value of a simple command is its exit status, or 128 plus the signal number if terminated by a signal. For example,
echo foo
is a simple command with arguments.
A pipeline is either a simple command, or a sequence of two or more
simple commands where each command is separated from the next by ‘|
’
or ‘|&
’. Where commands are separated by ‘|
’, the standard
output of the first command is connected to the
standard input of the next. ‘|&
’ is shorthand for ‘2>&1 |
’, which
connects both the standard output and the standard error of the
command to the standard input of the next. The value of a pipeline
is the value of the last command, unless the pipeline is preceded by
‘!
’ in which case the value is the logical inverse of the value of the
last command.
For example,
echo foo | sed 's/foo/bar/'
is a pipeline, where the output (‘foo
’ plus a newline) of the first
command will be passed to the input of the second.
If a pipeline is preceded by ‘coproc
’, it is executed as a coprocess;
a two-way pipe is established between it and the parent shell. The
shell can read from or write to the coprocess by means of the ‘>&p
’
and ‘<&p
’ redirection operators or with ‘print -p
’ and ‘read -p
’.
A pipeline cannot be preceded by both ‘coproc
’ and ‘!
’.
If job control is active, the coprocess can be treated in other than input
and output as an ordinary background job.
A sublist is either a single pipeline, or a sequence of two or more
pipelines separated by ‘&&
’ or ‘||
’. If two pipelines are separated
by ‘&&
’, the second pipeline is executed only if the first succeeds
(returns a zero status). If two pipelines are separated by ‘||
’, the
second is executed only if the first fails (returns a nonzero status).
Both operators have equal precedence and are left associative.
The value of the sublist is the value of the last pipeline executed.
For example,
dmesg | grep panic && print yes
is a sublist consisting of two pipelines, the second just a simple command
which will be executed if and only if the grep
command returns a zero
status. If it does not, the value of the sublist is that return status, else
it is the status returned by the print
(almost certainly zero).
A list is a sequence of zero or more sublists, in which each sublist
is terminated by ‘;
’, ‘&
’, ‘&|
’, ‘&!
’, or a newline.
This terminator
may optionally be omitted from the last sublist in the list when the
list appears as a complex command inside ‘(
...)
’
or ‘{
...}
’. When a
sublist is terminated by ‘;
’ or newline, the shell waits for it to
finish before executing the next sublist. If a sublist is terminated
by a ‘&
’, ‘&|
’, or ‘&!
’,
the shell executes the last pipeline in it in the background, and
does not wait for it to finish (note the difference from other shells
which execute the whole sublist in the background).
A backgrounded pipeline returns a status of zero.
More generally, a list can be seen as a set of any shell commands whatsoever, including the complex commands below; this is implied wherever the word ‘list’ appears in later descriptions. For example, the commands in a shell function form a special sort of list.
A simple command may be preceded by a precommand modifier,
which will alter how the command is interpreted. These modifiers are
shell builtin commands with the exception of nocorrect
which is
a reserved word.
-
¶The command is executed with a ‘-
’ prepended to its
argv[0]
string.
builtin
¶The command word is taken to be the name of a builtin command, rather than a shell function or external command.
command
[ -pvV
] ¶The command word is taken to be the name of an external command,
rather than a shell function or builtin. If the POSIX_BUILTINS
option
is set, builtins will also be executed but certain special properties
of them are suppressed. The -p
flag causes a default path to be
searched instead of that in $path
. With the -v
flag, command
is similar to whence
and with -V
, it is equivalent to whence
-v
.
exec
[ -cl
] [ -a
argv0 ] ¶The following command together with any arguments is run in place
of the current process, rather than as a sub-process. The shell does not
fork and is replaced. The shell does not invoke TRAPEXIT
, nor does it
source zlogout
files.
The options are provided for compatibility with other shells.
The -c
option clears the environment.
The -l
option is equivalent to the -
precommand modifier, to
treat the replacement command as a login shell; the command is executed
with a -
prepended to its argv[0]
string. This flag has no effect
if used together with the -a
option.
The -a
option is used to specify explicitly the argv[0]
string
(the name of the command as seen by the process itself) to be used by the
replacement command and is directly equivalent to setting a value
for the ARGV0
environment variable.
nocorrect
¶Spelling correction is not done on any of the words. This must appear before any other precommand modifier, as it is interpreted immediately, before any parsing is done. It has no effect in non-interactive shells.
noglob
¶Filename generation (globbing) is not performed on any of the words.
A complex command in zsh is one of the following:
if
list then
list [ elif
list then
list ] ... [ else
list ] fi
¶The if
list is executed, and if it returns a zero exit status,
the then
list is executed.
Otherwise, the elif
list is executed and if its status is zero,
the then
list is executed.
If each elif
list returns nonzero status, the else
list
is executed.
for
name ... [ in
word ... ] term do
list done
¶Expand the list of words, and set the parameter
name to each of them in turn, executing list
each time. If the ‘in
word’ is omitted,
use the positional parameters instead of the words.
The term consists of one or more newline or ;
which terminate the words, and are optional when the
‘in
word’ is omitted.
More than one parameter name can appear before the list of
words. If N names are given, then on each execution of the
loop the next N words are assigned to the corresponding
parameters. If there are more names than remaining words, the
remaining parameters are each set to the empty string. Execution of the
loop ends when there is no remaining word to assign to the first
name. It is only possible for in
to appear as the first name
in the list, else it will be treated as marking the end of the list.
for ((
[expr1] ;
[expr2] ;
[expr3] )) do
list done
The arithmetic expression expr1 is evaluated first (see Arithmetic Evaluation). The arithmetic expression expr2 is repeatedly evaluated until it evaluates to zero and when non-zero, list is executed and the arithmetic expression expr3 evaluated. If any expression is omitted, then it behaves as if it evaluated to 1.
while
list do
list done
¶Execute the do
list as long as the while
list
returns a zero exit status.
until
list do
list done
¶Execute the do
list as long as until
list
returns a nonzero exit status.
repeat
word do
list done
¶word is expanded and treated as an arithmetic expression, which must evaluate to a number n. list is then executed n times.
The repeat
syntax is disabled by default when the
shell starts in a mode emulating another shell. It can be enabled
with the command ‘enable -r repeat
’
case
word in
[ [(
] pattern [ |
pattern ] ... )
list (;;
|;&
|;|
) ] ... esac
¶Execute the list associated with the first pattern that matches word, if any. The form of the patterns is the same as that used for filename generation. See Filename Generation.
Note further that, unless the SH_GLOB
option is set, the whole
pattern with alternatives is treated by the shell as equivalent to a
group of patterns within parentheses, although white space may appear
about the parentheses and the vertical bar and will be stripped from the
pattern at those points. White space may appear elsewhere in the
pattern; this is not stripped. If the SH_GLOB
option is set, so
that an opening parenthesis can be unambiguously treated as part of the
case syntax, the expression is parsed into separate words and these are
treated as strict alternatives (as in other shells).
If the list that is executed is terminated with ;&
rather than
;;
, the following list is also executed. The rule for
the terminator of the following list ;;
, ;&
or ;|
is
applied unless the esac
is reached.
If the list that is executed is terminated with ;|
the
shell continues to scan the patterns looking for the next match,
executing the corresponding list, and applying the rule for
the corresponding terminator ;;
, ;&
or ;|
.
Note that word is not re-expanded; all applicable patterns
are tested with the same word.
select
name [ in
word ... term ] do
list done
¶where term is one or more newline or ;
to terminate the words.
Print the set of words, each preceded by a number.
If the in
word is omitted, use the positional parameters.
The PROMPT3
prompt is printed and a line is read from the line editor
if the shell is interactive and that is active, or else standard input.
If this line consists of the
number of one of the listed words, then the parameter name
is set to the word corresponding to this number.
If this line is empty, the selection list is printed again.
Otherwise, the value of the parameter name is set to null.
The contents of the line read from standard input is saved
in the parameter REPLY
. list is executed
for each selection until a break or end-of-file is encountered.
(
list )
¶Execute list in a subshell. Traps set by the trap
builtin
are reset to their default values while executing list; an
exception is that ignored signals will continue to be ignored
if the option POSIXTRAPS
is set.
{
list }
Execute list.
{
try-list } always {
always-list }
¶First execute try-list. Regardless of errors, or break
or
continue
commands encountered within try-list,
execute always-list. Execution then continues from the
result of the execution of try-list; in other words, any error,
or break
or continue
command is treated in the
normal way, as if always-list were not present. The two
chunks of code are referred to as the ‘try block’ and the ‘always block’.
Optional newlines or semicolons may appear after the always
;
note, however, that they may not appear between the preceding
closing brace and the always
.
An ‘error’ in this context is a condition such as a syntax error which
causes the shell to abort execution of the current function, script, or
list. Syntax errors encountered while the shell is parsing the
code do not cause the always-list to be executed. For example,
an erroneously constructed if
block in try-list would cause the
shell to abort during parsing, so that always-list would not be
executed, while an erroneous substitution such as ${*foo*}
would
cause a run-time error, after which always-list would be executed.
An error condition can be tested and reset with the special integer
variable TRY_BLOCK_ERROR
. Outside an always-list the value is
irrelevant, but it is initialised to -1
. Inside always-list, the
value is 1 if an error occurred in the try-list, else 0. If
TRY_BLOCK_ERROR
is set to 0 during the always-list, the error
condition caused by the try-list is reset, and shell execution
continues normally after the end of always-list. Altering the value
during the try-list is not useful (unless this forms part of an
enclosing always
block).
Regardless of TRY_BLOCK_ERROR
, after the end of always-list the
normal shell status $?
is the value returned from try-list.
This will be non-zero if there was an error, even if TRY_BLOCK_ERROR
was set to zero.
The following executes the given code, ignoring any errors it causes. This is an alternative to the usual convention of protecting code by executing it in a subshell.
{ # code which may cause an error } always { # This code is executed regardless of the error. (( TRY_BLOCK_ERROR = 0 )) } # The error condition has been reset.
When a try
block occurs outside of any function,
a return
or a exit
encountered in try-list does not cause
the execution of always-list. Instead, the shell exits immediately
after any EXIT
trap has been executed.
Otherwise, a return
command encountered in try-list will cause the
execution of always-list, just like break
and continue
.
function
[ -T
] word ... [ ()
] [ term ] {
list }
¶()
[ term ] {
list }
()
[ term ] commandwhere term is one or more newline or ;
.
Define a function which is referenced by any one of word.
Normally, only one word is provided; multiple words
are usually only useful for setting traps.
The body of the function is the list between
the {
and }
. See Functions.
The options of function
have the following meanings:
Enable tracing for this function, as though with functions -T
. See the
documentation of the -f
option to the typeset
builtin, in
Shell Builtin Commands.
If the option SH_GLOB
is set for compatibility with other shells, then
whitespace may appear between the left and right parentheses when
there is a single word; otherwise, the parentheses will be treated as
forming a globbing pattern in that case.
In any of the forms above, a redirection may appear outside the function body, for example
func() { ... } 2>&1
The redirection is stored with the function and applied whenever the function is executed. Any variables in the redirection are expanded at the point the function is executed, but outside the function scope.
time
[ pipeline ] ¶The pipeline is executed, and timing statistics are
reported on the standard error in the form specified
by the TIMEFMT
parameter.
If pipeline is omitted, print statistics about the
shell process and its children.
[[
exp ]]
¶Evaluates the conditional expression exp and return a zero exit status if it is true. See Conditional Expressions for a description of exp.
Many of zsh’s complex commands have alternate forms. These are non-standard and are likely not to be obvious even to seasoned shell programmers; they should not be used anywhere that portability of shell code is a concern.
The short versions below only work if sublist is of the form ‘{
list }
’ or if the SHORT_LOOPS
option is set. For the if
,
while
and until
commands, in both these cases the test part of the
loop must also be suitably delimited, such as by ‘[[
... ]]
’ or
‘((
... ))
’,
else the end of the test will not be recognized. For the
for
, repeat
, case
and select
commands no such special form
for the arguments is necessary, but the other condition (the special form
of sublist or use of the SHORT_LOOPS
option) still applies.
The SHORT_REPEAT
option is available to enable the short version only
for the repeat
command.
if
list {
list }
[ elif
list {
list }
] ... [ else {
list }
]An alternate form of if
. The rules mean that
if [[ -o ignorebraces ]] { print yes }
works, but
if true { # Does not work! print yes }
does not, since the test is not suitably delimited.
if
list sublistA short form of the alternate if
. The same limitations on the form of
list apply as for the previous form.
for
name ... (
word ... )
sublistA short form of for
.
for
name ... [ in
word ... ] term sublistwhere term is at least one newline or ;
.
Another short form of for
.
for ((
[expr1] ;
[expr2] ;
[expr3] ))
sublistA short form of the arithmetic for
command.
foreach
name ... (
word ... )
list end
¶Another form of for
.
while
list {
list }
An alternative form of while
. Note the limitations on the form of
list mentioned above.
until
list {
list }
An alternative form of until
. Note the limitations on the form of
list mentioned above.
repeat
word sublistThis is a short form of repeat
.
case
word {
[ [(
] pattern [ |
pattern ] ... )
list (;;
|;&
|;|
) ] ... }
An alternative form of case
.
select
name [ in
word ... term ] sublistwhere term is at least one newline or ;
.
A short form of select
.
function
word ... [ ()
] [ term ] sublistThis is a short form of function
.
The following words are recognized as reserved words when used as the first
word of a command unless quoted or disabled using disable -r
:
do done esac then elif else fi for case
if while function repeat time until
select coproc nocorrect foreach end ! [[ { }
declare export float integer local readonly typeset
Additionally, ‘}
’ is recognized in any position if neither the
IGNORE_BRACES
option nor the IGNORE_CLOSE_BRACES
option is set.
Certain errors are treated as fatal by the shell: in an interactive
shell, they cause control to return to the command line, and in a
non-interactive shell they cause the shell to be aborted. In older
versions of zsh, a non-interactive shell running a script would not
abort completely, but would resume execution at the next command to be
read from the script, skipping the remainder of any functions or
shell constructs such as loops or conditions; this somewhat illogical
behaviour can be recovered by setting the option CONTINUE_ON_ERROR
.
Fatal errors found in non-interactive shells include:
set
builtin
typeset
,
local
, declare
, export
, integer
, float
continue
, break
)
RESTRICTED
options is set
BAD_PATTERN
NO_MATCH
or
similar options
$'
...'
expressions
If the POSIX_BUILTINS
option is set, more errors associated with
shell builtin commands are treated as fatal, as specified by the POSIX
standard.
In non-interactive shells, or in interactive shells with the
INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
option set, a word beginning
with the third character of the histchars
parameter
(‘#
’ by default) causes that word and all the following
characters up to a newline to be ignored.
Every eligible word in the shell input is checked to see if there is an alias defined for it. If so, it is replaced by the text of the alias if it is in command position (if it could be the first word of a simple command), or if the alias is global. If the replacement text ends with a space, the next word in the shell input is always eligible for purposes of alias expansion.
It is an error for the function name, word, in the sh-compatible function
definition syntax ‘word ()
...’ to be a word that resulted
from alias expansion, unless the ALIAS_FUNC_DEF
option is set.
An alias is defined using the alias
builtin; global aliases
may be defined using the -g
option to that builtin.
A word is defined as:
case
, do
, else
, etc.)
(
’ or ‘)
’ when not part of a glob pattern
Alias expansion is done on the shell input before any other expansion
except history expansion. Therefore, if an alias is defined for the
word foo
, alias expansion may be avoided by quoting part of the
word, e.g. \foo
. Any form of quoting works, although there is
nothing to prevent an alias being defined for the quoted form such as
\foo
as well.
In particular, note that quoting must be used when using unalias
to remove
global aliases:
% alias -g foo=bar % unalias foo unalias: no such hash table element: bar % unalias \foo %
When POSIX_ALIASES
is set, only plain unquoted strings are eligible
for aliasing. The alias
builtin does not reject ineligible aliases,
but they are not expanded.
For use with completion, which would remove an initial backslash followed
by a character that isn’t special, it may be more convenient to quote the
word by starting with a single quote, i.e. 'foo
; completion will
automatically add the trailing single quote.
Although aliases can be used in ways that bend normal shell syntax, not every string of non-white-space characters can be used as an alias.
Any set of characters not listed as a word above is not a word, hence no
attempt is made to expand it as an alias, no matter how it is defined
(i.e. via the builtin or the special parameter aliases
described in
The zsh/parameter Module).
However, as noted in the case of POSIX_ALIASES
above, the shell does
not attempt to deduce whether the string corresponds to a word at the
time the alias is created.
For example, an expression containing an =
at the start of
a command line is an assignment and cannot be expanded as an alias;
a lone =
is not an assignment but can only be set as an alias
using the parameter, as otherwise the =
is taken part of the
syntax of the builtin command.
It is not presently possible to alias the ‘((
’ token that
introduces arithmetic expressions, because until a full statement has been
parsed, it cannot be distinguished from two consecutive ‘(
’
tokens introducing nested subshells.
Also, if a separator such as &&
is aliased,
\&&
turns into the two tokens \&
and &
, each of which may
have been aliased separately. Similarly for \<<
, \>|
, etc.
There is a commonly encountered problem with aliases illustrated by the following code:
alias echobar='echo bar'; echobar
This prints a message that the command echobar
could not be found.
This happens because aliases are expanded when the code is read in;
the entire line is read in one go, so that when echobar
is executed it
is too late to expand the newly defined alias. This is often
a problem in shell scripts, functions, and code executed with ‘source
’
or ‘.
’. Consequently, use of functions rather than aliases is
recommended in non-interactive code.
A character may be quoted (that is, made
to stand for itself) by preceding it with a ‘\
’.
‘\
’ followed by a newline is ignored.
A string enclosed between ‘$'
’ and ‘'
’ is
processed the same way as the string arguments of the
print
builtin, and the resulting string is considered to be
entirely quoted. A literal ‘'
’ character can be included in the
string by using the ‘\'
’ escape.
All characters enclosed between a pair of single quotes ({No value for `dsq'}
) that
is not preceded by a ‘$
’ are quoted. A single quote cannot appear
within single quotes unless the option RC_QUOTES
is set, in which case
a pair of single quotes are turned into a single quote. For example,
print {No value for `dsq'}{No value for `dsq'}
outputs nothing apart from a newline if RC_QUOTES
is not set, but one
single quote if it is set.
Inside double quotes (""
), parameter and
command substitution occur, and ‘\
’ quotes the characters
‘\
’, ‘`
’, ‘"
’, ‘$
’, and the first character
of $histchars
(default ‘!
’).
If a command is followed by &
and job control is not active,
then the default standard input
for the command is the empty file /dev/null
.
Otherwise, the environment for the execution of a command contains the
file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by
input/output specifications.
The following may appear anywhere in a simple command or may precede or follow a complex command. Expansion occurs before word or digit is used except as noted below. If the result of substitution on word produces more than one filename, redirection occurs for each separate filename in turn.
<
wordOpen file word for reading as standard input. It is an error to open a file in this fashion if it does not exist.
<>
wordOpen file word for reading and writing as standard input. If the file does not exist then it is created.
>
wordOpen file word for writing as standard output.
If the file does not exist then it is created.
If the file exists, and the CLOBBER
option is unset,
this causes an error;
otherwise, it is truncated to zero length.
>|
word>!
wordSame as >
, except that the file is truncated to zero length
if it exists, regardless of CLOBBER
.
>>
wordOpen file word for writing in append mode as standard output.
If the file does not exist, and the CLOBBER
and APPEND_CREATE
options are both unset, this causes an error;
otherwise, the file is created.
>>|
word>>!
wordSame as >>
, except that the file is created if it does not
exist, regardless of CLOBBER
and APPEND_CREATE
.
<<
[-
] wordThe shell input is read up to a line that is the same as word, or to an end-of-file. No parameter expansion, command substitution or filename generation is performed on word. The resulting document, called a here-document, becomes the standard input.
If any character of word is quoted with
single or double quotes or a ‘\
’,
no interpretation is placed upon the characters of the document.
Otherwise, parameter and command substitution
occurs, ‘\
’ followed by a newline is removed,
and ‘\
’ must be used to quote the characters
‘\
’, ‘$
’, ‘`
’ and the first character of word.
Note that word itself does not undergo shell expansion. Backquotes
in word do not have their usual effect; instead they behave
similarly to double quotes, except that the backquotes themselves are
passed through unchanged. (This information is given for completeness
and it is not recommended that backquotes be used.) Quotes in the form
$'
...'
have their standard effect of expanding backslashed
references to special characters.
If <<-
is used, then all leading
tabs are stripped from word and from the document.
<<<
wordPerform shell expansion on word and pass the result to standard input. This is known as a here-string. Compare the use of word in here-documents above, where word does not undergo shell expansion. The result will have a trailing newline after it.
<&
number>&
numberThe standard input/output is duplicated from file descriptor number (see dup2(2)).
<& -
>& -
Close the standard input/output.
<& p
>& p
The input/output from/to the coprocess is moved to the standard input/output.
>&
word&>
word(Except where ‘>&
word’ matches one of the above syntaxes;
‘&>
’ can always be used to avoid this ambiguity.)
Redirects both standard output and standard error (file descriptor 2)
in the manner of ‘>
word’.
Note that this does not have the same effect as ‘>
word 2>&1
’
in the presence of multios (see the section below).
>&|
word>&!
word&>|
word&>!
wordRedirects both standard output and standard error (file descriptor 2)
in the manner of ‘>|
word’.
>>&
word&>>
wordRedirects both standard output and standard error (file descriptor 2)
in the manner of ‘>>
word’.
>>&|
word>>&!
word&>>|
word&>>!
wordRedirects both standard output and standard error (file descriptor 2)
in the manner of ‘>>|
word’.
If one of the above is preceded by a digit, then the file descriptor referred to is that specified by the digit instead of the default 0 or 1. The order in which redirections are specified is significant. The shell evaluates each redirection in terms of the (file descriptor, file) association at the time of evaluation. For example:
...
1>
fname2>&1
first associates file descriptor 1 with file fname. It then associates file descriptor 2 with the file associated with file descriptor 1 (that is, fname). If the order of redirections were reversed, file descriptor 2 would be associated with the terminal (assuming file descriptor 1 had been) and then file descriptor 1 would be associated with file fname.
The ‘|&
’ command separator described in
Simple Commands & Pipelines
is a shorthand for ‘2>&1 |
’.
The various forms of process substitution, ‘<(
list)
’,
and ‘=(
list)
’ for input and
‘>(
list)
’ for output, are often used together with
redirection. For example, if word in an output redirection is of the
form ‘>(
list)
’ then the output is piped to the
command represented by list. See
Process Substitution.
When the shell is parsing arguments to a command, and the shell option
IGNORE_BRACES
is not set, a different form of redirection is allowed:
instead of a digit before the operator there is a valid shell identifier
enclosed in braces. The shell will open a new file descriptor that
is guaranteed to be at least 10 and set the parameter named by the
identifier to the file descriptor opened. No whitespace is allowed
between the closing brace and the redirection character. For example:
...
{myfd}>&1
This opens a new file descriptor that is a duplicate of file descriptor
1 and sets the parameter myfd
to the number of the file descriptor,
which will be at least 10. The new file descriptor can be written to using
the syntax >&$myfd
. The file descriptor remains open in subshells
and forked external executables.
The syntax {
varid}>&-
, for example {myfd}>&-
, may be used
to close a file descriptor opened in this fashion. Note that the
parameter given by varid must previously be set to a file descriptor
in this case.
It is an error to open or close a file descriptor in this fashion when the
parameter is readonly. However, it is not an error to read or write a file
descriptor using <&$
param or >&$
param if param is
readonly.
If the option CLOBBER
is unset, it is an error to open a file
descriptor using a parameter that is already set to an open file descriptor
previously allocated by this mechanism. Unsetting the parameter before
using it for allocating a file descriptor avoids the error.
Note that this mechanism merely allocates or closes a file descriptor; it
does not perform any redirections from or to it. It is usually convenient
to allocate a file descriptor prior to use as an argument to exec
.
The syntax does not in any case work when used around complex commands
such as parenthesised subshells or loops, where the opening brace is
interpreted as part of a command list to be executed in the current shell.
The following shows a typical sequence of allocation, use, and closing of a file descriptor:
integer myfd exec {myfd}>~/logs/mylogfile.txt print This is a log message. >&$myfd exec {myfd}>&-
Note that the expansion of the variable in the expression >&$myfd
occurs at the point the redirection is opened. This is after the expansion
of command arguments and after any redirections to the left on the command
line have been processed.
If the user tries to open a file descriptor for writing more than once,
the shell opens the file descriptor as a pipe to a process that copies
its input to all the specified outputs, similar to tee,
provided the MULTIOS
option is set, as it is by default. Thus:
date >foo >bar
writes the date to two files, named ‘foo
’ and ‘bar
’.
Note that a pipe is an implicit redirection; thus
date >foo | cat
writes the date to the file ‘foo
’, and also pipes it to cat.
Note that the shell opens all the files to be used in the multio process immediately, not at the point they are about to be written.
Note also that redirections are always expanded in order. This happens
regardless of the setting of the MULTIOS
option, but with the option
in effect there are additional consequences. For example,
the meaning of the expression >&1
will change after a previous
redirection:
date >&1 >output
In the case above, the >&1
refers to the standard output at the
start of the line; the result is similar to the tee
command.
However, consider:
date >output >&1
As redirections are evaluated in order, when the >&1
is encountered
the standard output is set to the file output
and another copy of
the output is therefore sent to that file. This is unlikely to be what
is intended.
If the MULTIOS
option is set, the word after a redirection operator is also subjected
to filename generation (globbing). Thus
: > *
will truncate all files in the current directory,
assuming there’s at least one. (Without the MULTIOS
option, it would create an empty file called ‘*
’.)
Similarly, you can do
echo exit 0 >> *.sh
If the user tries to open a file descriptor for reading more than once,
the shell opens the file descriptor as a pipe to a process that copies
all the specified inputs to its output in the order specified, provided
the MULTIOS
option is set. It should be noted that each file is
opened immediately, not at the point where it is about to be read:
this behaviour differs from cat
, so if strictly standard behaviour
is needed, cat
should be used instead.
Thus
sort <foo <fubar
or even
sort <f{oo,ubar}
is equivalent to ‘cat foo fubar | sort
’.
Expansion of the redirection argument occurs at the point the redirection
is opened, at the point described above for the expansion of the variable
in >&$myfd
.
Note that a pipe is an implicit redirection; thus
cat bar | sort <foo
is equivalent to ‘cat bar foo | sort
’ (note the order of the inputs).
If the MULTIOS
option is unset,
each redirection replaces the previous redirection for that file descriptor.
However, all files redirected to are actually opened, so
echo Hello > bar > baz
when MULTIOS
is unset will truncate ‘bar
’, and write ‘Hello
’
into ‘baz
’.
There is a problem when an output multio is attached to an external program. A simple example shows this:
cat file >file1 >file2 cat file1 file2
Here, it is possible that the second ‘cat
’ will not display the full
contents of file1
and file2
(i.e. the original contents of
file
repeated twice).
The reason for this is that the multios are spawned after the cat
process is forked from the parent shell, so the parent shell does not
wait for the multios to finish writing data. This means the command as
shown can exit before file1
and file2
are completely written.
As a workaround, it is possible to run the cat
process as part of a
job in the current shell:
{ cat file } >file >file2
Here, the {
...}
job will pause to wait for both files to be
written.
When a simple command consists of one or more redirection operators and zero or more parameter assignments, but no command name, zsh can behave in several ways.
If the parameter NULLCMD
is not set or the option CSH_NULLCMD
is
set, an error is caused. This is the csh behavior and CSH_NULLCMD
is set by default when emulating csh.
If the option SH_NULLCMD
is set, the builtin ‘:
’ is inserted as a
command with the given redirections. This is the default when emulating
sh or ksh.
Otherwise, if the parameter NULLCMD
is set, its value will be used as a
command with the given redirections. If both NULLCMD
and
READNULLCMD
are set, then the value of the latter will be used instead
of that of the former when the redirection is an input. The default for
NULLCMD
is ‘cat
’ and for READNULLCMD
is ‘more
’. Thus
< file
shows the contents of file
on standard output, with paging if that is a
terminal. NULLCMD
and READNULLCMD
may refer to shell functions.
If a command name contains no slashes, the shell attempts to locate it. If there exists a shell function by that name, the function is invoked as described in Functions. If there exists a shell builtin by that name, the builtin is invoked.
Otherwise, the shell searches each element of $path
for a
directory containing an executable file by that name.
If execution fails: an error message is printed, and one of the following values is returned.
The search was unsuccessful. The error message is
‘command not found:
cmd’.
The executable file has insufficient permissions, is a directory or special file, or is not a script and is in a format unrecognized by the operating system. The exact conditions and error message are operating system-dependent; see execve(2).
If execution fails because the file is not in executable format,
and the file is not a directory, it is assumed to be a shell
script. /bin/sh
is spawned to execute it. If the program
is a file beginning with ‘#!
’, the remainder of the first line
specifies an interpreter for the program. The shell will
execute the specified interpreter on operating systems that do
not handle this executable format in the kernel.
If no external command is found but a function command_not_found_handler
exists the shell executes this function with all
command line arguments. The return status of the function becomes the
status of the command. Note that the handler is executed in a
subshell forked to execute an external command, hence changes to
directories, shell parameters, etc. have no effect on the main shell.
Shell functions are defined with the function
reserved word or the
special syntax ‘funcname ()
’.
Shell functions are read in and stored internally.
Alias names are resolved when the function is read.
Functions are executed like commands with the arguments
passed as positional parameters.
(See Command Execution.)
Functions execute in the same process as the caller and
share all files
and present working directory with the
caller. A trap on EXIT
set inside a function
is executed after the function completes in the environment
of the caller.
The return
builtin is used to return from function calls.
Function identifiers can be listed with the functions
builtin.
Functions can be undefined with the unfunction
builtin.
A function can be marked as undefined using the autoload
builtin
(or ‘functions -u
’ or ‘typeset -fu
’). Such a function has no
body. When the function is first executed, the shell searches for its
definition using the elements of the fpath
variable. Thus to define
functions for autoloading, a typical sequence is:
fpath=(~/myfuncs $fpath) autoload myfunc1 myfunc2 ...
The usual alias expansion during reading will be suppressed if the
autoload
builtin or its equivalent is given the option -U
. This is
recommended for the use of functions supplied with the zsh distribution.
Note that for functions precompiled with the zcompile
builtin command
the flag -U
must be provided when the .zwc
file is created, as the
corresponding information is compiled into the latter.
For each element in fpath
, the shell looks for three possible
files, the newest of which is used to load the definition for the function:
.zwc
A file created with the zcompile
builtin command, which is expected to
contain the definitions for all functions in the directory named
element. The file is treated in the same manner as a directory
containing files for functions and is searched for the definition of the
function. If the definition is not found, the search for a definition
proceeds with the other two possibilities described below.
If element already includes a .zwc
extension (i.e. the extension
was explicitly given by the user), element is searched for the
definition of the function without comparing its age to that of other
files; in fact, there does not need to be any directory named element
without the suffix. Thus including an element such as
‘/usr/local/funcs.zwc
’ in fpath
will speed up the search for
functions, with the disadvantage that functions included must be explicitly
recompiled by hand before the shell notices any changes.
/
function.zwc
A file created with zcompile
, which is expected to contain the
definition for function. It may include other function definitions
as well, but those are neither loaded nor executed; a file found in this
way is searched only for the definition of function.
/
functionA file of zsh command text, taken to be the definition for function.
In summary, the order of searching is, first, in the parents of
directories in fpath
for the newer of either a compiled directory or
a directory in fpath
; second, if more than one of these contains a
definition for the function that is sought, the leftmost in the fpath
is chosen; and third, within a directory, the newer of either a compiled
function or an ordinary function definition is used.
If the KSH_AUTOLOAD
option is set, or the file contains only a
simple definition of the function, the file’s contents will be executed.
This will normally define the function in question, but may also perform
initialization, which is executed in the context of the function execution,
and may therefore define local parameters. It is an error if the function
is not defined by loading the file.
Otherwise, the function body (with no surrounding ‘funcname()
{
...}
’) is taken to be the complete contents of the file. This
form allows the file to be used directly as an executable shell script. If
processing of the file results in the function being re-defined, the
function itself is not re-executed. To force the shell to perform
initialization and then call the function defined, the file should contain
initialization code (which will be executed then discarded) in addition to
a complete function definition (which will be retained for subsequent calls
to the function), and a call to the shell function, including any
arguments, at the end.
For example, suppose the autoload file func
contains
func() { print This is func; } print func is initialized
then ‘func; func
’ with KSH_AUTOLOAD
set will produce both messages
on the first call, but only the message ‘This is func
’ on the second
and subsequent calls. Without KSH_AUTOLOAD
set, it will produce
the initialization message on the first call, and the other message on the
second and subsequent calls.
It is also possible to create a function that is not marked as autoloaded,
but which loads its own definition by searching fpath
, by using
‘autoload -X
’ within a shell function. For example, the following are
equivalent:
myfunc() { autoload -X } myfunc args...
and
unfunction myfunc # if myfunc was defined autoload myfunc myfunc args...
In fact, the functions
command outputs ‘builtin autoload -X
’ as
the body of an autoloaded function. This is done so that
eval "$(functions)"
produces a reasonable result. A true autoloaded function can be
identified by the presence of the comment ‘# undefined
’ in the body,
because all comments are discarded from defined functions.
To load the definition of an autoloaded function myfunc
without
executing myfunc
, use:
autoload +X myfunc
If no name is given for a function, it is ‘anonymous’ and is handled
specially. Either form of function definition may be used: a ‘()
’ with
no preceding name, or a ‘function
’ with an immediately following open
brace. The function is executed immediately at the point of definition and
is not stored for future use. The function name is set to ‘(anon)
’.
Arguments to the function may be specified as words following the
closing brace defining the function, hence if there are none no
arguments (other than $0
) are set. This is a difference from the
way other functions are parsed: normal function definitions may be
followed by certain keywords such as ‘else
’ or ‘fi
’, which will
be treated as arguments to anonymous functions, so that a newline or
semicolon is needed to force keyword interpretation.
Note also that the argument list of any enclosing script or function is hidden (as would be the case for any other function called at this point).
Redirections may be applied to the anonymous function in the same manner as to a current-shell structure enclosed in braces. The main use of anonymous functions is to provide a scope for local variables. This is particularly convenient in start-up files as these do not provide their own local variable scope.
For example,
variable=outside function { local variable=inside print "I am $variable with arguments $*" } this and that print "I am $variable"
outputs the following:
I am inside with arguments this and that I am outside
Note that function definitions with arguments that expand to nothing,
for example ‘name=; function $name {
... }
’, are not
treated as anonymous functions. Instead, they are treated as normal
function definitions where the definition is silently discarded.
Certain functions, if defined, have special meaning to the shell.
For the functions below, it is possible to define an array that has the
same name as the function with ‘_functions
’ appended. Any element in
such an array is taken as the name of a function to execute; it is executed
in the same context and with the same arguments and same initial value of $?
as the basic function. For
example, if $chpwd_functions
is an array containing the values
‘mychpwd
’, ‘chpwd_save_dirstack
’, then the shell attempts to
execute the functions ‘chpwd
’, ‘mychpwd
’ and
‘chpwd_save_dirstack
’, in that order. Any function that does not exist
is silently ignored. A function found by this mechanism is referred to
elsewhere as a hook function. An error in any function causes subsequent
functions not to be run. Note further that an error in a precmd
hook
causes an immediately following periodic
function not to run (though
it may run at the next opportunity).
chpwd
¶Executed whenever the current working directory is changed.
periodic
¶If the parameter PERIOD
is set, this function is executed every $PERIOD
seconds, just before a prompt. Note that if multiple functions
are defined using the array periodic_functions
only one
period is applied to the complete set of functions, and the
scheduled time is not reset if the list of functions is altered.
Hence the set of functions is always called together.
precmd
¶Executed before each prompt. Note that precommand functions are not re-executed simply because the command line is redrawn, as happens, for example, when a notification about an exiting job is displayed.
preexec
¶Executed just after a command has been read and is about to be executed. If the history mechanism is active (regardless of whether the line was discarded from the history buffer), the string that the user typed is passed as the first argument, otherwise it is an empty string. The actual command that will be executed (including expanded aliases) is passed in two different forms: the second argument is a single-line, size-limited version of the command (with things like function bodies elided); the third argument contains the full text that is being executed.
zshaddhistory
¶Executed when a history line has been read interactively, but before it is executed. The sole argument is the complete history line (so that any terminating newline will still be present).
If any of the hook functions returns status 1 (or any non-zero value other than 2, though this is not guaranteed for future versions of the shell) the history line will not be saved, although it lingers in the history until the next line is executed, allowing you to reuse or edit it immediately.
If any of the hook functions returns status 2 the history line will be saved on the internal history list, but not written to the history file. In case of a conflict, the first non-zero status value is taken.
A hook function may call ‘fc -p
...’ to switch the history
context so that the history is saved in a different file from
that in the global HISTFILE
parameter. This is handled specially:
the history context is automatically restored after the processing
of the history line is finished.
The following example function works with one of the options
INC_APPEND_HISTORY
or SHARE_HISTORY
set, in order that the line
is written out immediately after the history entry is added. It first
adds the history line to the normal history with the newline stripped,
which is usually the correct behaviour. Then it switches the history
context so that the line will be written to a history file in the
current directory.
zshaddhistory() { print -sr -- ${1%%$'\n'} fc -p .zsh_local_history }
zshexit
¶Executed at the point where the main shell is about to exit normally.
This is not called by exiting subshells, nor when the exec
precommand modifier is used before an external command. Also, unlike
TRAPEXIT
, it is not called when functions exit.
The functions below are treated specially but do not have corresponding hook arrays.
TRAP
NAL ¶If defined and non-null,
this function will be executed whenever the shell
catches a signal SIG
NAL, where NAL is a signal
name as specified for the kill
builtin.
The signal number will be passed as the first parameter to the function.
If a function of this form is defined and null,
the shell and processes spawned by it will ignore SIG
NAL.
The return status from the function is handled specially. If it is zero, the signal is assumed to have been handled, and execution continues normally. Otherwise, the shell will behave as interrupted except that the return status of the trap is retained.
Programs terminated by uncaught signals typically return the status 128
plus the signal number. Hence the following causes the handler for
SIGINT
to print a message, then mimic the usual effect of the signal.
TRAPINT() { print "Caught SIGINT, aborting." return $(( 128 + $1 )) }
The functions TRAPZERR
, TRAPDEBUG
and TRAPEXIT
are never
executed inside other traps.
TRAPDEBUG
¶If the option DEBUG_BEFORE_CMD
is set (as it is by default), executed
before each command; otherwise executed after each command. See
the description of the trap
builtin in
Shell Builtin Commands for details of additional features provided
in debug traps.
TRAPEXIT
¶Executed when the shell exits,
or when the current function exits if defined inside a function.
The value of $?
at the start of execution is the exit status of the
shell or the return status of the function exiting.
TRAPZERR
¶Executed whenever a command has a non-zero exit status. However, the
function is not executed if the command occurred in a sublist followed by
‘&&
’ or ‘||
’; only the final command in a sublist of this type
causes the trap to be executed. The function TRAPERR
acts the same as
TRAPZERR
on systems where there is no SIGERR
(this is the usual
case).
The functions beginning ‘TRAP
’ may alternatively be defined with the
trap
builtin: this may be preferable for some uses. Setting a trap
with one form removes any trap of the other form for the same signal;
removing a trap in either form removes all traps for the same signal.
The forms
TRAPNAL() { # code }
(’function traps’) and
trap ' # code ' NAL
(’list traps’) are equivalent in most ways, the exceptions being the following:
If the MONITOR
option is set,
an interactive shell associates a job with each pipeline.
It keeps a table of current jobs, printed by the jobs
command, and assigns them small integer numbers.
When a job is started asynchronously with ‘&
’,
the shell prints a line to standard error which looks like:
[1] 1234
indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was job number 1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process ID was 1234.
If a job is started with ‘&|
’ or ‘&!
’,
then that job is immediately disowned. After startup, it
does not have a place in the job table, and is not subject
to the job control features described here.
If you are running a job and wish to do something else you may hit the key
^Z (control-Z) which sends a TSTP
signal to the current job: this key
may be redefined by the susp
option of the external stty
command.
The shell will then normally indicate that the job has been ‘suspended’,
and print another prompt. You can then manipulate the state of this job,
putting it in the background with the bg
command, or run some other
commands and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground with
the foreground command fg
. A ^Z takes effect immediately and
is like an interrupt in that pending output and unread input are discarded
when it is typed.
A job being run in the background will suspend if it tries to read from the terminal.
Note that if the job running in the foreground is a shell function,
then suspending it will have the effect of causing the shell to fork.
This is necessary to separate the function’s state from that of the
parent shell performing the job control, so that the latter can return
to the command line prompt. As a result, even if fg
is
used to continue the job the function will no longer be part of the
parent shell, and any variables set by the function will not be visible
in the parent shell. Thus the behaviour is different from the case
where the function was never suspended. Zsh is different from many
other shells in this regard.
One additional side effect is that use of disown
with a job
created by suspending shell code in this fashion is delayed: the
job can only be disowned once any process started from the parent
shell has terminated. At that point, the disowned job disappears
silently from the job list.
The same behaviour is found when the shell is executing code as the
right hand side of a pipeline or any complex shell construct such as
if
, for
, etc., in order that the entire block of code
can be managed as a single job.
Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output,
but this can be disabled by giving the command ‘stty tostop
’.
If you set this
tty option, then background jobs will suspend when they try to produce
output like they do when they try to read input.
When a command is suspended and continued later with the fg
or
wait
builtins, zsh restores tty modes that were in effect when it was
suspended. This (intentionally) does not apply if the command is
continued via ‘kill -CONT
’, nor when it is continued with bg
.
There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. A job can be referred to by the process ID of any process of the job or by one of the following:
%
numberThe job with the given number.
%
stringThe last job whose command line begins with string.
%?
stringThe last job whose command line contains string.
%%
Current job.
%+
Equivalent to ‘%%
’.
%-
Previous job.
The shell learns immediately whenever a process changes state.
It normally informs you whenever a job becomes blocked so that
no further progress is possible. If the NOTIFY
option is not set,
it waits until just before it prints a prompt before it informs you.
All such notifications are sent directly to the terminal, not to
the standard output or standard error.
When the monitor mode is on, each background job that completes
triggers any trap set for CHLD
.
When you try to leave the shell while jobs are running or suspended, you will
be warned that ‘You have suspended (running) jobs’.
You may use the jobs
command to see what they are.
If you do this or immediately try to
exit again, the shell will not warn you a second time; the suspended
jobs will be terminated, and the running jobs will be sent
a SIGHUP
signal, if the HUP
option is set.
To avoid having the shell terminate the running jobs, either
use the nohup(1) command
or the disown
builtin.
The INT
and QUIT
signals for an invoked
command are ignored if the command is followed by
‘&
’ and the MONITOR
option is not active.
The shell itself always ignores the QUIT
signal.
Otherwise, signals have the values
inherited by the shell from its parent
(but see the TRAP
NAL special functions in Functions).
Certain jobs are run asynchronously by the shell other than those
explicitly put into the background; even in cases where the shell
would usually wait for such jobs, an explicit exit
command
or exit due to the option ERR_EXIT
will cause the shell to
exit without waiting. Examples of such asynchronous jobs are
process substitution, see
Process Substitution, and the handler processes for
multios, see
the section Multios in Redirection.
The shell can perform integer and floating point arithmetic, either using
the builtin let
, or via a substitution of the form
$((
...))
. For
integers, the shell is usually compiled to use 8-byte precision where this
is available, otherwise precision is 4 bytes. This can be tested, for
example, by giving the command ‘print - $(( 12345678901 ))
’; if the
number appears unchanged, the precision is at least 8 bytes. Floating
point arithmetic always uses the ‘double’ type with whatever corresponding
precision is provided by the compiler and the library.
The let
builtin command takes arithmetic expressions as arguments; each
is evaluated separately. Since many of the arithmetic operators, as well
as spaces, require quoting, an alternative form is provided: for any
command which begins with a ‘((
’, all the characters until a
matching ‘))
’ are treated as a double-quoted expression and
arithmetic expansion performed as for an argument of let
. More
precisely, ‘((
...))
’ is equivalent to
‘let "
..."
’. The return status is 0 if the arithmetic value
of the expression is non-zero, 1 if it is zero, and 2 if an error occurred.
For example, the following statement
(( val = 2 + 1 ))
is equivalent to
let "val = 2 + 1"
both assigning the value 3 to the shell variable val
and returning a
zero status.
Integers can be in bases other than 10.
A leading ‘0x
’ or ‘0X
’ denotes hexadecimal and a leading
‘0b
’ or ‘0B
’ binary.
Integers may also be of the form ‘base#
n’,
where base is a decimal number between two and thirty-six
representing the arithmetic base and n
is a number in that base (for example, ‘16#ff
’ is 255 in hexadecimal).
The base#
may also be omitted, in which case
base 10 is used. For backwards compatibility the form
‘[
base]
n’ is also accepted.
An integer expression or a base given in the form
‘base#
n’ may contain underscores (‘_
’) after the
leading digit for visual guidance; these are ignored in computation.
Examples are 1_000_000
or 0xffff_ffff
which are equivalent to
1000000
and 0xffffffff
respectively.
It is also possible to specify a base to be used for output in the form
‘[#
base]
’, for example ‘[#16]
’. This is used when
outputting arithmetical substitutions or when assigning to scalar
parameters, but an explicitly defined integer or floating point parameter
will not be affected. If an integer variable is implicitly defined by an
arithmetic expression, any base specified in this way will be set as the
variable’s output arithmetic base as if the option ‘-i
base’ to
the typeset
builtin had been used. The expression has no precedence
and if it occurs more than once in a mathematical expression, the last
encountered is used. For clarity it is recommended that it appear at the
beginning of an expression. As an example:
typeset -i 16 y print $(( [#8] x = 32, y = 32 )) print $x $y
outputs first ‘8#40
’, the rightmost value in the given output base, and
then ‘8#40 16#20
’, because y
has been explicitly declared to
have output base 16, while x
(assuming it does not already exist) is
implicitly typed by the arithmetic evaluation, where it acquires the output
base 8.
The base may be replaced or followed by an underscore, which may itself be followed by a positive integer (if it is missing the value 3 is used). This indicates that underscores should be inserted into the output string, grouping the number for visual clarity. The following integer specifies the number of digits to group together. For example:
setopt cbases print $(( [#16_4] 65536 ** 2 ))
outputs ‘0x1_0000_0000
’.
The feature can be used with floating point numbers, in which case the base must be omitted; grouping is away from the decimal point. For example,
zmodload zsh/mathfunc print $(( [#_] sqrt(1e7) ))
outputs ‘3_162.277_660_168_379_5
’ (the number of decimal places
shown may vary).
If the C_BASES
option is set, hexadecimal numbers are output in the standard C
format, for example ‘0xFF
’ instead of the usual ‘16#FF
’. If the
option OCTAL_ZEROES
is also set (it is not by default), octal numbers
will be treated similarly and hence appear as ‘077
’ instead of
‘8#77
’. This option has no effect on the output of bases other than
hexadecimal and octal, and these formats are always understood on input.
When an output base is specified using the ‘[#
base]
’ syntax,
an appropriate base prefix will be output if necessary, so that the value
output is valid syntax for input. If the #
is doubled, for example
‘[##16]
’, then no base prefix is output.
Floating point constants are recognized by the presence of a decimal point
or an exponent. The decimal point may be the first character of the
constant, but the exponent character e
or E
may not, as it will be
taken for a parameter name. All numeric parts (before and after the
decimal point and in the exponent) may contain underscores after the
leading digit for visual guidance; these are ignored in computation.
An arithmetic expression uses nearly the same syntax and associativity of expressions as in C.
In the native mode of operation, the following operators are supported (listed in decreasing order of precedence):
+ - ! ~ ++ --
unary plus/minus, logical NOT, complement, {pre,post}{in,de}crement
<< >>
bitwise shift left, right
&
bitwise AND
^
bitwise XOR
|
bitwise OR
**
exponentiation
* / %
multiplication, division, modulus (remainder)
+ -
addition, subtraction
< > <= >=
comparison
== !=
equality and inequality
&&
logical AND
|| ^^
logical OR, XOR
? :
ternary operator
= += -= *= /= %= &= ^= |= <<= >>= &&= ||= ^^= **=
assignment
,
comma operator
The operators ‘&&
’, ‘||
’, ‘&&=
’, and ‘||=
’ are
short-circuiting, and only one of the latter two expressions in a ternary
operator is evaluated. Note the precedence of the bitwise AND, OR,
and XOR operators.
With the option C_PRECEDENCES
the precedences (but no other
properties) of the operators are altered to be the same as those in
most other languages that support the relevant operators:
+ - ! ~ ++ --
unary plus/minus, logical NOT, complement, {pre,post}{in,de}crement
**
exponentiation
* / %
multiplication, division, modulus (remainder)
+ -
addition, subtraction
<< >>
bitwise shift left, right
< > <= >=
comparison
== !=
equality and inequality
&
bitwise AND
^
bitwise XOR
|
bitwise OR
&&
logical AND
^^
logical XOR
||
logical OR
? :
ternary operator
= += -= *= /= %= &= ^= |= <<= >>= &&= ||= ^^= **=
assignment
,
comma operator
Note the precedence of exponentiation in both cases is below
that of unary operators, hence ‘-3**2
’ evaluates as ‘9
’, not
‘-9
’. Use parentheses where necessary: ‘-(3**2)
’. This is
for compatibility with other shells.
Mathematical functions can be called with the syntax
‘func(
args)
’, where the function decides
if the args is used as a string or a comma-separated list of
arithmetic expressions. The shell currently defines no mathematical
functions by default, but the module zsh/mathfunc
may be loaded with
the zmodload
builtin to provide standard floating point mathematical
functions.
An expression of the form ‘##
x’ where x is any character
sequence such as ‘a
’, ‘^A
’, or ‘\M-\C-x
’ gives the value of
this character and an expression of the form ‘#
name’ gives the
value of the first character of the contents of the parameter name.
Character values are according to the character set used in the current
locale; for multibyte character handling the option MULTIBYTE
must be
set. Note that this form is different from ‘$#
name’, a standard
parameter substitution which gives the length of the parameter name.
‘#\
’ is accepted instead of ‘##
’, but its use is deprecated.
Named parameters and subscripted arrays can be referenced by name within an arithmetic expression without using the parameter expansion syntax. For example,
((val2 = val1 * 2))
assigns twice the value of $val1
to the parameter named val2
.
An internal integer representation of a named parameter
can be specified with the integer
builtin.
Arithmetic evaluation is performed on the value of each
assignment to a named parameter declared integer
in this manner. Assigning a floating point number to an integer results in
rounding towards zero.
Likewise, floating point numbers can be declared with the float
builtin; there are two types, differing only in their output format, as
described for the typeset
builtin. The output format can be bypassed
by using arithmetic substitution instead of the parameter substitution,
i.e. ‘${
float}
’ uses the defined format, but
‘$((
float))
’ uses a generic floating point
format.
Promotion of integer to floating point values is performed where
necessary. In addition, if any operator which requires an integer
(‘&
’, ‘|
’, ‘^
’, ‘<<
’, ‘>>
’ and their equivalents with
assignment) is given a floating point argument, it will be silently rounded
towards zero except for ‘~
’ which rounds down.
Users should beware that, in common with many other programming
languages but not software designed for calculation, the evaluation of
an expression in zsh is taken a term at a time and promotion of integers
to floating point does not occur in terms only containing integers. A
typical result of this is that a division such as 6/8
is truncated,
in this being rounded towards 0. The FORCE_FLOAT
shell option can
be used in scripts or functions where floating point evaluation is
required throughout.
Scalar variables can hold integer or floating point values at different times; there is no memory of the numeric type in this case.
If a variable is first assigned in a numeric context without previously
being declared, it will be implicitly typed as integer
or float
and
retain that type either until the type is explicitly changed or until the
end of the scope. This can have unforeseen consequences. For example, in
the loop
for (( f = 0; f < 1; f += 0.1 )); do # use $f done
if f
has not already been declared, the first assignment will cause it
to be created as an integer, and consequently the operation ‘f += 0.1
’
will always cause the result to be truncated to zero, so that the loop will
fail. A simple fix would be to turn the initialization into ‘f = 0.0
’.
It is therefore best to declare numeric variables with explicit types.
A conditional expression is used with the [[
compound command to test attributes of files and to compare strings.
Each expression can be constructed from one or more
of the following unary or binary expressions:
-a
filetrue if file exists.
-b
filetrue if file exists and is a block special file.
-c
filetrue if file exists and is a character special file.
-d
filetrue if file exists and is a directory.
-e
filetrue if file exists.
-f
filetrue if file exists and is a regular file.
-g
filetrue if file exists and has its setgid bit set.
-h
filetrue if file exists and is a symbolic link.
-k
filetrue if file exists and has its sticky bit set.
-n
stringtrue if length of string is non-zero.
-o
optiontrue if option named option is on. option may be a single character, in which case it is a single letter option name. (See Specifying Options.)
When no option named option exists, and the POSIX_BUILTINS
option
hasn’t been set, return 3 with a warning. If that option is set, return 1
with no warning.
-p
filetrue if file exists and is a FIFO special file (named pipe).
-r
filetrue if file exists and is readable by current process.
-s
filetrue if file exists and has size greater than zero.
-t
fdtrue if file descriptor number fd is open and associated with a terminal device. (note: fd is not optional)
-u
filetrue if file exists and has its setuid bit set.
-v
varnametrue if shell variable varname is set.
-w
filetrue if file exists and is writable by current process.
-x
filetrue if file exists and is executable by current process. If file exists and is a directory, then the current process has permission to search in the directory.
-z
stringtrue if length of string is zero.
-L
filetrue if file exists and is a symbolic link.
-O
filetrue if file exists and is owned by the effective user ID of this process.
-G
filetrue if file exists and its group matches the effective group ID of this process.
-S
filetrue if file exists and is a socket.
-N
filetrue if file exists and its access time is not newer than its modification time.
-nt
file2true if file1 exists and is newer than file2.
-ot
file2true if file1 exists and is older than file2.
-ef
file2true if file1 and file2 exist and refer to the same file.
=
pattern==
patterntrue if string matches pattern.
The two forms are exactly equivalent. The ‘=
’ form is
the traditional shell syntax (and hence the only one generally used
with the test
and [
builtins); the ‘==
’ form provides
compatibility with other sorts of computer language.
!=
patterntrue if string does not match pattern.
=~
regexptrue if string matches the regular expression
regexp. If the option RE_MATCH_PCRE
is set
regexp is tested as a PCRE regular expression using
the zsh/pcre
module, else it is tested as a POSIX
extended regular expression using the zsh/regex
module.
Upon successful match, some variables will be updated; no variables
are changed if the matching fails.
If the option BASH_REMATCH
is not set the scalar parameter
MATCH
is set to the substring that matched the pattern and
the integer parameters MBEGIN
and MEND
to the index of the start
and end, respectively, of the match in string, such that if
string is contained in variable var
the expression
‘${var[$MBEGIN,$MEND]}
’ is identical to ‘$MATCH
’. The setting
of the option KSH_ARRAYS
is respected. Likewise, the array
match
is set to the substrings that matched parenthesised
subexpressions and the arrays mbegin
and mend
to the indices of
the start and end positions, respectively, of the substrings within
string. The arrays are not set if there were no parenthesised
subexpressions. For example, if the string ‘a short string
’ is matched
against the regular expression ‘s(...)t
’, then (assuming the
option KSH_ARRAYS
is not set) MATCH
, MBEGIN
and MEND
are ‘short
’, 3
and 7
, respectively, while match
,
mbegin
and mend
are single entry arrays containing
the strings ‘hor
’, ‘4
’ and ‘6
’, respectively.
If the option BASH_REMATCH
is set the array
BASH_REMATCH
is set to the substring that matched the pattern
followed by the substrings that matched parenthesised
subexpressions within the pattern.
<
string2true if string1 comes before string2 based on ASCII value of their characters.
>
string2true if string1 comes after string2 based on ASCII value of their characters.
-eq
exp2true if exp1 is numerically equal to exp2.
Note that for purely numeric comparisons use of the
((
...))
builtin described in
Arithmetic Evaluation is more convenient than
conditional expressions.
-ne
exp2true if exp1 is numerically not equal to exp2.
-lt
exp2true if exp1 is numerically less than exp2.
-gt
exp2true if exp1 is numerically greater than exp2.
-le
exp2true if exp1 is numerically less than or equal to exp2.
-ge
exp2true if exp1 is numerically greater than or equal to exp2.
(
exp )
true if exp is true.
!
exptrue if exp is false.
&&
exp2true if exp1 and exp2 are both true.
||
exp2true if either exp1 or exp2 is true.
For compatibility, if there is a single argument that is not
syntactically significant, typically a variable, the condition is
treated as a test for whether the expression expands as a string of
non-zero length. In other words, [[ $var ]]
is the same as [[ -n
$var ]]
. It is recommended that the second, explicit, form be used
where possible.
Normal shell expansion is performed on the file, string and pattern arguments, but the result of each expansion is constrained to be a single word, similar to the effect of double quotes.
Filename generation is not performed on any form of argument to
conditions. However, it can be forced in any case where normal shell
expansion is valid and when the option EXTENDED_GLOB
is in effect by
using an explicit glob qualifier of the form (#q)
at the
end of the string. A normal glob qualifier expression may appear
between the ‘q
’ and the closing parenthesis; if none appears the
expression has no effect beyond causing filename generation. The
results of filename generation are joined together to form a single
word, as with the results of other forms of expansion.
This special use of filename generation is only available with the
[[
syntax. If the condition occurs within the [
or test
builtin commands then globbing occurs instead as part of normal command
line expansion before the condition is evaluated. In this case it may
generate multiple words which are likely to confuse the syntax of the
test command.
For example,
[[ -n file*(#qN) ]]
produces status zero if and only if there is at least one file in the
current directory beginning with the string ‘file
’. The globbing
qualifier N
ensures that the expression is empty if there is
no matching file.
Pattern metacharacters are active for the pattern arguments;
the patterns are the same as those used for filename generation, see
Filename Generation, but there is no special behaviour
of ‘/
’ nor initial dots, and no glob qualifiers are allowed.
In each of the above expressions, if
file is of the form ‘/dev/fd/
n’,
where n is an integer,
then the test applied to the open file whose
descriptor number is n,
even if the underlying system does not support
the /dev/fd
directory.
In the forms which do numeric comparison, the expressions exp
undergo arithmetic expansion as if they were enclosed in
$((
...))
.
For example, the following:
[[ ( -f foo || -f bar ) && $report = y* ]] && print File exists.
tests if either file foo
or file bar
exists, and if so, if the
value of the parameter report
begins with ‘y
’; if the complete
condition is true, the message ‘File exists.
’ is printed.
Prompt sequences undergo a special form of expansion. This type of expansion
is also available using the -P
option to the print
builtin.
If the PROMPT_SUBST
option is set, the prompt string is first subjected to
parameter expansion,
command substitution and
arithmetic expansion.
See
Expansion.
Certain escape sequences may be recognised in the prompt string.
If the PROMPT_BANG
option is set, a ‘!
’ in the prompt is replaced
by the current history event number. A literal ‘!
’ may then be
represented as ‘!!
’.
If the PROMPT_PERCENT
option is set, certain escape sequences that
start with ‘%
’ are expanded.
Many escapes are followed by a single character, although some of these
take an optional integer argument that
should appear between the ‘%
’ and the next character of the
sequence. More complicated escape sequences are available to provide
conditional expansion.
%%
A ‘%
’.
%)
A ‘)
’.
%l
The line (tty) the user is logged in on, without ‘/dev/
’ prefix.
If the name starts with ‘/dev/tty
’, that prefix is stripped.
%M
The full machine hostname.
%m
The hostname up to the first ‘.
’.
An integer may follow the ‘%
’ to specify
how many components of the hostname are desired. With a negative integer,
trailing components of the hostname are shown.
%n
$USERNAME
.
%y
The line (tty) the user is logged in on, without ‘/dev/
’ prefix.
This does not treat ‘/dev/tty
’ names specially.
%#
A ‘#
’ if the shell is running with privileges, a ‘%
’ if not.
Equivalent to ‘%(!.#.%%)
’.
The definition of ‘privileged’, for these purposes, is that either the
effective user ID is zero, or, if POSIX.1e capabilities are supported, that
at least one capability is raised in either the Effective or Inheritable
capability vectors.
%?
The return status of the last command executed just before the prompt.
%_
The status of the parser, i.e. the shell constructs (like ‘if
’ and
‘for
’) that have been started on the command line. If given an integer
number that many strings will be printed; zero or negative or no integer means
print as many as there are. This is most useful in prompts PS2
for
continuation lines and PS4
for debugging with the XTRACE
option; in
the latter case it will also work non-interactively.
%^
The status of the parser in reverse. This is the same as ‘%_
’ other than
the order of strings. It is often used in RPS2
.
%d
%/
Current working directory. If an integer follows the ‘%
’,
it specifies a number of trailing components of the current working
directory to show; zero means the whole path. A negative integer
specifies leading components, i.e. %-1d
specifies the first component.
%~
As %d
and %/
, but if the current working directory starts with
$HOME
, that part is replaced by a ‘~
’. Furthermore, if it has a named
directory as its prefix, that part is replaced by a ‘~
’ followed by
the name of the directory, but only if the result is shorter than
the full path;
Filename Expansion.
%e
Evaluation depth of the current sourced file, shell function, or eval
.
This is incremented or decremented every time the value of %N
is
set or reverted to a previous value, respectively. This is most useful
for debugging as part of $PS4
.
%h
%!
Current history event number.
%i
The line number currently being executed in the script, sourced file, or
shell function given by %N
. This is most useful for debugging as part
of $PS4
.
%I
The line number currently being executed in the file %x
. This is
similar to %i
, but the line number is always a line number in the
file where the code was defined, even if the code is a shell function.
%j
The number of jobs.
%L
The current value of $SHLVL
.
%N
The name of the script, sourced file, or shell function that zsh is
currently executing, whichever was started most recently. If there is
none, this is equivalent to the parameter $0
. An integer may follow
the ‘%
’ to specify a number of trailing path components to show; zero
means the full path. A negative integer specifies leading components.
%x
The name of the file containing the source code currently being
executed. This behaves as %N
except that function and eval command
names are not shown, instead the file where they were defined.
%c
%.
%C
Trailing component of the current working directory.
An integer may follow the ‘%
’ to get more than one component.
Unless ‘%C
’ is used, tilde contraction is performed first. These are
deprecated as %c
and %C
are equivalent to %1~
and %1/
,
respectively, while explicit positive integers have the same effect as for
the latter two sequences.
%D
The date in yy-
mm-
dd format.
%T
Current time of day, in 24-hour format.
%t
%@
Current time of day, in 12-hour, am/pm format.
%*
Current time of day in 24-hour format, with seconds.
%w
The date in day-
dd format.
%W
The date in mm/
dd/
yy format.
%D{
string}
string is formatted using the strftime
function.
See strftime(3) for more details. Various zsh
extensions provide numbers with no leading zero or space
if the number is a single digit:
%f
a day of the month
%K
the hour of the day on the 24-hour clock
%L
the hour of the day on the 12-hour clock
In addition, if the system supports the POSIX gettimeofday
system
call, %.
provides decimal fractions of a second since the epoch with
leading zeroes. By default three decimal places are provided, but a
number of digits up to 9 may be given following the %
; hence %6.
outputs microseconds, and %9.
outputs nanoseconds. (The latter
requires a nanosecond-precision clock_gettime
; systems lacking this
will return a value multiplied by the appropriate power of 10.) A typical
example of this is the format ‘%D{%H:%M:%S.%.}
’.
The GNU extension %N
is handled as a synonym for %9.
.
Additionally, the GNU extension that a ‘-
’ between the %
and the
format character causes a leading zero or space to be stripped
is handled directly by the shell for the format characters d
, f
,
H
, k
, l
, m
, M
, S
and y
; any other format
characters are provided to the system’s strftime(3)
with any leading ‘-
’ present, so the handling is system dependent.
Further GNU (or other) extensions are also passed to strftime(3)
and may work if the system supports them.
%B
(%b
)Start (stop) boldface mode.
%E
Clear to end of line.
%U
(%u
)Start (stop) underline mode.
%S
(%s
)Start (stop) standout mode.
%F
(%f
)Start (stop) using a different foreground colour, if supported
by the terminal. The colour may be specified two ways: either
as a numeric argument, as normal, or by a sequence in braces
following the %F
, for example %F{red}
. In the latter case
the values allowed are as described for the fg
zle_highlight
attribute;
Character Highlighting. This means that numeric
colours are allowed in the second format also.
%K
(%k
)Start (stop) using a different bacKground colour. The syntax is
identical to that for %F
and %f
.
%{
...%}
Include a string as a literal escape sequence. The string within the braces should not change the cursor position. Brace pairs can nest.
A positive numeric argument between the %
and the {
is treated as
described for %G
below.
%G
Within a %{
...%}
sequence, include a ‘glitch’: that is, assume
that a single character width will be output. This is useful when
outputting characters that otherwise cannot be correctly handled by the
shell, such as the alternate character set on some terminals.
The characters in question can be included within a %{
...%}
sequence together with the appropriate number of %G
sequences to
indicate the correct width. An integer between the ‘%
’ and ‘G
’
indicates a character width other than one. Hence %{
seq%2G%}
outputs seq and assumes it takes up the width of two standard
characters.
Multiple uses of %G
accumulate in the obvious fashion; the position
of the %G
is unimportant. Negative integers are not handled.
Note that when prompt truncation is in use it is advisable to divide up
output into single characters within each %{
...%}
group so that
the correct truncation point can be found.
%v
¶The value of the first element of the psvar
array parameter. Following
the ‘%
’ with an integer gives that element of the array. Negative
integers count from the end of the array.
%(
x.
true-text.
false-text)
Specifies a ternary expression. The character following the x is
arbitrary; the same character is used to separate the text for the
‘true’ result from that for the ‘false’ result.
This separator may not appear in the true-text, except as part of a
%-escape
sequence. A ‘)
’ may appear in the false-text as ‘%)
’.
true-text
and false-text may both contain arbitrarily-nested escape
sequences, including further ternary expressions.
The left parenthesis may be preceded or followed by a positive integer n,
which defaults to zero. A negative integer will be multiplied by -1, except
as noted below for ‘l
’.
The test character x may be any of the following:
!
True if the shell is running with privileges.
#
True if the effective uid of the current process is n.
?
True if the exit status of the last command was n.
_
True if at least n shell constructs were started.
C
/
True if the current absolute path has at least n elements
relative to the root directory, hence /
is counted as 0 elements.
c
.
~
True if the current path, with prefix replacement, has at
least n elements relative to the root directory, hence /
is
counted as 0 elements.
D
True if the month is equal to n (January = 0).
d
True if the day of the month is equal to n.
e
True if the evaluation depth is at least n.
g
True if the effective gid of the current process is n.
j
True if the number of jobs is at least n.
L
True if the SHLVL
parameter is at least n.
l
True if at least n characters have already been
printed on the current line. When n is negative, true if at least
abs
(
n)
characters remain before the opposite
margin (thus the left margin for RPROMPT
).
S
True if the SECONDS
parameter is at least n.
T
True if the time in hours is equal to n.
t
True if the time in minutes is equal to n.
v
True if the array psvar
has at least n elements.
V
True if element n of the array psvar
is set and
non-empty.
w
True if the day of the week is equal to n (Sunday = 0).
%<
string<
%>
string>
%[
xstring]
Specifies truncation behaviour for the remainder of the prompt string.
The third, deprecated, form is equivalent to ‘%
xstringx’,
i.e. x may be ‘<
’ or ‘>
’.
The string will be displayed in
place of the truncated portion of any string; note this does not
undergo prompt expansion.
The numeric argument, which in the third form may appear immediately
after the ‘[
’, specifies the maximum permitted length of
the various strings that can be displayed in the prompt.
In the first two forms, this numeric argument may be negative, in which
case the truncation length is determined by subtracting the absolute
value of the numeric argument from the number of character positions
remaining on the current prompt line. If this results in a zero or
negative length, a length of 1 is used. In other words, a negative
argument arranges that after truncation at least n characters
remain before the right margin (left margin for RPROMPT
).
The forms with ‘<
’ truncate at the left of the string,
and the forms with ‘>
’ truncate at the right of the string.
For example, if the current directory is ‘/home/pike
’,
the prompt ‘%8<..<%/
’ will expand to ‘..e/pike
’.
In this string, the terminating character (‘<
’, ‘>
’ or ‘]
’),
or in fact any character, may be quoted by a preceding ‘\
’; note
when using print -P
, however, that this must be doubled as the
string is also subject to standard print
processing, in addition
to any backslashes removed by a double quoted string: the worst case
is therefore ‘print -P "%<\\\\<<..."
’.
If the string is longer than the specified truncation length, it will appear in full, completely replacing the truncated string.
The part of the prompt string to be truncated runs to the end of the
string, or to the end of the next enclosing group of the ‘%(
’
construct, or to the next truncation encountered at the same grouping
level (i.e. truncations inside a ‘%(
’ are separate), which
ever comes first. In particular, a truncation with argument zero
(e.g., ‘%<<
’) marks the end of the range of the string to be
truncated while turning off truncation from there on. For example, the
prompt ‘%10<...<%~%<<%#
’ will print a truncated representation of the
current directory, followed by a ‘%
’ or ‘#
’, followed by a
space. Without the ‘%<<
’, those two characters would be included
in the string to be truncated. Note that ‘%-0<<
’ is not equivalent
to ‘%<<
’ but specifies that the prompt is truncated at the right margin.
Truncation applies only within each individual line of the prompt, as
delimited by embedded newlines (if any). If the total length of any line
of the prompt after truncation is greater than the terminal width, or if
the part to be truncated contains embedded newlines, truncation behavior
is undefined and may change in a future version of the shell. Use
‘%-
n(l.
true-text.
false-text)
’ to remove parts
of the prompt when the available space is less than n.
The following types of expansions are performed in the indicated order in five steps:
This is performed only in interactive shells.
Aliases are expanded immediately before the command line is parsed as explained in Aliasing.
These five are performed in left-to-right fashion. On each argument,
any of the five steps that are needed are performed one after the other.
Hence, for example, all the parts of parameter expansion are completed
before command substitution is started. After these expansions, all
unquoted occurrences of the characters ‘\
’,‘'
’ and ‘"
’ are
removed.
If the SH_FILE_EXPANSION
option is set, the order of expansion is
modified for compatibility with sh and ksh. In that case
filename expansion is performed immediately after alias expansion,
preceding the set of five expansions mentioned above.
This expansion, commonly referred to as globbing, is always done last.
The following sections explain the types of expansion in detail.
History expansion allows you to use words from previous command lines in the command line you are typing. This simplifies spelling corrections and the repetition of complicated commands or arguments.
Immediately before execution, each command is saved in the history list,
the size of which is controlled by the HISTSIZE
parameter. The one
most recent command is always retained in any case. Each saved command in
the history list is called a history event and is assigned a number,
beginning with 1 (one) when the shell starts up. The history number that
you may see in your prompt (see
Prompt Expansion) is the number that is to be assigned to the next command.
A history expansion begins with the first character of the histchars
parameter, which is ‘!
’ by default, and may occur anywhere on the
command line, including inside double quotes (but not inside single quotes
'...'
or C-style quotes $'...'
nor when escaped with a backslash).
The first character is followed by an optional event designator (Event Designators) and then an optional word designator (Word Designators); if neither of these designators is present, no history expansion occurs.
Input lines containing history expansions are echoed after being expanded, but before any other expansions take place and before the command is executed. It is this expanded form that is recorded as the history event for later references.
History expansions do not nest.
By default, a history reference with no event designator refers to the
same event as any preceding history reference on that command line; if it
is the only history reference in a command, it refers to the previous
command.
However, if the option CSH_JUNKIE_HISTORY
is set, then every history
reference with no event specification always refers to the previous
command.
For example, ‘!
’ is the event designator for the previous command, so
‘!!:1
’ always refers to the first word of the previous command, and
‘!!$
’ always refers to the last word of the previous command. With
CSH_JUNKIE_HISTORY
set, then ‘!:1
’ and ‘!$
’ function in the
same manner as ‘!!:1
’ and ‘!!$
’, respectively. Conversely, if
CSH_JUNKIE_HISTORY
is unset, then ‘!:1
’ and ‘!$
’ refer to the
first and last words, respectively, of the same event referenced by the
nearest other history reference preceding them on the current command
line, or to the previous command if there is no preceding reference.
The character sequence ‘^
foo^
bar’ (where ‘^
’ is
actually the second character of the histchars
parameter)
repeats the last command, replacing the string foo with bar.
More precisely, the sequence ‘^
foo^
bar^
’ is
synonymous with ‘!!:s
^
foo^
bar^
’, hence other
modifiers (see Modifiers) may follow the final ‘^
’.
In particular, ‘^
foo^
bar^:G
’ performs a global
substitution.
If the shell encounters the character sequence ‘!"
’
in the input, the history mechanism is temporarily disabled until
the current list (see
Shell Grammar) is fully parsed. The ‘!"
’ is removed from the input, and any
subsequent ‘!
’ characters have no special significance.
A less convenient but more comprehensible form of command history support
is provided by the fc
builtin.
An event designator is a reference to a command-line entry in the history
list. In the list below, remember that the initial `!'
in each item
may be changed to another character by setting the histchars
parameter.
!
Start a history expansion, except when followed by a blank, newline,
‘=
’ or ‘(
’. If followed immediately by a word designator
(Word Designators), this forms a history reference
with no event designator (Overview).
!!
Refer to the previous command. By itself, this expansion repeats the previous command.
!
nRefer to command-line n.
!-
nRefer to the current command-line minus n.
!
strRefer to the most recent command starting with str.
!?
str[?
]Refer to the most recent command containing str. The trailing
‘?
’ is necessary if this reference is to be followed by a modifier or
followed by any text that is not to be considered part of str.
!#
Refer to the current command line typed in so far. The line is
treated as if it were complete up to and including the word before the
one with the ‘!#
’ reference.
!{
...}
Insulate a history reference from adjacent characters (if necessary).
A word designator indicates which word or words of a given command line are
to be included in a history reference. A ‘:
’ usually
separates the event specification from the word designator.
It may be omitted only if the word designator begins with a
‘^
’, ‘$
’, ‘*
’, ‘-
’ or ‘%
’.
Word designators include:
0
The first input word (command).
The nth argument.
^
The first argument. That is, 1
.
$
The last argument.
%
The word matched by (the most recent) ?
str search.
-
yA range of words; x defaults to 0
.
*
All the arguments, or a null value if there are none.
*
Abbreviates ‘x-$
’.
-
Like ‘x*
’ but omitting word $
.
Note that a ‘%
’ word designator works only when used in one of
‘!%
’, ‘!:%
’ or ‘!?
str?:%
’, and only when used after a
!?
expansion (possibly in an earlier command). Anything else results
in an error, although the error may not be the most obvious one.
After the optional word designator, you can add
a sequence of one or more of the following modifiers,
each preceded by a ‘:
’. These modifiers also work on the result
of filename generation and parameter expansion, except where
noted.
a
Turn a file name into an absolute path: prepends the current directory,
if necessary; remove ‘.
’ path segments; and remove ‘..
’ path segments
and the segments that immediately precede them.
This transformation is agnostic about what is in the filesystem, i.e. is
on the logical, not the physical directory. It takes place in the same
manner as when changing directories when neither of the options
CHASE_DOTS
or CHASE_LINKS
is set. For example,
‘/before/here/../after
’ is always transformed to
‘/before/after
’, regardless of whether ‘/before/here
’ exists or what
kind of object (dir, file, symlink, etc.) it is.
A
Turn a file name into an absolute path as the ‘a
’ modifier does, and
then pass the result through the realpath(3)
library
function to resolve symbolic links.
Note: on systems that do not have a realpath(3)
library
function, symbolic links are not resolved, so on those systems ‘a
’ and
‘A
’ are equivalent.
Note: foo:A
and realpath(foo)
are different on some inputs.
For realpath(foo)
semantics, see the ‘P
‘ modifier.
c
Resolve a command name into an absolute path by searching the command
path given by the PATH
variable. This does not work for commands
containing directory parts. Note also that this does not usually work as
a glob qualifier unless a file of the same name is found in the
current directory.
e
Remove all but the part of the filename extension following the ‘.
’;
see the definition of the filename extension in the description of the
r
modifier below. Note that according to that definition the result
will be empty if the string ends with a ‘.
’.
h
[ digits ]Remove a trailing pathname component, shortening the path by one
directory level: this is the ‘head’ of the pathname. This works like
‘dirname
’. If the h
is followed immediately (with no spaces or
other separator) by any number of decimal digits, and the value of the
resulting number is non-zero, that number of leading components is
preserved instead of the final component being removed. In an
absolute path the leading ‘/
’ is the first component, so,
for example, if var=/my/path/to/something
, then ${var:h3}
substitutes /my/path
. Consecutive ‘/’s are treated the same as
a single ‘/’. In parameter substitution, digits may only be
used if the expression is in braces, so for example the short form
substitution $var:h2
is treated as ${var:h}2
, not as
${var:h2}
. No restriction applies to the use of digits in history
substitution or globbing qualifiers. If more components are requested
than are present, the entire path is substituted (so this does not
trigger a ‘failed modifier’ error in history expansion).
l
Convert the words to all lowercase.
p
Print the new command but do not execute it. Only works with history expansion.
P
Turn a file name into an absolute path, like realpath(3)
.
The resulting path will be absolute,
will refer to the same directory entry as the input filename,
and none of its components will be symbolic links or equal to
‘.
’ or ‘..
’.
Unlike realpath(3)
, non-existent trailing components are
permitted and preserved.
q
Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions. Works
with history expansion and parameter expansion, though for parameters
it is only useful if the resulting text is to be re-evaluated such as
by eval
.
Q
Remove one level of quotes from the substituted words.
r
Remove a filename extension leaving the root name. Strings with no
filename extension are not altered. A filename
extension is a ‘.
’ followed by any number of characters (including
zero) that are neither ‘.
’ nor ‘/
’ and that continue to the end
of the string. For example, the extension of
‘foo.orig.c
’ is ‘.c
’, and ‘dir.c/foo
’ has no extension.
s/
l/
r[/
]Substitute r for l as described below. The substitution is done only for the first string that matches l. For arrays and for filename generation, this applies to each word of the expanded text. See below for further notes on substitutions.
The forms ‘gs/
l/
r’ and ‘s/
l/
r/:G
’
perform global substitution, i.e. substitute every occurrence of r
for l. Note that the g
or :G
must appear in exactly the
position shown.
See further notes on this form of substitution below.
&
Repeat the previous s
substitution. Like s
, may be preceded
immediately by a g
. In parameter expansion the &
must appear
inside braces, and in filename generation it must be quoted with a
backslash.
t
[ digits ]Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the final component (tail).
This works like ‘basename
’. Any trailing slashes are first removed.
Decimal digits are handled as described above for (h), but in this
case that number of trailing components is preserved instead of
the default 1; 0 is treated the same as 1.
u
Convert the words to all uppercase.
x
Like q
, but break into words at whitespace. Does not work with
parameter expansion.
The s/
l/
r/
substitution works as follows. By
default the left-hand side of substitutions are not patterns, but
character strings. Any character can be used as the delimiter in place
of ‘/
’. A backslash quotes the delimiter character. The character
‘&
’, in the right-hand-side r, is replaced by the text from the
left-hand-side l. The ‘&
’ can be quoted with a backslash. A
null l uses the previous string either from the previous l or
from the contextual scan string s from ‘!?
s’. You can
omit the rightmost delimiter if a newline immediately follows r;
the rightmost ‘?
’ in a context scan can similarly be omitted. Note
the same record of the last l and r is maintained across all
forms of expansion.
Note that if a ‘&
’ is used within glob qualifiers an extra backslash
is needed as a &
is a special character in this case.
Also note that the order of expansions affects the interpretation of
l and r. When used in a history expansion, which occurs before
any other expansions, l and r are treated as literal strings
(except as explained for HIST_SUBST_PATTERN
below). When used in
parameter expansion, the replacement of r into the parameter’s value
is done first, and then any additional process, parameter, command,
arithmetic, or brace references are applied, which may evaluate those
substitutions and expansions more than once if l appears more than
once in the starting value. When used in a glob qualifier, any
substitutions or expansions are performed once at the time the qualifier
is parsed, even before the ‘:s
’ expression itself is divided into
l and r sides.
If the option HIST_SUBST_PATTERN
is set, l is treated as
a pattern of the usual form described in
Filename Generation. This can be used in
all the places where modifiers are available; note, however, that
in globbing qualifiers parameter substitution has already taken place,
so parameters in the replacement string should be quoted to ensure
they are replaced at the correct time.
Note also that complicated patterns used in globbing qualifiers may
need the extended glob qualifier notation
(#q:s/
.../
.../)
in order for the
shell to recognize the expression as a glob qualifier. Further,
note that bad patterns in the substitution are not subject to
the NO_BAD_PATTERN
option so will cause an error.
When HIST_SUBST_PATTERN
is set, l may start with a #
to indicate that the pattern must match at the start of the string
to be substituted, and a %
may appear at the start or after an #
to indicate that the pattern must match at the end of the string
to be substituted. The %
or #
may be quoted with two
backslashes.
For example, the following piece of filename generation code
with the EXTENDED_GLOB
option:
print -r -- *.c(#q:s/#%(#b)s(*).c/'S${match[1]}.C'/)
takes the expansion of *.c
and applies the glob qualifiers in the
(#q
...)
expression, which consists of a substitution
modifier anchored to the start and end of each word (#%
). This
turns on backreferences ((#b)
), so that the parenthesised
subexpression is available in the replacement string as ${match[1]}
.
The replacement string is quoted so that the parameter is not substituted
before the start of filename generation.
The following f
, F
, w
and W
modifiers work only with
parameter expansion and filename generation. They are listed here to
provide a single point of reference for all modifiers.
f
Repeats the immediately (without a colon) following modifier until the resulting word doesn’t change any more.
F:
expr:
Like f
, but repeats only n times if the expression
expr evaluates to n. Any character can be used instead of
the ‘:
’; if ‘(
’, ‘[
’, or ‘{
’
is used as the opening delimiter,
the closing delimiter should be ’)
’, ‘]
’, or ‘}
’,
respectively.
w
Makes the immediately following modifier work on each word in the string.
W:
sep:
Like w
but words are considered to be the parts of the string
that are separated by sep. Any character can be used instead of
the ‘:
’; opening parentheses are handled specially, see above.
Each part of a command argument that takes the form
‘<(
list)
’,
‘>(
list)
’ or
‘=(
list)
’
is subject to process substitution. The expression may be preceded
or followed by other strings except that, to prevent clashes with
commonly occurring strings and patterns, the last
form must occur at the start of a command argument, and the forms
are only expanded when first parsing command or assignment arguments.
Process substitutions may be used following redirection operators; in this
case, the substitution must appear with no trailing string.
Note that ‘<<(
list)
’ is not a special syntax; it
is equivalent to ‘< <(
list)
’, redirecting
standard input from the result of process substitution. Hence all
the following documentation applies. The second form (with the space)
is recommended for clarity.
In the case of the <
or >
forms, the shell runs the commands in
list as a subprocess of the job executing the shell command line.
If the system supports the /dev/fd
mechanism, the command argument is the name of the device file
corresponding to a file descriptor; otherwise, if the system supports named
pipes (FIFOs), the command argument will be a named pipe. If the form with
>
is selected then writing on this special file will provide input for
list. If <
is used, then the file passed as an argument will
be connected to the output of the list process. For example,
paste <(cut -f1
file1) <(cut -f3
file2) | tee >(
process1) >(
process2) >/dev/null
cuts fields 1 and 3 from the files file1 and file2 respectively, pastes the results together, and sends it to the processes process1 and process2.
If =(
...)
is used instead of
<(
...)
,
then the file passed as an argument will be the name
of a temporary file containing the output of the list
process. This may be used instead of the <
form for a program that expects to lseek (see lseek(2))
on the input file.
There is an optimisation for substitutions of the form
=(<<<
arg)
, where arg is a single-word argument
to the here-string redirection <<<
. This form produces a file name
containing the value of arg after any substitutions have been
performed. This is handled entirely within the current shell. This is
effectively the reverse of the special form $(<
arg)
which treats arg as a file name and replaces it with the file’s
contents.
The =
form is useful as both the /dev/fd
and the named pipe
implementation of <(
...)
have drawbacks. In
the former case, some programmes may automatically close the file
descriptor in question before examining the file on the command line,
particularly if this is necessary for security reasons such as when the
programme is running setuid. In the second case, if the
programme does not actually open the file, the subshell attempting to read
from or write to the pipe will (in a typical implementation, different
operating systems may have different behaviour) block for ever and have to
be killed explicitly. In both cases, the shell actually supplies the
information using a pipe, so that programmes that expect to lseek
(see lseek(2)) on the file will not work.
Also note that the previous example can be more compactly and
efficiently written (provided the MULTIOS
option is set) as:
paste <(cut -f1
file1) <(cut -f3
file2)
> >(
process1) > >(
process2)
The shell uses pipes instead of FIFOs to implement the latter two process substitutions in the above example.
There is an additional problem with >(
process)
; when
this is attached to an external command, the parent shell does not wait
for process to finish and hence an immediately following command
cannot rely on the results being complete. The problem and solution are
the same as described in the section MULTIOS in
Redirection. Hence in a simplified
version of the example above:
paste <(cut -f1
file1) <(cut -f3
file2)
> >(
process)
(note that no MULTIOS
are involved), process will be run
asynchronously as far as the parent shell is concerned. The workaround is:
{ paste <(cut -f1
file1) <(cut -f3
file2) }
> >(
process)
The extra processes here are spawned from the parent shell which will wait for their completion.
Another problem arises any time a job with a substitution that requires
a temporary file is disowned by the shell, including the case where
‘&!
’ or ‘&|
’ appears at the end of a command containing a
substitution. In that case the temporary file will not be cleaned up as
the shell no longer has any memory of the job. A workaround is to use
a subshell, for example,
(mycmd =(myoutput)) &!
as the forked subshell will wait for the command to finish then remove the temporary file.
A general workaround to ensure a process substitution endures for an appropriate length of time is to pass it as a parameter to an anonymous shell function (a piece of shell code that is run immediately with function scope). For example, this code:
() { print File $1: cat $1 } =(print This be the verse)
outputs something resembling the following
File /tmp/zsh6nU0kS: This be the verse
The temporary file created by the process substitution will be deleted when the function exits.
The character ‘$
’ is used to introduce parameter expansions.
See
Parameters
for a description of parameters, including arrays, associative arrays,
and subscript notation to access individual array elements.
Note in particular the fact that words of unquoted parameters are not
automatically split on whitespace unless the option SH_WORD_SPLIT
is
set; see references to this option below for more details. This is an
important difference from other shells. However, as in other shells,
null words are elided from unquoted parameters’ expansions.
With default options, after the assignments:
array=("first word" "" "third word") scalar="only word"
then $array
substitutes two words, ‘first word
’ and ‘third
word
’, and $scalar
substitutes a single word ‘only word
’. Note
that second element of array
was elided. Scalar parameters can
be elided too if their value is null (empty). To avoid elision, use quoting as
follows: "$scalar"
for scalars and "${array[@]}"
or "${(@)array}"
for arrays. (The last two forms are equivalent.)
Parameter expansions can involve flags, as in ‘${(@kv)aliases}
’,
and other operators, such as ‘${PREFIX:-"/usr/local"}
’. Parameter
expansions can also be nested. These topics will be introduced below.
The full rules are complicated and are noted at the end.
In the expansions discussed below that require a pattern, the form of
the pattern is the same as that used for filename generation;
see Filename Generation. Note that these patterns, along with
the replacement text of any substitutions, are themselves subject to
parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic expansion.
In addition to the following operations, the colon modifiers described in
Modifiers in History Expansion can be
applied: for example, ${i:s/foo/bar/}
performs string
substitution on the expansion of parameter $i
.
In the following descriptions, ‘word’ refers to a single word substituted on the command line, not necessarily a space delimited word.
${
name}
The value, if any, of the parameter name is substituted.
The braces are required if the expansion is to be followed by
a letter, digit, or underscore that is not to be interpreted
as part of name. In addition, more complicated forms of substitution
usually require the braces to be present; exceptions, which only apply if
the option KSH_ARRAYS
is not set, are a single subscript or any colon
modifiers appearing after the name, or any of the characters ‘^
’,
‘=
’, ‘~
’, ‘#
’ or ‘+
’ appearing before the name, all of
which work with or without braces.
If name is an array parameter, and the KSH_ARRAYS
option is not
set, then the value of each
element of name is substituted, one element per word. Otherwise, the
expansion results in one word only; with KSH_ARRAYS
, this is the first
element of an array. No field splitting is done on the result unless the
SH_WORD_SPLIT
option is set.
See also the flags =
and s:
string:
.
${+
name}
If name is the name of a set parameter ‘1
’ is substituted,
otherwise ‘0
’ is substituted.
${
name-
word}
${
name:-
word}
If name is set, or in the second form is non-null, then substitute its value; otherwise substitute word. In the second form name may be omitted, in which case word is always substituted.
${
name+
word}
${
name:+
word}
If name is set, or in the second form is non-null, then substitute word; otherwise substitute nothing.
${
name=
word}
${
name:=
word}
${
name::=
word}
In the first form, if name is unset then set it to word; in the second form, if name is unset or null then set it to word; and in the third form, unconditionally set name to word. In all forms, the value of the parameter is then substituted.
${
name?
word}
${
name:?
word}
In the first form, if name is set, or in the second form if name is both set and non-null, then substitute its value; otherwise, print word and exit from the shell. Interactive shells instead return to the prompt. If word is omitted, then a standard message is printed.
In any of the above expressions that test a variable and substitute an
alternate word, note that you can use standard shell quoting in the
word value to selectively override the splitting done by the
SH_WORD_SPLIT
option and the =
flag, but not splitting by the
s:
string:
flag.
In the following expressions, when name is an array and
the substitution is not quoted, or if the ‘(@)
’ flag or the
name[@]
syntax is used, matching and replacement is
performed on each array element separately.
${
name#
pattern}
${
name##
pattern}
If the pattern matches the beginning of the value of name, then substitute the value of name with the matched portion deleted; otherwise, just substitute the value of name. In the first form, the smallest matching pattern is preferred; in the second form, the largest matching pattern is preferred.
${
name%
pattern}
${
name%%
pattern}
If the pattern matches the end of the value of name, then substitute the value of name with the matched portion deleted; otherwise, just substitute the value of name. In the first form, the smallest matching pattern is preferred; in the second form, the largest matching pattern is preferred.
${
name:#
pattern}
If the pattern matches the value of name, then substitute
the empty string; otherwise, just substitute the value of name.
If name is an array
the matching array elements are removed (use the ‘(M)
’ flag to
remove the non-matched elements).
${
name:|
arrayname}
If arrayname is the name (N.B., not contents) of an array variable, then any elements contained in arrayname are removed from the substitution of name. If the substitution is scalar, either because name is a scalar variable or the expression is quoted, the elements of arrayname are instead tested against the entire expression.
${
name:*
arrayname}
Similar to the preceding substitution, but in the opposite sense, so that entries present in both the original substitution and as elements of arrayname are retained and others removed.
${
name:^
arrayname}
${
name:^^
arrayname}
Zips two arrays, such that the output array is twice as long as the
shortest (longest for ‘:^^
’) of name
and arrayname
, with
the elements alternatingly being picked from them. For ‘:^
’, if one
of the input arrays is longer, the output will stop when the end of the
shorter array is reached. Thus,
a=(1 2 3 4); b=(a b); print ${a:^b}
will output ‘1 a 2 b
’. For ‘:^^
’, then the input is repeated
until all of the longer array has been used up and the above will output
‘1 a 2 b 3 a 4 b
’.
Either or both inputs may be a scalar, they will be treated as an array of length 1 with the scalar as the only element. If either array is empty, the other array is output with no extra elements inserted.
Currently the following code will output ‘a b
’ and ‘1
’ as two separate
elements, which can be unexpected. The second print provides a workaround which
should continue to work if this is changed.
a=(a b); b=(1 2); print -l "${a:^b}"; print -l "${${a:^b}}"
${
name:
offset}
${
name:
offset:
length}
This syntax gives effects similar to parameter subscripting
in the form $
name[
start,
end]
, but is
compatible with other shells; note that both offset and length
are interpreted differently from the components of a subscript.
If offset is non-negative, then if the variable name is a scalar substitute the contents starting offset characters from the first character of the string, and if name is an array substitute elements starting offset elements from the first element. If length is given, substitute that many characters or elements, otherwise the entire rest of the scalar or array.
A positive offset is always treated as the offset of a character or
element in name from the first character or element of the array
(this is different from native zsh subscript notation). Hence 0
refers to the first character or element regardless of the setting of
the option KSH_ARRAYS
.
A negative offset counts backwards from the end of the scalar or array, so that -1 corresponds to the last character or element, and so on.
When positive, length counts from the offset position toward the end of the scalar or array. When negative, length counts back from the end. If this results in a position smaller than offset, a diagnostic is printed and nothing is substituted.
The option MULTIBYTE
is obeyed, i.e. the offset and length
count multibyte characters where appropriate.
offset and length undergo the same set of shell substitutions as for scalar assignment; in addition, they are then subject to arithmetic evaluation. Hence, for example
print ${foo:3} print ${foo: 1 + 2} print ${foo:$(( 1 + 2))} print ${foo:$(echo 1 + 2)}
all have the same effect, extracting the string starting at the fourth
character of $foo
if the substitution would otherwise return a scalar,
or the array starting at the fourth element if $foo
would return an
array. Note that with the option KSH_ARRAYS
$foo
always returns
a scalar (regardless of the use of the offset syntax) and a form
such as ${foo[*]:3}
is required to extract elements of an array named
foo
.
If offset is negative, the -
may not appear immediately
after the :
as this indicates the
${
name:-
word}
form of substitution. Instead, a space
may be inserted before the -
. Furthermore, neither offset nor
length may begin with an alphabetic character or &
as these are
used to indicate history-style modifiers. To substitute a value from a
variable, the recommended approach is to precede it with a $
as this
signifies the intention (parameter substitution can easily be rendered
unreadable); however, as arithmetic substitution is performed, the
expression ${var: offs}
does work, retrieving the offset from
$offs
.
For further compatibility with other shells there is a special case
for array offset 0. This usually accesses the
first element of the array. However, if the substitution refers to the
positional parameter array, e.g. $@
or $*
, then offset 0
instead refers to $0
, offset 1 refers to $1
, and so on. In
other words, the positional parameter array is effectively extended by
prepending $0
. Hence ${*:0:1}
substitutes $0
and
${*:1:1}
substitutes $1
.
${
name/
pattern/
repl}
${
name//
pattern/
repl}
${
name:/
pattern/
repl}
Replace the longest possible match of pattern in the expansion of
parameter name by string repl. The first form
replaces just the first occurrence, the second form all occurrences,
and the third form replaces only if pattern matches the entire string.
Both pattern and repl are subject to double-quoted substitution,
so that expressions like ${name/$opat/$npat}
will work, but obey the
usual rule that pattern characters in $opat
are not treated specially
unless either the option GLOB_SUBST
is set, or $opat
is instead
substituted as ${~opat}
.
The pattern may begin with a ‘#
’, in which case the
pattern must match at the start of the string, or ‘%
’, in
which case it must match at the end of the string, or ‘#%
’ in which
case the pattern must match the entire string. The repl may
be an empty string, in which case the final ‘/
’ may also be omitted.
To quote the final ‘/
’ in other cases it should be preceded by a
single backslash; this is not necessary if the
‘/
’ occurs inside a substituted parameter. Note also that the ‘#
’,
‘%
’ and ‘#%
are not active if they occur inside a substituted
parameter, even at the start.
If, after quoting rules apply, ${
name}
expands to an array,
the replacements act on each element individually. Note also the
effect of the I
and S
parameter expansion flags below; however,
the flags M
, R
, B
, E
and N
are not useful.
For example,
foo="twinkle twinkle little star" sub="t*e" rep="spy" print ${foo//${~sub}/$rep} print ${(S)foo//${~sub}/$rep}
Here, the ‘~
’ ensures that the text of $sub
is treated as a
pattern rather than a plain string. In the first case, the longest
match for t*e
is substituted and the result is ‘spy star
’,
while in the second case, the shortest matches are taken and the
result is ‘spy spy lispy star
’.
${#
spec}
If spec is one of the above substitutions, substitute
the length in characters of the result instead of
the result itself. If spec is an array expression,
substitute the number of elements of the result.
This has the side-effect that joining is skipped even in quoted
forms, which may affect other sub-expressions in spec.
Note that ‘^
’, ‘=
’, and ‘~
’, below, must appear
to the left of ‘#
’ when these forms are combined.
If the option POSIX_IDENTIFIERS
is not set, and spec is a
simple name, then the braces are optional; this is true even
for special parameters so e.g. $#-
and $#*
take the length
of the string $-
and the array $*
respectively. If
POSIX_IDENTIFIERS
is set, then braces are required for
the #
to be treated in this fashion.
${^
spec}
¶${^^
spec}
Turn on the RC_EXPAND_PARAM
option for the
evaluation of spec; if the ‘^
’ is doubled, turn it off.
When this option is set, array expansions of the form
foo${
xx}
bar,
where the parameter xx
is set to (
a b c)
, are substituted with
‘fooabar foobbar foocbar’ instead of the default
‘fooa b cbar’. Note that an empty array will therefore cause
all arguments to be removed.
Internally, each such expansion is converted into the
equivalent list for brace expansion. E.g., ${^var}
becomes
{$var[1],$var[2],
...}
, and is processed as described in
Brace Expansion below: note, however, the expansion
happens immediately, with any explicit brace expansion
happening later. If word splitting is also in effect the
$var[
N]
may themselves be split into different list
elements.
${=
spec}
¶${==
spec}
Perform word splitting using the rules for SH_WORD_SPLIT
during the
evaluation of spec, but regardless of whether the parameter appears in
double quotes; if the ‘=
’ is doubled, turn it off.
This forces parameter expansions to be split into
separate words before substitution, using IFS
as a delimiter.
This is done by default in most other shells.
Note that splitting is applied to word in the assignment forms
of spec before the assignment to name is performed.
This affects the result of array assignments with the A
flag.
${~
spec}
¶${~~
spec}
Turn on the GLOB_SUBST
option for the evaluation of
spec; if the ‘~
’ is doubled, turn it off. When this option is
set, the string resulting from the expansion will be interpreted as a
pattern anywhere that is possible, such as in filename expansion and
filename generation and pattern-matching contexts like the right
hand side of the ‘=
’ and ‘!=
’ operators in conditions.
In nested substitutions, note that the effect of the ~
applies to the
result of the current level of substitution. A surrounding pattern
operation on the result may cancel it. Hence, for example, if the
parameter foo
is set to *
, ${~foo//\*/*.c}
is substituted by
the pattern *.c
, which may be expanded by filename generation, but
${${~foo}//\*/*.c}
substitutes to the string *.c
, which will not
be further expanded.
If a ${
...}
type parameter expression or a
$(
...)
type command substitution is used in place of
name above, it is expanded first and the result is used as if
it were the value of name. Thus it is
possible to perform nested operations: ${${foo#head}%tail}
substitutes the value of $foo
with both ‘head
’ and ‘tail
’
deleted. The form with $(
...)
is often useful in
combination with the flags described next; see the examples below.
Each name or nested ${
...}
in a parameter expansion may
also be followed by a subscript expression as described in
Array Parameters.
Note that double quotes may appear around nested expressions, in which
case only the part inside is treated as quoted; for example,
${(f)"$(foo)"}
quotes the result of $(foo)
, but the flag ‘(f)
’
(see below) is applied using the rules for unquoted expansions. Note
further that quotes are themselves nested in this context; for example, in
"${(@f)"$(foo)"}"
, there are two sets of quotes, one surrounding the
whole expression, the other (redundant) surrounding the $(foo)
as
before.
If the opening brace is directly followed by an opening parenthesis,
the string up to the matching closing parenthesis will be taken as a
list of flags. In cases where repeating a flag is meaningful, the
repetitions need not be consecutive; for example, ‘(q%q%q
)’
means the same thing as the more readable ‘(%%qqq
)’. The
following flags are supported:
#
Evaluate the resulting words as numeric expressions and interpret
these as character codes. Output the corresponding characters. Note
that this form is entirely distinct from use of the #
without
parentheses.
If the MULTIBYTE
option is set and the number is greater than 127
(i.e. not an ASCII character) it is treated as a Unicode character.
%
Expand all %
escapes in the resulting words in the same way as in
prompts (see
Prompt Expansion). If this flag is given twice,
full prompt expansion is done on the resulting words, depending on the
setting of the PROMPT_PERCENT
, PROMPT_SUBST
and PROMPT_BANG
options.
@
In double quotes, array elements are put into separate words.
E.g., ‘"${(@)foo}"
’ is equivalent to ‘"${foo[@]}"
’ and
‘"${(@)foo[1,2]}"
’ is the same as ‘"$foo[1]" "$foo[2]"
’.
This is distinct from field splitting by the f
, s
or z
flags, which still applies within each array element.
A
Convert the substitution into an array expression, even if it otherwise
would be scalar. This has lower precedence than subscripting, so one
level of nested expansion is required in order that subscripts apply
to array elements. Thus ${${(A
)
name}[1]}
yields the full value of name when name is scalar.
This assigns an array parameter with ‘${
...=
...}
’,
‘${
...:=
...}
’ or ‘${
...::=
...}
’.
If this flag is repeated (as in ‘AA
’), assigns an associative
array parameter. Assignment is made before sorting or padding;
if field splitting is active, the word part is split before
assignment. The name part may be a subscripted range for
ordinary arrays; when assigning an associative array, the word
part must be converted to an array, for example by using
‘${(AA)=
name=
...}
’ to activate field splitting.
Surrounding context such as additional nesting or use of the value in a scalar assignment may cause the array to be joined back into a single string again.
a
Sort in array index order; when combined with ‘O
’ sort in reverse
array index order. Note that ‘a
’ is therefore equivalent to the
default but ‘Oa
’ is useful for obtaining an array’s elements in reverse
order.
b
Quote with backslashes only characters that are special to pattern
matching. This is useful when the contents of the variable are to be
tested using GLOB_SUBST
, including the ${~
...}
switch.
Quoting using one of the q
family of flags does not work
for this purpose since quotes are not stripped from non-pattern
characters by GLOB_SUBST
. In other words,
pattern=${(q)str} [[ $str = ${~pattern} ]]
works if $str
is ‘a*b
’ but not if it is ‘a b
’, whereas
pattern=${(b)str} [[ $str = ${~pattern} ]]
is always true for any possible value of $str
.
c
With ${#
name}
, count the total number of characters in an array,
as if the elements were concatenated with spaces between them. This is not
a true join of the array, so other expressions used with this flag may have
an effect on the elements of the array before it is counted.
C
Capitalize the resulting words. ‘Words’ in this case refers to sequences of alphanumeric characters separated by non-alphanumerics, not to words that result from field splitting.
D
Assume the string or array elements contain directories and attempt
to substitute the leading part of these by names. The remainder of
the path (the whole of it if the leading part was not substituted)
is then quoted so that the whole string can be used as a shell
argument. This is the reverse of ‘~
’ substitution: see
Filename Expansion.
e
Perform single word shell expansions, namely parameter expansion, command substitution and arithmetic expansion, on the result. Such expansions can be nested but too deep recursion may have unpredictable effects.
f
Split the result of the expansion at newlines. This is a shorthand
for ‘ps:\n:
’.
F
Join the words of arrays together using newline as a separator.
This is a shorthand for ‘pj:\n:
’.
g:
opts:
Process escape sequences like the echo builtin when no options are given
(g::
). With the o
option, octal escapes don’t take a leading
zero. With the c
option, sequences like ‘^X
’ are also processed.
With the e
option, processes ‘\M-t
’ and similar sequences like the
print builtin. With both of the o
and e
options, behaves like the
print builtin except that in none of these modes is ‘\c
’ interpreted.
i
Sort case-insensitively. May be combined with ‘n
’ or ‘O
’.
k
If name refers to an associative array, substitute the keys
(element names) rather than the values of the elements. Used with
subscripts (including ordinary arrays), force indices or keys to be
substituted even if the subscript form refers to values. However,
this flag may not be combined with subscript ranges. With the
KSH_ARRAYS
option a subscript ‘[*]
’ or ‘[@]
’ is needed
to operate on the whole array, as usual.
L
Convert all letters in the result to lower case.
n
Sort decimal integers numerically; if the first differing
characters of two test strings are not digits, sorting
is lexical. ‘+
’ and ‘-
’ are not treated specially; they are treated as
any other non-digit. Integers with more initial zeroes
are sorted before those with fewer or none. Hence the array ‘foo+24 foo1 foo02
foo2 foo3 foo20 foo23
’ is sorted into the order shown.
May be combined with ‘i
’ or ‘O
’.
-
As n
, but a leading minus sign indicates a negative decimal
integer. A leading minus sign not followed by an integer does not trigger
numeric sorting.
Note that ‘+
’ signs are not handled specially (this may change in the
future).
o
Sort the resulting words in ascending order; if this appears on its
own the sorting is lexical and case-sensitive (unless the locale
renders it case-insensitive). Sorting in ascending order is the
default for other forms of sorting, so this is ignored if combined
with ‘a
’, ‘i
’, ‘n
’ or ‘-
’.
O
Sort the resulting words in descending order; ‘O
’ without ‘a
’,
‘i
’, ‘n
’ or ‘-
’ sorts in reverse lexical order. May be
combined with ‘a
’, ‘i
’, ‘n
’ or ‘-
’ to reverse the
order of sorting.
P
This forces the value of the parameter name to be interpreted as a
further parameter name, whose value will be used where appropriate.
Note that flags set with one of the typeset
family of commands
(in particular case transformations) are not applied to the value of
name used in this fashion.
If used with a nested parameter or command substitution, the result of that
will be taken as a parameter name in the same way. For example, if you
have ‘foo=bar
’ and ‘bar=baz
’, the strings ${(P)foo}
,
${(P)${foo}}
, and ${(P)$(echo bar)}
will be expanded to
‘baz
’.
Likewise, if the reference is itself nested, the expression with the
flag is treated as if it were directly replaced by the parameter name.
It is an error if this nested substitution produces an array with more
than one word. For example, if ‘name=assoc
’ where the parameter
assoc
is an associative array, then
‘${${(P)name}[elt]}
’ refers to the element of the associative
subscripted ‘elt
’.
q
Quote characters that are special to the shell in the resulting words with
backslashes; unprintable or invalid characters are quoted using the
$'\
NNN'
form, with separate quotes for each octet.
If this flag is given twice, the resulting words are quoted in single
quotes and if it is given three times, the words are quoted in double
quotes; in these forms no special handling of unprintable or invalid
characters is attempted. If the flag is given four times, the words are
quoted in single quotes preceded by a $
. Note that in all three of
these forms quoting is done unconditionally, even if this does not change
the way the resulting string would be interpreted by the shell.
If a q-
is given (only a single q
may appear), a minimal
form of single quoting is used that only quotes the string if needed to
protect special characters. Typically this form gives the most readable
output.
If a q+
is given, an extended form of minimal quoting is used that
causes unprintable characters to be rendered using $'
...'
.
This quoting is similar to that used by the output of values by the
typeset
family of commands.
Q
Remove one level of quotes from the resulting words.
t
Use a string describing the type of the parameter where the value
of the parameter would usually appear. This string consists of keywords
separated by hyphens (‘-
’). The first keyword in the string describes
the main type, it can be one of ‘scalar
’, ‘array
’, ‘integer
’,
‘float
’ or ‘association
’. The other keywords describe the type in
more detail:
local
for local parameters
left
for left justified parameters
right_blanks
for right justified parameters with leading blanks
right_zeros
for right justified parameters with leading zeros
lower
for parameters whose value is converted to all lower case when it is expanded
upper
for parameters whose value is converted to all upper case when it is expanded
readonly
for readonly parameters
tag
for tagged parameters
tied
for parameters tied to another parameter in the manner of PATH
(colon-separated list) and path
(array), whether these are
special parameters or user-defined with ‘typeset -T
’
export
for exported parameters
unique
for arrays which keep only the first occurrence of duplicated values
hide
for parameters with the ‘hide’ flag
hideval
for parameters with the ‘hideval’ flag
special
for special parameters defined by the shell
u
Expand only the first occurrence of each unique word.
U
Convert all letters in the result to upper case.
v
Used with k
, substitute (as two consecutive words) both the key
and the value of each associative array element. Used with subscripts,
force values to be substituted even if the subscript form refers to
indices or keys.
V
Make any special characters in the resulting words visible.
w
With ${#
name}
, count words in arrays or strings; the s
flag may be used to set a word delimiter.
W
Similar to w
with the difference that empty words between
repeated delimiters are also counted.
X
With this flag, parsing errors occurring with the Q
, e
and #
flags or the pattern matching forms such as
‘${
name#
pattern}
’ are reported. Without the flag,
errors are silently ignored.
z
Split the result of the expansion into words using shell parsing to
find the words, i.e. taking into account any quoting in the value.
Comments are not treated specially but as ordinary strings, similar
to interactive shells with the INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
option unset
(however, see the Z
flag below for related options)
Note that this is done very late, even later than the ‘(s)
’ flag. So to
access single words in the result use nested expansions as
in ‘${${(z)foo}[2]}
’. Likewise, to remove the quotes in the
resulting words use ‘${(Q)${(z)foo}}
’.
0
Split the result of the expansion on null bytes. This is a shorthand
for ‘ps:\0:
’.
The following flags (except p
) are followed by one or more arguments
as shown. Any character, or the matching pairs ‘(
...)
’,
‘{
...}
’, ‘[
...]
’, or ‘<
...>
’, may be used in place
of a colon as delimiters, but note that when a flag takes more than one
argument, a matched pair of delimiters must surround each argument.
p
Recognize the same escape sequences as the print
builtin
in string arguments to any of the flags described below that
follow this argument.
Alternatively, with this option string arguments may be in the form
$
var in which case the value of the variable is substituted.
Note this form is strict; the string argument does not undergo general
parameter expansion.
For example,
sep=: val=a:b:c print ${(ps.$sep.)val}
splits the variable on a :
.
~
Strings inserted into the expansion by any of the flags below are to
be treated as patterns. This applies to the string arguments of flags
that follow ~
within the same set of parentheses. Compare with ~
outside parentheses, which forces the entire substituted string to
be treated as a pattern. Hence, for example,
[[ "?" = ${(~j.|.)array} ]]
treats ‘|
’ as a pattern and succeeds if and only if $array
contains the string ‘?
’ as an element. The ~
may be
repeated to toggle the behaviour; its effect only lasts to the
end of the parenthesised group.
j:
string:
Join the words of arrays together using string as a separator.
Note that this occurs before field splitting by the s:
string:
flag or the SH_WORD_SPLIT
option.
l:
expr::
string1::
string2:
Pad the resulting words on the left. Each word will be truncated if required and placed in a field expr characters wide.
The arguments :
string1:
and :
string2:
are
optional; neither, the first, or both may be given. Note that the same
pairs of delimiters must be used for each of the three arguments. The
space to the left will be filled with string1 (concatenated as
often as needed) or spaces if string1 is not given. If both
string1 and string2 are given, string2 is inserted once
directly to the left of each word, truncated if necessary, before
string1 is used to produce any remaining padding.
If either of string1 or string2 is present but empty,
i.e. there are two delimiters together at that point, the first
character of $IFS
is used instead.
If the MULTIBYTE
option is in effect, the flag m
may also
be given, in which case widths will be used for the calculation of
padding; otherwise individual multibyte characters are treated as occupying
one unit of width.
If the MULTIBYTE
option is not in effect, each byte in the string is
treated as occupying one unit of width.
Control characters are always assumed to be one unit wide; this allows the mechanism to be used for generating repetitions of control characters.
m
Only useful together with one of the flags l
or r
or with the
#
length operator when the MULTIBYTE
option
is in effect. Use the character width reported by the system in
calculating how much of the string it occupies or the overall
length of the string. Most printable characters have a width of one
unit, however certain Asian character sets and certain special effects
use wider characters; combining characters have zero width.
Non-printable characters are arbitrarily counted as zero width; how they
would actually be displayed will vary.
If the m
is repeated, the character either counts zero (if it has
zero width), else one. For printable character strings this has the
effect of counting the number of glyphs (visibly separate characters),
except for the case where combining characters themselves have non-zero
width (true in certain alphabets).
r:
expr::
string1::
string2:
As l
, but pad the words on the right and insert string2
immediately to the right of the string to be padded.
Left and right padding may be used together. In this case the strategy is to apply left padding to the first half width of each of the resulting words, and right padding to the second half. If the string to be padded has odd width the extra padding is applied on the left.
s:
string:
Force field splitting at the
separator string. Note that a string of two or more
characters means that all of them must match in sequence; this differs from
the treatment of two or more characters in the IFS
parameter.
See also the =
flag and the SH_WORD_SPLIT
option. An empty
string may also be given in which case every character will be a separate
element.
For historical reasons, the usual behaviour that empty array elements are retained inside double quotes is disabled for arrays generated by splitting; hence the following:
line="one::three" print -l "${(s.:.)line}"
produces two lines of output for one
and three
and elides the
empty field. To override this behaviour, supply the ‘(@)
’ flag as well,
i.e. "${(@s.:.)line}"
.
Z:
opts:
As z
but takes a combination of option letters between a following
pair of delimiter characters. With no options the effect is identical
to z
. The following options are available:
(Z+c+)
causes comments to be parsed as a string and retained; any field in the resulting array beginning with an unquoted comment character is a comment.
(Z+C+)
causes comments to be parsed
and removed. The rule for comments is standard: anything between a word
starting with the third character of $HISTCHARS
, default #
, up to
the next newline is a comment.
(Z+n+)
causes unquoted newlines to be treated as ordinary whitespace, else they are treated as if they are shell code delimiters and converted to semicolons.
Options are combined within the same set of delimiters,
e.g. (Z+Cn+)
.
_:
flags:
The underscore (_
) flag is reserved for future use. As of this
revision of zsh, there are no valid flags; anything following an
underscore, other than an empty pair of delimiters, is treated as an
error, and the flag itself has no effect.
The following flags are meaningful with the ${
...#
...}
or
${
...%
...}
forms. The S
, I
, and *
flags may also be
used with the ${
.../
...}
forms.
S
With #
or ##
, search for the match that starts closest to the start of
the string (a ‘substring match’). Of all matches at a particular position,
#
selects the shortest and ##
the longest:
% str="aXbXc" % echo ${(S)str#X*} abXc % echo ${(S)str##X*} a %
With %
or %%
, search for the match that starts closest to the end of
the string:
% str="aXbXc" % echo ${(S)str%X*} aXbc % echo ${(S)str%%X*} aXb %
(Note that %
and %%
don’t search for the match that ends closest to the
end of the string, as one might expect.)
With substitution via ${
.../
...}
or
${
...//
...}
, specifies non-greedy matching, i.e. that the
shortest instead of the longest match should be replaced:
% str="abab" % echo ${str/*b/_} _ % echo ${(S)str/*b/_} _ab %
I:
expr:
Search the exprth match (where expr evaluates to a number).
This only applies when searching for substrings, either with the S
flag, or with ${
.../
...}
(only the exprth match is
substituted) or ${
...//
...}
(all matches from the
exprth on are substituted). The default is to take the first match.
The exprth match is counted such that there is either one or zero
matches from each starting position in the string, although for global
substitution matches overlapping previous replacements are ignored. With
the ${
...%
...}
and ${
...%%
...}
forms, the starting
position for the match moves backwards from the end as the index increases,
while with the other forms it moves forward from the start.
Hence with the string
which switch is the right switch for Ipswich?
substitutions of the form
${
(SI:
N:
)string#w*ch}
as N increases
from 1 will match and remove ‘which
’, ‘witch
’, ‘witch
’ and
‘wich
’; the form using ‘##
’ will match and remove ‘which switch
is the right switch for Ipswich
’, ‘witch is the right switch for
Ipswich
’, ‘witch for Ipswich
’ and ‘wich
’. The form using ‘%
’
will remove the same matches as for ‘#
’, but in reverse order, and the
form using ‘%%
’ will remove the same matches as for ‘##
’ in reverse
order.
*
¶Enable EXTENDED_GLOB
for substitution via ${
.../
...}
or
${
...//
...}
. Note that ‘**
’ does not disable extendedglob.
B
Include the index of the beginning of the match in the result.
E
Include the index one character past the end of the match in the result (note this is inconsistent with other uses of parameter index).
M
Include the matched portion in the result.
N
Include the length of the match in the result.
R
Include the unmatched portion in the result (the Rest).
Here is a summary of the rules for substitution; this assumes that braces
are present around the substitution, i.e. ${
...}
. Some particular
examples are given below. Note that the Zsh Development Group accepts
no responsibility for any brain damage which may occur during the
reading of the following rules.
1.
Nested substitutionIf multiple nested ${
...}
forms are present, substitution is
performed from the inside outwards. At each level, the substitution takes
account of whether the current value is a scalar or an array, whether the
whole substitution is in double quotes, and what flags are supplied to the
current level of substitution, just as if the nested substitution were the
outermost. The flags are not propagated up to enclosing
substitutions; the nested substitution will return either a scalar or an
array as determined by the flags, possibly adjusted for quoting. All the
following steps take place where applicable at all levels of substitution.
Note that, unless the ‘(P)
’ flag is present, the flags and any
subscripts apply directly to the value of the nested substitution; for
example, the expansion ${${foo}}
behaves exactly the same as
${foo}
. When the ‘(P)
’ flag is present in a nested substitution,
the other substitution rules are applied to the value before it is
interpreted as a name, so ${${(P)foo}}
may differ from ${(P)foo}
.
At each nested level of substitution, the substituted words undergo all
forms of single-word substitution (i.e. not filename generation), including
command substitution, arithmetic expansion and filename expansion
(i.e. leading ~
and =
). Thus, for example, ${${:-=cat}:h}
expands to the directory where the cat
program resides. (Explanation:
the internal substitution has no parameter but a default value =cat
,
which is expanded by filename expansion to a full path; the outer
substitution then applies the modifier :h
and takes the directory part
of the path.)
2.
Internal parameter flagsAny parameter flags set by one of the typeset
family of commands, in
particular the -L
, -R
, -Z
, -u
and -l
options for
padding and capitalization, are applied directly to the parameter value.
Note these flags are options to the command, e.g. ‘typeset -Z
’; they
are not the same as the flags used within parameter substitutions.
At the outermost level of substitution, the ‘(P)
’ flag (rule 4.
)
ignores these transformations and uses the unmodified value of the
parameter as the name to be replaced. This is usually the desired
behavior because padding may make the value syntactically illegal as a
parameter name, but if capitalization changes are desired, use the
${${(P)foo}}
form (rule 25.
).
3.
Parameter subscriptingIf the value is a raw parameter reference with a subscript, such as
${
var[3]}
, the effect of subscripting is applied directly to
the parameter. Subscripts are evaluated left to right; subsequent
subscripts apply to the scalar or array value yielded by the previous
subscript. Thus if var
is an array, ${var[1][2]}
is the second
character of the first word, but ${var[2,4][2]}
is the entire third
word (the second word of the range of words two through four of the
original array). Any number of subscripts may appear. Flags such as
‘(k)
’ and ‘(v)
’ which alter the result of subscripting are applied.
4.
Parameter name replacementAt the outermost level of nesting only, the ‘(P)
’ flag is applied. This
treats the value so far as a parameter name (which may include a subscript
expression) and replaces that with the corresponding value. This
replacement occurs later if the ‘(P)
’ flag appears in a nested
substitution.
If the value so far names a parameter that has internal flags (rule 2.
),
those internal flags are applied to the new value after replacement.
5.
Double-quoted joiningIf the value after this process is an array, and the substitution
appears in double quotes, and neither an ‘(@)
’ flag nor a ‘#
’
length operator is present at the current level, then words of the
value are joined with the first character of the parameter $IFS
,
by default a space, between each word (single word arrays are not
modified). If the ‘(j)
’ flag is present, that is used for joining
instead of $IFS
.
6.
Nested subscriptingAny remaining subscripts (i.e. of a nested substitution) are evaluated at
this point, based on whether the value is an array or a scalar. As with
3.
, multiple subscripts can appear. Note that ${foo[2,4][2]}
is
thus equivalent to ${${foo[2,4]}[2]}
and also to
"${${(@)foo[2,4]}[2]}"
(the nested substitution returns an array in
both cases), but not to "${${foo[2,4]}[2]}"
(the nested substitution
returns a scalar because of the quotes).
7.
ModifiersAny modifiers, as specified by a trailing ‘#
’, ‘%
’, ‘/
’
(possibly doubled) or by a set of modifiers of the form ‘:...
’ (see
Modifiers in History Expansion), are applied to the words
of the value at this level.
8.
Character evaluationAny ‘(#)
’ flag is applied, evaluating the result so far numerically
as a character.
9.
LengthAny initial ‘#
’ modifier, i.e. in the form ${#
var}
, is
used to evaluate the length of the expression so far.
10.
Forced joiningIf the ‘(j)
’ flag is present, or no ‘(j)
’ flag is present but
the string is to be split as given by rule 11.
, and joining
did not take place at rule 5.
, any words in the value are joined
together using the given string or the first character of $IFS
if none.
Note that the ‘(F)
’ flag implicitly supplies a string for joining in this
manner.
11.
Simple word splittingIf one of the ‘(s)
’ or ‘(f)
’ flags are present, or the ‘=
’
specifier was present (e.g. ${=
var}
), the word is split on
occurrences of the specified string, or (for =
with neither of the two
flags present) any of the characters in $IFS
.
If no ‘(s)
’, ‘(f)
’ or ‘=
’ was given, but the word is not
quoted and the option SH_WORD_SPLIT
is set, the word is split on
occurrences of any of the characters in $IFS
. Note this step, too,
takes place at all levels of a nested substitution.
12.
Case modificationAny case modification from one of the flags ‘(L)
’, ‘(U)
’ or ‘(C)
’
is applied.
13.
Escape sequence replacementFirst any replacements from the ‘(g)
’ flag are performed, then any
prompt-style formatting from the ‘(%)
’ family of flags is applied.
14.
Quote applicationAny quoting or unquoting using ‘(q)
’ and ‘(Q)
’ and related flags
is applied.
15.
Directory namingAny directory name substitution using ‘(D)
’ flag is applied.
16.
Visibility enhancementAny modifications to make characters visible using the ‘(V)
’ flag
are applied.
17.
Lexical word splittingIf the ’(z)
’ flag or one of the forms of the ’(Z)
’ flag is
present, the word is split as if it were a shell command line, so that
quotation marks and other metacharacters are used to decide what
constitutes a word. Note this form of splitting is entirely distinct
from that described by rule 11.
: it does not use $IFS
, and
does not cause forced joining.
18.
UniquenessIf the result is an array and the ‘(u)
’ flag was present, duplicate
elements are removed from the array.
19.
OrderingIf the result is still an array and one of the ‘(o)
’ or ‘(O)
’ flags
was present, the array is reordered.
20.
RC_EXPAND_PARAM
At this point the decision is made whether any resulting array elements
are to be combined element by element with surrounding text, as given
by either the RC_EXPAND_PARAM
option or the ‘^
’ flag.
21.
Re-evaluationAny ‘(e)
’ flag is applied to the value, forcing it to be re-examined
for new parameter substitutions, but also for command and arithmetic
substitutions.
22.
PaddingAny padding of the value by the ‘(l.
fill.)
’ or
‘(r.
fill.)
’ flags is applied.
23.
Semantic joiningIn contexts where expansion semantics requires a single word to
result, all words are rejoined with the first character of IFS
between. So in ‘${(P
)${(f
)lines}}
’
the value of ${lines}
is split at newlines, but then must be
joined again before the ‘(P)
’ flag can be applied.
If a single word is not required, this rule is skipped.
24.
Empty argument removalIf the substitution does not appear in double quotes, any resulting zero-length argument, whether from a scalar or an element of an array, is elided from the list of arguments inserted into the command line.
Strictly speaking, the removal happens later as the same happens with other forms of substitution; the point to note here is simply that it occurs after any of the above parameter operations.
25.
Nested parameter name replacementIf the ‘(P)
’ flag is present and rule 4.
has not applied, the
value so far is treated as a parameter name (which may include a subscript
expression) and replaced with the corresponding value, with internal flags
(rule 2.
) applied to the new value.
The flag f
is useful to split a double-quoted substitution line by
line. For example, ${(f)"$(<
file)"}
substitutes the contents of file divided so that each line is
an element of the resulting array. Compare this with the effect of
$
(<
file)
alone, which divides the file
up by words, or the same inside double quotes, which makes the entire
content of the file a single string.
The following illustrates the rules for nested parameter expansions.
Suppose that $foo
contains the array (bar baz
)
:
"${(@)${foo}[1]}"
This produces the result b
. First, the inner substitution
"${foo}"
, which has no array (@
) flag, produces a single word
result "bar baz"
. The outer substitution "${(@)...[1]}"
detects
that this is a scalar, so that (despite the ‘(@)
’ flag) the subscript
picks the first character.
"${${(@)foo}[1]}"
This produces the result ‘bar
’. In this case, the inner substitution
"${(@)foo}"
produces the array ‘(bar baz
)
’. The outer
substitution "${...[1]}"
detects that this is an array and picks the
first word. This is similar to the simple case "${foo[1]}"
.
As an example of the rules for word splitting and joining, suppose $foo
contains the array ‘(ax1 bx1
)
’. Then
${(s/x/)foo}
produces the words ‘a
’, ‘1 b
’ and ‘1
’.
${(j/x/s/x/)foo}
produces ‘a
’, ‘1
’, ‘b
’ and ‘1
’.
${(s/x/)foo%%1*}
produces ‘a
’ and ‘ b
’ (note the extra space). As substitution
occurs before either joining or splitting, the operation first generates
the modified array (ax bx
)
, which is joined to give
"ax bx"
, and then split to give ‘a
’, ‘ b
’ and ‘’. The final
empty string will then be elided, as it is not in double quotes.
A command enclosed in parentheses preceded by a dollar sign, like
‘$(
...)
’, or quoted with grave
accents, like ‘`
...`
’, is replaced with its standard output, with
any trailing newlines deleted.
If the substitution is not enclosed in double quotes, the
output is broken into words using the IFS
parameter.
The substitution ‘$(cat
foo)
’ may be replaced
by the faster ‘$(<
foo)
’. In this case foo
undergoes single word shell expansions (parameter expansion,
command substitution and arithmetic expansion), but not
filename generation.
If the option GLOB_SUBST
is set, the result of any unquoted command
substitution, including the special form just mentioned, is eligible for
filename generation.
A string of the form ‘$[
exp]
’ or
‘$((
exp))
’ is substituted
with the value of the arithmetic expression exp. exp is
subjected to parameter expansion, command substitution
and arithmetic expansion before it is evaluated.
See Arithmetic Evaluation.
A string of the form
‘foo{
xx,
yy,
zz}
bar’
is expanded to the individual words
‘fooxxbar’, ‘fooyybar’ and ‘foozzbar’.
Left-to-right order is preserved. This construct
may be nested. Commas may be quoted in order to
include them literally in a word.
An expression of the form ‘{
n1..
n2}
’,
where n1 and n2 are integers,
is expanded to every number between
n1 and n2 inclusive. If either number begins with a
zero, all the resulting numbers will be padded with leading zeroes to
that minimum width, but for negative numbers the -
character is also
included in the width. If the numbers are in decreasing order the
resulting sequence will also be in decreasing order.
An expression of the form ‘{
n1..
n2..
n3}
’,
where n1, n2, and n3 are integers,
is expanded as above, but only every n3th number starting from n1
is output. If n3 is negative the numbers are output in reverse order,
this is slightly different from simply swapping n1 and n2 in the case
that the step n3 doesn’t evenly divide the range. Zero padding can be
specified in any of the three numbers, specifying it in the third can be useful
to pad for example ‘{-99..100..01}
’ which is not possible to specify by putting a
0 on either of the first two numbers (i.e. pad to two characters).
An expression of the form ‘{
c1..
c2}
’, where
c1 and c2 are single characters (which may be multibyte
characters), is expanded to every character in the range from c1 to
c2 in whatever character sequence is used internally. For
characters with code points below 128 this is US ASCII (this is the only
case most users will need). If any intervening character is not
printable, appropriate quotation is used to render it printable.
If the character sequence is reversed, the output is in reverse
order, e.g. ‘{d..a}
’ is substituted as ‘d c b a
’.
If a brace expression matches none of the above forms, it is left
unchanged, unless the option BRACE_CCL
(an abbreviation for ‘brace
character class’) is set.
In that case, it is expanded to a list of the individual
characters between the braces sorted into the order of the characters
in the ASCII character set (multibyte characters are not currently
handled). The syntax is similar to a
[
...]
expression in filename generation:
‘-
’ is treated specially to denote a range of characters, but ‘^
’ or
‘!
’ as the first character is treated normally. For example,
‘{abcdef0-9}
’ expands to 16 words 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f
.
Note that brace expansion is not part of filename generation (globbing); an
expression such as */{foo,bar}
is split into two separate words
*/foo
and */bar
before filename generation takes place. In
particular, note that this is liable to produce a ‘no match’ error if
either of the two expressions does not match; this is to be contrasted
with */(foo|bar)
, which is treated as a single pattern but otherwise
has similar effects.
To combine brace expansion with array expansion, see the
${^
spec}
form described
in Parameter Expansion
above.
Each word is checked to see if it begins with an unquoted ‘~
’.
If it does, then the word up to a ‘/
’,
or the end of the word if there is no ‘/
’,
is checked to see if it can be substituted in one of the ways
described here. If so, then the ‘~
’ and the checked portion are
replaced with the appropriate substitute value.
A ‘~
’ by itself is replaced by the value of $HOME
.
A ‘~
’ followed by a ‘+
’ or a ‘-
’ is replaced by current
or previous working directory, respectively.
A ‘~
’ followed by a number is replaced by the directory at that
position in the directory stack.
‘~0
’ is equivalent to ‘~+
’,
and ‘~1
’ is the top of the stack.
‘~+
’ followed by a number is replaced by the directory at that
position in the directory stack.
‘~+0
’ is equivalent to ‘~+
’,
and ‘~+1
’ is the top of the stack.
‘~-
’ followed by a number is replaced by the directory that
many positions from the bottom of the stack.
‘~-0
’ is the bottom of the stack.
The PUSHD_MINUS
option exchanges the effects of ‘~+
’ and ‘~-
’ where they are
followed by a number.
If the function zsh_directory_name
exists, or the shell variable
zsh_directory_name_functions
exists and contains an array of
function names, then the functions are used to implement dynamic
directory naming. The functions are tried in order until one returns
status zero, so it is important that functions test whether they can
handle the case in question and return an appropriate status.
A ‘~
’ followed by a string namstr in unquoted square brackets is
treated specially as a dynamic directory name. Note that the first
unquoted closing square bracket always terminates namstr. The shell
function is passed two arguments: the string n
(for name) and
namstr. It should either set the array reply
to a single element
which is the directory corresponding to the name and return status zero
(executing an assignment as the last statement is usually sufficient), or
it should return status non-zero. In the former case the element of reply
is used as the directory; in the latter case the substitution is deemed to
have failed. If all functions fail and the option NOMATCH
is set,
an error results.
The functions defined as above are also used to see if a directory can
be turned into a name, for example when printing the directory stack or
when expanding %~
in prompts. In this case each function is passed two
arguments: the string d
(for directory) and the candidate for dynamic
naming. The function should either return non-zero status, if the
directory cannot be named by the function, or it should set the array reply
to consist of two elements: the first is the dynamic name for the directory
(as would appear within ‘~[
...]
’), and the second is the
prefix length of the directory to be replaced. For example, if the trial
directory is /home/myname/src/zsh
and the dynamic name for
/home/myname/src
(which has 16 characters) is s
, then the function
sets
reply=(s 16)
The directory name so returned is compared with possible static names for parts of the directory path, as described below; it is used if the prefix length matched (16 in the example) is longer than that matched by any static name.
It is not a requirement that a function implements both
n
and d
calls; for example, it might be appropriate for certain
dynamic forms of expansion not to be contracted to names. In that case
any call with the first argument d
should cause a non-zero status to
be returned.
The completion system calls ‘zsh_directory_name c
’ followed by
equivalent calls to elements of the array
zsh_directory_name_functions
, if it exists, in order to
complete dynamic names for directories. The code for this should be
as for any other completion function as described in
Completion System.
As a working example, here is a function that expands any dynamic names
beginning with the string p:
to directories below
/home/pws/perforce
. In this simple case a static name for the
directory would be just as effective.
zsh_directory_name() { emulate -L zsh setopt extendedglob local -a match mbegin mend if [[ $1 = d ]]; then # turn the directory into a name if [[ $2 = (#b)(/home/pws/perforce/)([^/]##)* ]]; then typeset -ga reply reply=(p:$match[2] $(( ${#match[1]} + ${#match[2]} )) ) else return 1 fi elif [[ $1 = n ]]; then # turn the name into a directory [[ $2 != (#b)p:(?*) ]] && return 1 typeset -ga reply reply=(/home/pws/perforce/$match[1]) elif [[ $1 = c ]]; then # complete names local expl local -a dirs dirs=(/home/pws/perforce/*(/:t)) dirs=(p:${^dirs}) _wanted dynamic-dirs expl 'dynamic directory' compadd -S\] -a dirs return else return 1 fi return 0 }
A ‘~
’ followed by anything not already covered consisting
of any number of alphanumeric characters or underscore (‘_
’),
hyphen (‘-
’), or dot (‘.
’) is looked up as a
named directory, and replaced by the value of that named directory if found.
Named directories are typically home directories for users on the system.
They may also be defined if the text after the ‘~
’ is the name
of a string shell parameter whose value begins with a ‘/
’.
Note that trailing slashes will be removed from the path to the directory
(though the original parameter is not modified).
It is also possible to define directory names using the -d
option to the
hash
builtin.
When the shell prints a path (e.g. when expanding %~
in prompts or when
printing the directory stack), the path is checked to see if it has a named
directory as its prefix. If so, then the prefix portion is replaced with a
‘~
’ followed by the name of the directory.
The shorter of the two ways of referring to the directory is used,
i.e. either the directory name or the full path; the name is used
if they are the same length.
The parameters $PWD
and $OLDPWD
are never abbreviated in this fashion.
If a word begins with an unquoted ‘=
’
and the EQUALS
option is set,
the remainder of the word is taken as the
name of a command. If a command
exists by that name, the word is replaced
by the full pathname of the command.
Filename expansion is performed on the right hand side of a parameter
assignment, including those appearing after commands of the
typeset
family. In this case, the right hand side will be treated
as a colon-separated list in the manner of the PATH
parameter,
so that a ‘~
’ or an ‘=
’ following a ‘:
’ is eligible for expansion.
All such behaviour can be
disabled by quoting the ‘~
’, the ‘=
’, or the whole expression (but not
simply the colon); the EQUALS
option is also respected.
If the option MAGIC_EQUAL_SUBST
is set, any unquoted shell
argument in the form ‘identifier=
expression’ becomes eligible
for file expansion as described in the previous paragraph. Quoting the
first ‘=
’ also inhibits this.
If a word contains an unquoted instance of one of the characters
‘*
’, ‘(
’, ‘|
’, ‘<
’, ‘[
’, or ‘?
’, it is regarded
as a pattern for filename generation, unless the GLOB
option is unset.
If the EXTENDED_GLOB
option is set,
the ‘^
’ and ‘#
’ characters also denote a pattern; otherwise
they are not treated specially by the shell.
The word is replaced with a list of sorted filenames that match
the pattern. If no matching pattern is found, the shell gives
an error message, unless the NULL_GLOB
option is set,
in which case the word is deleted; or unless the NOMATCH
option is unset, in which case the word is left unchanged.
In filename generation,
the character ‘/
’ must be matched explicitly;
also, a ‘.
’ must be matched
explicitly at the beginning of a pattern or after a ‘/
’, unless the
GLOB_DOTS
option is set.
No filename generation pattern
matches the files ‘.
’ or ‘..
’. In other instances of pattern
matching, the ‘/
’ and ‘.
’ are not treated specially.
*
Matches any string, including the null string.
?
Matches any character.
[
...]
Matches any of the enclosed characters. Ranges of characters
can be specified by separating two characters by a ‘-
’.
A ‘-
’ or ‘]
’ may be matched by including it as the
first character in the list.
There are also several named classes of characters, in the form
‘[:
name:]
’ with the following meanings.
The first set use the macros provided by
the operating system to test for the given character combinations,
including any modifications due to local language settings, see
ctype(3):
[:alnum:]
The character is alphanumeric
[:alpha:]
The character is alphabetic
[:ascii:]
The character is 7-bit, i.e. is a single-byte character without the top bit set.
[:blank:]
The character is a blank character
[:cntrl:]
The character is a control character
[:digit:]
The character is a decimal digit
[:graph:]
The character is a printable character other than whitespace
[:lower:]
The character is a lowercase letter
[:print:]
The character is printable
[:punct:]
The character is printable but neither alphanumeric nor whitespace
[:space:]
The character is whitespace
[:upper:]
The character is an uppercase letter
[:xdigit:]
The character is a hexadecimal digit
Another set of named classes is handled internally by the shell and is not sensitive to the locale:
[:IDENT:]
The character is allowed to form part of a shell identifier, such
as a parameter name; this test respects the POSIX_IDENTIFIERS
option
[:IFS:]
The character is used as an input field separator, i.e. is contained in the
IFS
parameter
[:IFSSPACE:]
The character is an IFS white space character; see the documentation
for IFS
in
Parameters Used By The Shell.
[:INCOMPLETE:]
Matches a byte that starts an incomplete multibyte character.
Note that there may be a sequence of more than one bytes that
taken together form the prefix of a multibyte character. To
test for a potentially incomplete byte sequence, use the pattern
‘[[:INCOMPLETE:]]*
’. This will never match a sequence starting
with a valid multibyte character.
[:INVALID:]
Matches a byte that does not start a valid multibyte character. Note this may be a continuation byte of an incomplete multibyte character as any part of a multibyte string consisting of invalid and incomplete multibyte characters is treated as single bytes.
[:WORD:]
The character is treated as part of a word; this test is sensitive
to the value of the WORDCHARS
parameter
Note that the square brackets are additional
to those enclosing the whole set of characters, so to test for a
single alphanumeric character you need ‘[[:alnum:]]
’. Named
character sets can be used alongside other types,
e.g. ‘[[:alpha:]0-9]
’.
[^
...]
[!
...]
Like [
...]
, except that it matches any character which is
not in the given set.
<
[x]-
[y]>
Matches any number in the range x to y, inclusive.
Either of the numbers may be omitted to make the range open-ended;
hence ‘<->
’ matches any number. To match individual digits, the
[
...]
form is more efficient.
Be careful when using other wildcards adjacent to patterns of this form;
for example, <0-9>*
will actually match any number whatsoever at the
start of the string, since the ‘<0-9>
’ will match the first digit, and
the ‘*
’ will match any others. This is a trap for the unwary, but is
in fact an inevitable consequence of the rule that the longest possible
match always succeeds. Expressions such as ‘<0-9>[^[:digit:]]*
’ can be
used instead.
(
...)
Matches the enclosed pattern. This is used for grouping.
If the KSH_GLOB
option is set, then a
‘@
’, ‘*
’, ‘+
’, ‘?
’ or ‘!
’ immediately preceding
the ‘(
’ is treated specially, as detailed below. The option
SH_GLOB
prevents bare parentheses from being used in this way, though
the KSH_GLOB
option is still available.
Note that grouping cannot extend over multiple directories: it is an error
to have a ‘/
’ within a group (this only applies for patterns used in
filename generation). There is one exception: a group of the form
(
pat/)#
appearing as a complete path segment can
match a sequence of directories. For example, foo/(a*/)#bar
matches
foo/bar
, foo/any/bar
, foo/any/anyother/bar
, and so on.
|
yMatches either x or y.
This operator has lower precedence than any other.
The ‘|
’ character
must be within parentheses, to avoid interpretation as a pipeline.
The alternatives are tried in order from left to right.
^
x(Requires EXTENDED_GLOB
to be set.)
Matches anything except the pattern x.
This has a higher precedence than ‘/
’, so ‘^foo/bar
’
will search directories in ‘.
’ except ‘./foo
’
for a file named ‘bar
’.
~
y(Requires EXTENDED_GLOB
to be set.)
Match anything that matches the pattern x but does not match y.
This has lower precedence than any operator except ‘|
’, so
‘*/*~foo/bar
’ will search for all files in all directories in ‘.
’
and then exclude ‘foo/bar
’ if there was such a match.
Multiple patterns can be excluded by
‘foo~
bar~
baz’.
In the exclusion pattern (y), ‘/
’ and ‘.
’ are not treated
specially the way they usually are in globbing.
#
(Requires EXTENDED_GLOB
to be set.)
Matches zero or more occurrences of the pattern x.
This operator has high precedence; ‘12#
’ is equivalent to ‘1(2#)
’,
rather than ‘(12)#
’. It is an error for an unquoted ‘#
’ to follow
something which cannot be repeated; this includes an empty string, a
pattern already followed by ‘##
’, or parentheses when part of a
KSH_GLOB
pattern (for example, ‘!(
foo)#
’ is
invalid and must be replaced by
‘*(!(
foo))
’).
##
(Requires EXTENDED_GLOB
to be set.)
Matches one or more occurrences of the pattern x.
This operator has high precedence; ‘12##
’ is equivalent to ‘1(2##)
’,
rather than ‘(12)##
’. No more than two active ‘#
’ characters may
appear together. (Note the potential clash with glob qualifiers in the
form ‘1(2##)
’ which should therefore be avoided.)
If the KSH_GLOB
option is set, the effects of parentheses can be
modified by a preceding ‘@
’, ‘*
’, ‘+
’, ‘?
’ or ‘!
’.
This character need not be unquoted to have special effects,
but the ‘(
’ must be.
@(
...)
Match the pattern in the parentheses. (Like ‘(
...)
’.)
*(
...)
Match any number of occurrences. (Like ‘(
...)#
’,
except that recursive directory searching is not supported.)
+(
...)
Match at least one occurrence. (Like ‘(
...)##
’,
except that recursive directory searching is not supported.)
?(
...)
Match zero or one occurrence. (Like ‘(|
...)
’.)
!(
...)
Match anything but the expression in parentheses.
(Like ‘(^(
...))
’.)
The precedence of the operators given above is (highest) ‘^
’, ‘/
’,
‘~
’, ‘|
’ (lowest); the
remaining operators are simply treated from left to right as part of a
string, with ‘#
’ and ‘##
’ applying to the shortest possible
preceding unit (i.e. a character, ‘?
’, ‘[
...]
’,
‘<
...>
’, or a parenthesised expression). As mentioned
above, a ‘/
’ used as a directory separator may not appear inside
parentheses, while a ‘|
’ must do so; in patterns used in other contexts
than filename generation (for example, in case
statements and tests
within ‘[[
...]]
’), a ‘/
’ is not special; and ‘/
’ is also
not special after a ‘~
’ appearing outside parentheses in a filename
pattern.
There are various flags which affect any text to their right up to the
end of the enclosing group or to the end of the pattern; they require
the EXTENDED_GLOB
option. All take the form
(#
X)
where X may have one of the following
forms:
i
Case insensitive: upper or lower case characters in the pattern match upper or lower case characters.
l
Lower case characters in the pattern match upper or lower case characters; upper case characters in the pattern still only match upper case characters.
I
Case sensitive: locally negates the effect of i
or l
from
that point on.
b
¶Activate backreferences for parenthesised groups in the pattern;
this does not work in filename generation. When a pattern with a set of
active parentheses is matched, the strings matched by the groups are
stored in the array $match
, the indices of the beginning of the matched
parentheses in the array $mbegin
, and the indices of the end in the array
$mend
, with the first element of each array corresponding to the first
parenthesised group, and so on. These arrays are not otherwise special to
the shell. The indices use the same convention as does parameter
substitution, so that elements of $mend
and $mbegin
may be used in
subscripts; the KSH_ARRAYS
option is respected. Sets of globbing flags
are not considered parenthesised groups; only the first nine active
parentheses can be referenced.
For example,
foo="a_string_with_a_message" if [[ $foo = (a|an)_(#b)(*) ]]; then print ${foo[$mbegin[1],$mend[1]]} fi
prints ‘string_with_a_message
’.
Note that the first set of parentheses is before the
(#b)
and does not create a backreference.
Backreferences work with all forms of pattern matching other than filename
generation, but note that when performing matches on an entire array, such
as ${
array#
pattern}
, or a global substitution, such
as ${
param//
pat/
repl}
, only the data for the
last match remains available. In the case of global replacements this may
still be useful. See the example for the m
flag below.
The numbering of backreferences strictly follows the order of the opening
parentheses from left to right in the pattern string, although sets of
parentheses may be nested. There are special rules for parentheses followed
by ‘#
’ or ‘##
’. Only the last match of the parenthesis is
remembered: for example, in ‘[[ abab = (#b)([ab])# ]]
’, only the final
‘b
’ is stored in match[1]
. Thus extra parentheses may be necessary
to match the complete segment: for example, use
‘X((ab|cd)#)Y
’ to match
a whole string of either ‘ab
’ or ‘cd
’ between ‘X
’ and ‘Y
’,
using the value of $match[1]
rather than $match[2]
.
If the match fails none of the parameters is altered, so in some cases it
may be necessary to initialise them beforehand. If some of the
backreferences fail to match — which happens if they are in an alternate
branch which fails to match, or if they are followed by #
and matched
zero times — then the matched string is set to the empty string, and the
start and end indices are set to -1.
Pattern matching with backreferences is slightly slower than without.
B
Deactivate backreferences, negating the effect of the b
flag from that
point on.
c
N,
MThe flag (#c
N,
M)
can be used anywhere
that the #
or ##
operators can be used except in the expressions
‘(*/)#
’ and ‘(*/)##
’ in filename generation, where ‘/
’
has special meaning; it cannot be combined with other globbing flags and
a bad pattern error occurs if it is misplaced. It is equivalent to the
form {
N,
M}
in regular expressions. The previous
character or group is required to match between N and M times,
inclusive. The form (#c
N)
requires exactly N
matches; (#c,
M)
is equivalent to specifying N
as 0; (#c
N,)
specifies that there is no maximum
limit on the number of matches.
m
¶Set references to the match data for the entire string matched; this is
similar to backreferencing and does not work in filename generation. The
flag must be in effect at the end of the pattern, i.e. not local to a
group. The parameters $MATCH
, $MBEGIN
and $MEND
will be set to
the string matched and to the indices of the beginning and end of the
string, respectively. This is most useful in parameter substitutions, as
otherwise the string matched is obvious.
For example,
arr=(veldt jynx grimps waqf zho buck) print ${arr//(#m)[aeiou]/${(U)MATCH}}
forces all the matches (i.e. all vowels) into uppercase, printing
‘vEldt jynx grImps wAqf zhO bUck
’.
Unlike backreferences, there is no speed penalty for using match references, other than the extra substitutions required for the replacement strings in cases such as the example shown.
M
Deactivate the m
flag, hence no references to match data will be
created.
a
numApproximate matching: num errors are allowed in the string matched by the pattern. The rules for this are described in the next subsection.
s
, e
Unlike the other flags, these have only a local effect, and each must
appear on its own: ‘(#s)
’ and ‘(#e)
’ are the only valid forms.
The ‘(#s)
’ flag succeeds only at the start of the test string, and the
‘(#e)
’ flag succeeds only at the end of the test string; they
correspond to ‘^
’ and ‘$
’ in standard regular expressions. They
are useful for matching path segments in patterns other than those in
filename generation (where path segments are in any case treated
separately). For example, ‘*((#s)|/)test((#e)|/)*
’ matches
a path segment ‘test
’ in any of the following strings: test
,
test/at/start
, at/end/test
, in/test/middle
.
Another use is in parameter substitution; for example
‘${array/(#s)A*Z(#e)}
’ will remove only elements of an
array which
match the complete pattern ‘A*Z
’. There are other ways of performing
many operations of this type, however the combination of the substitution
operations ‘/
’ and ‘//
’ with the ‘(#s)
’ and ‘(#e)
’ flags
provides a single simple and memorable method.
Note that assertions of the form ‘(^(#s))
’ also work, i.e. match
anywhere except at the start of the string, although this actually means
‘anything except a zero-length portion at the start of the string’; you
need to use ‘(""~(#s))
’ to match a zero-length portion of the string
not at the start.
q
A ‘q
’ and everything up to the closing parenthesis of the globbing
flags are ignored by the pattern matching code. This is intended to
support the use of glob qualifiers, see below. The result is that
the pattern ‘(#b)(*).c(#q.)
’ can be used both for globbing
and for
matching against a string. In the former case, the ‘(#q.)
’ will be
treated as a glob qualifier and the ‘(#b)
’ will not be useful, while in
the latter case the ‘(#b)
’ is useful for backreferences and the
‘(#q.)
’ will be ignored. Note that colon modifiers in the glob
qualifiers are also not applied in ordinary pattern matching.
u
Respect the current locale in determining the presence of multibyte
characters in a pattern, provided the shell was compiled with
MULTIBYTE_SUPPORT
. This overrides the MULTIBYTE
option; the default behaviour is taken from the option. Compare U
.
(Mnemonic: typically multibyte characters are from Unicode in the UTF-8
encoding, although any extension of ASCII supported by the system
library may be used.)
U
All characters are considered to be a single byte long. The opposite
of u
. This overrides the MULTIBYTE
option.
For example, the test string fooxx
can be matched by the pattern
(#i
)FOOXX
, but not by (#l
)FOOXX
,
(#i
)FOO
(#I
)XX
or
((#i
)FOOX
)X
. The string
(#ia2
)readme
specifies case-insensitive matching of
readme
with up to two errors.
When using the ksh syntax for grouping both KSH_GLOB
and
EXTENDED_GLOB
must be set and the left parenthesis should be
preceded by @
. Note also that the flags do not affect letters
inside [
...]
groups, in other words (#i
)[a-z]
still matches only lowercase letters. Finally, note that when
examining whole paths case-insensitively every directory must be
searched for all files which match, so that a pattern of the form
(#i
)/foo/bar/...
is potentially slow.
When matching approximately, the shell keeps a count of the errors found,
which cannot exceed the number specified in the
(#a
num)
flags. Four types of error are recognised:
Different characters, as in fooxbar
and fooybar
.
Transposition of characters, as in banana
and abnana
.
A character missing in the target string, as with the pattern road
and
target string rod
.
An extra character appearing in the target string, as with stove
and strove
.
Thus, the pattern (#a3
)abcd
matches dcba
, with the
errors occurring by using the first rule twice and the second once,
grouping the string as [d][cb][a]
and [a][bc][d]
.
Non-literal parts of the pattern must match exactly, including characters
in character ranges: hence (#a1
)???
matches strings of
length four, by applying rule 4 to an empty part of the pattern, but not
strings of length two, since all the ?
must match. Other characters
which must match exactly are initial dots in filenames (unless the
GLOB_DOTS
option is set), and all slashes in filenames, so that
a/bc
is two errors from ab/c
(the slash cannot be transposed with
another character). Similarly, errors are counted separately for
non-contiguous strings in the pattern, so that (ab|cd
)ef
is two errors from aebf
.
When using exclusion via the ~
operator, approximate matching is
treated entirely separately for the excluded part and must be activated
separately. Thus, (#a1
)README~READ_ME
matches
READ.ME
but not READ_ME
, as the trailing READ_ME
is matched
without approximation. However,
(#a1
)README~(#a1
)READ_ME
does not match any pattern of the form READ
?ME
as all
such forms are now excluded.
Apart from exclusions, there is only one overall error count; however, the
maximum errors allowed may be altered locally, and this can be delimited by
grouping. For example,
(#a1
)cat
((#a0
)dog
)fox
allows one error in total, which may not occur in the dog
section, and
the pattern
(#a1
)cat
(#a0
)dog
(#a1
)fox
is equivalent. Note that the point at which an error is first found is the
crucial one for establishing whether to use approximation; for example,
(#a1)abc(#a0)xyz
will not match abcdxyz
, because the
error occurs at the ‘x
’, where approximation is turned off.
Entire path segments may be matched approximately, so that
‘(#a1)/foo/d/is/available/at/the/bar
’ allows one error in any path
segment. This is much less efficient than without the (#a1)
, however,
since every directory in the path must be scanned for a possible
approximate match. It is best to place the (#a1)
after any path
segments which are known to be correct.
A pathname component of the form ‘(
foo/)#
’
matches a path consisting of zero or more directories
matching the pattern foo.
As a shorthand, ‘**/
’ is equivalent to ‘(*/)#
’; note that this
therefore matches files in the current directory as well as
subdirectories.
Thus:
ls -ld -- (*/)#bar
or
ls -ld -- **/bar
does a recursive directory search for files named ‘bar
’ (potentially
including the file ‘bar
’ in the current directory). This form does not
follow symbolic links; the alternative form ‘***/
’ does, but is
otherwise identical. Neither of these can be combined with other forms of
globbing within the same path segment; in that case, the ‘*
’
operators revert to their usual effect.
Even shorter forms are available when the option GLOB_STAR_SHORT
is
set. In that case if no /
immediately follows a **
or ***
they are treated as if both a /
plus a further *
are present.
Hence:
setopt GLOBSTARSHORT ls -ld -- **.c
is equivalent to
ls -ld -- **/*.c
Patterns used for filename generation may end in a list of qualifiers enclosed in parentheses. The qualifiers specify which filenames that otherwise match the given pattern will be inserted in the argument list.
If the option BARE_GLOB_QUAL
is set, then a trailing set of parentheses
containing no ‘|
’ or ‘(
’ characters (or ‘~
’ if it is special)
is taken as a set of
glob qualifiers. A glob subexpression that would normally be taken as glob
qualifiers, for example ‘(^x)
’, can be forced to be treated as part of
the glob pattern by doubling the parentheses, in this case producing
‘((^x))
’.
If the option EXTENDED_GLOB
is set, a different syntax for glob
qualifiers is available, namely ‘(#q
x)
’
where x is any of the same
glob qualifiers used in the other format. The qualifiers must still appear
at the end of the pattern. However, with this syntax multiple glob
qualifiers may be chained together. They are treated as a logical AND of
the individual sets of flags. Also, as the syntax is unambiguous, the
expression will be treated as glob qualifiers just as long any parentheses
contained within it are balanced; appearance of ‘|
’, ‘(
’ or
‘~
’ does not negate the effect. Note that qualifiers will be
recognised in this form even if a bare glob qualifier exists at the end of
the pattern, for example ‘*(#q*)(.)
’ will recognise executable regular
files if both options are set; however, mixed syntax should probably be
avoided for the sake of clarity. Note that within conditions using the
‘[[
’ form the presence of a parenthesised expression
(#q
...)
at the end of a string indicates that globbing
should be performed; the expression may include glob qualifiers, but
it is also valid if it is simply (#q)
. This does
not apply to the right hand side of pattern match operators as the
syntax already has special significance.
A qualifier may be any one of the following:
/
directories
F
‘full’ (i.e. non-empty) directories. Note that the
opposite sense (^F
)
expands to empty directories
and all non-directories. Use (/^F
)
for
empty directories.
.
plain files
@
symbolic links
=
sockets
p
named pipes (FIFOs)
*
executable plain files (0100 or 0010 or 0001)
%
device files (character or block special)
%b
block special files
%c
character special files
r
owner-readable files (0400)
w
owner-writable files (0200)
x
owner-executable files (0100)
A
group-readable files (0040)
I
group-writable files (0020)
E
group-executable files (0010)
R
world-readable files (0004)
W
world-writable files (0002)
X
world-executable files (0001)
s
setuid files (04000)
S
setgid files (02000)
t
files with the sticky bit (01000)
f
specfiles with access rights matching spec. This spec may be a
octal number optionally preceded by a ‘=
’, a ‘+
’, or a
‘-
’. If none of these characters is given, the behavior is the
same as for ‘=
’. The octal number describes the mode bits to be
expected, if combined with a ‘=
’, the value given must match the
file-modes exactly, with a ‘+
’, at least the bits in the
given number must be set in the file-modes, and with a ‘-
’, the
bits in the number must not be set. Giving a ‘?
’ instead of a
octal digit anywhere in the number ensures that the corresponding bits
in the file-modes are not checked, this is only useful in combination
with ‘=
’.
If the qualifier ‘f
’ is followed by any other character anything
up to the next matching character (‘[
’, ‘{
’, and ‘<
’ match
‘]
’, ‘}
’, and ‘>
’ respectively, any other character
matches itself) is taken as a list of comma-separated
sub-specs. Each sub-spec may be either an octal number as
described above or a list of any of the characters ‘u
’, ‘g
’,
‘o
’, and ‘a
’, followed by a ‘=
’, a ‘+
’, or a
‘-
’, followed by a list of any of the characters ‘r
’, ‘w
’,
‘x
’, ‘s
’, and ‘t
’, or an octal digit. The first list of
characters specify which access rights are to be checked. If a ‘u
’
is given, those for the owner of the file are used, if a ‘g
’ is
given, those of the group are checked, a ‘o
’ means to test those
of other users, and the ‘a
’ says to test all three groups. The
‘=
’, ‘+
’, and ‘-
’ again says how the modes are to be
checked and have the same meaning as described for the first form
above. The second list of characters finally says which access rights
are to be expected: ‘r
’ for read access, ‘w
’ for write access,
‘x
’ for the right to execute the file (or to search a directory),
‘s
’ for the setuid and setgid bits, and ‘t
’ for the sticky
bit.
Thus, ‘*(f70?)
’ gives the files for which the owner has read,
write, and execute permission, and for which other group members have
no rights, independent of the permissions for other users. The pattern
‘*(f-100)
’ gives all files for which the owner does not have
execute permission, and ‘*(f:gu+w,o-rx:)
’ gives the files for which
the owner and the other members of the group have at least write
permission, and for which other users don’t have read or execute
permission.
e
string+
cmdThe string will be executed as shell code. The filename will be included in the list if and only if the code returns a zero status (usually the status of the last command).
In the first form, the first character after the ‘e
’
will be used as a separator and anything up to the next matching separator
will be taken as the string; ‘[
’, ‘{
’, and ‘<
’ match
‘]
’, ‘}
’, and ‘>
’, respectively, while any other character
matches itself. Note that expansions must be quoted in the string
to prevent them from being expanded before globbing is done.
string is then executed as shell code. The string globqual
is appended to the array zsh_eval_context
the duration of
execution.
During the execution of string the filename currently being tested is
available in the parameter REPLY
; the parameter may be altered to
a string to be inserted into the list instead of the original
filename. In addition, the parameter reply
may be set to an array or a
string, which overrides the value of REPLY
. If set to an array, the
latter is inserted into the command line word by word.
For example, suppose a directory contains a single file ‘lonely
’. Then
the expression ‘*(e:'reply=(${REPLY}{1,2})':)
’ will cause the words
‘lonely1
’ and ‘lonely2
’ to be inserted into the command line. Note
the quoting of string.
The form +
cmd has the same effect, but no delimiters appear
around cmd. Instead, cmd is taken as the longest sequence of
characters following the +
that are alphanumeric or underscore.
Typically cmd will be the name of a shell function that contains the
appropriate test. For example,
nt() { [[ $REPLY -nt $NTREF ]] } NTREF=reffile ls -ld -- *(+nt)
lists all files in the directory that have been modified more recently than
reffile
.
d
devfiles on the device dev
l
[-
|+
]ctfiles having a link count less than ct (-
), greater than
ct (+
), or equal to ct
U
files owned by the effective user ID
G
files owned by the effective group ID
u
idfiles owned by user ID id if that is a number. Otherwise,
id specifies a user name: the
character after the ‘u
’ will be taken as a separator and the string
between it and the next matching separator will be taken as a user name.
The starting separators ‘[
’, ‘{
’, and ‘<
’
match the final separators ‘]
’, ‘}
’, and ‘>
’, respectively;
any other character matches itself. The selected files are those
owned by this user. For example, ‘u:foo:
’ or ‘u[foo]
’ selects
files owned by user ‘foo
’.
g
idlike u
id but with group IDs or names
a
[Mwhms
][-
|+
]nfiles accessed exactly n days ago. Files accessed within the last
n days are selected using a negative value for n (-
n).
Files accessed more than n days ago are selected by a positive n
value (+
n). Optional unit specifiers ‘M
’, ‘w
’,
‘h
’, ‘m
’ or ‘s
’ (e.g. ‘ah5
’) cause the check to be
performed with months (of 30 days), weeks, hours, minutes or seconds
instead of days, respectively. An explicit ‘d
’ for days is also
allowed.
Any fractional part of the difference between the access time and the
current part in the appropriate units is ignored in the comparison. For
instance, ‘echo *(ah-5)
’ would echo files accessed within the last
five hours, while ‘echo *(ah+5)
’ would echo files accessed at least
six hours ago, as times strictly between five and six hours are treated
as five hours.
m
[Mwhms
][-
|+
]nlike the file access qualifier, except that it uses the file modification time.
c
[Mwhms
][-
|+
]nlike the file access qualifier, except that it uses the file inode change time.
L
[+
|-
]nfiles less than n bytes (-
), more than n bytes (+
), or
exactly n bytes in length.
If this flag is directly followed by a size specifier ‘k
’ (‘K
’),
‘m
’ (‘M
’), or ‘p
’ (‘P
’) (e.g. ‘Lk-50
’) the check is
performed with kilobytes, megabytes, or blocks (of 512 bytes) instead.
(On some systems additional specifiers are available for gigabytes,
‘g
’ or ‘G
’, and terabytes, ‘t
’ or ‘T
’.) If a size specifier
is used a file is regarded as "exactly" the size if the file size rounded up
to the next unit is equal to the test size. Hence ‘*(Lm1)
’
matches files from 1 byte up to 1 Megabyte inclusive. Note also that
the set of files "less than" the test size only includes files that would
not match the equality test; hence ‘*(Lm-1)
’ only matches
files of zero size.
^
negates all qualifiers following it
-
toggles between making the qualifiers work on symbolic links (the
default) and the files they point to, if any; any symbolic link for
whose target the ‘stat
’ system call fails (whatever the cause of the
failure) is treated as a file in its own right
M
T
appends a trailing qualifier mark to the filenames, analogous to the
LIST_TYPES
option, for the current pattern (overrides M
)
N
D
n
Y
nenables short-circuit mode: the pattern will expand to at most n filenames. If more than n matches exist, only the first n matches in directory traversal order will be considered.
Implies oN
when no o
c qualifier is used.
o
cspecifies how the names of the files should be sorted. The following values of c sort in the following ways:
n
By name.
L
By the size (length) of the files.
l
By number of links.
a
By time of last access, youngest first.
m
By time of last modification, youngest first.
c
By time of last inode change, youngest first.
d
By directories: files in subdirectories appear before
those in the current directory at each level of the search — this is best
combined with other criteria, for example ‘odon
’ to sort on names for
files within the same directory.
N
No sorting is performed.
e
string+
cmdSort by shell code (see below).
Note that the modifiers ^
and -
are used,
so ‘*(^-oL)
’ gives a list of all files sorted by file size in descending
order, following any symbolic links. Unless oN
is used, multiple order
specifiers may occur to resolve ties.
The default sorting is n
(by name) unless the Y
glob qualifier is used,
in which case it is N
(unsorted).
oe
and o+
are special cases; they are each followed by shell code,
delimited as for the e
glob qualifier and the +
glob qualifier
respectively (see above). The code is executed for each matched file with
the parameter REPLY
set to the name of the file on entry and
globsort
appended to zsh_eval_context
. The code
should modify the parameter REPLY
in some fashion. On return, the
value of the parameter is used instead of the file name as the string on
which to sort. Unlike other sort operators, oe
and o+
may be
repeated, but note that the maximum number of sort operators of any kind
that may appear in any glob expression is 12.
O
clike ‘o
’, but sorts in descending order; i.e. ‘*(^o
c)
’ is the
same as ‘*(O
c)
’ and ‘*(^O
c)
’ is the same as ‘*(o
c)
’; ‘Od
’
puts files in the current directory before those in subdirectories at each
level of the search.
[
beg[,
end]]
specifies which of the matched filenames should be included in the
returned list. The syntax is the same as for array
subscripts. beg and the optional end may be mathematical
expressions. As in parameter subscripting they may be negative to make
them count from the last match backward. E.g.: ‘*(-OL[1,3])
’
gives a list of the names of the three largest files.
P
stringThe string will be prepended to each glob match as a separate
word. string is delimited in the same way as arguments to the
e
glob qualifier described above. The qualifier can be repeated;
the words are prepended separately so that the resulting command
line contains the words in the same order they were given in the
list of glob qualifiers.
A typical use for this is to prepend an option before all occurrences
of a file name; for example, the pattern ‘*(P:-f:)
’ produces the
command line arguments ‘-f
file1 -f
file2 ...’
If the modifier ^
is active, then string will be appended
instead of prepended. Prepending and appending is done independently
so both can be used on the same glob expression; for example by writing
‘*(P:foo:^P:bar:^P:baz:)
’ which produces the command line arguments
‘foo
baz
file1 bar
...’
More than one of these lists can be combined, separated by commas. The
whole list matches if at least one of the sublists matches (they are
‘or’ed, the qualifiers in the sublists are ‘and’ed). Some qualifiers,
however, affect all matches generated, independent of the sublist in
which they are given. These are the qualifiers ‘M
’, ‘T
’,
‘N
’, ‘D
’, ‘n
’, ‘o
’, ‘O
’ and the subscripts given
in brackets (‘[
...]
’).
If a ‘:
’ appears in a qualifier list, the remainder of the expression in
parenthesis is interpreted as a modifier (see Modifiers
in History Expansion). Each modifier must be introduced by a
separate ‘:
’. Note also that the result after modification does not
have to be an existing file. The name of any existing file can be followed
by a modifier of the form ‘(:
...)
’
even if no actual filename generation
is performed, although note that the presence of the parentheses
causes the entire expression to be subjected to any global pattern matching
options such as NULL_GLOB
. Thus:
ls -ld -- *(-/)
lists all directories and symbolic links that point to directories, and
ls -ld -- *(-@)
lists all broken symbolic links, and
ls -ld -- *(%W)
lists all world-writable device files in the current directory, and
ls -ld -- *(W,X)
lists all files in the current directory that are world-writable or world-executable, and
print -rC1 /tmp/foo*(u0^@:t)
outputs the basename of all root-owned files beginning with the string
‘foo
’ in /tmp
, ignoring symlinks, and
ls -ld -- *.*~(lex|parse).[ch](^D^l1)
lists all files having a link count of one whose names contain a dot
(but not those starting with a dot, since GLOB_DOTS
is explicitly
switched off) except for lex.c
, lex.h
, parse.c
and parse.h
.
print -rC1 b*.pro(#q:s/pro/shmo/)(#q.:s/builtin/shmiltin/)
demonstrates how colon modifiers and other qualifiers may be chained
together. The ordinary qualifier ‘.
’ is applied first, then the colon
modifiers in order from left to right. So if EXTENDED_GLOB
is set and
the base pattern matches the regular file builtin.pro
, the shell will
print ‘shmiltin.shmo
’.
A parameter has a name, a value, and a number of attributes.
A name may be any sequence of alphanumeric
characters and underscores, or the single characters
‘*
’, ‘@
’, ‘#
’, ‘?
’, ‘-
’, ‘$
’, or ‘!
’.
A parameter whose name begins with an alphanumeric or underscore is also
referred to as a variable.
The attributes of a parameter determine the type of its value, often referred to as the parameter type or variable type, and also control other processing that may be applied to the value when it is referenced. The value type may be a scalar (a string, an integer, or a floating point number), an array (indexed numerically), or an associative array (an unordered set of name-value pairs, indexed by name, also referred to as a hash).
Named scalar parameters may have the exported, -x
, attribute, to
copy them into the process environment, which is then passed from the
shell to any new processes that it starts. Exported parameters are called
environment variables. The shell also imports environment variables
at startup time and automatically marks the corresponding parameters as
exported. Some environment variables are not imported for reasons of
security or because they would interfere with the correct operation of
other shell features.
Parameters may also be special, that is, they have a predetermined meaning to the shell. Special parameters cannot have their type changed or their readonly attribute turned off, and if a special parameter is unset, then later recreated, the special properties will be retained.
To declare the type of a parameter, or to assign a string or numeric value
to a scalar parameter, use the typeset
builtin.
The value of a scalar parameter may also be assigned by writing:
name
=
value
In scalar assignment, value is expanded as a single string, in
which the elements of arrays are joined together; filename expansion is
not performed unless the option GLOB_ASSIGN
is set.
When the integer attribute, -i
, or a floating point attribute, -E
or -F
, is set for name, the value is subject to arithmetic
evaluation. Furthermore, by replacing ‘=
’ with ‘+=
’, a parameter
can be incremented or appended to. See Array Parameters and
Arithmetic Evaluation
for additional forms of assignment.
Note that assignment may implicitly change the attributes of a parameter.
For example, assigning a number to a variable in arithmetic evaluation may
change its type to integer or float, and with GLOB_ASSIGN
assigning a
pattern to a variable may change its type to an array.
To reference the value of a parameter, write ‘$
name’ or
‘${
name}
’. See
Parameter Expansion
for complete details. That section also explains the effect
of the difference between scalar and array assignment on parameter
expansion.
To assign an array value, write one of:
set -A
name value ...
name
=(
value ...)
name
=(
[
key]=
value ...)
If no parameter name exists, an ordinary array parameter is created. If the parameter name exists and is a scalar, it is replaced by a new array.
In the third form, key is an expression that will be evaluated in
arithmetic context (in its simplest form, an integer) that gives the
index of the element to be assigned with value. In this form any
elements not explicitly mentioned that come before the largest index to
which a value is assigned are assigned an empty string. The indices
may be in any order. Note that this syntax is strict: [
and ]=
must
not be quoted, and key may not consist of the unquoted string
]=
, but is otherwise treated as a simple string. The enhanced forms
of subscript expression that may be used when directly subscripting a
variable name, described in the section ‘Array Subscripts’ below, are not
available.
The syntaxes with and without the explicit key may be mixed. An implicit key is deduced by incrementing the index from the previously assigned element. Note that it is not treated as an error if latter assignments in this form overwrite earlier assignments.
For example, assuming the option KSH_ARRAYS
is not set, the following:
array=(one [3]=three four)
causes the array variable array
to contain four elements one
,
an empty string, three
and four
, in that order.
In the forms where only value is specified, full command line expansion is performed.
In the [
key]=
value form,
both key and value undergo all forms of expansion
allowed for single word shell expansions (this does not include filename
generation); these are as performed by the parameter expansion flag
(e)
as described in
Parameter Expansion.
Nested parentheses may surround value and are included as part of the
value, which is joined into a plain string; this differs from ksh which
allows the values themselves to be arrays. A future version of zsh may
support that. To cause the brackets to be interpreted as a character
class for filename generation, and therefore to treat the resulting list
of files as a set of values, quote the equal sign using any form of quoting.
Example:
name
=(
[a-z]'='*)
To append to an array without changing the existing values, use one of the following:
name
+=(
value ...)
name
+=(
[
key]=
value ...)
In the second form key may specify an existing index as well as an
index off the end of the old array; any existing value is overwritten by
value. Also, it is possible to use [
key]+=
value
to append to the existing value at that index.
Within the parentheses on the right hand side of either form of the assignment, newlines and semicolons are treated the same as white space, separating individual values. Any consecutive sequence of such characters has the same effect.
Ordinary array parameters may also be explicitly declared with:
typeset -a
name
Associative arrays must be declared before assignment, by using:
typeset -A
name
When name refers to an associative array, the list in an assignment is interpreted as alternating keys and values:
set -A
name key value ...
name
=(
key value ...)
name
=(
[
key]=
value ...)
Note that only one of the two syntaxes above may be used in any given assignment; the forms may not be mixed. This is unlike the case of numerically indexed arrays.
Every key must have a value in this case. Note that this assigns to the entire array, deleting any elements that do not appear in the list. The append syntax may also be used with an associative array:
name
+=(
key value ...)
name
+=(
[
key]=
value ...)
This adds a new key/value pair if the key is not already present, and
replaces the value for the existing key if it is. In the second
form it is also possible to use [
key]+=
value to
append to the existing value at that key. Expansion is performed
identically to the corresponding forms for normal arrays, as
described above.
To create an empty array (including associative arrays), use one of:
set -A
name
name
=()
Individual elements of an array may be selected using a subscript. A
subscript of the form ‘[
exp]
’ selects the single element
exp, where exp is an arithmetic expression which will be subject
to arithmetic expansion as if it were surrounded by
‘$((
...))
’. The elements are numbered
beginning with 1, unless the KSH_ARRAYS
option is set in which case
they are numbered from zero.
Subscripts may be used inside braces used to delimit a parameter name, thus
‘${foo[2]}
’ is equivalent to ‘$foo[2]
’. If the KSH_ARRAYS
option is set, the braced form is the only one that works, as bracketed
expressions otherwise are not treated as subscripts.
If the KSH_ARRAYS
option is not set, then by default accesses to
an array element with a subscript that evaluates to zero return an
empty string, while an attempt to write such an element is treated as
an error. For backward compatibility the KSH_ZERO_SUBSCRIPT
option can be set to cause subscript values 0 and 1 to be equivalent; see
the description of the option in Description of Options.
The same subscripting syntax is used for associative arrays, except that no arithmetic expansion is applied to exp. However, the parsing rules for arithmetic expressions still apply, which affects the way that certain special characters must be protected from interpretation. See Subscript Parsing below for details.
A subscript of the form ‘[*]
’ or ‘[@]
’ evaluates to all elements
of an array; there is no difference between the two except when they
appear within double quotes.
‘"$foo[*]"
’ evaluates to ‘"$foo[1] $foo[2]
..."
’, whereas
‘"$foo[@]"
’ evaluates to ‘"$foo[1]" "$foo[2]"
...’. For
associative arrays, ‘[*]
’ or ‘[@]
’ evaluate to all the values,
in no particular order. Note that this does not substitute
the keys; see the documentation for the ‘k
’ flag under
Parameter Expansion
for complete details.
When an array parameter is referenced as ‘$
name’ (with no
subscript) it evaluates to ‘$
name[*]
’, unless the KSH_ARRAYS
option is set in which case it evaluates to ‘${
name[0]}
’ (for
an associative array, this means the value of the key ‘0
’, which may
not exist even if there are values for other keys).
A subscript of the form ‘[
exp1,
exp2]
’
selects all elements in the range exp1 to exp2,
inclusive. (Associative arrays are unordered, and so do not support
ranges.) If one of the subscripts evaluates to a negative number,
say -
n, then the nth element from the end
of the array is used. Thus ‘$foo[-3]
’ is the third element
from the end of the array foo
, and
‘$foo[1,-1]
’ is the same as ‘$foo[*]
’.
Subscripting may also be performed on non-array values, in which
case the subscripts specify a substring to be extracted.
For example, if FOO
is set to ‘foobar
’, then
‘echo $FOO[2,5]
’ prints ‘ooba
’. Note that
some forms of subscripting described below perform pattern matching,
and in that case the substring extends from the start of the match
of the first subscript to the end of the match of the second
subscript. For example,
string="abcdefghijklm" print ${string[(r)d?,(r)h?]}
prints ‘defghi
’. This is an obvious generalisation of the
rule for single-character matches. For a single subscript,
only a single character is referenced (not the range of characters
covered by the match).
Note that in substring operations the second subscript is handled
differently by the r
and R
subscript flags: the former takes the
shortest match as the length and the latter the longest match. Hence
in the former case a *
at the end is redundant while in
the latter case it matches the whole remainder of the string. This
does not affect the result of the single subscript case as here the
length of the match is irrelevant.
A subscript may be used on the left side of an assignment like so:
name
[
exp]=
value
In this form of assignment the element or range specified by exp is replaced by the expression on the right side. An array (but not an associative array) may be created by assignment to a range or element. Arrays do not nest, so assigning a parenthesized list of values to an element or range changes the number of elements in the array, shifting the other elements to accommodate the new values. (This is not supported for associative arrays.)
This syntax also works as an argument to the typeset
command:
typeset
"
name[
exp]"=
value
The value may not be a parenthesized list in this case; only
single-element assignments may be made with typeset
. Note that quotes
are necessary in this case to prevent the brackets from being interpreted
as filename generation operators. The noglob
precommand modifier
could be used instead.
To delete an element of an ordinary array, assign ‘()
’ to
that element. To delete an element of an associative array, use the
unset
command:
unset
"
name[
exp]"
If the opening bracket, or the comma in a range, in any subscript
expression is directly followed by an opening parenthesis, the string up
to the matching closing one is considered to be a list of flags, as in
‘name[(
flags)
exp]
’.
The flags s
, n
and b
take an argument; the delimiter
is shown below as ‘:
’, but any character, or the matching pairs
‘(
...)
’, ‘{
...}
’, ‘[
...]
’, or
‘<
...>
’, may be used, but note that ‘<
...>
’ can only be
used if the subscript is inside a double quoted expression or a
parameter substitution enclosed in braces as otherwise the expression is
interpreted as a redirection.
The flags currently understood are:
w
If the parameter subscripted is a scalar then this flag makes
subscripting work on words instead of characters. The default word
separator is whitespace. When combined with the i
or I
flag,
the effect is to produce the index of the first character of the
first/last word which matches the given pattern; note that a failed
match in this case always yields 0.
s:
string:
This gives the string that separates words (for use with the
w
flag). The delimiter character :
is arbitrary; see above.
p
Recognize the same escape sequences as the print
builtin in
the string argument of a subsequent ‘s
’ flag.
f
If the parameter subscripted is a scalar then this flag makes
subscripting work on lines instead of characters, i.e. with elements
separated by newlines. This is a shorthand for ‘pws:\n:
’.
r
Reverse subscripting: if this flag is given, the exp is taken as a
pattern and the result is the first matching array element, substring or
word (if the parameter is an array, if it is a scalar, or if it is a
scalar and the ‘w
’ flag is given, respectively). The subscript used
is the number of the matching element, so that pairs of subscripts such as
‘$foo[(r)??,3]
’ and ‘$foo[(r)??,(r)f*]
’ are
possible if the parameter is not an associative array. If the
parameter is an associative array, only the value part of each pair is
compared to the pattern, and the result is that value.
If a search through an ordinary array failed, the search sets the
subscript to one past the end of the array, and hence
${array[(r)
pattern]}
will substitute the empty string. Thus the
success of a search can be tested by using the (i)
flag, for
example (assuming the option KSH_ARRAYS
is not in effect):
[[ ${array[(i)pattern]} -le ${#array} ]]
If KSH_ARRAYS
is in effect, the -le
should be replaced by -lt
.
R
Like ‘r
’, but gives the last match. For associative arrays, gives
all possible matches. May be used for assigning to ordinary array
elements, but not for assigning to associative arrays. On failure, for
normal arrays this has the effect of returning the element corresponding to
subscript 0; this is empty unless one of the options KSH_ARRAYS
or
KSH_ZERO_SUBSCRIPT
is in effect.
Note that in subscripts with both ‘r
’ and ‘R
’ pattern characters
are active even if they were substituted for a parameter (regardless of the
setting of GLOB_SUBST
which controls this feature in normal pattern
matching). The flag ‘e
’ can be added to inhibit pattern matching. As
this flag does not inhibit other forms of substitution, care is still
required; using a parameter to hold the key has the desired effect:
key2='original key' print ${array[(Re)$key2]}
i
Like ‘r
’, but gives the index of the match instead; this may not be
combined with a second argument. On the left side of an assignment,
behaves like ‘r
’. For associative arrays, the key part of each pair
is compared to the pattern, and the first matching key found is the
result. On failure substitutes the length of the array plus one, as
discussed under the description of ‘r
’, or the empty string for an
associative array.
Note: Although ‘i
’ may be applied to a scalar substitution to find
the offset of a substring, the results are likely to be misleading when
searching within substitutions that yield an empty string, or when
searching for the empty substring.
I
Like ‘i
’, but gives the index of the last match, or all possible
matching keys in an associative array. On failure substitutes 0, or
the empty string for an associative array. This flag is best when
testing for values or keys that do not exist.
Note: If the option KSH_ARRAYS
is in effect and no match is found, the
result is indistinguishable from the case when the first element of the array
matches.
k
If used in a subscript on an associative array, this flag causes the keys
to be interpreted as patterns, and returns the value for the first key
found where exp is matched by the key. Note this could be any
such key as no ordering of associative arrays is defined.
This flag does not work on the left side of an assignment to an associative
array element. If used on another type of parameter, this behaves like ‘r
’.
K
On an associative array this is like ‘k
’ but returns all values where
exp is matched by the keys. On other types of parameters this has
the same effect as ‘R
’.
n:
expr:
If combined with ‘r
’, ‘R
’, ‘i
’ or ‘I
’, makes them give
the nth or nth last match (if expr evaluates to
n). This flag is ignored when the array is associative.
The delimiter character :
is arbitrary; see above.
b:
expr:
If combined with ‘r
’, ‘R
’, ‘i
’ or ‘I
’, makes them begin
at the nth or nth last element, word, or character (if expr
evaluates to n). This flag is ignored when the array is associative.
The delimiter character :
is arbitrary; see above.
e
This flag causes any pattern matching that would be performed on the
subscript to use plain string matching instead. Hence
‘${array[(re)*]}
’ matches only the array element whose value is *
.
Note that other forms of substitution such as parameter substitution are
not inhibited.
This flag can also be used to force *
or @
to be interpreted as
a single key rather than as a reference to all values. It may be used
for either purpose on the left side of an assignment.
See Parameter Expansion Flags (Parameter Expansion) for additional ways to manipulate the results of array subscripting.
This discussion applies mainly to associative array key strings and to
patterns used for reverse subscripting (the ‘r
’, ‘R
’, ‘i
’,
etc. flags), but it may also affect parameter substitutions that appear
as part of an arithmetic expression in an ordinary subscript.
To avoid subscript parsing limitations in assignments to associative array elements, use the append syntax:
aa+=('key with "*strange*" characters' 'value string')
The basic rule to remember when writing a subscript expression is that all
text between the opening ‘[
’ and the closing ‘]
’ is interpreted
as if it were in double quotes (Quoting). However, unlike double quotes which normally cannot nest, subscript
expressions may appear inside double-quoted strings or inside other
subscript expressions (or both!), so the rules have two important
differences.
The first difference is that brackets (‘[
’ and ‘]
’) must appear as
balanced pairs in a subscript expression unless they are preceded by a
backslash (‘\
’). Therefore, within a subscript expression (and unlike
true double-quoting) the sequence ‘\[
’ becomes ‘[
’, and similarly
‘\]
’ becomes ‘]
’. This applies even in cases where a backslash is
not normally required; for example, the pattern ‘[^[]
’ (to match any
character other than an open bracket) should be written ‘[^\[]
’ in a
reverse-subscript pattern. However, note that ‘\[^\[\]
’ and even
‘\[^[]
’ mean the same thing, because backslashes are always
stripped when they appear before brackets!
The same rule applies to parentheses (‘(
’ and ‘)
’) and
braces (‘{
’ and ‘}
’): they must appear either in balanced pairs or
preceded by a backslash, and backslashes that protect parentheses or
braces are removed during parsing. This is because parameter expansions
may be surrounded by balanced braces, and subscript flags are introduced by
balanced parentheses.
The second difference is that a double-quote (‘"
’) may appear as part
of a subscript expression without being preceded by a backslash, and
therefore that the two characters ‘\"
’ remain as two characters in the
subscript (in true double-quoting, ‘\"
’ becomes ‘"
’). However,
because of the standard shell quoting rules, any double-quotes that appear
must occur in balanced pairs unless preceded by a backslash. This makes
it more difficult to write a subscript expression that contains an odd
number of double-quote characters, but the reason for this difference is
so that when a subscript expression appears inside true double-quotes, one
can still write ‘\"
’ (rather than ‘\\\"
’) for ‘"
’.
To use an odd number of double quotes as a key in an assignment, use the
typeset
builtin and an enclosing pair of double quotes; to refer to
the value of that key, again use double quotes:
typeset -A aa typeset "aa[one\"two\"three\"quotes]"=QQQ print "$aa[one\"two\"three\"quotes]"
It is important to note that the quoting rules do not change when a parameter expansion with a subscript is nested inside another subscript expression. That is, it is not necessary to use additional backslashes within the inner subscript expression; they are removed only once, from the innermost subscript outwards. Parameters are also expanded from the innermost subscript first, as each expansion is encountered left to right in the outer expression.
A further complication arises from a way in which subscript parsing is
not different from double quote parsing. As in true double-quoting,
the sequences ‘\*
’, and ‘\@
’ remain as two characters when they
appear in a subscript expression. To use a literal ‘*
’ or ‘@
’ as
an associative array key, the ‘e
’ flag must be used:
typeset -A aa aa[(e)*]=star print $aa[(e)*]
A last detail must be considered when reverse subscripting is performed.
Parameters appearing in the subscript expression are first expanded and
then the complete expression is interpreted as a pattern. This has two
effects: first, parameters behave as if GLOB_SUBST
were on (and it
cannot be turned off); second, backslashes are interpreted twice, once
when parsing the array subscript and again when parsing the pattern. In a
reverse subscript, it’s necessary to use four backslashes to cause a
single backslash to match literally in the pattern. For complex patterns,
it is often easiest to assign the desired pattern to a parameter and then
refer to that parameter in the subscript, because then the backslashes,
brackets, parentheses, etc., are seen only when the complete expression is
converted to a pattern. To match the value of a parameter literally in a
reverse subscript, rather than as a pattern,
use ‘${(q
)
name}
’ (Parameter Expansion) to quote the expanded value.
Note that the ‘k
’ and ‘K
’ flags are reverse subscripting for an
ordinary array, but are not reverse subscripting for an associative
array! (For an associative array, the keys in the array itself are
interpreted as patterns by those flags; the subscript is a plain string
in that case.)
One final note, not directly related to subscripting: the numeric names
of positional parameters (Positional Parameters) are parsed specially, so for example ‘$2foo
’ is equivalent to
‘${2}foo
’. Therefore, to use subscript syntax to extract a substring
from a positional parameter, the expansion must be surrounded by braces;
for example, ‘${2[3,5]}
’ evaluates to the third through fifth
characters of the second positional parameter, but ‘$2[3,5]
’ is the
entire second parameter concatenated with the filename generation pattern
‘[3,5]
’.
The positional parameters provide access to the command-line arguments
of a shell function, shell script, or the shell itself; see
Invocation, and also Functions.
The parameter n, where n is a number,
is the nth positional parameter.
The parameter ‘$0
’ is a special case, see
Parameters Set By The Shell.
The parameters *
, @
and argv
are
arrays containing all the positional parameters;
thus ‘$argv[
n]
’, etc., is equivalent to simply ‘$
n’.
Note that the options KSH_ARRAYS
or KSH_ZERO_SUBSCRIPT
apply
to these arrays as well, so with either of those options set,
‘${argv[0]}
’ is equivalent to ‘$1
’ and so on.
Positional parameters may be changed after the shell or function starts by
using the set
builtin, by assigning to the argv
array, or by direct
assignment of the form ‘n=
value’ where n is the number of
the positional parameter to be changed. This also creates (with empty
values) any of the positions from 1 to n that do not already have
values. Note that, because the positional parameters form an array, an
array assignment of the form ‘n=(
value ...)
’ is
allowed, and has the effect of shifting all the values at positions greater
than n by as many positions as necessary to accommodate the new values.
Shell function executions delimit scopes for shell parameters.
(Parameters are dynamically scoped.) The typeset
builtin, and its
alternative forms declare
, integer
, local
and readonly
(but not export
), can be used to declare a parameter as being local
to the innermost scope.
When a parameter is read or assigned to, the
innermost existing parameter of that name is used. (That is, the
local parameter hides any less-local parameter.) However, assigning
to a non-existent parameter, or declaring a new parameter with export
,
causes it to be created in the outermost scope.
Local parameters disappear when their scope ends.
unset
can be used to delete a parameter while it is still in scope;
any outer parameter of the same name remains hidden.
Special parameters may also be made local; they retain their special
attributes unless either the existing or the newly-created parameter
has the -h
(hide) attribute. This may have unexpected effects:
there is no default value, so if there is no assignment at the
point the variable is made local, it will be set to an empty value (or zero
in the case of integers).
The following:
typeset PATH=/new/directory:$PATH
is valid for temporarily allowing the shell or programmes called from it to
find the programs in /new/directory
inside a function.
Note that the restriction in older versions of zsh that local parameters were never exported has been removed.
In the parameter lists that follow, the mark ‘<S>’ indicates that the
parameter is special. ‘<Z>’ indicates that the parameter does not exist
when the shell initializes in sh
or ksh
emulation mode.
The parameters ‘!
’, ‘#
’, ‘*
’, ‘-
’, ‘?
’, ‘@
’,
‘$
’, ‘ARGC
’, ‘HISTCMD
’, ‘LINENO
’, ‘PPID
’,
‘status
’, ‘TTYIDLE
’, ‘zsh_eval_context
’,
‘ZSH_EVAL_CONTEXT
’, and ‘ZSH_SUBSHELL
’ are read-only and thus
cannot be restored by the user, so they are not output by
‘typeset -p
’. This also applies to many read-only parameters loaded
from modules.
The following parameters are automatically set by the shell:
!
<S> ¶The process ID of the last command started in the background with &
,
put into the background with the bg
builtin, or spawned with coproc
.
#
<S> ¶The number of positional parameters in decimal. Note that some confusion
may occur with the syntax $#
param which substitutes the length of
param. Use ${#}
to resolve ambiguities. In particular, the
sequence ‘$#-
...’ in an arithmetic expression is interpreted as
the length of the parameter -
, q.v.
ARGC
<S> <Z> ¶Same as #
.
$
<S> ¶The process ID of this shell, set when the shell initializes. Processes
forked from the shell without executing a new program, such as command
substitutions and commands grouped with (
...)
,
are subshells that duplicate the current shell, and thus substitute the
same value for $$
as their parent shell.
-
<S> ¶Flags supplied to the shell on invocation or by the set
or setopt
commands.
*
<S> ¶An array containing the positional parameters.
argv
<S> <Z> ¶Same as *
. Assigning to argv
changes the local positional
parameters, but argv
is not itself a local parameter.
Deleting argv
with unset
in any function deletes it everywhere,
although only the innermost positional parameter array is deleted (so
*
and @
in other scopes are not affected).
@
<S> ¶Same as argv[@]
, even when argv
is not set.
?
<S> ¶The exit status returned by the last command.
0
<S> ¶The name used to invoke the current shell, or as set by the -c
command
line option upon invocation. If the FUNCTION_ARGZERO
option is set,
$0
is set upon entry to a shell function to the name of the function,
and upon entry to a sourced script to the name of the script, and reset to
its previous value when the function or script returns.
status
<S> <Z> ¶Same as ?
.
pipestatus
<S> <Z> ¶An array containing the exit statuses returned by all commands in the last pipeline.
_
<S> ¶The last argument of the previous command. Also, this parameter is set in the environment of every command executed to the full pathname of the command.
CPUTYPE
¶The machine type (microprocessor class or machine model), as determined at run time.
EGID
<S> ¶The effective group ID of the shell process. If you have sufficient
privileges, you may change the effective group ID of the shell
process by assigning to this parameter. Also (assuming sufficient
privileges), you may start a single command with a different
effective group ID by ‘(EGID=
gid; command)
’
If this is made local, it is not implicitly set to 0, but may be explicitly set locally.
EUID
<S> ¶The effective user ID of the shell process. If you have sufficient
privileges, you may change the effective user ID of the shell process
by assigning to this parameter. Also (assuming sufficient privileges),
you may start a single command with a different
effective user ID by ‘(EUID=
uid; command)
’
If this is made local, it is not implicitly set to 0, but may be explicitly set locally.
ERRNO
<S> ¶The value of errno
(see errno(3))
as set by the most recently failed system call.
This value is system dependent and is intended for debugging
purposes. It is also useful with the zsh/system
module which
allows the number to be turned into a name or message.
To use this parameter, it must first be assigned a value (typically 0 (zero)). It is initially unset for scripting compatibility.
FUNCNEST
<S> ¶Integer. If greater than or equal to zero, the maximum nesting depth of shell functions. When it is exceeded, an error is raised at the point where a function is called. The default value is determined when the shell is configured, but is typically 500. Increasing the value increases the danger of a runaway function recursion causing the shell to crash. Setting a negative value turns off the check.
GID
<S> ¶The real group ID of the shell process. If you have sufficient privileges,
you may change the group ID of the shell process by assigning to this
parameter. Also (assuming sufficient privileges), you may start a single
command under a different
group ID by ‘(GID=
gid; command)
’
If this is made local, it is not implicitly set to 0, but may be explicitly set locally.
HISTCMD
¶The current history event number in an interactive shell, in other
words the event number for the command that caused $HISTCMD
to be read. If the current history event modifies the history,
HISTCMD
changes to the new maximum history event number.
HOST
¶The current hostname.
LINENO
<S> ¶The line number of the current line within the current script, sourced
file, or shell function being executed, whichever was started most
recently. Note that in the case of shell functions the line
number refers to the function as it appeared in the original definition,
not necessarily as displayed by the functions
builtin.
LOGNAME
¶If the corresponding variable is not set in the environment of the
shell, it is initialized to the login name corresponding to the
current login session. This parameter is exported by default but
this can be disabled using the typeset
builtin. The value
is set to the string returned by the getlogin(3) system call
if that is available.
MACHTYPE
¶The machine type (microprocessor class or machine model), as determined at compile time.
OLDPWD
¶The previous working directory. This is set when the shell initializes and whenever the directory changes.
OPTARG
<S> ¶The value of the last option argument processed by the getopts
command.
OPTIND
<S> ¶The index of the last option argument processed by the getopts
command.
OSTYPE
¶The operating system, as determined at compile time.
PPID
<S> ¶The process ID of the parent of the shell, set when the shell initializes.
As with $$
, the value does not change in subshells created as a
duplicate of the current shell.
PWD
¶The present working directory. This is set when the shell initializes and whenever the directory changes.
RANDOM
<S> ¶A pseudo-random integer from 0 to 32767, newly generated each time
this parameter is referenced. The random number generator
can be seeded by assigning a numeric value to RANDOM
.
The values of RANDOM
form an intentionally-repeatable pseudo-random
sequence; subshells that reference RANDOM
will result
in identical pseudo-random values unless the value of RANDOM
is
referenced or seeded in the parent shell in between subshell invocations.
SECONDS
<S> ¶The number of seconds since shell invocation. If this parameter is assigned a value, then the value returned upon reference will be the value that was assigned plus the number of seconds since the assignment.
Unlike other special parameters, the type of the SECONDS
parameter can
be changed using the typeset
command. The type may be changed only
to one of the floating point types or back to integer. For example,
‘typeset -F SECONDS
’
causes the value to be reported as a floating point number. The
value is available to microsecond accuracy, although the shell may
show more or fewer digits depending on the use of typeset
. See
the documentation for the builtin typeset
in
Shell Builtin Commands for more details.
SHLVL
<S> ¶Incremented by one each time a new shell is started.
signals
¶An array containing the names of the signals. Note that with
the standard zsh numbering of array indices, where the first element
has index 1, the signals are offset by 1 from the signal number
used by the operating system. For example, on typical Unix-like systems
HUP
is signal number 1, but is referred to as $signals[2]
. This
is because of EXIT
at position 1 in the array, which is used
internally by zsh but is not known to the operating system.
TRY_BLOCK_ERROR
<S> ¶In an always
block, indicates whether the preceding list of code
caused an error. The value is 1 to indicate an error, 0 otherwise.
It may be reset, clearing the error condition. See
Complex Commands
TRY_BLOCK_INTERRUPT
<S> ¶This variable works in a similar way to TRY_BLOCK_ERROR
, but
represents the status of an interrupt from the signal SIGINT, which
typically comes from the keyboard when the user types ^C
. If set to
0, any such interrupt will be reset; otherwise, the interrupt is
propagated after the always
block.
Note that it is possible that an interrupt arrives during the execution
of the always
block; this interrupt is also propagated.
TTY
¶The name of the tty associated with the shell, if any.
TTYIDLE
<S> ¶The idle time of the tty associated with the shell in seconds or -1 if there is no such tty.
UID
<S> ¶The real user ID of the shell process. If you have sufficient privileges,
you may change the user ID of the shell by assigning to this parameter.
Also (assuming sufficient privileges), you may start a single command
under a different
user ID by ‘(UID=
uid; command)
’
If this is made local, it is not implicitly set to 0, but may be explicitly set locally.
USERNAME
<S> ¶The username corresponding to the real user ID of the shell process. If you
have sufficient privileges, you may change the username (and also the
user ID and group ID) of the shell by assigning to this parameter.
Also (assuming sufficient privileges), you may start a single command
under a different username (and user ID and group ID)
by ‘(USERNAME=
username; command)
’
VENDOR
¶The vendor, as determined at compile time.
zsh_eval_context
<S> <Z> (ZSH_EVAL_CONTEXT
<S>) ¶An array (colon-separated list) indicating the context of shell code that is being run. Each time a piece of shell code that is stored within the shell is executed a string is temporarily appended to the array to indicate the type of operation that is being performed. Read in order the array gives an indication of the stack of operations being performed with the most immediate context last.
Note that the variable does not give information on syntactic context such
as pipelines or subshells. Use $ZSH_SUBSHELL
to detect subshells.
The context is one of the following:
cmdarg
Code specified by the -c
option to the command line that invoked
the shell.
cmdsubst
Command substitution using the `
...`
or
$(
...)
construct.
equalsubst
File substitution using the =(
...)
construct.
eval
Code executed by the eval
builtin.
evalautofunc
Code executed with the KSH_AUTOLOAD
mechanism in order to define
an autoloaded function.
fc
Code from the shell history executed by the -e
option to the fc
builtin.
file
Lines of code being read directly from a file, for example by
the source
builtin.
filecode
Lines of code being read from a .zwc
file instead of directly
from the source file.
globqual
Code executed by the e
or +
glob qualifier.
globsort
Code executed to order files by the o
glob qualifier.
insubst
File substitution using the <(
...)
construct.
loadautofunc
Code read directly from a file to define an autoloaded function.
outsubst
File substitution using the >(
...)
construct.
sched
Code executed by the sched
builtin.
shfunc
A shell function.
stty
Code passed to stty
by the STTY
environment variable.
Normally this is passed directly to the system’s stty
command,
so this value is unlikely to be seen in practice.
style
Code executed as part of a style retrieved by the zstyle
builtin
from the zsh/zutil
module.
toplevel
The highest execution level of a script or interactive shell.
trap
Code executed as a trap defined by the trap
builtin. Traps
defined as functions have the context shfunc
. As traps are
asynchronous they may have a different hierarchy from other
code.
zpty
Code executed by the zpty
builtin from the zsh/zpty
module.
zregexparse-guard
Code executed as a guard by the zregexparse
command from the
zsh/zutil
module.
zregexparse-action
Code executed as an action by the zregexparse
command from the
zsh/zutil
module.
ZSH_ARGZERO
¶If zsh was invoked to run a script, this is the name of the script.
Otherwise, it is the name used to invoke the current shell. This is
the same as the value of $0
when the POSIX_ARGZERO
option is
set, but is always available.
ZSH_EXECUTION_STRING
¶If the shell was started with the option -c
, this contains
the argument passed to the option. Otherwise it is not set.
ZSH_NAME
¶Expands to the basename of the command used to invoke this instance of zsh.
ZSH_PATCHLEVEL
¶The output of ‘git describe --tags --long
’ for the zsh repository
used to build the shell. This is most useful in order to keep
track of versions of the shell during development between releases;
hence most users should not use it and should instead rely on
$ZSH_VERSION
.
zsh_scheduled_events
See The zsh/sched Module.
ZSH_SCRIPT
¶If zsh was invoked to run a script, this is the name of the script, otherwise it is unset.
ZSH_SUBSHELL
¶Readonly integer. Initially zero, incremented each time the shell forks
to create a subshell for executing code. Hence ‘(print $ZSH_SUBSHELL)
’
and ‘print $(print $ZSH_SUBSHELL)
’ output 1, while
‘( (print $ZSH_SUBSHELL) )
’ outputs 2.
ZSH_VERSION
¶The version number of the release of zsh.
The following parameters are used by the shell. Again, ‘<S>’ indicates
that the parameter is special and ‘<Z>’ indicates that the parameter does
not exist when the shell initializes in sh
or ksh
emulation mode.
In cases where there are two parameters with an upper- and lowercase
form of the same name, such as path
and PATH
, the lowercase form
is an array and the uppercase form is a scalar with the elements of the
array joined together by colons. These are similar to tied parameters
created via ‘typeset -T
’. The normal use for the colon-separated
form is for exporting to the environment, while the array form is easier
to manipulate within the shell. Note that unsetting either of the pair
will unset the other; they retain their special properties when
recreated, and recreating one of the pair will recreate the other.
ARGV0
¶If exported, its value is used as the argv[0]
of external commands.
Usually used in constructs like ‘ARGV0=emacs nethack
’.
BAUD
¶The rate in bits per second at which data reaches the terminal. The line editor will use this value in order to compensate for a slow terminal by delaying updates to the display until necessary. If the parameter is unset or the value is zero the compensation mechanism is turned off. The parameter is not set by default.
This parameter may be profitably set in some circumstances, e.g. for slow modems dialing into a communications server, or on a slow wide area network. It should be set to the baud rate of the slowest part of the link for best performance.
cdpath
<S> <Z> (CDPATH
<S>) ¶An array (colon-separated list)
of directories specifying the search path for the cd
command.
COLUMNS
<S> ¶The number of columns for this terminal session. Used for printing select lists and for the line editor.
CORRECT_IGNORE
¶If set, is treated as a pattern during spelling correction. Any
potential correction that matches the pattern is ignored. For example,
if the value is ‘_*
’ then completion functions (which, by
convention, have names beginning with ‘_
’) will never be offered
as spelling corrections. The pattern does not apply to the correction
of file names, as applied by the CORRECT_ALL
option (so with the
example just given files beginning with ‘_
’ in the current
directory would still be completed).
CORRECT_IGNORE_FILE
¶If set, is treated as a pattern during spelling correction of file names.
Any file name that matches the pattern is never offered as a correction.
For example, if the value is ‘.*
’ then dot file names will never be
offered as spelling corrections. This is useful with the
CORRECT_ALL
option.
DIRSTACKSIZE
¶The maximum size of the directory stack, by default there is no limit. If the
stack gets larger than this, it will be truncated automatically.
This is useful with the AUTO_PUSHD
option.
ENV
¶If the ENV
environment variable is set when zsh is invoked as sh
or ksh
, $ENV
is sourced after the profile scripts. The value of
ENV
is subjected to parameter expansion, command substitution, and
arithmetic expansion before being interpreted as a pathname. Note that
ENV
is not used unless the shell is interactive and zsh is
emulating sh or ksh.
FCEDIT
¶The default editor for the fc
builtin. If FCEDIT
is not set,
the parameter EDITOR
is used; if that is not set either, a builtin
default, usually vi
, is used.
fignore
<S> <Z> (FIGNORE
<S>) ¶An array (colon separated list) containing the suffixes of files to be ignored during filename completion. However, if completion only generates files with suffixes in this list, then these files are completed anyway.
fpath
<S> <Z> (FPATH
<S>) ¶An array (colon separated list)
of directories specifying the search path for
function definitions. This path is searched when a function
with the -u
attribute is referenced. If an executable
file is found, then it is read and executed in the current environment.
histchars
<S> ¶Three characters used by the shell’s history and lexical analysis
mechanism. The first character signals the start of a history
expansion (default ‘!
’). The second character signals the
start of a quick history substitution (default ‘^
’). The third
character is the comment character (default ‘#
’).
The characters must be in the ASCII character set; any attempt to set
histchars
to characters with a locale-dependent meaning will be
rejected with an error message.
HISTCHARS
<S> <Z> ¶Same as histchars
. (Deprecated.)
HISTFILE
¶The file to save the history in when an interactive shell exits. If unset, the history is not saved.
HISTORY_IGNORE
¶If set, is treated as a pattern at the time history files are written.
Any potential history entry that matches the pattern is skipped. For
example, if the value is ‘fc *
’ then commands that invoke the
interactive history editor are never written to the history file.
Note that HISTORY_IGNORE
defines a single pattern: to
specify alternatives use the
‘(
first|
second|
...)
’ syntax.
Compare the HIST_NO_STORE
option or the zshaddhistory
hook,
either of which would prevent such commands from being added to the
interactive history at all. If you wish to use HISTORY_IGNORE
to
stop history being added in the first place, you can define the
following hook:
zshaddhistory() { emulate -L zsh ## uncomment if HISTORY_IGNORE ## should use EXTENDED_GLOB syntax # setopt extendedglob [[ $1 != ${~HISTORY_IGNORE} ]] }
HISTSIZE
<S> ¶The maximum number of events stored in the internal history list.
If you use the HIST_EXPIRE_DUPS_FIRST
option, setting this value
larger than the SAVEHIST
size will give you the difference as a
cushion for saving duplicated history events.
If this is made local, it is not implicitly set to 0, but may be explicitly set locally.
HOME
<S> ¶The default argument for the cd
command. This is not set automatically
by the shell in sh
, ksh
or csh
emulation, but it is typically
present in the environment anyway, and if it becomes set it has its usual
special behaviour.
IFS
<S> ¶Internal field separators (by default space, tab, newline and NUL), that
are used to separate words which result from
command or parameter expansion and words read by
the read
builtin. Any characters from the set space, tab and
newline that appear in the IFS are called IFS white space.
One or more IFS white space characters or one non-IFS white space
character together with any adjacent IFS white space character delimit
a field. If an IFS white space character appears twice consecutively
in the IFS, this character is treated as if it were not an IFS white
space character.
If the parameter is unset, the default is used. Note this has a different effect from setting the parameter to an empty string.
KEYBOARD_HACK
¶This variable defines a character to be removed from the end of the
command line before interpreting it (interactive shells only). It is
intended to fix the problem with keys placed annoyingly close to return
and replaces the SUNKEYBOARDHACK
option which did this for
backquotes only. Should the chosen character be one of singlequote,
doublequote or backquote, there must also be an odd number of them
on the command line for the last one to be removed.
For backward compatibility, if the SUNKEYBOARDHACK
option is
explicitly set, the value of KEYBOARD_HACK
reverts to backquote.
If the option is explicitly unset, this variable is set to empty.
KEYTIMEOUT
¶The time the shell waits, in hundredths of seconds, for another key to be pressed when reading bound multi-character sequences.
LANG
<S> ¶This variable determines the locale category for any category not
specifically selected via a variable starting with ‘LC_
’.
LC_ALL
<S> ¶This variable overrides the value of the ‘LANG
’ variable and the value
of any of the other variables starting with ‘LC_
’.
LC_COLLATE
<S> ¶This variable determines the locale category for character collation information within ranges in glob brackets and for sorting.
LC_CTYPE
<S> ¶This variable determines the locale category for character handling
functions. If the MULTIBYTE
option is in effect this variable or
LANG
should contain a value that reflects the character set in
use, even if it is a single-byte character set, unless only the
7-bit subset (ASCII) is used. For example, if the character set
is ISO-8859-1, a suitable value might be en_US.iso88591
(certain
Linux distributions) or en_US.ISO8859-1
(MacOS).
LC_MESSAGES
<S> ¶This variable determines the language in which messages should be written. Note that zsh does not use message catalogs.
LC_NUMERIC
<S> ¶This variable affects the decimal point character and thousands separator character for the formatted input/output functions and string conversion functions. Note that zsh ignores this setting when parsing floating point mathematical expressions.
LC_TIME
<S> ¶This variable determines the locale category for date and time formatting in prompt escape sequences.
LINES
<S> ¶The number of lines for this terminal session. Used for printing select lists and for the line editor.
LISTMAX
¶In the line editor, the number of matches to list without asking first. If the value is negative, the list will be shown if it spans at most as many lines as given by the absolute value. If set to zero, the shell asks only if the top of the listing would scroll off the screen.
MAIL
¶If this parameter is set and mailpath
is not set,
the shell looks for mail in the specified file.
MAILCHECK
¶The interval in seconds between checks for new mail.
mailpath
<S> <Z> (MAILPATH
<S>) ¶An array (colon-separated list) of filenames to check for
new mail. Each filename can be followed by a ‘?
’ and a
message that will be printed. The message will undergo
parameter expansion, command substitution and arithmetic
expansion with the variable $_
defined as the name
of the file that has changed. The default message is
‘You have new mail
’. If an element is a directory
instead of a file the shell will recursively check every
file in every subdirectory of the element.
manpath
<S> <Z> (MANPATH
<S> <Z>) ¶An array (colon-separated list)
whose value is not used by the shell. The manpath
array can be useful, however, since setting it also sets
MANPATH
, and vice versa.
match
mbegin
mend
Arrays set by the shell when the b
globbing flag is used in pattern
matches. See the subsection Globbing flags in
Filename Generation.
MATCH
MBEGIN
MEND
Set by the shell when the m
globbing flag is used in pattern
matches. See the subsection Globbing flags in
Filename Generation.
module_path
<S> <Z> (MODULE_PATH
<S>) ¶An array (colon-separated list)
of directories that zmodload
searches for dynamically loadable modules.
This is initialized to a standard pathname,
usually ‘/usr/local/lib/zsh/$ZSH_VERSION
’.
(The ‘/usr/local/lib
’ part varies from installation to installation.)
For security reasons, any value set in the environment when the shell
is started will be ignored.
These parameters only exist if the installation supports dynamic module loading.
NULLCMD
<S> ¶The command name to assume if a redirection is specified
with no command. Defaults to cat
. For sh/ksh
behavior, change this to :
. For csh-like
behavior, unset this parameter; the shell will print an
error message if null commands are entered.
path
<S> <Z> (PATH
<S>) ¶An array (colon-separated list) of directories to search for commands. When this parameter is set, each directory is scanned and all files found are put in a hash table.
POSTEDIT
<S> ¶This string is output whenever the line editor exits. It usually contains termcap strings to reset the terminal.
PROMPT
<S> <Z> ¶PROMPT2
<S> <Z>PROMPT3
<S> <Z>PROMPT4
<S> <Z>Same as PS1
, PS2
, PS3
and PS4
,
respectively.
prompt
<S> <Z> ¶Same as PS1
.
PROMPT_EOL_MARK
¶When the PROMPT_CR
and PROMPT_SP
options are set, the
PROMPT_EOL_MARK
parameter can be used to customize how the end of
partial lines are shown. This parameter undergoes prompt expansion, with
the PROMPT_PERCENT
option set. If not set, the default behavior is
equivalent to the value ‘%B%S%#%s%b
’.
PS1
<S> ¶The primary prompt string, printed before a command is read.
It undergoes a special form of expansion
before being displayed; see
Prompt Expansion. The default is ‘%m%#
’.
PS2
<S> ¶The secondary prompt, printed when the shell needs more information
to complete a command.
It is expanded in the same way as PS1
.
The default is ‘%_>
’, which displays any shell constructs or quotation
marks which are currently being processed.
PS3
<S> ¶Selection prompt used within a select
loop.
It is expanded in the same way as PS1
.
The default is ‘?#
’.
PS4
<S> ¶The execution trace prompt. Default is ‘+%N:%i>
’, which displays
the name of the current shell structure and the line number within it.
In sh or ksh emulation, the default is ‘+
’.
psvar
<S> <Z> (PSVAR
<S>) ¶An array (colon-separated list) whose elements can be used in
PROMPT
strings. Setting psvar
also sets PSVAR
, and
vice versa.
READNULLCMD
<S> ¶The command name to assume if a single input redirection
is specified with no command. Defaults to more
.
REPORTMEMORY
¶If nonnegative, commands whose maximum resident set size (roughly
speaking, main memory usage) in kilobytes is greater than this
value have timing statistics reported. The format used to output
statistics is the value of the TIMEFMT
parameter, which is the same
as for the REPORTTIME
variable and the time
builtin; note that
by default this does not output memory usage. Appending
" max RSS %M"
to the value of TIMEFMT
causes it to output the
value that triggered the report. If REPORTTIME
is also in use,
at most a single report is printed for both triggers. This feature
requires the getrusage()
system call, commonly supported by
modern Unix-like systems.
REPORTTIME
¶If nonnegative, commands whose combined user and system execution times
(measured in seconds) are greater than this value have timing
statistics printed for them. Output is suppressed for commands
executed within the line editor, including completion; commands
explicitly marked with the time
keyword still cause the summary
to be printed in this case.
REPLY
¶This parameter is reserved by convention to pass string values between
shell scripts and shell builtins in situations where a function call or
redirection are impossible or undesirable. The read
builtin and the
select
complex command may set REPLY
, and filename generation both
sets and examines its value when evaluating certain expressions. Some
modules also employ REPLY
for similar purposes.
reply
¶As REPLY
, but for array values rather than strings.
RPROMPT
<S> ¶RPS1
<S>This prompt is displayed on the right-hand side of the screen
when the primary prompt is being displayed on the left.
This does not work if the SINGLE_LINE_ZLE
option is set.
It is expanded in the same way as PS1
.
RPROMPT2
<S> ¶RPS2
<S>This prompt is displayed on the right-hand side of the screen
when the secondary prompt is being displayed on the left.
This does not work if the SINGLE_LINE_ZLE
option is set.
It is expanded in the same way as PS2
.
SAVEHIST
¶The maximum number of history events to save in the history file.
If this is made local, it is not implicitly set to 0, but may be explicitly set locally.
SPROMPT
<S> ¶The prompt used for spelling correction. The sequence
‘%R
’ expands to the string which presumably needs spelling
correction, and ‘%r
’ expands to the proposed correction.
All other prompt escapes are also allowed.
The actions available at the prompt are [nyae]
:
n
(‘no’) (default)Discard the correction and run the command.
y
(‘yes’)Make the correction and run the command.
a
(‘abort’)Discard the entire command line without running it.
e
(‘edit’)Resume editing the command line.
STTY
¶If this parameter is set in a command’s environment, the shell runs the
stty
command with the value of this parameter as arguments in order to
set up the terminal before executing the command. The modes apply only to the
command, and are reset when it finishes or is suspended. If the command is
suspended and continued later with the fg
or wait
builtins it will
see the modes specified by STTY
, as if it were not suspended. This
(intentionally) does not apply if the command is continued via ‘kill
-CONT
’. STTY
is ignored if the command is run in the background, or
if it is in the environment of the shell but not explicitly assigned to in
the input line. This avoids running stty at every external command by
accidentally exporting it. Also note that STTY
should not be used for
window size specifications; these will not be local to the command.
If the parameter is set and empty, all of the above applies except
that stty
is not run. This can be useful as a way to freeze the tty
around a single command, blocking its changes to tty settings,
similar to the ttyctl
builtin.
TERM
<S> ¶The type of terminal in use. This is used when looking up termcap
sequences. An assignment to TERM
causes zsh to re-initialize the
terminal, even if the value does not change (e.g., ‘TERM=$TERM
’). It
is necessary to make such an assignment upon any change to the terminal
definition database or terminal type in order for the new settings to
take effect.
TERMINFO
<S> ¶A reference to your terminfo database, used by the ‘terminfo’ library when the
system has it; see terminfo(5).
If set, this causes the shell to reinitialise the terminal, making the
workaround ‘TERM=$TERM
’ unnecessary.
TERMINFO_DIRS
<S> ¶A colon-seprarated list of terminfo databases, used by the ‘terminfo’ library
when the system has it; see terminfo(5). This variable is only
used by certain terminal libraries, in particular ncurses; see
terminfo(5) to check support on your system. If set, this
causes the shell to reinitialise the terminal, making the workaround
‘TERM=$TERM
’ unnecessary. Note that unlike other colon-separated
arrays this is not tied to a zsh array.
TIMEFMT
¶The format of process time reports with the time
keyword.
The default is ‘%J %U user %S system %P cpu %*E total
’.
Recognizes the following escape sequences, although not all
may be available on all systems, and some that are available
may not be useful:
%%
A ‘%
’.
%U
CPU seconds spent in user mode.
%S
CPU seconds spent in kernel mode.
%E
Elapsed time in seconds.
%P
The CPU percentage, computed as
100*(%U
+%S
)/%E
.
%W
Number of times the process was swapped.
%X
The average amount in (shared) text space used in kilobytes.
%D
The average amount in (unshared) data/stack space used in kilobytes.
%K
The total space used (%X
+%D
) in kilobytes.
%M
The maximum memory the process had in use at any time in kilobytes.
%F
The number of major page faults (page needed to be brought from disk).
%R
The number of minor page faults.
%I
The number of input operations.
%O
The number of output operations.
%r
The number of socket messages received.
%s
The number of socket messages sent.
%k
The number of signals received.
%w
Number of voluntary context switches (waits).
%c
Number of involuntary context switches.
%J
The name of this job.
A star may be inserted between the percent sign and flags printing time
(e.g., ‘%*E
’); this causes the time to be printed in
‘hh:
mm:
ss.
ttt’
format (hours and minutes are only printed if they are not zero).
Alternatively, ‘m
’ or ‘u
’ may be used (e.g., ‘%mE
’) to produce
time output in milliseconds or microseconds, respectively.
TMOUT
¶If this parameter is nonzero, the shell will receive an ALRM
signal if a command is not entered within the specified number of
seconds after issuing a prompt. If there is a trap on SIGALRM
, it
will be executed and a new alarm is scheduled using the value of the
TMOUT
parameter after executing the trap. If no trap is set, and
the idle time of the terminal is not less than the value of the
TMOUT
parameter, zsh terminates. Otherwise a new alarm is
scheduled to TMOUT
seconds after the last keypress.
TMPPREFIX
¶A pathname prefix which the shell will use for all temporary files.
Note that this should include an initial part for the file name as
well as any directory names. The default is ‘/tmp/zsh
’.
TMPSUFFIX
¶A filename suffix which the shell will use for temporary files created
by process substitutions (e.g., ‘=(list)
’).
Note that the value should include a leading dot ‘.
’ if intended
to be interpreted as a file extension. The default is not to append
any suffix, thus this parameter should be assigned only when needed
and then unset again.
WORDCHARS
<S> ¶A list of non-alphanumeric characters considered part of a word by the line editor.
ZBEEP
¶If set, this gives a string of characters, which can use all the same codes
as the bindkey
command as described in
The zsh/zle Module, that will be output to the terminal
instead of beeping. This may have a visible instead of an audible effect;
for example, the string ‘\e[?5h\e[?5l
’ on a vt100 or xterm will have
the effect of flashing reverse video on and off (if you usually use reverse
video, you should use the string ‘\e[?5l\e[?5h
’ instead). This takes
precedence over the NOBEEP
option.
ZDOTDIR
¶The directory to search for shell startup files (.zshrc, etc),
if not $HOME
.
zle_bracketed_paste
¶Many terminal emulators have a feature that allows applications to identify when text is pasted into the terminal rather than being typed normally. For ZLE, this means that special characters such as tabs and newlines can be inserted instead of invoking editor commands. Furthermore, pasted text forms a single undo event and if the region is active, pasted text will replace the region.
This two-element array contains the terminal escape sequences for enabling and disabling the feature. These escape sequences are used to enable bracketed paste when ZLE is active and disable it at other times. Unsetting the parameter has the effect of ensuring that bracketed paste remains disabled.
zle_highlight
¶An array describing contexts in which ZLE should highlight the input text. See Character Highlighting.
ZLE_LINE_ABORTED
¶This parameter is set by the line editor when an error occurs. It
contains the line that was being edited at the point of the error.
‘print -zr -- $ZLE_LINE_ABORTED
’ can be used to recover the line.
Only the most recent line of this kind is remembered.
ZLE_REMOVE_SUFFIX_CHARS
¶ZLE_SPACE_SUFFIX_CHARS
These parameters are used by the line editor. In certain circumstances suffixes (typically space or slash) added by the completion system will be removed automatically, either because the next editing command was not an insertable character, or because the character was marked as requiring the suffix to be removed.
These variables can contain the sets of characters that will cause the
suffix to be removed. If ZLE_REMOVE_SUFFIX_CHARS
is set, those
characters will cause the suffix to be removed; if
ZLE_SPACE_SUFFIX_CHARS
is set, those characters will cause the
suffix to be removed and replaced by a space.
If ZLE_REMOVE_SUFFIX_CHARS
is not set, the default behaviour is
equivalent to:
ZLE_REMOVE_SUFFIX_CHARS=$' \t\n;&|'
If ZLE_REMOVE_SUFFIX_CHARS
is set but is empty, no characters have this
behaviour. ZLE_SPACE_SUFFIX_CHARS
takes precedence, so that the
following:
ZLE_SPACE_SUFFIX_CHARS=$'&|'
causes the characters ‘&
’ and ‘|
’ to remove the suffix but to
replace it with a space.
To illustrate the difference, suppose that the option AUTO_REMOVE_SLASH
is in effect and the directory DIR
has just been completed, with an
appended /
, following which the user types ‘&
’. The default result
is ‘DIR&
’. With ZLE_REMOVE_SUFFIX_CHARS
set but without including
‘&
’ the result is ‘DIR/&
’. With ZLE_SPACE_SUFFIX_CHARS
set to
include ‘&
’ the result is ‘DIR &
’.
Note that certain completions may provide their own suffix removal or replacement behaviour which overrides the values described here. See the completion system documentation in Completion System.
ZLE_RPROMPT_INDENT
<S> ¶If set, used to give the indentation between the right hand side of
the right prompt in the line editor as given by RPS1
or RPROMPT
and the right hand side of the screen. If not set, the value 1 is used.
Typically this will be used to set the value to 0 so that the prompt appears flush with the right hand side of the screen. This is not the default as many terminals do not handle this correctly, in particular when the prompt appears at the extreme bottom right of the screen. Recent virtual terminals are more likely to handle this case correctly. Some experimentation is necessary.
Options are primarily referred to by name.
These names are case insensitive and underscores are ignored.
For example, ‘allexport
’ is equivalent to ‘A__lleXP_ort
’.
The sense of an option name may be inverted by preceding it with
‘no
’, so ‘setopt No_Beep
’ is equivalent to ‘unsetopt beep
’.
This inversion can only be done once, so ‘nonobeep
’ is not
a synonym for ‘beep
’. Similarly, ‘tify
’ is not a synonym for
‘nonotify
’ (the inversion of ‘notify
’).
Some options also have one or more single letter names.
There are two sets of single letter options: one used by default,
and another used to emulate sh/ksh (used when the
SH_OPTION_LETTERS
option is set).
The single letter options can be used on the shell command line,
or with the set
, setopt
and unsetopt
builtins, as normal Unix options preceded by ‘-
’.
The sense of the single letter options may be inverted by using
‘+
’ instead of ‘-
’.
Some of the single letter option names refer to an option being off,
in which case the inversion of that name refers to the option being on.
For example, ‘+n
’ is the short name of ‘exec
’, and
‘-n
’ is the short name of its inversion, ‘noexec
’.
In strings of single letter options supplied to the shell at startup,
trailing whitespace will be ignored; for example the string ‘-f
’
will be treated just as ‘-f
’, but the string ‘-f i
’ is an error.
This is because many systems which implement the ‘#!
’ mechanism for
calling scripts do not strip trailing whitespace.
It is possible for options to be set within a function scope. See the
description of the option LOCAL_OPTIONS
below.
In the following list, options set by default in all emulations are marked
<D>; those set by default only in csh, ksh, sh, or zsh emulations are marked
<C>, <K>, <S>, <Z> as appropriate. When listing options (by ‘setopt
’,
‘unsetopt
’, ‘set -o
’ or ‘set +o
’), those turned on by default
appear in the list prefixed with ‘no
’. Hence (unless
KSH_OPTION_PRINT
is set), ‘setopt
’ shows all options whose settings
are changed from the default.
AUTO_CD
(-J
) ¶If a command is issued that can’t be executed as a normal command,
and the command is the name of a directory, perform the cd
command to that directory.
This option is only applicable if the option SHIN_STDIN
is set,
i.e. if commands are being read from standard input. The option
is designed for interactive use; it is recommended that cd
be used explicitly in scripts to avoid ambiguity.
AUTO_PUSHD
(-N
) ¶Make cd
push the old directory onto the directory stack.
CDABLE_VARS
(-T
) ¶If the argument to a cd
command (or an implied cd
with the
AUTO_CD
option set) is not a directory, and does not begin with a
slash, try to expand the expression as if it were preceded by a ‘~
’ (see
Filename Expansion).
CD_SILENT
¶Never print the working directory after a cd
(whether explicit or
implied with the AUTO_CD
option set). cd
normally prints the
working directory when the argument given to it was -
, a stack entry, or
the name of a directory found under CDPATH
. Note that this is distinct
from pushd
’s stack-printing behaviour, which is controlled by
PUSHD_SILENT
. This option overrides the printing-related effects of
POSIX_CD
.
CHASE_DOTS
¶When changing to a directory containing a path segment ‘..
’ which would
otherwise be treated as canceling the previous segment in the path (in
other words, ‘foo/..
’ would be removed from the path, or if ‘..
’ is
the first part of the path, the last part of the current working directory
would be removed), instead resolve the path to the physical directory.
This option is overridden by CHASE_LINKS
.
For example, suppose /foo/bar
is a link to the directory /alt/rod
.
Without this option set, ‘cd /foo/bar/..
’ changes to /foo
; with it
set, it changes to /alt
. The same applies if the current directory
is /foo/bar
and ‘cd ..
’ is used. Note that all other symbolic
links in the path will also be resolved.
CHASE_LINKS
(-w
) ¶Resolve symbolic links to their true values when changing directory.
This also has the effect of CHASE_DOTS
, i.e. a ‘..
’ path segment
will be treated as referring to the physical parent, even if the preceding
path segment is a symbolic link.
POSIX_CD
<K> <S> ¶Modifies the behaviour of cd
, chdir
and pushd
commands
to make them more compatible with the POSIX standard. The behaviour with
the option unset is described in the documentation for the cd
builtin in
Shell Builtin Commands.
If the option is set, the shell does not test for directories beneath
the local directory (‘.
’) until after all directories in cdpath
have been tested, and the cd
and chdir
commands do not recognise
arguments of the form ‘{+
|-
}n’ as directory stack entries.
Also, if the option is set, the conditions under which the shell
prints the new directory after changing to it are modified. It is
no longer restricted to interactive shells (although printing of
the directory stack with pushd
is still limited to interactive
shells); and any use of a component of CDPATH
, including a ‘.
’ but
excluding an empty component that is otherwise treated as ‘.
’, causes
the directory to be printed.
PUSHD_IGNORE_DUPS
¶Don’t push multiple copies of the same directory onto the directory stack.
PUSHD_MINUS
¶Exchanges the meanings of ‘+
’ and ‘-
’
when used with a number to specify a directory in the stack.
PUSHD_SILENT
(-E
) ¶Do not print the directory stack after pushd
or popd
.
PUSHD_TO_HOME
(-D
) ¶Have pushd
with no arguments act like ‘pushd $HOME
’.
ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT
<D> ¶If unset, key functions that list completions try to return to the last prompt if given a numeric argument. If set these functions try to return to the last prompt if given no numeric argument.
ALWAYS_TO_END
¶If a completion is performed with the cursor within a word, and a full completion is inserted, the cursor is moved to the end of the word. That is, the cursor is moved to the end of the word if either a single match is inserted or menu completion is performed.
AUTO_LIST
(-9
) <D> ¶Automatically list choices on an ambiguous completion.
AUTO_MENU
<D> ¶Automatically use menu completion after the second consecutive request for
completion, for example by pressing the tab key repeatedly. This option
is overridden by MENU_COMPLETE
.
AUTO_NAME_DIRS
¶Any parameter that is set to the absolute name of a directory
immediately becomes a name for that directory, that will be used
by the ‘%~
’
and related prompt sequences, and will be available when completion
is performed on a word starting with ‘~
’.
(Otherwise, the parameter must be used in the form ‘~
param’ first.)
AUTO_PARAM_KEYS
<D> ¶If a parameter name was completed and a following character
(normally a space) automatically
inserted, and the next character typed is one
of those that have to come directly after the name (like ‘}
’, ‘:
’,
etc.), the automatically added character is deleted, so that the character
typed comes immediately after the parameter name.
Completion in a brace expansion is affected similarly: the added character
is a ‘,
’, which will be removed if ‘}
’ is typed next.
AUTO_PARAM_SLASH
<D> ¶If a parameter is completed whose content is the name of a directory, then add a trailing slash instead of a space.
AUTO_REMOVE_SLASH
<D> ¶When the last character resulting from a completion is a slash and the next character typed is a word delimiter, a slash, or a character that ends a command (such as a semicolon or an ampersand), remove the slash.
BASH_AUTO_LIST
¶On an ambiguous completion, automatically list choices when the
completion function is called twice in succession. This takes
precedence over AUTO_LIST
. The setting of LIST_AMBIGUOUS
is
respected. If AUTO_MENU
is set, the menu behaviour will then start
with the third press. Note that this will not work with
MENU_COMPLETE
, since repeated completion calls immediately cycle
through the list in that case.
COMPLETE_ALIASES
¶Prevents aliases on the command line from being internally substituted before completion is attempted. The effect is to make the alias a distinct command for completion purposes.
COMPLETE_IN_WORD
¶If unset, the cursor is set to the end of the word if completion is started. Otherwise it stays there and completion is done from both ends.
GLOB_COMPLETE
¶When the current word has a glob pattern, do not insert all the words
resulting from the expansion but generate matches as for completion and
cycle through them like MENU_COMPLETE
. The matches are generated as if
a ‘*
’ was added to the end of the word, or inserted at the cursor when
COMPLETE_IN_WORD
is set. This actually uses pattern matching, not
globbing, so it works not only for files but for any completion, such as
options, user names, etc.
Note that when the pattern matcher is used, matching control (for example,
case-insensitive or anchored matching) cannot be used. This limitation
only applies when the current word contains a pattern; simply turning
on the GLOB_COMPLETE
option does not have this effect.
HASH_LIST_ALL
<D> ¶Whenever a command completion or spelling correction is attempted, make sure the entire command path is hashed first. This makes the first completion slower but avoids false reports of spelling errors.
LIST_AMBIGUOUS
<D> ¶This option works when AUTO_LIST
or BASH_AUTO_LIST
is also
set. If there is an unambiguous prefix to insert on the command line,
that is done without a completion list being displayed; in other
words, auto-listing behaviour only takes place when nothing would be
inserted. In the case of BASH_AUTO_LIST
, this means that the list
will be delayed to the third call of the function.
LIST_BEEP
<D> ¶Beep on an ambiguous completion. More accurately, this forces the
completion widgets to return status 1 on an ambiguous completion, which
causes the shell to beep if the option BEEP
is also set; this may
be modified if completion is called from a user-defined widget.
LIST_PACKED
¶Try to make the completion list smaller (occupying less lines) by printing the matches in columns with different widths.
LIST_ROWS_FIRST
¶Lay out the matches in completion lists sorted horizontally, that is, the second match is to the right of the first one, not under it as usual.
LIST_TYPES
(-X
) <D> ¶When listing files that are possible completions, show the type of each file with a trailing identifying mark.
MENU_COMPLETE
(-Y
) ¶On an ambiguous completion, instead of listing possibilities or beeping,
insert the first match immediately. Then when completion is requested
again, remove the first match and insert the second match, etc.
When there are no more matches, go back to the first one again.
reverse-menu-complete
may be used to loop through the list
in the other direction. This option overrides AUTO_MENU
.
REC_EXACT
(-S
) ¶If the string on the command line exactly matches one of the possible completions, it is accepted, even if there is another completion (i.e. that string with something else added) that also matches.
BAD_PATTERN
(+2
) <C> <Z> ¶If a pattern for filename generation is badly formed, print an error message. (If this option is unset, the pattern will be left unchanged.)
BARE_GLOB_QUAL
<Z> ¶In a glob pattern, treat a trailing set of parentheses as a qualifier
list, if it contains no ‘|
’, ‘(
’ or (if special) ‘~
’
characters. See Filename Generation.
BRACE_CCL
¶Expand expressions in braces which would not otherwise undergo brace expansion to a lexically ordered list of all the characters. See Brace Expansion.
CASE_GLOB
<D> ¶Make globbing (filename generation) sensitive to case. Note that other
uses of patterns are always sensitive to case. If the option is unset,
the presence of any character which is special to filename generation
will cause case-insensitive matching. For example, cvs(/)
can match the directory CVS
owing to the presence of the globbing flag
(unless the option BARE_GLOB_QUAL
is unset).
CASE_MATCH
<D> ¶Make regular expressions using the zsh/regex
module (including
matches with =~
) sensitive to case.
CASE_PATHS
¶If CASE_PATHS
is not set (the default), CASE_GLOB
affects the
interpretation of every path component, whenever a special
character appears in any component. When CASE_PATHS
is set,
file path components that do not contain special filename
generation characters are always sensitive to case, thus restricting
NO_CASE_GLOB
to components that contain globbing characters.
Note that if the filesystem itself is not sensitive to case, then
CASE_PATHS
has no effect.
CSH_NULL_GLOB
<C> ¶If a pattern for filename generation has no matches,
delete the pattern from the argument list;
do not report an error unless all the patterns
in a command have no matches.
Overrides NOMATCH
.
EQUALS
<Z> ¶Perform =
filename expansion.
(See Filename Expansion.)
EXTENDED_GLOB
¶Treat the ‘#
’, ‘~
’ and ‘^
’ characters as part of patterns
for filename generation, etc. (An initial unquoted ‘~
’
always produces named directory expansion.)
FORCE_FLOAT
¶Constants in arithmetic evaluation will be treated as floating point even without the use of a decimal point; the values of integer variables will be converted to floating point when used in arithmetic expressions. Integers in any base will be converted.
GLOB
(+F
, ksh: +f
) <D> ¶Perform filename generation (globbing). (See Filename Generation.)
GLOB_ASSIGN
<C> ¶If this option is set, filename generation (globbing) is
performed on the right hand side of scalar parameter assignments of
the form ‘name=
pattern (e.g. ‘foo=*
’).
If the result has more than one word the parameter will become an array
with those words as arguments. This option is provided for backwards
compatibility only: globbing is always performed on the right hand side
of array assignments of the form ‘name=(
value)
’
(e.g. ‘foo=(*)
’) and this form is recommended for clarity;
with this option set, it is not possible to predict whether the result
will be an array or a scalar.
GLOB_DOTS
(-4
) ¶Do not require a leading ‘.
’ in a filename to be matched explicitly.
GLOB_STAR_SHORT
¶When this option is set and the default zsh-style globbing is in
effect, the pattern ‘**/*
’ can be abbreviated to ‘**
’ and the
pattern ‘***/*
’ can be abbreviated to ***
. Hence ‘**.c
’
finds a file ending in .c
in any subdirectory, and ‘***.c
’ does
the same while also following symbolic links. A /
immediately
after the ‘**
’ or ‘***
’ forces the pattern to be treated as the
unabbreviated form.
GLOB_SUBST
<C> <K> <S> ¶Treat any characters resulting from parameter expansion as being eligible for filename expansion and filename generation, and any characters resulting from command substitution as being eligible for filename generation. Braces (and commas in between) do not become eligible for expansion.
HIST_SUBST_PATTERN
¶Substitutions using the :s
and :&
history modifiers are performed
with pattern matching instead of string matching. This occurs wherever
history modifiers are valid, including glob qualifiers and parameters.
See
Modifiers.
IGNORE_BRACES
(-I
) <S> ¶Do not perform brace expansion. For historical reasons this
also includes the effect of the IGNORE_CLOSE_BRACES
option.
IGNORE_CLOSE_BRACES
¶When neither this option nor IGNORE_BRACES
is set, a sole
close brace character ‘}
’ is syntactically significant at any
point on a command line. This has the effect that no semicolon
or newline is necessary before the brace terminating a function
or current shell construct. When either option is set, a closing brace
is syntactically significant only in command position. Unlike
IGNORE_BRACES
, this option does not disable brace expansion.
For example, with both options unset a function may be defined in the following fashion:
args() { echo $# }
while if either option is set, this does not work and something equivalent to the following is required:
args() { echo $#; }
KSH_GLOB
<K> ¶In pattern matching, the interpretation of parentheses is affected by
a preceding ‘@
’, ‘*
’, ‘+
’, ‘?
’ or ‘!
’.
See Filename Generation.
MAGIC_EQUAL_SUBST
¶All unquoted arguments of the form ‘anything=
expression’
appearing after the command name have filename expansion (that is,
where expression has a leading ‘~
’ or ‘=
’) performed on
expression as if it were a parameter assignment. The argument is
not otherwise treated specially; it is passed to the command as a single
argument, and not used as an actual parameter assignment. For example, in
echo foo=~/bar:~/rod
, both occurrences of ~
would be replaced.
Note that this happens anyway with typeset
and similar statements.
This option respects the setting of the KSH_TYPESET
option. In other
words, if both options are in effect, arguments looking like
assignments will not undergo word splitting.
MARK_DIRS
(-8
, ksh: -X
) ¶Append a trailing ‘/
’ to all directory
names resulting from filename generation (globbing).
MULTIBYTE
<D> ¶Respect multibyte characters when found in strings. When this option is set, strings are examined using the system library to determine how many bytes form a character, depending on the current locale. This affects the way characters are counted in pattern matching, parameter values and various delimiters.
The option is on by default if the shell was compiled with
MULTIBYTE_SUPPORT
; otherwise it is off by default and has no effect
if turned on.
If the option is off a single byte is always treated as a single character. This setting is designed purely for examining strings known to contain raw bytes or other values that may not be characters in the current locale. It is not necessary to unset the option merely because the character set for the current locale does not contain multibyte characters.
The option does not affect the shell’s editor, which always uses the locale to determine multibyte characters. This is because the character set displayed by the terminal emulator is independent of shell settings.
NOMATCH
(+3
) <C> <Z> ¶If a pattern for filename generation has no matches,
print an error, instead of
leaving it unchanged in the argument list.
This also applies to file expansion
of an initial ‘~
’ or ‘=
’.
NULL_GLOB
(-G
) ¶If a pattern for filename generation has no matches,
delete the pattern from the argument list instead
of reporting an error. Overrides NOMATCH
.
NUMERIC_GLOB_SORT
¶If numeric filenames are matched by a filename generation pattern, sort the filenames numerically rather than lexicographically.
RC_EXPAND_PARAM
(-P
) ¶Array expansions of the form
‘foo${
xx}
bar’, where the parameter
xx is set to (
a b c)
, are substituted with
‘fooabar foobbar foocbar’ instead of the default
‘fooa b cbar’. Note that an empty array will therefore cause
all arguments to be removed.
REMATCH_PCRE
¶If set, regular expression matching with the =~
operator will use
Perl-Compatible Regular Expressions from the PCRE library.
(The zsh/pcre
module must be available.)
If not set, regular expressions will use the extended regexp syntax
provided by the system libraries.
SH_GLOB
<K> <S> ¶Disables the special meaning of ‘(
’, ‘|
’, ‘)
’
and ’<
’ for globbing the result of parameter and command substitutions,
and in some other places where
the shell accepts patterns. If SH_GLOB
is set but KSH_GLOB
is
not, the shell allows the interpretation of
subshell expressions enclosed in parentheses in some cases where there
is no space before the opening parenthesis, e.g. !(true)
is interpreted as if there were a space after the !
. This option is
set by default if zsh is invoked as sh
or ksh
.
UNSET
(+u
, ksh: +u
) <K> <S> <Z> ¶Treat unset parameters as if they were empty when substituting, and as if they were zero when reading their values in arithmetic expansion and arithmetic commands. Otherwise they are treated as an error.
WARN_CREATE_GLOBAL
¶Print a warning message when a global parameter is created in a function
by an assignment or in math context.
This often indicates that a parameter has not been
declared local when it should have been. Parameters explicitly declared
global from within a function using typeset -g
do not cause a warning.
Note that there is no warning when a local parameter is assigned to in
a nested function, which may also indicate an error.
WARN_NESTED_VAR
¶Print a warning message when an existing parameter from an
enclosing function scope, or global, is set in a function
by an assignment or in math context. Assignment to shell
special parameters does not cause a warning. This is the companion
to WARN_CREATE_GLOBAL
as in this case the warning is only
printed when a parameter is not created. Where possible,
use of typeset -g
to set the parameter suppresses the error,
but note that this needs to be used every time the parameter is set.
To restrict the effect of this option to a single function scope,
use ‘functions -W
’.
For example, the following code produces a warning for the assignment
inside the function nested
as that overrides the value within
toplevel
toplevel() { local foo="in fn" nested } nested() { foo="in nested" } setopt warn_nested_var toplevel
APPEND_HISTORY
<D> ¶If this is set, zsh sessions will append their history list to
the history file, rather than replace it. Thus, multiple parallel
zsh sessions will all have the new entries from their history lists
added to the history file, in the order that they exit.
The file will still be periodically re-written to trim it when the
number of lines grows 20% beyond the value specified by
$SAVEHIST
(see also the HIST_SAVE_BY_COPY
option).
BANG_HIST
(+K
) <C> <Z> ¶Perform textual history expansion, csh-style,
treating the character ‘!
’ specially.
EXTENDED_HISTORY
<C> ¶Save each command’s beginning timestamp (in seconds since the epoch) and the duration (in seconds) to the history file. The format of this prefixed data is:
‘:
<beginning time>:
<elapsed seconds>;
<command>’.
HIST_ALLOW_CLOBBER
¶Add ‘|
’ to output redirections in the history. This allows history
references to clobber files even when CLOBBER
is unset.
HIST_BEEP
<D> ¶Beep in ZLE when a widget attempts to access a history entry which isn’t there.
HIST_EXPIRE_DUPS_FIRST
¶If the internal history needs to be trimmed to add the current command line,
setting this option will cause the oldest history event that has a duplicate
to be lost before losing a unique event from the list.
You should be sure to set the value of HISTSIZE
to a larger number
than SAVEHIST
in order to give you some room for the duplicated
events, otherwise this option will behave just like
HIST_IGNORE_ALL_DUPS
once the history fills up with unique events.
HIST_FCNTL_LOCK
¶When writing out the history file, by default zsh uses ad-hoc file locking
to avoid known problems with locking on some operating systems. With this
option locking is done by means of the system’s fcntl
call, where
this method is available. On recent operating systems this may
provide better performance, in particular avoiding history corruption when
files are stored on NFS.
HIST_FIND_NO_DUPS
¶When searching for history entries in the line editor, do not display duplicates of a line previously found, even if the duplicates are not contiguous.
HIST_IGNORE_ALL_DUPS
¶If a new command line being added to the history list duplicates an older one, the older command is removed from the list (even if it is not the previous event).
HIST_IGNORE_DUPS
(-h
) ¶Do not enter command lines into the history list if they are duplicates of the previous event.
HIST_IGNORE_SPACE
(-g
) ¶Remove command lines from the history list when the first character on the line is a space, or when one of the expanded aliases contains a leading space. Only normal aliases (not global or suffix aliases) have this behaviour. Note that the command lingers in the internal history until the next command is entered before it vanishes, allowing you to briefly reuse or edit the line. If you want to make it vanish right away without entering another command, type a space and press return.
HIST_LEX_WORDS
¶By default, shell history that is read in from files is split into words on all white space. This means that arguments with quoted whitespace are not correctly handled, with the consequence that references to words in history lines that have been read from a file may be inaccurate. When this option is set, words read in from a history file are divided up in a similar fashion to normal shell command line handling. Although this produces more accurately delimited words, if the size of the history file is large this can be slow. Trial and error is necessary to decide.
HIST_NO_FUNCTIONS
¶Remove function definitions from the history list. Note that the function lingers in the internal history until the next command is entered before it vanishes, allowing you to briefly reuse or edit the definition.
HIST_NO_STORE
¶Remove the history
(fc -l
) command from the history list
when invoked.
Note that the command lingers in the internal history until the next
command is entered before it vanishes, allowing you to briefly reuse
or edit the line.
HIST_REDUCE_BLANKS
¶Remove superfluous blanks from each command line being added to the history list.
HIST_SAVE_BY_COPY
<D> ¶When the history file is re-written, we normally write out a copy of
the file named $HISTFILE.new
and then rename it over the old one.
However, if this option is unset, we instead truncate the old
history file and write out the new version in-place. If one of the
history-appending options is enabled, this option only has an effect
when the enlarged history file needs to be re-written to trim it
down to size. Disable this only if you have special needs, as doing
so makes it possible to lose history entries if zsh gets interrupted
during the save.
When writing out a copy of the history file, zsh preserves the old file’s permissions and group information, but will refuse to write out a new file if it would change the history file’s owner.
HIST_SAVE_NO_DUPS
¶When writing out the history file, older commands that duplicate newer ones are omitted.
HIST_VERIFY
¶Whenever the user enters a line with history expansion, don’t execute the line directly; instead, perform history expansion and reload the line into the editing buffer.
INC_APPEND_HISTORY
¶This option works like APPEND_HISTORY
except that new history lines
are added to the $HISTFILE
incrementally (as soon as they are
entered), rather than waiting until the shell exits.
The file will still be periodically re-written to trim it when the
number of lines grows 20% beyond the value specified by
$SAVEHIST
(see also the HIST_SAVE_BY_COPY
option).
INC_APPEND_HISTORY_TIME
¶This option is a variant of INC_APPEND_HISTORY
in which, where
possible, the history entry is written out to the file after the
command is finished, so that the time taken by the command is recorded
correctly in the history file in EXTENDED_HISTORY
format. This
means that the history entry will not be available immediately from
other instances of the shell that are using the same history file.
This option is only useful if INC_APPEND_HISTORY
and
SHARE_HISTORY
are turned off. The three options should be
considered mutually exclusive.
SHARE_HISTORY
<K> ¶This option both imports new commands from the history file, and also
causes your typed commands to be appended to the history file (the
latter is like specifying INC_APPEND_HISTORY
, which should be turned
off if this option is in effect). The history lines are also output
with timestamps ala EXTENDED_HISTORY
(which makes it easier to find
the spot where we left off reading the file after it gets re-written).
By default, history movement commands visit the imported lines as well as the local lines, but you can toggle this on and off with the set-local-history zle binding. It is also possible to create a zle widget that will make some commands ignore imported commands, and some include them.
If you find that you want more control over when commands
get imported, you may wish to turn SHARE_HISTORY
off,
INC_APPEND_HISTORY
or INC_APPEND_HISTORY_TIME
(see above) on,
and then manually import commands whenever you need them using ‘fc
-RI
’.
ALL_EXPORT
(-a
, ksh: -a
) ¶All parameters subsequently defined are automatically exported.
GLOBAL_EXPORT
<Z> ¶If this option is set, passing the -x
flag to the builtins declare
,
float
, integer
, readonly
and typeset
(but not local
)
will also set the -g
flag; hence parameters exported to
the environment will not be made local to the enclosing function, unless
they were already or the flag +g
is given explicitly. If the option is
unset, exported parameters will be made local in just the same way as any
other parameter.
This option is set by default for backward compatibility; it is not
recommended that its behaviour be relied upon. Note that the builtin
export
always sets both the -x
and -g
flags, and hence its
effect extends beyond the scope of the enclosing function; this is the
most portable way to achieve this behaviour.
GLOBAL_RCS
(+d
) <D> ¶If this option is unset, the startup files /etc/zprofile
,
/etc/zshrc
, /etc/zlogin
and /etc/zlogout
will not be run. It
can be disabled and re-enabled at any time, including inside local startup
files (.zshrc
, etc.).
RCS
(+f
) <D> ¶After /etc/zshenv
is sourced on startup, source the
.zshenv
, /etc/zprofile
, .zprofile
,
/etc/zshrc
, .zshrc
, /etc/zlogin
, .zlogin
, and .zlogout
files, as described in Files.
If this option is unset, the /etc/zshenv
file is still sourced, but any
of the others will not be; it can be set at any time to prevent the
remaining startup files after the currently executing one from
being sourced.
ALIASES
<D> ¶Expand aliases.
CLOBBER
(+C
, ksh: +C
) <D> ¶Allows ‘>
’ redirection to truncate existing files.
Otherwise ‘>!
’ or ‘>|
’ must be used to truncate a file.
If the option is not set, and the option APPEND_CREATE
is also
not set, ‘>>!
’ or ‘>>|
’ must be used to create a file.
If either option is set, ‘>>
’ may be used.
CLOBBER_EMPTY
¶This option is only used if the option CLOBBER
is not set: note that
it is set by default.
If this option is set, then regular files of zero length may be ovewritten (‘clobbered’). Note that it is possible another process has written to the file between this test and use of the file by the current process. This option should therefore not be used in cases where files to be clobbered may be written to asynchronously.
CORRECT
(-0
) ¶Try to correct the spelling of commands.
Note that, when the HASH_LIST_ALL
option is not set or when some
directories in the path are not readable, this may falsely report spelling
errors the first time some commands are used.
The shell variable CORRECT_IGNORE
may be set to a pattern to
match words that will never be offered as corrections.
CORRECT_ALL
(-O
) ¶Try to correct the spelling of all arguments in a line.
The shell variable CORRECT_IGNORE_FILE
may be set to a pattern to
match file names that will never be offered as corrections.
DVORAK
¶Use the Dvorak keyboard instead of the standard qwerty keyboard as a basis
for examining spelling mistakes for the CORRECT
and CORRECT_ALL
options and the spell-word
editor command.
FLOW_CONTROL
<D> ¶If this option is unset, output flow control via start/stop characters (usually assigned to ^S/^Q) is disabled in the shell’s editor.
IGNORE_EOF
(-7
) ¶Do not exit on end-of-file. Require the use
of exit
or logout
instead.
However, ten consecutive EOFs will cause the shell to exit anyway,
to avoid the shell hanging if its tty goes away.
Also, if this option is set and the Zsh Line Editor is used, widgets implemented by shell functions can be bound to EOF (normally Control-D) without printing the normal warning message. This works only for normal widgets, not for completion widgets.
INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
(-k
) <K> <S> ¶Allow comments even in interactive shells.
HASH_CMDS
<D> ¶Note the location of each command the first time it is executed.
Subsequent invocations of the same command will use the
saved location, avoiding a path search.
If this option is unset, no path hashing is done at all.
However, when CORRECT
is set, commands whose names do not appear in
the functions or aliases hash tables are hashed in order to avoid
reporting them as spelling errors.
HASH_DIRS
<D> ¶Whenever a command name is hashed, hash the directory containing it,
as well as all directories that occur earlier in the path.
Has no effect if neither HASH_CMDS
nor CORRECT
is set.
HASH_EXECUTABLES_ONLY
¶When hashing commands because of HASH_CMDS
, check that the
file to be hashed is actually an executable. This option
is unset by default as if the path contains a large number of commands,
or consists of many remote files, the additional tests can take
a long time. Trial and error is needed to show if this option is
beneficial.
MAIL_WARNING
(-U
) ¶Print a warning message if a mail file has been accessed since the shell last checked.
PATH_DIRS
(-Q
) ¶Perform a path search even on command names with slashes in them.
Thus if ‘/usr/local/bin
’ is in the user’s path, and he or she types
‘X11/xinit
’, the command ‘/usr/local/bin/X11/xinit
’ will be executed
(assuming it exists).
Commands explicitly beginning with ‘/
’, ‘./
’ or ‘../
’
are not subject to the path search.
This also applies to the ‘.
’ and source
builtins.
Note that subdirectories of the current directory are always searched for
executables specified in this form. This takes place before any search
indicated by this option, and regardless of whether ‘.
’ or the current
directory appear in the command search path.
PATH_SCRIPT
<K> <S> ¶If this option is not set, a script passed as the first non-option argument to the shell must contain the name of the file to open. If this option is set, and the script does not specify a directory path, the script is looked for first in the current directory, then in the command path. See Invocation.
PRINT_EIGHT_BIT
¶Print eight bit characters literally in completion lists, etc. This option is not necessary if your system correctly returns the printability of eight bit characters (see ctype(3)).
PRINT_EXIT_VALUE
(-1
) ¶Print the exit value of programs with non-zero exit status. This is only available at the command line in interactive shells.
RC_QUOTES
¶Allow the character sequence ‘{No value for `dsq'}
’ to signify a single quote
within singly quoted strings. Note this does not apply in quoted strings
using the format $'
...'
, where a backslashed single quote can
be used.
RM_STAR_SILENT
(-H
) <K> <S> ¶Do not query the user before executing ‘rm *
’ or ‘rm path/*
’.
RM_STAR_WAIT
¶If querying the user before executing ‘rm *
’ or ‘rm path/*
’,
first wait ten seconds and ignore anything typed in that time.
This avoids the problem of reflexively answering ‘yes’ to the query
when one didn’t really mean it. The wait and query can always be
avoided by expanding the ‘*
’ in ZLE (with tab).
SHORT_LOOPS
<C> <Z> ¶Allow the short forms of for
, repeat
, select
,
if
, and function
constructs.
SHORT_REPEAT
¶Allow the short form repeat
as SHORT_LOOPS
but without enabling
it for the other constructs.
SUN_KEYBOARD_HACK
(-L
) ¶If a line ends with a backquote, and there are an odd number
of backquotes on the line, ignore the trailing backquote.
This is useful on some keyboards where the return key is
too small, and the backquote key lies annoyingly close to it.
As an alternative the variable KEYBOARD_HACK
lets you choose the
character to be removed.
AUTO_CONTINUE
¶With this option set, stopped jobs that are removed from the job table
with the disown
builtin command are automatically sent a CONT
signal to make them running.
AUTO_RESUME
(-W
) ¶Treat single word simple commands without redirection as candidates for resumption of an existing job.
BG_NICE
(-6
) <C> <Z> ¶Run all background jobs at a lower priority. This option is set by default.
CHECK_JOBS
<Z> ¶Report the status of background and suspended jobs before exiting a shell
with job control; a second attempt to exit the shell will succeed.
NO_CHECK_JOBS
is best used only in combination with NO_HUP
, else
such jobs will be killed automatically.
The check is omitted if the commands run from the previous command line
included a ‘jobs
’ command, since it is assumed the user is aware that
there are background or suspended jobs. A ‘jobs
’ command run from one
of the hook functions defined in
the section ‘Special Functions’ in Functions
is not counted for this purpose.
CHECK_RUNNING_JOBS
<Z> ¶Check for both running and suspended jobs when CHECK_JOBS
is enabled.
When this option is disabled, zsh checks only for suspended jobs, which
matches the default behavior of bash.
This option has no effect unless CHECK_JOBS
is set.
HUP
<Z> ¶Send the HUP
signal to running jobs when the
shell exits.
LONG_LIST_JOBS
(-R
) ¶Print job notifications in the long format by default.
MONITOR
(-m
, ksh: -m
) ¶Allow job control. Set by default in interactive shells.
NOTIFY
(-5
, ksh: -b
) <Z> ¶Report the status of background jobs immediately, rather than waiting until just before printing a prompt.
POSIX_JOBS
<K> <S> ¶This option makes job control more compliant with the POSIX standard.
When the option is not set, the MONITOR
option is unset on entry to
subshells, so that job control is no longer active. When the option is
set, the MONITOR
option and job control remain active in the
subshell, but note that the subshell has no access to jobs in the parent
shell.
When the option is not set, jobs put in the background or foreground
with bg
or fg
are displayed with the same information that would
be reported by jobs
. When the option is set, only the text is
printed. The output from jobs
itself is not affected by the option.
When the option is not set, job information from the parent
shell is saved for output within a subshell (for example, within a
pipeline). When the option is set, the output of jobs
is empty
until a job is started within the subshell.
In previous versions of the shell, it was necessary to enable
POSIX_JOBS
in order for the builtin command wait
to return the
status of background jobs that had already exited. This is no longer
the case.
PROMPT_BANG
<K> ¶If set, ‘!
’ is treated specially in prompt expansion.
See
Prompt Expansion.
PROMPT_CR
(+V
) <D> ¶Print a carriage return just before printing a prompt in the line editor. This is on by default as multi-line editing is only possible if the editor knows where the start of the line appears.
PROMPT_SP
<D> ¶Attempt to preserve a partial line (i.e. a line that did not end with a
newline) that would otherwise be covered up by the command prompt due to
the PROMPT_CR
option. This works by outputting some cursor-control
characters, including a series of spaces, that should make the terminal
wrap to the next line when a partial line is present (note that this is
only successful if your terminal has automatic margins, which is typical).
When a partial line is preserved, by default you will see an inverse+bold
character at the end of the partial line: a ‘%
’ for a normal user or
a ‘#
’ for root. If set, the shell parameter PROMPT_EOL_MARK
can be
used to customize how the end of partial lines are shown.
NOTE: if the PROMPT_CR
option is not set, enabling this option will
have no effect. This option is on by default.
PROMPT_PERCENT
<C> <Z> ¶If set, ‘%
’ is treated specially in prompt expansion.
See
Prompt Expansion.
PROMPT_SUBST
<K> <S> ¶If set, parameter expansion, command substitution and arithmetic expansion are performed in prompts. Substitutions within prompts do not affect the command status.
TRANSIENT_RPROMPT
¶Remove any right prompt from display when accepting a command line. This may be useful with terminals with other cut/paste methods.
ALIAS_FUNC_DEF
<S> ¶By default, zsh does not allow the definition of functions using
the ‘name ()
’ syntax if name was expanded as an
alias: this causes an error. This is usually the desired behaviour, as
otherwise the combination of an alias and a function based on the same
definition can easily cause problems.
When this option is set, aliases can be used for defining functions.
For example, consider the following definitions as they might occur in a startup file.
alias foo=bar foo() { print This probably does not do what you expect. }
Here, foo
is expanded as an alias to bar
before the
()
is encountered, so the function defined would be named
bar
. By default this is instead an error in native mode. Note that
quoting any part of the function name, or using the keyword
function
, avoids the problem, so is recommended when the function
name can also be an alias.
C_BASES
¶Output hexadecimal numbers in the standard C format, for example ‘0xFF
’
instead of the usual ‘16#FF
’. If the option OCTAL_ZEROES
is also
set (it is not by default), octal numbers will be treated similarly and
hence appear as ‘077
’ instead of ‘8#77
’. This option has no effect
on the choice of the output base, nor on the output of bases other than
hexadecimal and octal. Note that these formats will be understood on input
irrespective of the setting of C_BASES
.
C_PRECEDENCES
¶This alters the precedence of arithmetic operators to be more like C and other programming languages; Arithmetic Evaluation has an explicit list.
DEBUG_BEFORE_CMD
<D> ¶Run the DEBUG
trap before each command; otherwise it is run after
each command. Setting this option mimics the behaviour of ksh 93; with
the option unset the behaviour is that of ksh 88.
ERR_EXIT
(-e
, ksh: -e
) ¶If a command has a non-zero exit status, execute the ZERR
trap, if set, and exit. This is disabled while running initialization
scripts.
The behaviour is also disabled inside DEBUG
traps. In this
case the option is handled specially: it is unset on entry to
the trap. If the option DEBUG_BEFORE_CMD
is set,
as it is by default, and the option ERR_EXIT
is found to have been set
on exit, then the command for which the DEBUG
trap is being executed is
skipped. The option is restored after the trap exits.
Non-zero status in a command list containing &&
or ||
is ignored
for commands not at the end of the list. Hence
false && true
does not trigger exit.
Exiting due to ERR_EXIT
has certain interactions with asynchronous
jobs noted in
Jobs & Signals.
ERR_RETURN
¶If a command has a non-zero exit status, return immediately from the
enclosing function. The logic is similar to that for ERR_EXIT
,
except that an implicit return
statement is executed instead of an
exit
. This will trigger an exit at the outermost level of a
non-interactive script.
Normally this option inherits the behaviour of ERR_EXIT
that
code followed by ‘&&
’ ‘||
’ does not trigger a return. Hence
in the following:
summit || true
no return is forced as the combined effect always has a zero return status.
Note. however, that if summit
in the above example is itself a
function, code inside it is considered separately: it may force a return
from summit
(assuming the option remains set within summit
), but
not from the enclosing context. This behaviour is different from
ERR_EXIT
which is unaffected by function scope.
EVAL_LINENO
<Z> ¶If set, line numbers of expressions evaluated using the builtin eval
are tracked separately of the enclosing environment. This applies both
to the parameter LINENO
and the line number output by the prompt
escape %i
. If the option is set, the prompt escape %N
will output
the string ‘(eval)
’ instead of the script or function name as an
indication. (The two prompt escapes are typically used in the parameter
PS4
to be output when the option XTRACE
is set.) If
EVAL_LINENO
is unset, the line number of the surrounding script or
function is retained during the evaluation.
EXEC
(+n
, ksh: +n
) <D> ¶Do execute commands. Without this option, commands are
read and checked for syntax errors, but not executed.
This option cannot be turned off in an interactive shell,
except when ‘-n
’ is supplied to the shell at startup.
FUNCTION_ARGZERO
<C> <Z> ¶When executing a shell function or sourcing a script, set $0
temporarily to the name of the function/script. Note that toggling
FUNCTION_ARGZERO
from on to off (or off to on) does not change the
current value of $0
. Only the state upon entry to the function or
script has an effect. Compare POSIX_ARGZERO
.
LOCAL_LOOPS
¶When this option is not set, the effect of break
and continue
commands may propagate outside function scope, affecting loops in
calling functions. When the option is set in a calling function, a
break
or a continue
that is not caught within a called function
(regardless of the setting of the option within that function)
produces a warning and the effect is cancelled.
LOCAL_OPTIONS
<K> ¶If this option is set at the point of return from a shell function,
most options (including this one) which were in force upon entry to
the function are restored; options that are not restored are
PRIVILEGED
and RESTRICTED
. Otherwise, only this option,
and the LOCAL_LOOPS
, XTRACE
and PRINT_EXIT_VALUE
options are
restored. Hence if this is explicitly unset by a shell function the
other options in force at the point of return will remain so.
A shell function can also guarantee itself a known shell configuration
with a formulation like ‘emulate -L zsh
’; the -L
activates
LOCAL_OPTIONS
.
LOCAL_PATTERNS
¶If this option is set at the point of return from a shell function,
the state of pattern disables, as set with the builtin command
‘disable -p
’, is restored to what it was when the function was
entered. The behaviour of this option is similar to the effect
of LOCAL_OPTIONS
on options; hence ‘emulate -L sh
’ (or
indeed any other emulation with the -L
option) activates
LOCAL_PATTERNS
.
LOCAL_TRAPS
<K> ¶If this option is set when a signal trap is set inside a function, then the
previous status of the trap for that signal will be restored when the
function exits. Note that this option must be set prior to altering the
trap behaviour in a function; unlike LOCAL_OPTIONS
, the value on exit
from the function is irrelevant. However, it does not need to be set
before any global trap for that to be correctly restored by a function.
For example,
unsetopt localtraps trap - INT fn() { setopt localtraps; trap {No value for `dsq'} INT; sleep 3; }
will restore normal handling of SIGINT
after the function exits.
MULTI_FUNC_DEF
<Z> ¶Allow definitions of multiple functions at once in the form ‘fn1
fn2
...()
’; if the option is not set, this causes
a parse error. Definition of multiple functions with the function
keyword is always allowed. Multiple function definitions are not often
used and can cause obscure errors.
MULTIOS
<Z> ¶Perform implicit tees or cats when multiple redirections are attempted (see Redirection).
OCTAL_ZEROES
<S> ¶Interpret any integer constant beginning with a 0 as octal, per IEEE Std 1003.2-1992 (ISO 9945-2:1993). This is not enabled by default as it causes problems with parsing of, for example, date and time strings with leading zeroes.
Sequences of digits indicating a numeric base such as the ‘08
’
component in ‘08#77
’ are always interpreted as decimal, regardless
of leading zeroes.
PIPE_FAIL
¶By default, when a pipeline exits the exit status recorded by the shell
and returned by the shell variable $?
reflects that of the
rightmost element of a pipeline. If this option is set, the exit status
instead reflects the status of the rightmost element of the pipeline
that was non-zero, or zero if all elements exited with zero status.
SOURCE_TRACE
¶If set, zsh will print an informational message announcing the name of
each file it loads. The format of the output is similar to that
for the XTRACE
option, with the message <sourcetrace>
.
A file may be loaded by the shell itself when it
starts up and shuts down (Startup/Shutdown Files
) or by the use of
the ‘source
’ and ‘dot
’ builtin commands.
TYPESET_SILENT
¶If this is unset, executing any of the ‘typeset
’ family of
commands with no options and a list of parameters that have no values
to be assigned but already exist will display the value of the parameter.
If the option is set, they will only be shown when parameters are selected
with the ‘-m
’ option. The option ‘-p
’ is available whether or not
the option is set.
TYPESET_TO_UNSET
<K> <S> ¶When declaring a new parameter with any of the ‘typeset
’ family of
related commands, the parameter remains unset unless and until a
value is explicity assigned to it, either in the ‘typeset
’ command
itself or as a later assignment statement.
VERBOSE
(-v
, ksh: -v
) ¶Print shell input lines as they are read.
XTRACE
(-x
, ksh: -x
) ¶Print commands and their arguments as they are executed. The
output is preceded by the value of $PS4
, formatted as described
in
Prompt Expansion.
APPEND_CREATE
<K> <S> ¶This option only applies when NO_CLOBBER
(-C
) is in effect.
If this option is not set, the shell will report an error when a
append redirection (>>
) is used on a file that does not already
exists (the traditional zsh behaviour of NO_CLOBBER
). If the option
is set, no error is reported (POSIX behaviour).
BASH_REMATCH
¶When set, matches performed with the =~
operator will set the
BASH_REMATCH
array variable, instead of the default MATCH
and
match
variables. The first element of the BASH_REMATCH
array
will contain the entire matched text and subsequent elements will contain
extracted substrings. This option makes more sense when KSH_ARRAYS
is
also set, so that the entire matched portion is stored at index 0 and the
first substring is at index 1. Without this option, the MATCH
variable
contains the entire matched text and the match
array variable contains
substrings.
BSD_ECHO
<S> ¶Make the echo
builtin compatible with the BSD echo(1) command.
This disables backslashed escape sequences in echo strings unless the
-e
option is specified.
CONTINUE_ON_ERROR
¶If a fatal error is encountered (see Errors), and the code is running in a script, the shell will resume execution at the next statement in the script at the top level, in other words outside all functions or shell constructs such as loops and conditions. This mimics the behaviour of interactive shells, where the shell returns to the line editor to read a new command; it was the normal behaviour in versions of zsh before 5.0.1.
CSH_JUNKIE_HISTORY
<C> ¶A history reference without an event specifier will always refer to the previous command. Without this option, such a history reference refers to the same event as the previous history reference on the current command line, defaulting to the previous command.
CSH_JUNKIE_LOOPS
<C> ¶Allow loop bodies to take the form ‘list; end
’ instead of
‘do
list; done
’.
CSH_JUNKIE_QUOTES
<C> ¶Changes the rules for single- and double-quoted text to match that of
csh. These require that embedded newlines be preceded by a backslash;
unescaped newlines will cause an error message.
In double-quoted strings, it is made impossible to escape ‘$
’, ‘`
’
or ‘"
’ (and ‘\
’ itself no longer needs escaping).
Command substitutions are only expanded once, and cannot be nested.
CSH_NULLCMD
<C> ¶Do not use the values of NULLCMD
and READNULLCMD
when running redirections with no command. This make
such redirections fail (see Redirection).
KSH_ARRAYS
<K> <S> ¶Emulate ksh array handling as closely as possible. If this option
is set, array elements are numbered from zero, an array parameter
without subscript refers to the first element instead of the whole array,
and braces are required to delimit a subscript (‘${path[2]}
’ rather
than just ‘$path[2]
’) or to apply modifiers to any parameter
(‘${PWD:h}
’ rather than ‘$PWD:h
’).
KSH_AUTOLOAD
<K> <S> ¶Emulate ksh function autoloading. This means that when a function is autoloaded, the corresponding file is merely executed, and must define the function itself. (By default, the function is defined to the contents of the file. However, the most common ksh-style case - of the file containing only a simple definition of the function - is always handled in the ksh-compatible manner.)
KSH_OPTION_PRINT
<K> ¶Alters the way options settings are printed: instead of separate lists of set and unset options, all options are shown, marked ‘on’ if they are in the non-default state, ‘off’ otherwise.
KSH_TYPESET
¶This option is now obsolete: a better appropximation to the behaviour of
other shells is obtained with the reserved word interface to
declare
, export
, float
, integer
, local
, readonly
and typeset
. Note that the option is only applied when the reserved
word interface is not in use.
Alters the way arguments to the typeset
family of commands, including
declare
, export
, float
, integer
, local
and
readonly
, are processed. Without this option, zsh will perform normal
word splitting after command and parameter expansion in arguments of an
assignment; with it, word splitting does not take place in those cases.
KSH_ZERO_SUBSCRIPT
¶Treat use of a subscript of value zero in array or string expressions as a
reference to the first element, i.e. the element that usually has the
subscript 1. Ignored if KSH_ARRAYS
is also set.
If neither this option nor KSH_ARRAYS
is set, accesses to an element of
an array or string with subscript zero return an empty element or string,
while attempts to set element zero of an array or string are treated as an
error. However, attempts to set an otherwise valid subscript range that
includes zero will succeed. For example, if KSH_ZERO_SUBSCRIPT
is not
set,
array[0]=(element)
is an error, while
array[0,1]=(element)
is not and will replace the first element of the array.
This option is for compatibility with older versions of the shell and is not recommended in new code.
POSIX_ALIASES
<K> <S> ¶When this option is set, reserved words are not candidates for alias expansion: it is still possible to declare any of them as an alias, but the alias will never be expanded. Reserved words are described in Reserved Words.
Alias expansion takes place while text is being read; hence when this
option is set it does not take effect until the end of any function or
other piece of shell code parsed as one unit. Note this may
cause differences from other shells even when the option is in
effect. For example, when running a command with ‘zsh -c
’,
or even ‘zsh -o posixaliases -c
’, the entire command argument is parsed
as one unit, so aliases defined within the argument are not available even
in later lines. If in doubt, avoid use of aliases in non-interactive
code.
POSIX_ARGZERO
¶This option may be used to temporarily disable FUNCTION_ARGZERO
and
thereby restore the value of $0
to the name used to invoke the shell
(or as set by the -c
command line option). For compatibility with
previous versions of the shell, emulations use NO_FUNCTION_ARGZERO
instead of POSIX_ARGZERO
, which may result in unexpected scoping of
$0
if the emulation mode is changed inside a function or script.
To avoid this, explicitly enable POSIX_ARGZERO
in the emulate
command:
emulate sh -o POSIX_ARGZERO
Note that NO_POSIX_ARGZERO
has no effect unless FUNCTION_ARGZERO
was already enabled upon entry to the function or script.
POSIX_BUILTINS
<K> <S> ¶When this option is set the command
builtin can be used to execute
shell builtin commands. Parameter assignments specified before shell
functions and special builtins are kept after the command completes unless
the special builtin is prefixed with the command
builtin. Special
builtins are
.
,
:
,
break
,
continue
,
declare
,
eval
,
exit
,
export
,
integer
,
local
,
readonly
,
return
,
set
,
shift
,
source
,
times
,
trap
and
unset
.
In addition, various error conditions associated with the above builtins
or exec
cause a non-interactive shell to exit and an interactive
shell to return to its top-level processing.
Furthermore, functions and shell builtins are not executed after
an exec
prefix; the command to be executed must be an external
command found in the path.
Furthermore, the getopts
builtin behaves in a POSIX-compatible
fashion in that the associated variable OPTIND
is not made
local to functions, and its value is calculated differently to match
other shells.
Moreover, the warning and special exit code from
[[ -o
non_existent_option ]]
are suppressed.
POSIX_IDENTIFIERS
<K> <S> ¶When this option is set, only the ASCII characters a
to z
, A
to
Z
, 0
to 9
and _
may be used in identifiers (names
of shell parameters and modules).
In addition, setting this option limits the effect of parameter
substitution with no braces, so that the expression $#
is treated as
the parameter $#
even if followed by a valid parameter name.
When it is unset, zsh allows expressions of the form $#
name
to refer to the length of $
name, even for special variables,
for example in expressions such as $#-
and $#*
.
Another difference is that with the option set assignment to an
unset variable in arithmetic context causes the variable to be created
as a scalar rather than a numeric type. So after ‘unset t; (( t = 3
))
’. without POSIX_IDENTIFIERS
set t
has integer type, while with
it set it has scalar type.
When the option is unset and multibyte character support is enabled (i.e. it
is compiled in and the option MULTIBYTE
is set), then additionally any
alphanumeric characters in the local character set may be used in
identifiers. Note that scripts and functions written with this feature are
not portable, and also that both options must be set before the script
or function is parsed; setting them during execution is not sufficient
as the syntax variable=
value has already been parsed as
a command rather than an assignment.
If multibyte character support is not compiled into the shell this option is ignored; all octets with the top bit set may be used in identifiers. This is non-standard but is the traditional zsh behaviour.
POSIX_STRINGS
<K> <S> ¶This option affects processing of quoted strings. Currently it only affects the behaviour of null characters, i.e. character 0 in the portable character set corresponding to US ASCII.
When this option is not set, null characters embedded within strings
of the form $'
...'
are treated as ordinary characters. The
entire string is maintained within the shell and output to files where
necessary, although owing to restrictions of the library interface
the string is truncated at the null character in file names, environment
variables, or in arguments to external programs.
When this option is set, the $'
...'
expression is truncated at
the null character. Note that remaining parts of the same string
beyond the termination of the quotes are not truncated.
For example, the command line argument a$'b\0c'd
is treated with
the option off as the characters a
, b
, null, c
, d
,
and with the option on as the characters a
, b
, d
.
POSIX_TRAPS
<K> <S> ¶When this option is set, the usual zsh behaviour of executing
traps for EXIT
on exit from shell functions is suppressed.
In that case, manipulating EXIT
traps always alters the global
trap for exiting the shell; the LOCAL_TRAPS
option is
ignored for the EXIT
trap.
Also, a return
statement executed in a trap with no argument passes
back from the function the value from the surrounding context, not from
code executed within the trap.
Furthermore, if a trap is set to be ignored, this state persists when a subshell is entered. Without the option, the trap would be reset to its default state at this point.
SH_FILE_EXPANSION
<K> <S> ¶Perform filename expansion (e.g., ~
expansion) before
parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion
and brace expansion.
If this option is unset, it is performed after
brace expansion, so things like ‘~$USERNAME
’ and
‘~{pfalstad,rc}
’ will work.
SH_NULLCMD
<K> <S> ¶Do not use the values of NULLCMD
and READNULLCMD
when doing redirections, use ‘:
’ instead (see Redirection).
SH_OPTION_LETTERS
<K> <S> ¶If this option is set the shell tries to interpret single letter options
(which are used with set
and setopt
) like ksh does.
This also affects the value of the -
special parameter.
SH_WORD_SPLIT
(-y
) <K> <S> ¶Causes field splitting to be performed on unquoted parameter expansions. Note that this option has nothing to do with word splitting. (See Parameter Expansion.)
TRAPS_ASYNC
¶While waiting for a program to exit, handle signals and run traps immediately. Otherwise the trap is run after a child process has exited. Note this does not affect the point at which traps are run for any case other than when the shell is waiting for a child process.
INTERACTIVE
(-i
, ksh: -i
) ¶This is an interactive shell. This option is set upon initialisation if
the standard input is a tty and commands are being read from standard input.
(See the discussion of SHIN_STDIN
.)
This heuristic may be overridden by specifying a state for this option
on the command line.
The value of this option can only be changed via flags supplied at
invocation of the shell.
It cannot be changed once zsh is running.
LOGIN
(-l
, ksh: -l
) ¶This is a login shell.
If this option is not explicitly set, the shell becomes a login shell if
the first character of the argv[0]
passed to the shell is a ‘-
’.
PRIVILEGED
(-p
, ksh: -p
) ¶Turn on privileged mode. Typically this is used when script is to be run
with elevated privileges. This should be done as follows directly with
the -p
option to zsh so that it takes effect during startup.
#!/bin/zsh -p
The option is enabled automatically on startup if the effective user (group) ID is not equal to the real user (group) ID. In this case, turning the option off causes the effective user and group IDs to be set to the real user and group IDs. Be aware that if that fails the shell may be running with different IDs than was intended so a script should check for failure and act accordingly, for example:
unsetopt privileged || exit
The PRIVILEGED
option disables sourcing user startup files.
If zsh is invoked as ‘sh
’ or ‘ksh
’ with this option set,
/etc/suid_profile
is sourced (after /etc/profile
on interactive
shells). Sourcing ~/.profile
is disabled and the contents of the
ENV
variable is ignored. This option cannot be changed using the
-m
option of setopt
and unsetopt
, and changing it inside a
function always changes it globally regardless of the LOCAL_OPTIONS
option.
RESTRICTED
(-r
) ¶Enables restricted mode. This option cannot be changed using
unsetopt
, and setting it inside a function always changes it
globally regardless of the LOCAL_OPTIONS
option. See
Restricted Shell.
SHIN_STDIN
(-s
, ksh: -s
) ¶Commands are being read from the standard input.
Commands are read from standard input if no command is specified with
-c
and no file of commands is specified. If SHIN_STDIN
is set explicitly on the command line,
any argument that would otherwise have been
taken as a file to run will instead be treated as a normal positional
parameter.
Note that setting or unsetting this option on the command line does not
necessarily affect the state the option will have while the shell is
running - that is purely an indicator of whether or not commands are
actually being read from standard input.
The value of this option can only be changed via flags supplied at
invocation of the shell.
It cannot be changed once zsh is running.
SINGLE_COMMAND
(-t
, ksh: -t
) ¶If the shell is reading from standard input, it exits after a single command
has been executed. This also makes the shell non-interactive, unless the
INTERACTIVE
option is explicitly set on the command line.
The value of this option can only be changed via flags supplied at
invocation of the shell.
It cannot be changed once zsh is running.
BEEP
(+B
) <D> ¶Beep on error in ZLE.
COMBINING_CHARS
¶Assume that the terminal displays combining characters correctly. Specifically, if a base alphanumeric character is followed by one or more zero-width punctuation characters, assume that the zero-width characters will be displayed as modifications to the base character within the same width. Not all terminals handle this. If this option is not set, zero-width characters are displayed separately with special mark-up.
If this option is set, the pattern test [[:WORD:]]
matches a
zero-width punctuation character on the assumption that it will be
used as part of a word in combination with a word character.
Otherwise the base shell does not handle combining characters specially.
EMACS
¶If ZLE is loaded, turning on this option has the equivalent effect
of ‘bindkey -e
’. In addition, the VI option is unset.
Turning it off has no effect. The option setting is
not guaranteed to reflect the current keymap. This option is
provided for compatibility; bindkey
is the recommended interface.
OVERSTRIKE
¶Start up the line editor in overstrike mode.
SINGLE_LINE_ZLE
(-M
) <K> ¶Use single-line command line editing instead of multi-line.
Note that although this is on by default in ksh emulation it only provides superficial compatibility with the ksh line editor and reduces the effectiveness of the zsh line editor. As it has no effect on shell syntax, many users may wish to disable this option when using ksh emulation interactively.
VI
¶If ZLE is loaded, turning on this option has the equivalent effect
of ‘bindkey -v
’. In addition, the EMACS option is unset.
Turning it off has no effect. The option setting is
not guaranteed to reflect the current keymap. This option is
provided for compatibility; bindkey
is the recommended interface.
ZLE
(-Z
) ¶Use the zsh line editor. Set by default in interactive shells connected to a terminal.
Some options have alternative names. These aliases are never used for output, but can be used just like normal option names when specifying options to the shell.
BRACE_EXPAND
¶NO_IGNORE_BRACES
(ksh and bash compatibility)
DOT_GLOB
¶GLOB_DOTS
(bash compatibility)
HASH_ALL
¶HASH_CMDS
(bash compatibility)
HIST_APPEND
¶APPEND_HISTORY
(bash compatibility)
HIST_EXPAND
¶BANG_HIST
(bash compatibility)
LOG
¶NO_HIST_NO_FUNCTIONS
(ksh compatibility)
MAIL_WARN
¶MAIL_WARNING
(bash compatibility)
ONE_CMD
¶SINGLE_COMMAND
(bash compatibility)
PHYSICAL
¶CHASE_LINKS
(ksh and bash compatibility)
PROMPT_VARS
¶PROMPT_SUBST
(bash compatibility)
STDIN
¶SHIN_STDIN
(ksh compatibility)
TRACK_ALL
¶HASH_CMDS
(ksh compatibility)
-0
CORRECT
-1
PRINT_EXIT_VALUE
-2
NO_BAD_PATTERN
-3
NO_NOMATCH
-4
GLOB_DOTS
-5
NOTIFY
-6
BG_NICE
-7
IGNORE_EOF
-8
MARK_DIRS
-9
AUTO_LIST
-B
NO_BEEP
-C
NO_CLOBBER
-D
PUSHD_TO_HOME
-E
PUSHD_SILENT
-F
NO_GLOB
-G
NULL_GLOB
-H
RM_STAR_SILENT
-I
IGNORE_BRACES
-J
AUTO_CD
-K
NO_BANG_HIST
-L
SUN_KEYBOARD_HACK
-M
SINGLE_LINE_ZLE
-N
AUTO_PUSHD
-O
CORRECT_ALL
-P
RC_EXPAND_PARAM
-Q
PATH_DIRS
-R
LONG_LIST_JOBS
-S
REC_EXACT
-T
CDABLE_VARS
-U
MAIL_WARNING
-V
NO_PROMPT_CR
-W
AUTO_RESUME
-X
LIST_TYPES
-Y
MENU_COMPLETE
-Z
ZLE
-a
ALL_EXPORT
-e
ERR_EXIT
-f
NO_RCS
-g
HIST_IGNORE_SPACE
-h
HIST_IGNORE_DUPS
-i
INTERACTIVE
-k
INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
-l
LOGIN
-m
MONITOR
-n
NO_EXEC
-p
PRIVILEGED
-r
RESTRICTED
-s
SHIN_STDIN
-t
SINGLE_COMMAND
-u
NO_UNSET
-v
VERBOSE
-w
CHASE_LINKS
-x
XTRACE
-y
SH_WORD_SPLIT
-C
NO_CLOBBER
-T
TRAPS_ASYNC
-X
MARK_DIRS
-a
ALL_EXPORT
-b
NOTIFY
-e
ERR_EXIT
-f
NO_GLOB
-i
INTERACTIVE
-l
LOGIN
-m
MONITOR
-n
NO_EXEC
-p
PRIVILEGED
-r
RESTRICTED
-s
SHIN_STDIN
-t
SINGLE_COMMAND
-u
NO_UNSET
-v
VERBOSE
-x
XTRACE
-A
Used by set
for setting arrays
-b
Used on the command line to specify end of option processing
-c
Used on the command line to specify a single command
-m
Used by setopt
for pattern-matching option setting
-o
Used in all places to allow use of long option names
-s
Used by set
to sort positional parameters
Some shell builtin commands take options as described in individual
entries; these are often referred to in the list below as ‘flags
’ to
avoid confusion with shell options, which may also have an effect on the
behaviour of builtin commands. In this introductory section,
‘option
’ always has the meaning of an option to a command that should
be familiar to most command line users.
Typically, options are single letters preceded by a hyphen (-
).
Options that take an argument accept it either immediately following the
option letter or after white space, for example ‘print -C3 {1..9}
’ or
‘print -C 3 {1..9}
’ are equivalent. Arguments to options are not the
same as arguments to the command; the documentation indicates which is
which. Options that do not take an argument may be combined in a single
word, for example ‘print -rca -- *
’ and ‘print -r -c -a -- *
’ are
equivalent.
Some shell builtin commands also take options that begin with ‘+
’
instead of ‘-
’. The list below makes clear which commands these
are.
Options (together with their individual arguments, if any) must appear in a group before any non-option arguments; once the first non-option argument has been found, option processing is terminated.
All builtin commands other than ‘echo
’ and precommand modifiers,
even those that have no options, can be given the argument ‘-
-
’
to terminate option processing. This indicates that the following words
are non-option arguments, but is otherwise ignored. This is useful in
cases where arguments to the command may begin with ‘-
’. For
historical reasons, most builtin commands (including ‘echo
’) also
recognize a single ‘-
’ in a separate word for this purpose; note
that this is less standard and use of ‘-
-
’ is recommended.
-
simple commandSee Precommand Modifiers.
.
file [ arg ... ] ¶Read commands from file and execute them in the current shell environment.
If file does not contain a slash, or if PATH_DIRS
is set,
the shell looks in the components of $path
to find the directory
containing file. Files in the current directory are not read
unless ‘.
’ appears somewhere in $path
. If a file named
‘file.zwc
’ is found, is newer than file, and is the
compiled form (created with the zcompile
builtin) of file,
then commands are read from that file instead of file.
If any arguments arg are given, they become the positional parameters; the old positional parameters are restored when the file is done executing. However, if no arguments are given, the positional parameters remain those of the calling context, and no restoring is done.
If file was not found the return status is 127; if file was found but contained a syntax error the return status is 126; else the return status is the exit status of the last command executed.
:
[ arg ... ] ¶This command does nothing, although normal argument expansions is performed which may have effects on shell parameters. A zero exit status is returned.
alias
[ {+
|-
}gmrsL
] [ name[=
value] ... ] ¶For each name with a corresponding value, define an alias
with that value. A trailing space in value causes the next word
to be checked for alias expansion. If the -g
flag is present,
define a global alias; global aliases are expanded even if they do not
occur in command position:
% perldoc --help 2>&1 | grep 'built-in functions' -f Search Perl built-in functions % alias -g HG='--help 2>&1 | grep' % perldoc HG 'built-in functions' -f Search Perl built-in functions
If the -s
flag is present, define a suffix alias: if the command
word on a command line is in the form ‘text.
name’, where
text is any non-empty string, it is replaced by the text
‘value text.
name’. Note that name is treated as
a literal string, not a pattern. A trailing space in value is not
special in this case. For example,
alias -s ps='gv --'
will cause the command ‘*.ps
’ to be expanded to ‘gv -- *.ps
’. As
alias expansion is carried out earlier than globbing, the ‘*.ps
’ will
then be expanded. Suffix aliases constitute a different name space from
other aliases (so in the above example it is still possible
to create an alias for the command ps
) and the two sets are never
listed together.
For each name with no value,
print the value of name, if any. With no arguments, print all
currently defined aliases other than suffix aliases. If the -m
flag
is given the arguments are taken as patterns (they should be quoted to
preserve them from being interpreted as glob patterns), and the aliases
matching these patterns are printed. When printing aliases and one of
the -g
, -r
or -s
flags is present, restrict the printing to
global, regular or suffix aliases, respectively; a regular alias is one
which is neither a global nor a suffix alias. Using ‘+
’
instead of ‘-
’, or ending the option list with a single
‘+
’, prevents the values of the aliases from being printed.
If the -L
flag is present, then print each
alias in a manner suitable for putting in a startup script. The exit
status is nonzero if a name (with no value) is given for
which no alias has been defined.
For more on aliases, include common problems, see Aliasing.
autoload
[ {+
|-
}RTUXdkmrtWz
] [ -w
] [ name ... ] ¶See the section ‘Autoloading Functions’ in Functions for full details. The fpath
parameter
will be searched to find the function definition when the function is
first referenced.
If name consists of an absolute path, the function is defined to
load from the file given (searching as usual for dump files in the given
location). The name of the function is the basename (non-directory
part) of the file. It is normally an error if the function is not found
in the given location; however, if the option -d
is given, searching
for the function defaults to $fpath
. If a function is loaded by
absolute path, any functions loaded from it that are marked for
autoload
without an absolute path have the load path of the parent
function temporarily prepended to $fpath
.
If the option -r
or -R
is given, the function is searched for
immediately and the location is recorded internally for use when the
function is executed; a relative path is expanded using the value of
$PWD
. This protects against a change to $fpath
after the call
to autoload
. With -r
, if the function is not found, it is
silently left unresolved until execution; with -R
, an error message
is printed and command processing aborted immediately the search fails,
i.e. at the autoload
command rather than at function execution..
The flag -X
may be used only inside a shell function. It causes the
calling function to be marked for autoloading and then immediately
loaded and executed, with the current array of positional parameters as
arguments. This replaces the previous definition of the function. If
no function definition is found, an error is printed and the function
remains undefined and marked for autoloading. If an argument is given,
it is used as a directory (i.e. it does not include the name of the
function) in which the function is to be found; this may be combined
with the -d
option to allow the function search to default to $fpath
if it is not in the given location.
The flag +X
attempts to load each name as an autoloaded function,
but does not execute it. The exit status is zero (success) if the
function was not previously defined and a definition for it was found.
This does not replace any existing definition of the function. The
exit status is nonzero (failure) if the function was already defined or
when no definition was found. In the latter case the function remains
undefined and marked for autoloading. If ksh-style autoloading is
enabled, the function created will contain the contents of the file
plus a call to the function itself appended to it, thus giving normal
ksh autoloading behaviour on the first call to the function.
If the -m
flag is also given each name is treated as a
pattern and all functions already marked for autoload that match the
pattern are loaded.
With the -t
flag, turn on execution tracing; with -T
, turn on
execution tracing only for the current function, turning it off on entry
to any called functions that do not also have tracing enabled.
With the -U
flag, alias expansion is suppressed when the function is
loaded.
With the -w
flag, the names are taken as names of files compiled
with the zcompile
builtin, and all functions defined in them are
marked for autoloading.
The flags -z
and -k
mark the function to be autoloaded using the
zsh or ksh style, as if the option KSH_AUTOLOAD
were unset or were
set, respectively. The flags override the setting of the option at the
time the function is loaded.
Note that the autoload
command makes no attempt to ensure the
shell options set during the loading or execution of the file have
any particular value. For this, the emulate
command can be used:
emulate zsh -c 'autoload -Uz func'
arranges that when func is loaded the shell is in native zsh
emulation, and this emulation is also applied when func is run.
Some of the functions of autoload
are also provided by functions
-u
or functions -U
, but autoload
is a more comprehensive
interface.
bg
[ job ... ] ¶&
Put each specified job in the background, or the current job if none is specified.
bindkey
See Zle Builtins.
break
[ n ] ¶Exit from an enclosing for
, while
,
until
, select
or repeat
loop. If an arithmetic expression n
is specified, then break n levels instead of just one.
builtin
name [ args ... ] ¶Executes the builtin name, with the given args.
bye
¶Same as exit
.
cap
See The zsh/cap Module.
cd
[ -qsLP
] [ arg ] ¶cd
[ -qsLP
] old newcd
[ -qsLP
] {+
|-
}nChange the current directory. In the first form, change the
current directory to arg, or to the value of $HOME
if
arg is not specified. If arg is ‘-
’, change to the
previous directory.
Otherwise, if arg begins with a slash, attempt to change to the directory given by arg.
If arg does not begin with a slash, the behaviour depends on whether
the current directory ‘.
’ occurs in the list of directories contained
in the shell parameter cdpath
. If it does not, first attempt to change
to the directory arg under the current directory, and if that fails
but cdpath
is set and contains at least one element attempt to change
to the directory arg under each component of cdpath
in turn until
successful. If ‘.
’ occurs in cdpath
, then cdpath
is searched
strictly in order so that ‘.
’ is only tried at the appropriate point.
The order of testing cdpath
is modified if the option POSIX_CD
is set, as described in the documentation for the option.
If no directory is found, the option CDABLE_VARS
is set, and a
parameter named arg exists whose value begins with a slash, treat its
value as the directory. In that case, the parameter is added to the named
directory hash table.
The second form of cd
substitutes the string new
for the string old in the name of the current directory,
and tries to change to this new directory.
The third form of cd
extracts an entry from the directory
stack, and changes to that directory. An argument of the form
‘+
n’ identifies a stack entry by counting from the left
of the list shown by the dirs
command, starting with zero.
An argument of the form ‘-
n’ counts from the right.
If the PUSHD_MINUS
option is set, the meanings of ‘+
’
and ‘-
’ in this context are swapped.
If the POSIX_CD
option is set, this form of cd
is not recognised
and will be interpreted as the first form.
If the -q
(quiet) option is specified, the hook function chpwd
and the functions in the array chpwd_functions
are not called.
This is useful for calls to cd
that do not change the environment
seen by an interactive user.
If the -s
option is specified, cd
refuses to change the current
directory if the given pathname contains symlinks. If the -P
option
is given or the CHASE_LINKS
option is set, symbolic links are resolved
to their true values. If the -L
option is given symbolic links are
retained in the directory (and not resolved) regardless of the state of
the CHASE_LINKS
option.
chdir
¶Same as cd
.
clone
See The zsh/clone Module.
command
[ -pvV
] simple command ¶The simple command argument is taken as an external command instead of
a function or builtin and is executed. If the POSIX_BUILTINS
option
is set, builtins will also be executed but certain special properties
of them are suppressed. The -p
flag causes a default path to be
searched instead of that in $path
. With the -v
flag, command
is similar to whence
and with -V
, it is equivalent to whence
-v
.
See also Precommand Modifiers.
comparguments
compcall
compctl
compdescribe
compfiles
compgroups
compquote
comptags
comptry
compvalues
continue
[ n ] ¶Resume the next iteration of the enclosing
for
, while
, until
, select
or
repeat
loop. If an arithmetic expression n is specified, break out of
n-1 loops and resume at the nth enclosing loop.
declare
¶Same as typeset
.
dirs
[ -c
] [ arg ... ] ¶dirs
[ -lpv
]With no arguments, print the contents of the directory stack.
Directories are added to this stack with the pushd
command,
and removed with the cd
or popd
commands.
If arguments are specified, load them onto the directory stack,
replacing anything that was there, and push the current directory
onto the stack.
-c
clear the directory stack.
-l
print directory names in full instead of using of using ~
expressions (Filename Expansion).
-p
print directory entries one per line.
-v
number the directories in the stack when printing.
disable
[ -afmprs
] name ... ¶Temporarily disable the named hash table elements or patterns. The default
is to disable builtin commands. This allows you to use an external
command with the same name as a builtin command. The -a
option
causes disable
to act on regular or global aliases. The -s
option causes disable
to act on suffix aliases. The -f
option causes
disable
to act on shell functions. The -r
options causes
disable
to act on reserved words. Without arguments all disabled
hash table elements from the corresponding hash table are printed.
With the -m
flag the arguments are taken as patterns (which should be
quoted to prevent them from undergoing filename expansion), and all hash
table elements from the corresponding hash table matching these patterns
are disabled. Disabled objects can be enabled with the enable
command.
With the option -p
, name ... refer to elements of the
shell’s pattern syntax as described in Filename Generation.
Certain elements can be disabled separately, as given below.
Note that patterns
not allowed by the current settings for the options EXTENDED_GLOB
,
KSH_GLOB
and SH_GLOB
are never enabled, regardless of the
setting here. For example, if EXTENDED_GLOB
is not active,
the pattern ^
is ineffective even if ‘disable -p "^"
’ has
not been issued. The list below indicates any option settings
that restrict the use of the pattern. It should be noted that
setting SH_GLOB
has a wider effect than merely disabling patterns
as certain expressions, in particular those involving parentheses,
are parsed differently.
The following patterns may be disabled; all the strings need quoting on the command line to prevent them from being interpreted immediately as patterns and the patterns are shown below in single quotes as a reminder.
'?'
The pattern character ?
wherever it occurs, including when preceding
a parenthesis with KSH_GLOB
.
'*'
The pattern character *
wherever it occurs, including recursive
globbing and when preceding a parenthesis with KSH_GLOB
.
'['
Character classes.
'<'
(NO_SH_GLOB
)Numeric ranges.
'|'
(NO_SH_GLOB
)Alternation in grouped patterns, case statements, or KSH_GLOB parenthesised expressions.
'('
(NO_SH_GLOB
)Grouping using single parentheses. Disabling this does not disable the
use of parentheses for KSH_GLOB
where they are introduced by a
special character, nor for glob qualifiers (use ‘setopt
NO_BARE_GLOB_QUAL
’ to disable glob qualifiers that use parentheses
only).
'~'
(EXTENDED_GLOB
)Exclusion in the form A~
B.
'^'
(EXTENDED_GLOB
)Exclusion in the form A^
B.
'#'
(EXTENDED_GLOB
)The pattern character #
wherever it occurs, both for
repetition of a previous pattern and for indicating globbing flags.
'?('
(KSH_GLOB
)The grouping form ?(
...)
. Note this is also
disabled if '?'
is disabled.
'*('
(KSH_GLOB
)The grouping form *(
...)
. Note this is also
disabled if '*'
is disabled.
'+('
(KSH_GLOB
)The grouping form +(
...)
.
'!('
(KSH_GLOB
)The grouping form !(
...)
.
'@('
(KSH_GLOB
)The grouping form @(
...)
.
disown
[ job ... ] ¶&|
&!
Remove the specified jobs from the job table; the shell will no longer report their status, and will not complain if you try to exit an interactive shell with them running or stopped. If no job is specified, disown the current job.
If the jobs are currently stopped and the AUTO_CONTINUE
option
is not set, a warning is printed containing information about how to
make them running after they have been disowned. If one of the latter
two forms is used, the jobs will automatically be made running,
independent of the setting of the AUTO_CONTINUE
option.
echo
[ -neE
] [ arg ... ] ¶Write each arg on the standard output, with a space separating
each one.
If the -n
flag is not present, print a newline at the end.
echo
recognizes the following escape sequences:
\a
bell character
\b
backspace
\c
suppress subsequent characters and final newline
\e
escape
\f
form feed
\n
linefeed (newline)
\r
carriage return
\t
horizontal tab
\v
vertical tab
\\
backslash
\0
NNNcharacter code in octal
\x
NNcharacter code in hexadecimal
\u
NNNNunicode character code in hexadecimal
\U
NNNNNNNNunicode character code in hexadecimal
The -E
flag, or the BSD_ECHO
option, can be used to disable
these escape sequences. In the latter case, -e
flag can be used to
enable them.
Note that for standards compliance a double dash does not terminate
option processing; instead, it is printed directly. However, a
single dash does terminate option processing, so the first dash,
possibly following options, is not printed, but everything following it
is printed as an argument. The single dash behaviour is different
from other shells. For a more portable way of printing text, see
printf
, and for a more controllable way of printing text within zsh,
see print
.
echotc
echoti
emulate
[ -lLR
] [ {zsh
|sh
|ksh
|csh
} [ flags ... ] ] ¶Without any argument print current emulation mode.
With single argument set up zsh options to emulate the specified shell
as much as possible.
csh will never be fully emulated.
If the argument is not one of the shells listed above, zsh
will be used as a default; more precisely, the tests performed on the
argument are the same as those used to determine the emulation at startup
based on the shell name, see
Compatibility
. In addition to setting shell options, the command also restores
the pristine state of pattern enables, as if all patterns had been
enabled using enable -p
.
If the emulate
command occurs inside a function that has been
marked for execution tracing with functions -t
then the xtrace
option will be turned on regardless of emulation mode or other options.
Note that code executed inside the function by the .
, source
, or
eval
commands is not considered to be running directly from the
function, hence does not provoke this behaviour.
If the -R
switch is given, all settable options
are reset to their default value corresponding to the specified emulation
mode, except for certain options describing the interactive
environment; otherwise, only those options likely to cause portability
problems in scripts and functions are altered. If the -L
switch is given,
the options LOCAL_OPTIONS
, LOCAL_PATTERNS
and LOCAL_TRAPS
will be set as
well, causing the effects of the emulate
command and any setopt
,
disable -p
or enable -p
, and trap
commands to be local to
the immediately surrounding shell
function, if any; normally these options are turned off in all emulation
modes except ksh
. The -L
switch is mutually exclusive with the
use of -c
in flags.
If there is a single argument and the -l
switch is given, the
options that would be set or unset (the latter indicated with the prefix
‘no
’) are listed. -l
can be combined with -L
or -R
and
the list will be modified in the appropriate way. Note the list does
not depend on the current setting of options, i.e. it includes all
options that may in principle change, not just those that would actually
change.
The flags may be any of the invocation-time flags described in
Invocation,
except that ‘-o EMACS
’ and ‘-o VI
’ may not be used. Flags such
as ‘+r
’/‘+o RESTRICTED
’ may be prohibited in some circumstances.
If -c
arg appears in flags, arg is evaluated while the
requested emulation is temporarily in effect. In this case the emulation
mode and all options are restored to their previous values before
emulate
returns. The -R
switch may precede the name of the shell
to emulate; note this has a meaning distinct from including -R
in
flags.
Use of -c
enables ‘sticky’ emulation mode for functions defined
within the evaluated expression: the emulation mode is associated
thereafter with the function so that whenever the function is executed
the emulation (respecting the -R
switch, if present) and all
options are set (and pattern disables cleared)
before entry to the function, and the state is restored after exit.
If the function is called when the sticky emulation is already in
effect, either within an ‘emulate
shell -c
’ expression or
within another function with the same sticky emulation, entry and exit
from the function do not cause options to be altered (except due to
standard processing such as the LOCAL_OPTIONS
option). This also
applies to functions marked for autoload within the sticky emulation;
the appropriate set of options will be applied at the point the
function is loaded as well as when it is run.
For example:
emulate sh -c 'fni() { setopt cshnullglob; } fno() { fni; }' fno
The two functions fni
and fno
are defined with sticky sh
emulation. fno
is then executed, causing options associated
with emulations to be set to their values in sh
. fno
then
calls fni
; because fni
is also marked for sticky sh
emulation, no option changes take place on entry to or exit from it.
Hence the option cshnullglob
, turned off by sh
emulation, will
be turned on within fni
and remain on return to fno
. On exit
from fno
, the emulation mode and all options will be restored to the
state they were in before entry to the temporary emulation.
The documentation above is typically sufficient for the intended purpose of executing code designed for other shells in a suitable environment. More detailed rules follow.
The sticky emulation environment provided by ‘emulate
shell -c
’ is identical to that provided by entry to
a function marked for sticky emulation as a consequence of being
defined in such an environment. Hence, for example, the sticky
emulation is inherited by subfunctions defined within functions
with sticky emulation.
No change of options takes place on entry to or exit from functions that are not marked for sticky emulation, other than those that would normally take place, even if those functions are called within sticky emulation.
No special handling is provided for functions marked for
autoload
nor for functions present in wordcode created by
the zcompile
command.
The presence or absence of the -R
switch to emulate
corresponds to different sticky emulation modes, so for example
‘emulate sh -c
’, ‘emulate -R sh -c
’ and ‘emulate csh -c
’
are treated as three distinct sticky emulations.
Difference in shell options supplied in addition to the
basic emulation also mean the sticky emulations are different, so for
example ‘emulate zsh -c
’ and ‘emulate zsh -o cbases -c
’ are
treated as distinct sticky emulations.
enable
[ -afmprs
] name ... ¶Enable the named hash table elements, presumably disabled
earlier with disable
. The default is to enable builtin commands.
The -a
option causes enable
to act on regular or global aliases.
The -s
option causes enable
to act on suffix aliases.
The -f
option causes enable
to act on shell functions. The -r
option causes enable
to act on reserved words. Without arguments
all enabled hash table elements from the corresponding hash table are
printed. With the -m
flag the arguments are taken as patterns
(should be quoted) and all hash table elements from the corresponding
hash table matching these patterns are enabled. Enabled objects can be
disabled with the disable
builtin command.
enable -p
reenables patterns disabled with disable -p
. Note
that it does not override globbing options; for example, ‘enable -p
"~"
’ does not cause the pattern character ~
to be active unless
the EXTENDED_GLOB
option is also set. To enable all possible
patterns (so that they may be individually disabled with disable -p
),
use ‘setopt EXTENDED_GLOB KSH_GLOB NO_SH_GLOB
’.
eval
[ arg ... ] ¶Read the arguments as input to the shell and execute the resulting command(s) in the current shell process. The return status is the same as if the commands had been executed directly by the shell; if there are no args or they contain no commands (i.e. are an empty string or whitespace) the return status is zero.
exec
[ -cl
] [ -a
argv0 ] [ command [ arg ... ] ]Replace the current shell with command rather than forking. If command is a shell builtin command or a shell function, the shell executes it, and exits when the command is complete.
With -c
clear the environment; with -l
prepend -
to the
argv[0]
string of the command executed (to simulate a login shell);
with -a
argv0 set the argv[0]
string of the command
executed.
See Precommand Modifiers.
If the option POSIX_BUILTINS
is set, command is never
interpreted as a shell builtin command or shell function. This
means further precommand modifiers such as builtin
and
noglob
are also not interpreted within the shell. Hence
command is always found by searching the command path.
If command is omitted but any redirections are specified, then the redirections will take effect in the current shell.
exit
[ n ] ¶Exit the shell with the exit status specified by an arithmetic
expression n; if none
is specified, use the exit status from the last command executed.
An EOF condition will also cause the shell to exit, unless
the IGNORE_EOF
option is set.
See notes at the end of
Jobs & Signals for some possibly unexpected interactions
of the exit
command with jobs.
export
[ name[=
value] ... ] ¶The specified names are marked for automatic export
to the environment of subsequently executed commands.
Equivalent to typeset -gx
.
If a parameter specified does not
already exist, it is created in the global scope.
false
[ arg ... ] ¶Do nothing and return an exit status of 1.
fc
[ -e
ename ] [ -s
] [ -LI
] [ -m
match ] [ old=
new ... ] [ first [ last ] ]fc -l
[ -LI
] [ -nrdfEiD
] [ -t
timefmt ] [ -m
match ]
[ old=
new ... ] [ first [ last ] ]fc -p
[ -a
] [ filename [ histsize [ savehistsize ] ] ]fc
-P
fc
-ARWI
[ filename ]The fc
command controls the interactive history mechanism. Note
that reading and writing of history options is only performed if the
shell is interactive. Usually this is detected automatically, but
it can be forced by setting the interactive
option when starting the
shell.
The first two forms of this command select a range of events from
first to last from the history list. The arguments first
and last may be specified as a number or as a string. A negative
number is used as an offset to the current history event number. A string
specifies the most recent event beginning with the given string. All
substitutions old=
new, if any, are then performed on the
text of the events.
The range of events selected by numbers can be narrowed further by the following flags.
-I
restricts to only internal events (not from $HISTFILE
)
-L
restricts to only local events (not from other shells, see
SHARE_HISTORY
in Description of Options – note that $HISTFILE
is
considered local when read at startup)
-m
takes the first argument as a pattern (which should be quoted) and only the history events matching this pattern are considered
If first is not specified, it will be set to -1 (the most recent
event), or to -16 if the -l
flag is given.
If last is not specified, it will be set to first,
or to -1 if the -l
flag is given.
However, if the current event has added entries to the history with
‘print -s
’ or ‘fc -R
’, then the default last for -l
includes all new history entries since the current event began.
When the -l
flag is given, the resulting events are listed on
standard output. Otherwise the editor program specified by -e
ename
is invoked on a file containing these history events. If -e
is not given, the
value of the parameter FCEDIT
is used; if that is not set the value of
the parameter EDITOR
is used; if that is not set a builtin default,
usually ‘vi
’ is used. If ename is ‘-
’, no editor is invoked.
When editing is complete, the edited command is executed.
The flag ‘-s
’ is equivalent to ‘-e -
’.
The flag -r
reverses the order of the events and the
flag -n
suppresses event numbers when listing.
Also when listing,
-d
prints timestamps for each event
-f
prints full time-date stamps in the US
‘MM/
DD/
YY hh:
mm’ format
-E
prints full time-date stamps in the European
‘dd.
mm.
yyyy hh:
mm’ format
-i
prints full time-date stamps in ISO8601
‘yyyy-
mm-
dd hh:
mm’ format
-t
fmtprints time and date stamps in the given format;
fmt is formatted with the strftime function with the zsh extensions
described for the %D{
string}
prompt format in
Prompt Expansion. The resulting formatted string must be
no more than 256 characters or will not be printed
-D
prints elapsed times; may be combined with one of the options above
‘fc -p
’ pushes the current history list onto a stack and switches to a
new history list. If the -a
option is also specified, this history list
will be automatically popped when the current function scope is exited, which
is a much better solution than creating a trap function to call ‘fc -P
’
manually. If no arguments are specified, the history list is left empty,
$HISTFILE
is unset, and $HISTSIZE
& $SAVEHIST
are set to their
default values. If one argument is given, $HISTFILE
is set to that
filename, $HISTSIZE
& $SAVEHIST
are left unchanged, and the history
file is read in (if it exists) to initialize the new list. If a second
argument is specified, $HISTSIZE
& $SAVEHIST
are instead set to the
single specified numeric value. Finally, if a third argument is specified,
$SAVEHIST
is set to a separate value from $HISTSIZE
. You are free to
change these environment values for the new history list however you desire
in order to manipulate the new history list.
‘fc -P
’ pops the history list back to an older list saved by ‘fc -p
’.
The current list is saved to its $HISTFILE
before it is destroyed
(assuming that $HISTFILE
and $SAVEHIST
are set appropriately, of
course). The values of $HISTFILE
, $HISTSIZE
, and $SAVEHIST
are
restored to the values they had when ‘fc -p
’ was called. Note that this
restoration can conflict with making these variables "local", so your best
bet is to avoid local declarations for these variables in functions that use
‘fc -p
’. The one other guaranteed-safe combination is declaring these
variables to be local at the top of your function and using the automatic
option (-a
) with ‘fc -p
’. Finally, note that it is legal to manually
pop a push marked for automatic popping if you need to do so before the
function exits.
‘fc -R
’ reads the history from the given file,
‘fc -W
’ writes the history out to the given file,
and ‘fc -A
’ appends the history out to the given file.
If no filename is specified, the $HISTFILE
is assumed.
If the -I
option is added to -R
, only those events that are
not already contained within the internal history list are added.
If the -I
option is added to -A
or -W
, only those
events that are new since last incremental append/write to
the history file are appended/written.
In any case, the created file will have no more than $SAVEHIST
entries.
fg
[ job ... ] ¶Bring each specified job in turn to the foreground. If no job is specified, resume the current job.
float
[ {+
|-
}Hghlprtux
] [ {+
|-
}EFLRZ
[ n ] ] [ name[=
value] ... ] ¶Equivalent to typeset -E
, except that options irrelevant to floating
point numbers are not permitted.
functions
[ {+
|-
}UkmtTuWz
] [ -x
num ] [ name ... ] ¶functions -c
oldfn newfnfunctions -M
[-s
] mathfn [ min [ max [ shellfn ] ] ]functions -M
[ -m
pattern ... ]functions +M
[ -m
] mathfn ...Equivalent to typeset -f
, with the exception of the -c
, -x
,
-M
and -W
options. For functions -u
and functions -U
,
see autoload
, which provides additional options. For functions -t
and functions -T
, see typeset -f
.
The -x
option indicates that any functions output will have
each leading tab for indentation, added by the shell to show syntactic
structure, expanded to the given number num of spaces. num
can also be 0 to suppress all indentation.
The -W
option turns on the option WARN_NESTED_VAR
for the named
function or functions only. The option is turned off at the start of
nested functions (apart from anonoymous functions) unless the called
function also has the -W
attribute.
The -c
option causes oldfn to be copied to newfn. The
copy is efficiently handled internally by reference counting. If
oldfn was marked for autoload it is first loaded and if this
fails the copy fails. Either function may subsequently be redefined
without affecting the other. A typical idiom is that oldfn is the
name of a library shell function which is then redefined to call
newfn
, thereby installing a modified version of the function.
Use of the -M
option may not be combined with any of the options
handled by typeset -f
.
functions -M
mathfn defines mathfn as the name of
a mathematical function recognised in all forms of arithmetical expressions;
see
Arithmetic Evaluation. By default mathfn may take
any number of comma-separated arguments. If min is given,
it must have exactly min args; if min and max are
both given, it must have at least min and at most max
args. max may be -1 to indicate that there is no upper limit.
By default the function is implemented by a shell function of the same
name; if shellfn is specified it gives the name of the corresponding
shell function while mathfn remains the name used in arithmetical
expressions. The name of the function in $0
is mathfn (not
shellfn as would usually be the case), provided the option
FUNCTION_ARGZERO
is in effect. The positional parameters in the shell
function correspond to the arguments of the mathematical function call.
The result of the last arithmetical expression evaluated inside the shell
function gives the result of the mathematical function. This is not limited to
arithmetic substitutions of the form $((
...))
,
but also includes arithmetical expressions evaluated in any other way, including
by the let
builtin,
by ((
...))
statements,
and even
by the return
builtin
and
by array subscripts.
Therefore, care must be taken not to use syntactical constructs that perform
arithmetic evaluation after evaluating what is to be the result of the function.
For example:
# WRONG zmath_cube() { (( $1 * $1 * $1 )) return 0 } functions -M cube 1 1 zmath_cube print $(( cube(3) ))
This will print ‘0
’ because of the return
.
Commenting the return
out would lead to a different problem: the
((
...))
statement would become
the last statement in the function, so the return status ($?
) of the
function would be non-zero (indicating failure) whenever the arithmetic
result of the function would happen to be zero (numerically):
# WRONG zmath_cube() { (( $1 * $1 * $1 )) } functions -M cube 1 1 zmath_cube print $(( cube(0) ))
Instead, the true
builtin can be used:
# RIGHT zmath_cube() { (( $1 * $1 * $1 )) true } functions -M cube 1 1 zmath_cube print $(( cube(3) ))
If the additional option -s
is given to functions -M
, the
argument to the function is a single string: anything between the
opening and matching closing parenthesis is passed to the function as a
single argument, even if it includes commas or white space. The minimum
and maximum argument specifiers must therefore be 1 if given. An empty
argument list is passed as a zero-length string.
Thus, the following string function takes a single argument, including
the commas, and prints 11:
stringfn() { (( $#1 )); true } functions -Ms stringfn print $(( stringfn(foo,bar,rod) ))
functions -M
with no arguments lists all such user-defined functions in
the same form as a definition. With the additional option -m
and
a list of arguments, all functions whose mathfn matches one of
the pattern arguments are listed.
function +M
removes the list of mathematical functions; with the
additional option -m
the arguments are treated as patterns and
all functions whose mathfn matches the pattern are removed. Note
that the shell function implementing the behaviour is not removed
(regardless of whether its name coincides with mathfn).
getcap
See The zsh/cap Module.
getln
[ -AclneE
] name ... ¶Read the top value from the buffer stack and put it in
the shell parameter name. Equivalent to
read -zr
.
getopts
optstring name [ arg ... ] ¶Checks the args for legal options. If the args are omitted,
use the positional parameters. A valid option argument
begins with a ‘+
’ or a ‘-
’. An argument not beginning with
a ‘+
’ or a ‘-
’, or the argument ‘-
-
’, ends the options.
Note that a single ‘-
’ is not considered a valid option argument.
optstring contains the letters that getopts
recognizes. If a letter is followed by a ‘:
’, that option
requires an argument. The options can be
separated from the argument by blanks.
Each time it is invoked, getopts
places the option letter it finds
in the shell parameter name, prepended with a ‘+
’ when
arg begins with a ‘+
’. The index of the next arg
is stored in OPTIND
. The option argument, if any,
is stored in OPTARG
.
The first option to be examined may be changed by explicitly assigning
to OPTIND
. OPTIND
has an initial value of 1
, and is
normally set to 1
upon entry to a shell function and restored
upon exit. (The POSIX_BUILTINS
option disables this, and also changes
the way the value is calculated to match other shells.) OPTARG
is not reset and retains its value from the most recent call to
getopts
. If either of OPTIND
or OPTARG
is explicitly
unset, it remains unset, and the index or option argument is not
stored. The option itself is still stored in name in this case.
A leading ‘:
’ in optstring causes getopts
to store the
letter of any invalid option in OPTARG
, and to set name to
‘?
’ for an unknown option and to ‘:
’ when a required argument is
missing. Otherwise, getopts
sets name to ‘?
’ and prints
an error message when an option is invalid. The exit status is
nonzero when there are no more options.
hash
[ -Ldfmrv
] [ name[=
value] ] ... ¶hash
can be used to directly modify the contents of the command
hash table, and the named directory hash table. Normally one would
modify these tables by modifying one’s PATH
(for the command hash table) or by creating appropriate shell parameters
(for the named directory hash table).
The choice of hash table to work on is determined by the -d
option;
without the option the command hash table is used, and with the option the
named directory hash table is used.
A command name starting with a /
is never hashed, whether by
explicit use of the hash
command or otherwise. Such a command
is always found by direct look up in the file system.
Given no arguments, and neither the -r
or -f
options,
the selected hash table will be listed in full.
The -r
option causes the selected hash table to be emptied.
It will be subsequently rebuilt in the normal fashion.
The -f
option causes the selected hash table to be fully
rebuilt immediately. For the command hash table this hashes
all the absolute directories in the PATH
,
and for the named directory hash table this adds all users’ home directories.
These two options cannot be used with any arguments.
The -m
option causes the arguments to be taken as patterns
(which should be quoted) and the elements of the hash table
matching those patterns are printed. This is the only way to display
a limited selection of hash table elements.
For each name with a corresponding value, put ‘name’ in
the selected hash table, associating it with the pathname ‘value’.
In the command hash table, this means that
whenever ‘name’ is used as a command argument, the shell will try
to execute the file given by ‘value’.
In the named directory hash table, this means
that ‘value’ may be referred to as ‘~
name’.
For each name with no
corresponding value, attempt to add name to the hash table,
checking what the appropriate value
is in the normal manner for
that hash table. If an appropriate value
can’t be found, then
the hash table will be unchanged.
The -v
option causes hash table entries to be listed as they are
added by explicit specification. If has no effect if used with -f
.
If the -L
flag is present, then each hash table entry is printed in
the form of a call to hash.
history
¶Same as fc -l
.
integer
[ {+
|-
}Hghlprtux
] [ {+
|-
}LRZi
[ n ] ] [ name[=
value] ... ] ¶Equivalent to typeset -i
, except that options irrelevant to
integers are not permitted.
jobs
[ -dlprs
] [ job ... ] ¶jobs -Z
stringLists information about each given job, or all jobs
if job is omitted. The -l
flag lists process
IDs, and the -p
flag lists process groups.
If the -r
flag is specified only running jobs will be listed
and if the -s
flag is given only stopped jobs are shown.
If the -d
flag is given, the directory from which the job was
started (which may not be the current directory of the job) will also
be shown.
The -Z
option replaces the shell’s argument and environment space with
the given string, truncated if necessary to fit. This will normally be
visible in ps
(ps(1)) listings. This feature is typically
used by daemons, to indicate their state.
Full job control is only available in the top-level interactive shell,
not in commands run in the left hand side of pipelines or within
the (
...)
construct. However, a snapshot
of the job state at that point is taken, so it is still possible
to use the jobs
builtin, or any parameter providing job information.
This gives information about the state of jobs at the point the subshell
was created. If background processes are created within the subshell,
then instead information about those processes is provided.
For example,
sleep 10 & # Job in background ( # Shell forks jobs # Shows information about "sleep 10 &" sleep 5 & # Process in background (no job control) jobs # Shows information about "sleep 5 &" )
kill
[ -s
signal_name | -n
signal_number | -
sig ] job ... ¶kill
-l
[ sig ... ]Sends either SIGTERM
or the specified signal to the given
jobs or processes.
Signals are given by number or by names, with or without the ‘SIG
’
prefix.
If the signal being sent is not ‘KILL
’ or ‘CONT
’, then the job
will be sent a ‘CONT
’ signal if it is stopped.
The argument job can be the process ID of a job
not in the job list.
In the second form, kill -l
, if sig is not
specified the signal names are listed. Otherwise, for each
sig that is a name, the corresponding signal number is
listed. For each sig that is a signal number or a number
representing the exit status of a process which was terminated or
stopped by a signal the name of the signal is printed.
On some systems, alternative signal names are allowed for a few signals.
Typical examples are SIGCHLD
and SIGCLD
or SIGPOLL
and
SIGIO
, assuming they correspond to the same signal number. kill
-l
will only list the preferred form, however kill -l
alt will
show if the alternative form corresponds to a signal number. For example,
under Linux kill -l IO
and kill -l POLL
both output 29, hence
kill -IO
and kill -POLL
have the same effect.
Many systems will allow process IDs to be negative to kill a process group or zero to kill the current process group.
let
arg ... ¶Evaluate each arg as an arithmetic expression. See Arithmetic Evaluation for a description of arithmetic expressions. The exit status is 0 if the value of the last expression is nonzero, 1 if it is zero, and 2 if an error occurred.
limit
[ -hs
] [ resource [ limit ] ] ... ¶Set or display resource limits. Unless the -s
flag is given,
the limit applies only the children of the shell. If -s
is
given without other arguments, the resource limits of the current
shell is set to the previously set resource limits of the children.
If limit is not specified, print the current limit placed
on resource, otherwise
set the limit to the specified value. If the -h
flag
is given, use hard limits instead of soft limits.
If no resource is given, print all limits.
When looping over multiple resources, the shell will abort immediately if it detects a badly formed argument. However, if it fails to set a limit for some other reason it will continue trying to set the remaining limits.
resource can be one of:
addressspace
Maximum amount of address space used.
aiomemorylocked
Maximum amount of memory locked in RAM for AIO operations.
aiooperations
Maximum number of AIO operations.
cachedthreads
Maximum number of cached threads.
coredumpsize
Maximum size of a core dump.
cputime
Maximum CPU seconds per process.
datasize
Maximum data size (including stack) for each process.
descriptors
Maximum value for a file descriptor.
filesize
Largest single file allowed.
kqueues
Maximum number of kqueues allocated.
maxproc
Maximum number of processes.
maxpthreads
Maximum number of threads per process.
memorylocked
Maximum amount of memory locked in RAM.
memoryuse
Maximum resident set size.
msgqueue
Maximum number of bytes in POSIX message queues.
posixlocks
Maximum number of POSIX locks per user.
pseudoterminals
Maximum number of pseudo-terminals.
resident
Maximum resident set size.
sigpending
Maximum number of pending signals.
sockbufsize
Maximum size of all socket buffers.
stacksize
Maximum stack size for each process.
swapsize
Maximum amount of swap used.
vmemorysize
Maximum amount of virtual memory.
Which of these resource limits are available depends on the system. resource can be abbreviated to any unambiguous prefix. It can also be an integer, which corresponds to the integer defined for the resource by the operating system.
If argument corresponds to a number which is out of the range of the
resources configured into the shell, the shell will try to read or write
the limit anyway, and will report an error if this fails. As the shell
does not store such resources internally, an attempt to set the limit will
fail unless the -s
option is present.
limit is a number, with an optional scaling factor, as follows:
h
hours
k
kilobytes (default)
m
megabytes or minutes
g
gigabytes
:
]ssminutes and seconds
The limit
command is not made available by default when the
shell starts in a mode emulating another shell. It can be made available
with the command ‘zmodload -F zsh/rlimits b:limit
’.
local
[ {+
|-
}AHUahlprtux
] [ {+
|-
}EFLRZi
[ n ] ] [ name[=
value] ... ] ¶Same as typeset
, except that the options -g
, and
-f
are not permitted. In this case the -x
option does not force
the use of -g
, i.e. exported variables will be local to functions.
logout
[ n ] ¶Same as exit
, except that it only works in a login shell.
noglob
simple commandSee Precommand Modifiers.
popd
[ -q
] [ {+
|-
}n ] ¶Remove an entry from the directory stack, and perform a cd
to
the new top directory. With no argument, the current top entry is
removed. An argument of the form ‘+
n’ identifies a stack
entry by counting from the left of the list shown by the dirs
command,
starting with zero. An argument of the form -
n counts from the right.
If the PUSHD_MINUS
option is set, the meanings of ‘+
’ and
‘-
’ in this context are swapped.
If the -q
(quiet) option is specified, the hook function chpwd
and the functions in the array $chpwd_functions
are not called,
and the new directory stack is not printed. This is useful for calls to
popd
that do not change the environment seen by an interactive user.
print
[ -abcDilmnNoOpPrsSz
] [ -u
n ] [ -f
format ] [ -C
cols ] ¶
[ -v
name ] [ -xX
tabstop ] [ -R
[ -en
]] [ arg ... ]With the ‘-f
’ option the arguments are printed as described by printf
.
With no flags or with the flag ‘-
’, the arguments are printed on
the standard output as described by echo
, with the following differences:
the escape sequence ‘\M-
x’ (or ‘\M
x’) metafies the character
x (sets the highest bit),
‘\C-
x’ (or ‘\C
x’) produces a control character
(‘\C-@
’ and ‘\C-?
’ give the characters NULL and delete),
a character code in octal is represented by ‘\
NNN’
(instead of ‘\0
NNN’),
and ‘\E
’ is a synonym for ‘\e
’.
Finally, if not in an escape
sequence, ‘\
’ escapes the following character and is not printed.
-a
Print arguments with the column incrementing first. Only useful with the
-c
and -C
options.
-b
Recognize all the escape sequences defined for the bindkey
command,
see
Zle Builtins.
-c
Print the arguments in columns. Unless -a
is also given, arguments are
printed with the row incrementing first.
-C
colsPrint the arguments in cols columns. Unless -a
is also given,
arguments are printed with the row incrementing first.
-D
Treat the arguments as paths, replacing directory prefixes with ~
expressions corresponding to directory names, as appropriate.
-i
If given together with -o
or -O
, sorting is performed
case-independently.
-l
Print the arguments separated by newlines instead of spaces. Note: if
the list of arguments is empty, print -l
will still output one empty
line. To print a possibly-empty list of arguments one per line, use
print -C1
, as in ‘print -rC1 -- "$list[@]"
’.
-m
Take the first argument as a pattern (should be quoted), and remove it from the argument list together with subsequent arguments that do not match this pattern.
-n
Do not add a newline to the output.
-N
Print the arguments separated and terminated by nulls. Again,
print -rNC1 -- "$list[@]"
is a canonical way to print an
arbitrary list as null-delimited records.
-o
Print the arguments sorted in ascending order.
-O
Print the arguments sorted in descending order.
-p
Print the arguments to the input of the coprocess.
-P
Perform prompt expansion (see
Prompt Expansion).
In combination with ‘-f
’,
prompt escape sequences are parsed only within interpolated arguments,
not within the format string.
-r
Ignore the escape conventions of echo
.
-R
Emulate the BSD echo
command, which does not process escape sequences
unless the -e
flag is given. The -n
flag suppresses the trailing
newline. Only the -e
and -n
flags are recognized after
-R
; all other arguments and options are printed.
-s
Place the results in the history list instead of on the standard output.
Each argument to the print
command is treated as a single word in the
history, regardless of its content.
-S
Place the results in the history list instead of on the standard output.
In this case only a single argument is allowed; it will be split into
words as if it were a full shell command line. The effect is
similar to reading the line from a history file with the
HIST_LEX_WORDS
option active.
-u
nPrint the arguments to file descriptor n.
-v
nameStore the printed arguments as the value of the parameter name.
-x
tab-stopExpand leading tabs on each line of output in the printed string
assuming a tab stop every tab-stop characters. This is appropriate
for formatting code that may be indented with tabs. Note that leading
tabs of any argument to print, not just the first, are expanded, even if
print
is using spaces to separate arguments (the column count
is maintained across arguments but may be incorrect on output
owing to previous unexpanded tabs).
The start of the output of each print command is assumed to be aligned
with a tab stop. Widths of multibyte characters are handled if the
option MULTIBYTE
is in effect. This option is ignored if other
formatting options are in effect, namely column alignment or
printf
style, or if output is to a special location such as shell
history or the command line editor.
-X
tab-stopThis is similar to -x
, except that all tabs in the printed string
are expanded. This is appropriate if tabs in the arguments are
being used to produce a table format.
-z
Push the arguments onto the editing buffer stack, separated by spaces.
If any of ‘-m
’, ‘-o
’ or ‘-O
’ are used in combination with
‘-f
’ and there are no arguments (after the removal process in the
case of ‘-m
’) then nothing is printed.
printf
[ -v
name ] format [ arg ... ] ¶Print the arguments according to the format specification. Formatting
rules are the same as used in C. The same escape sequences as for echo
are recognised in the format. All C conversion specifications ending in
one of csdiouxXeEfgGn
are handled. In addition to this, ‘%b
’ can be
used instead of ‘%s
’ to cause escape sequences in the argument to be
recognised and ‘%q
’ can be used to quote the argument in such a way
that allows it to be reused as shell input. With the numeric format
specifiers, if the corresponding argument starts with a quote character,
the numeric value of the following character is used as the number to
print; otherwise the argument is evaluated as an arithmetic expression. See
Arithmetic Evaluation
for a description of arithmetic
expressions. With ‘%n
’, the corresponding argument is taken as an
identifier which is created as an integer parameter.
Normally, conversion specifications are applied to each argument in order
but they can explicitly specify the nth argument is to be used by
replacing ‘%
’ by ‘%
n$
’ and ‘*
’ by ‘*
n$
’.
It is recommended that you do not mix references of this explicit style
with the normal style and the handling of such mixed styles may be subject
to future change.
If arguments remain unused after formatting, the format string is reused
until all arguments have been consumed. With the print
builtin, this
can be suppressed by using the -r
option. If more arguments are
required by the format than have been specified, the behaviour is as if
zero or an empty string had been specified as the argument.
The -v
option causes the output to be stored as the value of the
parameter name, instead of printed. If name is an array and
the format string is reused when consuming arguments then one
array element will be used for each use of the format string.
pushd
[ -qsLP
] [ arg ] ¶pushd
[ -qsLP
] old newpushd
[ -qsLP
] {+
|-
}nChange the current directory, and push the old current directory
onto the directory stack. In the first form, change the
current directory to arg.
If arg is not specified, change to the second directory
on the stack (that is, exchange the top two entries), or
change to $HOME
if the PUSHD_TO_HOME
option is set or if there is only one entry on the stack.
Otherwise, arg is interpreted as it would be by cd
.
The meaning of old and new in the second form is also
the same as for cd
.
The third form of pushd
changes directory by rotating the
directory list. An argument of the form ‘+
n’ identifies a stack
entry by counting from the left of the list shown by the dirs
command, starting with zero. An argument of the form ‘-
n’ counts
from the right. If the PUSHD_MINUS
option is set, the meanings
of ‘+
’ and ‘-
’ in this context are swapped.
If the -q
(quiet) option is specified, the hook function chpwd
and the functions in the array $chpwd_functions
are not called,
and the new directory stack is not printed. This is useful for calls to
pushd
that do not change the environment seen by an interactive user.
If the option -q
is not specified and the shell option PUSHD_SILENT
is not set, the directory stack will be printed after a pushd
is
performed.
The options -s
, -L
and -P
have the same meanings as for the
cd
builtin.
pushln
[ arg ... ] ¶Equivalent to print -nz
.
pwd
[ -rLP
] ¶Print the absolute pathname of the current working directory.
If the -r
or the -P
flag is specified, or the CHASE_LINKS
option is set and the -L
flag is not given, the printed path will not
contain symbolic links.
r
¶Same as fc -e -
.
read
[ -rszpqAclneE
] [ -t
[ num ] ] [ -k
[ num ] ] [ -d
delim ] ¶
[ -u
n ] [ [name][?
prompt] ] [ name ... ]Read one line and break it into fields using the characters
in $IFS
as separators, except as noted below.
The first field is assigned to the first name, the second field
to the second name, etc., with leftover
fields assigned to the last name.
If name is omitted then
REPLY
is used for scalars and reply
for arrays.
-r
Raw mode: a ‘\
’ at the end of a line does not signify line
continuation and backslashes in the line don’t quote the following
character and are not removed.
-s
Don’t echo back characters if reading from the terminal.
-q
Read only one character from the terminal and set name to
‘y
’ if this character was ‘y
’ or ‘Y
’ and to ‘n
’ otherwise.
With this flag set the return status is zero only if the character was
‘y
’ or ‘Y
’. This option may be used with a timeout (see -t
); if
the read times out, or encounters end of file, status 2 is returned. Input is
read from the terminal unless one of -u
or -p
is present. This option
may also be used within zle widgets.
-k
[ num ]Read only one (or num) characters. All are assigned to the first
name, without word splitting. This flag is ignored when -q
is
present. Input is read from the terminal unless one of -u
or -p
is present. This option may also be used within zle widgets.
Note that despite the mnemonic ‘key’ this option does read full
characters, which may consist of multiple bytes if the option
MULTIBYTE
is set.
-z
Read one entry from the editor buffer stack and assign it to the first
name, without word splitting. Text is pushed onto the stack with
‘print -z
’ or with push-line
from the line editor (see
Zsh Line Editor). This flag is ignored when the -k
or -q
flags are present.
-e
-E
The input read is printed (echoed) to the standard output. If the -e
flag is used, no input is assigned to the parameters.
-A
The first name is taken as the name of an array and all words are assigned to it.
-c
-l
These flags are allowed only if called inside a
function used for completion (specified with the -K
flag to
compctl
). If the -c
flag is given, the words of the
current command are read. If the -l
flag is given, the whole
line is assigned as a scalar. If both flags are present, -l
is used and -c
is ignored.
-n
Together with -c
, the number of the word the cursor is on is
read. With -l
, the index of the character the cursor is on is
read. Note that the command name is word number 1, not word 0,
and that when the cursor is at the end of the line, its character
index is the length of the line plus one.
-u
nInput is read from file descriptor n.
-p
Input is read from the coprocess.
-d
delimInput is terminated by the first character of delim instead of by newline.
-t
[ num ]Test if input is available before attempting to read. If num
is present, it must begin with a digit and will be evaluated
to give a number of seconds, which may be a floating point number;
in this case the read times out if input is not available within this
time. If num is not present, it is taken to be zero, so that
read
returns immediately if no input is available.
If no input is available, return status 1 and do not set any variables.
This option is not available when reading from the editor buffer with
-z
, when called from within completion with -c
or -l
, with
-q
which clears the input queue before reading, or within zle where
other mechanisms should be used to test for input.
Note that read does not attempt to alter the input processing mode. The
default mode is canonical input, in which an entire line is read at a time,
so usually ‘read -t
’ will not read anything until an entire line has
been typed. However, when reading from the terminal with -k
input is processed one key at a time; in this case, only availability of
the first character is tested, so that e.g. ‘read -t -k 2
’ can still
block on the second character. Use two instances of ‘read -t -k
’ if
this is not what is wanted.
If the first argument contains a ‘?
’, the remainder of this
word is used as a prompt on standard error when the shell
is interactive.
The value (exit status) of read
is 1 when an end-of-file is
encountered, or when -c
or -l
is present and the command is
not called from a compctl
function, or as described for -q
.
Otherwise the value is 0.
The behavior of some combinations of the -k
, -p
, -q
, -u
and -z
flags is undefined. Presently -q
cancels all the others,
-p
cancels -u
, -k
cancels -z
, and otherwise -z
cancels both -p
and -u
.
The -c
or -l
flags cancel any and all of -kpquz
.
readonly
¶Same as typeset -r
. With the POSIX_BUILTINS
option set, same
as typeset -gr
.
rehash
¶Same as hash -r
.
return
[ n ] ¶Causes a shell function or ‘.
’ script to return to
the invoking script with the return status specified by
an arithmetic expression n.
For example, the following prints ‘42
’:
() { integer foo=40; return "foo + 2" } echo $?
If n is omitted, the return status is that of the last command executed.
If return
was executed from a trap in a TRAP
NAL function,
the effect is different for zero and non-zero return status. With zero
status (or after an implicit return at the end of the trap), the shell
will return to whatever it was previously processing; with a non-zero
status, the shell will behave as interrupted except that the return
status of the trap is retained. Note that the numeric value of the signal
which caused the trap is passed as the first argument, so the statement
‘return "128+$1"
’ will return the same status as if the signal
had not been trapped.
sched
See The zsh/sched Module.
set
[ {+
|-
}options | {+
|-
}o
[ option_name ] ] ... [ {+
|-
}A
[ name ] ]
[ arg ... ]Set the options for the shell and/or set the positional parameters, or
declare and set an array. If the -s
option is given, it causes the
specified arguments to be sorted before assigning them to the positional
parameters (or to the array name if -A
is used). With +s
sort arguments in descending order. For the meaning of the other flags, see
Options. Flags may be specified by name using the -o
option. If no option
name is supplied with -o
, the current option states are printed: see
the description of setopt
below for more information on the format.
With +o
they are printed in a form that can be used as input
to the shell.
If the -A
flag is specified, name is set to an array containing
the given args; if no name is specified, all arrays are printed
together with their values.
If +A
is used and name is an array, the
given arguments will replace the initial elements of that array; if no
name is specified, all arrays are printed without their values.
The behaviour of arguments after -A
name or +A
name
depends on whether the option KSH_ARRAYS
is set. If it is not set, all
arguments following name are treated as values for the array,
regardless of their form. If the option is set, normal option processing
continues at that point; only regular arguments are treated as values for
the array. This means that
set -A array -x -- foo
sets array
to ‘-x -
- foo
’ if KSH_ARRAYS
is not set, but sets
the array to foo
and turns on the option ‘-x
’ if it is set.
If the -A
flag is not present, but there are arguments beyond the
options, the positional parameters are set. If the option list (if any)
is terminated by ‘-
-
’, and there are no further arguments, the
positional parameters will be unset.
If no arguments and no ‘-
-
’ are given, then the names and values of
all parameters are printed on the standard output. If the only argument is
‘+
’, the names of all parameters are printed.
For historical reasons, ‘set -
’ is treated as ‘set +xv
’
and ‘set -
args’ as ‘set +xv --
args’ when in
any other emulation mode than zsh’s native mode.
setcap
See The zsh/cap Module.
setopt
[ {+
|-
}options | {+
|-
}o
option_name ] [ -m
] [ name ... ] ¶Set the options for the shell. All options specified either with flags or by name are set.
If no arguments are supplied, the names of all options currently set are
printed. The form is chosen so as to minimize the differences from the
default options for the current emulation (the default emulation being
native zsh
, shown as <Z>
in
Description of Options).
Options that are on by default for the emulation are
shown with the prefix no
only if they are off, while other options are
shown without the prefix no
and only if they are on. In addition to
options changed from the default state by the user, any options activated
automatically by the shell (for example, SHIN_STDIN
or INTERACTIVE
)
will be shown in the list. The format is further modified by the option
KSH_OPTION_PRINT
, however the rationale for choosing options with
or without the no
prefix remains the same in this case.
If the -m
flag is given the arguments are taken as patterns
(which should be quoted to protect them from filename expansion), and all
options with names matching these patterns are set.
Note that a bad option name does not cause execution of subsequent shell
code to be aborted; this is behaviour is different from that of ‘set
-o
’. This is because set
is regarded as a special builtin by the
POSIX standard, but setopt
is not.
shift
[ -p
] [ n ] [ name ... ] ¶The positional parameters ${
n+1}
... are renamed
to $1
..., where n is an arithmetic expression that
defaults to 1.
If any names are given then the arrays with these names are
shifted instead of the positional parameters.
If the option -p
is given arguments are instead removed (popped)
from the end rather than the start of the array.
source
file [ arg ... ] ¶Same as ‘.
’, except that the current directory is always searched and
is always searched first, before directories in $path
.
stat
See The zsh/stat Module.
suspend
[ -f
] ¶Suspend the execution of the shell (send it a SIGTSTP
)
until it receives a SIGCONT
.
Unless the -f
option is given, this will refuse to suspend a login shell.
test
[ arg ... ] ¶[
[ arg ... ] ]
Like the system version of test
. Added for compatibility;
use conditional expressions instead (see Conditional Expressions).
The main differences between the conditional expression syntax and the
test
and [
builtins are: these commands are not handled
syntactically, so for example an empty variable expansion may cause an
argument to be omitted; syntax errors cause status 2 to be returned instead
of a shell error; and arithmetic operators expect integer arguments rather
than arithmetic expressions.
The command attempts to implement POSIX and its extensions where these
are specified. Unfortunately there are intrinsic ambiguities in
the syntax; in particular there is no distinction between test operators
and strings that resemble them. The standard attempts to resolve these
for small numbers of arguments (up to four); for five or more arguments
compatibility cannot be relied on. Users are urged wherever possible to
use the ‘[[
’ test syntax which does not have these ambiguities.
times
¶Print the accumulated user and system times for the shell and for processes run from the shell.
trap
[ arg ] [ sig ... ] ¶arg is a series of commands (usually quoted to protect it from
immediate evaluation by the shell) to be read and executed when the shell
receives any of the signals specified by one or more sig args.
Each sig can be given as a number,
or as the name of a signal either with or without the string SIG
in front (e.g. 1, HUP, and SIGHUP are all the same signal).
If arg is ‘-
’, then the specified signals are reset to their
defaults, or, if no sig args are present, all traps are reset.
If arg is an empty string, then the specified signals are ignored by the shell (and by the commands it invokes).
If arg is omitted but one or more sig args are provided (i.e.
the first argument is a valid signal number or name), the effect is the
same as if arg had been specified as ‘-
’.
The trap
command with no arguments prints a list of commands
associated with each signal.
If sig is ZERR
then arg will be executed
after each command with a nonzero exit status. ERR
is an alias
for ZERR
on systems that have no SIGERR
signal (this is the
usual case).
If sig is DEBUG
then arg will be executed
before each command if the option DEBUG_BEFORE_CMD
is set
(as it is by default), else after each command. Here, a ‘command’ is
what is described as a ‘sublist’ in the shell grammar, see
Simple Commands & Pipelines.
If DEBUG_BEFORE_CMD
is set various additional features are available.
First, it is possible to skip the next command by setting the option
ERR_EXIT
; see the description of the ERR_EXIT
option in
Description of Options. Also, the shell parameter
ZSH_DEBUG_CMD
is set to the string corresponding to the command
to be executed following the trap. Note that this string is reconstructed
from the internal format and may not be formatted the same way as the
original text. The parameter is unset after the trap is executed.
If sig is 0
or EXIT
and the trap
statement is executed inside the body of a function,
then the command arg is executed after the function completes.
The value of $?
at the start of execution is the exit status of the
shell or the return status of the function exiting.
If sig is 0
or EXIT
and the trap
statement is not executed inside the body of a function,
then the command arg is executed when the shell terminates; the
trap runs before any zshexit
hook functions.
ZERR
, DEBUG
, and EXIT
traps are not executed inside other
traps. ZERR
and DEBUG
traps are kept within subshells, while
other traps are reset.
Note that traps defined with the trap
builtin are slightly different
from those defined as ‘TRAP
NAL () { ... }’, as the latter have
their own function environment (line numbers, local variables, etc.) while
the former use the environment of the command in which they were called.
For example,
trap 'print $LINENO' DEBUG
will print the line number of a command executed after it has run, while
TRAPDEBUG() { print $LINENO; }
will always print the number zero.
Alternative signal names are allowed as described under kill
above.
Defining a trap under either name causes any trap under an alternative
name to be removed. However, it is recommended that for consistency
users stick exclusively to one name or another.
true
[ arg ... ] ¶Do nothing and return an exit status of 0.
ttyctl
[ -fu
] ¶The -f
option freezes the tty (i.e. terminal or terminal emulator), and
-u
unfreezes it.
When the tty is frozen, no changes made to the tty settings by
external programs will be honored by the shell, except for changes in the
size of the screen; the shell will
simply reset the settings to their previous values as soon as each
command exits or is suspended. Thus, stty
and similar programs have
no effect when the tty is frozen. Freezing the tty does not cause
the current state to be remembered: instead, it causes future changes
to the state to be blocked.
Without options it reports whether the terminal is frozen or not.
Note that, regardless of whether the tty is frozen or not, the
shell needs to change the settings when the line editor starts, so
unfreezing the tty does not guarantee settings made on the
command line are preserved. Strings of commands run between
editing the command line will see a consistent tty state.
See also the shell variable STTY
for a means of initialising
the tty before running external commands and/or freezing the tty
around a single command.
type
[ -wfpamsS
] name ... ¶Equivalent to whence -v
.
typeset
[ {+
|-
}AHUaghlmrtux
] [ {+
|-
}EFLRZip
[ n ] ]
[ +
] [ name[=
value] ... ]typeset
-T
[ {+
|-
}Uglrux
] [ {+
|-
}LRZp
[ n ] ]
[ +
| SCALAR[=
value] array[=(
value ...)
] [ sep ] ]typeset
-f
[ {+
|-
}TUkmtuz
] [ +
] [ name ... ]Set or display attributes and values for shell parameters.
Except as noted below for control flags that change the behavior, a parameter is created for each name that does not already refer to one. When inside a function, a new parameter is created for every name (even those that already exist), and is unset again when the function completes. See Local Parameters. The same rules apply to special shell parameters, which retain their special attributes when made local.
For each name=
value assignment, the parameter
name is set to value. If the assignment is omitted and name
does not refer to an existing parameter, a new parameter is intialized
to empty string, zero, or empty array (as appropriate), unless the
shell option TYPESET_TO_UNSET
is set. When that option is set,
the parameter attributes are recorded but the parameter remains unset.
If the shell option TYPESET_SILENT
is not set, for each remaining
name that refers to a parameter that is already set, the name and
value of the parameter are printed in the form of an assignment.
Nothing is printed for newly-created parameters, or when any attribute
flags listed below are given along with the name. Using
‘+
’ instead of minus to introduce an attribute turns it off.
If no name is present, the names and values of all parameters are
printed. In this case the attribute flags restrict the display to only
those parameters that have the specified attributes, and using ‘+
’
rather than ‘-
’ to introduce the flag suppresses printing of the values
of parameters when there is no parameter name.
All forms of the command handle scalar assignment. Array assignment is
possible if any of the reserved words declare
, export
, float
,
integer
, local
, readonly
or typeset
is matched when the
line is parsed (N.B. not when it is executed). In this case the arguments
are parsed as assignments, except that the ‘+=
’ syntax and the
GLOB_ASSIGN
option are not supported, and scalar values after =
are not split further into words, even if expanded (regardless of the
setting of the KSH_TYPESET
option; this option is obsolete).
Examples of the differences between command and reserved word parsing:
# Reserved word parsing typeset svar=$(echo one word) avar=(several words)
The above creates a scalar parameter svar
and an array
parameter avar
as if the assignments had been
svar="one word" avar=(several words)
On the other hand:
# Normal builtin interface builtin typeset svar=$(echo two words)
The builtin
keyword causes the above to use the standard builtin
interface to typeset
in which argument parsing is performed in the same
way as for other commands. This example creates a scalar svar
containing the value two
and another scalar parameter words
with
no value. An array value in this case would either cause an error or be
treated as an obscure set of glob qualifiers.
Arbitrary arguments are allowed if they take the form of assignments after command line expansion; however, these only perform scalar assignment:
var='svar=val' typeset $var
The above sets the scalar parameter svar
to the value val
.
Parentheses around the value within var
would not cause array
assignment as they will be treated as ordinary characters when $var
is substituted. Any non-trivial expansion in the name part of the
assignment causes the argument to be treated in this fashion:
typeset {var1,var2,var3}=name
The above syntax is valid, and has the expected effect of setting the
three parameters to the same value, but the command line is parsed as
a set of three normal command line arguments to typeset
after
expansion. Hence it is not possible to assign to multiple arrays by
this means.
Note that each interface to any of the commands may be disabled
separately. For example, ‘disable -r typeset
’ disables the reserved
word interface to typeset
, exposing the builtin interface, while
‘disable typeset
’ disables the builtin. Note that disabling the
reserved word interface for typeset
may cause problems with the
output of ‘typeset -p
’, which assumes the reserved word interface is
available in order to restore array and associative array values.
Unlike parameter assignment statements, typeset
’s exit status on an
assignment that involves a command substitution does not reflect the exit
status of the command substitution. Therefore, to test for an error in
a command substitution, separate the declaration of the parameter from its
initialization:
# WRONG typeset var1=$(exit 1) || echo "Trouble with var1" # RIGHT typeset var1 && var1=$(exit 1) || echo "Trouble with var1"
To initialize a parameter param to a command output and mark it readonly,
use typeset -r
param or readonly
param after the parameter
assignment statement.
If no attribute flags are given, and either no name arguments are
present or the flag +m
is used, then each parameter name printed is
preceded by a list of the attributes of that parameter (array
,
association
, exported
, float
, integer
, readonly
,
or undefined
for autoloaded parameters not yet loaded). If +m
is
used with attribute flags, and all those flags are introduced with
+
, the matching parameter names are printed but their values
are not.
The following control flags change the behavior of typeset
:
+
If ‘+
’ appears by itself in a separate word as the last option,
then the names of all parameters (functions with -f
) are printed, but
the values (function bodies) are not. No name arguments may appear,
and it is an error for any other options to follow ‘+
’. The
effect of ‘+
’ is as if all attribute flags which precede it were
given with a ‘+
’ prefix. For example, ‘typeset -U +
’ is
equivalent to ‘typeset +U
’ and displays the names of all arrays having
the uniqueness attribute, whereas ‘typeset -f -U +
’ displays the
names of all autoloadable functions. If +
is the only option,
then type information (array, readonly, etc.) is also printed for each
parameter, in the same manner as ‘typeset +m "*"
’.
-g
The -g
(global) means that any resulting parameter will not be
restricted to local scope. Note that this does not necessarily mean that
the parameter will be global, as the flag will apply to any existing
parameter (even if unset) from an enclosing function. This flag does not
affect the parameter after creation, hence it has no effect when listing
existing parameters, nor does the flag +g
have any effect except in
combination with -m
(see below).
-m
If the -m
flag is given the name arguments are taken as patterns
(use quoting to prevent these from being interpreted as file patterns).
With no attribute flags, all parameters (or functions with the -f
flag) with matching names are printed (the shell option TYPESET_SILENT
is not used in this case).
If the +g
flag is combined with -m
, a new local parameter is
created for every matching parameter that is not already local. Otherwise
-m
applies all other flags or assignments to the existing parameters.
Except when assignments are made with name=
value, using
+m
forces the matching parameters and their attributes to be printed,
even inside a function. Note that -m
is ignored if no patterns are
given, so ‘typeset -m
’ displays attributes but ‘typeset -a +m
’
does not.
-p
[ n ]If the -p
option is given, parameters and values are printed in the
form of a typeset command with an assignment, regardless of other flags
and options. Note that the -H
flag on parameters is respected; no
value will be shown for these parameters.
-p
may be followed by an optional integer argument. Currently
only the value 1
is supported. In this case arrays and associative
arrays are printed with newlines between indented elements for
readability.
-T
[ scalar[=
value] array[=(
value ...)
] [ sep ] ]This flag has a different meaning when used with -f
; see below.
Otherwise the -T
option requires zero, two, or three arguments to be
present. With no arguments, the list of parameters created in this
fashion is shown. With two or three arguments, the first two are the name
of a scalar and of an array parameter (in that order) that will be tied
together in the manner of $PATH
and $path
. The optional third
argument is a single-character separator which will be used to join the
elements of the array to form the scalar; if absent, a colon is used, as
with $PATH
. Only the first character of the separator is significant;
any remaining characters are ignored. Multibyte characters are not
yet supported.
Only one of the scalar and array parameters may be assigned an initial value (the restrictions on assignment forms described above also apply).
Both the scalar and the array may be manipulated as normal. If one is
unset, the other will automatically be unset too. There is no way of
untying the variables without unsetting them, nor of converting the type
of one of them with another typeset
command; +T
does not work,
assigning an array to scalar is an error, and assigning a scalar to
array sets it to be a single-element array.
Note that both ‘typeset -xT ...
’ and ‘export -T ...
’ work, but
only the scalar will be marked for export. Setting the value using the
scalar version causes a split on all separators (which cannot be quoted).
It is possible to apply -T
to two previously tied variables but with a
different separator character, in which case the variables remain joined
as before but the separator is changed.
When an existing scalar is tied to a new array, the value of the scalar is preserved but no attribute other than export will be preserved.
Attribute flags that transform the final value (-L
, -R
, -Z
,
-l
, -u
) are only applied to the expanded value at the point
of a parameter expansion expression using ‘$
’. They are not applied
when a parameter is retrieved internally by the shell for any purpose.
The following attribute flags may be specified:
-A
The names refer to associative array parameters; see Array Parameters.
-L
[ n ]Left justify and remove leading blanks from the value when the parameter is expanded. If n is nonzero, it defines the width of the field. If n is zero, the width is determined by the width of the value of the first assignment. In the case of numeric parameters, the length of the complete value assigned to the parameter is used to determine the width, not the value that would be output.
The width is the count of characters, which may be multibyte characters
if the MULTIBYTE
option is in effect. Note that the screen
width of the character is not taken into account; if this is required,
use padding with parameter expansion flags
${(ml
...)
...}
as described in
‘Parameter Expansion Flags’ in
Parameter Expansion.
When the parameter is expanded, it is filled on the right with
blanks or truncated if necessary to fit the field.
Note truncation can lead to unexpected results with numeric parameters.
Leading zeros are removed if the -Z
flag is also set.
-R
[ n ]Similar to -L
, except that right justification is used;
when the parameter is expanded, the field is left filled with
blanks or truncated from the end. May not be combined with the -Z
flag.
-U
For arrays (but not for associative arrays), keep only the first
occurrence of each duplicated value. This may also be set for tied
parameters (see -T
) or colon-separated special parameters like
PATH
or FIGNORE
, etc. Note the flag takes effect on assignment,
and the type of the variable being assigned to is determinative; for
variables with shared values it is therefore recommended to set the flag
for all interfaces, e.g. ‘typeset -U PATH path
’.
This flag has a different meaning when used with -f
; see below.
-Z
[ n ]Specially handled if set along with the -L
flag.
Otherwise, similar to -R
, except that leading zeros are used for
padding instead of blanks if the first non-blank character is a digit.
Numeric parameters are specially handled: they are always eligible
for padding with zeroes, and the zeroes are inserted at an appropriate
place in the output.
-a
The names refer to array parameters. An array parameter may be
created this way, but it may be assigned to in the typeset
statement only if the reserved word form of typeset
is enabled
(as it is by default). When displaying, both normal and associative
arrays are shown.
-f
The names refer to functions rather than parameters. No assignments
can be made, and the only other valid flags are -t
, -T
, -k
,
-u
, -U
and -z
. The flag -t
turns on execution tracing
for this function; the flag -T
does the same, but turns off tracing
for any named (not anonymous) function called from the present one,
unless that function also
has the -t
or -T
flag. The -u
and -U
flags cause the
function to be marked for autoloading; -U
also causes alias
expansion to be suppressed when the function is loaded. See the
description of the ‘autoload
’ builtin for details.
Note that the builtin functions
provides the same basic capabilities
as typeset -f
but gives access to a few extra options; autoload
gives further additional options for the case typeset -fu
and
typeset -fU
.
-h
Hide: only useful for special parameters (those marked ‘<S>’ in the table in
Parameters Set By The Shell), and for local parameters with the same name as a special parameter,
though harmless for others. A special parameter with this attribute will
not retain its special effect when made local. Thus after ‘typeset -h
PATH
’, a function containing ‘typeset PATH
’ will create an ordinary
local parameter without the usual behaviour of PATH
. Alternatively,
the local parameter may itself be given this attribute; hence inside a
function ‘typeset -h PATH
’ creates an ordinary local parameter and the
special PATH
parameter is not altered in any way. It is also possible
to create a local parameter using ‘typeset +h
special’, where the
local copy of special will retain its special properties regardless of
having the -h
attribute. Global special parameters loaded from shell
modules (currently those in zsh/mapfile
and zsh/parameter
) are
automatically given the -h
attribute to avoid name clashes.
-H
Hide value: specifies that typeset
will not display the value of the
parameter when listing parameters; the display for such parameters is
always as if the ‘+
’ flag had been given. Use of the parameter is
in other respects normal, and the option does not apply if the parameter is
specified by name, or by pattern with the -m
option. This is on by
default for the parameters in the zsh/parameter
and zsh/mapfile
modules. Note, however, that unlike the -h
flag this is also useful
for non-special parameters.
-i
[ n ]Use an internal integer representation. If n is nonzero it defines the output arithmetic base, otherwise it is determined by the first assignment. Bases from 2 to 36 inclusive are allowed.
-E
[ n ]Use an internal double-precision floating point representation. On output the variable will be converted to scientific notation. If n is nonzero it defines the number of significant figures to display; the default is ten.
-F
[ n ]Use an internal double-precision floating point representation. On output the variable will be converted to fixed-point decimal notation. If n is nonzero it defines the number of digits to display after the decimal point; the default is ten.
-l
Convert the result to lower case whenever the parameter is expanded. The value is not converted when assigned.
-r
The given names are marked readonly. Note that if name is a special parameter, the readonly attribute can be turned on, but cannot then be turned off.
If the POSIX_BUILTINS
option is set, the readonly attribute is
more restrictive: unset variables can be marked readonly and cannot then
be set; furthermore, the readonly attribute cannot be removed from any
variable.
It is still possible to change other attributes of the variable though,
some of which like -U
or -Z
would affect the value. More generally,
the readonly attribute should not be relied on as a security mechanism.
Note that in zsh (like in pdksh but unlike most other shells) it is still possible to create a local variable of the same name as this is considered a different variable (though this variable, too, can be marked readonly). Special variables that have been made readonly retain their value and readonly attribute when made local.
-t
Tags the named parameters. Tags have no special meaning to the shell.
This flag has a different meaning when used with -f
; see above.
-u
Convert the result to upper case whenever the parameter is expanded.
The value is not converted when assigned.
This flag has a different meaning when used with -f
; see above.
-x
Mark for automatic export to the environment of subsequently
executed commands. If the option GLOBAL_EXPORT
is set, this implies
the option -g
, unless +g
is also explicitly given; in other words
the parameter is not made local to the enclosing function. This is for
compatibility with previous versions of zsh.
ulimit
[ -HSa
] [ { -bcdfiklmnpqrsTtvwx
| -N
resource } [ limit ] ... ] ¶Set or display resource limits of the shell and the processes started by
the shell. The value of limit can be a number in the unit specified
below or one of the values ‘unlimited
’, which removes the limit on the
resource, or ‘hard
’, which uses the current value of the hard limit on
the resource.
By default, only soft limits are manipulated. If the -H
flag
is given use hard limits instead of soft limits. If the -S
flag is given
together with the -H
flag set both hard and soft limits.
If no options are used, the file size limit (-f
) is assumed.
If limit is omitted the current value of the specified resources are printed. When more than one resource value is printed, the limit name and unit is printed before each value.
When looping over multiple resources, the shell will abort immediately if it detects a badly formed argument. However, if it fails to set a limit for some other reason it will continue trying to set the remaining limits.
Not all the following resources are supported on all systems. Running
ulimit -a
will show which are supported.
-a
Lists all of the current resource limits.
-b
Socket buffer size in bytes (N.B. not kilobytes)
-c
512-byte blocks on the size of core dumps.
-d
Kilobytes on the size of the data segment.
-f
512-byte blocks on the size of files written.
-i
The number of pending signals.
-k
The number of kqueues allocated.
-l
Kilobytes on the size of locked-in memory.
-m
Kilobytes on the size of physical memory.
-n
open file descriptors.
-p
The number of pseudo-terminals.
-q
Bytes in POSIX message queues.
-r
Maximum real time priority. On some systems where this
is not available, such as NetBSD, this has the same effect as -T
for compatibility with sh
.
-s
Kilobytes on the size of the stack.
-T
The number of simultaneous threads available to the user.
-t
CPU seconds to be used.
-u
The number of processes available to the user.
-v
Kilobytes on the size of virtual memory. On some systems this refers to the limit called ‘address space’.
-w
Kilobytes on the size of swapped out memory.
-x
The number of locks on files.
A resource may also be specified by integer in the form ‘-N
resource’, where resource corresponds to the integer defined for
the resource by the operating system. This may be used to set the limits
for resources known to the shell which do not correspond to option letters.
Such limits will be shown by number in the output of ‘ulimit -a
’.
The number may alternatively be out of the range of limits compiled into the shell. The shell will try to read or write the limit anyway, and will report an error if this fails.
umask
[ -S
] [ mask ] ¶The umask is set to mask. mask can be either
an octal number or a symbolic value as described in the chmod(1) man page.
If mask is omitted, the current value is printed. The -S
option causes the mask to be printed as a symbolic value. Otherwise,
the mask is printed as an octal number. Note that in
the symbolic form the permissions you specify are those which are to be
allowed (not denied) to the users specified.
unalias
[ -ams
] name ... ¶Removes aliases. This command works the same as unhash -a
, except that
the -a
option removes all regular or global aliases, or with -s
all suffix aliases: in this case no name arguments may appear. The
options -m
(remove by pattern) and -s
without -a
(remove
listed suffix aliases) behave as for unhash -a
. Note that
the meaning of -a
is different between unalias
and unhash
.
unfunction
¶Same as unhash -f
.
unhash
[ -adfms
] name ... ¶Remove the element named name from an internal hash table. The
default is remove elements from the command hash table. The -a
option causes unhash
to remove regular or global aliases; note
when removing a global aliases that the argument must be quoted to prevent
it from being expanded before being passed to the command.
The -s
option causes unhash
to remove suffix aliases.
The -f
option causes
unhash
to remove shell functions. The -d
options causes
unhash
to remove named directories. If the -m
flag is given
the arguments are taken as patterns (should be quoted) and all elements
of the corresponding hash table with matching names will be removed.
unlimit
[ -hs
] resource ... ¶The resource limit for each resource is set to the hard limit.
If the -h
flag is given and the shell has appropriate privileges,
the hard resource limit for each resource is removed.
The resources of the shell process are only changed if the -s
flag is given.
The unlimit
command is not made available by default when the
shell starts in a mode emulating another shell. It can be made available
with the command ‘zmodload -F zsh/rlimits b:unlimit
’.
unset
[ -fmv
] name ... ¶Each named parameter is unset. Local parameters remain local even if unset; they appear unset within scope, but the previous value will still reappear when the scope ends.
Individual elements of associative array parameters may be unset by using
subscript syntax on name, which should be quoted (or the entire command
prefixed with noglob
) to protect the subscript from filename generation.
If the -m
flag is specified the arguments are taken as patterns (should
be quoted) and all parameters with matching names are unset. Note that this
cannot be used when unsetting associative array elements, as the subscript
will be treated as part of the pattern.
The -v
flag specifies that name refers to parameters. This is the
default behaviour.
unset -f
is equivalent to unfunction
.
unsetopt
[ {+
|-
}options | {+
|-
}o
option_name ] [ name ... ] ¶Unset the options for the shell. All options specified either
with flags or by name are unset. If no arguments are supplied,
the names of all options currently unset are printed.
If the -m
flag is given the arguments are taken as patterns
(which should be quoted to preserve them from being interpreted as glob
patterns), and all options with names matching these patterns are unset.
vared
See Zle Builtins.
wait
[ job ... ] ¶Wait for the specified jobs or processes. If job is not given
then all currently active child processes are waited for.
Each job can be either a job specification or the process ID
of a job in the job table.
The exit status from this command is that of the job waited for.
If job represents an unknown job or process ID, a warning is printed
(unless the POSIX_BUILTINS
option is set) and the exit status is 127.
It is possible to wait for recent processes (specified by process ID,
not by job) that were running in the background even if the process has
exited. Typically the process ID will be recorded by capturing the
value of the variable $!
immediately after the process has been
started. There is a limit on the number of process IDs remembered by
the shell; this is given by the value of the system configuration
parameter CHILD_MAX
. When this limit is reached, older process IDs
are discarded, least recently started processes first.
Note there is no protection against the process ID wrapping, i.e. if the wait is not executed soon enough there is a chance the process waited for is the wrong one. A conflict implies both process IDs have been generated by the shell, as other processes are not recorded, and that the user is potentially interested in both, so this problem is intrinsic to process IDs.
whence
[ -vcwfpamsS
] [ -x
num ] name ... ¶For each name, indicate how it would be interpreted if used as a command name.
If name is not an alias, built-in command, external command, shell
function, hashed command, or a reserved word, the exit status shall be
non-zero, and — if -v
, -c
, or -w
was passed — a message
will be written to standard output. (This is different from other shells that
write that message to standard error.)
whence
is most useful when name is only the last path component
of a command, i.e. does not include a ‘/
’; in particular, pattern
matching only succeeds if just the non-directory component of the command is
passed.
-v
Produce a more verbose report.
-c
Print the results in a csh-like format.
This takes precedence over -v
.
-w
For each name, print ‘name:
word’ where word
is one of alias
, builtin
, command
, function
,
hashed
, reserved
or none
, according as name
corresponds to an alias, a built-in command, an external command, a
shell function, a command defined with the hash
builtin, a
reserved word, or is not recognised. This takes precedence over
-v
and -c
.
-f
Causes the contents of a shell function to be
displayed, which would otherwise not happen unless the -c
flag were used.
-p
Do a path search for name even if it is an alias, reserved word, shell function or builtin.
-a
Do a search for all occurrences of name throughout the command path. Normally only the first occurrence is printed.
-m
The arguments are taken as patterns (pattern characters should be quoted), and the information is displayed for each command matching one of these patterns.
-s
If a pathname contains symlinks, print the symlink-free pathname as well.
-S
As -s
, but if the pathname had to be resolved by following
multiple symlinks, the intermediate steps are printed, too. The
symlink resolved at each step might be anywhere in the path.
-x
numExpand tabs when outputting shell functions using the -c
option.
This has the same effect as the -x
option to the functions
builtin.
where
[ -wpmsS
] [ -x
num ] name ... ¶Equivalent to whence -ca
.
which
[ -wpamsS
] [ -x
num ] name ... ¶Equivalent to whence -c
.
zcompile
[ -U
] [ -z
| -k
] [ -R
| -M
] file [ name ... ] ¶zcompile
-ca
[ -m
] [ -R
| -M
] file [ name ... ]zcompile -t
file [ name ... ]This builtin command can be used to compile functions or scripts, storing the compiled form in a file, and to examine files containing the compiled form. This allows faster autoloading of functions and sourcing of scripts by avoiding parsing of the text when the files are read.
The first form (without the -c
, -a
or -t
options) creates a
compiled file. If only the file argument is given, the
output file has the name ‘file.zwc
’ and will be placed in
the same directory as the file. The shell will load the compiled
file instead of the normal function file when the function
is autoloaded; see
Functions
for a description of how autoloaded functions are searched. The
extension .zwc
stands for ‘zsh word code’.
If there is at least one name argument, all the named files
are compiled into the output file given as the first argument. If
file does not end in .zwc
, this extension is automatically
appended. Files containing multiple compiled functions are called ‘digest’
files, and are intended to be used as elements of the FPATH
/fpath
special array.
The second form, with the -c
or -a
options, writes the compiled
definitions for all the named functions into file. For -c
, the
names must be functions currently defined in the shell, not those marked
for autoloading. Undefined functions that are marked for autoloading
may be written by using the -a
option, in which case the fpath
is searched and the contents of the definition files for those
functions, if found, are compiled into file. If both -c
and
-a
are given, names of both defined functions and functions marked
for autoloading may be given. In either case, the functions in files
written with the -c
or -a
option will be autoloaded as if the
KSH_AUTOLOAD
option were unset.
The reason for handling loaded and not-yet-loaded functions with
different options is that some definition files for autoloading define
multiple functions, including the function with the same name as the
file, and, at the end, call that function. In such cases the output of
‘zcompile -c
’ does not include the additional functions defined in
the file, and any other initialization code in the file is lost. Using
‘zcompile -a
’ captures all this extra information.
If the -m
option is combined with -c
or -a
,
the names are used as patterns and all functions whose names
match one of these patterns will be written. If no name is given,
the definitions of all functions currently defined or marked as
autoloaded will be written.
Note the second form cannot be used for compiling functions that include redirections as part of the definition rather than within the body of the function; for example
fn1() { { ... } >~/logfile }
can be compiled but
fn1() { ... } >~/logfile
cannot. It is possible to use the first form of zcompile
to compile
autoloadable functions that include the full function definition instead
of just the body of the function.
The third form, with the -t
option, examines an existing
compiled file. Without further arguments, the names of the original
files compiled into it are listed. The first line of output shows
the version of the shell which compiled the file and how the file
will be used (i.e. by reading it directly or by mapping it into memory).
With arguments, nothing is output and the return status is set to zero if
definitions for all names were found in the compiled
file, and non-zero if the definition for at least one name was not
found.
Other options:
-U
Aliases are not expanded when compiling the named files.
-R
When the compiled file is read, its contents are copied into the
shell’s memory, rather than memory-mapped (see -M
). This
happens automatically on systems that do not support memory mapping.
When compiling scripts instead of autoloadable functions, it is often desirable to use this option; otherwise the whole file, including the code to define functions which have already been defined, will remain mapped, consequently wasting memory.
-M
The compiled file is mapped into the shell’s memory when read. This
is done in such a way that multiple instances of the shell running
on the same host will share this mapped file. If neither -R
nor
-M
is given, the zcompile
builtin decides what to do based
on the size of the compiled file.
-k
-z
These options are used when the compiled file contains functions which
are to be autoloaded. If -z
is given, the
function will be autoloaded as if the KSH_AUTOLOAD
option is
not set, even if it is set at the time the compiled file is
read, while if the -k
is given, the function will be loaded as if
KSH_AUTOLOAD
is set. These options also take precedence over
any -k
or -z
options specified to the autoload
builtin. If
neither of these options is given, the function will be loaded as
determined by the setting of the KSH_AUTOLOAD
option at the time
the compiled file is read.
These options may also appear as many times as necessary between the listed
names to specify the loading style of all following functions, up to
the next -k
or -z
.
The created file always contains two versions of the compiled format, one for big-endian machines and one for small-endian machines. The upshot of this is that the compiled file is machine independent and if it is read or mapped, only one half of the file is actually used (and mapped).
zformat
See The zsh/zutil Module.
zftp
See The zsh/zftp Module.
zle
See Zle Builtins.
zmodload
[ -dL
] [ -s
] [ ... ] ¶zmodload -F
[ -alLme
-P
param ] module [ [+-
]feature ... ]zmodload -e
[ -A
] [ ... ]zmodload
[ -a
[ -bcpf
[ -I
] ] ] [ -iL
] ...zmodload
-u
[ -abcdpf
[ -I
] ] [ -iL
] ...zmodload
-A
[ -L
] [ modalias[=
module] ... ]zmodload
-R
modalias ...Performs operations relating to zsh’s loadable modules.
Loading of modules while the shell is running (‘dynamical loading’) is not
available on all operating systems, or on all installations on a particular
operating system, although the zmodload
command itself is always
available and can be used to manipulate modules built into versions of the
shell executable without dynamical loading.
Without arguments the names of all currently loaded binary modules are
printed. The -L
option causes this list to be in the form of a
series of zmodload
commands. Forms with arguments are:
zmodload
[ -is
] name ...zmodload
-u
[ -i
] name ...In the simplest case, zmodload
loads a binary module. The module must
be in a file with a name consisting of the specified name followed by
a standard suffix, usually ‘.so
’ (‘.sl
’ on HPUX).
If the module to be loaded is already loaded the duplicate module is
ignored. If zmodload
detects an inconsistency, such as an
invalid module name or circular dependency list, the current code block is
aborted. If it is available, the module is loaded if necessary, while if it
is not available, non-zero status is silently returned. The option
-i
is accepted for compatibility but has no effect.
The named module is searched for in the same way a command is, using
$module_path
instead of $path
. However, the path search is
performed even when the module name contains a ‘/
’, which it usually does.
There is no way to prevent the path search.
If the module supports features (see below), zmodload
tries to
enable all features when loading a module. If the module was successfully
loaded but not all features could be enabled, zmodload
returns status 2.
If the option -s
is given, no error is printed if the module was not
available (though other errors indicating a problem with the module are
printed). The return status indicates if the module was loaded. This
is appropriate if the caller considers the module optional.
With -u
, zmodload
unloads modules. The same name
must be given that was given when the module was loaded, but it is not
necessary for the module to exist in the file system.
The -i
option suppresses the error if the module is already
unloaded (or was never loaded).
Each module has a boot and a cleanup function. The module will not be loaded if its boot function fails. Similarly a module can only be unloaded if its cleanup function runs successfully.
zmodload -F
[ -almLe
-P
param ] module [ [+-
]feature ... ]zmodload -F
allows more selective control over the features provided
by modules. With no options apart from -F
, the module named
module is loaded, if it was not already loaded, and the list of
features is set to the required state. If no
features are specified, the module is loaded, if it was not already
loaded, but the state of features is unchanged. Each feature
may be preceded by a +
to turn the feature on, or -
to turn it
off; the +
is assumed if neither character is present.
Any feature not explicitly mentioned is left in its current state;
if the module was not previously loaded this means any such features will
remain disabled. The return status is zero if all features were
set, 1 if the module failed to load, and 2 if some features could
not be set (for example, a parameter couldn’t be added because there
was a different parameter of the same name) but the module was loaded.
The standard features are builtins, conditions, parameters and math
functions; these are indicated by the prefix ‘b:
’, ‘c:
’
(‘C:
’ for an infix condition), ‘p:
’ and ‘f:
’, respectively,
followed by the name that the corresponding feature would have in the
shell. For example, ‘b:strftime
’ indicates a builtin named
strftime
and p:EPOCHSECONDS
indicates a parameter named
EPOCHSECONDS
. The module may provide other (‘abstract’) features of
its own as indicated by its documentation; these have no prefix.
With -l
or -L
, features provided by the module are listed. With
-l
alone, a list of features together with their states is shown, one
feature per line. With -L
alone, a zmodload -F
command that would
cause enabled features of the module to be turned on is shown. With
-lL
, a zmodload -F
command that would cause all the features to be
set to their current state is shown. If one of these combinations is given
with the option -P
param then the parameter param is set to an
array of features, either features together with their state or (if
-L
alone is given) enabled features.
With the option -L
the module name may be omitted; then a list
of all enabled features for all modules providing features is printed
in the form of zmodload -F
commands. If -l
is also given,
the state of both enabled and disabled features is output in that form.
A set of features may be provided together with -l
or -L
and a
module name; in that case only the state of those features is
considered. Each feature may be preceded by +
or -
but the
character has no effect. If no set of features is provided, all
features are considered.
With -e
, the command first tests that the module is loaded;
if it is not, status 1 is returned. If the module is loaded,
the list of features given as an argument is examined. Any feature
given with no prefix is simply tested to see if the module provides it;
any feature given with a prefix +
or -
is tested to
see if is provided and in the given state. If the tests on all features
in the list succeed, status 0 is returned, else status 1.
With -m
, each entry in the given list of features is taken
as a pattern to be matched against the list of features provided
by the module. An initial +
or -
must be given explicitly.
This may not be combined with the -a
option as autoloads must
be specified explicitly.
With -a
, the given list of features is marked for autoload from
the specified module, which may not yet be loaded. An optional +
may appear before the feature name. If the feature is prefixed with
-
, any existing autoload is removed. The options -l
and -L
may be used to list autoloads. Autoloading is specific to individual
features; when the module is loaded only the requested feature is
enabled. Autoload requests are preserved if the module is
subsequently unloaded until an explicit ‘zmodload -Fa
module
-
feature’ is issued. It is not an error to request an autoload
for a feature of a module that is already loaded.
When the module is loaded each autoload is checked against the features
actually provided by the module; if the feature is not provided the
autoload request is deleted. A warning message is output; if the
module is being loaded to provide a different feature, and that autoload
is successful, there is no effect on the status of the current command.
If the module is already loaded at the time when zmodload -Fa
is
run, an error message is printed and status 1 returned.
zmodload -Fa
can be used with the -l
, -L
, -e
and
-P
options for listing and testing the existence of autoloadable
features. In this case -l
is ignored if -L
is specified.
zmodload -FaL
with no module name lists autoloads for all modules.
Note that only standard features as described above can be autoloaded; other features require the module to be loaded before enabling.
zmodload
-d
[ -L
] [ name ]zmodload
-d
name dep ...zmodload
-ud
name [ dep ... ]The -d
option can be used to specify module dependencies. The modules
named in the second and subsequent arguments will be loaded before the
module named in the first argument.
With -d
and one argument, all dependencies for that module are listed.
With -d
and no arguments, all module dependencies are listed. This
listing is by default in a Makefile-like format. The -L
option
changes this format to a list of zmodload -d
commands.
If -d
and -u
are both used, dependencies are removed. If only one
argument is given, all dependencies for that module are removed.
zmodload
-ab
[ -L
]zmodload
-ab
[ -i
] name [ builtin ... ]zmodload
-ub
[ -i
] builtin ...The -ab
option defines autoloaded builtins. It defines the specified
builtins. When any of those builtins is called, the module specified
in the first argument is loaded and all its features are enabled (for
selective control of features use ‘zmodload -F -a
’ as described
above). If only the name is given, one builtin is defined, with
the same name as the module. -i
suppresses the error if the builtin
is already defined or autoloaded, but not if another builtin of the
same name is already defined.
With -ab
and no arguments, all autoloaded builtins are listed, with the
module name (if different) shown in parentheses after the builtin name.
The -L
option changes this format to a list of zmodload -a
commands.
If -b
is used together with the -u
option, it removes builtins
previously defined with -ab
. This is only possible if the builtin is
not yet loaded. -i
suppresses the error if the builtin is already
removed (or never existed).
Autoload requests are retained if the module is subsequently unloaded
until an explicit ‘zmodload -ub
builtin’ is issued.
zmodload
-ac
[ -IL
]zmodload
-ac
[ -iI
] name [ cond ... ]zmodload
-uc
[ -iI
] cond ...The -ac
option is used to define autoloaded condition codes. The
cond strings give the names of the conditions defined by the
module. The optional -I
option is used to define infix condition
names. Without this option prefix condition names are defined.
If given no condition names, all defined names are listed (as a series of
zmodload
commands if the -L
option is given).
The -uc
option removes definitions for autoloaded conditions.
zmodload
-ap
[ -L
]zmodload
-ap
[ -i
] name [ parameter ... ]zmodload
-up
[ -i
] parameter ...The -p
option is like the -b
and -c
options, but makes
zmodload
work on autoloaded parameters instead.
zmodload
-af
[ -L
]zmodload
-af
[ -i
] name [ function ... ]zmodload
-uf
[ -i
] function ...The -f
option is like the -b
, -p
, and -c
options, but
makes zmodload
work on autoloaded math functions instead.
zmodload
-a
[ -L
]zmodload
-a
[ -i
] name [ builtin ... ]zmodload
-ua
[ -i
] builtin ...Equivalent to -ab
and -ub
.
zmodload -e
[ -A
] [ string ... ]The -e
option without arguments lists all loaded modules; if the -A
option is also given, module aliases corresponding to loaded modules are
also shown. If arguments are provided, nothing is printed;
the return status is set to zero if all strings given as arguments
are names of loaded modules and to one if at least on string is not
the name of a loaded module. This can be used to test for the
availability of things implemented by modules. In this case, any
aliases are automatically resolved and the -A
flag is not used.
zmodload
-A
[ -L
] [ modalias[=
module] ... ]For each argument, if both modalias and module are given,
define modalias to be an alias for the module module.
If the module modalias is ever subsequently requested, either via a
call to zmodload
or implicitly, the shell will attempt to load
module instead. If module is not given, show the definition of
modalias. If no arguments are given, list all defined module aliases.
When listing, if the -L
flag was also given, list the definition as a
zmodload
command to recreate the alias.
The existence of aliases for modules is completely independent of whether
the name resolved is actually loaded as a module: while the alias exists,
loading and unloading the module under any alias has exactly the same
effect as using the resolved name, and does not affect the connection
between the alias and the resolved name which can be removed either by
zmodload -R
or by redefining the alias. Chains of aliases (i.e. where
the first resolved name is itself an alias) are valid so long as these are
not circular. As the aliases take the same format as module names, they
may include path separators: in this case, there is no requirement for any
part of the path named to exist as the alias will be resolved first. For
example, ‘any/old/alias
’ is always a valid alias.
Dependencies added to aliased modules are actually added to the resolved module; these remain if the alias is removed. It is valid to create an alias whose name is one of the standard shell modules and which resolves to a different module. However, if a module has dependencies, it will not be possible to use the module name as an alias as the module will already be marked as a loadable module in its own right.
Apart from the above, aliases can be used in the zmodload
command
anywhere module names are required. However, aliases will not be
shown in lists of loaded modules with a bare ‘zmodload
’.
zmodload
-R
modalias ...For each modalias argument that was previously defined as a module
alias via zmodload -A
, delete the alias. If any was not defined, an
error is caused and the remainder of the line is ignored.
Note that zsh
makes no distinction between modules that were linked
into the shell and modules that are loaded dynamically. In both cases
this builtin command has to be used to make available the builtins and
other things defined by modules (unless the module is autoloaded on
these definitions). This is true even for systems that don’t support
dynamic loading of modules.
zparseopts
See The zsh/zutil Module.
zprof
See The zsh/zprof Module.
zpty
See The zsh/zpty Module.
zregexparse
See The zsh/zutil Module.
zsocket
zstyle
See The zsh/zutil Module.
ztcp
If the ZLE
option is set (which it is by default in interactive shells)
and the shell input is attached to the terminal, the user
is able to edit command lines.
There are two display modes. The first, multiline mode, is the
default. It only works if the TERM
parameter is set to a valid
terminal type that can move the cursor up. The second, single line
mode, is used if TERM
is invalid or incapable of moving the
cursor up, or if the SINGLE_LINE_ZLE
option is set.
This mode
is similar to ksh, and uses no termcap sequences. If TERM
is
"emacs", the ZLE
option will be unset by default.
The parameters BAUD
, COLUMNS
, and LINES
are also used by the
line editor. See
Parameters Used By The Shell.
The parameter zle_highlight
is also used by the line editor; see
Character Highlighting. Highlighting
of special characters and the region between the cursor and the
mark (as set with set-mark-command
in Emacs mode, or by visual-mode
in Vi mode) is enabled
by default; consult this reference for more information. Irascible
conservatives will wish to know that all highlighting may be disabled by
the following setting:
zle_highlight=(none)
In many places, references are made to the numeric argument
. This can
by default be entered in emacs mode by holding the alt key and typing
a number, or pressing escape before each digit, and in vi command mode
by typing the number before entering a command. Generally the numeric
argument causes the next command entered to be repeated the specified
number of times, unless otherwise noted below; this is implemented
by the digit-argument
widget. See also
Argumentsfor some other ways the numeric argument can be modified.
A keymap in ZLE contains a set of bindings between key sequences and ZLE commands. The empty key sequence cannot be bound.
There can be any number of keymaps at any time, and each keymap has one
or more names. If all of a keymap’s names are deleted, it disappears.
bindkey
can be used to manipulate keymap names.
Initially, there are eight keymaps:
emacs
EMACS emulation
viins
vi emulation - insert mode
vicmd
vi emulation - command mode
viopp
vi emulation - operator pending
visual
vi emulation - selection active
isearch
incremental search mode
command
read a command name
.safe
fallback keymap
The ‘.safe
’ keymap is special. It can never be altered, and the name
can never be removed. However, it can be linked to other names, which can
be removed. In the future other special keymaps may be added; users should
avoid using names beginning with ‘.
’ for their own keymaps.
In addition to these names, either ‘emacs
’ or ‘viins
’ is
also linked to the name ‘main
’. If one of the VISUAL
or
EDITOR
environment variables contain the string ‘vi
’ when the shell
starts up then it will be ‘viins
’, otherwise it will be ‘emacs
’.
bindkey
’s -e
and -v
options provide a convenient way to override this default choice.
When the editor starts up, it will select the ‘main
’ keymap.
If that keymap doesn’t exist, it will use ‘.safe
’ instead.
In the ‘.safe
’ keymap, each single key is bound to self-insert
,
except for ^J (line feed) and ^M (return) which are bound to accept-line
.
This is deliberately not pleasant to use; if you are using it, it
means you deleted the main keymap, and you should put it back.
When ZLE is reading a command from the terminal, it may read a sequence
that is bound to some command and is also a prefix of a longer bound string.
In this case ZLE will wait a certain time to see if more characters
are typed, and if not (or they don’t match any longer string) it will
execute the binding. This timeout is defined by the KEYTIMEOUT
parameter;
its default is 0.4 sec. There is no timeout if the prefix string is not
itself bound to a command.
The key timeout is also applied when ZLE is reading the bytes from a
multibyte character string when it is in the appropriate mode. (This
requires that the shell was compiled with multibyte mode enabled; typically
also the locale has characters with the UTF-8 encoding, although any
multibyte encoding known to the operating system is supported.) If the
second or a subsequent byte is not read within the timeout period, the
shell acts as if ?
were typed and resets the input state.
As well as ZLE commands, key sequences can be bound to other strings, by using
‘bindkey -s
’.
When such a sequence is read, the replacement string is pushed back as input,
and the command reading process starts again using these fake keystrokes.
This input can itself invoke further replacement strings, but in order to
detect loops the process will be stopped if there are twenty such replacements
without a real command being read.
A key sequence typed by the user can be turned into a command name for use
in user-defined widgets with the read-command
widget, described in
Miscellaneous below.
While for normal editing a single keymap is used exclusively, in many
modes a local keymap allows for some keys to be customised. For example,
in an incremental search mode, a binding in the isearch
keymap will
override a binding in the main
keymap but all keys that are not
overridden can still be used.
If a key sequence is defined in a local keymap, it will hide a key
sequence in the global keymap that is a prefix of that sequence. An
example of this occurs with the binding of iw
in viopp
as this
hides the binding of i
in vicmd
. However, a longer sequence in
the global keymap that shares the same prefix can still apply so for
example the binding of ^Xa
in the global keymap will be unaffected
by the binding of ^Xb
in the local keymap.
The ZLE module contains three related builtin commands. The bindkey
command manipulates keymaps and key bindings; the vared
command invokes
ZLE on the value of a shell parameter; and the zle
command manipulates
editing widgets and allows command line access to ZLE commands from within
shell functions.
bindkey
[ options ] -l
[ -L
] [ keymap ... ] ¶bindkey
[ options ] -d
bindkey
[ options ] -D
keymap ...bindkey
[ options ] -A
old-keymap new-keymapbindkey
[ options ] -N
new-keymap [ old-keymap ]bindkey
[ options ] -m
bindkey
[ options ] -r
in-string ...bindkey
[ options ] -s
in-string out-string ...bindkey
[ options ] in-string command ...bindkey
[ options ] [ in-string ]bindkey
’s options can be divided into three categories: keymap
selection for the current command, operation selection, and others. The
keymap selection options are:
-e
Selects keymap ‘emacs
’ for any operations by the current command,
and also links ‘emacs
’ to ‘main
’ so that it is selected by
default the next time the editor starts.
-v
Selects keymap ‘viins
’ for any operations by the current command,
and also links ‘viins
’ to ‘main
’ so that it is selected by default
the next time the editor starts.
-a
Selects keymap ‘vicmd
’ for any operations by the current command.
-M
keymapThe keymap specifies a keymap name that is selected for any operations by the current command.
If a keymap selection is required and none of the options above are used, the
‘main
’ keymap is used. Some operations do not permit a keymap to be
selected, namely:
-l
List all existing keymap names; if any arguments are given, list just those keymaps.
If the -L
option is also used, list in the form of bindkey
commands to create or link the keymaps. ‘bindkey -lL
main
’ shows which keymap is linked to ‘main
’, if any, and hence if
the standard emacs or vi emulation is in effect. This option does
not show the .safe
keymap because it cannot be created in that
fashion; however, neither is ‘bindkey -lL .safe
’ reported as an
error, it simply outputs nothing.
-d
Delete all existing keymaps and reset to the default state.
-D
keymap ...Delete the named keymaps.
-A
old-keymap new-keymapMake the new-keymap name an alias for old-keymap, so that both names refer to the same keymap. The names have equal standing; if either is deleted, the other remains. If there is already a keymap with the new-keymap name, it is deleted.
-N
new-keymap [ old-keymap ]Create a new keymap, named new-keymap. If a keymap already has that name, it is deleted. If an old-keymap name is given, the new keymap is initialized to be a duplicate of it, otherwise the new keymap will be empty.
To use a newly created keymap, it should be linked to main
. Hence
the sequence of commands to create and use a new keymap ‘mymap
’
initialized from the emacs
keymap (which remains unchanged) is:
bindkey -N mymap emacs bindkey -A mymap main
Note that while ‘bindkey -A
newmap main
’ will work when
newmap is emacs
or viins
, it will not work for vicmd
, as
switching from vi insert to command mode becomes impossible.
The following operations act on the ‘main
’ keymap if no keymap
selection option was given:
-m
Add the built-in set of meta-key bindings to the selected keymap.
Only keys that are unbound or bound to self-insert
are affected.
-r
in-string ...Unbind the specified in-strings in the selected keymap.
This is exactly equivalent to binding the strings to undefined-key
.
When -R
is also used, interpret the in-strings as ranges.
When -p
is also used, the in-strings specify prefixes. Any
binding that has the given in-string as a prefix, not including the
binding for the in-string itself, if any, will be removed. For
example,
bindkey -rpM viins '^['
will remove all bindings in the vi-insert keymap beginning with an escape
character (probably cursor keys), but leave the binding for the escape
character itself (probably vi-cmd-mode
). This is incompatible with the
option -R
.
-s
in-string out-string ...Bind each in-string to each out-string.
When in-string is typed, out-string will be
pushed back and treated as input to the line editor.
When -R
is also used, interpret the in-strings as ranges.
Note that both in-string and out-string are subject to the same form of interpretation, as described below.
Bind each in-string to each command.
When -R
is used, interpret the in-strings as ranges.
List key bindings. If an in-string is specified, the binding of
that string in the selected keymap is displayed. Otherwise, all key
bindings in the selected keymap are displayed. (As a special case,
if the -e
or -v
option is used alone, the keymap is not
displayed - the implicit linking of keymaps is the only thing that
happens.)
When the option -p
is used, the in-string must be present.
The listing shows all bindings which have the given key sequence as a
prefix, not including any bindings for the key sequence itself.
When the -L
option is used, the list is in the form of bindkey
commands to create the key bindings.
When the -R
option is used as noted above, a valid range consists of
two characters, with an optional ‘-
’ between them. All characters
between the two specified, inclusive, are bound as specified.
For either in-string or out-string, the following escape sequences are recognised:
\a
bell character
\b
backspace
\e
, \E
escape
\f
form feed
\n
linefeed (newline)
\r
carriage return
\t
horizontal tab
\v
vertical tab
\
NNNcharacter code in octal
\x
NNcharacter code in hexadecimal
\u
NNNNunicode character code in hexadecimal
\U
NNNNNNNNunicode character code in hexadecimal
\M
[-
]Xcharacter with meta bit set
\C
[-
]Xcontrol character
^
Xcontrol character
In all other cases, ‘\
’ escapes the following character. Delete is
written as ‘^?
’. Note that ‘\M^?
’ and ‘^\M?
’ are not the same,
and that (unlike emacs), the bindings ‘\M-
X’ and ‘\e
X’
are entirely distinct, although they are initialized to the same bindings
by ‘bindkey -m
’.
vared
[ -Aacghe
] [ -p
prompt ] [ -r
rprompt ]
[ -M
main-keymap ] [ -m
vicmd-keymap ]
[ -i
init-widget ] [ -f
finish-widget ]
[ -t
tty ] nameThe value of the parameter name is loaded into the edit
buffer, and the line editor is invoked. When the editor exits,
name is set to the string value returned by the editor.
When the -c
flag is given, the parameter is created if it doesn’t
already exist. The -a
flag may be given with -c
to create
an array parameter, or the -A
flag to create an associative array.
If the type of an existing parameter does not match the type to be
created, the parameter is unset and recreated. The -g
flag may
be given to suppress warnings from the WARN_CREATE_GLOBAL
and WARN_NESTED_VAR
options.
If an array or array slice is being edited, separator characters as defined
in $IFS
will be shown quoted with a backslash, as will backslashes
themselves. Conversely, when the edited text is split into an array, a
backslash quotes an immediately following separator character or backslash;
no other special handling of backslashes, or any handling of quotes, is
performed.
Individual elements of existing array or associative array parameters
may be edited by using subscript syntax on name. New elements are
created automatically, even without -c
.
If the -p
flag is given, the following string will be taken as
the prompt to display at the left. If the -r
flag is given,
the following string gives the prompt to display at the right. If the
-h
flag is specified, the history can be accessed from ZLE. If the
-e
flag is given, typing ^D
(Control-D) on an empty line
causes vared
to exit immediately with a non-zero return value.
The -M
option gives a keymap to link to the main
keymap during
editing, and the -m
option gives a keymap to link to the vicmd
keymap during editing. For vi-style editing, this allows a pair of keymaps
to override viins
and vicmd
. For emacs-style editing, only -M
is normally needed but the -m
option may still be used. On exit, the
previous keymaps will be restored.
Vared
calls the usual ‘zle-line-init
’ and ‘zle-line-finish
’
hooks before and after it takes control. Using the -i
and -f
options, it is possible to replace these with other custom widgets.
If ‘-t
tty’ is given, tty is the name of a terminal device
to be used instead of the default /dev/tty
. If tty does not
refer to a terminal an error is reported.
zle
¶zle
-l
[ -L
| -a
] [ string ... ]zle
-D
widget ...zle
-A
old-widget new-widgetzle
-N
widget [ function ]zle
-f
flag [ flag... ]zle
-C
widget completion-widget functionzle
-R
[ -c
] [ display-string ] [ string ... ]zle
-M
stringzle
-U
stringzle
-K
keymapzle
-F
[ -L
| -w
] [ fd [ handler ] ]zle
-I
zle
-T
[ tc
function | -r
tc
| -L
]zle
widget [ -n
num ] [ -f
flag ] [ -Nw
] [ -K
keymap ] args ...The zle
builtin performs a number of different actions concerning
ZLE.
With no options and no arguments, only the return status will be set. It is zero if ZLE is currently active and widgets could be invoked using this builtin command and non-zero otherwise. Note that even if non-zero status is returned, zle may still be active as part of the completion system; this does not allow direct calls to ZLE widgets.
Otherwise, which operation it performs depends on its options:
-l
[ -L
| -a
] [ string ]List all existing user-defined widgets. If the -L
option is used, list in the form of zle
commands to create the widgets.
When combined with the -a
option, all widget names are listed,
including the builtin ones. In this case the -L
option is ignored.
If at least one string is given, and -a
is present or -L
is
not used, nothing will be printed. The return status will be zero if
all strings are names of existing widgets and non-zero if at least one
string is not a name of a defined widget. If -a
is also
present, all widget names are used for the comparison including builtin
widgets, else only user-defined widgets are used.
If at least one string is present and the -L
option is used,
user-defined widgets matching any string are listed in the form of
zle
commands to create the widgets.
-D
widget ...Delete the named widgets.
-A
old-widget new-widgetMake the new-widget name an alias for old-widget, so that both names refer to the same widget. The names have equal standing; if either is deleted, the other remains. If there is already a widget with the new-widget name, it is deleted.
-N
widget [ function ]Create a user-defined widget. If there is already a widget with the specified name, it is overwritten. When the new widget is invoked from within the editor, the specified shell function is called. If no function name is specified, it defaults to the same name as the widget. For further information, see Zle Widgets.
-f
flag [ flag... ]Set various flags on the running widget. Possible values for flag are:
yank
for indicating that the widget has yanked text into the buffer.
If the widget is wrapping an existing internal widget, no further
action is necessary, but if it has inserted the text manually, then it
should also take care to set YANK_START
and YANK_END
correctly.
yankbefore
does the same but is used when the yanked text appears
after the cursor.
kill
for indicating that text has been killed into the cutbuffer.
When repeatedly invoking a kill widget, text is appended to the cutbuffer
instead of replacing it, but when wrapping such widgets, it is necessary
to call ‘zle -f kill
’ to retain this effect.
vichange
for indicating that the widget represents a vi change that
can be repeated as a whole with ‘vi-repeat-change
’. The flag should be set
early in the function before inspecting the value of NUMERIC
or invoking
other widgets. This has no effect for a widget invoked from insert mode. If
insert mode is active when the widget finishes, the change extends until next
returning to command mode.
-C
widget completion-widget function ¶Create a user-defined completion widget named widget. The completion widget will behave like the built-in completion-widget whose name is given as completion-widget. To generate the completions, the shell function function will be called. For further information, see Completion Widgets.
-R
[ -c
] [ display-string ] [ string ... ]Redisplay the command line. If a display-string is given and not empty, this is shown in the status line (immediately below the line being edited).
If the optional strings are given they are listed below the
prompt in the same way as completion lists are printed. If no
strings are given but the -c
option is used such a list is
cleared.
Note that immediately after returning from running widgets, the command line will be redisplayed and the strings displayed will be erased. Therefore, this option is only useful for widgets that do not exit immediately after using it.
This command can safely be called outside user defined widgets; if zle is active, the display will be refreshed, while if zle is not active, the command has no effect. In this case there will usually be no other arguments.
The status is zero if zle was active, else one.
-M
stringAs with the -R
option, the string will be displayed below the
command line; unlike the -R
option, the string will not be put into
the status line but will instead be printed normally below the
prompt. This means that the string will still be displayed after
the widget returns (until it is overwritten by subsequent commands).
-U
stringThis pushes the characters in the string onto the input stack of ZLE. After the widget currently executed finishes ZLE will behave as if the characters in the string were typed by the user.
As ZLE uses a stack, if this option is used repeatedly the last string pushed onto the stack will be processed first. However, the characters in each string will be processed in the order in which they appear in the string.
-K
keymapSelects the keymap named keymap. An error message will be displayed if there is no such keymap.
This keymap selection affects the interpretation of following keystrokes
within this invocation of ZLE. Any following invocation (e.g., the next
command line) will start as usual with the ‘main
’ keymap selected.
-F
[ -L
| -w
] [ fd [ handler ] ]Only available if your system supports one of the ‘poll’ or ‘select’ system calls; most modern systems do.
Installs handler (the name of a shell function) to handle input from file descriptor fd. Installing a handler for an fd which is already handled causes the existing handler to be replaced. Any number of handlers for any number of readable file descriptors may be installed. Note that zle makes no attempt to check whether this fd is actually readable when installing the handler. The user must make their own arrangements for handling the file descriptor when zle is not active.
When zle is attempting to read data, it will examine both the terminal and
the list of handled fd’s. If data becomes available on a handled
fd, zle calls handler with the fd which is ready for reading
as the first argument. Under normal circumstances this is the only
argument, but if an error was detected, a second argument provides
details: ‘hup
’ for a disconnect, ‘nval
’ for a closed or otherwise
invalid descriptor, or ‘err
’ for any other condition. Systems that
support only the ‘select’ system call always use ‘err
’.
If the option -w
is also given, the handler is instead a line
editor widget, typically a shell function made into a widget using
‘zle -N
’. In that case handler can use all the facilities of zle
to update the current editing line. Note, however, that as handling fd
takes place at a low level changes to the display will not automatically
appear; the widget should call ‘zle -R
’ to force redisplay. As of this
writing, widget handlers only support a single argument and thus are never
passed a string for error state, so widgets must be prepared to test the
descriptor themselves.
If either type of handler produces output to the terminal, it should call
‘zle -I
’ before doing so (see below). Handlers should not attempt to
read from the terminal.
If no handler is given, but an fd is present, any handler for that fd is removed. If there is none, an error message is printed and status 1 is returned.
If no arguments are given, or the -L
option is supplied, a list of
handlers is printed in a form which can be stored for later execution.
An fd (but not a handler) may optionally be given with the -L
option; in this case, the function will list the handler if any, else
silently return status 1.
Note that this feature should be used with care. Activity on one of the fd’s which is not properly handled can cause the terminal to become unusable. Removing an fd handler from within a signal trap may cause unpredictable behavior.
Here is a simple example of using this feature. A connection to a remote TCP port is created using the ztcp command; see The zsh/net/tcp Module. Then a handler is installed which simply prints out any data which arrives on this connection. Note that ‘select’ will indicate that the file descriptor needs handling if the remote side has closed the connection; we handle that by testing for a failed read.
if ztcp pwspc 2811; then tcpfd=$REPLY handler() { zle -I local line if ! read -r line <&$1; then # select marks this fd if we reach EOF, # so handle this specially. print "[Read on fd $1 failed, removing.]" >&2 zle -F $1 return 1 fi print -r - $line } zle -F $tcpfd handler fi
-I
Unusually, this option is most useful outside ordinary widget functions, though it may be used within if normal output to the terminal is required. It invalidates the current zle display in preparation for output; typically this will be from a trap function. It has no effect if zle is not active. When a trap exits, the shell checks to see if the display needs restoring, hence the following will print output in such a way as not to disturb the line being edited:
TRAPUSR1() { # Invalidate zle display [[ -o zle ]] && zle -I # Show output print Hello }
In general, the trap function may need to test whether zle is active before
using this method (as shown in the example), since the zsh/zle
module
may not even be loaded; if it is not, the command can be skipped.
It is possible to call ‘zle -I
’ several times before control is
returned to the editor; the display will only be invalidated the first time
to minimise disruption.
Note that there are normally better ways of manipulating the display from
within zle widgets; see, for example, ‘zle -R
’ above.
The returned status is zero if zle was invalidated, even though
this may have been by a previous call to ‘zle -I
’ or by a system
notification. To test if a zle widget may be called at this point, execute
zle
with no arguments and examine the return status.
-T
This is used to add, list or remove internal transformations on the processing performed by the line editor. It is typically used only for debugging or testing and is therefore of little interest to the general user.
‘zle -T
transformation func’ specifies that the
given transformation (see below) is effected by shell function
func.
‘zle -Tr
transformation’ removes the given transformation
if it was present (it is not an error if none was).
‘zle -TL
’ can be used to list all transformations currently in
operation.
Currently the only transformation is tc
. This is used instead
of outputting termcap codes to the terminal. When the transformation is
in operation the shell function is passed the termcap code that would be
output as its first argument; if the operation required a numeric
argument, that is passed as a second argument. The function should set
the shell variable REPLY
to the transformed termcap code. Typically
this is used to produce some simply formatted version of the code and
optional argument for debugging or testing. Note that this
transformation is not applied to other non-printing characters such as
carriage returns and newlines.
-n
num ] [ -f
flag ] [ -Nw
] [ -K
keymap ] args ...Invoke the specified widget. This can only be done when ZLE is active; normally this will be within a user-defined widget.
With the options -n
and -N
, the current numeric argument will be
saved and then restored after the call to widget; ‘-n
num’
sets the numeric argument temporarily to num, while ‘-N
’ sets it
to the default, i.e. as if there were none.
With the option -K
, keymap will be used as the current keymap
during the execution of the widget. The previous keymap will be
restored when the widget exits.
Normally, calling a widget in this way does not set the special
parameter WIDGET
and related parameters, so that the environment
appears as if the top-level widget called by the user were still
active. With the option -w
, WIDGET
and related parameters are set
to reflect the widget being executed by the zle
call.
Normally, when widget returns the special parameter LASTWIDGET
will
point to it. This can be inhibited by passing the option -f nolast
.
Any further arguments will be passed to the widget; note that as
standard argument handling is performed, any general argument list
should be preceded by -
-
. If it is a shell
function, these are passed down as positional parameters; for builtin
widgets it is up to the widget in question what it does with them.
Currently arguments are only handled by the incremental-search commands,
the history-search-forward
and -backward
and the corresponding
functions prefixed by vi-
, and by universal-argument
. No error is
flagged if the command does not use the arguments, or only uses some of
them.
The return status reflects the success or failure of the operation carried out by the widget, or if it is a user-defined widget the return status of the shell function.
A non-zero return status causes the shell to beep when the widget exits,
unless the BEEP
options was unset or the widget was called via the
zle
command. Thus if a user defined widget requires an immediate beep,
it should call the beep
widget directly.
All actions in the editor are performed by ‘widgets’. A widget’s job is simply to perform some small action. The ZLE commands that key sequences in keymaps are bound to are in fact widgets. Widgets can be user-defined or built in.
The standard widgets built into ZLE are listed in
Standard Widgets.
Other built-in widgets can be defined by other modules (see
Zsh Modules). Each built-in widget has two names: its normal canonical name, and the
same name preceded by a ‘.
’. The ‘.
’ name is special: it can’t be
rebound to a different widget. This makes the widget available even when
its usual name has been redefined.
User-defined widgets are defined using ‘zle -N
’, and implemented
as shell functions. When the widget is executed, the corresponding
shell function is executed, and can perform editing (or other) actions.
It is recommended that user-defined widgets should not have names
starting with ‘.
’.
User-defined widgets, being implemented as shell functions,
can execute any normal shell command. They can also run other widgets
(whether built-in or user-defined) using the zle
builtin command. The
standard input of the function is redirected from /dev/null to prevent
external commands from unintentionally blocking ZLE by reading from the
terminal, but read -k
or read -q
can be used to read characters.
Finally, they can examine and edit the ZLE buffer being edited by reading
and setting the special parameters described below.
These special parameters are always available in widget functions, but
are not in any way special outside ZLE. If they have some normal value
outside ZLE, that value is temporarily inaccessible, but will return
when the widget function exits. These special parameters in fact have
local scope, like parameters created in a function using local
.
Inside completion widgets and traps called while ZLE is active, these parameters are available read-only.
Note that the parameters appear as local to any ZLE widget in which they appear. Hence if it is desired to override them this needs to be done within a nested function:
widget-function() { # $WIDGET here refers to the special variable # that is local inside widget-function () { # This anonymous nested function allows WIDGET # to be used as a local variable. The -h # removes the special status of the variable. local -h WIDGET } }
BUFFER
(scalar) ¶The entire contents of the edit buffer. If it is written to, the cursor remains at the same offset, unless that would put it outside the buffer.
BUFFERLINES
(integer) ¶The number of screen lines needed for the edit buffer currently displayed on screen (i.e. without any changes to the preceding parameters done after the last redisplay); read-only.
CONTEXT
(scalar) ¶The context in which zle was called to read a line; read-only. One of the values:
start
The start of a command line (at prompt PS1
).
cont
A continuation to a command line (at prompt PS2
).
select
In a select
loop (at prompt PS3
).
vared
Editing a variable in vared
.
CURSOR
(integer) ¶The offset of the cursor, within the edit buffer. This is in the range
0 to $#BUFFER
, and is by definition equal to $#LBUFFER
.
Attempts to move the cursor outside the buffer will result in the
cursor being moved to the appropriate end of the buffer.
CUTBUFFER
(scalar) ¶The last item cut using one of the ‘kill-
’ commands; the string
which the next yank would insert in the line. Later entries in
the kill ring are in the array killring
. Note that the
command ‘zle copy-region-as-kill
string’ can be used to
set the text of the cut buffer from a shell function and cycle the kill
ring in the same way as interactively killing text.
HISTNO
(integer) ¶The current history number. Setting this has the same effect as
moving up or down in the history to the corresponding history line.
An attempt to set it is ignored if the line is not stored in the
history. Note this is not the same as the parameter HISTCMD
,
which always gives the number of the history line being added to the main
shell’s history. HISTNO
refers to the line being retrieved within
zle.
ISEARCHMATCH_ACTIVE
(integer) ¶ISEARCHMATCH_START
(integer)ISEARCHMATCH_END
(integer)ISEARCHMATCH_ACTIVE
indicates whether a part of the BUFFER
is
currently matched by an incremental search pattern. ISEARCHMATCH_START
and ISEARCHMATCH_END
give the location of the matched part and are
in the same units as CURSOR
. They are only valid for reading
when ISEARCHMATCH_ACTIVE
is non-zero.
All parameters are read-only.
KEYMAP
(scalar) ¶The name of the currently selected keymap; read-only.
KEYS
(scalar) ¶The keys typed to invoke this widget, as a literal string; read-only.
KEYS_QUEUED_COUNT
(integer) ¶The number of bytes pushed back to the input queue and therefore
available for reading immediately before any I/O is done; read-only.
See also PENDING
; the two values are distinct.
killring
(array) ¶The array of previously killed items, with the most recently killed first.
This gives the items that would be retrieved by a yank-pop
in the
same order. Note, however, that the most recently killed item is in
$CUTBUFFER
; $killring
shows the array of previous entries.
The default size for the kill ring is eight, however the length may be
changed by normal array operations. Any empty string in the kill ring is
ignored by the yank-pop
command, hence the size of the array
effectively sets the maximum length of the kill ring, while the number of
non-zero strings gives the current length, both as seen by the user at the
command line.
LASTABORTEDSEARCH
(scalar) ¶The last search string used by an interactive search that was aborted by the user (status 3 returned by the search widget).
LASTSEARCH
(scalar) ¶The last search string used by an interactive search; read-only. This is set even if the search failed (status 0, 1 or 2 returned by the search widget), but not if it was aborted by the user.
LASTWIDGET
(scalar) ¶The name of the last widget that was executed; read-only.
LBUFFER
(scalar) ¶The part of the buffer that lies to the left of the cursor position.
If it is assigned to, only that part of the buffer is replaced, and the
cursor remains between the new $LBUFFER
and the old $RBUFFER
.
MARK
(integer) ¶Like CURSOR
, but for the mark. With vi-mode operators that wait for
a movement command to select a region of text, setting MARK
allows
the selection to extend in both directions from the initial cursor
position.
NUMERIC
(integer) ¶The numeric argument. If no numeric argument was given, this parameter
is unset. When this is set inside a widget function, builtin widgets
called with the zle
builtin command will use the value
assigned. If it is unset inside a widget function, builtin widgets
called behave as if no numeric argument was given.
PENDING
(integer) ¶The number of bytes pending for input, i.e. the number of bytes which have
already been typed and can immediately be read. On systems where the shell
is not able to get this information, this parameter will always have a
value of zero. Read-only. See also KEYS_QUEUED_COUNT
; the two
values are distinct.
PREBUFFER
(scalar) ¶In a multi-line input at the secondary prompt, this read-only parameter contains the contents of the lines before the one the cursor is currently in.
PREDISPLAY
(scalar) ¶Text to be displayed before the start of the editable text buffer. This does not have to be a complete line; to display a complete line, a newline must be appended explicitly. The text is reset on each new invocation (but not recursive invocation) of zle.
POSTDISPLAY
(scalar) ¶Text to be displayed after the end of the editable text buffer. This does not have to be a complete line; to display a complete line, a newline must be prepended explicitly. The text is reset on each new invocation (but not recursive invocation) of zle.
RBUFFER
(scalar) ¶The part of the buffer that lies to the right of the cursor position.
If it is assigned to, only that part of the buffer is replaced, and the
cursor remains between the old $LBUFFER
and the new $RBUFFER
.
REGION_ACTIVE
(integer) ¶Indicates if the region is currently active. It can be assigned 0 or 1 to deactivate and activate the region respectively. A value of 2 activates the region in line-wise mode with the highlighted text extending for whole lines only; see Character Highlighting.
region_highlight
(array) ¶Each element of this array may be set to a string that describes
highlighting for an arbitrary region of the command line that will
take effect the next time the command line is redisplayed. Highlighting
of the non-editable parts of the command line in PREDISPLAY
and POSTDISPLAY
are possible, but note that the P
flag
is needed for character indexing to include PREDISPLAY
.
Each string consists of the following whitespace-separated parts:
P
’ to signify that the start and end offset that
follow include any string set by the PREDISPLAY
special parameter;
this is needed if the predisplay string itself is to be highlighted.
Whitespace between the ‘P
’ and the start offset is optional.
CURSOR
.
CURSOR
.
zle_highlight
, see
Character Highlighting;
for example, standout
or fg=red,bold
.
memo=
token’.
The token consists of everything between the ‘=
’ and the next
whitespace, comma, NUL, or the end of the string.
The token is preserved verbatim but not parsed in any way.
Plugins may use this to identify array elements they have added: for example,
a plugin might set token to its (the plugin’s) name and then use
‘region_highlight=( ${region_highlight:#*memo=
token} )
’
in order to remove array elements it have added.
(This example uses the ‘${
name:#
pattern}
’ array-grepping
syntax described in
Parameter Expansion.)
For example,
region_highlight=("P0 20 bold memo=foobar")
specifies that the first twenty characters of the text including any predisplay string should be highlighted in bold.
Note that the effect of region_highlight
is not saved and disappears
as soon as the line is accepted.
Note that zsh 5.8 and older do not support the ‘memo=
token’ field
and may misparse the third (highlight specification) field when a memo
is given.
The final highlighting on the command line depends on both region_highlight
and zle_highlight
; see
Character Highlighting for details.
registers
(associative array) ¶The contents of each of the vi register buffers. These are
typically set using vi-set-buffer
followed by a delete, change or
yank command.
SUFFIX_ACTIVE
(integer) ¶SUFFIX_START
(integer)SUFFIX_END
(integer)SUFFIX_ACTIVE
indicates whether an auto-removable completion suffix
is currently active. SUFFIX_START
and SUFFIX_END
give the
location of the suffix and are in the same units as CURSOR
. They are
only valid for reading when SUFFIX_ACTIVE
is non-zero.
All parameters are read-only.
UNDO_CHANGE_NO
(integer) ¶A number representing the state of the undo history. The only use
of this is passing as an argument to the undo
widget in order to
undo back to the recorded point. Read-only.
UNDO_LIMIT_NO
(integer) ¶A number corresponding to an existing change in the undo history;
compare UNDO_CHANGE_NO
. If this is set to a value greater
than zero, the undo
command will not allow the line to
be undone beyond the given change number. It is still possible
to use ‘zle undo
change’ in a widget to undo beyond
that point; in that case, it will not be possible to undo at
all until UNDO_LIMIT_NO
is reduced. Set to 0 to disable the limit.
A typical use of this variable in a widget function is as follows (note the additional function scope is required):
() { local UNDO_LIMIT_NO=$UNDO_CHANGE_NO # Perform some form of recursive edit. }
WIDGET
(scalar) ¶The name of the widget currently being executed; read-only.
WIDGETFUNC
(scalar) ¶The name of the shell function that implements a widget defined with
either zle -N
or zle -C
. In the former case, this is the second
argument to the zle -N
command that defined the widget, or
the first argument if there was no second argument. In the latter case
this is the third argument to the zle -C
command that defined the
widget. Read-only.
WIDGETSTYLE
(scalar) ¶Describes the implementation behind the completion widget currently being
executed; the second argument that followed zle -C
when the widget was
defined. This is the name of a builtin completion widget. For widgets
defined with zle -N
this is set to the empty string. Read-only.
YANK_ACTIVE
(integer) ¶YANK_START
(integer)YANK_END
(integer)YANK_ACTIVE
indicates whether text has just been yanked (pasted)
into the buffer. YANK_START
and YANK_END
give the location of
the pasted text and are in the same units as CURSOR
. They are only
valid for reading when YANK_ACTIVE
is non-zero. They can also be
assigned by widgets that insert text in a yank-like fashion, for example
wrappers of bracketed-paste
. See also zle -f
.
YANK_ACTIVE
is read-only.
ZLE_RECURSIVE
(integer) ¶Usually zero, but incremented inside any instance of
recursive-edit
. Hence indicates the current recursion level.
ZLE_RECURSIVE
is read-only.
ZLE_STATE
(scalar) ¶Contains a set of space-separated words that describe the current zle
state.
Currently, the states shown are the insert mode as set by the
overwrite-mode
or vi-replace
widgets and whether history commands
will visit imported entries as controlled by the set-local-history widget.
The string contains ‘insert
’ if characters to be inserted on the
command line move existing characters to the right or ‘overwrite
’
if characters to be inserted overwrite existing characters. It contains
‘localhistory
’ if only local history commands will be visited or
‘globalhistory
’ if imported history commands will also be visited.
The substrings are sorted in alphabetical order so that if you want to test for two specific substrings in a future-proof way, you can do match by doing:
if [[ $ZLE_STATE == *globalhistory*insert* ]]; then ...; fi
There are a few user-defined widgets which are special to the shell. If they do not exist, no special action is taken. The environment provided is identical to that for any other editing widget.
zle-isearch-exit
¶Executed at the end of incremental search at the point where the isearch
prompt is removed from the display. See zle-isearch-update
for
an example.
zle-isearch-update
¶Executed within incremental search when the display is about to be
redrawn. Additional output below the incremental search prompt can be
generated by using ‘zle -M
’ within the widget. For example,
zle-isearch-update() { zle -M "Line $HISTNO"; } zle -N zle-isearch-update
Note the line output by ‘zle -M
’ is not deleted on exit from
incremental search. This can be done from a zle-isearch-exit
widget:
zle-isearch-exit() { zle -M ""; } zle -N zle-isearch-exit
zle-line-pre-redraw
¶Executed whenever the input line is about to be redrawn, providing an opportunity to update the region_highlight array.
zle-line-init
¶Executed every time the line editor is started to read a new line of input. The following example puts the line editor into vi command mode when it starts up.
zle-line-init() { zle -K vicmd; } zle -N zle-line-init
(The command inside the function sets the keymap directly; it is
equivalent to zle vi-cmd-mode
.)
zle-line-finish
¶This is similar to zle-line-init
but is executed every time the
line editor has finished reading a line of input.
zle-history-line-set
¶Executed when the history line changes.
zle-keymap-select
¶Executed every time the keymap changes, i.e. the special parameter
KEYMAP
is set to a different value, while the line editor is active.
Initialising the keymap when the line editor starts does not cause the
widget to be called.
The value $KEYMAP
within the function reflects the new keymap. The
old keymap is passed as the sole argument.
This can be used for detecting switches between the vi command
(vicmd
) and insert (usually main
) keymaps.
The following is a list of all the standard widgets,
and their default bindings in emacs mode,
vi command mode and vi insert mode
(the ‘emacs
’, ‘vicmd
’ and ‘viins
’ keymaps, respectively).
Note that cursor keys are bound to movement keys in all three keymaps;
the shell assumes that the cursor keys send the key sequences reported
by the terminal-handling library (termcap or terminfo). The key sequences
shown in the list are those based on the VT100, common on many modern
terminals, but in fact these are not necessarily bound. In the case of the
viins
keymap, the initial escape character of the sequences serves also
to return to the vicmd
keymap: whether this happens is determined by
the KEYTIMEOUT
parameter, see Parameters.
vi-backward-blank-word
(unbound) (B
) (unbound) ¶Move backward one word, where a word is defined as a series of non-blank characters.
vi-backward-blank-word-end
(unbound) (gE
) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the previous word, where a word is defined as a series of non-blank characters.
backward-char
(^B ESC-[D
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move backward one character.
vi-backward-char
(unbound) (^H h ^?
) (ESC-[D
) ¶Move backward one character, without changing lines.
backward-word
(ESC-B ESC-b
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move to the beginning of the previous word.
emacs-backward-word
¶Move to the beginning of the previous word.
vi-backward-word
(unbound) (b
) (unbound) ¶Move to the beginning of the previous word, vi-style.
vi-backward-word-end
(unbound) (ge
) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the previous word, vi-style.
beginning-of-line
(^A
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move to the beginning of the line. If already at the beginning of the line, move to the beginning of the previous line, if any.
vi-beginning-of-line
¶Move to the beginning of the line, without changing lines.
down-line
(unbound) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move down a line in the buffer.
end-of-line
(^E
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the line. If already at the end of the line, move to the end of the next line, if any.
vi-end-of-line
(unbound) ($
) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the line. If an argument is given to this command, the cursor will be moved to the end of the line (argument - 1) lines down.
vi-forward-blank-word
(unbound) (W
) (unbound) ¶Move forward one word, where a word is defined as a series of non-blank characters.
vi-forward-blank-word-end
(unbound) (E
) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the current word, or, if at the end of the current word, to the end of the next word, where a word is defined as a series of non-blank characters.
forward-char
(^F ESC-[C
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move forward one character.
vi-forward-char
(unbound) (space l
) (ESC-[C
) ¶Move forward one character.
vi-find-next-char
(^X^F
) (f
) (unbound) ¶Read a character from the keyboard, and move to the next occurrence of it in the line.
vi-find-next-char-skip
(unbound) (t
) (unbound) ¶Read a character from the keyboard, and move to the position just before the next occurrence of it in the line.
vi-find-prev-char
(unbound) (F
) (unbound) ¶Read a character from the keyboard, and move to the previous occurrence of it in the line.
vi-find-prev-char-skip
(unbound) (T
) (unbound) ¶Read a character from the keyboard, and move to the position just after the previous occurrence of it in the line.
vi-first-non-blank
(unbound) (^
) (unbound) ¶Move to the first non-blank character in the line.
vi-forward-word
(unbound) (w
) (unbound) ¶Move forward one word, vi-style.
forward-word
(ESC-F ESC-f
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move to the beginning of the next word.
The editor’s idea of a word is specified with the WORDCHARS
parameter.
emacs-forward-word
¶Move to the end of the next word.
vi-forward-word-end
(unbound) (e
) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the next word.
vi-goto-column
(ESC-|
) (|
) (unbound) ¶Move to the column specified by the numeric argument.
vi-goto-mark
(unbound) (`
) (unbound) ¶Move to the specified mark.
vi-goto-mark-line
(unbound) ('
) (unbound) ¶Move to beginning of the line containing the specified mark.
vi-repeat-find
(unbound) (;
) (unbound) ¶Repeat the last vi-find
command.
vi-rev-repeat-find
(unbound) (,
) (unbound) ¶Repeat the last vi-find
command in the opposite direction.
up-line
(unbound) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move up a line in the buffer.
beginning-of-buffer-or-history
(ESC-<
) (gg
) (unbound) ¶Move to the beginning of the buffer, or if already there, move to the first event in the history list.
beginning-of-line-hist
¶Move to the beginning of the line. If already at the beginning of the buffer, move to the previous history line.
beginning-of-history
¶Move to the first event in the history list.
down-line-or-history
(^N ESC-[B
) (j
) (ESC-[B
) ¶Move down a line in the buffer, or if already at the bottom line, move to the next event in the history list.
vi-down-line-or-history
(unbound) (+
) (unbound) ¶Move down a line in the buffer, or if already at the bottom line, move to the next event in the history list. Then move to the first non-blank character on the line.
down-line-or-search
¶Move down a line in the buffer, or if already at the bottom line, search forward in the history for a line beginning with the first word in the buffer.
If called from a function by the zle
command with arguments, the first
argument is taken as the string for which to search, rather than the
first word in the buffer.
down-history
(unbound) (^N
) (unbound) ¶Move to the next event in the history list.
history-beginning-search-backward
¶Search backward in the history for a line beginning with the current line up to the cursor. This leaves the cursor in its original position.
end-of-buffer-or-history
(ESC->
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the buffer, or if already there, move to the last event in the history list.
end-of-line-hist
¶Move to the end of the line. If already at the end of the buffer, move to the next history line.
end-of-history
¶Move to the last event in the history list.
vi-fetch-history
(unbound) (G
) (unbound) ¶Fetch the history line specified by the numeric argument. This defaults to the current history line (i.e. the one that isn’t history yet).
history-incremental-search-backward
(^R ^Xr
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Search backward incrementally for a specified string. The search is
case-insensitive if the search string does not have uppercase letters and no
numeric argument was given. The string may begin with ‘^
’ to anchor the
search to the beginning of the line. When called from a user-defined
function returns the following statuses: 0, if the search succeeded;
1, if the search failed; 2, if the search term was a bad pattern;
3, if the search was aborted by the send-break
command.
A restricted set of editing functions
is available in the mini-buffer. Keys are looked up in the special
isearch
keymap, and if not found there in the main keymap (note
that by default the isearch
keymap is empty).
An interrupt signal, as defined by the stty
setting, will stop the search and go back to the original line. An undefined
key will have the same effect. Note that the following always
perform the same task within incremental searches and cannot be
replaced by user defined widgets, nor can the set of functions
be extended. The supported functions are:
accept-and-hold
accept-and-infer-next-history
accept-line
accept-line-and-down-history
Perform the usual function after exiting incremental search. The command line displayed is executed.
backward-delete-char
vi-backward-delete-char
Back up one place in the search history. If the search has been repeated this does not immediately erase a character in the minibuffer.
accept-search
Exit incremental search, retaining the command line but performing no further action. Note that this function is not bound by default and has no effect outside incremental search.
backward-delete-word
backward-kill-word
vi-backward-kill-word
Back up one character in the minibuffer; if multiple searches
have been performed since the character was inserted the search
history is rewound to the point just before the character was
entered. Hence this has the effect of repeating
backward-delete-char
.
clear-screen
Clear the screen, remaining in incremental search mode.
history-incremental-search-backward
Find the next occurrence of the contents of the mini-buffer. If the mini-buffer is empty, the most recent previously used search string is reinstated.
history-incremental-search-forward
Invert the sense of the search.
magic-space
Inserts a non-magical space.
quoted-insert
vi-quoted-insert
Quote the character to insert into the minibuffer.
redisplay
Redisplay the command line, remaining in incremental search mode.
vi-cmd-mode
Select the ‘vicmd
’ keymap;
the ‘main
’ keymap (insert mode) will be selected initially.
In addition, the modifications that were made while in vi insert mode are merged to form a single undo event.
vi-repeat-search
vi-rev-repeat-search
Repeat the search. The direction of the search is indicated in the mini-buffer.
Any character that is not bound to one of the above functions, or
self-insert
or self-insert-unmeta
, will cause the mode to be
exited. The character is then looked up and executed in the keymap in
effect at that point.
When called from a widget function by the zle
command, the incremental
search commands can take a string argument. This will be treated as a
string of keys, as for arguments to the bindkey
command, and used as
initial input for the command. Any characters in the string which are
unused by the incremental search will be silently ignored. For example,
zle history-incremental-search-backward forceps
will search backwards for forceps
, leaving the minibuffer containing
the string ‘forceps
’.
history-incremental-search-forward
(^S ^Xs
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Search forward incrementally for a specified string. The search is
case-insensitive if the search string does not have uppercase letters and no
numeric argument was given. The string may begin with ‘^
’ to anchor the
search to the beginning of the line. The functions available in the
mini-buffer are the same as for history-incremental-search-backward
.
history-incremental-pattern-search-backward
¶history-incremental-pattern-search-forward
These widgets behave similarly to the corresponding widgets with
no -pattern
, but the search string typed by the user is treated
as a pattern, respecting the current settings of the various options
affecting pattern matching. See
Filename Generation for a description of patterns.
If no numeric argument was given lowercase letters in the search
string may match uppercase letters in the history. The string may begin
with ‘^
’ to anchor the search to the beginning of the line.
The prompt changes to indicate an invalid pattern; this may simply indicate the pattern is not yet complete.
Note that only non-overlapping matches are reported, so an expression with wildcards may return fewer matches on a line than are visible by inspection.
history-search-backward
(ESC-P ESC-p
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Search backward in the history for a line beginning with the first word in the buffer.
If called from a function by the zle
command with arguments, the first
argument is taken as the string for which to search, rather than the
first word in the buffer.
vi-history-search-backward
(unbound) (/
) (unbound) ¶Search backward in the history for a specified string.
The string may begin with ‘^
’ to anchor the search to the
beginning of the line.
A restricted set of editing functions is available in
the mini-buffer. An interrupt signal, as defined by the stty setting, will
stop the search.
The functions available in the mini-buffer are:
accept-line
,
backward-delete-char
,
vi-backward-delete-char
,
backward-kill-word
,
vi-backward-kill-word
,
clear-screen
,
redisplay
,
quoted-insert
and
vi-quoted-insert
.
vi-cmd-mode
is treated the same as accept-line, and
magic-space
is treated as a space.
Any other character that is not bound to self-insert or
self-insert-unmeta will beep and be ignored. If the function is called from vi
command mode, the bindings of the current insert mode will be used.
If called from a function by the zle
command with arguments, the first
argument is taken as the string for which to search, rather than the
first word in the buffer.
history-search-forward
(ESC-N ESC-n
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Search forward in the history for a line beginning with the first word in the buffer.
If called from a function by the zle
command with arguments, the first
argument is taken as the string for which to search, rather than the
first word in the buffer.
vi-history-search-forward
(unbound) (?
) (unbound) ¶Search forward in the history for a specified string.
The string may begin with ‘^
’ to anchor the search to the
beginning of the line. The functions available in the mini-buffer are the same
as for vi-history-search-backward
. Argument handling is also the same
as for that command.
infer-next-history
(^X^N
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Search in the history list for a line matching the current one and fetch the event following it.
insert-last-word
(ESC-_ ESC-.
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Insert the last word from the previous history event at the cursor position. If a positive numeric argument is given, insert that word from the end of the previous history event. If the argument is zero or negative insert that word from the left (zero inserts the previous command word). Repeating this command replaces the word just inserted with the last word from the history event prior to the one just used; numeric arguments can be used in the same way to pick a word from that event.
When called from a shell function invoked from a user-defined widget, the
command can take one to three arguments. The first argument specifies a
history offset which applies to successive calls to this widget: if it is -1,
the default behaviour is used, while if it is 1, successive calls will move
forwards through the history. The value 0 can be used to indicate that the
history line examined by the previous execution of the command will be
reexamined. Note that negative numbers should be preceded by a
‘-
-
’ argument to avoid confusing them with options.
If two arguments are given, the second specifies the word on the command line in normal array index notation (as a more natural alternative to the numeric argument). Hence 1 is the first word, and -1 (the default) is the last word.
If a third argument is given, its value is ignored, but it is used to
signify that the history offset is relative to the current history line,
rather than the one remembered after the previous invocations of
insert-last-word
.
For example, the default behaviour of the command corresponds to
zle insert-last-word -- -1 -1
while the command
zle insert-last-word -- -1 1 -
always copies the first word of the line in the history immediately before the line being edited. This has the side effect that later invocations of the widget will be relative to that line.
vi-repeat-search
(unbound) (n
) (unbound) ¶Repeat the last vi history search.
vi-rev-repeat-search
(unbound) (N
) (unbound) ¶Repeat the last vi history search, but in reverse.
up-line-or-history
(^P ESC-[A
) (k
) (ESC-[A
) ¶Move up a line in the buffer, or if already at the top line, move to the previous event in the history list.
vi-up-line-or-history
(unbound) (-
) (unbound) ¶Move up a line in the buffer, or if already at the top line, move to the previous event in the history list. Then move to the first non-blank character on the line.
up-line-or-search
¶Move up a line in the buffer, or if already at the top line, search backward in the history for a line beginning with the first word in the buffer.
If called from a function by the zle
command with arguments, the first
argument is taken as the string for which to search, rather than the
first word in the buffer.
up-history
(unbound) (^P
) (unbound) ¶Move to the previous event in the history list.
history-beginning-search-forward
¶Search forward in the history for a line beginning with the current line up to the cursor. This leaves the cursor in its original position.
set-local-history
¶By default, history movement commands visit the imported lines as well as the local lines. This widget lets you toggle this on and off, or set it with the numeric argument. Zero for both local and imported lines and nonzero for only local lines.
vi-add-eol
(unbound) (A
) (unbound) ¶Move to the end of the line and enter insert mode.
vi-add-next
(unbound) (a
) (unbound) ¶Enter insert mode after the current cursor position, without changing lines.
backward-delete-char
(^H ^?
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Delete the character behind the cursor.
vi-backward-delete-char
(unbound) (X
) (^H
) ¶Delete the character behind the cursor, without changing lines. If in insert mode, this won’t delete past the point where insert mode was last entered.
backward-delete-word
¶Delete the word behind the cursor.
backward-kill-line
¶Kill from the beginning of the line to the cursor position.
backward-kill-word
(^W ESC-^H ESC-^?
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Kill the word behind the cursor.
vi-backward-kill-word
(unbound) (unbound) (^W
) ¶Kill the word behind the cursor, without going past the point where insert mode was last entered.
capitalize-word
(ESC-C ESC-c
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Capitalize the current word and move past it.
vi-change
(unbound) (c
) (unbound) ¶Read a movement command from the keyboard, and kill
from the cursor position to the endpoint of the movement.
Then enter insert mode.
If the command is vi-change
, change the current line.
For compatibility with vi, if the command is vi-forward-word
or vi-forward-blank-word
, the whitespace after the word is not
included. If you prefer the more consistent behaviour with the
whitespace included use the following key binding:
bindkey -a -s cw dwi
vi-change-eol
(unbound) (C
) (unbound) ¶Kill to the end of the line and enter insert mode.
vi-change-whole-line
(unbound) (S
) (unbound) ¶Kill the current line and enter insert mode.
copy-region-as-kill
(ESC-W ESC-w
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Copy the area from the cursor to the mark to the kill buffer.
If called from a ZLE widget function in the form ‘zle
copy-region-as-kill
string’ then string will be taken as the
text to copy to the kill buffer. The cursor, the mark and the text on the
command line are not used in this case.
copy-prev-word
(ESC-^_
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Duplicate the word to the left of the cursor.
copy-prev-shell-word
¶Like copy-prev-word
, but the word is found by using shell parsing,
whereas copy-prev-word
looks for blanks. This makes a difference
when the word is quoted and contains spaces.
vi-delete
(unbound) (d
) (unbound) ¶Read a movement command from the keyboard, and kill
from the cursor position to the endpoint of the movement.
If the command is vi-delete
, kill the current line.
delete-char
¶Delete the character under the cursor.
vi-delete-char
(unbound) (x
) (unbound) ¶Delete the character under the cursor, without going past the end of the line.
delete-word
¶Delete the current word.
down-case-word
(ESC-L ESC-l
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Convert the current word to all lowercase and move past it.
vi-down-case
(unbound) (gu
) (unbound) ¶Read a movement command from the keyboard, and convert all characters
from the cursor position to the endpoint of the movement to lowercase.
If the movement command is vi-down-case
, swap the case of all
characters on the current line.
kill-word
(ESC-D ESC-d
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Kill the current word.
gosmacs-transpose-chars
¶Exchange the two characters behind the cursor.
vi-indent
(unbound) (>
) (unbound) ¶Indent a number of lines.
vi-insert
(unbound) (i
) (unbound) ¶Enter insert mode.
vi-insert-bol
(unbound) (I
) (unbound) ¶Move to the first non-blank character on the line and enter insert mode.
vi-join
(^X^J
) (J
) (unbound) ¶Join the current line with the next one.
kill-line
(^K
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Kill from the cursor to the end of the line. If already on the end of the line, kill the newline character.
vi-kill-line
(unbound) (unbound) (^U
) ¶Kill from the cursor back to wherever insert mode was last entered.
vi-kill-eol
(unbound) (D
) (unbound) ¶Kill from the cursor to the end of the line.
kill-region
¶Kill from the cursor to the mark.
kill-buffer
(^X^K
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Kill the entire buffer.
kill-whole-line
(^U
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Kill the current line.
vi-match-bracket
(^X^B
) (%
) (unbound) ¶Move to the bracket character (one of {}
, ()
or []
) that
matches the one under the cursor.
If the cursor is not on a bracket character, move forward without going
past the end of the line to find one, and then go to the matching bracket.
vi-open-line-above
(unbound) (O
) (unbound) ¶Open a line above the cursor and enter insert mode.
vi-open-line-below
(unbound) (o
) (unbound) ¶Open a line below the cursor and enter insert mode.
vi-oper-swap-case
(unbound) (g~
) (unbound) ¶Read a movement command from the keyboard, and swap
the case of all characters
from the cursor position to the endpoint of the movement.
If the movement command is vi-oper-swap-case
,
swap the case of all characters on the current line.
overwrite-mode
(^X^O
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Toggle between overwrite mode and insert mode.
vi-put-before
(unbound) (P
) (unbound) ¶Insert the contents of the kill buffer before the cursor. If the kill buffer contains a sequence of lines (as opposed to characters), paste it above the current line.
vi-put-after
(unbound) (p
) (unbound) ¶Insert the contents of the kill buffer after the cursor. If the kill buffer contains a sequence of lines (as opposed to characters), paste it below the current line.
put-replace-selection
(unbound) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Replace the contents of the current region or selection with the contents of the kill buffer. If the kill buffer contains a sequence of lines (as opposed to characters), the current line will be split by the pasted lines.
quoted-insert
(^V
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Insert the next character typed into the buffer literally. An interrupt character will not be inserted.
vi-quoted-insert
(unbound) (unbound) (^Q ^V
) ¶Display a ‘^
’ at the cursor position, and
insert the next character typed into the buffer literally.
An interrupt character will not be inserted.
quote-line
(ESC-'
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Quote the current line; that is, put a ‘'
’ character at the
beginning and the end, and convert all ‘'
’ characters
to ‘'\{No value for `dsq'}
’.
quote-region
(ESC-"
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Quote the region from the cursor to the mark.
vi-replace
(unbound) (R
) (unbound) ¶Enter overwrite mode.
vi-repeat-change
(unbound) (.
) (unbound) ¶Repeat the last vi mode text modification. If a count was used with the modification, it is remembered. If a count is given to this command, it overrides the remembered count, and is remembered for future uses of this command. The cut buffer specification is similarly remembered.
vi-replace-chars
(unbound) (r
) (unbound) ¶Replace the character under the cursor with a character read from the keyboard.
self-insert
(printable characters) (unbound) (printable characters and some control characters) ¶Insert a character into the buffer at the cursor position.
self-insert-unmeta
(ESC-^I ESC-^J ESC-^M
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Insert a character into the buffer after stripping the meta bit and converting ^M to ^J.
vi-substitute
(unbound) (s
) (unbound) ¶Substitute the next character(s).
vi-swap-case
(unbound) (~
) (unbound) ¶Swap the case of the character under the cursor and move past it.
transpose-chars
(^T
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Exchange the two characters to the left of the cursor if at end of line, else exchange the character under the cursor with the character to the left.
transpose-words
(ESC-T ESC-t
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Exchange the current word with the one before it.
With a positive numeric argument N, the word around the cursor, or following it if the cursor is between words, is transposed with the preceding N words. The cursor is put at the end of the resulting group of words.
With a negative numeric argument -N, the effect is the same as using a positive argument N except that the original cursor position is retained, regardless of how the words are rearranged.
vi-unindent
(unbound) (<
) (unbound) ¶Unindent a number of lines.
vi-up-case
(unbound) (gU
) (unbound) ¶Read a movement command from the keyboard, and convert all characters
from the cursor position to the endpoint of the movement to lowercase.
If the movement command is vi-up-case
, swap the case of all
characters on the current line.
up-case-word
(ESC-U ESC-u
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Convert the current word to all caps and move past it.
yank
(^Y
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Insert the contents of the kill buffer at the cursor position.
yank-pop
(ESC-y
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Remove the text just yanked, rotate the kill-ring (the history of
previously killed text) and yank the new top. Only works following
yank
, vi-put-before
, vi-put-after
or yank-pop
.
vi-yank
(unbound) (y
) (unbound) ¶Read a movement command from the keyboard, and copy the region
from the cursor position to the endpoint of the movement
into the kill buffer.
If the command is vi-yank
, copy the current line.
vi-yank-whole-line
(unbound) (Y
) (unbound) ¶Copy the current line into the kill buffer.
vi-yank-eol
¶Copy the region from the cursor position to the end of the line into the kill buffer. Arguably, this is what Y should do in vi, but it isn’t what it actually does.
digit-argument
(ESC-0
..ESC-9
) (1
-9
) (unbound) ¶Start a new numeric argument, or add to the current one.
See also vi-digit-or-beginning-of-line
. This only works if bound to a
key sequence ending in a decimal digit.
Inside a widget function, a call to this function treats the last key of the key sequence which called the widget as the digit.
neg-argument
(ESC-
-
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Changes the sign of the following argument.
universal-argument
¶Multiply the argument of the next command by 4. Alternatively, if
this command is followed by an integer (positive or negative), use
that as the argument for the next command. Thus digits cannot be
repeated using this command. For example, if this command occurs
twice, followed immediately by forward-char
, move forward sixteen
spaces; if instead it is followed by -2
, then forward-char
,
move backward two spaces.
Inside a widget function, if passed an argument, i.e. ‘zle
universal-argument
num’, the numeric argument will be set to
num; this is equivalent to ‘NUMERIC=
num’.
argument-base
¶Use the existing numeric argument as a numeric base, which must be in the
range 2 to 36 inclusive. Subsequent use of digit-argument
and
universal-argument
will input a new numeric argument in the given base.
The usual hexadecimal convention is used: the letter a
or A
corresponds to 10, and so on. Arguments in bases requiring digits from 10
upwards are more conveniently input with universal-argument
, since
ESC-a
etc. are not usually bound to digit-argument
.
The function can be used with a command argument inside a user-defined widget. The following code sets the base to 16 and lets the user input a hexadecimal argument until a key out of the digit range is typed:
zle argument-base 16 zle universal-argument
accept-and-menu-complete
¶In a menu completion, insert the current completion into the buffer, and advance to the next possible completion.
complete-word
¶Attempt completion on the current word.
delete-char-or-list
(^D
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Delete the character under the cursor. If the cursor is at the end of the line, list possible completions for the current word.
expand-cmd-path
¶Expand the current command to its full pathname.
expand-or-complete
(TAB
) (unbound) (TAB
) ¶Attempt shell expansion on the current word. If that fails, attempt completion.
expand-or-complete-prefix
¶Attempt shell expansion on the current word up to cursor.
expand-history
(ESC-space ESC-!
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Perform history expansion on the edit buffer.
expand-word
(^X*
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Attempt shell expansion on the current word.
list-choices
(ESC-^D
) (^D =
) (^D
) ¶List possible completions for the current word.
list-expand
(^Xg ^XG
) (^G
) (^G
) ¶List the expansion of the current word.
magic-space
¶Perform history expansion and insert a space into the buffer. This is intended to be bound to space.
menu-complete
¶Like complete-word
, except that menu completion is used.
See the MENU_COMPLETE
option.
menu-expand-or-complete
¶Like expand-or-complete
, except that menu completion is used.
reverse-menu-complete
¶Perform menu completion, like menu-complete
, except that if
a menu completion is already in progress, move to the previous
completion rather than the next.
end-of-list
¶When a previous completion displayed a list below the prompt, this widget can be used to move the prompt below the list.
accept-and-hold
(ESC-A ESC-a
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Push the contents of the buffer on the buffer stack and execute it.
accept-and-infer-next-history
¶Execute the contents of the buffer. Then search the history list for a line matching the current one and push the event following onto the buffer stack.
accept-line
(^J ^M
) (^J ^M
) (^J ^M
) ¶Finish editing the buffer. Normally this causes the buffer to be executed as a shell command.
accept-line-and-down-history
(^O
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Execute the current line, and push the next history event on the buffer stack.
auto-suffix-remove
¶If the previous action added a suffix (space, slash, etc.) to the word on the command line, remove it. Otherwise do nothing. Removing the suffix ends any active menu completion or menu selection.
This widget is intended to be called from user-defined widgets to enforce a desired suffix-removal behavior.
auto-suffix-retain
¶If the previous action added a suffix (space, slash, etc.) to the word on the command line, force it to be preserved. Otherwise do nothing. Retaining the suffix ends any active menu completion or menu selection.
This widget is intended to be called from user-defined widgets to enforce a desired suffix-preservation behavior.
beep
¶Beep, unless the BEEP
option is unset.
bracketed-paste
(^[[200~
) (^[[200~
) (^[[200~
) ¶This widget is invoked when text is pasted to the terminal emulator. It is not intended to be bound to actual keys but instead to the special sequence generated by the terminal emulator when text is pasted.
When invoked interactively, the pasted text is inserted to the buffer and placed in the cutbuffer. If a numeric argument is given, shell quoting will be applied to the pasted text before it is inserted.
When a named buffer is specified with vi-set-buffer
("x
),
the pasted text is stored in that named buffer but not inserted.
When called from a widget function as ‘bracketed-paste
name‘, the
pasted text is assigned to the variable name and no other processing is
done.
See also the zle_bracketed_paste
parameter.
vi-cmd-mode
(^X^V
) (unbound) (^[
) ¶Enter command mode; that is, select the ‘vicmd
’ keymap.
Yes, this is bound by default in emacs mode.
vi-caps-lock-panic
¶Hang until any lowercase key is pressed. This is for vi users without the mental capacity to keep track of their caps lock key (like the author).
clear-screen
(^L ESC-^L
) (^L
) (^L
) ¶Clear the screen and redraw the prompt.
deactivate-region
¶Make the current region inactive. This disables vim-style visual selection mode if it is active.
describe-key-briefly
¶Reads a key sequence, then prints the function bound to that sequence.
exchange-point-and-mark
(^X^X
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Exchange the cursor position (point) with the position of the mark. Unless a negative numeric argument is given, the region between point and mark is activated so that it can be highlighted. If a zero numeric argument is given, the region is activated but point and mark are not swapped.
execute-named-cmd
(ESC-x
) (:
) (unbound) ¶Read the name of an editor command and execute it. Aliasing this
widget with ‘zle -A
’ or replacing it with ‘zle -N
’ has no
effect when interpreting key bindings, but ‘zle execute-named-cmd
’
will invoke such an alias or replacement.
A restricted set of editing functions is available in the
mini-buffer. Keys are looked up in the special
command
keymap, and if not found there in the main keymap.
An interrupt signal, as defined by the stty setting, will
abort the function. Note that the following always
perform the same task within the executed-named-cmd
environment and
cannot be replaced by user defined widgets, nor can the set of functions
be extended. The allowed functions are:
backward-delete-char
,
vi-backward-delete-char
,
clear-screen
,
redisplay
,
quoted-insert
,
vi-quoted-insert
,
backward-kill-word
,
vi-backward-kill-word
,
kill-whole-line
,
vi-kill-line
,
backward-kill-line
,
list-choices
,
delete-char-or-list
,
complete-word
,
accept-line
,
expand-or-complete
and
expand-or-complete-prefix
.
kill-region
kills the last word,
and vi-cmd-mode is treated the same as accept-line.
The space and tab characters, if not bound to one of
these functions, will complete the name and then list the
possibilities if the AUTO_LIST
option is set.
Any other character that is not bound to self-insert
or
self-insert-unmeta
will beep and be ignored.
The bindings of the current insert mode will be used.
Currently this command may not be redefined or called by name.
execute-last-named-cmd
(ESC-z
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Redo the last function executed with execute-named-cmd
.
Like execute-named-cmd
, this command may not be redefined,
but it may be called by name.
get-line
(ESC-G ESC-g
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Pop the top line off the buffer stack and insert it at the cursor position.
pound-insert
(unbound) (#
) (unbound) ¶If there is no # character at the beginning of the buffer,
add one to the beginning of each line.
If there is one, remove a # from each line that has one.
In either case, accept the current line.
The INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
option must be set
for this to have any usefulness.
vi-pound-insert
¶If there is no # character at the beginning of the current line,
add one. If there is one, remove it.
The INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
option must be set
for this to have any usefulness.
push-input
¶Push the entire current multiline construct onto the buffer stack and
return to the top-level (PS1
) prompt.
If the current parser construct is only a single line, this is exactly
like push-line
.
Next time the editor starts up or is popped with get-line
, the
construct will be popped off the top of the buffer stack and loaded
into the editing buffer.
push-line
(^Q ESC-Q ESC-q
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Push the current buffer onto the buffer stack and clear the buffer. Next time the editor starts up, the buffer will be popped off the top of the buffer stack and loaded into the editing buffer.
push-line-or-edit
¶At the top-level (PS1
) prompt, equivalent to push-line
.
At a secondary (PS2
) prompt, move the entire current multiline
construct into the editor buffer.
The latter is equivalent to push-input
followed by get-line
.
read-command
¶Only useful from a user-defined widget. A keystroke is read just as in
normal operation, but instead of the command being executed the name
of the command that would be executed is stored in the shell parameter
REPLY
. This can be used as the argument of a future zle
command. If the key sequence is not bound, status 1 is returned;
typically, however, REPLY
is set to undefined-key
to indicate
a useless key sequence.
recursive-edit
¶Only useful from a user-defined widget. At this point in the function,
the editor regains control until one of the standard widgets which would
normally cause zle to exit (typically an accept-line
caused by
hitting the return key) is executed. Instead, control returns to the
user-defined widget. The status returned is non-zero if the return was
caused by an error, but the function still continues executing and hence
may tidy up. This makes it safe for the user-defined widget to alter
the command line or key bindings temporarily.
The following widget, caps-lock
, serves as an example.
self-insert-ucase() { LBUFFER+=${(U)KEYS[-1]} } integer stat zle -N self-insert self-insert-ucase zle -A caps-lock save-caps-lock zle -A accept-line caps-lock zle recursive-edit stat=$? zle -A .self-insert self-insert zle -A save-caps-lock caps-lock zle -D save-caps-lock (( stat )) && zle send-break return $stat
This causes typed letters to be inserted capitalised until either
accept-line
(i.e. typically the return key) is typed or the
caps-lock
widget is invoked again; the later is handled by saving
the old definition of caps-lock
as save-caps-lock
and then
rebinding it to invoke accept-line
. Note that an error from the
recursive edit is detected as a non-zero return status and propagated by
using the send-break
widget.
redisplay
(unbound) (^R
) (^R
) ¶Redisplays the edit buffer.
reset-prompt
(unbound) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Force the prompts on both the left and right of the screen to be re-expanded, then redisplay the edit buffer. This reflects changes both to the prompt variables themselves and changes in the expansion of the values (for example, changes in time or directory, or changes to the value of variables referred to by the prompt).
Otherwise, the prompt is only expanded each time zle starts, and when the display has been interrupted by output from another part of the shell (such as a job notification) which causes the command line to be reprinted.
reset-prompt
doesn’t alter the special parameter LASTWIDGET
.
send-break
(^G ESC-^G
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Abort the current editor function, e.g. execute-named-command
, or the
editor itself, e.g. if you are in vared
. Otherwise abort the parsing of
the current line; in this case the aborted line is available in the shell
variable ZLE_LINE_ABORTED
. If the editor is aborted from within
vared
, the variable ZLE_VARED_ABORTED
is set.
run-help
(ESC-H ESC-h
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Push the buffer onto the buffer stack, and execute the
command ‘run-help
cmd’, where cmd is the current
command. run-help
is normally aliased to man
.
vi-set-buffer
(unbound) ("
) (unbound) ¶Specify a buffer to be used in the following command.
There are 37 buffers that can be specified:
the 26 ‘named’ buffers "a
to "z
, the ‘yank’ buffer "0
,
the nine ‘queued’ buffers "1
to "9
and the ‘black hole’ buffer
"_
. The named buffers can also be specified as "A
to "Z
.
When a buffer is specified for a cut, change or yank command, the text
concerned replaces the previous contents of the specified buffer. If
a named buffer is specified using a capital, the newly cut text is
appended to the buffer instead of overwriting it. When using the "_
buffer, nothing happens. This can be useful for deleting text without
affecting any buffers.
If no buffer is specified for a cut or change command, "1
is used, and
the contents of "1
to "8
are each shifted along one buffer;
the contents of "9
is lost. If no buffer is specified for a yank
command, "0
is used. Finally, a paste command without a specified
buffer will paste the text from the most recent command regardless of any
buffer that might have been used with that command.
When called from a widget function by the zle
command, the buffer
can optionally be specified with an argument. For example,
zle vi-set-buffer A
vi-set-mark
(unbound) (m
) (unbound) ¶Set the specified mark at the cursor position.
set-mark-command
(^@
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Set the mark at the cursor position. If called with a negative numeric argument, do not set the mark but deactivate the region so that it is no longer highlighted (it is still usable for other purposes). Otherwise the region is marked as active.
spell-word
(ESC-$ ESC-S ESC-s
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Attempt spelling correction on the current word.
split-undo
¶Breaks the undo sequence at the current change. This is useful in vi mode as
changes made in insert mode are coalesced on entering command mode. Similarly,
undo
will normally revert as one all the changes made by a user-defined
widget.
undefined-key
¶This command is executed when a key sequence that is not bound to any command is typed. By default it beeps.
undo
(^_ ^Xu ^X^U
) (u
) (unbound) ¶Incrementally undo the last text modification. When called from a
user-defined widget, takes an optional argument indicating a previous state
of the undo history as returned by the UNDO_CHANGE_NO
variable;
modifications are undone until that state is reached, subject to
any limit imposed by the UNDO_LIMIT_NO
variable.
Note that when invoked from vi command mode, the full prior change made in insert mode is reverted, the changes having been merged when command mode was selected.
redo
(unbound) (^R
) (unbound) ¶Incrementally redo undone text modifications.
vi-undo-change
(unbound) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Undo the last text modification. If repeated, redo the modification.
visual-mode
(unbound) (v
) (unbound) ¶Toggle vim-style visual selection mode. If line-wise visual mode is currently enabled then it is changed to being character-wise. If used following an operator, it forces the subsequent movement command to be treated as a character-wise movement.
visual-line-mode
(unbound) (V
) (unbound) ¶Toggle vim-style line-wise visual selection mode. If character-wise visual mode is currently enabled then it is changed to being line-wise. If used following an operator, it forces the subsequent movement command to be treated as a line-wise movement.
what-cursor-position
(^X=
) (ga
) (unbound) ¶Print the character under the cursor, its code as an octal, decimal and hexadecimal number, the current cursor position within the buffer and the column of the cursor in the current line.
where-is
¶Read the name of an editor command and print the listing of key
sequences that invoke the specified command.
A restricted set of editing functions is available in the
mini-buffer. Keys are looked up in the special
command
keymap, and if not found there in the main keymap.
which-command
(ESC-?
) (unbound) (unbound) ¶Push the buffer onto the buffer stack, and execute the
command ‘which-command
cmd’. where cmd is the current
command. which-command
is normally aliased to whence
.
vi-digit-or-beginning-of-line
(unbound) (0
) (unbound) ¶If the last command executed was a digit as part of an argument, continue the argument. Otherwise, execute vi-beginning-of-line.
Text objects are commands that can be used to select a block of text
according to some criteria. They are a feature of the vim text editor
and so are primarily intended for use with vi operators or from visual
selection mode. However, they can also be used from vi-insert or emacs
mode. Key bindings listed below apply to the viopp
and visual
keymaps.
select-a-blank-word
(aW
) ¶Select a word including adjacent blanks, where a word is defined as a series of non-blank characters. With a numeric argument, multiple words will be selected.
select-a-shell-word
(aa
) ¶Select the current command argument applying the normal rules for quoting.
select-a-word
(aw
) ¶Select a word including adjacent blanks, using the normal vi-style word definition. With a numeric argument, multiple words will be selected.
select-in-blank-word
(iW
) ¶Select a word, where a word is defined as a series of non-blank characters. With a numeric argument, multiple words will be selected.
select-in-shell-word
(ia
) ¶Select the current command argument applying the normal rules for quoting. If the argument begins and ends with matching quote characters, these are not included in the selection.
select-in-word
(iw
) ¶Select a word, using the normal vi-style word definition. With a numeric argument, multiple words will be selected.
The line editor has the ability to highlight characters or regions
of the line that have a particular significance. This is controlled
by the array parameter zle_highlight
, if it has been set by the user.
If the parameter contains the single entry none
all highlighting
is turned off. Note the parameter is still expected to be an array.
Otherwise each entry of the array should consist of a word indicating a context for highlighting, then a colon, then a comma-separated list of the types of highlighting to apply in that context.
The contexts available for highlighting are the following:
default
¶Any text within the command line not affected by any other highlighting. Text outside the editable area of the command line is not affected.
isearch
When one of the incremental history search widgets is active, the area of the command line matched by the search string or pattern.
region
The currently selected text. In emacs terminology, this is referred to as
the region and is bounded by the cursor (point) and the mark. The region
is only highlighted if it is active, which is the case after the mark
is modified with set-mark-command
or exchange-point-and-mark
.
Note that whether or not the region is active has no effect on its
use within emacs style widgets, it simply determines whether it is
highlighted. In vi mode, the region corresponds to selected text in
visual mode.
special
¶Individual characters that have no direct printable representation but are shown in a special manner by the line editor. These characters are described below.
suffix
¶This context is used in completion for characters that are
marked as suffixes that will be removed if the completion ends
at that point, the most obvious example being a slash (/
) after
a directory name. Note that suffix removal is configurable; the
circumstances under which the suffix will be removed may differ
for different completions.
paste
Following a command to paste text, the characters that were inserted.
When region_highlight
is set, the contexts that describe a region —
isearch
, region
, suffix
, and paste
—
are applied first, then region_highlight
is applied, then the remaining
zle_highlight
contexts are applied. If a particular character is
affected by multiple specifications, the last specification wins.
zle_highlight
may contain additional fields for controlling how
terminal sequences to change colours are output. Each of the following is
followed by a colon and a string in the same form as for key bindings.
This will not be necessary for the vast majority of terminals as the
defaults shown in parentheses are widely used.
fg_start_code
(\e[3
) ¶The start of the escape sequence for the foreground colour. This is followed by one to three ASCII digits representing the colour. Only used for palette colors, i.e. not 24-bit colors specified via a color triplet.
fg_default_code
(9
)The number to use instead of the colour to reset the default foreground colour.
fg_end_code
(m
)The end of the escape sequence for the foreground colour.
bg_start_code
(\e[4
)The start of the escape sequence for the background colour.
See fg_start_code
above.
bg_default_code
(9
)The number to use instead of the colour to reset the default background colour.
bg_end_code
(m
)The end of the escape sequence for the background colour.
The available types of highlighting are the following. Note that not all types of highlighting are available on all terminals:
none
No highlighting is applied to the given context. It is not useful for this to appear with other types of highlighting; it is used to override a default.
fg=
colourThe foreground colour should be set to colour, a decimal integer,
the name of one of the eight most widely-supported colours or as a
‘#
’ followed by an RGB triplet in hexadecimal format.
Not all terminals support this and, of those that do, not all provide
facilities to test the support, hence the user should decide based on the
terminal type. Most terminals support the colours black
, red
,
green
, yellow
, blue
, magenta
, cyan
and white
,
which can be set by name. In addition. default
may be used to
set the terminal’s default foreground colour. Abbreviations are allowed;
b
or bl
selects black. Some terminals may generate additional
colours if the bold
attribute is also present.
On recent terminals and on systems with an up-to-date terminal database the
number of colours supported may be tested by the command ‘echotc
Co
’; if this succeeds, it indicates a limit on the number of colours which
will be enforced by the line editor. The number of colours is in any case
limited to 256 (i.e. the range 0 to 255).
Some modern terminal emulators have support for 24-bit true colour (16
million colours). In this case, the hex triplet format can be used. This
consists of a ‘#
’ followed by either a three or six digit hexadecimal
number describing the red, green and blue components of the colour. Hex
triplets can also be used with 88 and 256 colour terminals via the
zsh/nearcolor
module (see The zsh/nearcolor Module).
Colour is also known as color.
bg=
colourThe background colour should be set to colour. This works similarly to the foreground colour, except the background is not usually affected by the bold attribute.
bold
The characters in the given context are shown in a bold font. Not all terminals distinguish bold fonts.
standout
The characters in the given context are shown in the terminal’s standout mode. The actual effect is specific to the terminal; on many terminals it is inverse video. On some such terminals, where the cursor does not blink it appears with standout mode negated, making it less than clear where the cursor actually is. On such terminals one of the other effects may be preferable for highlighting the region and matched search string.
underline
The characters in the given context are shown underlined. Some terminals show the foreground in a different colour instead; in this case whitespace will not be highlighted.
The characters described above as ‘special’ are as follows. The formatting described here is used irrespective of whether the characters are highlighted:
Control characters in the ASCII range are shown as
‘^
’ followed by the base character.
This item applies to control characters not in the ASCII range,
plus other characters as follows. If the MULTIBYTE
option is in
effect, multibyte characters not in the ASCII character set that are
reported as having zero width are treated as combining characters when the
option COMBINING_CHARS
is on. If the option is off, or if a character
appears where a combining character is not valid, the character
is treated as unprintable.
Unprintable multibyte characters are shown as a hexadecimal number between angle brackets. The number is the code point of the character in the wide character set; this may or may not be Unicode, depending on the operating system.
If the MULTIBYTE
option is in effect, any sequence of one or more
bytes that does not form a valid character in the current character
set is treated as a series of bytes each shown as a special character.
This case can be distinguished from other unprintable characters
as the bytes are represented as two hexadecimal digits between angle
brackets, as distinct from the four or eight digits that are used for
unprintable characters that are nonetheless valid in the current
character set.
Not all systems support this: for it to work, the system’s representation of wide characters must be code values from the Universal Character Set, as defined by IS0 10646 (also known as Unicode).
When a double-width character appears in the final column of a line, it is instead shown on the next line. The empty space left in the original position is highlighted as a special character.
If zle_highlight
is not set or no value applies to a particular
context, the defaults applied are equivalent to
zle_highlight=(region:standout special:standout suffix:bold isearch:underline paste:standout)
i.e. both the region and special characters are shown in standout mode.
Within widgets, arbitrary regions may be highlighted by setting the
special array parameter region_highlight
; see
Zle Widgets.
The shell’s programmable completion mechanism can be manipulated in two
ways; here the low-level features supporting the newer, function-based
mechanism are defined. A complete set of shell functions based on these
features is described in
the next chapter, Completion System,
and users with no interest in adding to that system (or, potentially,
writing their own — see dictionary entry for ‘hubris’) should skip
the current section. The older system based on the compctl
builtin
command is described in
Completion Using compctl.
Completion widgets are defined by the -C
option to the zle
builtin command provided by the zsh/zle
module (see
The zsh/zle Module). For example,
zle -C complete expand-or-complete completer
defines a widget named ‘complete
’. The second argument is the name
of any of the builtin widgets that handle completions:
complete-word
, expand-or-complete
,
expand-or-complete-prefix
, menu-complete
,
menu-expand-or-complete
, reverse-menu-complete
,
list-choices
, or delete-char-or-list
. Note that this will still
work even if the widget in question has been re-bound.
When this newly defined widget is bound to a key
using the bindkey
builtin command defined in the zsh/zle
module
(Zsh Line Editor), typing that key will call the shell function ‘completer
’. This
function is responsible for generating completion matches using the
builtins described below. As with other ZLE widgets, the function is
called with its standard input closed.
Once the function returns, the completion code takes over control again
and treats the matches in the same manner as the specified builtin
widget, in this case expand-or-complete
.
The parameters ZLE_REMOVE_SUFFIX_CHARS
and ZLE_SPACE_SUFFIX_CHARS
are used by the completion mechanism, but are not special. See
Parameters Used By The Shell.
Inside completion widgets, and any functions called from them, some
parameters have special meaning; outside these functions they are not
special to the shell in any way. These parameters are used to pass
information between the completion code and the completion widget. Some of
the builtin commands and the condition codes use or change the current
values of these parameters. Any existing values will be hidden during
execution of completion widgets; except for compstate
, the parameters
are reset on each function exit (including nested function calls from
within the completion widget) to the values they had when the function was
entered.
CURRENT
¶This is the number of the current word, i.e. the word the cursor is
currently on in the words
array. Note that this value is only
correct if the ksharrays
option is not set.
IPREFIX
¶Initially this will be set to the empty string. This parameter functions
like PREFIX
; it contains a string which precedes the one in PREFIX
and is not considered part of the list of matches. Typically, a string is
transferred from the beginning of PREFIX
to the end of IPREFIX
, for
example:
IPREFIX=${PREFIX%%\=*}= PREFIX=${PREFIX#*=}
causes the part of the prefix up to and including the first equal sign not
to be treated as part of a matched string. This can be done automatically
by the compset
builtin, see below.
ISUFFIX
¶As IPREFIX
, but for a suffix that should not be considered part
of the matches; note that the ISUFFIX
string follows the SUFFIX
string.
PREFIX
¶Initially this will be set to the part of the current word from the beginning of the word up to the position of the cursor; it may be altered to give a common prefix for all matches.
QIPREFIX
¶This parameter is read-only and contains the quoted string up to the
word being completed. E.g. when completing ‘"foo
’, this parameter
contains the double quote. If the -q
option of compset
is used
(see below), and the original string was ‘"foo bar
’ with the
cursor on the ‘bar
’, this parameter contains ‘"foo
’.
QISUFFIX
¶Like QIPREFIX
, but containing the suffix.
SUFFIX
¶Initially this will be set to the part of the current word from the
cursor position to the end; it may be altered to give a common suffix for
all matches. It is most useful when the option COMPLETE_IN_WORD
is
set, as otherwise the whole word on the command line is treated as a
prefix.
compstate
¶This is an associative array with various keys and values that the completion code uses to exchange information with the completion widget. The keys are:
all_quotes
¶The -q
option of the compset
builtin command (see below)
allows a quoted string to be broken into separate words; if the cursor is
on one of those words, that word will be completed, possibly invoking
‘compset -q
’ recursively. With this key it is possible to test the
types of quoted strings which are currently broken into parts in this
fashion. Its value contains one character for each quoting level. The
characters are a single quote or a double quote for strings quoted with
these characters, a dollars sign for strings quoted with
$'
...'
and a backslash for strings not starting with a
quote character. The first character in the value always corresponds to the
innermost quoting level.
context
¶This will be set by the completion code to the overall context in which completion is attempted. Possible values are:
array_value
when completing inside the value of an array parameter assignment; in
this case the words
array contains the words inside the parentheses.
brace_parameter
when completing the name of a parameter in a parameter expansion beginning
with ${
. This context will also be set when completing parameter
flags following ${(
; the full command line argument is presented
and the handler must test the value to be completed to ascertain that
this is the case.
assign_parameter
when completing the name of a parameter in a parameter assignment.
command
when completing for a normal command (either in command position or for an argument of the command).
condition
when completing inside a ‘[[
...]]
’ conditional expression; in
this case the words
array contains only the words inside the
conditional expression.
math
when completing in a mathematical environment such as a
‘((
...))
’ construct.
parameter
when completing the name of a parameter in a parameter expansion beginning
with $
but not ${
.
redirect
when completing after a redirection operator.
subscript
when completing inside a parameter subscript.
value
when completing the value of a parameter assignment.
exact
¶Controls the behaviour when the REC_EXACT
option is set. It will be
set to accept
if an exact match would be accepted, and will be unset
otherwise.
If it was set when at least one match equal to the string on the line was generated, the match is accepted.
exact_string
¶The string of an exact match if one was found, otherwise unset.
ignored
¶The number of completions that were ignored because they matched one of the
patterns given with the -F
option to the compadd
builtin
command.
insert
¶This controls the manner in which a match is inserted into the command
line. On entry to the widget function, if it is unset the command line is
not to be changed; if set to unambiguous
, any prefix common to all
matches is to be inserted; if set to automenu-unambiguous
, the
common prefix is to be inserted and the next invocation of the
completion code may start menu completion (due to the AUTO_MENU
option being set); if set to menu
or automenu
menu completion
will be started for the matches currently generated (in the
latter case this will happen because the AUTO_MENU
is set). The
value may also contain the string ‘tab
’ when the completion code
would normally not really do completion, but only insert the TAB
character.
On exit it may be set to any of the values above (where setting it to
the empty string is the same as unsetting it), or to a number, in which
case the match whose number is given will be inserted into the command line.
Negative numbers count backward from the last match (with ‘-1
’
selecting the last match) and out-of-range values are wrapped
around, so that a value of zero selects the last match and a value
one more than the maximum selects the first. Unless the value of this
key ends in a space, the match is inserted as in a menu completion,
i.e. without automatically appending a space.
Both menu
and automenu
may also specify the number of the
match to insert, given after a colon. For example, ‘menu:2
’ says
to start menu completion, beginning with the second match.
Note that a value containing the substring ‘tab
’ makes the
matches generated be ignored and only the TAB be inserted.
Finally, it may also be set to all
, which makes all matches
generated be inserted into the line.
insert_positions
¶When the completion system inserts an unambiguous string into the line, there may be multiple places where characters are missing or where the character inserted differs from at least one match. The value of this key contains a colon separated list of all these positions, as indexes into the command line.
last_prompt
¶If this is set to a non-empty string for every match added, the
completion code will move the cursor back to the previous prompt after
the list of completions has been displayed. Initially this is set or
unset according to the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT
option.
list
¶This controls whether or how the list of matches will be displayed. If it
is unset or empty they will never be listed; if its value begins with
list
, they will always be listed; if it begins with autolist
or ambiguous
, they will be listed when the AUTO_LIST
or
LIST_AMBIGUOUS
options respectively would normally cause them to
be.
If the substring force
appears in the value, this makes the
list be shown even if there is only one match. Normally, the list
would be shown only if there are at least two matches.
The value contains the substring packed
if the LIST_PACKED
option is set. If this substring is given for all matches added to a
group, this group will show the LIST_PACKED
behavior. The same is
done for the LIST_ROWS_FIRST
option with the substring rows
.
Finally, if the value contains the string explanations
, only the
explanation strings, if any, will be listed and if it contains
messages
, only the messages (added with the -x
option of
compadd
) will be listed. If it contains both explanations
and
messages
both kinds of explanation strings will be listed. It
will be set appropriately on entry to a completion widget and may be
changed there.
list_lines
¶This gives the number of lines that are needed to display the full
list of completions. Note that to calculate the total number of lines
to display you need to add the number of lines needed for the command
line to this value, this is available as the value of the BUFFERLINES
special parameter.
list_max
¶Initially this is set to the value of the LISTMAX
parameter.
It may be set to any other value; when the widget exits this value
will be used in the same way as the value of LISTMAX
.
nmatches
¶The number of matches added by the completion code so far.
old_insert
¶On entry to the widget this will be set to the number of the match of an old list of completions that is currently inserted into the command line. If no match has been inserted, this is unset.
As with old_list
, the value of this key will only be used if it is the
string keep
. If it was set to this value by the widget and there was an
old match inserted into the command line, this match will be kept and if
the value of the insert
key specifies that another match should be
inserted, this will be inserted after the old one.
old_list
¶This is set to yes
if there is still a valid list of completions
from a previous completion at the time the widget is invoked. This will
usually be the case if and only if the previous editing operation was a
completion widget or one of the builtin completion functions. If there is a
valid list and it is also currently shown on the screen, the value of this
key is shown
.
After the widget has exited the value of this key is only used if it
was set to keep
. In this case the completion code will continue
to use this old list. If the widget generated new matches, they will
not be used.
parameter
¶The name of the parameter when completing in a subscript or in the value of a parameter assignment.
pattern_insert
¶Normally this is set to menu
, which specifies that menu completion will
be used whenever a set of matches was generated using pattern_match
(see below). If
it is set to any other non-empty string by the user and menu completion is
not selected by other option settings, the code will instead insert any
common prefix for the generated matches as with normal completion.
pattern_match
¶Locally controls the behaviour given by the GLOB_COMPLETE
option.
Initially it is set to ‘*
’ if and only if the option is set.
The completion widget may set it to this value, to an empty string
(which has the same effect as unsetting it), or to any
other non-empty string. If it is non-empty, unquoted metacharacters on the
command line will be treated as patterns; if it is ‘*
’, then
additionally a wildcard ‘*
’ is assumed at the cursor position; if
it is empty or unset, metacharacters will be treated literally.
Note that the match specifications given to the compadd
builtin
command are not used if this is set to a non-empty string.
quote
¶When completing inside quotes, this contains the quotation character (i.e. either a single quote, a double quote, or a backtick). Otherwise it is unset.
quoting
¶When completing inside single quotes, this is set to the string
single
; inside double quotes, the string
double
; inside backticks, the string backtick
.
Otherwise it is unset.
redirect
¶The redirection operator when completing in a redirection position,
i.e. one of <
, >
, etc.
restore
¶This is set to auto
before a function is entered, which forces the
special parameters mentioned above (words
, CURRENT
, PREFIX
,
IPREFIX
, SUFFIX
, and ISUFFIX
) to be restored to their
previous values when the function exits. If a function unsets it or
sets it to any other string, they will not be restored.
to_end
¶Specifies the occasions on which the cursor is moved to the end of a string
when a match is inserted. On entry to a widget function, it may be
single
if this will happen when a single unambiguous match was inserted
or match
if it will happen any time a match is inserted (for example,
by menu completion; this is likely to be the effect of the ALWAYS_TO_END
option).
On exit, it may be set to single
as above. It may also be set to
always
, or to the empty string or unset; in those cases the cursor will
be moved to the end of the string always or never respectively. Any
other string is treated as match
.
unambiguous
¶This key is read-only and will always be set to the common (unambiguous) prefix the completion code has generated for all matches added so far.
unambiguous_cursor
¶This gives the position the cursor would be placed at if the
common prefix in the unambiguous
key were inserted, relative to
the value of that key. The cursor would be placed before the character
whose index is given by this key.
unambiguous_positions
¶This contains all positions where characters in the unambiguous string
are missing or where the character inserted differs from at least one
of the matches. The positions are given as indexes into the string
given by the value of the unambiguous
key.
vared
¶If completion is called while editing a line using the vared
builtin, the value of this key is set to the name of the parameter
given as an argument to vared
. This key is only set while a vared
command is active.
words
¶This array contains the words present on the command line currently being edited.
compadd
[ -akqQfenUl12C
] [ -F
array ]
[-P
prefix ] [ -S
suffix ]
[-p
hidden-prefix ] [ -s
hidden-suffix ]
[-i
ignored-prefix ] [ -I
ignored-suffix ]
[-W
file-prefix ] [ -d
array ]
[-J
group-name ] [ -X
explanation ] [ -x
message ]
[-V
group-name ] [ -o
[ order ] ]
[-r
remove-chars ] [ -R
remove-func ]
[-D
array ] [ -O
array ] [ -A
array ]
[-E
number ]
[-M
match-spec ] [ -
-
] [ completions ... ]This builtin command can be used to add matches directly and control all the information the completion code stores with each possible completion. The return status is zero if at least one match was added and non-zero if no matches were added.
The completion code breaks each match into seven fields in the order:
<ipre><apre><hpre><body><hsuf><asuf><isuf>
The first field
is an ignored prefix taken from the command line, the contents of the
IPREFIX
parameter plus the string given with the -i
option. With the -U
option, only the string from the -i
option is used. The field <apre> is an optional prefix string
given with the -P
option. The <hpre> field is a string
that is considered part of the match but that should not be shown when
listing completions, given with the -p
option; for example,
functions that do filename generation might specify
a common path prefix this way. <body> is the part of the match that
should appear in the list of matches shown to the user.
The suffixes <hsuf>,
<asuf> and <isuf> correspond to the prefixes <hpre>,
<apre> and <ipre> and are given by the options -s
, -S
and
-I
, respectively.
The supported flags are:
-P
prefixThis gives a string to be inserted before each match. The string given is not considered as part of the match and any shell metacharacters in it will not be quoted when the string is inserted.
-S
suffixLike -P
, but gives a string to be inserted after each match.
-p
hidden-prefixThis gives a string that should be inserted before each
match but that should not appear in the list of matches. Unless the
-U
option is given, this string must be matched as part of the string
on the command line.
-s
hidden-suffixLike ‘-p
’, but gives a string to insert after each match.
-i
ignored-prefixThis gives a string to insert just before any
string given with the ‘-P
’ option. Without ‘-P
’ the string is
inserted before the string given with ‘-p
’ or directly before each
match.
-I
ignored-suffixLike -i
, but gives an ignored suffix.
-a
With this flag the completions are taken as names of arrays and the
actual completions are their values. If only some elements of the
arrays are needed, the completions may also contain subscripts, as in
‘foo[2,-1]
’.
-k
With this flag the completions are taken as names of associative arrays
and the actual completions are their keys. As for -a
, the
words may also contain subscripts, as in ‘foo[(R)*bar*]
’.
-d
arrayThis adds per-completion display strings. The array should contain one element per completion given. The completion code will then display the first element instead of the first completion, and so on. The array may be given as the name of an array parameter or directly as a space-separated list of words in parentheses.
If there are fewer display strings than completions, the leftover completions will be displayed unchanged and if there are more display strings than completions, the leftover display strings will be silently ignored.
-l
This option only has an effect if used together with the -d
option. If it is given, the display strings are listed one per line,
not arrayed in columns.
-o
[ order ]This controls the order in which matches are sorted. order is a comma-separated list comprising the following possible values. These values can be abbreviated to their initial two or three characters. Note that the order forms part of the group name space so matches with different orderings will not be in the same group.
match
If given, the order of the output is determined by the match strings;
otherwise it is determined by the display strings (i.e. the strings given
by the -d
option). This is the default if ‘-o
’ is specified but
the order argument is omitted.
nosort
This specifies that the completions are pre-sorted and their order should be preserved. This value only makes sense alone and cannot be combined with any others.
numeric
If the matches include numbers, sort them numerically rather than lexicographically.
reverse
Arrange the matches backwards by reversing the sort ordering.
-J
group-nameGives the name of the group that the matches should be stored in.
-V
group-nameLike -J
but naming an unsorted group. This option is identical to
the combination of -J
and -o nosort
.
-1
If given together with the -V
option, makes
only consecutive duplicates in the group be removed. If combined with
the -J
option, this has no visible effect. Note that groups
with and without this flag are in different name spaces.
-2
If given together with the -J
or -V
option, makes all
duplicates be kept. Again, groups with and without this flag are in
different name spaces.
-X
explanationThe explanation string will be printed with the list of matches, above the group currently selected.
Within the explanation, the following sequences may be used to
specify output attributes
(see Prompt Expansion):
‘%B
’, ‘%S
’, ‘%U
’, ‘%F
’, ‘%K
’ and their lower case
counterparts, as well as ‘%{
...%}
’. ‘%F
’, ‘%K
’ and
‘%{
...%}
’ take arguments in the same form as prompt
expansion. (Note that the sequence ‘%G
’ is not available; an
argument to ‘%{
’ should be used instead.) The sequence ‘%%
’
produces a literal ‘%
’.
These sequences are most often employed by users when customising the
format
style
(see
Completion System),
but they must also be taken into account when writing completion
functions, as passing descriptions with unescaped ‘%
’ characters
to utility functions such as _arguments
and _message
may
produce unexpected results. If arbitrary text is to be passed in a
description, it can be escaped using e.g. ${my_str//\%/%%}
.
-x
messageLike -X
, but the message will be printed even if there are no
matches in the group.
-q
The suffix given with -S
will be automatically removed if
the next character typed is a blank or does not insert anything, or if
the suffix consists of only one character and the next character typed
is the same character.
-r
remove-charsThis is a more versatile form of the -q
option.
The suffix given with -S
or the slash automatically added after
completing directories will be automatically removed if
the next character typed inserts one of the characters given in the
remove-chars. This string is parsed as a characters class and
understands the backslash sequences used by the print
command. For
example, ‘-r "a-z\t"
’ removes the suffix if the next character typed
inserts a lower case character or a TAB, and ‘-r "^0-9"
’ removes the
suffix if the next character typed inserts anything but a digit. One extra
backslash sequence is understood in this string: ‘\-
’ stands for
all characters that insert nothing. Thus ‘-S "=" -q
’ is the same
as ‘-S "=" -r "= \t\n\-"
’.
This option may also be used without the -S
option; then any
automatically added space will be removed when one of the characters in the
list is typed.
-R
remove-funcThis is another form of the -r
option. When a match
has been accepted and a suffix has been inserted, the function
remove-func will be called after the next character typed. It is
passed the length of the suffix as an argument and can use the special
parameters available in ordinary (non-completion) zle widgets (see
Zsh Line Editor) to analyse and modify the command line.
-f
If this flag is given, all of the matches built from the completions are
marked as being the names of files. They are not required to be actual
filenames, but if they are, and the option LIST_TYPES
is set, the
characters describing the types of the files in the completion lists will
be shown. This also forces a slash to be added when the name of a
directory is completed.
-e
This flag can be used to tell the completion code that the matches
added are parameter names for a parameter expansion. This will make
the AUTO_PARAM_SLASH
and AUTO_PARAM_KEYS
options be used for
the matches.
-W
file-prefixThis string is a pathname that will be prepended to each match together
with any prefix specified by the -p
option to form a complete filename
for testing. Hence it is only useful if combined with the -f
flag, as
the tests will not otherwise be performed.
-F
arraySpecifies an array containing patterns. completions that match one of these patterns are ignored, that is, not considered to be matches.
The array may be the name of an array parameter or a list of
literal patterns enclosed in parentheses and quoted, as in ‘-F "(*?.o
*?.h)"
’. If the name of an array is given, the elements of the array are
taken as the patterns.
-Q
This flag instructs the completion code not to quote any metacharacters in the matches when inserting them into the command line.
-M
match-specThis gives local match specifications as described below in
Completion Matching Control. This option may be given more than once.
In this case all match-specs given are concatenated with spaces
between them to form the specification string to use.
Note that they will only be used if the -U
option is not given.
-n
Specifies that matching completions are to be added to the set of matches, but are not to be listed to the user.
-U
If this flag is given, all completions are added to the set of matches and no matching will be done by the completion code. Normally this is used in functions that do the matching themselves.
-O
arrayIf this option is given, the completions are not added to the set of matches. Instead, matching is done as usual and all of the completions that match will be stored in the array parameter whose name is given as array.
-A
arrayAs the -O
option, except that instead of those of the completions
which
match being stored in array, the strings generated internally by the
completion code are stored. For example,
with a match specification of ‘-M "L:|no="
’, a current word of ‘nof
’
and completions of ‘foo
’, this
option stores the string ‘nofoo
’ in the array, whereas the -O
option stores the ‘foo
’ originally given.
-D
arrayAs with -O
, the completions are not added to the set of matches.
Instead, whenever the nth completion does not
match, the nth element of the array is removed. Elements
for which the corresponding completion matches are retained.
This option can be used more than once to remove elements from multiple
arrays.
-C
This option adds a special match which expands to all other matches
when inserted into the line, even those that are added after this
option is used. Together with the -d
option it is possible to
specify a string that should be displayed in the list for this special
match. If no string is given, it will be shown as a string containing
the strings that would be inserted for the other matches, truncated to
the width of the screen.
-E
numberThis option adds number empty matches after matching completions have
been added. An empty match takes up space in completion listings but
will never be inserted in the line and can’t be selected with menu
completion or menu selection. This makes empty matches only useful to
format completion lists and to make explanatory string be shown in
completion lists (since empty matches can be given display strings
with the -d
option). And because all but one empty string would
otherwise be removed, this option implies the -V
and -2
options (even if an explicit -J
option is given). This can be
important to note as it affects the name space into which matches are
added.
-
-
-
This flag ends the list of flags and options. All arguments after it will be taken as the completions even if they begin with hyphens.
Except for the -M
flag, if any of these flags is given more than
once, the first one (and its argument) will be used.
compset -p
number ¶compset -P
[ number ] patterncompset -s
numbercompset -S
[ number ] patterncompset -n
begin [ end ]compset -N
beg-pat [ end-pat ]compset -q
This command simplifies modification of the special parameters, while its return status allows tests on them to be carried out.
The options are:
-p
numberIf the value of the PREFIX
parameter is at least number
characters long, the first number characters are removed from it and
appended to the contents of the IPREFIX
parameter.
-P
[ number ] patternIf the value of the PREFIX
parameter begins with anything that
matches the pattern, the matched portion is removed from
PREFIX
and appended to IPREFIX
.
Without the optional number, the longest match is taken, but
if number is given, anything up to the numberth match is
moved. If the number is negative, the numberth longest
match is moved. For example, if PREFIX
contains the string
‘a=b=c
’, then compset -P '*\='
will move the string ‘a=b=
’
into the IPREFIX
parameter, but compset -P 1 '*\='
will move only
the string ‘a=
’.
-s
numberAs -p
, but transfer the last number characters from the
value of SUFFIX
to the front of the value of ISUFFIX
.
-S
[ number ] patternAs -P
, but match the last portion of SUFFIX
and transfer the
matched portion to the front of the value of ISUFFIX
.
-n
begin [ end ]If the current word position as specified by the parameter CURRENT
is greater than or equal to begin, anything up to the
beginth word is removed from the words
array and the value
of the parameter CURRENT
is decremented by begin.
If the optional end is given, the modification is done only if
the current word position is also less than or equal to end. In
this case, the words from position end onwards are also removed from
the words
array.
Both begin and end may be negative to count backwards
from the last element of the words
array.
-N
beg-pat [ end-pat ]If one of the elements of the words
array before the one at the
index given by the value of the parameter CURRENT
matches the
pattern beg-pat, all elements up to and including the matching one are
removed from the words
array and the value of CURRENT
is changed to
point to the same word in the changed array.
If the optional pattern end-pat is also given, and there is an
element in the words
array matching this pattern, the parameters
are modified only if the index of this word is higher than the one
given by the CURRENT
parameter (so that the matching word has
to be after the cursor). In this case, the words starting with the one
matching end-pat
are also removed from the words
array. If words
contains no word matching end-pat, the
testing and modification is performed as if it were not given.
-q
The word
currently being completed is split on spaces into separate words,
respecting the usual shell quoting conventions. The
resulting words are stored in the words
array, and CURRENT
,
PREFIX
, SUFFIX
, QIPREFIX
, and QISUFFIX
are modified to
reflect the word part that is completed.
In all the above cases the return status is zero if the test succeeded and the parameters were modified and non-zero otherwise. This allows one to use this builtin in tests such as:
if compset -P '*\='; then ...
This forces anything up to and including the last equal sign to be ignored by the completion code.
compcall
[ -TD
]This allows the use of completions defined with the compctl
builtin
from within completion widgets. The list of matches will be generated as
if one of the non-widget completion functions (complete-word
, etc.)
had been called, except that only compctl
s given for specific commands
are used. To force the code to try completions defined with the -T
option of compctl
and/or the default completion (whether defined by
compctl -D
or the builtin default) in the appropriate places, the
-T
and/or -D
flags can be passed to compcall
.
The return status can be used to test if a matching compctl
definition was found. It is non-zero if a compctl
was found and
zero otherwise.
Note that this builtin is defined by the zsh/compctl
module.
The following additional condition codes for use within the [[
... ]]
construct are available in completion widgets. These work on the special
parameters. All of these tests can also be performed by the compset
builtin, but in the case of the condition codes the contents of the special
parameters are not modified.
-prefix
[ number ] patterntrue if the test for the -P
option of compset
would succeed.
-suffix
[ number ] patterntrue if the test for the -S
option of compset
would succeed.
-after
beg-pattrue if the test of the -N
option with only the beg-pat given
would succeed.
-between
beg-pat end-pattrue if the test for the -N
option with both patterns would succeed.
When the user invokes completion, the current word on the command line (that is, the word the cursor is currently on) is used to generate a match pattern. Only those completions that match the pattern are offered to the user as matches.
The default match pattern is generated from the current word by either
*
’ (matching any number of characters in a completion)
or,
COMPLETE_IN_WORD
is set, inserting a ‘*
’ at the
cursor position.
This narrow pattern can be broadened selectively by passing a match
specification to the compadd
builtin command through its -M
option
(see
Completion Builtin Commands). A match specification consists of one or more matchers separated by
whitespace. Matchers in a match specification are applied one at a time, from
left to right. Once all matchers have been applied, completions are compared
to the final match pattern and non-matching ones are discarded.
-M
option is ignored if the current word contains a glob
pattern and the shell option GLOB_COMPLETE
is set or if the
pattern_match
key of the special associative array compstate
is set to
a non-empty value (see
Completion Special Parameters).
-M
option directly, but rather use the
matcher-list
and matcher
styles (see the subsection Standard Styles
in
Completion System Configuration).
Each matcher consists of
:
’,
|
’),
=
’), and
The patterns before the ‘=
’ are used to match substrings of the current
word. For each matched substring, the corresponding part of the match pattern
is broadened with the pattern after the ‘=
’, by means of a logical OR
.
Each pattern in a matcher cosists of either
\
’),
?
’),
[...]
’; see the subsection Glob Operators in
Filename Generation), and/or
Other shell patterns are not allowed.
A brace expression, like a bracket expression, consists of a list of
0-9
’), and/or
[:
name:]
’).
However, they differ from each other as follows:
{...}
’).
!
’ or ‘^
’ has no special meaning and will be interpreted as a literal
character.
=
’,
if there is one; if there is no brace expression on the other side, then this
pattern is the empty string. However, if either brace expression has more
elements than the other, then the excess entries are simply ignored. When
comparing indexes, each literal character or character class counts as one
element, but each range is instead expanded to the full list of literal
characters it represents. Additionally, if on both sides of the
‘=
’, the nth pattern is ‘[:upper:]
’ or ‘[:lower:]
’, then these
are expanded as ranges, too.
Note that, although the matching system does not yet handle multibyte
characters, this is likely to be a future extension. Hence, using
‘[:upper:]
’ and ‘[:lower:]
’ is recommended over
‘A-Z
’ and ‘a-z
’.
Below are the different forms of matchers supported. Each uppercase form behaves exactly like its lowercase counterpart, but adds an additional step after the match pattern has filtered out non-matching completions: Each of a match’s substrings that was matched by a subpattern from an uppercase matcher is replaced with the corresponding substring of the current word. However, patterns from lowercase matchers have higher weight: If a substring of the current word was matched by patterns from both a lowercase and an uppercase matcher, then the lowercase matcher’s pattern wins and the corresponding part of the match is not modified.
Unless indicated otherwise, each example listed assumes COMPLETE_IN_WORD
to
be unset (as it is by default).
m:
word-pat=
match-patM:
word-pat=
match-patFor each substring of the current word that matches word-pat, broaden the corresponding part of the match pattern to additionally match match-pat.
m:{[:lower:]}={[:upper:]}
lets any lower case character in the current word
be completed to itself or its uppercase counterpart. So, the completions
‘foo
’, ‘FOO
’ and ‘Foo
’ will are be considered matches for the word
‘fo
’.
M:_=
inserts every underscore from the current word into each match, in the
same relative position, determined by matching the substrings around it. So,
given a completion ‘foo
’, the word ‘f_o
’ will be completed to the match
‘f_oo
’, even though the latter was not present as a completion.
b:
word-pat=
match-patB:
word-pat=
match-pate:
word-pat=
match-patE:
word-pat=
match-patFor each consecutive substring at the b:
eginning or e:
nd of the current
word that matches word-pat, broaden the corresponding part of the match
pattern to additionally match match-pat.
‘b:-=+
’ lets any number of minuses at the start of the current word be
completed to a minus or a plus.
‘B:0=
’ adds all zeroes at the beginning of the current word to the
beginning of each match.
l:
|
word-pat=
match-patL:
|
word-pat=
match-patR:
word-pat|
=
match-patr:
word-pat|
=
match-patIf there is a substring at the l:
eft or r:
ight edge of the current word
that matches word-pat, then broaden the corresponding part of the match
pattern to additionally match match-pat.
For each l:
, L:
, r:
and R:
matcher (including the ones below),
the pattern match-pat may also be a ‘*
’. This matches any number of
characters in a completion.
‘r:|=*
’ appends a ‘*
’ to the match pattern, even when
COMPLETE_IN_WORD
is set and the cursor is not at the end of the current
word.
If the current word starts with a minus, then ‘L:|-=
’ will prepend it to
each match.
l:
anchor|
word-pat=
match-patL:
anchor|
word-pat=
match-patr:
word-pat|
anchor=
match-patR:
word-pat|
anchor=
match-patFor each substring of the current word that matches word-pat and has on
its l:
eft or r:
ight another substring matching anchor, broaden the
corresponding part of the match pattern to additionally match match-pat.
Note that these matchers (and the ones below) modify only what is matched by word-pat; they do not change the matching behavior of what is matched by anchor (or coanchor; see the matchers below). Thus, unless its corresponding part of the match pattern has been modified, the anchor in the current word has to match literally in each completion, just like any other substring of the current word.
If a matcher includes at least one anchor (which includes the matchers with two
anchors, below), then match-pat may also be ‘*
’ or ‘**
’. ‘*
’
can match any part of a completion that does not contain any substrings
matching anchor, whereas a ‘**
’ can match any part of a completion,
period. (Note that this is different from the behavior of ‘*
’ in the
anchorless forms of ‘l:
’ and ‘r:
’ and and also different from ‘*
’
and ‘**
’ in glob expressions.)
‘r:|.=*
’ makes the completion ‘comp.sources.unix
’ a match for the word
‘..u
’ — but not for the word ‘.u
’.
Given a completion ‘-
-foo
’, the matcher ‘L:--|no-=
’ will complete
the word ‘-
-no-
’ to the match ‘-
-no-foo
’.
l:
anchor||
coanchor=
match-patL:
anchor||
coanchor=
match-patr:
coanchor||
anchor=
match-patR:
coanchor||
anchor=
match-patFor any two consecutive substrings of the current word that match anchor and coanchor, in the order given, insert the pattern match-pat between their corresponding parts in the match pattern.
Note that, unlike anchor, the pattern coanchor does not change what
‘*
’ can match.
‘r:?||[[:upper:]]=*
’ will complete the current word ‘fB
’ to
‘fooBar
’, but it will not complete it to ‘fooHooBar
’ (because ‘*
’
here cannot match anything that includes a match for ‘[[:upper:]]
), nor
will it complete ‘B
’ to ‘fooBar
’ (because there is no character in the
current word to match coanchor).
Given the current word ‘pass.n
’ and a completion ‘pass.byname
’, the
matcher ‘L:.||[[:alpha:]]=by
’ will produce the match ‘pass.name
’.
x:
Ignore this matcher and all matchers to its right.
This matcher is used to mark the end of a match specification. In a single standalone list of matchers, this has no use, but where match specifications are concatenated, as is often the case when using the Completion System, it can allow one match specification to override another.
The first step is to define the widget:
zle -C complete complete-word complete-files
Then the widget can be bound to a key using the bindkey
builtin
command:
bindkey '^X\t' complete
After that the shell function complete-files
will be invoked
after typing control-X and TAB. The function should then generate the
matches, e.g.:
complete-files () { compadd - * }
This function will complete files in the current directory matching the current word.
This describes the shell code for the ‘new’ completion system, referred
to as compsys
. It is written in shell functions based on the
features described in
the previous chapter, Completion Widgets.
The features are contextual, sensitive to the point at which completion is started. Many completions are already provided. For this reason, a user can perform a great many tasks without knowing any details beyond how to initialize the system, which is described in Initialization.
The context that decides what completion is to be performed may be
A full context specification contains other elements, as we shall describe.
Besides commands names and contexts, the system employs two more concepts, styles and tags. These provide ways for the user to configure the system’s behaviour.
Tags play a dual role. They serve as a classification system for
the matches, typically indicating a class of object that the user
may need to distinguish. For example, when completing arguments of the
ls
command the user may prefer to try files
before directories
,
so both of these are tags. They also appear as the rightmost
element in a context specification.
Styles modify various operations of the completion system, such as
output formatting, but also what kinds of completers are used (and in
what order), or which tags are examined. Styles may accept arguments
and are manipulated using the zstyle
command described in
The zsh/zutil Module.
In summary, tags describe what the completion objects are, and style
how
they are to be completed. At various points of execution, the
completion system checks what styles and/or tags are defined for the
current context, and uses that to modify its behavior. The full
description of context handling, which determines how tags and other
elements of the context influence the behaviour of styles, is described
in Completion System Configuration.
When a completion is requested, a dispatcher function is called;
see the description of _main_complete
in the list of control functions
below. This dispatcher decides which function should
be called to produce the completions, and calls it. The result is
passed to one or more completers, functions that implement
individual completion strategies: simple completion, error correction,
completion with error correction, menu selection, etc.
More generally, the shell functions contained in the completion system are of two types:
comp
’ are to be called directly; there are only
a few of these;
_
’ are called by the
completion code. The shell functions of this set, which implement
completion behaviour and may be bound to keystrokes, are referred to
as ‘widgets’. These proliferate as new completions are required.
If the system was installed completely, it should be enough to
call the shell function compinit
from your initialization file; see the
next section. However, the function compinstall
can be run by a user
to configure various aspects of the completion system.
Usually, compinstall
will insert code into .zshrc
, although if
that is not writable it will save it in another file and tell you that
file’s location. Note that it is up to you to make sure that the lines
added to .zshrc
are actually run; you may, for example, need to move
them to an earlier place in the file if .zshrc
usually returns early.
So long as you keep them all together (including the comment lines at the
start and finish), you can rerun compinstall
and it will correctly
locate and modify these lines. Note, however, that any code you add to
this section by hand is likely to be lost if you rerun compinstall
,
although lines using the command ‘zstyle
’ should be gracefully handled.
The new code will take effect next time you start the shell, or run
.zshrc
by hand; there is also an option to make them take effect
immediately. However, if compinstall
has removed definitions, you will
need to restart the shell to see the changes.
To run compinstall
you will need to make sure it is in a directory
mentioned in your fpath
parameter, which should already be the case if
zsh was properly configured as long as your startup files do not remove the
appropriate directories from fpath
. Then it must be autoloaded
(‘autoload -U compinstall
’ is recommended). You can abort the
installation any time you are being prompted for information, and your
.zshrc
will not be altered at all; changes only take place right at the
end, where you are specifically asked for confirmation.
This section describes the use of compinit
to initialize completion for
the current session when called directly; if you have run
compinstall
it will be called automatically from your .zshrc
.
To initialize the system, the function compinit
should be in a
directory mentioned in the fpath
parameter, and should be autoloaded
(‘autoload -U compinit
’ is recommended), and then run simply as
‘compinit
’. This will define a
few utility functions, arrange for all the necessary shell functions to be
autoloaded, and will then re-define all widgets that do completion to use the
new system. If you use the menu-select
widget, which is part of the
zsh/complist
module, you should make sure that that module is loaded
before the call to compinit
so that that widget is also
re-defined. If completion styles (see below) are set up to perform
expansion as well as completion by default, and the TAB key is bound to
expand-or-complete
, compinit
will rebind it to complete-word
;
this is necessary to use the correct form of expansion.
Should you need to use the original completion commands, you can still
bind keys to the old widgets by putting a ‘.
’ in front of the
widget name, e.g. ‘.expand-or-complete
’.
To speed up the running of compinit
, it can be made to produce a dumped
configuration that will be read in on future invocations; this is the
default, but can be turned off by calling compinit
with the
option -D
. The dumped file is .zcompdump
in the same
directory as the startup files (i.e. $ZDOTDIR
or $HOME
);
alternatively, an explicit file name can be given by ‘compinit -d
dumpfile’. The next invocation of compinit
will read the dumped
file instead of performing a full initialization.
If the number of completion files changes, compinit
will recognise this
and produce a new dump file. However, if the name of a function or the
arguments in the first line of a #compdef
function (as described below)
change, it is easiest to delete the dump file by hand so that
compinit
will re-create it the next time it is run. The check
performed to see if there are new functions can be omitted by giving
the option -C
. In this case the dump file will only be created if
there isn’t one already.
The dumping is actually done by another function, compdump
, but you
will only need to run this yourself if you change the configuration
(e.g. using compdef
) and then want to dump the new one. The name of
the old dumped file will be remembered for this purpose.
If the parameter _compdir
is set, compinit
uses it as a directory
where completion functions can be found; this is only necessary if they are
not already in the function search path.
For security reasons compinit
also checks if the completion system
would use files not owned by root or by the current user, or files in
directories that are world- or group-writable or that are not owned by
root or by the current user. If such files or directories are found,
compinit
will ask if the completion system should really be used. To
avoid these tests and make all files found be used without asking, use the
option -u
, and to make compinit
silently ignore all insecure files
and directories use the option -i
. This security check is skipped
entirely when the -C
option is given, provided the dumpfile exists.
The security check can be retried at any time by running the function
compaudit
. This is the same check used by compinit
, but when it
is executed directly any changes to fpath
are made local to the
function so they do not persist. The directories to be checked may be
passed as arguments; if none are given, compaudit
uses fpath
and
_compdir
to find completion system directories, adding missing ones
to fpath
as necessary. To force a check of exactly the directories
currently named in fpath
, set _compdir
to an empty string before
calling compaudit
or compinit
.
The function bashcompinit
provides compatibility with bash’s programmable
completion system. When run it will define the functions, compgen
and
complete
which correspond to the bash builtins with the same names.
It will then be possible to use completion specifications and functions
written for bash.
The convention for autoloaded functions used in completion is that they
start with an underscore; as already mentioned, the fpath/FPATH
parameter must contain the directory in which they are stored. If zsh
was properly installed on your system, then fpath/FPATH
automatically
contains the required directories for the standard functions.
For incomplete installations, if compinit
does not find enough files
beginning with an underscore (fewer than twenty) in the search path, it
will try to find more by adding the directory _compdir
to the search
path. If that directory has a subdirectory named Base
, all
subdirectories will be added to the path. Furthermore, if the subdirectory
Base
has a subdirectory named Core
, compinit
will add all
subdirectories of the subdirectories to the path: this allows
the functions to be in the same format as in the zsh
source
distribution.
When compinit
is run, it searches all such files accessible via
fpath/FPATH
and reads the first line of each of them. This line should
contain one of the tags described below. Files whose first line does not
start with one of these tags are not considered to be part of the
completion system and will not be treated specially.
The tags are:
#compdef
name ... [ -
{p
|P
} pattern ... [ -N
name ... ] ]The file will be made autoloadable and the function defined
in it will be called when completing names, each of which is
either the name of a command whose arguments are to be completed or one of
a number of special contexts in the form -
context-
described
below.
Each name may also be of the form ‘cmd=
service’.
When completing the command cmd, the function typically behaves as
if the command (or special context) service was being completed
instead. This provides a way of altering the behaviour of functions
that can perform many different completions. It is implemented
by setting the parameter $service
when calling the function;
the function may choose to interpret this how it wishes, and simpler
functions will probably ignore it.
If the #compdef
line contains one of the options -p
or -P
,
the words following are taken to be patterns. The function will be
called when completion is attempted for a command or context that matches
one of the patterns. The options -p
and -P
are used to specify
patterns to be tried before or after other completions respectively.
Hence -P
may be used to specify default actions.
The option -N
is used after a list following -p
or -P
; it
specifies that remaining words no longer define patterns. It is
possible to toggle between the three options as many times as necessary.
#compdef -k
style key-sequence ...This option creates a widget behaving like the
builtin widget style and binds it to the given key-sequences,
if any. The style must be one of the builtin widgets that perform
completion, namely complete-word
, delete-char-or-list
,
expand-or-complete
, expand-or-complete-prefix
, list-choices
,
menu-complete
, menu-expand-or-complete
, or
reverse-menu-complete
. If the zsh/complist
module is loaded (see
The zsh/complist Module) the widget menu-select
is also available.
When one of the key-sequences is typed, the function in the file will
be invoked to generate the matches. Note that a key will not be re-bound
if it already was (that is, was bound to something other than
undefined-key
). The widget created has the same name as the file and
can be bound to any other keys using bindkey
as usual.
#compdef -K
widget-name style key-sequence [ name style seq ... ]This is similar to -k
except that only one key-sequence
argument may be given for each widget-name style pair.
However, the entire set of three arguments may be repeated with a
different set of arguments. Note in particular that the
widget-name must be distinct in each set. If it does not begin with
‘_
’ this will be added. The widget-name should not clash with
the name of any existing widget: names based on the name of the function
are most useful. For example,
#compdef -K _foo_complete complete-word "^X^C" \ _foo_list list-choices "^X^D"
(all on one line) defines a widget _foo_complete
for completion, bound
to ‘^X^C
’, and a widget _foo_list
for listing, bound to ‘^X^D
’.
#autoload
[ options ]Functions with the #autoload
tag are marked for autoloading but
are not otherwise treated specially. Typically they are to be called
from within one of the completion functions. Any options supplied
will be passed to the autoload
builtin; a typical use is +X
to
force the function to be loaded immediately. Note that the -U
and
-z
flags are always added implicitly.
The #
is part of the tag name and no white space is allowed after it.
The #compdef
tags use the compdef
function described below; the
main difference is that the name of the function is supplied implicitly.
The special contexts for which completion functions can be defined are:
-array-value-
¶The right hand side of an array-assignment
(‘name=(
...)
’)
-assign-parameter-
¶The name of a parameter in an assignment, i.e. on the left hand side of
an ‘=
’
-brace-parameter-
¶The name of a parameter expansion within braces (‘${
...}
’)
-command-
¶A word in command position
-condition-
¶A word inside a condition (‘[[
...]]
’)
-default-
¶Any word for which no other completion is defined
-equal-
¶A word beginning with an equals sign
-first-
¶This is tried before any other completion function. The function called
may set the _compskip
parameter to one of various values:
all
: no further completion is attempted; a string
containing the substring patterns
: no pattern completion functions
will be called; a string containing default
: the
function for the ‘-default-
’ context will not be called, but
functions defined for commands will be.
-math-
¶Inside mathematical contexts, such as
‘((
...))
’
-parameter-
¶The name of a parameter expansion (‘$
...’)
-redirect-
¶The word after a redirection operator.
-subscript-
¶The contents of a parameter subscript.
-tilde-
¶After an initial tilde (‘~
’), but before the first slash
in the word.
-value-
¶On the right hand side of an assignment.
Default implementations are supplied for each of these
contexts. In most cases the context -
context-
is
implemented by a corresponding function _
context, for example
the context ‘-tilde-
’ and the function ‘_tilde
’).
The contexts -redirect-
and -value-
allow extra context-specific
information. (Internally, this is handled by the functions for each
context calling the function _dispatch
.) The extra
information is added separated by commas.
For the -redirect-
context, the extra information is in the form
‘-redirect-,
op,
command’, where op is the
redirection operator and command is the name of the command on
the line. If there is no command on the line yet, the command
field will be empty.
For the -value-
context, the form is
‘-value-,
name,
command’, where name is the name of
the parameter on the left hand side of the assignment.
In the case of elements of an associative array, for
example ‘assoc=(key <TAB>
’, name is expanded to
‘name-
key’. In certain special contexts, such as
completing after ‘make CFLAGS=
’, the command part gives the
name of the command, here make
; otherwise it is empty.
It is not necessary to define fully specific completions as the
functions provided will try to generate completions by progressively
replacing the elements with ‘-default-
’. For example, when
completing after ‘foo=<TAB>
’, _value
will try the names
‘-value-,foo,
’ (note the empty command part),
‘-value-,foo,-default-
’ and‘-value-,-default-,-default-
’, in
that order, until it finds a function to handle the context.
As an example:
compdef '_files -g "*.log"' '-redirect-,2>,-default-'
completes files matching ‘*.log
’ after ‘2> <TAB>
’ for any
command with no more specific handler defined.
Also:
compdef _foo -value-,-default-,-default-
specifies that _foo
provides completions for the values of
parameters for which no special function has been defined. This is
usually handled by the function _value
itself.
The same lookup rules are used when looking up styles (as described below); for example
zstyle ':completion:*:*:-redirect-,2>,*:*' file-patterns '*.log'
is another way to make completion after ‘2> <TAB>
’ complete files
matching ‘*.log
’.
The following function is defined by compinit
and may be called
directly.
compdef
[ -ane
] function name ... [ -
{p
|P
} pattern ... [ -N
name ...]]compdef -d
name ...compdef -k
[ -an
] function style key-sequence [ key-sequence ... ]compdef -K
[ -an
] function name style key-seq [ name style seq ... ]The first form defines the function to call for completion in the
given contexts as described for the #compdef
tag above.
Alternatively, all the arguments may have the form
‘cmd=
service’. Here service should already have been
defined by ‘cmd1=
service’ lines in #compdef
files, as
described above. The argument for cmd will be completed in the
same way as service.
The function argument may alternatively be a string containing
almost any shell code. If the string contains an equal sign, the above
will take precedence. The option -e
may be used to specify the first
argument is to be evaluated as shell code even if it contains an equal
sign. The string will be executed using the eval
builtin command to
generate completions. This provides a way of avoiding having to define
a new completion function. For example, to complete files ending in
‘.h
’ as arguments to the command foo
:
compdef '_files -g "*.h"' foo
The option -n
prevents any completions already defined for the
command or context from being overwritten.
The option -d
deletes any completion defined for the command or
contexts listed.
The names may also contain -p
, -P
and -N
options as
described for the #compdef
tag. The effect on the argument list is
identical, switching between definitions of patterns tried initially,
patterns tried finally, and normal commands and contexts.
The parameter $_compskip
may be set by any function defined for a
pattern context. If it is set to a value containing the substring
‘patterns
’ none of the pattern-functions will be called; if it is
set to a value containing the substring ‘all
’, no other function
will be called. Setting $_compskip
in this manner is of particular
utility when using the -p
option, as otherwise the dispatcher will
move on to additional functions (likely the default one) after calling
the pattern-context one, which can mangle the display of completion
possibilities if not handled properly.
The form with -k
defines a widget with the same name as the function
that will be called for each of the key-sequences; this is like the
#compdef -k
tag. The function should generate the completions needed
and will otherwise behave like the builtin widget whose name is given as
the style argument. The widgets usable for this are:
complete-word
, delete-char-or-list
, expand-or-complete
,
expand-or-complete-prefix
, list-choices
, menu-complete
,
menu-expand-or-complete
, and reverse-menu-complete
, as well as
menu-select
if the zsh/complist
module is loaded. The option -n
prevents the key being bound if it is already to bound to something other
than undefined-key
.
The form with -K
is similar and defines multiple widgets based on the
same function, each of which requires the set of three arguments
name, style and key-sequence, where the latter two are as
for -k
and the first must be a unique widget name beginning with an
underscore.
Wherever applicable, the -a
option makes the function
autoloadable, equivalent to autoload -U
function.
The function compdef
can be used to associate existing completion
functions with new commands. For example,
compdef _pids foo
uses the function _pids
to complete process IDs for the command foo
.
Note also the _gnu_generic
function described below, which can be
used to complete options for commands that understand the
‘-
-help
’ option.
This section gives a short overview of how the completion system works, and then more detail on how users can configure how and when matches are generated.
When completion is attempted somewhere on the command line the
completion system begins building the context. The context represents
everything that the shell knows about the meaning of the command line
and the significance of the cursor position. This takes account of a
number of things including the command word (such as ‘grep
’ or
‘zsh
’) and options to which the current word may be an argument
(such as the ‘-o
’ option to zsh
which takes a shell option as an
argument).
The context starts out very generic ("we are beginning a completion") and becomes more specific as more is learned ("the current word is in a position that is usually a command name" or "the current word might be a variable name" and so on). Therefore the context will vary during the same call to the completion system.
This context information is condensed into a string consisting of multiple fields separated by colons, referred to simply as ‘the context’ in the remainder of the documentation. Note that a user of the completion system rarely needs to compose a context string, unless for example a new function is being written to perform completion for a new command. What a user may need to do is compose a style pattern, which is matched against a context when needed to look up context-sensitive options that configure the completion system.
The next few paragraphs explain how a context is composed within the
completion function suite. Following that is discussion of how styles
are defined. Styles determine such things as how the matches are
generated, similarly to shell options but with much more control. They
are defined with the zstyle
builtin command (The zsh/zutil Module).
The context string always consists of a fixed set of fields, separated
by colons and with a leading colon before the first. Fields which are
not yet known are left empty, but the surrounding colons appear anyway.
The fields are always in the order
:completion:
function:
completer:
command:
argument:
tag. These have the following meaning:
completion
, saying that this style is used by
the completion system. This distinguishes the context from those used
by, for example, zle widgets and ZFTP functions.
predict-on
and the various
functions in the Widget
directory of the distribution to the name of
that function, often in an abbreviated form.
complete
’ is the simplest, but other completers exist to perform
related tasks such as correction, or to modify the behaviour of a later
completer. See
Control Functions
for more information.
-
context-
, just at it appears
following the #compdef
tag or the compdef
function. Completion
functions for commands that have sub-commands usually modify this field
to contain the name of the command followed by a minus sign and the
sub-command. For example, the completion function for the cvs
command sets this field to cvs-add
when completing arguments to
the add
subcommand.
argument-
n, where n is the number of the argument,
and for arguments to options the form option-
opt-
n
where n is the number of the argument to option opt. However,
this is only the case if the command line is parsed with standard
UNIX-style options and arguments, so many completions do not set this.
The context is gradually put together as the functions are executed, starting
with the main entry point, which adds :completion:
and the function
element if necessary. The completer then adds the completer element.
The contextual completion adds the command and argument options.
Finally, the tag is added when the types of completion are known.
For example, the context name
:completion::complete:dvips:option-o-1:files
says that normal completion was attempted as the first argument to the
option -o
of the command dvips
:
dvips -o ...
and the completion function will generate filenames.
Usually completion will be tried for all possible tags in an order given
by the completion function. However, this can be altered by using the
tag-order
style. Completion is then restricted to the list of given
tags in the given order.
The _complete_help
bindable command shows all the contexts and tags
available for completion at a particular point. This provides an easy
way of finding information for tag-order
and other styles. It is
described in
Bindable Commands.
When looking up styles the completion system uses full context names, including the tag. Looking up the value of a style therefore consists of two things: the context, which is matched to the most specific (best fitting) pattern, and the name of the style itself, which must be matched exactly. The following examples demonstrate that patterns may be loosely defined for styles that apply broadly, or as tightly defined as desired for styles that apply in narrower circumstances.
For example, many completion functions can generate matches in a
simple and a verbose form and use the verbose
style to decide
which form should be used. To make all such functions use the verbose form,
put
zstyle ':completion:*' verbose yes
in a startup file (probably .zshrc
).
This gives the verbose
style the value yes
in every
context inside the completion system, unless that context has a more
specific definition. It is best to avoid giving the pattern as ‘*
’
in case the style has some meaning outside the completion system.
Many such general purpose styles can be configured simply by using the
compinstall
function.
A more specific example of the use of the verbose
style is by the
completion for the kill
builtin. If the style is set, the builtin
lists full job texts and process command lines; otherwise it shows the
bare job numbers and PIDs. To turn the style off for this use only:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:kill:*:*' verbose no
For even more control, the style can use one of the tags ‘jobs
’ or
‘processes
’. To turn off verbose display only for jobs:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:kill:*:jobs' verbose no
The -e
option to zstyle
even allows completion function code to
appear as the argument to a style; this requires some understanding of
the internals of completion functions (see
Completion Widgets)). For example,
zstyle -e ':completion:*' hosts 'reply=($myhosts)'
This forces the value of the hosts
style to be read from the
variable myhosts
each time a host name is needed; this is useful
if the value of myhosts
can change dynamically.
For another useful example, see the example in the description of the
file-list
style below. This form can be
slow and should be avoided for commonly examined styles such
as menu
and list-rows-first
.
Note that the order in which styles are defined does not matter; the
style mechanism uses the most specific possible match for a particular
style to determine the set of values. Strings are
preferred over patterns (for example, ‘:completion::complete:::foo
’ is
more specific than ‘:completion::complete:::*'
), and longer patterns are
preferred over the pattern ‘*
’. See
The zsh/zutil Module
for details.
Context patterns that use something other than a wildcard (*
) to match the
middle parts of the context — the completer, command, and
argument in
:completion:
function:
completer:
command:
argument:
tag
— should include all six colons (:
) explicitly. Without this,
a pattern such as :completion:*:foo:*
could match foo
against a
component other than the intended one (for example, against completer when
a match against command was intended).
Style names like those of tags are arbitrary and depend on the completion function. However, the following two sections list some of the most common tags and styles.
Some of the following are only used when looking up particular styles and do not refer to a type of match.
accounts
¶used to look up the users-hosts
style
all-expansions
¶used by the _expand
completer when adding the single string containing
all possible expansions
all-files
¶for the names of all files (as distinct from a particular subset, see the
globbed-files
tag).
arguments
¶for arguments to a command
arrays
¶for names of array parameters
association-keys
¶for keys of associative arrays; used when completing inside a subscript to a parameter of this type
bookmarks
¶when completing bookmarks (e.g. for URLs and the zftp
function suite)
builtins
¶for names of builtin commands
characters
¶for single characters in arguments of commands such as stty
. Also used
when completing character classes after an opening bracket
colormapids
¶for X colormap ids
colors
¶for color names
commands
¶for names of external commands. Also used by complex commands such as
cvs
when completing names subcommands.
contexts
¶for contexts in arguments to the zstyle
builtin command
corrections
¶used by the _approximate
and _correct
completers for possible
corrections
cursors
¶for cursor names used by X programs
default
¶used in some contexts to provide a way of supplying a default when more specific tags are also valid. Note that this tag is used when only the function field of the context name is set
descriptions
¶used when looking up the value of the format
style to generate
descriptions for types of matches
devices
¶for names of device special files
directories
¶for names of directories — local-directories
is used instead
when completing arguments of cd
and related builtin commands when
the cdpath
array is set
directory-stack
¶for entries in the directory stack
displays
¶for X display names
domains
¶for network domains
email-
plugin ¶for email addresses from the ‘_email-
plugin’ backend of _email_addresses
expansions
¶used by the _expand
completer for individual words (as opposed to
the complete set of expansions) resulting from the expansion of a word
on the command line
extensions
¶for X server extensions
file-descriptors
¶for numbers of open file descriptors
files
¶the generic file-matching tag used by functions completing filenames
fonts
¶for X font names
fstypes
¶for file system types (e.g. for the mount
command)
functions
¶names of functions — normally shell functions, although certain commands may understand other kinds of function
globbed-files
¶for filenames when the name has been generated by pattern matching
groups
¶for names of user groups
history-words
¶for words from the history
hosts
¶for hostnames
indexes
¶for array indexes
interfaces
¶for network interfaces
jobs
¶for jobs (as listed by the ‘jobs
’ builtin)
keymaps
¶for names of zsh keymaps
keysyms
¶for names of X keysyms
libraries
¶for names of system libraries
limits
¶for system limits
local-directories
¶for names of directories that are subdirectories of the current working
directory when completing arguments of cd
and related builtin
commands (compare path-directories
) — when the cdpath
array is unset, directories
is used instead
mailboxes
¶for e-mail folders
manuals
¶for names of manual pages
maps
¶for map names (e.g. NIS maps)
messages
¶used to look up the format
style for messages
modifiers
¶for names of X modifiers
modules
¶for modules (e.g. zsh
modules)
my-accounts
¶used to look up the users-hosts
style
named-directories
¶for named directories (you wouldn’t have guessed that, would you?)
names
¶for all kinds of names
newsgroups
¶for USENET groups
nicknames
¶for nicknames of NIS maps
options
¶for command options
original
¶used by the _approximate
, _correct
and _expand
completers when
offering the original string as a match
other-accounts
¶used to look up the users-hosts
style
packages
¶for packages (e.g. rpm
or installed Debian
packages)
parameters
¶for names of parameters
path-directories
¶for names of directories found by searching the cdpath
array when
completing arguments of cd
and related builtin commands (compare
local-directories
)
paths
¶used to look up the values of the expand
, ambiguous
and
special-dirs
styles
pods
¶for perl pods (documentation files)
ports
¶for communication ports
prefixes
¶for prefixes (like those of a URL)
printers
¶for print queue names
processes
¶for process identifiers
processes-names
¶used to look up the command
style when generating the names of
processes for killall
sequences
¶for sequences (e.g. mh
sequences)
sessions
¶for sessions in the zftp
function suite
signals
¶for signal names
strings
¶for strings (e.g. the replacement strings for the cd
builtin
command)
styles
¶for styles used by the zstyle builtin command
suffixes
¶for filename extensions
tags
¶for tags (e.g. rpm
tags)
targets
¶for makefile targets
time-zones
¶for time zones (e.g. when setting the TZ
parameter)
types
¶for types of whatever (e.g. address types for the xhost
command)
urls
¶used to look up the urls
and local
styles when completing URLs
users
¶for usernames
values
¶for one of a set of values in certain lists
variant
¶used by _pick_variant
to look up the command to run when determining
what program is installed for a particular command name.
visuals
¶for X visuals
warnings
¶used to look up the format
style for warnings
widgets
¶for zsh widget names
windows
¶for IDs of X windows
zsh-options
¶for shell options
Note that the values of several of these styles represent boolean
values. Any of the strings ‘true
’, ‘on
’,
‘yes
’, and ‘1
’ can be used for the value ‘true’ and
any of the strings ‘false
’, ‘off
’, ‘no
’, and ‘0
’ for
the value ‘false’. The behavior for any other value is undefined
except where explicitly mentioned. The default value may
be either ‘true’ or ‘false’ if the style is not set.
Some of these styles are tested first for every possible tag
corresponding to a type of match, and if no style was found, for the
default
tag. The most notable styles of this type are menu
,
list-colors
and styles controlling completion listing such as
list-packed
and last-prompt
. When tested for the default
tag, only the function field of the context will be set so that
a style using the default
tag will normally be defined along the lines of:
zstyle ':completion:*:default' menu ...
accept-exact
¶This is tested for the default
tag in addition to the tags valid for
the current context. If it is set to ‘true’ and any of the trial
matches is the same as the string on the command line, this match will
immediately be accepted (even if it would otherwise be considered
ambiguous).
When completing pathnames (where the tag used is ‘paths
’)
this style accepts any number of patterns as the value in addition to
the boolean values. Pathnames matching one of these
patterns will be accepted immediately even if the command line contains
some more partially typed pathname components and these match no file
under the directory accepted.
This style is also used by the _expand
completer to decide if
words beginning with a tilde or parameter expansion should be
expanded. For example, if there are parameters
foo
and foobar
, the string ‘$foo
’ will only be expanded if
accept-exact
is set to ‘true’; otherwise the completion system will
be allowed to complete $foo
to $foobar
. If the style is set to
‘continue
’, _expand
will add the expansion as a match and the completion
system will also be allowed to continue.
accept-exact-dirs
¶This is used by filename completion. Unlike accept-exact
it is
a boolean. By default, filename completion examines all components
of a path to see if there are completions of that component, even if
the component matches an existing directory. For example, when
completion after /usr/bin/
, the function examines possible
completions to /usr
.
When this style is ‘true’, any prefix of a path that matches an existing
directory is accepted without any attempt to complete it further.
Hence, in the given example, the path /usr/bin/
is accepted
immediately and completion tried in that directory.
This style is also useful when completing after directories that
magically appear when referenced, such as ZFS .zfs
directories
or NetApp .snapshot
directories. When the style is set the
shell does not check for the existence of the directory within the
parent directory.
If you wish to inhibit this behaviour entirely, set the path-completion
style (see below) to ‘false’.
add-space
¶This style is used by the _expand
completer. If it is ‘true’ (the
default), a space will be inserted after all words resulting from the
expansion, or a slash in the case of directory names. If the value
is ‘file
’, the completer will only add a space
to names of existing files. Either a boolean ‘true’ or the value
‘file
’ may be combined with ‘subst
’, in which case the completer
will not add a space to words generated from the expansion of a
substitution of the form ‘$(
...)
’ or ‘${
...}
’.
The _prefix
completer uses this style as a simple boolean value
to decide if a space should be inserted before the suffix.
ambiguous
¶This applies when completing non-final components of filename paths, in
other words those with a trailing slash. If it is set, the cursor is
left after the first ambiguous component, even if menu completion is in
use. The style is always tested with the paths
tag.
assign-list
¶When completing after an equals sign that is being treated as an
assignment, the completion system normally completes only one filename.
In some cases the value may be a list of filenames separated by colons,
as with PATH
and similar parameters. This style can be set to a
list of patterns matching the names of such parameters.
The default is to complete lists when the word on the line already contains a colon.
auto-description
¶If set, this style’s value will be used as the description for options that
are not described by the completion functions, but that have exactly
one argument. The sequence ‘%d
’ in the value will be replaced by
the description for this argument. Depending on personal preferences,
it may be useful to set this style to something like ‘specify: %d
’.
Note that this may not work for some commands.
avoid-completer
¶This is used by the _all_matches
completer to decide if the string
consisting of all matches should be added to the list currently being
generated. Its value is a list of names of completers. If any of
these is the name of the completer that generated the matches in this
completion, the string will not be added.
The default value for this style is ‘_expand _old_list _correct
_approximate
’, i.e. it contains the completers for which a string
with all matches will almost never be wanted.
cache-path
¶This style defines the path where any cache files containing dumped
completion data are stored. It defaults to ‘$ZDOTDIR/.zcompcache
’, or
‘$HOME/.zcompcache
’ if $ZDOTDIR
is not defined. The completion
cache will not be used unless the use-cache
style is set.
cache-policy
¶This style defines the function that will be used to determine whether
a cache needs rebuilding. See the section on the _cache_invalid
function below.
call-command
¶This style is used in the function for commands such as make
and
ant
where calling the command directly to generate matches suffers
problems such as being slow or, as in the case of make
can
potentially cause actions in the makefile to be executed. If it is set
to ‘true’ the command is called to generate matches. The default value
of this style is ‘false’.
command
¶In many places, completion functions need to call external commands to
generate the list of completions. This style can be used to override the
command that is called in some such cases. The elements of the value are
joined with spaces to form a command line to execute. The value can also
start with a hyphen, in which case the usual command will be added to the
end; this is most useful for putting ‘builtin
’ or ‘command
’ in
front to make sure the appropriate version of a command is called, for
example to avoid calling a shell function with the same name as an external
command.
As an example, the completion function for process IDs uses this
style with the processes
tag to generate the IDs to complete and
the list of processes to display (if the verbose
style is ‘true’).
The list produced by the command should look like the output of the
ps
command. The first line is not displayed, but is searched for
the string ‘PID
’ (or ‘pid
’) to find the position of the
process IDs in the following lines. If the line does not contain
‘PID
’, the first numbers in each of the other lines are taken as the
process IDs to complete.
Note that the completion function generally has to call the specified command for each attempt to generate the completion list. Hence care should be taken to specify only commands that take a short time to run, and in particular to avoid any that may never terminate.
command-path
¶This is a list of directories to search for commands to complete. The
default for this style is the value of the special parameter path
.
commands
¶This is used by the function completing sub-commands for the system
initialisation scripts (residing in /etc/init.d
or somewhere not
too far away from that). Its values give the default commands to
complete for those commands for which the completion function isn’t
able to find them out automatically. The default for this style are
the two strings ‘start
’ and ‘stop
’.
complete
¶This is used by the _expand_alias
function when invoked as a
bindable command. If set to ‘true’ and the word on the command
line is not the name of an alias, matching alias names will be
completed.
complete-options
¶This is used by the completer for cd
, chdir
and pushd
.
For these commands a -
is used to introduce a directory stack entry
and completion of these is far more common than completing options.
Hence unless the value of this style is ‘true’ options will not be
completed, even after an initial -
. If it is ‘true’, options will
be completed after an initial -
unless there is a preceding
-
-
on the command line.
completer
¶The strings given as the value of this style provide the names of the completer functions to use. The available completer functions are described in Control Functions.
Each string may be either the name of a completer function or a string
of the form ‘function:
name’. In the first case the
completer field of the context will contain the name of the
completer without the leading underscore and with all other
underscores replaced by hyphens. In the second case the
function is the name of the completer to call, but the context
will contain the user-defined name in the completer field of
the context. If the name starts with a hyphen, the string for the
context will be build from the name of the completer function as in
the first case with the name appended to it. For example:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer _complete _complete:-foo
Here, completion will call the _complete
completer twice, once
using ‘complete
’ and once using ‘complete-foo
’ in the
completer field of the context. Normally, using the same
completer more than once only makes sense when used with the
‘functions:
name’ form, because otherwise the context
name will be the same in all calls to the completer; possible
exceptions to this rule are the _ignored
and _prefix
completers.
The default value for this style is ‘_complete _ignored
’:
only completion will be done, first using the ignored-patterns
style
and the $fignore
array and then without ignoring matches.
condition
¶This style is used by the _list
completer function to decide if
insertion of matches should be delayed unconditionally. The default is
‘true’.
delimiters
¶This style is used when adding a delimiter for use with history
modifiers or glob qualifiers that have delimited arguments. It is
an array of preferred delimiters to add. Non-special characters are
preferred as the completion system may otherwise become confused.
The default list is :
, +
, /
, -
, %
. The list
may be empty to force a delimiter to be typed.
disabled
¶If this is set to ‘true’, the _expand_alias
completer and bindable
command will try to expand disabled aliases, too. The default is
‘false’.
domains
¶A list of names of network domains for completion.
If this is not set, domain names will be taken from
the file /etc/resolv.conf
.
environ
¶The environ style is used when completing for ‘sudo
’. It is set to an
array of ‘VAR=
value’ assignments to be exported into the
local environment before the completion for the target command is invoked.
zstyle ':completion:*:sudo::' environ \ PATH="/sbin:/usr/sbin:$PATH" HOME="/root"
expand
¶This style is used when completing strings consisting of multiple parts, such as path names.
If one of its values is the string ‘prefix
’, the partially typed
word from the line will be expanded as far as possible even if trailing
parts cannot be completed.
If one of its values is the string ‘suffix
’, matching names for
components after the first ambiguous one will also be added. This means
that the resulting string is the longest unambiguous string possible.
However, menu completion can be used to cycle through all matches.
extra-verbose
¶If set, the completion listing is more verbose at the cost of a probable decrease in completion speed. Completion performance will suffer if this style is set to ‘true’.
fake
¶This style may be set for any completion context. It
specifies additional strings that will always be completed in that
context. The form of each string is ‘value:
description’;
the colon and description may be omitted, but any literal colons in
value must be quoted with a backslash. Any description
provided is shown alongside the value in completion listings.
It is important to use a sufficiently restrictive context when specifying
fake strings. Note that the styles fake-files
and fake-parameters
provide additional features when completing files or parameters.
fake-always
¶This works identically to the fake
style except that
the ignored-patterns
style is not applied to it. This makes it
possible to override a set of matches completely by setting the
ignored patterns to ‘*
’.
The following shows a way of supplementing any tag with arbitrary data, but
having it behave for display purposes like a separate tag. In this example
we use the features of the tag-order
style to divide the
named-directories
tag into two when performing completion with
the standard completer complete
for arguments of cd
. The tag
named-directories-normal
behaves as normal, but the tag
named-directories-mine
contains a fixed set of directories.
This has the effect of adding the match group ‘extra directories
’ with
the given completions.
zstyle ':completion::complete:cd:*' tag-order \ 'named-directories:-mine:extra\ directories named-directories:-normal:named\ directories *' zstyle ':completion::complete:cd:*:named-directories-mine' \ fake-always mydir1 mydir2 zstyle ':completion::complete:cd:*:named-directories-mine' \ ignored-patterns '*'
fake-files
¶This style is used when completing files and looked up
without a tag. Its values are of the form
‘dir:
names...’. This will add the names (strings
separated by spaces) as
possible matches when completing in the directory dir, even if no
such files really exist. The dir may be a pattern; pattern characters
or colons in dir should be quoted with a backslash to be treated
literally.
This can be useful on systems that support special file systems whose
top-level pathnames can not be listed or generated with glob patterns
(but see accept-exact-dirs
for a more general way of dealing
with this problem). It can also be used for directories for which one
does not have read permission.
The pattern form can be used to add a certain ‘magic’ entry to all directories on a particular file system.
fake-parameters
¶This is used by the completion function for parameter names.
Its values are names of parameters that might not yet be
set but should be completed nonetheless. Each name may also be
followed by a colon and a string specifying the type of the parameter
(like ‘scalar
’, ‘array
’ or ‘integer
’). If the type is
given, the name will only be completed if parameters of that type are
required in the particular context. Names for which no type is
specified will always be completed.
file-list
¶This style controls whether files completed using the standard builtin
mechanism are to be listed with a long list similar to ls -l
.
Note that this feature uses the shell module
zsh/stat
for file information; this loads the builtin stat
which will replace any external stat
executable. To avoid
this the following code can be included in an initialization file:
zmodload -i zsh/stat disable stat
The style may either be set to a ‘true’ value (or ‘all
’), or
one of the values ‘insert
’ or ‘list
’, indicating that files
are to be listed in long format in all circumstances, or when
attempting to insert a file name, or when listing file names
without attempting to insert one.
More generally, the value may be an array of any of the above values,
optionally followed by =
num. If num is present it
gives the maximum number of matches for which long listing style
will be used. For example,
zstyle ':completion:*' file-list list=20 insert=10
specifies that long format will be used when listing up to 20 files or inserting a file with up to 10 matches (assuming a listing is to be shown at all, for example on an ambiguous completion), else short format will be used.
zstyle -e ':completion:*' file-list \ '(( ${+NUMERIC} )) && reply=(true)'
specifies that long format will be used any time a numeric argument is supplied, else short format.
file-patterns
¶This is used by the standard function for completing filenames,
_files
. If the style is unset up to three tags are offered,
‘globbed-files
’,‘directories
’ and ‘all-files
’, depending on
the types of files expected by the caller of _files
. The first two
(‘globbed-files
’ and ‘directories
’) are normally offered
together to make it easier to complete files in sub-directories.
The file-patterns
style provides alternatives to the default tags,
which are not used. Its value consists of elements of the form
‘pattern:
tag’; each string may contain any number of
such specifications separated by spaces.
The pattern is a pattern that is to be used to generate filenames.
Any occurrence of the sequence ‘%p
’ is replaced by any
pattern(s)
passed by the function calling _files
. Colons in the pattern must
be preceded by a backslash to make them distinguishable from the colon
before the tag. If more than one pattern is needed, the patterns
can be given inside braces, separated by commas.
The tags of all strings in the value will be offered by _files
and used when looking up other styles. Any tags in the same
word will be offered at the same time and before later words.
If no ‘:
tag’ is given the ‘files
’ tag will be used.
The tag may also be followed by an optional second colon and a
description, which will be used for the ‘%d
’ in the value of
the format
style (if that is set) instead of the default
description supplied by the completion function. The inclusion
of a description also gives precedence to associated options such as
for completion grouping so it can be used where files should be
separated.
For example, to make the rm
command first complete only names of
object files and then the names of all files if there is no matching
object file:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:rm:*:*' file-patterns \ '*.o:object-files' '%p:all-files'
To alter the default behaviour of file completion — offer files matching a pattern and directories on the first attempt, then all files — to offer only matching files on the first attempt, then directories, and finally all files:
zstyle ':completion:*' file-patterns \ '%p:globbed-files' '*(-/):directories' '*:all-files'
This works even where there is no special pattern: _files
matches
all files using the pattern ‘*
’ at the first step and stops when it
sees this pattern. Note also it will never try a pattern more than once
for a single completion attempt.
To separate directories into a separate group from the files but still
complete them at the first attempt, a description needs to be given.
Note that directories need to be explicitly excluded from the
globbed-files because ‘*
’ will match directories. For grouping, it
is also necessary to set the group-name
style.
zstyle ':completion:*' file-patterns \ '%p(^-/):globbed-files *(-/):directories:location'
During the execution of completion functions, the EXTENDED_GLOB
option is in effect, so the characters ‘#
’, ‘~
’ and ‘^
’ have
special meanings in the patterns.
file-sort
¶The standard filename completion function uses this style without a tag
to determine in which order the names should be listed; menu completion
will cycle through them in the same order. The possible
values are: ‘size
’ to sort by the size of the file;
‘links
’ to sort by the number of links to the file;
‘modification
’ (or ‘time
’ or ‘date
’) to sort by the last
modification time; ‘access
’ to sort by the last access time; and
‘inode
’ (or ‘change
’) to sort by the last inode change
time. If the style is set to any other value, or is unset, files will be
sorted alphabetically by name. If the value contains the string
‘reverse
’, sorting is done in the opposite order. If the value
contains the string ‘follow
’, timestamps are associated with the
targets of symbolic links; the default is to use the timestamps
of the links themselves.
file-split-chars
¶A set of characters that will cause all file completions for
the given context to be split at the point where any of the characters
occurs. A typical use is to set the style to :
; then everything
up to and including the last :
in the string so far is ignored when
completing files. As this is quite heavy-handed, it is usually
preferable to update completion functions for contexts where this
behaviour is useful.
filter
¶The ldap
plugin of email address completion (see _email_addresses
) uses
this style to specify
the attributes to match against when filtering entries. So for example, if
the style is set to ‘sn
’, matching is done against surnames. Standard
LDAP filtering is used so normal completion matching is bypassed. If this
style is not set, the LDAP plugin is skipped. You may also need to set the
command
style to specify how to connect to your LDAP server.
force-list
¶This forces a list of completions to be shown at any point where listing is
done, even in cases where the list would usually be suppressed.
For example, normally the list is only shown if
there are at least two different matches. By setting this style to
‘always
’, the list will always be shown, even if there is only a
single match that will immediately be accepted. The style may also
be set to a number. In this case the list will be shown if there are
at least that many matches, even if they would all insert the same
string.
This style is tested for the default tag as well as for each tag valid for the current completion. Hence the listing can be forced only for certain types of match.
format
¶If this is set for the descriptions
tag, its value is used as a
string to display above matches in completion lists. The sequence
‘%d
’ in this string will be replaced with a short description of
what these matches are. This string may also contain the output
attribute sequences understood by compadd -X
(see
Completion Widgets).
The style is tested with each tag valid for the current completion
before it is tested for the descriptions
tag. Hence different format
strings can be defined for different types of match.
Note also that some completer functions define additional
‘%
’-sequences. These are described for the completer functions that
make use of them.
Some completion functions display messages that may be customised by
setting this style for the messages
tag. Here, the ‘%d
’ is
replaced with a message given by the completion function.
Finally, the format string is looked up with the warnings
tag,
for use when no matches could be generated at all. In this case the
‘%d
’ is replaced with the descriptions for the matches that were
expected separated by spaces. The sequence ‘%D
’ is replaced with
the same descriptions separated by newlines.
It is possible to use printf-style field width specifiers with ‘%d
’
and similar escape sequences. This is handled by the zformat
builtin command from the zsh/zutil
module, see
The zsh/zutil Module.
gain-privileges
¶If set to true
, this style enables the use of commands like sudo
or doas
to gain extra privileges when retrieving information for
completion. This is only done when a command such as sudo
appears on
the command-line. To force the use of, e.g. sudo
or to override any
prefix that might be added due to gain-privileges
, the command
style can be used with a value that begins with a hyphen.
glob
¶This is used by the _expand
completer. If
it is set to ‘true’ (the default), globbing will be attempted on the
words resulting from a previous substitution (see the substitute
style) or else the original string from the line.
global
¶If this is set to ‘true’ (the default), the _expand_alias
completer and bindable command will try to expand global aliases.
group-name
¶The completion system can group different types of matches, which appear in separate lists. This style can be used to give the names of groups for particular tags. For example, in command position the completion system generates names of builtin and external commands, names of aliases, shell functions and parameters and reserved words as possible completions. To have the external commands and shell functions listed separately:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:-command-:*:commands' \ group-name commands zstyle ':completion:*:*:-command-:*:functions' \ group-name functions
As a consequence, any match with the same tag will be displayed in the same group.
If the name given is the empty string the name of the tag for the matches will be used as the name of the group. So, to have all different types of matches displayed separately, one can just set:
zstyle ':completion:*' group-name {No value for `dsq'}
All matches for which no group name is defined will be put in a group
named -default-
.
To display the group name in the output, see the format
style (q.v.)
under the descriptions
tag.
group-order
¶This style is additional to the group-name
style to specify the
order for display of the groups defined by that style (compare tag-order
,
which determines which completions appear at all). The groups named
are shown in the given order; any other groups
are shown in the order defined by the completion function.
For example, to have names of builtin commands, shell functions and external commands appear in that order when completing in command position:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:-command-:*:*' group-order \ builtins functions commands
groups
¶A list of names of UNIX groups. If this is not set,
group names are taken from the YP database or the file ‘/etc/group
’.
hidden
¶If this is set to ‘true’, matches for the given context
will not be listed, although
any description for the matches set with the format
style will be
shown. If it is set to ‘all
’, not even the description will be
displayed.
Note that the matches will still be completed; they are just not shown
in the list. To avoid having matches considered as possible
completions at all, the tag-order
style can be modified as described
below.
hosts
¶A list of names of hosts that should be completed. If this is not set,
hostnames are taken from the file ‘/etc/hosts
’.
hosts-ports
¶This style is used by commands that need or accept hostnames and
network ports. The strings in the value should be of the form
‘host:
port’. Valid ports are determined by the presence
of hostnames; multiple ports for the same host may appear.
ignore-line
¶This is tested for each tag valid for the current completion. If
it is set to ‘true’, none of the words that are already on the line
will be considered as possible completions. If it is set to
‘current
’, the word the cursor is on will not be considered as a
possible completion. The value ‘current-shown
’ is similar but only
applies if the list of completions is currently shown on the screen.
Finally, if the style is set to ‘other
’, all words on the line except
for the current one will be excluded from the possible completions.
The values ‘current
’ and ‘current-shown
’ are a bit like the
opposite of the accept-exact
style: only strings with
missing characters will be completed.
Note that you almost certainly don’t want to set this to ‘true’ or
‘other
’ for a general
context such as ‘:completion:*
’. This is because it would disallow
completion of, for example, options multiple times even if the command
in question accepts the option more than once.
ignore-parents
¶The style is tested without a tag by the function completing pathnames in order to determine whether to ignore the names of directories already mentioned in the current word, or the name of the current working directory. The value must include one or both of the following strings:
parent
The name of any directory whose path is already contained in the word on
the line is ignored. For example, when completing after foo/../
, the
directory foo
will not be considered a valid completion.
pwd
The name of the current working directory will not be completed; hence,
for example, completion after ../
will not use the name of the current
directory.
In addition, the value may include one or both of:
..
Ignore the specified directories only when the word on the line contains
the substring ‘../
’.
directory
Ignore the specified directories only when names of directories are completed, not when completing names of files.
Excluded values act in a similar fashion to values of the
ignored-patterns
style, so they can be restored to consideration by
the _ignored
completer.
ignored-patterns
¶A list of patterns; any trial completion matching one of the patterns
will be excluded from consideration. The
_ignored
completer can appear in the list of completers to
restore the ignored matches. This is a more configurable
version of the shell parameter $fignore
.
Note that the
EXTENDED_GLOB
option is set during the execution of completion
functions, so the characters ‘#
’, ‘~
’ and ‘^
’ have special
meanings in the patterns.
insert
¶This style is used by the _all_matches
completer to decide whether to
insert the list of all matches unconditionally instead of adding the
list as another match.
insert-ids
¶When completing process IDs, for example as arguments to the kill
and
wait
builtins the name of a
command may be converted to the appropriate process ID. A problem
arises when the process name typed is not unique. By default (or if this
style is set explicitly to ‘menu
’) the name will be converted
immediately to a set of possible IDs, and menu completion will be started
to cycle through them.
If the value of the style is ‘single
’,
the shell will wait until the user has typed enough to make the command
unique before converting the name to an ID; attempts at completion will
be unsuccessful until that point. If the value is any other
string, menu completion will be started when the string typed by the
user is longer than the common prefix to the corresponding IDs.
insert-sections
¶This style is used with tags of the form ‘manuals.
X’ when
completing names of manual pages. If set and the X in the tag name matches
the section number of the page being completed, the section number is inserted
along with the page name. For example, given
zstyle ':completion:*:manuals.*' insert-sections true
man ssh_<TAB>
may be completed to man 5 ssh_config
.
The value may also be set to one of ‘prepend
’, or ‘suffix
’.
‘prepend
’ behaves the same as ‘true’ as in the above example, while
‘suffix
’ would complete man ssh_<TAB>
as man ssh_config.5
.
This is especially useful in conjunction with separate-sections
, as
it ensures that the page requested of man
corresponds to the one
displayed in the completion listing when there are multiple pages with the
same name (e.g., printf(1)
and printf(3)
).
The default for this style is ‘false’.
insert-tab
¶If this is set to ‘true’, the completion system will insert a TAB character (assuming that was used to start completion) instead of performing completion when there is no non-blank character to the left of the cursor. If it is set to ‘false’, completion will be done even there.
The value may also contain the substrings ‘pending
’ or
‘pending=
val’. In this case, the typed character will be
inserted instead of starting completion when there is unprocessed input
pending. If a val is given, completion will not be done if there
are at least that many characters of unprocessed input. This is often
useful when pasting characters into a terminal. Note
however, that it relies on the $PENDING
special parameter from the
zsh/zle
module being set properly which is not guaranteed on all
platforms.
The default value of this style is ‘true’ except for completion within
vared
builtin command where it is ‘false’.
insert-unambiguous
¶This is used by the _match
and _approximate
completers.
These completers are often used with menu completion since the word typed
may bear little resemblance to the final completion.
However, if this style is ‘true’, the completer will start menu
completion only if it could find no unambiguous initial string at
least as long as the original string typed by the user.
In the case of the _approximate
completer, the completer
field in the context will already have been set to one of
correct-
num or approximate-
num, where num is the
number of errors that were accepted.
In the case of the _match
completer, the style may also be set to
the string ‘pattern
’. Then the pattern on the line is left
unchanged if it does not match unambiguously.
keep-prefix
¶This style is used by the _expand
completer. If it is ‘true’, the
completer will try to keep a prefix containing a tilde or parameter
expansion. Hence, for example, the string ‘~/f*
’ would be expanded to
‘~/foo
’ instead of ‘/home/user/foo
’. If the style is set to
‘changed
’ (the default), the prefix will only be left unchanged if
there were other changes between the expanded words and the original
word from the command line. Any other value forces the prefix to be
expanded unconditionally.
The behaviour of _expand
when this style is ‘true’ is to cause _expand
to give up when a single expansion with the restored prefix is the same
as the original; hence any remaining completers may be called.
known-hosts-files
¶This style should contain a list of files to search for host names and
(if the use-ip
style is set) IP addresses in a format compatible with
ssh known_hosts
files. If it is not set, the files
/etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
and ~/.ssh/known_hosts
are used.
last-prompt
¶This is a more flexible form of the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT
option.
If it is ‘true’, the completion system will try to return the cursor to
the previous command line after displaying a completion list. It is
tested for all tags valid for the current completion, then the
default
tag. The cursor will be moved back to the
previous line if this style is ‘true’ for all types of match. Note
that unlike the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT
option this is independent of the
numeric argument.
list
¶This style is used by the _history_complete_word
bindable command.
If it is set to ‘true’ it has no effect. If it is set to ‘false’
matches will not be listed. This overrides the setting of the options
controlling listing behaviour, in particular AUTO_LIST
. The context
always starts with ‘:completion:history-words
’.
list-colors
¶If the zsh/complist
module is loaded, this style can be used to set
color specifications. This mechanism replaces the use of the
ZLS_COLORS
and ZLS_COLOURS
parameters described in
The zsh/complist Module, but the syntax is the same.
If this style is set for the default
tag, the strings in the value
are taken as specifications that are to be used everywhere. If it is
set for other tags, the specifications are used only for matches of
the type described by the tag. For this to work best, the group-name
style must be set to an empty string.
In addition to setting styles for specific tags, it is also possible to
use group names specified explicitly by the group-name
tag together
with the ‘(group)
’ syntax allowed by the ZLS_COLORS
and
ZLS_COLOURS
parameters and simply using the default
tag.
It is possible to use any color specifications already set up for the GNU
version of the ls
command:
zstyle ':completion:*:default' list-colors \ ${(s.:.)LS_COLORS}
The default colors are the same as for the GNU ls
command and can be
obtained by setting the style to an empty string (i.e. {No value for `dsq'}
).
list-dirs-first
¶This is used by file completion and corresponds to a particular
setting of the file-patterns
style.
If set, the default directories to be completed
are listed separately from and before completion for other files.
list-grouped
¶If this style is ‘true’ (the default), the completion system will try to
make certain completion listings more compact by grouping matches.
For example, options for commands that have the same description (shown
when the verbose
style is set to ‘true’) will appear as a single
entry. However, menu selection can be used to cycle through all the
matches.
list-packed
¶This is tested for each tag valid in the current context as well as the
default
tag. If it is set to ‘true’, the corresponding matches
appear in listings as if the LIST_PACKED
option were set. If it is
set to ‘false’, they are listed normally.
list-prompt
¶If this style is set for the default
tag,
completion lists that don’t fit on the screen can be scrolled (see
The zsh/complist Module). The value, if not the empty string, will be displayed after every
screenful and the shell will prompt for a key press; if the style is
set to the empty string,
a default prompt will be used.
The value may contain the escape sequences:
‘%l
’ or ‘%L
’, which will be replaced by the number of the last line
displayed and the total number of lines; ‘%m
’ or ‘%M
’,
the number of the last match shown and the total number of
matches; and ‘%p
’ and ‘%P
’, ‘Top
’
when at the beginning of the list, ‘Bottom
’ when at the end and the
position shown as a percentage of the total length otherwise. In each
case the form with the uppercase letter will be replaced by a string of fixed
width, padded to the right with spaces, while the lowercase form will
be replaced by a variable width string. As in other prompt strings, the
escape sequences ‘%S
’, ‘%s
’, ‘%B
’, ‘%b
’, ‘%U
’,
‘%u
’ for entering and leaving the display modes
standout, bold and underline, and ‘%F
’, ‘%f
’, ‘%K
’, ‘%k
’ for
changing the foreground background colour, are also available, as is the form
‘%{
...%}
’ for enclosing escape sequences which display with zero
(or, with a numeric argument, some other) width.
After deleting this prompt the variable LISTPROMPT
should be unset for
the removal to take effect.
list-rows-first
¶This style is tested in the same way as the list-packed
style and
determines whether matches are to be listed in a rows-first fashion as
if the LIST_ROWS_FIRST
option were set.
list-separator
¶The value of this style is used in completion listing to separate the
string to complete from a description when possible (e.g. when
completing options). It defaults to ‘-
-
’ (two hyphens).
list-suffixes
¶This style is used by the function that completes filenames. If it is ‘true’, and completion is attempted on a string containing multiple partially typed pathname components, all ambiguous components will be shown. Otherwise, completion stops at the first ambiguous component.
local
¶This is for use with functions that complete URLs for which the corresponding files are available directly from the file system. Its value should consist of three strings: a hostname, the path to the default web pages for the server, and the directory name used by a user placing web pages within their home area.
For example:
zstyle ':completion:*' local toast \ /var/http/public/toast public_html
Completion after ‘http://toast/stuff/
’ will look for files in the
directory /var/http/public/toast/stuff
, while completion after
‘http://toast/~yousir/
’ will look for files in the directory
~yousir/public_html
.
mail-directory
¶If set, zsh will assume that mailbox files can be found in
the directory specified. It defaults to ‘~/Mail
’.
match-original
¶This is used by the _match
completer. If it is set to
only
, _match
will try to generate matches without inserting a
‘*
’ at the cursor position. If set to any other non-empty value,
it will first try to generate matches without inserting the ‘*
’
and if that yields no matches, it will try again with the ‘*
’
inserted. If it is unset or set to the empty string, matching will
only be performed with the ‘*
’ inserted.
matcher
¶This style is tested separately for each tag valid in the current
context. Its value is placed before any match specifications given by the
matcher-list
style so can override them via the use of an x:
specification. The value should be in the form described in
Completion Matching Control. For examples of this, see the description of the tag-order
style.
For notes comparing the use of this and the matcher-list
style, see
under the description of the tag-order
style.
matcher-list
¶This style can be set to a list of match specifications that are to be applied everywhere. Match specifications are described in Completion Matching Control. The completion system will try them one after another for each completer selected. For example, to try first simple completion and, if that generates no matches, case-insensitive completion:
zstyle ':completion:*' matcher-list {No value for `dsq'} 'm:{a-zA-Z}={A-Za-z}'
By default each specification replaces the previous one; however, if a
specification is prefixed with +
, it is added to the existing list.
Hence it is possible to create increasingly general specifications
without repetition:
zstyle ':completion:*' matcher-list \ {No value for `dsq'} '+m:{a-z}={A-Z}' '+m:{A-Z}={a-z}'
It is possible to create match specifications valid for particular
completers by using the third field of the context. This applies only
to completers that override the global matcher-list, which as of this
writing includes only _prefix
and _ignored
. For example, to
use the completers _complete
and _prefix
but allow
case-insensitive completion only with _complete
:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer _complete _prefix zstyle ':completion:*:complete:*:*:*' matcher-list \ {No value for `dsq'} 'm:{a-zA-Z}={A-Za-z}'
User-defined names, as explained for the completer
style, are
available. This makes it possible to try the same completer more than
once with different match specifications each time. For example, to try
normal completion without a match specification, then normal completion
with case-insensitive matching, then correction, and finally
partial-word completion:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer \ _complete _correct _complete:foo zstyle ':completion:*:complete:*:*:*' matcher-list \ {No value for `dsq'} 'm:{a-zA-Z}={A-Za-z}' zstyle ':completion:*:foo:*:*:*' matcher-list \ 'm:{a-zA-Z}={A-Za-z} r:|[-_./]=* r:|=*'
If the style is unset in any context no match specification is applied.
Note also that some completers such as _correct
and _approximate
do not use the match specifications at all, though these completers will
only ever be called once even if the matcher-list
contains more than
one element.
Where multiple specifications are useful, note that the entire
completion is done for each element of matcher-list
, which can
quickly reduce the shell’s performance. As a rough rule of thumb,
one to three strings will give acceptable performance. On the other
hand, putting multiple space-separated values into the same string does
not have an appreciable impact on performance.
If there is no current matcher or it is empty, and the option
NO_CASE_GLOB
is in effect, the matching for files is performed
case-insensitively in any case. However, any matcher must
explicitly specify case-insensitive matching if that is required.
For notes comparing the use of this and the matcher
style, see
under the description of the tag-order
style.
max-errors
¶This is used by the _approximate
and _correct
completer functions
to determine the maximum number of errors to allow. The completer will try
to generate completions by first allowing one error, then two errors, and
so on, until either a match or matches were found or the maximum number of
errors given by this style has been reached.
If the value for this style contains the string ‘numeric
’, the
completer function will take any numeric argument as the
maximum number of errors allowed. For example, with
zstyle ':completion:*:approximate:::' max-errors 2 numeric
two errors are allowed if no numeric argument is given, but with
a numeric argument of six (as in ‘ESC-6 TAB
’), up to six
errors are accepted. Hence with a value of ‘0 numeric
’, no correcting
completion will be attempted unless a numeric argument is given.
If the value contains the string ‘not-numeric
’, the completer
will not try to generate corrected
completions when given a numeric argument, so in this case the number given
should be greater than zero. For example, ‘2 not-numeric
’ specifies that
correcting completion with two errors will usually be performed, but if a
numeric argument is given, correcting completion will not be
performed.
The default value for this style is ‘2 numeric
’.
max-matches-width
¶This style is used to determine the trade off between the width of the
display used for matches and the width used for their descriptions when
the verbose
style is in effect. The value gives the number of
display columns to reserve for the matches. The default is half the
width of the screen.
This has the most impact when several matches have the same description and so will be grouped together. Increasing the style will allow more matches to be grouped together; decreasing it will allow more of the description to be visible.
menu
¶If this is ‘true’ in the context of any of the tags defined
for the current completion menu completion will be used. The value for
a specific tag will take precedence over that for the ‘default
’ tag.
If none of the values found in this way is ‘true’ but at least
one is set to ‘auto
’, the shell behaves as if the AUTO_MENU
option is set.
If one of the values is explicitly set to ‘false’, menu
completion will be explicitly turned off, overriding the
MENU_COMPLETE
option and other settings.
In the form ‘yes=
num’, where ‘yes
’ may be any of the
‘true’ values (‘yes
’, ‘true
’, ‘on
’ and ‘1
’),
menu completion will be turned on if there are at least num matches.
In the form ‘yes=long
’, menu completion will be turned on
if the list does not fit on the screen. This does not activate menu
completion if the widget normally only lists completions, but menu
completion can be activated in that case with the value ‘yes=long-list
’
(Typically, the value ‘select=long-list
’ described later is more
useful as it provides control over scrolling.)
Similarly, with any of the ‘false’ values (as in ‘no=10
’), menu
completion will not be used if there are num or more matches.
The value of this widget also controls menu selection, as implemented by
the zsh/complist
module. The following values may appear either
alongside or instead of the values above.
If the value contains the string ‘select
’, menu selection
will be started unconditionally.
In the form ‘select=
num’, menu selection will only be started if
there are at least num matches. If the values for more than one
tag provide a number, the smallest number is taken.
Menu selection can be turned off explicitly by defining a value
containing the string‘no-select
’.
It is also possible to start menu selection only if the list of
matches does not fit on the screen by using the value
‘select=long
’. To start menu selection even if the current widget
only performs listing, use the value ‘select=long-list
’.
To turn on menu completion or menu selection when there are a certain
number of matches or the list of matches does not fit on the
screen, both of ‘yes=
’ and ‘select=
’ may be given twice, once
with a number and once with ‘long
’ or ‘long-list
’.
Finally, it is possible to activate two special modes of menu selection.
The word ‘interactive
’ in the value causes interactive mode
to be entered immediately when menu selection is started; see
The zsh/complist Module
for a description of interactive mode. Including the string
‘search
’ does the same for incremental search mode. To select backward
incremental search, include the string ‘search-backward
’.
muttrc
¶If set, gives the location of the mutt configuration file. It defaults
to ‘~/.muttrc
’.
numbers
¶This is used with the jobs
tag. If it is ‘true’, the shell will
complete job numbers instead of the shortest unambiguous prefix
of the job command text. If the value is a number, job numbers will
only be used if that many words from the job descriptions are required to
resolve ambiguities. For example, if the value is ‘1
’, strings will
only be used if all jobs differ in the first word on their command lines.
old-list
¶This is used by the _oldlist
completer. If it is set to ‘always
’,
then standard widgets which perform listing will retain the current list of
matches, however they were generated; this can be turned off explicitly
with the value ‘never
’, giving the behaviour without the _oldlist
completer. If the style is unset, or any other value, then the existing
list of completions is displayed if it is not already; otherwise, the
standard completion list is generated; this is the default behaviour of
_oldlist
. However, if there is an old list and this style contains
the name of the completer function that generated the list, then the
old list will be used even if it was generated by a widget which does
not do listing.
For example, suppose you type ^Xc
to use the _correct_word
widget, which generates a list of corrections for the word under the
cursor. Usually, typing ^D
would generate a standard list of
completions for the word on the command line, and show that. With
_oldlist
, it will instead show the list of corrections already
generated.
As another example consider the _match
completer: with the
insert-unambiguous
style set to ‘true’ it inserts only a common prefix
string, if there is any. However, this may remove parts of the original
pattern, so that further completion could produce more matches than on the
first attempt. By using the _oldlist
completer and setting this style
to _match
, the list of matches generated on the first attempt will be
used again.
old-matches
¶This is used by the _all_matches
completer to decide if an old
list of matches should be used if one exists. This is selected by one of
the ‘true’ values or by the string ‘only
’. If
the value is ‘only
’, _all_matches
will only use an old list
and won’t have any effect on the list of matches currently being
generated.
If this style is set it is generally unwise to call the _all_matches
completer unconditionally. One possible use is for either this style or
the completer
style to be defined with the -e
option to
zstyle
to make the style conditional.
old-menu
¶This is used by the _oldlist
completer. It controls how menu
completion behaves when a completion has already been inserted and the
user types a standard completion key such as TAB
. The default
behaviour of _oldlist
is that menu completion always continues
with the existing list of completions. If this style is set to
‘false’, however, a new completion is started if the old list was
generated by a different completion command; this is the behaviour without
the _oldlist
completer.
For example, suppose you type ^Xc
to generate a list of corrections,
and menu completion is started in one of the usual ways. Usually, or with
this style set to ‘false’, typing TAB
at this point would start
trying to complete the line as it now appears. With _oldlist
, it
instead continues to cycle through the list of corrections.
original
¶This is used by the _approximate
and _correct
completers to decide if the original string should be added as
a possible completion. Normally, this is done only if there are
at least two possible corrections, but if this style is set to ‘true’, it
is always added. Note that the style will be examined with the
completer field in the context name set to correct-
num or
approximate-
num, where num is the number of errors that
were accepted.
packageset
¶This style is used when completing arguments of the Debian ‘dpkg
’
program. It contains an override for the default package set
for a given context. For example,
zstyle ':completion:*:complete:dpkg:option--status-1:*' \ packageset avail
causes available packages, rather than only installed packages,
to be completed for ‘dpkg -
-status
’.
path
¶The function that completes color names uses this style with the
colors
tag. The value should be the pathname of a file
containing color names in the format of an X11 rgb.txt
file. If
the style is not set but this file is found in one of various standard
locations it will be used as the default.
path-completion
¶This is used by filename completion. By default, filename completion
examines all components of a path to see if there are completions of
that component. For example, /u/b/z
can be completed to
/usr/bin/zsh
. Explicitly setting this style to ‘false’ inhibits this
behaviour for path components up to the /
before the cursor; this
overrides the setting of accept-exact-dirs
.
Even with the style set to ‘false’, it is still possible to complete
multiple paths by setting the option COMPLETE_IN_WORD
and moving the
cursor back to the first component in the path to be completed. For
example, /u/b/z
can be completed to /usr/bin/zsh
if the cursor is
after the /u
.
pine-directory
¶If set, specifies the directory containing PINE mailbox files. There is no default, since recursively searching this directory is inconvenient for anyone who doesn’t use PINE.
ports
¶A list of Internet service names (network ports) to complete. If this is
not set, service names are taken from the file ‘/etc/services
’.
prefix-hidden
¶This is used for certain completions which share a common prefix, for example command options beginning with dashes. If it is ‘true’, the prefix will not be shown in the list of matches.
The default value for this style is ‘false’.
prefix-needed
¶This style is also relevant for matches with a common prefix. If it is set to ‘true’ this common prefix must be typed by the user to generate the matches.
The style is applicable to the options
, signals
, jobs
,
functions
, and parameters
completion tags.
For command options, this means that the initial ‘-
’, ‘+
’, or
‘-
-
’ must be typed explicitly before option names will be
completed.
For signals, an initial ‘-
’ is required before signal names will
be completed.
For jobs, an initial ‘%
’ is required before job names will be
completed.
For function and parameter names, an initial ‘_
’ or ‘.
’ is
required before function or parameter names starting with those
characters will be completed.
The default value for this style is ‘false’ for function
and
parameter
completions, and ‘true’ otherwise.
preserve-prefix
¶This style is used when completing path names. Its value should be a
pattern matching an initial prefix of the word to complete that should
be left unchanged under all circumstances. For example, on some Unices
an initial ‘//
’ (double slash) has a special meaning; setting
this style to the string ‘//
’ will preserve it. As another example,
setting this style to ‘?:/
’ under Cygwin would allow completion
after ‘a:/...
’ and so on.
range
¶This is used by the _history
completer and the
_history_complete_word
bindable command to decide which words
should be completed.
If it is a single number, only the last N words from the history will be completed.
If it is a range of the form ‘max:
slice’,
the last slice words will be completed; then if that
yields no matches, the slice words before those will be tried and
so on. This process stops either when at least one match has been
found, or max words have been tried.
The default is to complete all words from the history at once.
recursive-files
¶If this style is set, its value is an array of patterns to be
tested against ‘$PWD/
’: note the trailing slash, which allows
directories in the pattern to be delimited unambiguously by including
slashes on both sides. If an ordinary file completion fails
and the word on the command line does not yet have a directory part to its
name, the style is retrieved using the same tag as for the completion
just attempted, then the elements tested against $PWD/
in turn.
If one matches, then the shell reattempts completion by prepending the word
on the command line with each directory in the expansion of **/*(/)
in turn. Typically the elements of the style will be set to restrict
the number of directories beneath the current one to a manageable
number, for example ‘*/.git/*
’.
For example,
zstyle ':completion:*' recursive-files '*/zsh/*'
If the current directory is /home/pws/zsh/Src
, then
zle_tr<TAB>
can be completed to Zle/zle_tricky.c
.
regular
¶This style is used by the _expand_alias
completer and bindable
command. If set to ‘true’ (the default), regular aliases will be
expanded but only in command position. If it is set to ‘false’,
regular aliases will never be expanded. If it is set to ‘always
’,
regular aliases will be expanded even if not in command position.
rehash
¶If this is set when completing external commands, the internal
list (hash) of commands will be updated for each search by issuing
the rehash
command. There is a speed penalty for this which
is only likely to be noticeable when directories in the path have
slow file access.
remote-access
¶If set to ‘false’, certain commands will be prevented from making
Internet connections to retrieve remote information. This includes the
completion for the CVS
command.
It is not always possible to know if connections are in fact to a remote site, so some may be prevented unnecessarily.
remove-all-dups
¶The _history_complete_word
bindable command and the _history
completer use this to decide if all duplicate matches should be
removed, rather than just consecutive duplicates.
select-prompt
¶If this is set for the default
tag, its
value will be displayed during menu selection (see the menu
style
above) when the completion list does not fit on the screen as a
whole. The same escapes as for the list-prompt
style are
understood, except that the numbers refer to the match or line the mark is
on. A default prompt is used when the value is the empty string.
select-scroll
¶This style is tested for the default
tag and determines how a
completion list is scrolled during a menu selection (see the menu
style above) when the completion list does not fit on the screen as a
whole. If the value is ‘0
’ (zero), the list is scrolled by
half-screenfuls; if it is a positive integer, the list is scrolled by the
given number of lines; if it is a negative number, the list is scrolled by a
screenful minus the absolute value of the given number of lines.
The default is to scroll by single lines.
separate-sections
¶This style is used with the manuals
tag when completing names of
manual pages. If it is ‘true’, entries for different sections are
added separately using tag names of the form ‘manuals.
X’,
where X is the section number. When the group-name
style is
also in effect, pages from different sections will appear separately.
This style is also used similarly with the words
style when
completing words for the dict command. It allows words from different
dictionary databases to be added separately. See also insert-sections
.
The default for this style is ‘false’.
show-ambiguity
¶If the zsh/complist
module is loaded, this style can be used to
highlight the first ambiguous character in completion lists. The
value is either a color indication such as those supported by the
list-colors
style or, with a value of ‘true’, a default of
underlining is selected. The highlighting is only applied if the
completion display strings correspond to the actual matches.
show-completer
¶Tested whenever a new completer is tried. If it is ‘true’, the completion system outputs a progress message in the listing area showing what completer is being tried. The message will be overwritten by any output when completions are found and is removed after completion is finished.
single-ignored
¶This is used by the _ignored
completer when there is only one match.
If its value is ‘show
’, the single match will be
displayed but not inserted. If the value is ‘menu
’, then the single
match and the original string are both added as matches and menu completion
is started, making it easy to select either of them.
sort
¶This allows the standard ordering of matches to be overridden.
If its value is ‘true
’ or ‘false
’, sorting is enabled or disabled.
Additionally the values associated with the ‘-o
’ option to compadd
can
also be listed: match
, nosort
, numeric
, reverse
. If it is not
set for the context, the standard behaviour of the calling widget is used.
The style is tested first against the full context including the tag, and if that fails to produce a value against the context without the tag.
In many cases where a calling widget explicitly selects a particular ordering
in lieu of the default, a value of ‘true
’ is not honoured. An example of
where this is not the case is for command history where the default of sorting
matches chronologically may be overridden by setting the style to ‘true’.
In the _expand
completer, if it is set to
‘true’, the expansions generated will always be sorted. If it is set
to ‘menu
’, then the expansions are only sorted when they are offered
as single strings but not in the string containing all possible
expansions.
special-dirs
¶Normally, the completion code will not produce the directory names
‘.
’ and ‘..
’ as possible completions. If this style is set to
‘true’, it will add both ‘.
’ and ‘..
’ as possible completions;
if it is set to ‘..
’, only ‘..
’ will be added.
The following example sets special-dirs
to ‘..
’ when the
current prefix is empty, is a single ‘.
’, or consists only of a path
beginning with ‘../
’. Otherwise the value is ‘false’.
zstyle -e ':completion:*' special-dirs \ '[[ $PREFIX = (../)#(|.|..) ]] && reply=(..)'
squeeze-slashes
¶If set to ‘true’, sequences of slashes in filename paths (for example in
‘foo//bar
’) will be treated as a single slash. This is the usual
behaviour of UNIX paths. However, by default the file completion
function behaves as if there were a ‘*
’ between the slashes.
stop
¶If set to ‘true’, the _history_complete_word
bindable
command will stop once when reaching the beginning or end of the
history. Invoking _history_complete_word
will then wrap around to
the opposite end of the history. If this style is set to ‘false’ (the
default), _history_complete_word
will loop immediately as in a
menu completion.
strip-comments
¶If set to ‘true’, this style causes non-essential comment text to be removed from completion matches. Currently it is only used when completing e-mail addresses where it removes any display name from the addresses, cutting them down to plain user@host form.
subst-globs-only
¶This is used by the _expand
completer. If it is set to ‘true’,
the expansion will only be used if it resulted from globbing; hence,
if expansions resulted from the use of the substitute
style
described below, but these were not further changed by globbing, the
expansions will be rejected.
The default for this style is ‘false’.
substitute
¶This boolean style controls whether the _expand
completer will
first try to expand all substitutions in the string (such as
‘$(
...)
’ and ‘${
...}
’).
The default is ‘true’.
suffix
¶This is used by the _expand
completer if the word starts with a
tilde or contains a parameter expansion. If it is set to ‘true’, the
word will only be expanded if it doesn’t have a suffix, i.e. if it is
something like ‘~foo
’ or ‘$foo
’ rather than ‘~foo/
’ or
‘$foo/bar
’, unless that suffix itself contains characters eligible
for expansion. The default for this style is ‘true’.
tag-order
¶This provides a mechanism for sorting how the tags available in a particular context will be used.
The values for the style are sets of space-separated lists of tags.
The tags in each value will be tried at the same time; if no match is
found, the next value is used. (See the file-patterns
style for
an exception to this behavior.)
For example:
zstyle ':completion:*:complete:-command-:*:*' tag-order \ 'commands functions'
specifies that completion in command position first offers external commands and shell functions. Remaining tags will be tried if no completions are found.
In addition to tag names, each string in the value may take one of the following forms:
-
If any value consists of only a hyphen, then only the tags specified in the other values are generated. Normally all tags not explicitly selected are tried last if the specified tags fail to generate any matches. This means that a single value consisting only of a single hyphen turns off completion.
!
tags...A string starting with an exclamation mark specifies names of tags that are not to be used. The effect is the same as if all other possible tags for the context had been listed.
:
label ...Here, tag is one of the standard tags and label is an
arbitrary name. Matches are generated as normal but the name label
is used in contexts instead of tag. This is not useful in words
starting with !
.
If the label starts with a hyphen, the tag is prepended to the label to form the name used for lookup. This can be used to make the completion system try a certain tag more than once, supplying different style settings for each attempt; see below for an example.
:
label:
descriptionAs before, but description
will replace the ‘%d
’ in
the value of the format
style instead of the default description
supplied by the completion function. Spaces in the description must
be quoted with a backslash. A ‘%d
’ appearing
in description is replaced with the description given by the
completion function.
In any of the forms above the tag may be a pattern or several
patterns in the form ‘{
pat1,
pat2...}
’. In this
case all matching tags will be used except
for any given explicitly in the same string.
One use of these features is to try one tag more than once, setting other styles differently on each attempt, but still to use all the other tags without having to repeat them all. For example, to make completion of function names in command position ignore all the completion functions starting with an underscore the first time completion is tried:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:-command-:*:*' tag-order \ 'functions:-non-comp *' functions zstyle ':completion:*:functions-non-comp' \ ignored-patterns '_*'
On the first attempt, all tags will be offered but the functions
tag
will be replaced by functions-non-comp
. The ignored-patterns
style
is set for this tag to exclude functions starting with an underscore.
If there are no matches, the second value of the
tag-order
style is used which completes functions using the default
tag, this time presumably including all function names.
The matches for one tag can be split into different groups. For example:
zstyle ':completion:*' tag-order \ 'options:-long:long\ options options:-short:short\ options options:-single-letter:single\ letter\ options' zstyle ':completion:*:options-long' \ ignored-patterns '[-+](|-|[^-]*)' zstyle ':completion:*:options-short' \ ignored-patterns '--*' '[-+]?' zstyle ':completion:*:options-single-letter' \ ignored-patterns '???*'
With the group-names
style set, options beginning with
‘-
-
’, options beginning with a single ‘-
’ or ‘+
’ but
containing multiple characters, and single-letter options will be
displayed in separate groups with different descriptions.
Another use of patterns is to
try multiple match specifications one after another. The
matcher-list
style offers something similar, but it is tested very
early in the completion system and hence can’t be set for single
commands nor for more specific contexts. Here is how to
try normal completion without any match specification and, if that
generates no matches, try again with case-insensitive matching, restricting
the effect to arguments of the command foo
:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:foo:*:*' tag-order '*' '*:-case' zstyle ':completion:*-case' matcher 'm:{a-z}={A-Z}'
First, all the tags offered when completing after foo
are tried using
the normal tag name. If that generates no matches, the second value of
tag-order
is used, which tries all tags again except that this time
each has -case
appended to its name for lookup of styles. Hence this
time the value for the matcher
style from the second call to zstyle
in the example is used to make completion case-insensitive.
It is possible to use the -e
option of the zstyle
builtin
command to specify conditions for the use of particular tags. For
example:
zstyle -e '*:-command-:*' tag-order ' if [[ -n $PREFIX$SUFFIX ]]; then reply=( ) else reply=( - ) fi'
Completion in command position will be attempted only if the string
typed so far is not empty. This is tested using the PREFIX
special parameter; see
Completion Widgets
for a description of parameters which are special inside completion widgets.
Setting reply
to an empty array provides the default
behaviour of trying all tags at once; setting it to an
array containing only a hyphen disables the use of all tags and hence of
all completions.
If no tag-order
style has been defined for a context, the strings
‘(|*-)argument-* (|*-)option-* values
’ and ‘options
’ plus all
tags offered by the completion function will be used to provide a
sensible default behavior that causes arguments (whether normal command
arguments or arguments of options) to be completed before option names for
most commands.
urls
¶This is used together with the urls
tag by
functions completing URLs.
If the value consists of more than one string, or if the only string does not name a file or directory, the strings are used as the URLs to complete.
If the value contains only one string which is the name of a normal file the URLs are taken from that file (where the URLs may be separated by white space or newlines).
Finally, if the only string in the value names a directory, the
directory hierarchy rooted at this directory gives the completions. The
top level directory should be the file access method, such as
‘http
’, ‘ftp
’, ‘bookmark
’ and so on. In many cases the next
level of directories will be a filename. The directory hierarchy can
descend as deep as necessary.
For example,
zstyle ':completion:*' urls ~/.urls mkdir -p ~/.urls/ftp/ftp.zsh.org/pub
allows completion of all the components of the URL
ftp://ftp.zsh.org/pub
after suitable commands such as
‘netscape
’ or ‘lynx
’. Note, however, that access methods and
files are completed separately, so if the hosts
style is set hosts
can be completed without reference to the urls
style.
See the description in the function _urls
itself
for more information (e.g. ‘more $^fpath/_urls(N)
’).
use-cache
¶If this is set, the completion caching layer is activated for any completions
which use it (via the _store_cache
, _retrieve_cache
, and
_cache_invalid
functions). The directory containing the cache
files can be changed with the cache-path
style.
use-compctl
¶If this style is set to a string not equal to false
, 0
,
no
, and off
, the completion system may use any completion
specifications defined with the compctl
builtin command. If the
style is unset, this is done only if the zsh/compctl
module
is loaded. The string may also contain the substring ‘first
’ to
use completions defined with ‘compctl -T
’, and the substring
‘default
’ to use the completion defined with ‘compctl -D
’.
Note that this is only intended to smooth the transition from
compctl
to the new completion system and may disappear in the
future.
Note also that the definitions from compctl
will only be used if
there is no specific completion function for the command in question. For
example, if there is a function _foo
to complete arguments to the
command foo
, compctl
will never be invoked for foo
.
However, the compctl
version will be tried if foo
only uses
default completion.
use-ip
¶By default, the function _hosts
that completes host names strips
IP addresses from entries read from host databases such as NIS and
ssh files. If this style is ‘true’, the corresponding IP addresses
can be completed as well. This style is not use in any context
where the hosts
style is set; note also it must be set before
the cache of host names is generated (typically the first completion
attempt).
users
¶This may be set to a list of usernames to be completed. If it is not set all usernames will be completed. Note that if it is set only that list of users will be completed; this is because on some systems querying all users can take a prohibitive amount of time.
users-hosts
¶The values of this style should be of the form
‘user@
host’ or ‘user:
host’. It is used for
commands that need pairs of
user- and hostnames. These commands will complete usernames from this
style (only), and will restrict subsequent hostname completion to hosts
paired with that user in one of the values of the style.
It is possible to group values for sets of commands which allow a remote
login, such as rlogin
and ssh
, by using the my-accounts
tag.
Similarly, values for sets of commands which usually refer to the
accounts of other people, such as talk
and finger
, can be
grouped by using the other-accounts
tag. More ambivalent commands
may use the accounts
tag.
users-hosts-ports
¶Like users-hosts
but used for commands like telnet
and
containing strings of the form ‘user@
host:
port’.
verbose
¶If set, as it is by default, the completion listing is more verbose. In particular many commands show descriptions for options if this style is ‘true’.
word
¶This is used by the _list
completer, which prevents the insertion of
completions until a second completion attempt when the line has not
changed. The normal way of finding out if the line has changed is to
compare its entire contents between the two occasions. If this style is
‘true’, the comparison is instead performed only on the current word.
Hence if completion is performed on another word with the same contents,
completion will not be delayed.
The initialization script compinit
redefines all the widgets
which perform completion to call the supplied widget function
_main_complete
. This function acts as a wrapper calling the
so-called ‘completer’ functions that generate matches. If
_main_complete
is called with arguments, these are taken as the
names of completer functions to be called in the order given. If no
arguments are given, the set of functions to try is taken from the
completer
style. For example, to use normal completion and
correction if that doesn’t generate any matches:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer _complete _correct
after calling compinit
. The default value for this style is
‘_complete _ignored
’, i.e. normally only ordinary completion is tried,
first with the effect of the ignored-patterns
style and then without
it. The _main_complete
function uses the return status of the completer
functions to decide if other completers should be called. If the return
status is zero, no other completers are tried and the _main_complete
function returns.
If the first argument to _main_complete
is a single hyphen, the
arguments will not be taken as names of completers. Instead, the
second argument gives a name to use in the completer field of the
context and the other arguments give a command name and arguments to
call to generate the matches.
The following completer functions are contained in the distribution,
although users may write their own. Note that in contexts the leading
underscore is stripped, for example basic completion is performed in the
context ‘:completion::complete:
...’.
_all_matches
¶This completer can be used to add a string consisting of all other
matches. As it influences later completers it must appear as the first
completer in the list. The list of all matches is affected by the
avoid-completer
and old-matches
styles described above.
It may be useful to use the _generic
function described below
to bind _all_matches
to its own keystroke, for example:
zle -C all-matches complete-word _generic bindkey '^Xa' all-matches zstyle ':completion:all-matches:*' old-matches only zstyle ':completion:all-matches::::' completer _all_matches
Note that this does not generate completions by itself: first use
any of the standard ways of generating a list of completions,
then use ^Xa
to show all matches. It is possible instead to
add a standard completer to the list and request that the
list of all matches should be directly inserted:
zstyle ':completion:all-matches::::' completer \ _all_matches _complete zstyle ':completion:all-matches:*' insert true
In this case the old-matches
style should not be set.
_approximate
¶This is similar to the basic _complete
completer but allows the
completions to undergo corrections. The maximum number of errors can be
specified by the max-errors
style; see the description of
approximate matching in
Filename Generation
for how errors are counted. Normally this completer will only be tried
after the normal _complete
completer:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer _complete _approximate
This will give correcting completion if and only if normal completion yields no possible completions. When corrected completions are found, the completer will normally start menu completion allowing you to cycle through these strings.
This completer uses the tags corrections
and original
when
generating the possible corrections and the original string. The
format
style for the former may contain the additional sequences
‘%e
’ and ‘%o
’ which will be replaced by the number of errors
accepted to generate the corrections and the original string,
respectively.
The completer progressively increases the number of errors allowed up to
the limit by the max-errors
style, hence if a completion is found
with one error, no completions with two errors will be shown, and so on.
It modifies the completer name in the context to indicate the number of
errors being tried: on the first try the completer field contains
‘approximate-1
’, on the second try ‘approximate-2
’, and so on.
When _approximate
is called from another function, the number of
errors to accept may be passed with the -a
option. The argument
is in the same format as the max-errors
style, all in one string.
Note that this completer (and the _correct
completer mentioned
below) can be quite expensive to call, especially when a large number
of errors are allowed. One way to avoid this is to set up the
completer
style using the -e
option to zstyle so that some
completers are only used when completion is attempted a second time on
the same string, e.g.:
zstyle -e ':completion:*' completer ' if [[ $_last_try != "$HISTNO$BUFFER$CURSOR" ]]; then _last_try="$HISTNO$BUFFER$CURSOR" reply=(_complete _match _prefix) else reply=(_ignored _correct _approximate) fi'
This uses the HISTNO
parameter and the BUFFER
and CURSOR
special parameters that are available inside zle and completion
widgets to find out if the command line hasn’t changed since the last
time completion was tried. Only then are the _ignored
,
_correct
and _approximate
completers called.
_canonical_paths
[ -A
var ] [ -N
] [ -MJV12nfX
] tag descr [ paths ... ] ¶This completion function completes all paths given to it, and also tries to
offer completions which point to the same file as one of the paths given
(relative path when an absolute path is given, and vice versa; when ..
’s
are present in the word to be completed; and some paths got from symlinks).
-A
, if specified, takes the paths from the array variable specified. Paths can
also be specified on the command line as shown above. -N
, if specified,
prevents canonicalizing the paths given before using them for completion, in
case they are already so. The options -M
, -J
, -V
, -1
, -2
,
-n
, -F
, -X
are passed to compadd
.
See _description
for a description of tag and descr.
_cmdambivalent
¶Completes the remaining positional arguments as an external command.
The external command and its arguments are completed as separate arguments
(in a manner appropriate for completing /usr/bin/env
)
if there are two or more remaining positional arguments on the command line,
and as a quoted command string (in the manner of system(...)
) otherwise.
See also _cmdstring
and _precommand
.
This function takes no arguments.
_cmdstring
¶Completes an external command as a single argument, as for
system(...)
.
_complete
¶This completer generates all possible completions in a context-sensitive
manner, i.e. using the settings defined with the compdef
function
explained above and the current settings of all special parameters.
This gives the normal completion behaviour.
To complete arguments of commands, _complete
uses the utility function
_normal
, which is in turn responsible for finding the particular
function; it is described below. Various contexts of the form
-
context-
are handled specifically. These are all
mentioned above as possible arguments to the #compdef
tag.
Before trying to find a function for a specific context, _complete
checks if the parameter ‘compcontext
’ is set. Setting
‘compcontext
’ allows the usual completion dispatching to be
overridden which is useful in places such as a function that uses
vared
for input. If it is set to an array, the elements are taken
to be the possible matches which will be completed using the tag
‘values
’ and the description ‘value
’. If it is set to an
associative array, the keys are used as the possible completions and
the values (if non-empty) are used as descriptions for the matches. If
‘compcontext
’ is set to a string containing colons, it should be of
the form ‘tag:
descr:
action’. In this case the
tag and descr give the tag and description to use and the
action indicates what should be completed in one of the forms
accepted by the _arguments
utility function described below.
Finally, if ‘compcontext
’ is set to a string without colons, the
value is taken as the name of the context to use and the function
defined for that context will be called. For this purpose, there is a
special context named -command-line-
that completes whole command
lines (commands and their arguments). This is not used by the completion
system itself but is nonetheless handled when explicitly called.
_correct
¶Generate corrections, but not completions, for the current word; this is
similar to _approximate
but will not allow any number of extra
characters at the cursor as that completer does. The effect is
similar to spell-checking. It is based on _approximate
, but the
completer field in the context name is correct
.
For example, with:
zstyle ':completion:::::' completer \ _complete _correct _approximate zstyle ':completion:*:correct:::' max-errors 2 not-numeric zstyle ':completion:*:approximate:::' max-errors 3 numeric
correction will accept up to two errors. If a numeric argument is given, correction will not be performed, but correcting completion will be, and will accept as many errors as given by the numeric argument. Without a numeric argument, first correction and then correcting completion will be tried, with the first one accepting two errors and the second one accepting three errors.
When _correct
is called as a function, the number of errors to accept
may be given following the -a
option. The argument is in the same
form a values to the accept
style, all in one string.
This completer function is intended to be used without the
_approximate
completer or, as in the example, just before
it. Using it after the _approximate
completer is useless since
_approximate
will at least generate the corrected strings
generated by the _correct
completer — and probably more.
_expand
¶This completer function does not really perform completion, but instead
checks if the word on the command line is eligible for expansion and,
if it is, gives detailed control over how this expansion is done. For
this to happen, the completion system needs to be invoked with
complete-word
, not expand-or-complete
(the default binding for
TAB
), as otherwise the string will be expanded by the shell’s
internal mechanism before the completion system is started.
Note also this completer should be called before the _complete
completer function.
The tags used when generating expansions are all-expansions
for the
string containing all possible expansions, expansions
when adding
the possible expansions as single matches and original
when adding
the original string from the line. The order in which these strings are
generated, if at all, can be controlled by the group-order
and
tag-order
styles, as usual.
The format string for all-expansions
and for expansions
may
contain the sequence ‘%o
’ which will be replaced by the original
string from the line.
The kind of expansion to be tried is controlled by the substitute
,
glob
and subst-globs-only
styles.
It is also possible to call _expand
as a function, in which case the
different modes may be selected with options: -s
for
substitute
, -g
for glob
and -o
for subst-globs-only
.
_expand_alias
¶If the word the cursor is on is an alias, it is expanded and no other
completers are called. The types of aliases which are to be expanded can
be controlled with the styles regular
, global
and disabled
.
This function is also a bindable command, see Bindable Commands.
_extensions
¶If the cursor follows the string ‘*.
’, filename extensions are
completed. The extensions are taken from files in current directory or a
directory specified at the beginning of the current word. For exact matches,
completion continues to allow other completers such as _expand
to
expand the pattern. The standard add-space
and prefix-hidden
styles are observed.
_external_pwds
¶Completes current directories of other zsh processes belonging to the current user.
This is intended to be used via _generic
, bound to a custom key
combination. Note that pattern matching is enabled so matching is
performed similar to how it works with the _match
completer.
_history
¶Complete words from the shell’s command history. This completer
can be controlled by the remove-all-dups
, and sort
styles as for the
_history_complete_word
bindable command, see
Bindable Commands
and
Completion System Configuration.
_ignored
¶The ignored-patterns
style can be set to a list of patterns which are
compared against possible completions; matching ones are removed.
With this completer those matches can be reinstated, as
if no ignored-patterns
style were set. The completer actually
generates its own list of matches; which completers are invoked
is determined in the same way as for the _prefix
completer.
The single-ignored
style is also available as described above.
_list
¶This completer allows the insertion of matches to be delayed until
completion is attempted a second time without the word on the line
being changed. On the first attempt, only the list of matches will be
shown. It is affected by the styles condition
and word
, see
Completion System Configuration.
_match
¶This completer is intended to be used after the _complete
completer. It behaves similarly but the string on the command line may
be a pattern to match against trial completions. This gives the effect
of the GLOB_COMPLETE
option.
Normally completion will be performed by taking the pattern from the line,
inserting a ‘*
’ at the cursor position and comparing the resulting
pattern with the possible completions generated. This can be modified
with the match-original
style described above.
The generated matches will be offered in a menu completion unless the
insert-unambiguous
style is set to ‘true’; see the description above
for other options for this style.
Note that matcher specifications defined globally or used by the
completion functions (the styles matcher-list
and matcher
) will
not be used.
_menu
¶This completer was written as simple example function to show how menu
completion can be enabled in shell code. However, it has the notable
effect of disabling menu selection which can be useful with
_generic
based widgets. It should be used as the first completer in
the list. Note that this is independent of the setting of the
MENU_COMPLETE
option and does not work with the other menu
completion widgets such as reverse-menu-complete
, or
accept-and-menu-complete
.
_oldlist
¶This completer controls how the standard completion widgets behave
when there is an existing list of completions which may have been
generated by a special completion (i.e. a separately-bound completion
command). It allows the ordinary completion keys to continue to use the
list of completions thus generated, instead of producing a new list of
ordinary contextual completions.
It should appear in the list of completers before any of
the widgets which generate matches. It uses two styles: old-list
and
old-menu
, see
Completion System Configuration.
_precommand
¶Complete an external command in word-separated arguments, as for
exec
and /usr/bin/env
.
_prefix
¶This completer can be used to try completion with the suffix (everything
after the cursor) ignored. In other words, the suffix will not be
considered to be part of the word to complete. The effect is similar
to the expand-or-complete-prefix
command.
The completer
style is used to decide which other completers are to
be called to generate matches. If this style is unset, the list of
completers set for the current context is used — except, of course, the
_prefix
completer itself. Furthermore, if this completer appears
more than once in the list of completers only those completers not
already tried by the last invocation of _prefix
will be called.
For example, consider this global completer
style:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer \ _complete _prefix _correct _prefix:foo
Here, the _prefix
completer tries normal completion but ignoring the
suffix. If that doesn’t generate any matches, and neither does
the call to the _correct
completer after it, _prefix
will
be called a second time and, now only trying correction with the
suffix ignored. On the second invocation the completer part of the
context appears as ‘foo
’.
To use _prefix
as the last resort and try only normal completion
when it is invoked:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer _complete ... _prefix zstyle ':completion::prefix:*' completer _complete
The add-space
style is also respected. If it is set to ‘true’ then
_prefix
will insert a space between the matches generated (if any)
and the suffix.
Note that this completer is only useful if the
COMPLETE_IN_WORD
option is set; otherwise, the cursor will
be moved to the end of the current word before the completion code is
called and hence there will be no suffix.
_user_expand
¶This completer behaves similarly to the _expand
completer but
instead performs expansions defined by users. The styles add-space
and
sort
styles specific to the _expand
completer are usable with
_user_expand
in addition to other styles handled more generally by
the completion system. The tag all-expansions
is also available.
The expansion depends on the array style user-expand
being defined
for the current context; remember that the context for completers is less
specific than that for contextual completion as the full context has not
yet been determined. Elements of the array may have one of the following
forms:
$
hashhash is the name of an associative array. Note this is not a full
parameter expression, merely a $
, suitably quoted to prevent immediate
expansion, followed by the name of an associative array. If the trial
expansion word matches a key in hash, the resulting expansion is the
corresponding value.
_func is the name of a shell function whose name must begin with
_
but is not otherwise special to the completion system. The function
is called with the trial word as an argument. If the word is to be
expanded, the function should set the array reply
to a list of
expansions. Optionally, it can set REPLY
to a word that will
be used as a description for the set of expansions.
The return status of the function is irrelevant.
In addition to the context-dependent completions provided, which are expected to work in an intuitively obvious way, there are a few widgets implementing special behaviour which can be bound separately to keys. The following is a list of these and their default bindings.
_bash_completions
¶This function is used by two widgets, _bash_complete-word
and
_bash_list-choices
. It exists to provide compatibility with
completion bindings in bash. The last character of the binding determines
what is completed: ‘!
’, command names; ‘$
’, environment variables;
‘@
’, host names; ‘/
’, file names; ‘~
’ user names. In bash, the
binding preceded by ‘\e
’ gives completion, and preceded by ‘^X
’
lists options. As some of these bindings clash with standard zsh
bindings, only ‘\e~
’ and ‘^X~
’ are bound by default. To add the
rest, the following should be added to .zshrc
after compinit
has
been run:
for key in '!' '$' '@' '/' '~'; do bindkey "\e$key" _bash_complete-word bindkey "^X$key" _bash_list-choices done
This includes the bindings for ‘~
’ in case they were already bound to
something else; the completion code does not override user bindings.
_correct_filename
(^XC
) ¶Correct the filename path at the cursor position. Allows up to six errors in the name. Can also be called with an argument to correct a filename path, independently of zle; the correction is printed on standard output.
_correct_word
(^Xc
) ¶Performs correction of the current argument using the usual contextual
completions as possible choices. This stores the string
‘correct-word
’ in the function field of the context name and
then calls the _correct
completer.
_expand_alias
(^Xa
) ¶This function can be used as a completer and as a bindable command.
It expands the word the cursor is on if it is an alias. The types of
alias expanded can be controlled with the styles regular
, global
and disabled
.
When used as a bindable command there is one additional feature that
can be selected by setting the complete
style to ‘true’. In this
case, if the word is not the name of an alias, _expand_alias
tries
to complete the word to a full alias name without expanding it. It
leaves the cursor directly after the completed word so that invoking
_expand_alias
once more will expand the now-complete alias name.
_expand_word
(^Xe
) ¶Performs expansion on the current word: equivalent to the standard
expand-word
command, but using the _expand
completer. Before
calling it, the function field of the context is set to
‘expand-word
’.
_generic
¶This function is not defined as a widget and not bound by default. However, it can be used to define a widget and will then store the name of the widget in the function field of the context and call the completion system. This allows custom completion widgets with their own set of style settings to be defined easily. For example, to define a widget that performs normal completion and starts menu selection:
zle -C foo complete-word _generic bindkey '...' foo zstyle ':completion:foo:*' menu yes select=1
Note in particular that the completer
style may be set for the context
in order to change the set of functions used to generate possible matches.
If _generic
is called with arguments, those are passed through to
_main_complete
as the list of completers in place of those defined by
the completer
style.
_history_complete_word
(\e/
) ¶Complete words from the shell’s command history. This uses the
list
, remove-all-dups
, sort
, and stop
styles.
_most_recent_file
(^Xm
) ¶Complete the name of the most recently modified file matching the pattern on the command line (which may be blank). If given a numeric argument N, complete the Nth most recently modified file. Note the completion, if any, is always unique.
_next_tags
(^Xn
) ¶This command alters the set of matches used to that for the next tag, or
set of tags, either as given by the tag-order
style or as set by
default; these matches would otherwise not be available.
Successive invocations of the command cycle through all possible sets of
tags.
_read_comp
(^X^R
) ¶Prompt the user for a string, and use that to perform completion on the
current word. There are two possibilities for the string. First, it can
be a set of words beginning ‘_
’, for example ‘_files -/
’, in which
case the function with any arguments will be called to generate the
completions. Unambiguous parts of the function name will be completed
automatically (normal completion is not available at this point) until a
space is typed.
Second, any other string will be passed as a set of arguments to
compadd
and should hence be an expression specifying what should
be completed.
A very restricted set of editing commands is available when reading the
string: ‘DEL
’ and ‘^H
’ delete the last character; ‘^U
’ deletes
the line, and ‘^C
’ and ‘^G
’ abort the function, while ‘RET
’
accepts the completion. Note the string is used verbatim as a command
line, so arguments must be quoted in accordance with standard shell rules.
Once a string has been read, the next call to _read_comp
will use the
existing string instead of reading a new one. To force a new string to be
read, call _read_comp
with a numeric argument.
_complete_debug
(^X?
) ¶This widget performs ordinary completion, but captures in a temporary file a trace of the shell commands executed by the completion system. Each completion attempt gets its own file. A command to view each of these files is pushed onto the editor buffer stack.
_complete_help
(^Xh
) ¶This widget displays information about the context names,
the tags, and the completion functions used
when completing at the current cursor position. If given a numeric
argument other than 1
(as in ‘ESC-2 ^Xh
’), then the styles
used and the contexts for which they are used will be shown, too.
Note that the information about styles may be incomplete; it depends on the information available from the completion functions called, which in turn is determined by the user’s own styles and other settings.
_complete_help_generic
¶Unlike other commands listed here, this must be created as a normal ZLE
widget rather than a completion widget (i.e. with zle -N
). It
is used for generating help with a widget bound to the _generic
widget that is described above.
If this widget is created using the name of the function, as it is by
default, then when executed it will read a key sequence. This is expected
to be bound to a call to a completion function that uses the _generic
widget. That widget will be executed, and information provided in
the same format that the _complete_help
widget displays for
contextual completion.
If the widget’s name contains debug
, for example if it is created
as ‘zle -N _complete_debug_generic _complete_help_generic
’, it
will read and execute the keystring for a generic widget as before,
but then generate debugging information as done by _complete_debug
for contextual completion.
If the widget’s name contains noread
, it will not read a keystring
but instead arrange that the next use of a generic widget run in
the same shell will have the effect as described above.
The widget works by setting the shell parameter
ZSH_TRACE_GENERIC_WIDGET
which is read by _generic
. Unsetting
the parameter cancels any pending effect of the noread
form.
For example, after executing the following:
zle -N _complete_debug_generic _complete_help_generic bindkey '^x:' _complete_debug_generic
typing ‘C-x :
’ followed by the key sequence for a generic widget
will cause trace output for that widget to be saved to a file.
_complete_tag
(^Xt
) ¶This widget completes symbol tags created by the etags
or ctags
programmes (note there is no connection with the completion system’s tags)
stored in a file TAGS
, in the format used by etags
, or tags
, in the
format created by ctags
. It will look back up the path hierarchy for
the first occurrence of either file; if both exist, the file TAGS
is
preferred. You can specify the full path to a TAGS
or tags
file by
setting the parameter $TAGSFILE
or $tagsfile
respectively.
The corresponding completion tags used are etags
and vtags
, after
emacs and vi respectively.
Descriptions follow for utility functions that may be
useful when writing completion functions. If functions are installed in
subdirectories, most of these reside in the
Base
subdirectory. Like the example
functions for commands in the distribution, the utility functions
generating matches all follow the convention of returning status zero if they
generated completions and non-zero if no matching completions could be
added.
_absolute_command_paths
¶This function completes external commands as absolute paths (unlike
_command_names -e
which completes their basenames). It takes no
arguments.
_all_labels
[ -x
] [ -12VJ
] tag name descr [ command arg ... ] ¶This is a convenient interface to the _next_label
function below,
implementing the loop shown in the _next_label
example. The
command and its arguments are called to generate the matches. The
options stored in the parameter name will automatically be inserted
into the args passed to the command. Normally, they are put
directly after the command, but if one of the args is a single
hyphen, they are inserted directly before that. If the hyphen is the last
argument, it will be removed from the argument list before the
command is called. This allows _all_labels
to be used in almost all
cases where the matches can be generated by a single call to the
compadd
builtin command or by a call to one of the utility functions.
For example:
local expl ... if _requested foo; then ... _all_labels foo expl '...' compadd ... - $matches fi
Will complete the strings from the matches
parameter, using
compadd
with additional options which will take precedence over
those generated by _all_labels
.
_alternative
[ -O
name ] [ -C
name ] spec ... ¶This function is useful in simple cases where multiple tags are available.
Essentially it implements a loop like the one described for the _tags
function below.
The tags to use and the action to perform if a tag is requested are
described using the specs which are of the form:
‘tag:
descr:
action’. The tags are offered using
_tags
and if the tag is requested, the action is executed with the
given description descr. The actions are those accepted
by the _arguments
function (described below), with the following
exceptions:
->
state’ and ‘=
...’ forms are not supported.
((a\:bar b\:baz
))
’ form does not need
the colon to be escaped, since the specs have no colon-separated fields
after the action.
For example, the action may be a simple function call:
_alternative \ 'users:user:_users' \ 'hosts:host:_hosts'
offers usernames and hostnames as possible matches,
generated by the _users
and _hosts
functions respectively.
Like _arguments
, this function uses _all_labels
to execute
the actions, which will loop over all sets of tags. Special handling is
only required if there is an additional valid tag, for example inside a
function called from _alternative
.
The option ‘-O
name’ is used in the same way as by the
_arguments
function. In other words, the elements of the name
array will be passed to compadd
when executing an action.
Like _tags
this function supports the -C
option to give a
different name for the argument context field.
_arguments
[ -nswWCRS
] [ -A
pat ] [ -O
name ] [ -M
matchspec ]
[ :
] spec ..._arguments
[ opt ... ] -
-
[ -l
] [ -i
pats ] [ -s
pair ]
[ helpspec ...]This function can be used to give a complete specification for completion for a command whose arguments follow standard UNIX option and argument conventions.
Options Overview
Options to _arguments
itself must be in separate words, i.e. -s -w
,
not -sw
. The options are followed by specs that describe options and
arguments of the analyzed command. To avoid ambiguity, all
options to _arguments
itself may be separated from the spec forms
by a single colon.
The ‘-
-
’
form is used to intuit spec forms from the help output of the command
being analyzed, and is described in detail below. The opts for the
‘-
-
’ form are otherwise the same options as the first form. Note
that ‘-s
’ following ‘-
-
’ has a distinct meaning from ‘-s
’
preceding ‘-
-
’, and both may appear.
The option switches -s
, -S
, -A
, -w
, and -W
affect how
_arguments
parses the analyzed command line’s options. These switches are
useful for commands with standard argument parsing.
The options of _arguments
have the following meanings:
-n
With this option, _arguments
sets the parameter NORMARG
to the position of the first normal argument in the $words
array,
i.e. the position after the end of the options. If that argument
has not been reached, NORMARG
is set to -1
. The caller
should declare ‘integer NORMARG
’ if the -n
option is passed;
otherwise the parameter is not used.
-s
Enable option stacking for single-letter options, whereby multiple
single-letter options may be combined into a single word. For example,
the two options ‘-x
’ and ‘-y
’ may be combined into
a single word ‘-xy
’. By default, every word corresponds to a single
option name (‘-xy
’ is a single option named ‘xy
’).
Options beginning with a single hyphen or plus sign are eligible for stacking; words beginning with two hyphens are not.
Note that -s
after -
-
has a different meaning, which is documented
in the segment entitled ‘Deriving spec forms from the help output’.
-w
In combination with -s
, allow option stacking
even if one or more of the options take
arguments. For example, if -x
takes an argument, with no
-s
, ‘-xy
’ is considered as a single (unhandled) option; with
-s
, -xy
is an option with the argument ‘y
’; with both -s
and -w
, -xy
is the option -x
and the option -y
with
arguments to -x
(and to -y
, if it takes arguments) still to come
in subsequent words.
-W
This option takes -w
a stage further: it is possible to
complete single-letter options even after an argument that occurs in the
same word. However, it depends on the action performed whether options
will really be completed at this point. For more control, use a
utility function like _guard
as part of the action.
-C
Modify the curcontext
parameter for an action of the form ‘->
state’.
This is discussed in detail below.
-R
Return status 300 instead of zero when a $state
is to
be handled, in the ‘->
string’ syntax.
-S
Do not complete options after a ‘-
-
’ appearing on the line,
and ignore the ‘-
-
’. For example, with -S
, in the line
foobar -x -- -y
the ‘-x
’ is considered an option, the ‘-y
’ is considered an
argument, and the ‘-
-
’ is considered to be neither.
-A
patDo not complete options after the first non-option
argument on the line. pat is a pattern matching
all strings which are not to be taken as arguments. For example, to make
_arguments
stop completing options after the first normal argument, but
ignoring all strings starting with a hyphen even if they are not described
by one of the optspecs, the form is ‘-A "-*"
’.
-O
namePass the elements of the array name as arguments to functions called to execute actions. This is discussed in detail below.
-M
matchspecUse the match specification matchspec for completing option names and values.
The default matchspec allows partial word completion after ‘_
’ and
‘-
’, such as completing ‘-f-b
’ to ‘-foo-bar
’. The default
matchspec is:
r:|[_-]=* r:|=*
-0
When populating values of the ‘opt_args
’ associative array, don’t
backslash-escape colons and backslashes and use NUL rather than colon for
joining multiple values. This option is described in more detail below, under
the heading specs: actions.
specs: overview
Each of the following forms is a spec describing individual sets of options or arguments on the command line being analyzed.
:
message:
action::
message:
actionThis describes the n’th normal argument. The message will be printed above the matches generated and the action indicates what can be completed in this position (see below). If there are two colons before the message the argument is optional. If the message contains only white space, nothing will be printed above the matches unless the action adds an explanation string itself.
:
message:
action::
message:
actionSimilar, but describes the next argument, whatever number that happens to be. If all arguments are specified in this form in the correct order the numbers are unnecessary.
*:
message:
action*::
message:
action*:::
message:
actionThis describes how arguments (usually non-option arguments, those not
beginning with -
or +
) are to be completed when neither
of the first two forms was provided. Any number of arguments can
be completed in this fashion.
With two colons before the message, the words
special array and
the CURRENT
special parameter are modified to refer only to the
normal arguments when the action is executed or evaluated. With
three colons before the message they are modified to refer only to
the normal arguments covered by this description.
:
...This describes an option. The colon indicates handling for one or more arguments to the option; if it is not present, the option is assumed to take no arguments.
The following forms are available for the initial optspec, whether or not the option has arguments.
*
optspecHere optspec is one of the remaining forms below. This indicates the following optspec may be repeated. Otherwise if the corresponding option is already present on the command line to the left of the cursor it will not be offered again.
-
optname+
optnameIn the simplest form the optspec is just the option name beginning
with a minus or a plus sign, such as ‘-foo
’. The first argument for
the option (if any) must follow as a separate word directly after the
option.
Either of ‘-+
optname’ and ‘+-
optname’ can be used to
specify that -
optname and +
optname are both valid.
In all the remaining forms, the leading ‘-
’ may be replaced by or
paired with ‘+
’ in this way.
-
optname-
The first argument of the option must come directly after the option name
in the same word. For example, ‘-foo-:
...’ specifies that
the completed option and argument will look like ‘-foo
arg’.
-
optname+
The first argument may appear immediately after optname in the same
word, or may appear as a separate word after the option. For example,
‘-foo+:
...’ specifies that the completed option and argument
will look like either ‘-foo
arg’ or ‘-foo
arg’.
-
optname=
The argument may appear as the next word, or in same word as the option
name provided that it is separated from it by an equals sign, for
example ‘-foo=
arg’ or ‘-foo
arg’.
-
optname=-
The argument to the option must appear after an equals sign in the same word, and may not be given in the next argument.
[
explanation]
An explanation string may be appended to any of the preceding forms of
optspec by enclosing it in brackets, as in ‘-q[query operation]
’.
The verbose
style is used to decide whether the explanation strings
are displayed with the option in a completion listing.
If no bracketed explanation string is given but the auto-description
style is set and only one argument is described for this optspec, the
value of the style is displayed, with any appearance of the sequence
‘%d
’ in it replaced by the message of the first optarg
that follows the optspec; see below.
It is possible for options with a literal ‘+
’ or ‘=
’ to
appear, but that character must be quoted, for example ‘-\+
’.
Each optarg following an optspec must take one of the following forms:
:
message:
action::
message:
actionAn argument to the option; message and action are treated as for ordinary arguments. In the first form, the argument is mandatory, and in the second form it is optional.
This group may be repeated for options which take multiple arguments.
In other words,
:
message1:
action1:
message2:
action2
specifies that the option takes two arguments.
:*
pattern:
message:
action:*
pattern::
message:
action:*
pattern:::
message:
actionThis describes multiple arguments. Only the last optarg for
an option taking multiple arguments may be
given in this form. If the pattern is empty (i.e. :*:
), all
the remaining words on the line are to be completed as described by the
action; otherwise, all the words up to and including a word matching
the pattern are to be completed using the action.
Multiple colons are treated as for the ‘*:
...’ forms for
ordinary arguments: when the message is preceded by two colons,
the words
special array and the CURRENT
special parameter are
modified during the execution or evaluation of the action to refer
only to the words after the option. When preceded by three colons, they
are modified to refer only to the words covered by this description.
Any literal colon in an optname, message, or action
must be preceded by a backslash, ‘\:
’.
Each of the forms above may be preceded by a list in parentheses
of option names and argument numbers. If the given option is on
the command line, the options and arguments indicated in parentheses
will not be offered. For example,
‘(-two -three 1)-one:
...’ completes the option ‘-one
’; if this
appears on the command line, the options -two
and -three
and the
first ordinary argument will not be completed after it.
‘(-foo):
...’ specifies an ordinary argument completion;
-foo
will not be completed if that argument is already present.
Other items may appear in the list of excluded options to indicate
various other items that should not be applied when the current
specification is matched: a single star (*
) for the rest arguments
(i.e. a specification of the form ‘*:
...’); a colon (:
)
for all normal (non-option-) arguments; and a hyphen (-
) for all
options. For example, if ‘(*)
’ appears before an option and the
option appears on the command line, the list of remaining arguments
(those shown in the above table beginning with ‘*:
’) will not be
completed.
To aid in reuse of specifications, it is possible to precede any of the
forms above with ‘!
’; then the form will no longer be completed,
although if the option or argument appears on the command line they will
be skipped as normal. The main use for this is when the arguments are
given by an array, and _arguments
is called repeatedly for more
specific contexts: on the first call ‘_arguments $global_options
’ is
used, and on subsequent calls ‘_arguments !$^global_options
’.
specs: actions
In each of the forms above the action determines how
completions should be generated. Except for the ‘->
string’
form below, the action will be executed by calling the
_all_labels
function to process all tag labels. No special handling
of tags is needed unless a function call introduces a new one.
The functions called to execute actions will be called with the
elements of the array named by the ‘-O
name’ option as arguments.
This can be used, for example, to pass the same set of options for the
compadd
builtin to all actions.
The forms for action are as follows.
(single unquoted space)This is useful where an argument is required but it is not possible or desirable to generate matches for it. The message will be displayed but no completions listed. Note that even in this case the colon at the end of the message is needed; it may only be omitted when neither a message nor an action is given.
(
item1 item2 ...)
One of a list of possible matches, for example:
:foo:(foo bar baz
)
((item1\:desc1 ...))
Similar to the above, but with descriptions for each possible match. Note the backslash before the colon. For example,
:foo:((a\:bar b\:baz
))
The matches will be listed together with their descriptions if the
description
style is set with the values
tag in the context.
->
string ¶In this form, _arguments
processes the arguments and options and then
returns control to the calling function with parameters set to indicate the
state of processing; the calling function then makes its own arrangements
for generating completions. For example, functions that implement a state
machine can use this type of action.
Where _arguments
encounters action in the ‘->
string’
format, it will strip all leading and trailing whitespace from string
and set the array state
to the set of all strings for which an
action is to be performed. The elements of the array state_descr
are
assigned the corresponding message field from each optarg
containing such an action.
By default and in common with all other well behaved completion
functions, _arguments returns status zero if it was able to add matches and
non-zero otherwise. However, if the -R
option is given,
_arguments
will instead return a status of 300 to indicate that
$state
is to be handled.
In addition to $state
and $state_descr
, _arguments
also
sets the global
parameters ‘context
’, ‘line
’ and ‘opt_args
’ as described
below, and does not reset any changes made to the special parameters
such as PREFIX
and words
. This gives the calling function the
choice of resetting these parameters or propagating changes in them.
A function calling _arguments
with at least
one action containing a ‘->
string’ must therefore declare
appropriate local parameters:
local context state state_descr line typeset -A opt_args
to prevent _arguments
from altering the global environment.
{
eval-string}
¶A string in braces is evaluated as shell code to generate matches. If the eval-string itself does not begin with an opening parenthesis or brace it is split into separate words before execution.
=
actionIf the action starts with ‘=
’ (an equals sign followed by a
space), _arguments
will insert the contents of the argument
field of the current context as the new first element in the words
special array and increment the value of the CURRENT
special
parameter. This has the effect of inserting a dummy word onto the
completion command line while not changing the point at which completion is
taking place.
This is most useful with one of the specifiers that restrict the words on
the command line on which the action is to operate (the two- and
three-colon forms above). One particular use is when an action itself
causes _arguments
on a restricted range; it is necessary to use this
trick to insert an appropriate command name into the range for the second
call to _arguments
to be able to parse the line.
word...This covers all forms other than those above. If the action starts with a space, the remaining list of words will be invoked unchanged.
Otherwise it will be invoked with some extra strings placed after the
first word; these are to be passed down as options to the compadd
builtin. They ensure that the state specified by _arguments
, in
particular the descriptions of options and arguments, is correctly passed
to the completion command. These additional arguments
are taken from the array parameter ‘expl
’; this will be set up
before executing the action and hence may be referred to inside it,
typically in an expansion of the form ‘$expl[@]
’ which preserves empty
elements of the array.
During the performance of the action the array ‘line
’ will be set to
the normal arguments from the command line, i.e. the words from the
command line after the command name excluding all options and their
arguments. Options are stored in the associative array
‘opt_args
’ with option names as keys and their arguments as
the values. By default, all colons and backslashes in the value are escaped
with backslashes, and if an option has multiple arguments (for example, when
using an optspec of the form ‘*
optspec’), they are joined with
(unescaped) colons. However, if the -0
option was passed, no backslash
escaping is performed, and multiple values are joined with NUL bytes. For
example, after ‘zsh -o foo:foo -o bar:bar -o <TAB>
’, the contents of
‘opt_args
’ would be
typeset -A opt_args=( [-o]='foo\:foo:bar\:bar:' )
by default, and
typeset -A opt_args=( [-o]=$'foo:foo\x00bar:bar\x00' )
if _arguments
had been called with the -0
option.
The parameter ‘context
’ is set when returning to the calling function
to perform an action of the form ‘->
string’. It is set to an
array of elements corresponding to the elements of $state
. Each
element is a suitable name for the argument field of the context: either a
string of the form ‘option
-opt-
n’ for the n’th
argument of the option -opt, or a string of the form
‘argument-
n’ for the n’th argument. For ‘rest’ arguments,
that is those in the list at the end not handled by position, n is the
string ‘rest
’. For example, when completing the argument of the -o
option, the name is ‘option-o-1
’, while for the second normal
(non-option-) argument it is ‘argument-2
’.
Furthermore, during the evaluation of the action the context name in
the curcontext
parameter is altered to append the same string that is
stored in the context
parameter.
The option -C
tells _arguments
to modify the curcontext
parameter for an action of the form ‘->
state’. This is the
standard parameter used to keep track of the current context. Here it
(and not the context
array) should be made local to the calling
function to avoid passing back the modified value and should be
initialised to the current value at the start of the function:
local curcontext="$curcontext"
This is useful where it is not possible for multiple states to be valid together.
Grouping Options
Options can be grouped to simplify exclusion lists. A group is
introduced with ‘+
’ followed by a name for the group in the
subsequent word. Whole groups can then be referenced in an exclusion
list or a group name can be used to disambiguate between two forms of
the same option. For example:
_arguments \ '(group2--x)-a' \ + group1 \ -m \ '(group2)-n' \ + group2 \ -x -y
If the name of a group is specified in the form
‘(
name)
’ then only one value from that group
will ever be completed; more formally, all specifications are mutually
exclusive to all other specifications in that group. This is useful for
defining options that are aliases for each other. For example:
_arguments \ -a -b \ + '(operation)' \ {-c,--compress}'[compress]' \ {-d,--decompress}'[decompress]' \ {-l,--list}'[list]'
If an option in a group appears on the command line, it is stored in the
associative array ‘opt_args
’ with ’group-
option’
as a key. In the example above, a key ‘operation--c
’ is used if the option
‘-c
’ is present on the command line.
Specifying Multiple Sets of Arguments
It is possible to specify multiple sets of options and arguments with the sets separated by single hyphens. This differs from groups in that sets are considered to be mutually exclusive of each other.
Specifications before the first set and from any group are common to all sets. For example:
_arguments \ -a \ - set1 \ -c \ - set2 \ -d \ ':arg:(x2 y2)'
This defines two sets. When the command line contains the option
‘-c
’, the ‘-d
’ option and the argument will not be considered
possible completions. When it contains ‘-d
’ or an argument, the
option ‘-c
’ will not be considered. However, after ‘-a
’
both sets will still be considered valid.
As for groups, the name of a set may appear in exclusion lists, either alone or preceding a normal option or argument specification.
The completion code has to parse the command line separately for each
set. This can be slow so sets should only be used when necessary.
A useful alternative is often an option specification with rest-arguments
(as in ‘-foo:*:...
’); here the option -foo
swallows up all
remaining arguments as described by the optarg definitions.
Deriving spec forms from the help output
The option ‘-
-
’ allows _arguments
to work out the names of long
options that support the ‘-
-help
’ option which is standard in many
GNU commands. The command word is called with the argument
‘-
-help
’ and the output examined for option names. Clearly, it can
be dangerous to pass this to commands which may not support this option as
the behaviour of the command is unspecified.
In addition to options, ‘_arguments -
-
’ will try to deduce the
types of arguments available for options when the form
‘-
-
opt=
val’ is valid. It is also possible to provide
hints by examining the help text of the command and adding helpspec of
the form ‘pattern:
message:
action’; note that other
_arguments
spec forms are not used. The pattern is matched
against the help text for an option, and if it matches the message and
action are used as for other argument specifiers. The special case
of ‘*:
’ means both message and action are empty, which has
the effect of causing options having no description in the help output to
be ordered in listings ahead of options that have a description.
For example:
_arguments -- '*\*:toggle:(yes no)' \ '*=FILE*:file:_files' \ '*=DIR*:directory:_files -/' \ '*=PATH*:directory:_files -/'
Here, ‘yes
’ and ‘no
’ will be completed as the argument of
options whose description ends in a star; file names will be completed for
options that contain the substring ‘=FILE
’ in the description; and
directories will be completed for options whose description contains
‘=DIR
’ or ‘=PATH
’. The last three are in fact the default and so
need not be given explicitly, although it is possible to override the use
of these patterns. A typical help text which uses this feature is:
-C, --directory=DIR change to directory DIR
so that the above specifications will cause directories to be completed
after ‘-
-directory
’, though not after ‘-C
’.
Note also that _arguments
tries to find out automatically if the
argument for an option is optional. This can be specified explicitly by
doubling the colon before the message.
If the pattern ends in ‘(-)
’, this will be removed from the
pattern and the action will be used only directly after the
‘=
’, not in the next word. This is the behaviour of a normal
specification defined with the form ‘=-
’.
By default, the command (with the option ‘--help
’) is run after
resetting all the locale categories (except for LC_CTYPE
) to ‘C
’.
If the localized help output is known to work, the option ‘-l
’ can
be specified after the ‘_arguments -
-
’ so that the command is
run in the current locale.
The ‘_arguments -
-
’ can be followed by the option ‘-i
patterns’ to give patterns for options which are not to be
completed. The patterns can be given as the name of an array parameter
or as a literal list in parentheses. For example,
_arguments -- -i \ "(--(en|dis)able-FEATURE*)"
will cause completion to ignore the options
‘-
-enable-FEATURE
’ and ‘-
-disable-FEATURE
’ (this example is
useful with GNU configure
).
The ‘_arguments -
-
’ form can also be followed by the option ‘-s
pair’ to describe option aliases. The pair consists of a list
of alternating patterns and corresponding replacements, enclosed in parens
and quoted so that it forms a single argument word in the _arguments
call.
For example, some configure
-script help output describes options only
as ‘-
-enable-foo
’, but the script also accepts the negated form
‘-
-disable-foo
’. To allow completion of the second form:
_arguments -- -s "((#s)--enable- --disable-)"
Miscellaneous notes
Finally, note that _arguments
generally expects to be the primary
function handling any completion for which it is used. It may have side
effects which change the treatment of any matches added by other functions
called after it. To combine _arguments
with other functions, those
functions should be called either before _arguments
, as an action
within a spec, or in handlers for ‘->
state’ actions.
Here is a more general example of the use of _arguments
:
_arguments '-l+:left border:' \ '-format:paper size:(letter A4)' \ '*-copy:output file:_files::resolution:(300 600)' \ ':postscript file:_files -g \*.\(ps\|eps\)' \ '*:page number:'
This describes three options: ‘-l
’, ‘-format
’, and
‘-copy
’. The first takes one argument described as ‘left
border’ for which no completion will be offered because of the empty
action. Its argument may come directly after the ‘-l
’ or it may be
given as the next word on the line.
The ‘-format
’ option takes one
argument in the next word, described as ‘paper size’ for which
only the strings ‘letter
’ and ‘A4
’ will be completed.
The ‘-copy
’ option may appear more than once on the command line and
takes two arguments. The first is mandatory and will be completed as a
filename. The second is optional (because of the second colon before
the description ‘resolution’) and will be completed from the strings
‘300
’ and ‘600
’.
The last two descriptions say what should be completed as
arguments. The first describes the first argument as a
‘postscript file’ and makes files ending in ‘ps
’ or ‘eps
’
be completed. The last description gives all other arguments the
description ‘page number’ but does not offer completions.
_cache_invalid
cache_identifier ¶This function returns status zero if the completions cache corresponding to
the given cache identifier needs rebuilding. It determines this by
looking up the cache-policy
style for the current context.
This should provide a function name which is run with the full path to the
relevant cache file as the only argument.
Example:
_example_caching_policy () { # rebuild if cache is more than a week old local -a oldp oldp=( "$1"(Nm+7) ) (( $#oldp )) }
_call_function
return name [ arg ... ] ¶If a function name exists, it is called with the arguments args. The return argument gives the name of a parameter in which the return status from the function name should be stored; if return is empty or a single hyphen it is ignored.
The return status of _call_function
itself is zero if the function
name exists and was called and non-zero otherwise.
_call_program
[ -l
] [ -p
] tag string ... ¶This function provides a mechanism for the user to override the use of an
external command. It looks up the command
style with the supplied
tag. If the style is set, its value is used as the command to
execute. The strings from the call to _call_program
, or from the
style if set, are concatenated with spaces between them and the resulting
string is evaluated. The return status is the return status of the command
called.
By default, the command is run in an environment where all the locale
categories (except for LC_CTYPE
) are reset to ‘C
’ by calling the
utility function _comp_locale
(see below). If the option ‘-l
’ is
given, the command is run with the current locale.
If the option ‘-p
’ is supplied it indicates that the command
output is influenced by the permissions it is run with. If the
gain-privileges
style is set to true, _call_program
will make
use of commands such as sudo
, if present on the command-line, to
match the permissions to whatever the final command is likely to run
under. When looking up the gain-privileges
and command
styles,
the command component of the zstyle context will end with a slash
(‘/
’) followed by the command that would be used to gain privileges.
_combination
[ -s
pattern ] tag style spec ... field opts ... ¶This function is used to complete combinations of values, for example pairs of hostnames and usernames. The style argument gives the style which defines the pairs; it is looked up in a context with the tag specified.
The style name consists of field names separated by hyphens, for example
‘users-hosts-ports
’. For each field for a value is already known, a
spec of the form ‘field=
pattern’ is given. For example,
if the command line so far specifies a user ‘pws
’, the argument
‘users=pws
’ should appear.
The next argument with no equals sign is taken as the name of the field for which completions should be generated (presumably not one of the fields for which the value is known).
The matches generated will be taken from the value of the style. These
should contain the possible values for the combinations in the appropriate
order (users, hosts, ports in the example above).
The values for the different fields are separated by colons. This
can be altered with the option -s
to _combination
which specifies a
pattern. Typically this is a character class, as for example
‘-s "[:@]"
’ in the case of the users-hosts
style. Each
‘field=
pattern’ specification restricts the
completions which apply to elements of the style with appropriately
matching fields.
If no style with the given name is defined for the given tag,
or if none of the strings in style’s value match, but a
function name of the required field preceded by an
underscore is defined, that function will be called to generate the
matches. For example, if there is no ‘users-hosts-ports
’ or no
matching hostname when a host is required, the function ‘_hosts
’ will
automatically be called.
If the same name is used for more than one field, in both the
‘field=
pattern’ and the argument that gives the name of the
field to be completed, the number of the field (starting with one) may
be given after the fieldname, separated from it by a colon.
All arguments after the required field name are passed to
compadd
when generating matches from the style value, or to
the functions for the fields if they are called.
_command_names
[ -e
| -
] ¶This function completes words that are valid at command position: names of
aliases, builtins, hashed commands, functions, and so on. With the -e
flag, only hashed commands are completed. The -
flag is ignored.
_comp_locale
¶This function resets all the locale categories other than LC_CTYPE
to
‘C
’ so that the output from external commands can be easily analyzed by
the completion system. LC_CTYPE
retains the current value (taking
LC_ALL
and LANG
into account), ensuring that non-ASCII characters
in file names are still handled properly.
This function should normally be run only in a subshell, because the new
locale is exported to the environment. Typical usage would be
‘$(_comp_locale;
command ...)
’.
_completers
[ -p
] ¶This function completes names of completers.
-p
Include the leading underscore (‘_
’) in the matches.
_default
¶This function corresponds to the -default-
special context which is
applied where no completion is defined. It is useful to call it under
certain error conditions such as completion after an unrecognised
subcommand. This applies the concept of graceful degradation to the
completion system, allowing it to fallback on basic completion of
commonly useful things like filenames.
_describe
[-12JVx
] [ -oO
| -t
tag ] descr name1 [ name2 ] [ opt ... ]
[ -
-
name1 [ name2 ] [ opt ... ] ... ]This function associates completions with descriptions.
Multiple groups separated by -
-
can be supplied, potentially with
different completion options opts.
The descr is taken as a string to display above the matches if the
format
style for the descriptions
tag is set. This is followed by
one or two names of arrays followed by options to pass to compadd
. The
array name1 contains the possible completions with their descriptions in
the form ‘completion:
description’. Any literal colons in
completion must be quoted with a backslash. If a name2 is
given, it should have the same number of elements as name1; in this
case the corresponding elements are added as possible completions instead
of the completion strings from name1. The completion list
will retain the descriptions from name1. Finally, a set of
completion options can appear.
If the option ‘-o
’ appears before the first argument, the matches added
will be treated as names of command options (N.B. not shell options),
typically following a ‘-
’, ‘-
-
’ or ‘+
’ on the command
line. In this case _describe
uses the prefix-hidden
,
prefix-needed
and verbose
styles to find out if the strings should
be added as completions and if the descriptions should be shown. Without
the ‘-o
’ option, only the verbose
style is used to decide how
descriptions are shown. If ‘-O
’ is used instead of ‘-o
’, command
options are completed as above but _describe
will not handle the
prefix-needed
style.
With the -t
option a tag can be specified. The default is
‘values
’ or, if the -o
option is given, ‘options
’.
The options -1
, -2
, -J
, -V
, -x
are passed to
_next_label
.
If selected by the list-grouped
style, strings with the same
description will appear together in the list.
_describe
uses the _all_labels
function to generate the matches, so
it does not need to appear inside a loop over tag labels.
_description
[ -x
] [ -12VJ
] tag name descr [ spec ... ] ¶This function is not to be confused with the previous one; it is used as
a helper function for creating options to compadd
. It is buried
inside many of the higher level completion functions and so often does
not need to be called directly.
The styles listed below are tested in the current context using the
given tag. The resulting options for compadd
are put into the
array named name (this is traditionally ‘expl
’, but this
convention is not enforced). The description for the corresponding set
of matches is passed to the function in descr.
The styles tested are: format
, hidden
, matcher
,
ignore-line
, ignored-patterns
, group-name
and sort
.
The format
style is first tested for the given tag and then for
the descriptions
tag if no value was found, while the remainder are
only tested for the tag given as the first argument. The function also
calls _setup
which tests some more styles.
The string returned by the format
style (if any) will be modified so
that the sequence ‘%d
’ is replaced by the descr given as the third
argument without any leading or trailing white space. If, after
removing the white space, the descr is the empty string, the format
style will not be used and the options put into the name array will
not contain an explanation string to be displayed above the matches.
If _description
is called with more than three arguments,
the additional specs should be of the form ‘char:
str’.
These supply escape sequence replacements for the format
style:
every appearance of ‘%
char’ will be replaced by string.
If no additional specs are given but the description in descr
conforms to a common form then further escape sequences are set for
elements of that description. These elements correspond to a default
value (‘%o
’), the units (‘%m
’) range of acceptable values
(‘%r
’) and the remaining initial part of the description (‘%h
’).
The form the description takes consists of specifying the units and
range in parentheses and the default value in square brackets, for
example:
_description times expl 'timeout (seconds) (0-60) [20]'
It is possible to use zformat
conditional expressions when styling
these elements. So, for example, to add ‘default:
’ as a tag but only
when there is a default value to show, the format
style might
include ‘%(o.default: %o.)
’.
If the -x
option is given, the description will be passed to
compadd
using the -x
option instead of the default -X
. This
means that the description will be displayed even if there are no
corresponding matches.
The options placed in the array name take account of the
group-name
style, so matches are placed in a separate group where
necessary. The group normally has its elements sorted (by passing the
option -J
to compadd
), but if an option starting with ‘-V
’,
‘-J
’, ‘-1
’, or ‘-2
’ is passed to _description
, that
option will be included in the array. Hence it is possible for the
completion group to be unsorted by giving the option ‘-V
’,
‘-1V
’, or ‘-2V
’.
In most cases, the function will be used like this:
local expl _description files expl file compadd "$expl[@]" - "$files[@]"
Note the use of the parameter expl
, the hyphen, and the list of
matches. Almost all calls to compadd
within the completion system use
a similar format; this ensures that user-specified styles are correctly
passed down to the builtins which implement the internals of completion.
_dir_list
[ -s
sep ] [ -S
] ¶Complete a list of directory names separated by colons
(the same format as $PATH
).
-s
sepUse sep as separator between items.
sep defaults to a colon (‘:
’).
-S
Add sep instead of slash (‘/
’) as an autoremoveable suffix.
_dispatch
context string ... ¶This sets the current context to context and looks for completion
functions to handle this context by hunting through the list of command
names or special contexts (as described above for compdef
)
given as strings. The first completion function to be defined
for one of the contexts in the list is used to generate matches.
Typically, the last string is -default-
to cause the function
for default completion to be used as a fallback.
The function sets the parameter
$service
to the string being tried, and sets
the context/command field (the fourth) of the $curcontext
parameter to the context given as the first argument.
_email_addresses
[ -c
] [ -n
plugin ] ¶Complete email addresses. Addresses are provided by plugins.
-c
Complete bare localhost@domain.tld
addresses, without a name part or
a comment.
Without this option, RFC822 ‘Firstname Lastname <
address>
’
strings are completed.
-n
pluginComplete aliases from plugin.
The following plugins are available by default:
_email-ldap
(see the filter
style),
_email-local
(completes user@
hostname Unix addresses),
_email-mail
(completes aliases from ~/.mailrc
),
_email-mush
,
_email-mutt
,
and
_email-pine
.
Addresses from the _email-
foo plugin are added under the
tag ‘email-
foo’.
Writing plugins
Plugins are written as separate functions with names starting with ‘_email-
’.
They are invoked with the -c
option and compadd
options.
They should either do their own completion or
set the $reply
array to a list of ‘alias:
address’ elements and return 300
.
New plugins will be picked up and run automatically.
_files
¶The function _files
is a wrapper around _path_files
. It supports
all of the same functionality, with some enhancements — notably, it
respects the list-dirs-first
style, and it allows users to override
the behaviour of the -g
and -/
options with the file-patterns
style. _files
should therefore be preferred over _path_files
in
most cases.
This function accepts the full set of options allowed by
_path_files
, described below.
_gnu_generic
¶This function is a simple wrapper around the _arguments
function
described above. It can be used to determine automatically the long
options understood by commands that produce a list when passed the
option ‘-
-help
’. It is intended to be used as a top-level
completion function in its own right. For example, to enable option
completion for the commands foo
and bar
, use
compdef _gnu_generic foo bar
after the call to compinit
.
The completion system as supplied is conservative in its use of this
function, since it is important to be sure the command understands the
option ‘-
-help
’.
_guard
[ options ] pattern descr ¶This function displays descr if pattern matches the string to
be completed. It is intended to be used in the action for the
specifications passed to _arguments
and similar functions.
The return status is zero if the message was displayed and the word to complete is not empty, and non-zero otherwise.
The pattern may be preceded by any of the options understood by
compadd
that are passed down from _description
, namely -M
,
-J
, -V
, -1
, -2
, -n
, -F
and -X
. All of these
options will be ignored. This fits in conveniently with the
argument-passing conventions of actions for _arguments
.
As an example, consider a command taking the options -n
and
-none
, where -n
must be followed by a numeric value in the
same word. By using:
_arguments '-n-: :_guard "[0-9]#" "numeric value"' '-none'
_arguments
can be made to both display the message ‘numeric
value
’ and complete options after ‘-n<TAB>
’. If the ‘-n
’ is
already followed by one or more digits (the pattern passed to
_guard
) only the message will be displayed; if the ‘-n
’ is
followed by another character, only options are completed.
_message
[ -r12
] [ -VJ
group ] descr ¶_message -e
[ tag ] descrThe descr is used in the same way as the third
argument to the _description
function, except that the resulting
string will always be shown whether or not matches were
generated. This is useful for displaying a help message in places where
no completions can be generated.
The format
style is examined with the messages
tag to find a
message; the usual tag, descriptions
, is used only if the style is
not set with the former.
If the -r
option is given, no style is used; the descr is
taken literally as the string to display. This is most useful
when the descr comes from a pre-processed argument list
which already contains an expanded description. Note that this
option does not disable the ‘%
’-sequence parsing done by
compadd
.
The -12VJ
options and the group are passed to compadd
and
hence determine the group the message string is added to.
The second -e
form gives a description for completions with the tag
tag to be shown even if there are no matches for that tag. This form
is called by _arguments
in the event that there is no action for an
option specification. The tag can be omitted and if so the tag is taken
from the parameter $curtag
; this is maintained by the completion
system and so is usually correct. Note that if there are no matches at
the time this function is called, compstate[insert]
is cleared, so
additional matches generated later are not inserted on the command line.
_multi_parts
[ -i
] sep array ¶The argument sep is a separator character.
The array may be either the
name of an array parameter or a literal array in the form
‘(foo bar
)
’, a parenthesised list of words separated
by whitespace. The possible completions are the
strings from the array. However, each chunk delimited by sep will be
completed separately. For example, the _tar
function uses
‘_multi_parts
/
patharray’ to complete partial file paths
from the given array of complete file paths.
The -i
option causes _multi_parts
to insert a unique match even
if that requires multiple separators to be inserted. This is not usually
the expected behaviour with filenames, but certain other types of
completion, for example those with a fixed set of possibilities, may be
more suited to this form.
Like other utility functions, this function accepts the ‘-V
’,
‘-J
’, ‘-1
’, ‘-2
’, ‘-n
’, ‘-f
’, ‘-X
’, ‘-M
’,
‘-P
’, ‘-S
’, ‘-r
’, ‘-R
’, and ‘-q
’ options and passes
them to the compadd
builtin.
_next_label
[ -x
] [ -12VJ
] tag name descr [ option ... ] ¶This function is used to implement the loop over different tag
labels for a particular tag as described above for the tag-order
style. On each call it checks to see if there are any more tag labels; if
there is it returns status zero, otherwise non-zero.
As this function requires a current tag to be set, it must always follow
a call to _tags
or _requested
.
The -x12VJ
options and the first three arguments are passed to the
_description
function. Where appropriate the tag will be
replaced by a tag label in this call. Any description given in
the tag-order
style is preferred to the descr passed to
_next_label
.
The options given after the descr
are set in the parameter given by name, and hence are to be passed
to compadd
or whatever function is called to add the matches.
Here is a typical use of this function for the tag foo
. The call to
_requested
determines if tag foo
is required at all; the loop
over _next_label
handles any labels defined for the tag in the
tag-order
style.
local expl ret=1 ... if _requested foo; then ... while _next_label foo expl '...'; do compadd "$expl[@]" ... && ret=0 done ... fi return ret
_normal
[ -P
| -p
precommand ] ¶This is the standard function called to handle completion outside
any special -
context-
. It is called both to complete the command
word and also the arguments for a command. In the second case,
_normal
looks for a special completion for that command, and if
there is none it uses the completion for the -default-
context.
A second use is to reexamine the command line specified by the $words
array and the $CURRENT
parameter after those have been modified.
For example, the function _precommand
, which
completes after precommand specifiers such as nohup
, removes the
first word from the words
array, decrements the CURRENT
parameter,
then calls ‘_normal -p $service
’. The effect is that
‘nohup
cmd ...’ is treated in the same way as ‘cmd ...’.
-P
Reset the list of precommands. This option should be used if completing
a command line which allows internal commands (e.g. builtins and
functions) regardless of prior precommands (e.g. ‘zsh -c
’).
-p
precommandAppend precommand to the list of precommands. This option should be
used in nearly all cases in which -P
is not applicable.
If the command name matches one of the patterns given by one of the
options -p
or -P
to compdef
, the corresponding completion
function is called and then the parameter _compskip
is
checked. If it is set completion is terminated at that point even if
no matches have been found. This is the same effect as in the
-first-
context.
_numbers
[ option ... ] [ description ] [ suffix ... ] ¶This can be used where a number is followed by a suffix to indicate the units. The unit suffixes are completed and can also be included in the description used when completion is invoked for the preceding number.
In addition to common compadd
options, _numbers
accepts the following
options:
-t
tagSpecify a tag to use instead of the default of numbers
.
-u
unitsIndicate the default units for the number, e.g. bytes
.
-l
minSpecify the lowest possible value for the number.
-m
maxSpecify the highest possible value for the number.
-d
defaultSpecify the default value.
-N
Allow negative numbers. This is implied if the range includes a negative.
-f
Allow decimal numbers.
Where a particular suffix represents the default units for a number, it should be prefixed with a colon. Additionally, suffixes can be followed by a colon and a description. So for example, the following allows the age of something to be specified, either in seconds or with an optional suffix with a longer unit of time:
_numbers -u seconds age :s:seconds m:minutes h:hours d:days
It is typically helpful for units to be presented in order of magnitude when completed. To facilitate this, the order in which they are given is preserved.
When the format
style is looked up with the descriptions
tag or
the tag specified with -t
, the list of suffixes is available as a
‘%x
’ escape sequence. This is in addition to the usual sequences
documented under the format
style. The form this list takes can also
be configured. To this end, the format
style is first looked up with
the tag unit-suffixes
. The retrieved format is applied to each
suffix in turn and the results are then concatenated to form the
completed list. For the unit-suffixes
format, ‘%x
’ expands to
the individual suffix and ‘%X
’ to its description. %d
’ indicates
a default suffix and can be used in a condition. The index and reverse
index are set in ‘%i
’ and ‘%r
’ respectively and are useful for
text included only with the first and last suffixes in the list. So for
example, the following joins the suffixes together as a comma-separated
list:
zstyle ':completion:*:unit-suffixes' format '%x%(r::,)'
_options
¶This can be used to complete the names of shell options. It provides a
matcher specification that ignores a leading ‘no
’, ignores
underscores and allows upper-case letters to
match their lower-case counterparts (for example, ‘glob
’,
‘noglob
’, ‘NO_GLOB
’ are all completed). Any arguments
are propagated to the compadd
builtin.
_options_set
and _options_unset
¶These functions complete only set or unset options, with the same
matching specification used in the _options
function.
Note that you need to uncomment a few lines in the _main_complete
function for these functions to work properly. The lines in question
are used to store the option settings in effect before the completion
widget locally sets the options it needs. Hence these functions are not
generally used by the completion system.
_parameters
¶This is used to complete the names of shell parameters.
The option ‘-g
pattern’ limits the completion to parameters
whose type matches the pattern. The type of a parameter is that
shown by ‘print ${(t)
param}
’, hence judicious use of
‘*
’ in pattern is probably necessary.
All other arguments are passed to the compadd
builtin.
_path_files
¶This function is used throughout the completion system
to complete filenames. It allows completion of partial paths. For
example, the string ‘/u/i/s/sig
’ may be completed to
‘/usr/include/sys/signal.h
’.
The options accepted by both _path_files
and _files
are:
-f
Complete all filenames. This is the default.
-/
Specifies that only directories should be completed.
-g
patternSpecifies that only files matching the pattern should be completed.
-W
pathsSpecifies path prefixes that are to be prepended to the string from the command line to generate the filenames but that should not be inserted as completions nor shown in completion listings. Here, paths may be the name of an array parameter, a literal list of paths enclosed in parentheses or an absolute pathname.
-F
ignored-filesThis behaves as for the corresponding option to the compadd
builtin.
It gives direct control over which
filenames should be ignored. If the option is not present, the
ignored-patterns
style is used.
Both _path_files
and _files
also accept the following options
which are passed to compadd
: ‘-J
’, ‘-V
’,
‘-1
’, ‘-2
’, ‘-n
’, ‘-X
’, ‘-M
’, ‘-P
’, ‘-S
’,
‘-q
’, ‘-r
’, and ‘-R
’.
Finally, the _path_files
function uses the styles expand
,
ambiguous
, special-dirs
, list-suffixes
and file-sort
described above.
_pick_variant
[ -b
builtin-label ] [ -c
command ] [ -r
name ]
label=
pattern ... label [ arg ... ]This function is used to resolve situations where a single command name requires more than one type of handling, either because it has more than one variant or because there is a name clash between two different commands.
The command to run is taken from the first element of the array
words
unless this is overridden by the option -c
. This command
is run and its output is compared with a series of patterns. Arguments
to be passed to the command can be specified at the end after all the
other arguments. The patterns to try in order are given by the arguments
label=
pattern; if the output of ‘command arg
...’ contains pattern, then label is selected as the label
for the command variant. If none of the patterns match, the final
command label is selected and status 1 is returned.
If the ‘-b
builtin-label’ is given, the command is tested to
see if it is provided as a shell builtin, possibly autoloaded; if so,
the label builtin-label is selected as the label for the variant.
If the ‘-r
name’ is given, the label picked is stored in
the parameter named name.
The results are also cached in the _cmd_variant
associative array
indexed by the name of the command run.
_regex_arguments
name spec ... ¶This function generates a completion function name which matches
the specifications specs, a set of regular expressions as
described below. After running _regex_arguments
, the function
name should be called as a normal completion function.
The pattern to be matched is given by the contents of
the words
array up to the current cursor position joined together
with null characters; no quotation is applied.
The arguments are grouped as sets of alternatives separated by ‘|
’,
which are tried one after the other until one matches. Each alternative
consists of a one or more specifications which are tried left to right,
with each pattern matched being stripped in turn from the command line
being tested, until all of the group succeeds or until one fails; in the
latter case, the next alternative is tried. This structure can be
repeated to arbitrary depth by using parentheses; matching proceeds from
inside to outside.
A special procedure is applied if no test succeeds but the remaining
command line string contains no null character (implying the remaining
word is the one for which completions are to be generated). The
completion target is restricted to the remaining word and any
actions for the corresponding patterns are executed. In this case,
nothing is stripped from the command line string. The order of
evaluation of the actions can be determined by the tag-order
style; the various formats supported by _alternative
can be used
in action. The descr is used for setting up the array
parameter expl
.
Specification arguments take one of following forms, in which
metacharacters such as ‘(
’, ‘)
’, ‘#
’ and ‘|
’
should be quoted.
/
pattern/
[%
lookahead%
] [-
guard] [:
tag:
descr:
action]This is a single primitive component.
The function tests whether the combined pattern
‘(#b)((#B)
pattern)
lookahead*
’ matches
the command line string. If so, ‘guard’ is evaluated and
its return status is examined to determine if the test has succeeded.
The pattern string ‘[]
’ is guaranteed never to match.
The lookahead is not stripped from the command line before the next
pattern is examined.
The argument starting with :
is used in the same manner as an argument to
_alternative
.
A component is used as follows: pattern is tested to see if the component already exists on the command line. If it does, any following specifications are examined to find something to complete. If a component is reached but no such pattern exists yet on the command line, the string containing the action is used to generate matches to insert at that point.
/
pattern/+
[%
lookahead%
] [-
guard] [:
tag:
descr:
action]This is similar to ‘/
pattern/
...’ but the left part of the
command line string (i.e. the part already matched by previous patterns)
is also considered part of the completion target.
/
pattern/-
[%
lookahead%
] [-
guard] [:
tag:
descr:
action]This is similar to ‘/
pattern/
...’ but the actions of the
current and previously matched patterns are ignored even if the
following ‘pattern’ matches the empty string.
(
spec )
Parentheses may be used to groups specs; note each parenthesis
is a single argument to _regex_arguments
.
#
This allows any number of repetitions of spec.
The two specs are to be matched one after the other as described above.
|
specEither of the two specs can be matched.
The function _regex_words
can be used as a helper function to
generate matches for a set of alternative words possibly with
their own arguments as a command line argument.
Examples:
_regex_arguments _tst /$'[^\0]#\0'/ \ /$'[^\0]#\0'/ :'compadd aaa'
This generates a function _tst
that completes aaa
as its only
argument. The tag and description for the action have been
omitted for brevity (this works but is not recommended in normal use).
The first component matches the command word, which is arbitrary; the
second matches any argument. As the argument is also arbitrary, any
following component would not depend on aaa
being present.
_regex_arguments _tst /$'[^\0]#\0'/ \ /$'aaa\0'/ :'compadd aaa'
This is a more typical use; it is similar, but any following patterns
would only match if aaa
was present as the first argument.
_regex_arguments _tst /$'[^\0]#\0'/ \( \ /$'aaa\0'/ :'compadd aaa' \ /$'bbb\0'/ :'compadd bbb' \) \#
In this example, an indefinite number of command arguments may be
completed. Odd arguments are completed as aaa
and even arguments
as bbb
. Completion fails unless the set of aaa
and bbb
arguments before the current one is matched correctly.
_regex_arguments _tst /$'[^\0]#\0'/ \ \( /$'aaa\0'/ :'compadd aaa' \| \ /$'bbb\0'/ :'compadd bbb' \) \#
This is similar, but either aaa
or bbb
may be completed for
any argument. In this case _regex_words
could be used to generate
a suitable expression for the arguments.
_regex_words
tag description spec ... ¶This function can be used to generate arguments for the
_regex_arguments
command which may be inserted at any point where
a set of rules is expected. The tag and description give a
standard tag and description pertaining to the current context. Each
spec contains two or three arguments separated by a colon: note
that there is no leading colon in this case.
Each spec gives one of a set of words that may be completed at
this point, together with arguments. It is thus roughly equivalent to
the _arguments
function when used in normal (non-regex) completion.
The part of the spec before the first colon is the word to be
completed. This may contain a *
; the entire word, before and after
the *
is completed, but only the text before the *
is required
for the context to be matched, so that further arguments may be
completed after the abbreviated form.
The second part of spec is a description for the word being completed.
The optional third part of the spec describes how words following the one being completed are themselves to be completed. It will be evaluated in order to avoid problems with quoting. This means that typically it contains a reference to an array containing previously generated regex arguments.
The option -t
term specifies a terminator for the word
instead of the usual space. This is handled as an auto-removable suffix
in the manner of the option -s
sep to _values
.
The result of the processing by _regex_words
is placed in the array
reply
, which should be made local to the calling function.
If the set of words and arguments may be matched repeatedly, a #
should be appended to the generated array at that point.
For example:
local -a reply _regex_words mydb-commands 'mydb commands' \ 'add:add an entry to mydb:$mydb_add_cmds' \ 'show:show entries in mydb' _regex_arguments _mydb "$reply[@]" _mydb "$@"
This shows a completion function for a command mydb
which takes
two command arguments, add
and show
. show
takes no arguments,
while the arguments for add
have already been prepared in an
array mydb_add_cmds
, quite possibly by a previous call to
_regex_words
.
_requested
[ -x
] [ -12VJ
] tag [ name descr [ command [ arg ... ] ] ¶This function is called to decide whether a tag already registered by a
call to _tags
(see below) has been requested by the user and hence
completion should be performed for it. It returns status zero if the
tag is requested and non-zero otherwise. The function is typically used
as part of a loop over different tags as follows:
_tags foo bar baz while _tags; do if _requested foo; then ... # perform completion for foo fi ... # test the tags bar and baz in the same way ... # exit loop if matches were generated done
Note that the test for whether matches were generated is not performed
until the end of the _tags
loop. This is so that the user can set
the tag-order
style to specify a set of tags to be completed at the
same time.
If name and descr are given, _requested
calls the
_description
function with these arguments together with the options
passed to _requested
.
If command is given, the _all_labels
function will be called
immediately with the same arguments. In simple cases this makes it
possible to perform the test for the tag and the matching in one go.
For example:
local expl ret=1 _tags foo bar baz while _tags; do _requested foo expl 'description' \ compadd foobar foobaz && ret=0 ... (( ret )) || break done
If the command is not compadd
, it must nevertheless be prepared
to handle the same options.
_retrieve_cache
cache_identifier ¶This function retrieves completion information from the file given by
cache_identifier, stored in a directory specified by the
cache-path
style which defaults to ~/.zcompcache
. The return status
is zero if retrieval was successful. It will only attempt retrieval
if the use-cache
style is set, so you can call this function
without worrying about whether the user wanted to use the caching
layer.
See _store_cache
below for more details.
_sep_parts
¶This function is passed alternating arrays and separators as arguments.
The arrays specify completions for parts of strings to be separated by the
separators. The arrays may be the names of array parameters or
a quoted list of words in parentheses. For example, with the array
‘hosts=(ftp news)
’ the call ‘_sep_parts '(foo bar)' @ hosts
’ will
complete the string ‘f
’ to ‘foo
’ and the string ‘b@n
’ to
‘bar@news
’.
This function accepts the compadd
options ‘-V
’, ‘-J
’,
‘-1
’, ‘-2
’, ‘-n
’, ‘-X
’, ‘-M
’, ‘-P
’, ‘-S
’,
‘-r
’, ‘-R
’, and ‘-q
’ and passes them on to the compadd
builtin used to add the matches.
_sequence
[ -s
sep ] [ -n
max ] [ -d
] function [ -
] ... ¶This function is a wrapper to other functions for completing items in a
separated list. The same function is used to complete each item in the
list. The separator is specified with the -s
option. If -s
is
omitted it will use ‘,
’. Duplicate values are not matched unless
-d
is specified. If there is a fixed or maximum number of items in
the list, this can be specified with the -n
option.
Common compadd
options are passed on to the function. It is possible
to use compadd
directly with _sequence
, though _values
may
be more appropriate in this situation.
_setup
tag [ group ] ¶This function sets up the special
parameters used by the completion system appropriately for the tag
given as the first argument. It uses the styles list-colors
,
list-packed
, list-rows-first
, last-prompt
, accept-exact
,
menu
and force-list
.
The optional group supplies the name of the group in which the matches will be placed. If it is not given, the tag is used as the group name.
This function is called automatically from _description
and hence is not normally called explicitly.
_store_cache
cache_identifier param ... ¶This function, together with _retrieve_cache
and
_cache_invalid
, implements a caching layer which can be used
in any completion function. Data obtained by
costly operations are stored in parameters;
this function then dumps the values of those parameters to a file. The
data can then be retrieved quickly from that file via _retrieve_cache
,
even in different instances of the shell.
The cache_identifier specifies the file which the data should be
dumped to. The file is stored in a directory specified by the
cache-path
style which defaults to ~/.zcompcache
. The remaining
params arguments are the parameters to dump to the file.
The return status is zero if storage was successful. The function will
only attempt storage if the use-cache
style is set, so you can
call this function without worrying about whether the user wanted to
use the caching layer.
The completion function may avoid calling _retrieve_cache
when it
already has the completion data available as parameters.
However, in that case it should
call _cache_invalid
to check whether the data in the parameters and
in the cache are still valid.
See the _perl_modules completion function for a simple example of the usage of the caching layer.
_tags
[ [ -C
name ] tag ... ] ¶If called with arguments, these are taken to be the names of tags
valid for completions in the current context. These tags are stored
internally and sorted by using the tag-order
style.
Next, _tags
is called repeatedly without arguments from the same
completion function. This successively selects the first, second,
etc. set of tags requested by the user. The return status is zero if at
least one of the tags is requested and non-zero otherwise. To test if a
particular tag is to be tried, the _requested
function should be
called (see above).
If ‘-C
name’ is given, name is temporarily stored in the
argument field (the fifth) of the context in the curcontext
parameter
during the call to _tags
; the field is restored on exit. This
allows _tags
to use a more
specific context without having to change and reset the
curcontext
parameter (which has the same effect).
_tilde_files
¶Like _files
, but resolve leading tildes according to the rules of
filename expansion, so the suggested completions don’t start with
a ‘~
’ even if the filename on the command-line does.
_values
[ -O
name ] [ -s
sep ] [ -S
sep ] [ -wC
] desc spec ... ¶This is used to complete arbitrary keywords (values) and their arguments, or lists of such combinations.
If the first argument is the option ‘-O
name’, it will be used
in the same way as by the _arguments
function. In other words, the
elements of the name array will be passed to compadd
when executing an action.
If the first argument (or the first argument after ‘-O
name’)
is ‘-s
’, the next argument is used as the character that separates
multiple values. This character is automatically added after each value
in an auto-removable fashion (see below); all values completed by
‘_values -s
’ appear in the same word on the command line, unlike
completion using _arguments
. If this option is not present, only a
single value will be completed per word.
Normally, _values
will only use the current word to determine
which values are already present on the command line and hence are not
to be completed again. If the -w
option is given, other arguments
are examined as well.
The first non-option argument, desc, is used as a string to print as a description before listing the values.
All other arguments describe the possible values and their
arguments in the same format used for the description of options by
the _arguments
function (see above). The only differences are that
no minus or plus sign is required at the beginning,
values can have only one argument, and the forms of action
beginning with an equal sign are not supported.
The character separating a value from its argument can be set using the
option -S
(like -s
, followed by the character to use as the
separator in the next argument). By default the equals
sign will be used as the separator between values and arguments.
Example:
_values -s , 'description' \ '*foo[bar]' \ '(two)*one[number]:first count:' \ 'two[another number]::second count:(1 2 3)'
This describes three possible values: ‘foo
’, ‘one
’, and
‘two
’. The first is described as ‘bar
’, takes no argument
and may appear more than once. The second is described as
‘number
’, may appear more than once, and takes one mandatory
argument described as ‘first count
’; no action is
specified, so it will not be completed. The
‘(two)
’ at the beginning says that if the value ‘one
’ is on
the line, the value ‘two
’ will no longer be considered a possible
completion. Finally, the last value (‘two
’) is described
as ‘another number
’ and takes an optional argument described as
‘second count
’ for which the completions (to appear after an
‘=
’) are ‘1
’, ‘2
’, and ‘3
’. The _values
function
will complete lists of these values separated by commas.
Like _arguments
, this function temporarily adds another context name
component to the arguments element (the fifth) of the current context
while executing the action. Here this name is just the name of the
value for which the argument is completed.
The style verbose
is used to decide if the descriptions for the
values (but not those for the arguments) should be printed.
The associative array val_args
is used to report values and their
arguments; this works similarly to the opt_args
associative array
used by _arguments
. Hence the function calling _values
should
declare the local parameters state
, state_descr
, line
,
context
and val_args
:
local context state state_descr line typeset -A val_args
when using an action of the form ‘->
string’. With this
function the context
parameter will be set to the name of the
value whose argument is to be completed. Note that for _values
,
the state
and state_descr
are scalars rather than arrays.
Only a single matching state is returned.
Note also that _values
normally adds the character used as the
separator between values as an auto-removable suffix (similar to a
‘/
’ after a directory). However, this is not possible for a
‘->
string’ action as the matches for the argument are
generated by the calling function. To get the usual behaviour,
the calling function can add the separator x as a suffix by
passing the options ‘-qS
x’ either directly or indirectly to
compadd
.
The option -C
is treated in the same way as it is by _arguments
.
In that case the parameter curcontext
should be made local instead
of context
(as described above).
_wanted
[ -x
] [ -C
name ] [ -12VJ
] tag name descr command [ arg ...] ¶In many contexts, completion can only generate one particular set of matches, usually corresponding to a single tag. However, it is still necessary to decide whether the user requires matches of this type. This function is useful in such a case.
The arguments to _wanted
are the same as those to _requested
,
i.e. arguments to be passed to _description
. However, in this case
the command is not optional; all the processing of tags, including
the loop over both tags and tag labels and the generation of matches,
is carried out automatically by _wanted
.
Hence to offer only one tag and immediately add the corresponding matches with the given description:
local expl _wanted tag expl 'description' \ compadd -- match1 match2...
See also the use of _wanted
in the example function in
Dynamic named directories.
Note that, as for _requested
, the command must be able to
accept options to be passed down to compadd
.
Like _tags
this function supports the -C
option to give a
different name for the argument context field. The -x
option has
the same meaning as for _description
.
_widgets
[ -g
pattern ] ¶This function completes names of zle widgets (see
Zle Widgets). The pattern, if present, is matched against values of the $widgets
special parameter, documented in
The zsh/zleparameter Module.
There are some standard variables, initialised by the _main_complete
function and then used from other functions.
The standard variables are:
_comp_caller_options
The completion system uses setopt
to set a number of options. This
allows functions to be written without concern for compatibility with
every possible combination of user options. However, sometimes completion
needs to know what the user’s option preferences are. These are saved
in the _comp_caller_options
associative array. Option names, spelled
in lowercase without underscores, are mapped to one or other of the
strings ‘on
’ and ‘off
’.
_comp_priv_prefix
Completion functions such as _sudo
can set the _comp_priv_prefix
array to a command prefix that may then be used by _call_program
to
match the privileges when calling programs to generate matches.
Two more features are offered by the _main_complete
function. The
arrays compprefuncs
and comppostfuncs
may contain
names of functions that are to be called immediately before or after
completion has been tried. A function will only be called once unless
it explicitly reinserts itself into the array.
In the source distribution, the files are contained in various
subdirectories of the Completion
directory. They may have been
installed in the same structure, or into one single function directory.
The following is a description of the files found in the original directory
structure. If you wish to alter an installed file, you will need to copy
it to some directory which appears earlier in your fpath
than the
standard directory where it appears.
Base
The core functions and special completion widgets automatically bound to keys. You will certainly need most of these, though will probably not need to alter them. Many of these are documented above.
Zsh
Functions for completing arguments of shell builtin commands and
utility functions for this. Some of these are also used by functions from
the Unix
directory.
Unix
Functions for completing arguments of external commands and suites of
commands. They may need modifying for your system, although in many cases
some attempt is made to decide which version of a command is present. For
example, completion for the mount
command tries to determine the system
it is running on, while completion for many other utilities try to decide
whether the GNU version of the command is in use, and hence whether the
-
-help
option is supported.
X
, AIX
, BSD
, ...Completion and utility function for commands available only on some systems.
These are not arranged hierarchically, so, for example, both the
Linux
and Debian
directories, as well as the X
directory,
may be useful on your system.
This version of zsh has two ways of performing completion of words on the
command line. New users of the shell may prefer to use the newer
and more powerful system based on shell functions; this is described
in Completion System, and the basic shell mechanisms which support
it are described in Completion Widgets. This chapter describes
the older compctl
command.
compctl
[ -CDT
] options [ command ... ]compctl
[ -CDT
] options [ -x
pattern options -
... -
-
]
[ +
options [ -x
... -
-
] ... [+
] ] [ command ... ]compctl
-M
match-specs ...compctl
-L
[ -CDTM
] [ command ... ]compctl
+
command ...Control the editor’s completion behavior according to the supplied set
of options. Various editing commands, notably
expand-or-complete-word
, usually bound to tab, will
attempt to complete a word typed by the user, while others, notably
delete-char-or-list
, usually bound to ^D in EMACS editing
mode, list the possibilities; compctl
controls what those
possibilities are. They may for example be filenames (the most common
case, and hence the default), shell variables, or words from a
user-specified list.
Completion of the arguments of a command may be different for each
command or may use the default. The behavior when completing the
command word itself may also be separately specified. These
correspond to the following flags and arguments, all of which (except
for -L
) may be combined with any combination of the
options described subsequently in Option Flags:
controls completion for the named commands, which must be listed last
on the command line. If completion is attempted for a command with a
pathname containing slashes and no completion definition is found, the
search is retried with the last pathname component. If the command starts
with a =
, completion is tried with the pathname of the command.
Any of the command strings may be patterns of the form normally
used for filename generation. These should be quoted to protect them
from immediate expansion; for example the command string 'foo*'
arranges for completion of the words of any command beginning with
foo
. When completion is attempted, all pattern completions are
tried in the reverse order of their definition until one matches. By
default, completion then proceeds as normal, i.e. the shell will try to
generate more matches for the specific command on the command line; this
can be overridden by including -tn
in the flags for the pattern
completion.
Note that aliases
are expanded before the command name is determined unless the
COMPLETE_ALIASES
option is set. Commands may not be combined
with the -C
, -D
or -T
flags.
-C
controls completion when the command word itself is being completed.
If no compctl -C
command has been issued, the names of any
executable command (whether in the path or specific to the shell, such
as aliases or functions) are completed.
-D
controls default completion behavior for the arguments of commands not
assigned any special behavior. If no compctl -D
command has
been issued, filenames are completed.
-T
supplies completion flags to be used before any other processing is
done, even before processing for compctl
s defined for specific
commands. This is especially useful when combined with extended
completion (the -x
flag, see Extended Completion below).
Using this flag you can define default behavior
which will apply to all commands without exception, or you can alter
the standard behavior for all commands. For example, if your access
to the user database is too slow and/or it contains too many users (so
that completion after ‘~
’ is too slow to be usable), you can use
compctl -T -x 's[~] C[0,[^/]#]' -k friends -S/ -tn
to complete the strings in the array friends
after a ‘~
’.
The C[
...]
argument is necessary so that this form of
~
-completion is
not tried after the directory name is finished.
-L
lists the existing completion behavior in a manner suitable for
putting into a start-up script; the existing behavior is not changed.
Any combination of the above forms, or the -M
flag (which must
follow the -L
flag), may be specified, otherwise all defined
completions are listed. Any other flags supplied are ignored.
If no argument is given, compctl
lists all defined completions
in an abbreviated form; with a list of options, all completions
with those flags set (not counting extended completion) are listed.
If the +
flag is alone and followed immediately by the command
list, the completion behavior for all the commands in the list is reset to
the default. In other words, completion will subsequently use the
options specified by the -D
flag.
The form with -M
as the first and only option defines global
matching specifications (see
Completion Matching Control). The match specifications given will be used for every completion
attempt (only when using compctl
, not with the new completion
system) and are tried in the order in which they are defined until one
generates at least one match. E.g.:
compctl -M {No value for `dsq'} 'm:{a-zA-Z}={A-Za-z}'
This will first try completion without any global match specifications (the empty string) and, if that generates no matches, will try case insensitive completion.
-fcFBdeaRGovNAIOPZEnbjrzu/12
]-k
array ] [ -g
globstring ] [ -s
subststring ]-K
function ]-Q
] [ -P
prefix ] [ -S
suffix ]-W
file-prefix ] [ -H
num pattern ]-q
] [ -X
explanation ] [ -Y
explanation ]-y
func-or-var ] [ -l
cmd ] [ -h
cmd ] [ -U
]-t
continue ] [ -J
name ] [ -V
name ]-M
match-spec ]The remaining options specify the type of command arguments to look for during completion. Any combination of these flags may be specified; the result is a sorted list of all the possibilities. The options are as follows.
These produce completion lists made up by the shell itself:
-f
Filenames and file system paths.
-/
Just file system paths.
-c
Command names, including aliases, shell functions, builtins and reserved words.
-F
Function names.
-B
Names of builtin commands.
-m
Names of external commands.
-w
Reserved words.
-a
Alias names.
-R
Names of regular (non-global) aliases.
-G
Names of global aliases.
-d
This can be combined with -F
, -B
, -w
,
-a
, -R
and -G
to get names of disabled
functions, builtins, reserved words or aliases.
-e
This option (to show enabled commands) is in effect by default, but
may be combined with -d
; -de
in combination with
-F
, -B
, -w
, -a
, -R
and -G
will complete names of functions, builtins, reserved words or aliases
whether or not they are disabled.
-o
Names of shell options (see Options).
-v
Names of any variable defined in the shell.
-N
Names of scalar (non-array) parameters.
-A
Array names.
-I
Names of integer variables.
-O
Names of read-only variables.
-p
Names of parameters used by the shell (including special parameters).
-Z
Names of shell special parameters.
-E
Names of environment variables.
-n
Named directories.
-b
Key binding names.
-j
Job names: the first word of the job leader’s command line. This is useful
with the kill
builtin.
-r
Names of running jobs.
-z
Names of suspended jobs.
-u
User names.
These have user supplied arguments to determine how the list of completions is to be made up:
-k
arrayNames taken from the elements of $
array (note that the ‘$
’
does not appear on the command line).
Alternatively, the argument array itself may be a set
of space- or comma-separated values in parentheses, in which any
delimiter may be escaped with a backslash; in this case the argument
should be quoted. For example,
compctl -k "(cputime filesize datasize stacksize coredumpsize resident descriptors)" limit
-g
globstringThe globstring is expanded using filename globbing; it should be
quoted to protect it from immediate expansion. The resulting
filenames are taken as the possible completions. Use ‘*(/)
’ instead of
‘*/
’ for directories. The fignore
special parameter is not
applied to the resulting files. More than one pattern may be given
separated by blanks. (Note that brace expansion is not part of
globbing. Use the syntax ‘(either|or)
’ to match alternatives.)
-s
subststringThe subststring is split into words and these words are than
expanded using all shell expansion mechanisms (see
Expansion). The resulting words are taken as possible
completions. The fignore
special parameter is not applied to the
resulting files. Note that -g
is faster for filenames.
-K
function ¶Call the given function to get the completions. Unless the name
starts with an underscore, the function is
passed two arguments: the prefix and the suffix of the word on which
completion is to be attempted, in other words those characters before
the cursor position, and those from the cursor position onwards. The
whole command line can be accessed with the -c
and -l
flags
of the read
builtin. The
function should set the variable reply
to an array containing
the completions (one completion per element); note that reply
should not be made local to the function. From such a function the
command line can be accessed with the -c
and -l
flags to
the read
builtin. For example,
function whoson { reply=(`users`); } compctl -K whoson talk
completes only logged-on users after ‘talk
’. Note that ‘whoson
’ must
return an array, so ‘reply=`users`
’ would be incorrect.
-H
num patternThe possible completions are taken from the last num history
lines. Only words matching pattern are taken. If num is
zero or negative the whole history is searched and if pattern is
the empty string all words are taken (as with ‘*
’). A typical
use is
compctl -D -f + -H 0 {No value for `dsq'}
which forces completion to look back in the history list for a word if no filename matches.
These do not directly specify types of name to be completed, but manipulate the options that do:
-Q
This instructs the shell not to quote any metacharacters in the possible
completions. Normally the results of a completion are inserted into
the command line with any metacharacters quoted so that they are
interpreted as normal characters. This is appropriate for filenames
and ordinary strings. However, for special effects, such as inserting
a backquoted expression from a completion array (-k
) so that
the expression will not be evaluated until the complete line is
executed, this option must be used.
-P
prefixThe prefix is inserted just before the completed string; any initial part already typed will be completed and the whole prefix ignored for completion purposes. For example,
compctl -j -P "%" kill
inserts a ‘%’ after the kill command and then completes job names.
-S
suffixWhen a completion is found the suffix is inserted after the completed string. In the case of menu completion the suffix is inserted immediately, but it is still possible to cycle through the list of completions by repeatedly hitting the same key.
-W
file-prefixWith directory file-prefix: for command, file, directory and
globbing completion (options -c
, -f
, -/
, -g
), the file
prefix is implicitly added in front of the completion. For example,
compctl -/ -W ~/Mail maildirs
completes any subdirectories to any depth beneath the directory
~/Mail
, although that prefix does not appear on the command line.
The file-prefix may also be of the form accepted by the -k
flag, i.e. the name of an array or a literal list in parenthesis. In
this case all the directories in the list will be searched for
possible completions.
-q
If used with a suffix as specified by the -S
option, this
causes the suffix to be removed if the next character typed is a blank
or does not insert anything or if the suffix consists of only one character
and the next character typed is the same character; this the same rule used
for the AUTO_REMOVE_SLASH
option. The option is most useful for list
separators (comma, colon, etc.).
-l
cmdThis option restricts the range
of command line words that are considered to be arguments. If
combined with one of the extended completion patterns ‘p[
...]
’,
‘r[
...]
’, or ‘R[
...]
’ (see Extended Completion
below) the range is restricted to the range of arguments
specified in the brackets. Completion is then performed as if these
had been given as arguments to the cmd supplied with the
option. If the cmd string is empty the first word in the range
is instead taken as the command name, and command name completion
performed on the first word in the range. For example,
compctl -x 'r[-exec,;]' -l {No value for `dsq'} -- find
completes arguments between ‘-exec
’ and the following ‘;
’ (or the end
of the command line if there is no such string) as if they were
a separate command line.
-h
cmdNormally zsh completes quoted strings as a whole. With this option,
completion can be done separately on different parts of such
strings. It works like the -l
option but makes the completion code
work on the parts of the current word that are separated by
spaces. These parts are completed as if they were arguments to the
given cmd. If cmd is the empty string, the first part is
completed as a command name, as with -l
.
-U
Use the whole list of possible completions, whether or not they
actually match the word on the command line. The word typed so far
will be deleted. This is most useful with a function (given by the
-K
option) which can examine the word components passed to it
(or via the read
builtin’s -c
and -l
flags) and
use its own criteria to decide what matches. If there is no
completion, the original word is retained. Since the produced
possible completions seldom have interesting common prefixes
and suffixes, menu completion is started immediately if AUTO_MENU
is
set and this flag is used.
-y
func-or-var ¶The list provided by func-or-var is displayed instead of the list
of completions whenever a listing is required; the actual completions
to be inserted are not affected. It can be provided in two
ways. Firstly, if func-or-var begins with a $
it defines a
variable, or if it begins with a left parenthesis a literal
array, which contains the list. A variable may have been set by a
call to a function using the -K
option. Otherwise it contains the
name of a function which will be executed to create the list. The
function will be passed as an argument list all matching completions,
including prefixes and suffixes expanded in full, and should set the
array reply
to the result. In both cases, the display list will
only be retrieved after a complete list of matches has been created.
Note that the returned list does not have to correspond, even in length, to the original set of matches, and may be passed as a scalar instead of an array. No special formatting of characters is performed on the output in this case; in particular, newlines are printed literally and if they appear output in columns is suppressed.
-X
explanationPrint explanation when trying completion on the current set of
options. A ‘%n
’ in this string is replaced by the number of
matches that were added for this explanation string.
The explanation only appears if completion was tried and there was
no unique match, or when listing completions. Explanation strings
will be listed together with the matches of the group specified
together with the -X
option (using the -J
or -V
option). If the same explanation string is given to multiple -X
options, the string appears only once (for each group) and the number
of matches shown for the ‘%n
’ is the total number of all matches
for each of these uses. In any case, the explanation string will only
be shown if there was at least one match added for the explanation
string.
The sequences %B
, %b
, %S
, %s
, %U
, and %u
specify
output attributes (bold, standout, and underline), %F
, %f
, %K
,
%k
specify foreground and background colours, and %{
...%}
can
be used to include literal escape sequences as in prompts.
-Y
explanationIdentical to -X
, except that the explanation first undergoes
expansion following the usual rules for strings in double quotes.
The expansion will be carried out after any functions are called for
the -K
or -y
options, allowing them to set variables.
-t
continueThe continue-string contains a character that specifies which set of completion flags should be used next. It is useful:
(i) With -T
, or when trying a list of pattern completions, when
compctl
would usually continue with ordinary processing after
finding matches; this can be suppressed with ‘-tn
’.
(ii) With a list of alternatives separated by +
, when compctl
would normally stop when one of the alternatives generates matches. It
can be forced to consider the next set of completions by adding ‘-t+
’
to the flags of the alternative before the ‘+
’.
(iii) In an extended completion list (see below), when compctl
would
normally continue until a set of conditions succeeded, then use only
the immediately following flags. With ‘-t-
’, compctl
will
continue trying extended completions after the next ‘-
’; with
‘-tx
’ it will attempt completion with the default flags, in other
words those before the ‘-x
’.
-J
nameThis gives the name of the group the matches should be placed in. Groups
are listed and sorted separately; likewise, menu completion will offer
the matches in the groups in the order in which the groups were
defined. If no group name is explicitly given, the matches are stored in
a group named default
. The first time a group name is encountered,
a group with that name is created. After that all matches with the same
group name are stored in that group.
This can be useful with non-exclusive alternative completions. For example, in
compctl -f -J files -t+ + -v -J variables foo
both files and variables are possible completions, as the -t+
forces
both sets of alternatives before and after the +
to be considered at
once. Because of the -J
options, however, all files are listed
before all variables.
-V
nameLike -J
, but matches within the group will not be sorted in listings
nor in menu completion. These unsorted groups are in a different name
space from the sorted ones, so groups defined as -J files
and -V
files
are distinct.
-1
If given together with the -V
option, makes
only consecutive duplicates in the group be removed. Note that groups
with and without this flag are in different name spaces.
-2
If given together with the -J
or -V
option, makes all
duplicates be kept. Again, groups with and without this flag are in
different name spaces.
-M
match-specThis defines additional matching control specifications that should be used only when testing words for the list of flags this flag appears in. The format of the match-spec string is described in Completion Matching Control.
compctl
[ -CDT
] options +
options [ +
... ] [ +
] command ...The form with ‘+
’ specifies alternative options. Completion is
tried with the options before the first ‘+
’. If this produces no
matches completion is tried with the flags after the ‘+
’ and so on. If
there are no flags after the last ‘+
’ and a match has not been found
up to that point, default completion is tried.
If the list of flags contains a -t
with a +
character, the next
list of flags is used even if the current list produced matches.
Additional options are available that restrict completion to some part of the command line; this is referred to as ‘extended completion’.
compctl
[ -CDT
] options -x
pattern options -
... -
-
[ command ... ]compctl
[ -CDT
] options [ -x
pattern options -
... -
-
]
[ +
options [ -x
... -
-
] ... [+
] ] [ command ... ]The form with ‘-x
’ specifies extended completion for the
commands given; as shown, it may be combined with alternative
completion using ‘+
’. Each pattern is examined in turn; when a
match is found, the corresponding options, as described in
Option Flags above, are used to generate possible
completions. If no pattern matches, the options given
before the -x
are used.
Note that each pattern should be supplied as a single argument and should be quoted to prevent expansion of metacharacters by the shell.
A pattern is built of sub-patterns separated by commas; it
matches if at least one of these sub-patterns matches (they are
‘or’ed). These sub-patterns are in turn composed of other
sub-patterns separated by white spaces which match if all of the
sub-patterns match (they are ‘and’ed). An element of the
sub-patterns is of the form ‘c[
...][
...]
’, where the pairs of
brackets may be repeated as often as necessary, and matches if any of
the sets of brackets match (an ‘or’). The example below makes this
clearer.
The elements may be any of the following:
s[
string]
...Matches if the current word on the command line starts with one of the strings given in brackets. The string is not removed and is not part of the completion.
S[
string]
...Like s[
string]
except that the string is part of the
completion.
p[
from,
to]
...Matches if the number of the current word is between one of
the from and to pairs inclusive. The comma and to
are optional; to defaults to the same value as from. The
numbers may be negative: -
n refers to the n’th last word
on the line.
c[
offset,
string]
...Matches if the string matches the word offset by offset from the current word position. Usually offset will be negative.
C[
offset,
pattern]
...Like c
but using pattern matching instead.
w[
index,
string]
...Matches if the word in position index is equal to the corresponding string. Note that the word count is made after any alias expansion.
W[
index,
pattern]
...Like w
but using pattern matching instead.
n[
index,
string]
...Matches if the current word contains string. Anything up to and including the indexth occurrence of this string will not be considered part of the completion, but the rest will. index may be negative to count from the end: in most cases, index will be 1 or -1. For example,
compctl -s '`users`' -x 'n[1,@]' -k hosts -- talk
will usually complete usernames, but if you insert an @
after the
name, names from the array hosts (assumed to contain hostnames,
though you must make the array yourself) will be completed. Other
commands such as rcp
can be handled similarly.
N[
index,
string]
...Like n
except that the string will be
taken as a character class. Anything up to and including the
indexth occurrence of any of the characters in string
will not be considered part of the completion.
m[
min,
max]
...Matches if the total number of words lies between min and max inclusive.
r[
str1,
str2]
...Matches if the cursor is after a word with prefix str1. If there is also a word with prefix str2 on the command line after the one matched by str1 it matches only if the cursor is before this word. If the comma and str2 are omitted, it matches if the cursor is after a word with prefix str1.
R[
str1,
str2]
...Like r
but using pattern matching instead.
q[
str]
...Matches the word currently being completed is in single quotes and the str begins with the letter ‘s’, or if completion is done in double quotes and str starts with the letter ‘d’, or if completion is done in backticks and str starts with a ‘b’.
compctl -u -x 's[+] c[-1,-f],s[-f+]' \ -g '~/Mail/*(:t)' - 's[-f],c[-1,-f]' -f -- mail
This is to be interpreted as follows:
If the current command is mail
, then
if ((the current word begins with
+
and the previous word is-f
) or (the current word begins with-f+
)), then complete the non-directory part (the ‘:t
’ glob modifier) of files in the directoryif the current word begins with
-f
or the previous word was-f
, then complete any file; elsecomplete user names.
Some optional parts of zsh are in modules, separate from the core
of the shell. Each of these modules may be linked in to the
shell at build time,
or can be dynamically linked while the shell is running
if the installation supports this feature.
Modules are linked at runtime with the zmodload
command,
see Shell Builtin Commands.
The modules that are bundled with the zsh distribution are:
zsh/attr
Builtins for manipulating extended attributes (xattr).
zsh/cap
Builtins for manipulating POSIX.1e (POSIX.6) capability (privilege) sets.
zsh/clone
A builtin that can clone a running shell onto another terminal.
zsh/compctl
The compctl
builtin for controlling completion.
zsh/complete
The basic completion code.
zsh/complist
Completion listing extensions.
zsh/computil
A module with utility builtins needed for the shell function based completion system.
zsh/curses
curses windowing commands
zsh/datetime
Some date/time commands and parameters.
zsh/db/gdbm
Builtins for managing associative array parameters tied to GDBM databases.
zsh/deltochar
A ZLE function duplicating EMACS’ zap-to-char
.
zsh/example
An example of how to write a module.
zsh/files
Some basic file manipulation commands as builtins.
zsh/langinfo
Interface to locale information.
zsh/mapfile
Access to external files via a special associative array.
zsh/mathfunc
Standard scientific functions for use in mathematical evaluations.
zsh/nearcolor
Map colours to the nearest colour in the available palette.
zsh/newuser
Arrange for files for new users to be installed.
zsh/parameter
Access to internal hash tables via special associative arrays.
zsh/pcre
Interface to the PCRE library.
zsh/param/private
Builtins for managing private-scoped parameters in function context.
zsh/regex
Interface to the POSIX regex library.
zsh/sched
A builtin that provides a timed execution facility within the shell.
zsh/net/socket
Manipulation of Unix domain sockets
zsh/stat
A builtin command interface to the stat
system call.
zsh/system
A builtin interface to various low-level system features.
zsh/net/tcp
Manipulation of TCP sockets
zsh/termcap
Interface to the termcap database.
zsh/terminfo
Interface to the terminfo database.
zsh/watch
Reporting of login and logout events.
zsh/zftp
A builtin FTP client.
zsh/zle
The Zsh Line Editor, including the bindkey
and vared
builtins.
zsh/zleparameter
Access to internals of the Zsh Line Editor via parameters.
zsh/zprof
A module allowing profiling for shell functions.
zsh/zpty
A builtin for starting a command in a pseudo-terminal.
zsh/zselect
Block and return when file descriptors are ready.
zsh/zutil
Some utility builtins, e.g. the one for supporting configuration via styles.
The zsh/attr
module is used for manipulating extended attributes.
The -h
option causes all commands to operate on symbolic links instead
of their targets.
The builtins in this module are:
zgetattr
[ -h
] filename attribute [ parameter ] ¶Get the extended attribute attribute from the specified filename. If the optional argument parameter is given, the attribute is set on that parameter instead of being printed to stdout.
zsetattr
[ -h
] filename attribute value ¶Set the extended attribute attribute on the specified filename to value.
zdelattr
[ -h
] filename attribute ¶Remove the extended attribute attribute from the specified filename.
zlistattr
[ -h
] filename [ parameter ] ¶List the extended attributes currently set on the specified filename. If the optional argument parameter is given, the list of attributes is set on that parameter instead of being printed to stdout.
zgetattr
and zlistattr
allocate memory dynamically. If the
attribute or list of attributes grows between the allocation and the call
to get them, they return 2. On all other errors, 1 is returned. This
allows the calling function to check for this case and retry.
The zsh/cap
module is used for manipulating POSIX.1e (POSIX.6) capability
sets. If the operating system does not support this interface, the
builtins defined by this module will do nothing.
The builtins in this module are:
cap
[ capabilities ] ¶Change the shell’s process capability sets to the specified capabilities, otherwise display the shell’s current capabilities.
getcap
filename ... ¶This is a built-in implementation of the POSIX standard utility. It displays the capability sets on each specified filename.
setcap
capabilities filename ... ¶This is a built-in implementation of the POSIX standard utility. It sets the capability sets on each specified filename to the specified capabilities.
The zsh/clone
module makes available one builtin command:
clone
tty ¶Creates a forked instance of the current shell, attached to the specified
tty. In the new shell, the PID
, PPID
and TTY
special
parameters are changed appropriately. $!
is set to zero in the new
shell, and to the new shell’s PID in the original shell.
The return status of the builtin is zero in both shells if successful, and non-zero on error.
The target of clone
should be an unused terminal, such as an unused virtual
console or a virtual terminal created by
xterm -e sh -c 'trap : INT QUIT TSTP; tty; while :; do sleep 100000000; done'
Some words of explanation are warranted about this long xterm command line: when doing clone on a pseudo-terminal, some other session ("session" meant as a unix session group, or SID) is already owning the terminal. Hence the cloned zsh cannot acquire the pseudo-terminal as a controlling tty. That means two things:
This does not apply when cloning to an unused vc.
Cloning to a used (and unprepared) terminal will result in two processes reading simultaneously from the same terminal, with input bytes going randomly to either process.
clone
is mostly useful as a shell built-in replacement for
openvt.
The zsh/compctl
module makes available two builtin commands. compctl
,
is the old, deprecated way to control completions for ZLE. See
Completion Using compctl.
The other builtin command, compcall
can be used in user-defined
completion widgets, see
Completion Widgets.
The zsh/complete
module makes available several builtin commands which
can be used in user-defined completion widgets, see
Completion Widgets.
The zsh/complist
module offers three extensions to completion listings:
the ability to highlight matches in such a list, the ability to
scroll through long lists and a different style of menu completion.
Whenever one of the parameters ZLS_COLORS
or ZLS_COLOURS
is set
and the zsh/complist
module is loaded or linked into the shell,
completion lists will be colored. Note, however, that complist
will
not automatically be loaded if it is not linked in: on systems with
dynamic loading, ‘zmodload zsh/complist
’ is required.
The parameters ZLS_COLORS
and ZLS_COLOURS
describe how matches
are highlighted. To turn on highlighting an empty value suffices, in
which case all the default values given below will be used. The format of
the value of these parameters is the same as used by the GNU version of the
ls
command: a colon-separated list of specifications of the form
‘name=
value’. The name may be one of the following strings,
most of which specify file types for which the value will be used.
The strings and their default values are:
no 0
for normal text (i.e. when displaying something other than a matched file)
fi 0
for regular files
di 32
for directories
ln 36
for symbolic links. If this has the special value target
,
symbolic links are dereferenced and the target file used to
determine the display format.
pi 31
for named pipes (FIFOs)
so 33
for sockets
bd 44;37
for block devices
cd 44;37
for character devices
or
nonefor a symlink to nonexistent file (default is the value defined for ln
)
mi
nonefor a non-existent file (default is the value defined for fi
); this code
is currently not used
su 37;41
for files with setuid bit set
sg 30;43
for files with setgid bit set
tw 30;42
for world writable directories with sticky bit set
ow 34;43
for world writable directories without sticky bit set
sa
nonefor files with an associated suffix alias; this is only tested after specific suffixes, as described below
st 37;44
for directories with sticky bit set but not world writable
ex 35
for executable files
lc \e[
for the left code (see below)
rc m
for the right code
tc 0
for the character indicating the file type printed after filenames if
the LIST_TYPES
option is set
sp 0
for the spaces printed after matches to align the next column
ec
nonefor the end code
Apart from these strings, the name may also be an asterisk
(‘*
’) followed by any string. The value given for such a
string will be used for all files whose name ends with the string.
The name may also be an equals sign (‘=
’) followed by a
pattern; the EXTENDED_GLOB
option will be turned on for evaluation
of the pattern. The value given for this pattern will be used for all
matches (not just filenames) whose display string are matched by
the pattern. Definitions for the form with the leading equal sign take
precedence over the values defined for file types, which in turn take
precedence over the form with the leading asterisk (file extensions).
The leading-equals form also allows different parts of the displayed
strings to be colored differently. For this, the pattern has to use the
‘(#b)
’ globbing flag and pairs of parentheses surrounding the
parts of the strings that are to be colored differently. In this case
the value may consist of more than one color code separated by
equal signs. The first code will be used for all parts for which no
explicit code is specified and the following codes will be used for
the parts matched by the sub-patterns in parentheses. For example,
the specification ‘=(#b)(?)*(?)=0=3=7
’ will be used for all
matches which are at least two characters long and will use
the code ‘3
’ for the first character, ‘7
’ for the last
character and ‘0
’ for the rest.
All three forms of name may be preceded by a pattern in
parentheses. If this is given, the value will be used
only for matches in groups whose names are matched by the pattern
given in the parentheses. For example, ‘(g*)m*=43
’ highlights all
matches beginning with ‘m
’ in groups whose names begin with
‘g
’ using the color code ‘43
’. In case of the ‘lc
’,
‘rc
’, and ‘ec
’ codes, the group pattern is ignored.
Note also that all patterns are tried in the order in which they appear in the parameter value until the first one matches which is then used. Patterns may be matched against completions, descriptions (possibly with spaces appended for padding), or lines consisting of a completion followed by a description. For consistent coloring it may be necessary to use more than one pattern or a pattern with backreferences.
When printing a match, the code prints the value of lc
, the value
for the file-type or the last matching specification with a ‘*
’,
the value of rc
, the string to display for the match itself, and
then the value of ec
if that is defined or the values of lc
,
no
, and rc
if ec
is not defined.
The default values are ISO 6429 (ANSI) compliant and can be used on
vt100 compatible terminals such as xterm
s. On monochrome terminals
the default values will have no visible effect. The colors
function from the contribution can be used to get associative arrays
containing the codes for ANSI terminals (see
Other Functions). For example, after loading colors
, one could use
‘$color[red]
’ to get the code for foreground color red and
‘$color[bg-green]
’ for the code for background color green.
If the completion system invoked by compinit is used, these
parameters should not be set directly because the system controls them
itself. Instead, the list-colors
style should be used (see
Completion System Configuration).
To enable scrolling through a completion list, the LISTPROMPT
parameter must be set. Its value will be used as the prompt; if it
is the empty string, a default prompt will be used. The value may
contain escapes of the form ‘%x
’. It supports the escapes
‘%B
’, ‘%b
’, ‘%S
’, ‘%s
’, ‘%U
’, ‘%u
’, ‘%F
’,
‘%f
’, ‘%K
’, ‘%k
’ and
‘%{
...%}
’ used also in shell prompts as well as three pairs of
additional sequences: a ‘%l
’ or ‘%L
’ is replaced by the number
of the last line shown and the total number of lines in the form
‘number/
total’; a ‘%m
’ or ‘%M
’ is replaced with
the number of the last match shown and the total number of matches; and
‘%p
’ or ‘%P
’ is replaced with ‘Top
’, ‘Bottom
’ or the
position of the first line shown in percent of the total number of
lines, respectively. In each of these cases the form with the uppercase
letter will be replaced with a string of fixed width, padded to the
right with spaces, while the lowercase form will not be padded.
If the parameter LISTPROMPT
is set, the completion code will not ask if
the list should be shown. Instead it immediately starts displaying the
list, stopping after the first screenful, showing the prompt at the bottom,
waiting for a keypress after temporarily switching to the listscroll
keymap. Some of the zle functions have a special meaning while scrolling
lists:
send-break
stops listing discarding the key pressed
accept-line
, down-history
, down-line-or-history
down-line-or-search
, vi-down-line-or-history
scrolls forward one line
complete-word
, menu-complete
, expand-or-complete
expand-or-complete-prefix
, menu-complete-or-expand
scrolls forward one screenful
accept-search
stop listing but take no other action
Every other character stops listing and immediately processes the key
as usual. Any key that is not bound in the listscroll
keymap or
that is bound to undefined-key
is looked up in the keymap
currently selected.
As for the ZLS_COLORS
and ZLS_COLOURS
parameters,
LISTPROMPT
should not be set directly when using the shell
function based completion system. Instead, the list-prompt
style
should be used.
The zsh/complist
module also offers an alternative style of selecting
matches from a list, called menu selection, which can be used if the
shell is set up to return to the last prompt after showing a
completion list (see the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT
option in
Options).
Menu selection can be invoked directly by
the widget menu-select
defined by this module. This is a standard
ZLE widget that can be bound to a key in the usual way as described
in Zsh Line Editor.
Alternatively,
the parameter MENUSELECT
can be set to an integer, which gives the
minimum number of matches that must be present before menu selection is
automatically turned on. This second method requires that menu completion
be started, either directly from a widget such as menu-complete
, or due
to one of the options MENU_COMPLETE
or AUTO_MENU
being set. If
MENUSELECT
is set, but is 0, 1 or empty, menu selection will always be
started during an ambiguous menu completion.
When using the completion system based on shell functions, the
MENUSELECT
parameter should not be used (like the ZLS_COLORS
and ZLS_COLOURS
parameters described above). Instead, the menu
style should be used with the select=
... keyword.
After menu selection is started, the matches will be listed. If there
are more matches than fit on the screen, only the first screenful is
shown. The
matches to insert into the command line can be selected from this
list. In the list one match is highlighted using the value for ma
from the ZLS_COLORS
or ZLS_COLOURS
parameter. The default
value for this is ‘7
’ which forces the selected match to be
highlighted using standout mode on a vt100-compatible terminal. If
neither ZLS_COLORS
nor ZLS_COLOURS
is set, the same terminal
control sequence as for the ‘%S
’ escape in prompts is used.
If there are more matches than fit on the screen and the parameter
MENUPROMPT
is set, its value will be shown below the matches. It
supports the same escape sequences as LISTPROMPT
, but the number
of the match or line shown will be that of the one where the mark is
placed. If its value is the empty string, a default prompt will be
used.
The MENUSCROLL
parameter can be used to specify how the list is
scrolled. If the parameter is unset, this is done line by line, if it
is set to ‘0
’ (zero), the list will scroll half the number of
lines of the screen. If the value is positive, it gives the number of
lines to scroll and if it is negative, the list will be scrolled
the number of lines of the screen minus the (absolute) value.
As for the ZLS_COLORS
, ZLS_COLOURS
and LISTPROMPT
parameters, neither MENUPROMPT
nor MENUSCROLL
should be
set directly when using the shell function based completion
system. Instead, the select-prompt
and select-scroll
styles
should be used.
The completion code sometimes decides not to show all of the matches
in the list. These hidden matches are either matches for which the
completion function which added them explicitly requested that they
not appear in the list (using the -n
option of the compadd
builtin command) or they are matches which duplicate a string already
in the list (because they differ only in things like prefixes or
suffixes that are not displayed). In the list used for menu selection,
however, even these matches are shown so that it is possible to select
them. To highlight such matches the hi
and du
capabilities in
the ZLS_COLORS
and ZLS_COLOURS
parameters are supported for
hidden matches of the first and second kind, respectively.
Selecting matches is done by moving the mark around using the zle movement functions. When not all matches can be shown on the screen at the same time, the list will scroll up and down when crossing the top or bottom line. The following zle functions have special meaning during menu selection. Note that the following always perform the same task within the menu selection map and cannot be replaced by user defined widgets, nor can the set of functions be extended:
accept-line
, accept-search
accept the current match and leave menu selection (but do not cause the command line to be accepted)
send-break
leaves menu selection and restores the previous contents of the command line
redisplay
, clear-screen
execute their normal function without leaving menu selection
accept-and-hold
, accept-and-menu-complete
accept the currently inserted match and continue selection allowing to select the next match to insert into the line
accept-and-infer-next-history
accepts the current match and then tries completion with
menu selection again; in the case of files this allows one to select
a directory and immediately attempt to complete files in it; if there
are no matches, a message is shown and one can use undo
to go back
to completion on the previous level, every other key leaves menu
selection (including the other zle functions which are otherwise
special during menu selection)
undo
removes matches inserted during the menu selection by one of the three functions before
down-history
, down-line-or-history
vi-down-line-or-history
, down-line-or-search
moves the mark one line down
up-history
, up-line-or-history
vi-up-line-or-history
, up-line-or-search
moves the mark one line up
forward-char
, vi-forward-char
moves the mark one column right
backward-char
, vi-backward-char
moves the mark one column left
forward-word
, vi-forward-word
vi-forward-word-end
, emacs-forward-word
moves the mark one screenful down
backward-word
, vi-backward-word
, emacs-backward-word
moves the mark one screenful up
vi-forward-blank-word
, vi-forward-blank-word-end
moves the mark to the first line of the next group of matches
vi-backward-blank-word
moves the mark to the last line of the previous group of matches
beginning-of-history
moves the mark to the first line
end-of-history
moves the mark to the last line
beginning-of-buffer-or-history
, beginning-of-line
beginning-of-line-hist
, vi-beginning-of-line
moves the mark to the leftmost column
end-of-buffer-or-history
, end-of-line
end-of-line-hist
, vi-end-of-line
moves the mark to the rightmost column
complete-word
, menu-complete
, expand-or-complete
expand-or-complete-prefix
, menu-expand-or-complete
moves the mark to the next match
reverse-menu-complete
moves the mark to the previous match
vi-insert
this toggles between normal and interactive mode; in interactive mode
the keys bound to self-insert
and self-insert-unmeta
insert
into the command line as in normal editing mode but without leaving
menu selection; after each character completion is tried again and the
list changes to contain only the new matches; the completion widgets
make the longest unambiguous string be inserted in the command line
and undo
and backward-delete-char
go back to the previous set
of matches
history-incremental-search-forward
history-incremental-search-backward
this starts incremental searches in the list of completions displayed;
in this mode, accept-line
only leaves incremental search, going
back to the normal menu selection mode
All movement functions wrap around at the edges; any other zle function not
listed leaves menu selection and executes that function. It is possible to
make widgets in the above list do the same by using the form of the widget
with a ‘.
’ in front. For example, the widget ‘.accept-line
’ has
the effect of leaving menu selection and accepting the entire command line.
During this selection the widget uses the keymap menuselect
. Any
key that is not defined in this keymap or that is bound to
undefined-key
is looked up in the keymap currently selected. This
is used to ensure that the most important keys used during selection
(namely the cursor keys, return, and TAB) have sensible defaults. However,
keys in the menuselect
keymap can be modified directly using the
bindkey
builtin command (see
The zsh/zle Module). For example, to make the return key leave menu selection without
accepting the match currently selected one could call
bindkey -M menuselect '^M' send-break
after loading the zsh/complist
module.
The zsh/computil
module adds several builtin commands that are used by
some of the completion functions in the completion system based on shell
functions (see
Completion System
). Except for compquote
these builtin commands are very
specialised and thus not very interesting when writing your own
completion functions. In summary, these builtin commands are:
comparguments
¶This is used by the _arguments
function to do the argument and
command line parsing. Like compdescribe
it has an option -i
to
do the parsing and initialize some internal state and various options
to access the state information to decide what should be completed.
compdescribe
¶This is used by the _describe
function to build the displays for
the matches and to get the strings to add as matches with their
options. On the first call one of the options -i
or -I
should be
supplied as the first argument. In the first case, display strings without
the descriptions will be generated, in the second case, the string used to
separate the matches from their descriptions must be given as the
second argument and the descriptions (if any) will be shown. All other
arguments are like the definition arguments to _describe
itself.
Once compdescribe
has been called with either the -i
or the
-I
option, it can be repeatedly called with the -g
option and
the names of four parameters as its arguments. This will step through
the different sets of matches and store the value of compstate[list]
in the first scalar, the options for compadd
in the second array,
the matches in the third array, and the strings to be displayed in the
completion listing in the fourth array. The arrays may then be directly
given to compadd
to register the matches with the completion code.
compfiles
¶Used by the _path_files
function to optimize complex recursive
filename generation (globbing). It does three things. With the
-p
and -P
options it builds the glob patterns to use,
including the paths already handled and trying to optimize the
patterns with respect to the prefix and suffix from the line and the
match specification currently used. The -i
option does the
directory tests for the ignore-parents
style and the -r
option
tests if a component for some of the matches are equal to the string
on the line and removes all other matches if that is true.
compgroups
¶Used by the _tags
function to implement the internals of the
group-order
style. This only takes its arguments as names of
completion groups and creates the groups for it (all six types: sorted
and unsorted, both without removing duplicates, with removing all
duplicates and with removing consecutive duplicates).
compquote
[ -p
] names ... ¶There may be reasons to write completion functions that have to add
the matches using the -Q
option to compadd
and perform quoting
themselves. Instead of interpreting the first character of the
all_quotes
key of the compstate
special association and using
the q
flag for parameter expansions, one can use this builtin
command. The arguments are the names of scalar or array parameters
and the values of these parameters are quoted as needed for the
innermost quoting level. If the -p
option is given, quoting is
done as if there is some prefix before the values of the parameters,
so that a leading equal sign will not be quoted.
The return status is non-zero in case of an error and zero otherwise.
comptags
¶comptry
These implement the internals of the tags mechanism.
compvalues
¶Like comparguments
, but for the _values
function.
The zsh/curses
module makes available one builtin command and
various parameters.
zcurses
init
¶zcurses
end
zcurses
addwin
targetwin nlines ncols begin_y begin_x [ parentwin ]zcurses
delwin
targetwinzcurses
refresh
[ targetwin ... ]zcurses
touch
targetwin ...zcurses
move
targetwin new_y new_xzcurses
clear
targetwin [ redraw
| eol
| bot
]zcurses
position
targetwin arrayzcurses
char
targetwin characterzcurses
string
targetwin stringzcurses
border
targetwin borderzcurses
attr
targetwin [ [+
|-
]attribute | fg_col/
bg_col ] [...]zcurses
bg
targetwin [ [+
|-
]attribute | fg_col/
bg_col | @
char ] [...]zcurses
scroll
targetwin [ on
| off
| [+
|-
]lines ]zcurses
input
targetwin [ param [ kparam [ mparam ] ] ]zcurses
mouse
[ delay
num | [+
|-
]motion
]zcurses
timeout
targetwin intvalzcurses
querychar
targetwin [ param ]zcurses
resize
height width [ endwin
| nosave
| endwin_nosave
]Manipulate curses windows. All uses of this command should be
bracketed by ‘zcurses init
’ to initialise use of curses, and
‘zcurses end
’ to end it; omitting ‘zcurses end
’ can cause
the terminal to be in an unwanted state.
The subcommand addwin
creates a window with nlines lines and
ncols columns. Its upper left corner will be placed at row
begin_y and column
begin_x of the screen. targetwin is a string and refers
to the name of a window that is not currently assigned. Note
in particular the curses convention that vertical values appear
before horizontal values.
If addwin
is given an existing window as the final argument, the new
window is created as a subwindow of parentwin. This differs from an
ordinary new window in that the memory of the window contents is shared
with the parent’s memory. Subwindows must be deleted before their parent.
Note that the coordinates of subwindows are relative to the screen, not
the parent, as with other windows.
Use the subcommand delwin
to delete a window created with
addwin
. Note that end
does not implicitly delete windows,
and that delwin
does not erase the screen image of the window.
The window corresponding to the full visible screen is called
stdscr
; it always exists after ‘zcurses init
’ and cannot
be delete with delwin
.
The subcommand refresh
will refresh window targetwin; this is
necessary to make any pending changes (such as characters you have
prepared for output with char
) visible on the screen. refresh
without an argument causes the screen to be cleared and redrawn.
If multiple windows are given, the screen is updated once at the end.
The subcommand touch
marks the targetwins listed as changed.
This is necessary before refresh
ing windows if a window that
was in front of another window (which may be stdscr
) is deleted.
The subcommand move
moves the cursor position in targetwin to
new coordinates new_y and new_x. Note that the
subcommand string
(but not the subcommand char
) advances the
cursor position over the characters added.
The subcommand clear
erases the contents of targetwin. One
(and no more than one) of three options may be specified. With the
option redraw
, in addition the next refresh
of targetwin
will cause the screen to be cleared and repainted. With the option
eol
, targetwin is only cleared to the end of the current cursor
line. With the option
bot
, targetwin is cleared to the end of the window, i.e
everything to the right and below the cursor is cleared.
The subcommand position
writes various positions associated with
targetwin into the array named array.
These are, in order:
The y and x coordinates of the cursor relative to the top left of targetwin
The y and x coordinates of the top left of targetwin on the screen
The size of targetwin in y and x dimensions.
Outputting characters and strings are achieved by char
and string
respectively.
To draw a border around window targetwin, use border
. Note
that the border is not subsequently handled specially: in other words,
the border is simply a set of characters output at the edge of the
window. Hence it can be overwritten, can scroll off the window, etc.
The subcommand attr
will set targetwin’s attributes or
foreground/background color pair for any successive character output.
Each attribute given on the line may be prepended by a +
to set
or a -
to unset that attribute; +
is assumed if absent. The
attributes supported are blink
, bold
, dim
, reverse
,
standout
, and underline
.
Each fg_col/
bg_col attribute (to be read as
‘fg_col on bg_col’) sets the foreground and background color
for character output. The color default
is sometimes available
(in particular if the library is ncurses), specifying the foreground
or background color with which the terminal started. The color pair
default/default
is always available. To use more than the 8 named
colors (red, green, etc.) construct the fg_col/
bg_col
pairs where fg_col and bg_col are decimal integers, e.g
128/200
. The maximum color value is 254 if the terminal supports
256 colors.
bg
overrides the color and other attributes of all characters in the
window. Its usual use is to set the background initially, but it will
overwrite the attributes of any characters at the time when it is called.
In addition to the arguments allowed with attr
, an argument @
char
specifies a character to be shown in otherwise blank areas of the window.
Owing to limitations of curses this cannot be a multibyte character
(use of ASCII characters only is recommended). As the specified set
of attributes override the existing background, turning attributes
off in the arguments is not useful, though this does not cause an error.
The subcommand scroll
can be used with on
or off
to enabled
or disable scrolling of a window when the cursor would otherwise move
below the window due to typing or output. It can also be used with a
positive or negative integer to scroll the window up or down the given
number of lines without changing the current cursor position (which
therefore appears to move in the opposite direction relative to the
window). In the second case, if scrolling is off
it is temporarily
turned on
to allow the window to be scrolled.
The subcommand input
reads a single character from the window
without echoing it back. If param is supplied the character is
assigned to the parameter param, else it is assigned to the
parameter REPLY
.
If both param and kparam are supplied, the key is read in
‘keypad’ mode. In this mode special keys such as function keys and
arrow keys return the name of the key in the parameter kparam. The
key names are the macros defined in the curses.h
or ncurses.h
with the prefix ‘KEY_
’ removed; see also the description of the
parameter zcurses_keycodes
below. Other keys cause a value to be
set in param as before. On a successful return only one of
param or kparam contains a non-empty string; the other is set
to an empty string.
If mparam is also supplied, input
attempts to handle mouse
input. This is only available with the ncurses library; mouse handling
can be detected by checking for the exit status of ‘zcurses mouse
’ with
no arguments. If a mouse
button is clicked (or double- or triple-clicked, or pressed or released with
a configurable delay from being clicked) then kparam is set to the string
MOUSE
, and mparam is set to an array consisting of the
following elements:
An identifier to discriminate different input devices; this is only rarely useful.
The x, y and z coordinates of the mouse click relative to the full screen, as three elements in that order (i.e. the y coordinate is, unusually, after the x coordinate). The z coordinate is only available for a few unusual input devices and is otherwise set to zero.
Any events that occurred as separate items; usually
there will be just one. An event consists of PRESSED
, RELEASED
,
CLICKED
, DOUBLE_CLICKED
or TRIPLE_CLICKED
followed
immediately (in the same element) by the number of the button.
If the shift key was pressed, the string SHIFT
.
If the control key was pressed, the string CTRL
.
If the alt key was pressed, the string ALT
.
Not all mouse events may be passed through to the terminal window; most terminal emulators handle some mouse events themselves. Note that the ncurses manual implies that using input both with and without mouse handling may cause the mouse cursor to appear and disappear.
The subcommand mouse
can be used to configure the use of the mouse.
There is no window argument; mouse options are global.
‘zcurses mouse
’ with no arguments returns status 0 if mouse handling
is possible, else status 1. Otherwise, the possible arguments (which
may be combined on the same command line) are as follows.
delay
num sets the maximum delay in milliseconds between press and
release events to be considered as a click; the value 0 disables click
resolution, and the default is one sixth of a second. motion
proceeded
by an optional ‘+
’ (the default) or -
turns on or off
reporting of mouse motion in addition to clicks, presses and releases,
which are always reported. However, it appears reports for mouse
motion are not currently implemented.
The subcommand timeout
specifies a timeout value for input from
targetwin. If intval is negative, ‘zcurses input
’ waits
indefinitely for a character to be typed; this is the default. If
intval is zero, ‘zcurses input
’ returns immediately; if there
is typeahead it is returned, else no input is done and status 1 is
returned. If intval is positive, ‘zcurses input
’ waits
intval milliseconds for input and if there is none at the end of
that period returns status 1.
The subcommand querychar
queries the character at the current cursor
position. The return values are stored in the array named param if
supplied, else in the array reply
. The first value is the character
(which may be a multibyte character if the system supports them); the
second is the color pair in the usual fg_col/
bg_col
notation, or 0
if color is not supported. Any attributes other than
color that apply to the character, as set with the subcommand attr
,
appear as additional elements.
The subcommand resize
resizes stdscr
and all windows to given
dimensions (windows that stick out from the new dimensions are resized
down). The underlying curses extension (resize_term call
) can be
unavailable. To verify, zeroes can be used for height and
width. If the result of the subcommand is 0
, resize_term is
available (2
otherwise). Tests show that resizing can be normally
accomplished by calling zcurses end
and zcurses refresh
. The
resize
subcommand is provided for versatility. Multiple system
configurations have been checked and zcurses end
and zcurses
refresh
are still needed for correct terminal state after resize. To
invoke them with resize
, use endwin argument. Using
nosave argument will cause new terminal state to not be saved
internally by zcurses
. This is also provided for versatility and
should normally be not needed.
ZCURSES_COLORS
¶Readonly integer. The maximum number of colors the terminal
supports. This value is initialised by the curses library and is not
available until the first time zcurses init
is run.
ZCURSES_COLOR_PAIRS
¶Readonly integer. The maximum number of color pairs
fg_col/
bg_col that may be defined in ‘zcurses attr
’
commands; note this limit applies to all color pairs that have been
used whether or not they are currently active. This value is initialised
by the curses library and is not available until the first time zcurses
init
is run.
zcurses_attrs
¶Readonly array. The attributes supported by zsh/curses
; available
as soon as the module is loaded.
zcurses_colors
¶Readonly array. The colors supported by zsh/curses
; available
as soon as the module is loaded.
zcurses_keycodes
¶Readonly array. The values that may be returned in the second
parameter supplied to ‘zcurses input
’ in the order in which they
are defined internally by curses. Not all function keys
are listed, only F0
; curses reserves space for F0
up to F63
.
zcurses_windows
¶Readonly array. The current list of windows, i.e. all windows that
have been created with ‘zcurses addwin
’ and not removed with
‘zcurses delwin
’.
The zsh/datetime
module makes available one builtin command:
strftime
[ -s
scalar | -n
] format [ epochtime [ nanoseconds ] ] ¶strftime
-r
[ -q
] [ -s
scalar | -n
] format timestringOutput the date in the format specified. With no epochtime, the current system date/time is used; optionally, epochtime may be used to specify the number of seconds since the epoch, and nanoseconds may additionally be used to specify the number of nanoseconds past the second (otherwise that number is assumed to be 0). See strftime(3) for details. The zsh extensions described in Prompt Expansion are also available.
-n
Suppress printing a newline after the formatted string.
-q
Run quietly; suppress printing of all error messages described below. Errors for invalid epochtime values are always printed.
-r
With the option -r
(reverse), use format to parse the input
string timestring and output the number of seconds since the epoch at
which the time occurred. The parsing is implemented by the system
function strptime
; see strptime(3). This means that zsh
format extensions are not available, but for reverse lookup they are not
required.
In most implementations of strftime
any timezone in the
timestring is ignored and the local timezone declared by the TZ
environment variable is used; other parameters are set to zero if not
present.
If timestring does not match format the command returns status 1 and prints an error message. If timestring matches format but not all characters in timestring were used, the conversion succeeds but also prints an error message.
If either of the system functions strptime
or mktime
is not
available, status 2 is returned and an error message is printed.
-s
scalarAssign the date string (or epoch time in seconds if -r
is given) to
scalar instead of printing it.
Note that depending on the system’s declared integral time type,
strftime
may produce incorrect results for epoch times greater than
2147483647 which corresponds to 2038-01-19 03:14:07 +0000.
The zsh/datetime
module makes available several parameters;
all are readonly:
EPOCHREALTIME
¶A floating point value representing the number of seconds since
the epoch. The notional accuracy is to nanoseconds if the
clock_gettime
call is available and to microseconds otherwise,
but in practice the range of double precision floating point and
shell scheduling latencies may be significant effects.
EPOCHSECONDS
¶An integer value representing the number of seconds since the epoch.
epochtime
¶An array value containing the number of seconds since the epoch in the first element and the remainder of the time since the epoch in nanoseconds in the second element. To ensure the two elements are consistent the array should be copied or otherwise referenced as a single substitution before the values are used. The following idiom may be used:
for secs nsecs in $epochtime; do ... done
The zsh/db/gdbm
module is used to create "tied" associative arrays
that interface to database files. If the GDBM interface is not available,
the builtins defined by this module will report an error. This module is
also intended as a prototype for creating additional database interfaces,
so the ztie
builtin may move to a more generic module in the future.
The builtins in this module are:
ztie -d db/gdbm -f
filename [ -r
] arrayname ¶Open the GDBM database identified by filename and, if successful, create the associative array arrayname linked to the file. To create a local tied array, the parameter must first be declared, so commands similar to the following would be executed inside a function scope:
local -A sampledb ztie -d db/gdbm -f sample.gdbm sampledb
The -r
option opens the database file for reading only, creating a
parameter with the readonly attribute. Without this option, using
‘ztie
’ on a file for which the user does not have write permission is
an error. If writable, the database is opened synchronously so fields
changed in arrayname are immediately written to filename.
Changes to the file modes filename after it has been opened do not
alter the state of arrayname, but ‘typeset -r
arrayname’
works as expected.
zuntie
[ -u
] arrayname ... ¶Close the GDBM database associated with each arrayname and then
unset the parameter. The -u
option forces an unset of parameters
made readonly with ‘ztie -r
’.
This happens automatically if the parameter is explicitly unset or its
local scope (function) ends. Note that a readonly parameter may not be
explicitly unset, so the only way to unset a global parameter created with
‘ztie -r
’ is to use ‘zuntie -u
’.
zgdbmpath
parametername ¶Put path to database file assigned to parametername into REPLY
scalar.
zgdbm_tied
¶Array holding names of all tied parameters.
The fields of an associative array tied to GDBM are neither cached nor otherwise stored in memory, they are read from or written to the database on each reference. Thus, for example, the values in a readonly array may be changed by a second writer of the same database file.
The zsh/deltochar
module makes available two ZLE functions:
delete-to-char
¶Read a character from the keyboard, and delete from the cursor position up to and including the next (or, with repeat count n, the nth) instance of that character. Negative repeat counts mean delete backwards.
zap-to-char
¶This behaves like delete-to-char
, except that the final occurrence of
the character itself is not deleted.
The zsh/example
module makes available one builtin command:
example
[ -flags
] [ args ... ] ¶Displays the flags and arguments it is invoked with.
The purpose of the module is to serve as an example of how to write a module.
The zsh/files
module makes available some common commands for file
manipulation as builtins; these commands are probably not needed for
many normal situations but can be useful in emergency recovery
situations with constrained resources. The commands do not implement
all features now required by relevant standards committees.
For all commands, a variant beginning zf_
is also available and loaded
automatically. Using the features capability of zmodload will let you load
only those names you want. Note that it’s possible to load only the
builtins with zsh-specific names using the following command:
zmodload -m -F zsh/files b:zf_\*
The commands loaded by default are:
chgrp
[ -hRs
] group filename ... ¶Changes group of files specified. This is equivalent to chown
with
a user-spec argument of ‘:
group’.
chmod
[ -Rs
] mode filename ... ¶Changes mode of files specified.
The specified mode must be in octal.
The -R
option causes chmod
to recursively descend into directories,
changing the mode of all files in the directory after
changing the mode of the directory itself.
The -s
option is a zsh extension to chmod
functionality. It enables
paranoid behaviour, intended to avoid security problems involving
a chmod
being tricked into affecting files other than the ones
intended. It will refuse to follow symbolic links, so that (for example)
{No value for ‘dsbq’}chmod 600 /tmp/foo/passwd
{No value for ‘dsq’} can’t accidentally chmod /etc/passwd
if /tmp/foo
happens to be a link to /etc
. It will also check
where it is after leaving directories, so that a recursive chmod of
a deep directory tree can’t end up recursively chmoding /usr
as
a result of directories being moved up the tree.
chown
[ -hRs
] user-spec filename ... ¶Changes ownership and group of files specified.
The user-spec can be in four forms:
change owner to user; do not change group
::
change owner to user; do not change group
:
change owner to user; change group to user’s primary group
:
groupchange owner to user; change group to group
:
groupdo not change owner; change group to group
In each case, the ‘:
’ may instead be a ‘.
’. The rule is that
if there is a ‘:
’ then the separator is ‘:
’, otherwise
if there is a ‘.
’ then the separator is ‘.
’, otherwise
there is no separator.
Each of user and group may be either a username (or group name, as appropriate) or a decimal user ID (group ID). Interpretation as a name takes precedence, if there is an all-numeric username (or group name).
If the target is a symbolic link, the -h
option causes chown
to set
the ownership of the link instead of its target.
The -R
option causes chown
to recursively descend into directories,
changing the ownership of all files in the directory after
changing the ownership of the directory itself.
The -s
option is a zsh extension to chown
functionality. It enables
paranoid behaviour, intended to avoid security problems involving
a chown
being tricked into affecting files other than the ones
intended. It will refuse to follow symbolic links, so that (for example)
{No value for ‘dsbq’}chown luser /tmp/foo/passwd
{No value for ‘dsq’} can’t accidentally chown /etc/passwd
if /tmp/foo
happens to be a link to /etc
. It will also check
where it is after leaving directories, so that a recursive chown of
a deep directory tree can’t end up recursively chowning /usr
as
a result of directories being moved up the tree.
ln
[ -dfhins
] filename dest ¶ln
[ -dfhins
] filename ... dirCreates hard (or, with -s
, symbolic) links. In the first form, the
specified destination is created, as a link to the specified
filename. In the second form, each of the filenames is
taken in turn, and linked to a pathname in the specified directory
that has the same last pathname component.
Normally, ln
will not attempt to create hard links to
directories. This check can be overridden using the -d
option.
Typically only the super-user can actually succeed in creating
hard links to directories.
This does not apply to symbolic links in any case.
By default, existing files cannot be replaced by links.
The -i
option causes the user to be queried about replacing
existing files. The -f
option causes existing files to be
silently deleted, without querying. -f
takes precedence.
The -h
and -n
options are identical and both exist for
compatibility; either one indicates that if the target is a symlink
then it should not be dereferenced.
Typically this is used in combination with -sf
so that if an
existing link points to a directory then it will be removed,
instead of followed.
If this option is used with multiple filenames and the target
is a symbolic link pointing to a directory then the result is
an error.
mkdir
[ -p
] [ -m
mode ] dir ... ¶Creates directories. With the -p
option, non-existing parent
directories are first created if necessary, and there will be
no complaint if the directory already exists.
The -m
option can be used to specify (in octal) a set of file permissions
for the created directories, otherwise mode 777 modified by the current
umask
(see umask(2)) is used.
mv
[ -fi
] filename dest ¶mv
[ -fi
] filename ... dirMoves files. In the first form, the specified filename is moved to the specified destination. In the second form, each of the filenames is taken in turn, and moved to a pathname in the specified directory that has the same last pathname component.
By default, the user will be queried before replacing any file
that the user cannot write to, but writable files will be silently
removed.
The -i
option causes the user to be queried about replacing
any existing files. The -f
option causes any existing files to be
silently deleted, without querying. -f
takes precedence.
Note that this mv
will not move files across devices.
Historical versions of mv
, when actual renaming is impossible,
fall back on copying and removing files; if this behaviour is desired,
use cp
and rm
manually. This may change in a future version.
rm
[ -dfiRrs
] filename ... ¶Removes files and directories specified.
Normally, rm
will not remove directories (except with the -R
or -r
options). The -d
option causes rm
to try removing directories
with unlink
(see unlink(2)), the same method used for files.
Typically only the super-user can actually succeed in unlinking
directories in this way.
-d
takes precedence over -R
and -r
.
By default, the user will be queried before removing any file
that the user cannot write to, but writable files will be silently
removed.
The -i
option causes the user to be queried about removing
any files. The -f
option causes files to be
silently deleted, without querying, and suppresses all error indications.
-f
takes precedence.
The -R
and -r
options cause rm
to recursively descend into
directories, deleting all files in the directory before removing the directory
with the rmdir
system call (see rmdir(2)).
The -s
option is a zsh extension to rm
functionality. It enables
paranoid behaviour, intended to avoid common security problems involving
a root-run rm
being tricked into removing files other than the ones
intended. It will refuse to follow symbolic links, so that (for example)
{No value for ‘dsbq’}rm /tmp/foo/passwd
{No value for ‘dsq’} can’t accidentally remove /etc/passwd
if /tmp/foo
happens to be a link to /etc
. It will also check
where it is after leaving directories, so that a recursive removal of
a deep directory tree can’t end up recursively removing /usr
as
a result of directories being moved up the tree.
rmdir
dir ... ¶Removes empty directories specified.
sync
¶Calls the system call of the same name (see sync(2)), which flushes dirty buffers to disk. It might return before the I/O has actually been completed.
The zsh/langinfo
module makes available one parameter:
langinfo
¶An associative array that maps langinfo elements to their values.
Your implementation may support a number of the following keys:
CODESET
,
D_T_FMT
,
D_FMT
,
T_FMT
,
RADIXCHAR
,
THOUSEP
,
YESEXPR
,
NOEXPR
,
CRNCYSTR
,
ABDAY_{1..7}
,
DAY_{1..7}
,
ABMON_{1..12}
,
MON_{1..12}
,
T_FMT_AMPM
,
AM_STR
,
PM_STR
,
ERA
,
ERA_D_FMT
,
ERA_D_T_FMT
,
ERA_T_FMT
,
ALT_DIGITS
The zsh/mapfile
module provides one special associative array parameter of
the same name.
mapfile
¶This associative array takes as keys the names of files; the resulting
value is the content of the file. The value is treated identically to any
other text coming from a parameter. The value may also be assigned to, in
which case the file in question is written (whether or not it originally
existed); or an element may be unset, which will delete the file in
question. For example, ‘vared 'mapfile[myfile]'
’ works as expected,
editing the file ‘myfile
’.
When the array is accessed as a whole, the keys are the names of files in
the current directory, and the values are empty (to save a huge overhead in
memory). Thus ${(k)mapfile}
has the same effect as the glob operator
*(D)
, since files beginning with a dot are not special. Care must be
taken with expressions such as rm ${(k)mapfile}
, which will delete
every file in the current directory without the usual ‘rm *
’ test.
The parameter mapfile
may be made read-only; in that case, files
referenced may not be written or deleted.
A file may conveniently be read into an array as one line per element
with the form
‘array=("${(f@)mapfile[
filename]}")
’.
The double quotes and the ‘@
’ are necessary to prevent empty lines
from being removed. Note that if the file ends with a newline,
the shell will split on the final newline, generating an additional
empty field; this can be suppressed by using
‘array=("${(f@)${mapfile[
filename]%$'\n'}}")
’.
Although reading and writing of the file in question is efficiently
handled, zsh’s internal memory management may be arbitrarily baroque;
however, mapfile
is usually very much more efficient than
anything involving a loop. Note in particular that
the whole contents of the file will always reside physically in memory when
accessed (possibly multiple times, due to standard parameter substitution
operations). In particular, this means handling of sufficiently long files
(greater than the machine’s swap space, or than the range of the pointer
type) will be incorrect.
No errors are printed or flagged for non-existent, unreadable, or unwritable files, as the parameter mechanism is too low in the shell execution hierarchy to make this convenient.
It is unfortunate that the mechanism for loading modules does not yet allow the user to specify the name of the shell parameter to be given the special behaviour.
The zsh/mathfunc
module provides standard
mathematical functions for use when
evaluating mathematical formulae. The syntax agrees with normal C and
FORTRAN conventions, for example,
(( f = sin(0.3) ))
assigns the sine of 0.3 to the parameter f.
Most functions take floating point arguments and return a floating point
value. However, any necessary conversions from or to integer type will be
performed automatically by the shell. Apart from atan
with a second
argument and the abs
, int
and float
functions, all functions
behave as noted in the manual page for the corresponding C function,
except that any arguments out of range for the function in question will be
detected by the shell and an error reported.
The following functions take a single floating point argument: acos
,
acosh
, asin
, asinh
, atan
, atanh
, cbrt
, ceil
,
cos
, cosh
, erf
, erfc
, exp
, expm1
, fabs
,
floor
, gamma
, j0
, j1
, lgamma
, log
, log10
,
log1p
, log2
, logb
, sin
, sinh
, sqrt
, tan
,
tanh
, y0
, y1
. The atan
function can optionally take a
second argument, in which case it behaves like the C function atan2
.
The ilogb
function takes a single floating point argument, but
returns an integer.
The function signgam
takes no arguments, and returns an integer, which
is the C variable of the same name, as described in gamma(3). Note
that it is therefore only useful immediately after a call to gamma
or
lgamma
. Note also that ‘signgam()
’ and ‘signgam
’ are
distinct expressions.
The functions min
, max
, and sum
are defined not in this module
but in the zmathfunc
autoloadable function, described in
Mathematical Functions.
The following functions take two floating point arguments: copysign
,
fmod
, hypot
, nextafter
.
The following take an integer first argument and a floating point second
argument: jn
, yn
.
The following take a floating point first argument and an integer second
argument: ldexp
, scalb
.
The function abs
does not convert the type of its single argument; it
returns the absolute value of either a floating point number or an
integer. The functions float
and int
convert their arguments into
a floating point or integer value (by truncation) respectively.
Note that the C pow
function is available in ordinary math evaluation
as the ‘**
’ operator and is not provided here.
The function rand48
is available if your system’s mathematical library
has the function erand48(3)
. It returns a pseudo-random floating point
number between 0 and 1. It takes a single string optional argument.
If the argument is not present, the random number seed is initialised by
three calls to the rand(3)
function — this produces the
same random
numbers as the next three values of $RANDOM
.
If the argument is present, it gives the name of a scalar parameter where
the current random number seed will be stored. On the first call, the
value must contain at least twelve hexadecimal digits (the remainder of the
string is ignored), or the seed will be initialised in the same manner as
for a call to rand48
with no argument. Subsequent calls to
rand48
(param) will then maintain the seed in the
parameter param as a string of twelve hexadecimal digits, with no base
signifier. The random number sequences for different parameters are
completely independent, and are also independent from that used by calls to
rand48
with no argument.
For example, consider
print $(( rand48(seed) )) print $(( rand48() )) print $(( rand48(seed) ))
Assuming $seed
does not exist, it will be initialised by the first
call. In the second call, the default seed is initialised; note, however,
that because of the properties of rand()
there is a
correlation between
the seeds used for the two initialisations, so for more secure uses, you
should generate your own 12-byte seed. The third call returns to the same
sequence of random numbers used in the first call, unaffected by the
intervening rand48()
.
The zsh/nearcolor
module replaces colours specified as hex triplets
with the nearest colour in the 88 or 256 colour palettes that are widely
used by terminal emulators. By default, 24-bit true colour escape codes
are generated when colours are specified using hex triplets. These are
not supported by all terminals. The purpose of this module is to make
it easier to define colour preferences in a form that can work across a
range of terminal emulators.
Aside from the default colour, the ANSI standard for terminal escape codes provides for eight colours. The bright attribute brings this to sixteen. These basic colours are commonly used in terminal applications due to being widely supported. Expanded 88 and 256 colour palettes are also common and, while the first sixteen colours vary somewhat between terminals and configurations, these add a generally consistent and predictable set of colours.
In order to use the zsh/nearcolor
module, it only needs to be
loaded. Thereafter, whenever a colour is specified using a hex triplet,
it will be compared against each of the available colours and the
closest will be selected. The first sixteen colours are never matched in
this process due to being unpredictable.
It isn’t possible to reliably detect support for true colour in the
terminal emulator. It is therefore recommended to be selective in
loading the zsh/nearcolor
module. For example, the following
checks the COLORTERM
environment variable:
[[ $COLORTERM = *(24bit|truecolor)* ]] || zmodload zsh/nearcolor
Note that some terminals accept the true color escape codes but map
them internally to a more limited palette in a similar manner to the
zsh/nearcolor
module.
The zsh/newuser
module is loaded at boot if it is
available, the RCS
option is set, and the PRIVILEGED
option is not
set (all three are true by default). This takes
place immediately after commands in the global zshenv
file (typically
/etc/zshenv
), if any, have been executed. If the module is not
available it is silently ignored by the shell; the module may safely be
removed from $MODULE_PATH
by the administrator if it is not required.
On loading, the module tests if any of the start-up files .zshenv
,
.zprofile
, .zshrc
or .zlogin
exist in the directory given by
the environment variable ZDOTDIR
, or the user’s home directory if that
is not set. The test is not performed and the module halts processing if
the shell was in an emulation mode (i.e. had been invoked as some other
shell than zsh).
If none of the start-up files were found, the module then looks for the
file newuser
first in a sitewide directory, usually the parent
directory of the site-functions
directory, and if that is not found the
module searches in a version-specific directory, usually the parent of the
functions
directory containing version-specific functions. (These
directories can be configured when zsh is built using the
--enable-site-scriptdir=
dir and --enable-scriptdir=
dir
flags to configure
, respectively; the defaults are
prefix/share/zsh
and prefix/share/zsh/$ZSH_VERSION
where
the default prefix is /usr/local
.)
If the file newuser
is found, it is then sourced in the same manner as
a start-up file. The file is expected to contain code to install start-up
files for the user, however any valid shell code will be executed.
The zsh/newuser
module is then unconditionally unloaded.
Note that it is possible to achieve exactly the same effect as the
zsh/newuser
module by adding code to /etc/zshenv
. The module
exists simply to allow the shell to make arrangements for new users without
the need for intervention by package maintainers and system administrators.
The script supplied with the module invokes the shell function
zsh-newuser-install
. This may be invoked directly by the user
even if the zsh/newuser
module is disabled. Note, however, that
if the module is not installed the function will not be installed either.
The function is documented in
User Configuration Functions.
The zsh/parameter
module gives access to some of the internal hash
tables used by the shell by defining some special parameters.
options
¶The keys for this associative array are the names of the options that
can be set and unset using the setopt
and unsetopt
builtins. The value of each key is either the string on
if the
option is currently set, or the string off
if the option is unset.
Setting a key to one of these strings is like setting or unsetting
the option, respectively. Unsetting a key in this array is like
setting it to the value off
.
commands
¶This array gives access to the command hash table. The keys are the
names of external commands, the values are the pathnames of the files
that would be executed when the command would be invoked. Setting a
key in this array defines a new entry in this table in the same way as
with the hash
builtin. Unsetting a key as in ‘unset
"commands[foo]"
’ removes the entry for the given key from the command
hash table.
functions
¶This associative array maps names of enabled functions to their definitions. Setting a key in it is like defining a function with the name given by the key and the body given by the value. Unsetting a key removes the definition for the function named by the key.
dis_functions
¶Like functions
but for disabled functions.
functions_source
¶This readonly associative array maps names of enabled functions to the name of the file containing the source of the function.
For an autoloaded function that has already been loaded, or marked for
autoload with an absolute path, or that has had its path resolved with
‘functions -r
’, this is the file found for autoloading, resolved
to an absolute path.
For a function defined within the body of a script or sourced file, this is the name of that file. In this case, this is the exact path originally used to that file, which may be a relative path.
For any other function, including any defined at an interactive prompt or
an autoload function whose path has not yet been resolved, this is
the empty string. However, the hash element is reported as defined
just so long as the function is present: the keys to this hash are
the same as those to $functions
.
dis_functions_source
¶Like functions_source
but for disabled functions.
builtins
¶This associative array gives information about the builtin commands
currently enabled. The keys are the names of the builtin commands and
the values are either ‘undefined
’ for builtin commands that will
automatically be loaded from a module if invoked or ‘defined
’ for
builtin commands that are already loaded.
dis_builtins
¶Like builtins
but for disabled builtin commands.
reswords
¶This array contains the enabled reserved words.
dis_reswords
¶Like reswords
but for disabled reserved words.
patchars
¶This array contains the enabled pattern characters.
dis_patchars
¶Like patchars
but for disabled pattern characters.
aliases
¶This maps the names of the regular aliases currently enabled to their expansions.
dis_aliases
¶Like aliases
but for disabled regular aliases.
galiases
¶Like aliases
, but for global aliases.
dis_galiases
¶Like galiases
but for disabled global aliases.
saliases
¶Like raliases
, but for suffix aliases.
dis_saliases
¶Like saliases
but for disabled suffix aliases.
parameters
¶The keys in this associative array are the names of the parameters
currently defined. The values are strings describing the type of the
parameter, in the same format used by the t
parameter flag, see
Parameter Expansion
.
Setting or unsetting keys in this array is not possible.
modules
¶An associative array giving information about modules. The keys are the names
of the modules loaded, registered to be autoloaded, or aliased. The
value says which state the named module is in and is one of the
strings ‘loaded
’, ‘autoloaded
’, or ‘alias:
name’,
where name is the name the module is aliased to.
Setting or unsetting keys in this array is not possible.
dirstack
¶A normal array holding the elements of the directory stack. Note that
the output of the dirs
builtin command includes one more
directory, the current working directory.
history
¶This associative array maps history event numbers to the full history lines.
Although it is presented as an associative array, the array of all values
(${history[@]}
) is guaranteed to be returned in order from most recent
to oldest history event, that is, by decreasing history event number.
historywords
¶A special array containing the words stored in the history. These also appear in most to least recent order.
jobdirs
¶This associative array maps job numbers to the directories from which the job was started (which may not be the current directory of the job).
The keys of the associative arrays are usually valid job numbers,
and these are the values output with, for example, ${(k)jobdirs}
.
Non-numeric job references may be used when looking up a value;
for example, ${jobdirs[%+]}
refers to the current job.
See the jobs
builtin for how job information is provided in a subshell.
jobtexts
¶This associative array maps job numbers to the texts of the command lines that were used to start the jobs.
Handling of the keys of the associative array is as described for
jobdirs
above.
See the jobs
builtin for how job information is provided in a subshell.
jobstates
¶This associative array gives information about the states of the jobs
currently known. The keys are the job numbers and the values are
strings of the form
‘job-state:
mark:
pid=
state...’. The
job-state gives the state the whole job is currently in, one of
‘running
’, ‘suspended
’, or ‘done
’. The mark is
‘+
’ for the current job, ‘-
’ for the previous job and empty
otherwise. This is followed by one ‘:
pid=
state’ for every
process in the job. The pids are, of course, the process IDs and
the state describes the state of that process.
Handling of the keys of the associative array is as described for
jobdirs
above.
See the jobs
builtin for how job information is provided in a subshell.
nameddirs
¶This associative array maps the names of named directories to the pathnames they stand for.
userdirs
¶This associative array maps user names to the pathnames of their home directories.
usergroups
¶This associative array maps names of system groups of which the current
user is a member to the corresponding group identifiers. The contents
are the same as the groups output by the id
command.
funcfiletrace
¶This array contains the absolute line numbers and corresponding file
names for the point where the current function, sourced file, or (if
EVAL_LINENO
is set) eval
command was
called. The array is of the same length as funcsourcetrace
and
functrace
, but differs from funcsourcetrace
in that the line and
file are the point of call, not the point of definition, and differs
from functrace
in that all values are absolute line numbers in
files, rather than relative to the start of a function, if any.
funcsourcetrace
¶This array contains the file names and line numbers of the
points where the functions, sourced files, and (if EVAL_LINENO
is set)
eval
commands currently being executed were
defined. The line number is the line where the ‘function
name’
or ‘name ()
’ started. In the case of an autoloaded
function the line number is reported as zero.
The format of each element is filename:
lineno.
For functions autoloaded from a file in native zsh format, where only the
body of the function occurs in the file, or for files that have been
executed by the source
or ‘.
’ builtins, the trace information is
shown as filename:
0, since the entire file is the
definition. The source file name is resolved to an absolute path when
the function is loaded or the path to it otherwise resolved.
Most users will be interested in the information in the
funcfiletrace
array instead.
funcstack
¶This array contains the names of the functions, sourced files,
and (if EVAL_LINENO
is set) eval
commands. currently being
executed. The first element is the name of the function using the
parameter.
The standard shell array zsh_eval_context
can be used to
determine the type of shell construct being executed at each depth:
note, however, that is in the opposite order, with the most recent
item last, and it is more detailed, for example including an
entry for toplevel
, the main shell code being executed
either interactively or from a script, which is not present
in $funcstack
.
functrace
¶This array contains the names and line numbers of the callers
corresponding to the functions currently being executed.
The format of each element is name:
lineno.
Callers are also shown for sourced files; the caller is the point
where the source
or ‘.
’ command was executed.
The zsh/pcre
module makes some commands available as builtins:
pcre_compile
[ -aimxs
] PCRE ¶Compiles a perl-compatible regular expression.
Option -a
will force the pattern to be anchored.
Option -i
will compile a case-insensitive pattern.
Option -m
will compile a multi-line pattern; that is,
^
and $
will match newlines within the pattern.
Option -x
will compile an extended pattern, wherein
whitespace and #
comments are ignored.
Option -s
makes the dot metacharacter match all characters,
including those that indicate newline.
pcre_study
¶Studies the previously-compiled PCRE which may result in faster matching.
pcre_match
[ -v
var ] [ -a
arr ] [ -n
offset ] [ -b
] string ¶Returns successfully if string
matches the previously-compiled
PCRE.
Upon successful match,
if the expression captures substrings within parentheses,
pcre_match
will set the array match
to those
substrings, unless the -a
option is given, in which
case it will set the array arr. Similarly, the variable
MATCH
will be set to the entire matched portion of the
string, unless the -v
option is given, in which case the variable
var will be set.
No variables are altered if there is no successful match.
A -n
option starts searching for a match from the
byte offset position in string. If the -b
option is given,
the variable ZPCRE_OP
will be set to an offset pair string,
representing the byte offset positions of the entire matched portion
within the string. For example, a ZPCRE_OP
set to "32 45" indicates
that the matched portion began on byte offset 32 and ended on byte offset 44.
Here, byte offset position 45 is the position directly after the matched
portion. Keep in mind that the byte position isn’t necessarily the same
as the character position when UTF-8 characters are involved.
Consequently, the byte offset positions are only to be relied on in the
context of using them for subsequent searches on string, using an offset
position as an argument to the -n
option. This is mostly
used to implement the "find all non-overlapping matches" functionality.
A simple example of "find all non-overlapping matches":
string="The following zip codes: 78884 90210 99513" pcre_compile -m "\d{5}" accum=() pcre_match -b -- $string while [[ $? -eq 0 ]] do b=($=ZPCRE_OP) accum+=$MATCH pcre_match -b -n $b[2] -- $string done print -l $accum
The zsh/pcre
module makes available the following test condition:
-pcre-match
pcre ¶Matches a string against a perl-compatible regular expression.
For example,
[[ "$text" -pcre-match ^d+$ ]] && print text variable contains only "d's".
If the REMATCH_PCRE
option is set, the =~
operator is equivalent to
-pcre-match
, and the NO_CASE_MATCH
option may be used. Note that
NO_CASE_MATCH
never applies to the pcre_match
builtin, instead use
the -i
switch of pcre_compile
.
The zsh/param/private
module is used to create parameters whose scope
is limited to the current function body, and not to other functions
called by the current function.
This module provides a single autoloaded builtin:
private
[ {+
|-
}AHUahlmrtux
] [ {+
|-
}EFLRZi
[ n ] ] [ name[=
value] ... ] ¶The private
builtin accepts all the same options and arguments as local
(Shell Builtin Commands) except
for the ‘-
T
’ option. Tied parameters may not be made private.
The ‘-
p
’ option is presently a no-op because the state of
private parameters cannot reliably be reloaded. This also applies
to printing private parameters with ‘typeset -p
’.
If used at the top level (outside a function scope), private
creates a
normal parameter in the same manner as declare
or typeset
. A
warning about this is printed if WARN_CREATE_GLOBAL
is set
(Options). Used inside a
function scope, private
creates a local parameter similar to one
declared with local
, except having special properties noted below.
Special parameters which expose or manipulate internal shell state, such
as ARGC
, argv
, COLUMNS
, LINES
, UID
, EUID
, IFS
,
PROMPT
, RANDOM
, SECONDS
, etc., cannot be made private unless
the ‘-
h
’ option is used to hide the special meaning of the
parameter. This may change in the future.
As with other typeset
equivalents, private
is both a builtin and a
reserved word, so arrays may be assigned with parenthesized word list
name=(
value...)
syntax. However, the reserved
word ‘private
’ is not available until zsh/param/private
is loaded,
so care must be taken with order of execution and parsing for function
definitions which use private
. To compensate for this, the module
also adds the option ‘-P
’ to the ‘local
’ builtin to declare private
parameters.
For example, this construction fails if zsh/param/private
has not yet
been loaded when ‘bad_declaration
’ is defined:
bad_declaration() { zmodload zsh/param/private private array=( one two three ) }
This construction works because local
is already a keyword, and the
module is loaded before the statement is executed:
good_declaration() { zmodload zsh/param/private local -P array=( one two three ) }
The following is usable in scripts but may have trouble with autoload
:
zmodload zsh/param/private iffy_declaration() { private array=( one two three ) }
The private
builtin may always be used with scalar assignments and
for declarations without assignments.
Parameters declared with private
have the following properties:
Note that this differs from the static scope defined by compiled languages
derived from C, in that the a new call to the same function creates a new
scope, i.e., the parameter is still associated with the call stack rather
than with the function definition. It differs from ksh ‘typeset -S
’
because the syntax used to define the function has no bearing on whether
the parameter scope is respected.
The zsh/regex
module makes available the following test condition:
-regex-match
regex ¶Matches a string against a POSIX extended regular expression.
On successful match,
matched portion of the string will normally be placed in the MATCH
variable. If there are any capturing parentheses within the regex, then
the match
array variable will contain those.
If the match is not successful, then the variables will not be altered.
For example,
[[ alphabetical -regex-match ^a([^a]+)a([^a]+)a ]] && print -l $MATCH X $match
If the option REMATCH_PCRE
is not set, then the =~
operator will
automatically load this module as needed and will invoke the
-regex-match
operator.
If BASH_REMATCH
is set, then the array BASH_REMATCH
will be set
instead of MATCH
and match
.
Note that the zsh/regex
module logic relies on the host system. The
same expr and regex pair could produce different results on different
platforms if a regex with non-standard syntax is given.
For example, no syntax for matching a word boundary is defined in the POSIX
extended regular expression standard. GNU libc
and BSD libc
both provide
such syntaxes as extensions (\b
and [[:<:]]
/[[:>:]]
respectively),
but neither of these syntaxes is supported by both of these implementations.
Refer to the regcomp(3) and re_format(7) manual pages on your system for locally-supported syntax.
The zsh/sched
module makes available one builtin command and one
parameter.
sched
[-o
] [+
]hh:
mm[:
ss] command ... ¶sched
[-o
] [+
]seconds command ...sched
[ -
item ]Make an entry in the scheduled list of commands to execute.
The time may be specified in either absolute or relative time,
and either as hours, minutes and (optionally) seconds separated by a
colon, or seconds alone.
An absolute number of seconds indicates the time since the epoch
(1970/01/01 00:00); this is useful in combination with the features in
the zsh/datetime
module, see
The zsh/datetime Module.
With no arguments, prints the list of scheduled commands. If the
scheduled command has the -o
flag set, this is shown at the
start of the command.
With the argument ‘-
item’, removes the given item
from the list. The numbering of the list is continuous and entries are
in time order, so the numbering can change when entries are added or
deleted.
Commands are executed either immediately before a prompt, or while
the shell’s line editor is waiting for input. In the latter case
it is useful to be able to produce output that does not interfere
with the line being edited. Providing the option -o
causes
the shell to clear the command line before the event and redraw it
afterwards. This should be used with any scheduled event that produces
visible output to the terminal; it is not needed, for example, with
output that updates a terminal emulator’s title bar.
To effect changes to the editor buffer when an event executes, use the
‘zle
’ command with no arguments to test whether the editor is active,
and if it is, then use ‘zle
widget’ to access the editor via
the named widget.
The sched
builtin is not made available by default when the shell
starts in a mode emulating another shell. It can be made available
with the command ‘zmodload -F zsh/sched b:sched
’.
zsh_scheduled_events
¶A readonly array corresponding to the events scheduled by the
sched
builtin. The indices of the array correspond to the numbers
shown when sched
is run with no arguments (provided that the
KSH_ARRAYS
option is not set). The value of the array
consists of the scheduled time in seconds since the epoch
(see The zsh/datetime Module for facilities for
using this number), followed by a colon, followed by any options
(which may be empty but will be preceded by a ‘-
’ otherwise),
followed by a colon, followed by the command to be executed.
The sched
builtin should be used for manipulating the events. Note
that this will have an immediate effect on the contents of the array,
so that indices may become invalid.
The zsh/net/socket
module makes available one builtin command:
zsocket
[ -altv
] [ -d
fd ] [ args ] ¶zsocket
is implemented as a builtin to allow full use of shell
command line editing, file I/O, and job control mechanisms.
zsocket
[ -v
] [ -d
fd ] filenameOpen a new Unix domain connection to filename.
The shell parameter REPLY
will be set to the file descriptor
associated with that connection. Currently, only stream connections
are supported.
If -d
is specified, its argument
will be taken as the target file descriptor for the
connection.
In order to elicit more verbose output, use -v
.
File descriptors can be closed with normal shell syntax when no longer needed, for example:
exec {REPLY}>&-
zsocket
-l
[ -v
] [ -d
fd ] filenamezsocket -l
will open a socket listening on filename.
The shell parameter REPLY
will be set to the file descriptor
associated with that listener. The file descriptor remains open in subshells
and forked external executables.
If -d
is specified, its argument
will be taken as the target file descriptor for
the connection.
In order to elicit more verbose output, use -v
.
zsocket
-a
[ -tv
] [ -d
targetfd ] listenfdzsocket -a
will accept an incoming connection
to the socket associated with listenfd.
The shell parameter REPLY
will
be set to the file descriptor associated with
the inbound connection. The file descriptor remains open in subshells
and forked external executables.
If -d
is specified, its argument
will be taken as the target file descriptor for the
connection.
If -t
is specified, zsocket
will return
if no incoming connection is pending. Otherwise
it will wait for one.
In order to elicit more verbose output, use -v
.
The zsh/stat
module makes available one builtin command under
two possible names:
zstat
[ -gnNolLtTrs
] [ -f
fd ] [ -H
hash ] [ -A
array ] [ -F
fmt ]
[ +
element ] [ file ... ]stat
...The command acts as a front end to the stat
system call (see
stat(2)). The same command is provided with two names; as
the name stat
is often used by an external command it is recommended
that only the zstat
form of the command is used. This can be
arranged by loading the module with the command ‘zmodload -F zsh/stat
b:zstat
’.
If the stat
call fails, the appropriate system error message
printed and status 1 is returned.
The fields of struct stat
give information about
the files provided as arguments to the command. In addition to those
available from the stat
call, an extra element ‘link
’ is provided.
These elements are:
device
The number of the device on which the file resides.
inode
The unique number of the file on this device (‘inode’ number).
mode
The mode of the file; that is, the file’s type and access permissions.
With the -s
option, this will
be returned as a string corresponding to the first column in the
display of the ls -l
command.
nlink
The number of hard links to the file.
uid
The user ID of the owner of the file. With the -s
option, this is displayed as a user name.
gid
The group ID of the file. With the -s
option, this
is displayed as a group name.
rdev
The raw device number. This is only useful for special devices.
size
The size of the file in bytes.
atime
mtime
ctime
The last access, modification and inode change times
of the file, respectively, as the number of seconds since
midnight GMT on 1st January, 1970. With the -s
option,
these are printed as strings for the local time zone; the format
can be altered with the -F
option, and with the -g
option the times are in GMT.
blksize
The number of bytes in one allocation block on the device on which the file resides.
block
The number of disk blocks used by the file.
link
If the file is a link and the -L
option is in
effect, this contains the name of the file linked to, otherwise
it is empty. Note that if this element is selected ({No value for ‘dsbq’}zstat +link
{No value for ‘dsq’})
then the -L
option is automatically used.
A particular element may be selected by including its name
preceded by a ‘+
’ in the option list; only one element is allowed.
The element may be shortened to any unique set of leading
characters. Otherwise, all elements will be shown for all files.
Options:
-A
arrayInstead of displaying the results on standard
output, assign them to an array, one struct stat
element per array
element for each file in order. In this case neither the name
of the element nor the name of the files appears in array unless the
-t
or -n
options were given, respectively. If -t
is given,
the element name appears as a prefix to the
appropriate array element; if -n
is given, the file name
appears as a separate array element preceding all the others.
Other formatting options are respected.
-H
hashSimilar to -A
, but instead assign the values to hash. The keys
are the elements listed above. If the -n
option is provided then the
name of the file is included in the hash with key name
.
-f
fdUse the file on file descriptor fd instead of named files; no list of file names is allowed in this case.
-F
fmtSupplies a strftime
(see strftime(3)) string for the
formatting of the time elements. The format string supports all of the
zsh extensions described in
Prompt Expansion.
In particular, -F %s.%N
can be used to show timestamps with nanosecond
precision if supported by the system.
The -s
option is implied.
-g
Show the time elements in the GMT time zone. The
-s
option is implied.
-l
List the names of the type elements (to standard
output or an array as appropriate) and return immediately;
arguments, and options other than -A
, are ignored.
-L
Perform an lstat
(see lstat(2)) rather than a stat
system call. In this case, if the file is a link, information
about the link itself rather than the target file is returned.
This option is required to make the link
element useful.
It’s important to note that this is the exact opposite from ls(1),
etc.
-n
Always show the names of files. Usually these are only shown when output is to standard output and there is more than one file in the list.
-N
Never show the names of files.
-o
If a raw file mode is printed, show it in octal, which is more useful for
human consumption than the default of decimal. A leading zero will be
printed in this case. Note that this does not affect whether a raw or
formatted file mode is shown, which is controlled by the -r
and -s
options, nor whether a mode is shown at all.
-r
Print raw data (the default format) alongside string
data (the -s
format); the string data appears in parentheses
after the raw data.
-s
Print mode
, uid
, gid
and the three time
elements as strings instead of numbers. In each case the format
is like that of ls -l
.
-t
Always show the type names for the elements of
struct stat
. Usually these are only shown when output is to
standard output and no individual element has been selected.
-T
Never show the type names of the struct stat
elements.
The zsh/system
module makes available various builtin commands and
parameters.
syserror
[ -e
errvar ] [ -p
prefix ] [ errno | errname ] ¶This command prints out the error message associated with errno, a system error number, followed by a newline to standard error.
Instead of the error number, a name errname, for example
ENOENT
, may be used. The set of names is the same as the contents
of the array errnos
, see below.
If the string prefix is given, it is printed in front of the error message, with no intervening space.
If errvar is supplied, the entire message, without a newline, is assigned to the parameter names errvar and nothing is output.
A return status of 0 indicates the message was successfully printed (although it may not be useful if the error number was out of the system’s range), a return status of 1 indicates an error in the parameters, and a return status of 2 indicates the error name was not recognised (no message is printed for this).
sysopen
[ -arw
] [ -m
permissions ] [ -o
options ]
-u
fd fileThis command opens a file. The -r
, -w
and -a
flags indicate
whether the file should be opened for reading, writing and appending,
respectively. The -m
option allows the initial permissions to use when
creating a file to be specified in octal form. The file descriptor is
specified with -u
. Either an explicit file descriptor in the range 0 to 9 can
be specified or a variable name can be given to which the file descriptor
number will be assigned.
The -o
option allows various system specific options to be
specified as a comma-separated list. The following is a list of possible
options. Note that, depending on the system, some may not be available.
cloexec
mark file to be closed when other programs are executed (else the file descriptor remains open in subshells and forked external executables)
create
creat
create file if it does not exist
excl
create file, error if it already exists
noatime
suppress updating of the file atime
nofollow
fail if file is a symbolic link
nonblock
the file is opened in nonblocking mode
sync
request that writes wait until data has been physically written
truncate
trunc
truncate file to size 0
To close the file, use one of the following:
exec {
fd}<&-
exec {
fd}>&-
sysread
[ -c
countvar ] [ -i
infd ] [ -o
outfd ]
[ -s
bufsize ] [ -t
timeout ] [ param ]Perform a single system read from file descriptor infd, or zero if
that is not given. The result of the read is stored in param or
REPLY
if that is not given. If countvar is given, the number
of bytes read is assigned to the parameter named by countvar.
The maximum number of bytes read is bufsize or 8192 if that is not given, however the command returns as soon as any number of bytes was successfully read.
If timeout is given, it specifies a timeout in seconds, which may
be zero to poll the file descriptor. This is handled by the poll
system call if available, otherwise the select
system call if
available.
If outfd is given, an attempt is made to write all the bytes just
read to the file descriptor outfd. If this fails, because of a
system error other than EINTR
or because of an internal zsh error
during an interrupt, the bytes read but not written are stored in the
parameter named by param if supplied (no default is used in this
case), and the number of bytes read but not written is stored in the
parameter named by countvar if that is supplied. If it was
successful, countvar contains the full number of bytes transferred,
as usual, and param is not set.
The error EINTR
(interrupted system call) is handled internally so
that shell interrupts are transparent to the caller. Any other error
causes a return.
The possible return statuses are
At least one byte of data was successfully read and, if appropriate, written.
There was an error in the parameters to the command. This is the only error for which a message is printed to standard error.
There was an error on the read, or on polling the input file descriptor
for a timeout. The parameter ERRNO
gives the error.
Data were successfully read, but there was an error writing them
to outfd. The parameter ERRNO
gives the error.
The attempt to read timed out. Note this does not set ERRNO
as this
is not a system error.
No system error occurred, but zero bytes were read. This usually indicates end of file. The parameters are set according to the usual rules; no write to outfd is attempted.
sysseek
[ -u
fd ] [ -w
start
|end
|current
] offsetThe current file position at which future reads and writes will take place is
adjusted to the specified byte offset. The offset is evaluated as a math
expression. The -u
option allows the file descriptor to be specified. By
default the offset is specified relative to the start or the file but, with the
-w
option, it is possible to specify that the offset should be relative to
the current position or the end of the file.
syswrite
[ -c
countvar ] [ -o
outfd ] dataThe data (a single string of bytes) are written to the file descriptor
outfd, or 1 if that is not given, using the write
system call.
Multiple write operations may be used if the first does not write all
the data.
If countvar is given, the number of byte written is stored in the parameter named by countvar; this may not be the full length of data if an error occurred.
The error EINTR
(interrupted system call) is handled internally by
retrying; otherwise an error causes the command to return. For example,
if the file descriptor is set to non-blocking output, an error
EAGAIN
(on some systems, EWOULDBLOCK
) may result in the command
returning early.
The return status may be 0 for success, 1 for an error in the parameters
to the command, or 2 for an error on the write; no error message is
printed in the last case, but the parameter ERRNO
will reflect
the error that occurred.
zsystem flock
[ -t
timeout ] [ -i
interval ] [ -f
var ] [-er
] filezsystem flock -u
fd_exprThe builtin zsystem
’s subcommand flock
performs advisory file
locking (via the fcntl(2) system call) over the entire contents
of the given file. This form of locking requires the processes
accessing the file to cooperate; its most obvious use is between two
instances of the shell itself.
In the first form the named file, which must already exist, is
locked by opening a file descriptor to the file and applying a lock to
the file descriptor. The lock terminates when the shell process that
created the lock exits; it is therefore often convenient to create file
locks within subshells, since the lock is automatically released when
the subshell exits. Note that use of the print
builtin with the
-u
option will, as a side effect, release the lock, as will redirection
to the file in the shell holding the lock. To work around this use a
subshell, e.g. ‘(print message) >>
file’. Status 0 is
returned if the lock succeeds, else status 1.
In the second form the file descriptor given by the arithmetic
expression fd_expr is closed, releasing a lock. The file descriptor
can be queried by using the ‘-f
var’ form during the lock;
on a successful lock, the shell variable var is set to the file
descriptor used for locking. The lock will be released if the
file descriptor is closed by any other means, for example using
‘exec {
var}>&-
’; however, the form described here performs
a safety check that the file descriptor is in use for file locking.
By default the shell waits indefinitely for the lock to succeed.
The option -t
timeout specifies a timeout for the lock in
seconds; fractional seconds are allowed. During this period, the
shell will attempt to lock the file every interval seconds
if the -i
interval option is given, otherwise once a second.
(This interval is shortened before the last attempt if needed,
so that the shell waits only until the timeout and not longer.)
If the attempt times out, status 2 is returned.
(Note: timeout is limited to 2^30-1 seconds (about 34 years), and interval to 0.999 * LONG_MAX microseconds (only about 35 minutes on 32-bit systems).)
If the option -e
is given, the file descriptor for the lock is
preserved when the shell uses exec
to start a new process;
otherwise it is closed at that point and the lock released.
If the option -r
is given, the lock is only for reading, otherwise
it is for reading and writing. The file descriptor is opened
accordingly.
zsystem supports
subcommandThe builtin zsystem
’s subcommand supports
tests whether a
given subcommand is supported. It returns status 0 if so, else
status 1. It operates silently unless there was a syntax error
(i.e. the wrong number of arguments), in which case status 255
is returned. Status 1 can indicate one of two things: subcommand
is known but not supported by the current operating system, or
subcommand is not known (possibly because this is an older
version of the shell before it was implemented).
systell(fd)
The systell math function returns the current file position for the file descriptor passed as an argument.
errnos
¶A readonly array of the names of errors defined on the system. These
are typically macros defined in C by including the system header file
errno.h
. The index of each name (assuming the option KSH_ARRAYS
is unset) corresponds to the error number. Error numbers num
before the last known error which have no name are given the name
E
num in the array.
Note that aliases for errors are not handled; only the canonical name is used.
sysparams
¶A readonly associative array. The keys are:
pid
¶Returns the process ID of the current process, even in subshells. Compare
$$
, which returns the process ID of the main shell process.
ppid
¶Returns the current process ID of the parent of the current process, even
in subshells. Compare $PPID
, which returns the process ID of the
initial parent of the main shell process.
procsubstpid
Returns the process ID of the last process started for process
substitution, i.e. the <(
...)
and
>(
...)
expansions.
The zsh/net/tcp
module makes available one builtin command:
ztcp
[ -acflLtv
] [ -d
fd ] [ args ] ¶ztcp
is implemented as a builtin to allow full use of shell
command line editing, file I/O, and job control mechanisms.
If ztcp
is run with no options, it will output
the contents of its session table.
If it is run with only the option -L
, it will output the contents of
the session table in a format suitable for automatic parsing. The option
is ignored if given with a command to open or close a session. The output
consists of a set of lines, one per session, each containing the following
elements separated by spaces:
The file descriptor in use for the connection. For normal inbound (I
)
and outbound (O
) connections this may be read and written by the usual
shell mechanisms. However, it should only be close with ‘ztcp -c
’.
A letter indicating how the session was created:
Z
A session created with the zftp
command.
L
A connection opened for listening with ‘ztcp -l
’.
I
An inbound connection accepted with ‘ztcp -a
’.
O
An outbound connection created with ‘ztcp
host ...’.
This is usually set to an all-zero IP address as the address of the localhost is irrelevant.
This is likely to be zero unless the connection is for listening.
This is the fully qualified domain name of the peer, if available, else an IP address. It is an all-zero IP address for a session opened for listening.
This is zero for a connection opened for listening.
ztcp
[ -v
] [ -d
fd ] host [ port ]Open a new TCP connection to host. If the port is
omitted, it will default to port 23. The connection will
be added to the session table and the shell parameter
REPLY
will be set to the file descriptor associated
with that connection.
If -d
is specified, its argument will be taken as the target file
descriptor for the connection.
In order to elicit more verbose output, use -v
.
ztcp
-l
[ -v
] [ -d
fd ] portztcp -l
will open a socket listening on TCP
port. The socket will be added to the
session table and the shell parameter REPLY
will be set to the file descriptor associated
with that listener.
If -d
is specified, its argument will be taken as the target file
descriptor for the connection.
In order to elicit more verbose output, use -v
.
ztcp
-a
[ -tv
] [ -d
targetfd ] listenfdztcp -a
will accept an incoming connection
to the port associated with listenfd.
The connection will be added to the session
table and the shell parameter REPLY
will
be set to the file descriptor associated with
the inbound connection.
If -d
is specified, its argument
will be taken as the target file descriptor for the
connection.
If -t
is specified, ztcp
will return
if no incoming connection is pending. Otherwise
it will wait for one.
In order to elicit more verbose output, use -v
.
ztcp
-cf
[ -v
] [ fd ]ztcp
-c
[ -v
] [ fd ]ztcp -c
will close the socket associated
with fd. The socket will be removed from the
session table. If fd is not specified,
ztcp
will close everything in the session table.
Normally, sockets registered by zftp (see
The zsh/zftp Module
) cannot be closed this way. In order
to force such a socket closed, use -f
.
In order to elicit more verbose output, use -v
.
Here is how to create a TCP connection between two instances of zsh. We need to pick an unassigned port; here we use the randomly chosen 5123.
On host1
,
zmodload zsh/net/tcp ztcp -l 5123 listenfd=$REPLY ztcp -a $listenfd fd=$REPLY
The second from last command blocks until there is an incoming connection.
Now create a connection from host2
(which may, of course, be the same
machine):
zmodload zsh/net/tcp ztcp host1 5123 fd=$REPLY
Now on each host, $fd
contains a file descriptor for talking to the
other. For example, on host1
:
print This is a message >&$fd
and on host2
:
read -r line <&$fd; print -r - $line
prints ‘This is a message
’.
To tidy up, on host1
:
ztcp -c $listenfd ztcp -c $fd
and on host2
ztcp -c $fd
The zsh/termcap
module makes available one builtin command:
echotc
cap [ arg ... ] ¶Output the termcap value corresponding to the capability cap, with optional arguments.
The zsh/termcap
module makes available one parameter:
termcap
¶An associative array that maps termcap capability codes to their values.
The zsh/terminfo
module makes available one builtin command:
echoti
cap [ arg ] ¶Output the terminfo value corresponding to the capability cap, instantiated with arg if applicable.
The zsh/terminfo
module makes available one parameter:
terminfo
¶An associative array that maps terminfo capability names to their values.
The zsh/watch
module can be used to report when specific users log in or
out. This is controlled via the following parameters.
LOGCHECK
¶The interval in seconds between checks for login/logout activity
using the watch
parameter.
watch
<S> <Z> (WATCH
<S>) ¶An array (colon-separated list) of login/logout events to report.
If it contains the single word ‘all
’, then all login/logout events
are reported. If it contains the single word ‘notme
’, then all
events are reported as with ‘all
’ except $USERNAME
.
An entry in this list may consist of a username,
an ‘@
’ followed by a remote hostname,
and a ‘%
’ followed by a line (tty). Any of these may
be a pattern (be sure to quote this during the assignment to
watch
so that it does not immediately perform file generation);
the setting of the EXTENDED_GLOB
option is respected.
Any or all of these components may be present in an entry;
if a login/logout event matches all of them,
it is reported.
For example, with the EXTENDED_GLOB
option set, the following:
watch=('^(pws|barts)')
causes reports for activity associated with any user other than pws
or barts
.
WATCHFMT
¶The format of login/logout reports if the watch
parameter is set.
Default is ‘%n has %a %l from %m
’.
Recognizes the following escape sequences:
%n
The name of the user that logged in/out.
%a
The observed action, i.e. "logged on" or "logged off".
%l
The line (tty) the user is logged in on.
%M
The full hostname of the remote host.
%m
The hostname up to the first ‘.
’. If only the
IP address is available or the utmp field contains
the name of an X-windows display, the whole name is printed.
NOTE:
The ‘%m
’ and ‘%M
’ escapes will work only if there is a host name
field in the utmp on your machine. Otherwise they are
treated as ordinary strings.
%F{
color}
(%f
)Start (stop) using a different foreground color.
%K{
color}
(%k
)Start (stop) using a different background color.
%S
(%s
)Start (stop) standout mode.
%U
(%u
)Start (stop) underline mode.
%B
(%b
)Start (stop) boldface mode.
%t
%@
The time, in 12-hour, am/pm format.
%T
The time, in 24-hour format.
%w
The date in ‘day-
dd’ format.
%W
The date in ‘mm/
dd/
yy’ format.
%D
The date in ‘yy-
mm-
dd’ format.
%D{
string}
The date formatted as string using the strftime
function, with
zsh extensions as described by
Prompt Expansion.
%(
x:
true-text:
false-text)
Specifies a ternary expression. The character following the x is arbitrary; the same character is used to separate the text for the "true" result from that for the "false" result. Both the separator and the right parenthesis may be escaped with a backslash. Ternary expressions may be nested.
The test character x may be any one of ‘l
’, ‘n
’, ‘m
’
or ‘M
’, which indicate a ‘true’ result if the corresponding
escape sequence would return a non-empty value; or it may be ‘a
’,
which indicates a ‘true’ result if the watched user has logged in,
or ‘false’ if he has logged out.
Other characters evaluate to neither true nor false; the entire
expression is omitted in this case.
If the result is ‘true’, then the true-text is formatted according to the rules above and printed, and the false-text is skipped. If ‘false’, the true-text is skipped and the false-text is formatted and printed. Either or both of the branches may be empty, but both separators must be present in any case.
Furthermore, the zsh/watch
module makes available one builtin
command:
log
¶List all users currently logged in who are affected by
the current setting of the watch
parameter.
The zsh/zftp
module makes available one builtin command:
zftp
subcommand [ args ] ¶The zsh/zftp
module is a client for FTP (file transfer protocol). It
is implemented as a builtin to allow full use of shell command line
editing, file I/O, and job control mechanisms. Often, users will
access it via shell functions providing a more powerful interface; a set is
provided with the zsh
distribution and is described in
Zftp Function System. However, the zftp
command is entirely usable in its
own right.
All commands consist of the command name zftp
followed by the name
of a subcommand. These are listed below. The return status of each
subcommand is supposed to reflect the success or failure of the remote
operation. See a description of the variable ZFTP_VERBOSE
for
more information on how responses from the server may be printed.
open
host[:
port] [ user [ password [ account ] ] ] ¶Open a new FTP session to host, which may be the name of a TCP/IP
connected host or an IP number in the standard dot notation. If the
argument is in the form host:
port, open a connection to
TCP port port instead of the standard FTP port 21. This may be
the name of a TCP service or a number: see the description of
ZFTP_PORT
below for more information.
If IPv6 addresses in colon format are used, the host should be
surrounded by quoted square brackets to distinguish it from the port,
for example '[fe80::203:baff:fe02:8b56]'
. For consistency this is
allowed with all forms of host.
Remaining arguments are passed to the login
subcommand. Note that
if no arguments beyond host are supplied, open
will not
automatically call login
. If no arguments at all are supplied,
open
will use the parameters set by the params
subcommand.
After a successful open, the shell variables ZFTP_HOST
, ZFTP_PORT
,
ZFTP_IP
and ZFTP_SYSTEM
are available; see ‘Variables’
below.
login
[ name [ password [ account ] ] ]user
[ name [ password [ account ] ] ]Login the user name with parameters password and account. Any of the parameters can be omitted, and will be read from standard input if needed (name is always needed). If standard input is a terminal, a prompt for each one will be printed on standard error and password will not be echoed. If any of the parameters are not used, a warning message is printed.
After a successful login, the shell variables ZFTP_USER
,
ZFTP_ACCOUNT
and ZFTP_PWD
are available; see ‘Variables’
below.
This command may be re-issued when a user is already logged in, and the server will first be reinitialized for a new user.
params
[ host [ user [ password [ account ] ] ] ]params
-
Store the given parameters for a later open
command with no
arguments. Only those given on the command line will be remembered.
If no arguments are given, the parameters currently set are printed,
although the password will appear as a line of stars; the return status is
one if no parameters were set, zero otherwise.
Any of the parameters may be specified as a ‘?
’, which
may need to be quoted to protect it from shell expansion. In this case,
the appropriate parameter will be read from stdin as with the
login
subcommand, including special handling of password. If the
‘?
’ is followed by a string, that is used as the prompt for reading the
parameter instead of the default message (any necessary punctuation and
whitespace should be included at the end of the prompt). The first letter
of the parameter (only) may be quoted with a ‘\
’; hence an argument
"\\$word"
guarantees that the string from the shell parameter $word
will be treated literally, whether or not it begins with a ‘?
’.
If instead a single ‘-
’ is given, the existing parameters, if any,
are deleted. In that case, calling open
with no arguments will
cause an error.
The list of parameters is not deleted after a close
, however it
will be deleted if the zsh/zftp
module is unloaded.
For example,
zftp params ftp.elsewhere.xx juser '?Password for juser: '
will store the host ftp.elsewhere.xx
and the user juser
and
then prompt the user for the corresponding password with the given prompt.
test
Test the connection; if the server has reported
that it has closed the connection (maybe due to a timeout), return
status 2; if no connection was open anyway, return status 1; else
return status 0. The test
subcommand is
silent, apart from messages printed by the $ZFTP_VERBOSE
mechanism, or error messages if the connection closes. There is no
network overhead for this test.
The test is only supported on systems with either the
select(2)
or
poll(2)
system calls; otherwise the message ‘not
supported on this system
’ is printed instead.
The test
subcommand will automatically be called at the start of any
other subcommand for the current session when a connection is open.
cd
directoryChange the remote directory to directory. Also alters the shell
variable ZFTP_PWD
.
cdup
Change the remote directory to the one higher in the directory tree.
Note that cd ..
will also work correctly on non-UNIX systems.
dir
[ arg ... ]Give a (verbose) listing of the remote directory. The args are
passed directly to the server. The command’s behaviour is implementation
dependent, but a UNIX server will typically interpret args as
arguments to the ls
command and with no arguments return the
result of ‘ls -l
’. The directory is listed to standard output.
ls
[ arg ... ]Give a (short) listing of the remote directory. With no arg,
produces a raw list of the files in the directory, one per line.
Otherwise, up to vagaries of the server implementation, behaves
similar to dir
.
type
[ type ]Change the type for the transfer to type, or print the current type
if type is absent. The allowed values are ‘A
’ (ASCII),
‘I
’ (Image, i.e. binary), or ‘B
’ (a synonym for ‘I
’).
The FTP default for a transfer is ASCII. However, if zftp
finds
that the remote host is a UNIX machine with 8-bit byes, it will
automatically switch to using binary for file transfers upon
open
. This can subsequently be overridden.
The transfer type is only passed to the remote host when a data connection is established; this command involves no network overhead.
ascii
The same as type A
.
binary
The same as type I
.
mode
[ S
| B
]Set the mode type to stream (S
) or block (B
). Stream mode is
the default; block mode is not widely supported.
remote
file ...local
[ file ... ]Print the size and last modification time of the remote or local
files. If there is more than one item on the list, the name of the
file is printed first. The first number is the file size, the second
is the last modification time of the file in the format
CCYYMMDDhhmmSS
consisting of year, month, date, hour, minutes and
seconds in GMT. Note that this format, including the length, is
guaranteed, so that time strings can be directly compared via the
[[
builtin’s <
and >
operators, even if they are too long
to be represented as integers.
Not all servers support the commands for retrieving this information.
In that case, the remote
command will print nothing and return
status 2, compared with status 1 for a file not found.
The local
command (but not remote
) may be used with no
arguments, in which case the information comes from examining file
descriptor zero. This is the same file as seen by a put
command
with no further redirection.
get
file ...Retrieve all files from the server, concatenating them and sending them to standard output.
put
file ...For each file, read a file from standard input and send that to the remote host with the given name.
append
file ...As put
, but if the remote file already exists, data is
appended to it instead of overwriting it.
getat
file pointputat
file pointappendat
file pointVersions of get
, put
and append
which will start the
transfer at the given point in the remote file. This is
useful for appending to an incomplete local file. However, note that
this ability is not universally supported by servers (and is not quite
the behaviour specified by the standard).
delete
file ...Delete the list of files on the server.
mkdir
directoryCreate a new directory directory on the server.
rmdir
directoryDelete the directory directory on the server.
rename
old-name new-nameRename file old-name to new-name on the server.
site
arg ...Send a host-specific command to the server. You will probably only need this if instructed by the server to use it.
quote
arg ...Send the raw FTP command sequence to the server. You should be
familiar with the FTP command set as defined in RFC959 before doing
this. Useful commands may include STAT
and HELP
. Note also
the mechanism for returning messages as described for the variable
ZFTP_VERBOSE
below, in particular that all messages from the
control connection are sent to standard error.
close
quit
Close the current data connection. This unsets the shell parameters
ZFTP_HOST
, ZFTP_PORT
, ZFTP_IP
, ZFTP_SYSTEM
, ZFTP_USER
,
ZFTP_ACCOUNT
, ZFTP_PWD
, ZFTP_TYPE
and ZFTP_MODE
.
session
[ sessname ]Allows multiple FTP sessions to be used at once. The name of the session
is an arbitrary string of characters; the default session is called
‘default
’. If this command is called without an argument, it will list
all the current sessions; with an argument, it will either switch to the
existing session called sessname, or create a new session of that name.
Each session remembers the status of the connection, the set of
connection-specific shell parameters (the same set as are unset when a
connection closes, as given in the description of close
), and any user
parameters specified with the params
subcommand. Changing to a
previous session restores those values; changing to a new session
initialises them in the same way as if zftp
had just been loaded. The
name of the current session is given by the parameter ZFTP_SESSION
.
rmsession
[ sessname ]Delete a session; if a name is not given, the current session is deleted.
If the current session is deleted, the earliest existing session becomes
the new current session, otherwise the current session is not changed.
If the session being deleted is the only one, a new session called
‘default
’ is created and becomes the current session; note that this is
a new session even if the session being deleted is also called
‘default
’. It is recommended that sessions not be deleted while
background commands which use zftp
are still active.
The following shell parameters are used by zftp
. Currently none
of them are special.
ZFTP_TMOUT
¶Integer. The time in seconds to wait for a network operation to complete before returning an error. If this is not set when the module is loaded, it will be given the default value 60. A value of zero turns off timeouts. If a timeout occurs on the control connection it will be closed. Use a larger value if this occurs too frequently.
ZFTP_IP
¶Readonly. The IP address of the current connection in dot notation.
ZFTP_HOST
¶Readonly. The hostname of the current remote server. If the host was
opened as an IP number, ZFTP_HOST
contains that instead; this
saves the overhead for a name lookup, as IP numbers are most commonly
used when a nameserver is unavailable.
ZFTP_PORT
¶Readonly. The number of the remote TCP port to which the connection is open (even if the port was originally specified as a named service). Usually this is the standard FTP port, 21.
In the unlikely event that your system does not have the appropriate
conversion functions, this appears in network byte order. If your
system is little-endian, the port then consists of two swapped bytes and the
standard port will be reported as 5376. In that case, numeric ports passed
to zftp open
will also need to be in this format.
ZFTP_SYSTEM
¶Readonly. The system type string returned by the server in response
to an FTP SYST
request. The most interesting case is a string
beginning "UNIX Type: L8"
, which ensures maximum compatibility
with a local UNIX host.
ZFTP_TYPE
¶Readonly. The type to be used for data transfers , either ‘A
’ or
‘I
’. Use the type
subcommand to change this.
ZFTP_USER
¶Readonly. The username currently logged in, if any.
ZFTP_ACCOUNT
¶Readonly. The account name of the current user, if any. Most servers do not require an account name.
ZFTP_PWD
¶Readonly. The current directory on the server.
ZFTP_CODE
¶Readonly. The three digit code of the last FTP reply from the server as a string. This can still be read after the connection is closed, and is not changed when the current session changes.
ZFTP_REPLY
¶Readonly. The last line of the last reply sent by the server. This can still be read after the connection is closed, and is not changed when the current session changes.
ZFTP_SESSION
¶Readonly. The name of the current FTP session; see the description of the
session
subcommand.
ZFTP_PREFS
¶A string of preferences for altering aspects of zftp
’s behaviour.
Each preference is a single character. The following are defined:
P
Passive: attempt to make the remote server initiate data transfers.
This is slightly more efficient than sendport mode. If the letter
S
occurs later in the string, zftp
will use sendport mode if
passive mode is not available.
S
Sendport: initiate transfers by the FTP PORT
command. If this
occurs before any P
in the string, passive mode will never be
attempted.
D
Dumb: use only the bare minimum of FTP commands. This prevents
the variables ZFTP_SYSTEM
and ZFTP_PWD
from being set, and
will mean all connections default to ASCII type. It may prevent
ZFTP_SIZE
from being set during a transfer if the server
does not send it anyway (many servers do).
If ZFTP_PREFS
is not set when zftp
is loaded, it will be set to a
default of ‘PS
’, i.e. use passive mode if available, otherwise
fall back to sendport mode.
ZFTP_VERBOSE
¶A string of digits between 0 and 5 inclusive, specifying which responses from the server should be printed. All responses go to standard error. If any of the numbers 1 to 5 appear in the string, raw responses from the server with reply codes beginning with that digit will be printed to standard error. The first digit of the three digit reply code is defined by RFC959 to correspond to:
A positive preliminary reply.
A positive completion reply.
A positive intermediate reply.
A transient negative completion reply.
A permanent negative completion reply.
It should be noted that, for unknown reasons, the reply ‘Service not available’, which forces termination of a connection, is classified as 421, i.e. ‘transient negative’, an interesting interpretation of the word ‘transient’.
The code 0 is special: it indicates that all but the last line of multiline replies read from the server will be printed to standard error in a processed format. By convention, servers use this mechanism for sending information for the user to read. The appropriate reply code, if it matches the same response, takes priority.
If ZFTP_VERBOSE
is not set when zftp
is loaded, it will be
set to the default value 450
, i.e., messages destined for the user
and all errors will be printed. A null string is valid and
specifies that no messages should be printed.
zftp_chpwd
¶If this function is set by the user, it is called every time the
directory changes on the server, including when a user is logged
in, or when a connection is closed. In the last case, $ZFTP_PWD
will be unset; otherwise it will reflect the new directory.
zftp_progress
¶If this function is set by the user, it will be called during
a get
, put
or append
operation each time sufficient data
has been received from the host. During a get
, the data is sent
to standard output, so it is vital that this function should write
to standard error or directly to the terminal, not to standard
output.
When it is called with a transfer in progress, the following additional shell parameters are set:
ZFTP_FILE
¶The name of the remote file being transferred from or to.
ZFTP_TRANSFER
¶A G
for a get
operation and a P
for a put
operation.
ZFTP_SIZE
¶The total size of the complete file being transferred:
the same as the first value provided by the
remote
and local
subcommands for a particular file.
If the server cannot supply this value for a remote file being
retrieved, it will not be set. If input is from a pipe the value may
be incorrect and correspond simply to a full pipe buffer.
ZFTP_COUNT
¶The amount of data so far transferred; a number between zero and
$ZFTP_SIZE
, if that is set. This number is always available.
The function is initially called with ZFTP_TRANSFER
set
appropriately and ZFTP_COUNT
set to zero. After the transfer is
finished, the function will be called one more time with
ZFTP_TRANSFER
set to GF
or PF
, in case it wishes to tidy
up. It is otherwise never called twice with the same value of
ZFTP_COUNT
.
Sometimes the progress meter may cause disruption. It is up to the
user to decide whether the function should be defined and to use
unfunction
when necessary.
A connection may not be opened in the left hand side of a pipe as this
occurs in a subshell and the file information is not updated in the main
shell. In the case of type or mode changes or closing the connection in a
subshell, the information is returned but variables are not updated until
the next call to zftp
. Other status changes in subshells will not be
reflected by changes to the variables (but should be otherwise harmless).
Deleting sessions while a zftp
command is active in the background can
have unexpected effects, even if it does not use the session being deleted.
This is because all shell subprocesses share information on the state of
all connections, and deleting a session changes the ordering of that
information.
On some operating systems, the control connection is not valid after a fork(), so that operations in subshells, on the left hand side of a pipeline, or in the background are not possible, as they should be. This is presumably a bug in the operating system.
The zsh/zleparameter
module defines two special parameters that can be
used to access internal information of the Zsh Line Editor (see
Zsh Line Editor).
keymaps
¶This array contains the names of the keymaps currently defined.
widgets
¶This associative array contains one entry per widget. The name
of the widget is the key and the value gives information about the
widget. It is either
the string ‘builtin
’ for builtin widgets,
a string of the form ‘user:
name’ for user-defined widgets,
where name is the name of the shell function implementing the widget,
a string of the form ‘completion:
type:
name’
for completion widgets,
or a null value if the widget is not yet fully defined.
In the penultimate case, type is the name of the builtin widget the
completion widget imitates in its behavior and name is the name
of the shell function implementing the completion widget.
When loaded, the zsh/zprof
causes shell functions to be profiled.
The profiling results can be obtained with the zprof
builtin command made available by this module. There is no way to turn
profiling off other than unloading the module.
zprof
[ -c
] ¶Without the -c
option, zprof
lists profiling results to
standard output. The format is comparable to that of commands like
gprof
.
At the top there is a summary listing all functions that were called
at least once. This summary is sorted in decreasing order of the
amount of time spent in each. The lines contain
the number of the function in order, which is used in
other parts of the list in suffixes of the form
‘[
num]
’, then the number of calls made to the function.
The next three columns list the time in
milliseconds spent in the function and its descendants, the average
time in milliseconds spent in the function and its descendants per
call and the percentage of time spent in all shell functions used in
this function and its descendants. The following three columns give
the same information, but counting only the time spent in the function
itself. The final column shows the name of the function.
After the summary, detailed information about every function that was invoked is listed, sorted in decreasing order of the amount of time spent in each function and its descendants. Each of these entries consists of descriptions for the functions that called the function described, the function itself, and the functions that were called from it. The description for the function itself has the same format as in the summary (and shows the same information). The other lines don’t show the number of the function at the beginning and have their function named indented to make it easier to distinguish the line showing the function described in the section from the surrounding lines.
The information shown in this case is almost the same as in the summary, but only refers to the call hierarchy being displayed. For example, for a calling function the column showing the total running time lists the time spent in the described function and its descendants only for the times when it was called from that particular calling function. Likewise, for a called function, this columns lists the total time spent in the called function and its descendants only for the times when it was called from the function described.
Also in this case, the column showing the number of calls to a function also shows a slash and then the total number of invocations made to the called function.
As long as the zsh/zprof
module is loaded, profiling will be done and
multiple invocations of the zprof
builtin command will show the
times and numbers of calls since the module was loaded. With the
-c
option, the zprof
builtin command will reset its internal
counters and will not show the listing.
The zsh/zpty
module offers one builtin:
zpty
[ -e
] [ -b
] name [ arg ... ] ¶The arguments following name are concatenated with spaces between,
then executed as a command, as if passed to the eval
builtin. The
command runs under a newly assigned pseudo-terminal; this is useful for
running commands non-interactively which expect an interactive
environment. The name is not part of the command, but is used to
refer to this command in later calls to zpty
.
With the -e
option, the pseudo-terminal is set up so that input
characters are echoed.
With the -b
option, input to and output from the pseudo-terminal are
made non-blocking.
The shell parameter REPLY
is set to the file descriptor assigned to
the master side of the pseudo-terminal. This allows the terminal to be
monitored with ZLE descriptor handlers (see Zle Builtins) or manipulated with sysread
and
syswrite
(see The zsh/system Module). Warning: Use of sysread
and syswrite
is not recommended; use zpty -r
and zpty -w
unless you know exactly what you are doing.
zpty
-d
[ name ... ]The second form, with the -d
option, is used to delete commands
previously started, by supplying a list of their names. If no
name is given, all commands are deleted. Deleting a command causes
the HUP signal to be sent to the corresponding process.
zpty
-w
[ -n
] name [ string ... ]The -w
option can be used to send the to command name the given
strings as input (separated by spaces). If the -n
option is
not given, a newline is added at the end.
If no string is provided, the standard input is copied to the
pseudo-terminal; this may stop before copying the full input if the
pseudo-terminal is non-blocking. The exact input is always copied:
the -n
option is not applied.
Note that the command under the pseudo-terminal sees this input as if it were typed, so beware when sending special tty driver characters such as word-erase, line-kill, and end-of-file.
zpty
-r
[ -mt
] name [ param [ pattern ] ]The -r
option can be used to read the output of the command name.
With only a name argument, the output read is copied to the standard
output. Unless the pseudo-terminal is non-blocking, copying continues
until the command under the pseudo-terminal exits; when non-blocking, only
as much output as is immediately available is copied. The return status is
zero if any output is copied.
When also given a param argument, at most one line is read and stored in the parameter named param. Less than a full line may be read if the pseudo-terminal is non-blocking. The return status is zero if at least one character is stored in param.
If a pattern is given as well, output is read until the whole string
read matches the pattern, even in the non-blocking case. The return
status is zero if the string read matches the pattern, or if the command
has exited but at least one character could still be read. If the option
-m
is present, the return status is zero only if the pattern matches.
As of this writing, a maximum of one megabyte of output can be consumed
this way; if a full megabyte is read without matching the pattern, the
return status is non-zero.
In all cases, the return status is non-zero if nothing could be read, and
is 2
if this is because the command has finished.
If the -r
option is combined with the -t
option, zpty
tests
whether output is available before trying to read. If no output is
available, zpty
immediately returns the status 1
. When used
with a pattern, the behaviour on a failed poll is similar to
when the command has exited: the return value is zero if at least
one character could still be read even if the pattern failed to match.
zpty
-t
nameThe -t
option without the -r
option can be used to test
whether the command name is still running. It returns a zero
status if the command is running and a non-zero value otherwise.
zpty
[ -L
]The last form, without any arguments, is used to list the commands
currently defined. If the -L
option is given, this is done in the
form of calls to the zpty
builtin.
The zsh/zselect
module makes available one builtin command:
zselect
[ -rwe
] [ -t
timeout ] [ -a
array ] [ -A
assoc ] [ fd ... ] ¶The zselect
builtin is a front-end to the ‘select’ system call, which
blocks until a file descriptor is ready for reading or writing, or has an
error condition, with an optional timeout. If this is not available on
your system, the command prints an error message and returns status 2
(normal errors return status 1). For more information, see your system’s
documentation for select(3). Note there is no connection with the
shell builtin of the same name.
Arguments and options may be intermingled in any order. Non-option
arguments are file descriptors, which must be decimal integers. By
default, file descriptors are to be tested for reading, i.e. zselect
will return when data is available to be read from the file descriptor, or
more precisely, when a read operation from the file descriptor will not
block. After a -r
, -w
and -e
, the given file descriptors are
to be tested for reading, writing, or error conditions. These options and
an arbitrary list of file descriptors may be given in any order.
(The presence of an ‘error condition’ is not well defined in the
documentation for many implementations of the select system call.
According to recent versions of the POSIX specification, it is really an
exception condition, of which the only standard example is out-of-band
data received on a socket. So zsh users are unlikely to find the -e
option useful.)
The option ‘-t
timeout’ specifies a timeout in hundredths of a
second. This may be zero, in which case the file descriptors will simply
be polled and zselect
will return immediately. It is possible to call
zselect with no file descriptors and a non-zero timeout for use as a
finer-grained replacement for ‘sleep’; note, however, the return status is
always 1 for a timeout.
The option ‘-a
array’ indicates that array should be set to
indicate the file descriptor(s) which are ready. If the option
is not
given, the array reply
will be used for this purpose. The array will
contain a string similar to the arguments for zselect
. For example,
zselect -t 0 -r 0 -w 1
might return immediately with status 0 and $reply
containing ‘-r 0 -w
1
’ to show that both file descriptors are ready for the requested
operations.
The option ‘-A
assoc’ indicates that the associative array
assoc should be set to indicate the file descriptor(s)
which are ready. This option overrides the option -a
, nor will
reply
be modified. The keys of assoc
are the file descriptors, and
the corresponding values are any of the characters ‘rwe
’ to indicate
the condition.
The command returns status 0 if some file descriptors are ready for reading. If the operation timed out, or a timeout of 0 was given and no file descriptors were ready, or there was an error, it returns status 1 and the array will not be set (nor modified in any way). If there was an error in the select operation the appropriate error message is printed.
The zsh/zutil
module only adds some builtins:
zstyle
[ -L
[ metapattern [ style ] ] ] ¶zstyle
[ -e
| -
| -
-
] pattern style string ...zstyle -d
[ pattern [ style ... ] ]zstyle -g
name [ pattern [ style ] ]zstyle -
{a
|b
|s
} context style name [ sep ]zstyle -
{T
|t
} context style [ string ... ]zstyle -m
context style patternThis builtin command is used to define and lookup styles. Styles are pairs of names and values, where the values consist of any number of strings. They are stored together with patterns and lookup is done by giving a string, called the ‘context’, which is matched against the patterns. The definition stored for the most specific pattern that matches will be returned.
A pattern is considered to be more specific
than another if it contains more components (substrings separated by
colons) or if the patterns for the components are more specific, where
simple strings are considered to be more specific than patterns and
complex patterns are considered to be more specific than the pattern
‘*
’. A ‘*
’ in the pattern will match zero or more characters
in the context; colons are not treated specially in this regard.
If two patterns are equally specific, the tie is broken in favour of
the pattern that was defined first.
For example, a fictional ‘weather
’ plugin might state in its documentation
that it looks up the preferred-precipitation
style under the
‘:weather:
continent:
day-of-the-week:
phase-of-the-moon’ context.
According to this, you might set the following in your zshrc
:
zstyle ':weather:europe:*' preferred-precipitation rain zstyle ':weather:*:Sunday:*' preferred-precipitation snow
Then the plugin would run under the hood a command such as
zstyle -s ":weather:${continent}:${day_of_week}:${moon_phase}" preferred-precipitation REPLY
in order to retrieve your preference into the scalar variable $REPLY
.
On Sundays $REPLY
would be set to ‘snow
’; in Europe it would be set
to ‘rain
’; and on Sundays in Europe it would be set to ‘snow
’ again,
because the patterns ‘:weather:europe:*
’ and ‘:weather:*:Sunday:*
’ both
match the context argument to zstyle -s
, are equally specific, and the
latter is more specific (because it has more colon-separated components).
Usage
The forms that operate on patterns are the following.
zstyle
[ -L
[ metapattern [ style ] ] ]Without arguments, lists style definitions. Styles
are shown in alphabetic order and patterns are shown in the order
zstyle
will test them.
If the -L
option is given, listing is done in the form of calls to
zstyle
. The optional first argument, metapattern, is a pattern which
will be matched against the string supplied as pattern when the style was
defined. Note:
this means, for example, ‘zstyle -L ":completion:*"
’ will
match any supplied pattern beginning ‘:completion:
’, not
just ":completion:*"
: use ':completion:\*'
to match that.
The optional second argument limits the output to a specific style (not a
pattern). -L
is not compatible with any other options.
zstyle
[ -
| -
-
| -e
] pattern style string ... ¶Defines the given style for the pattern with the strings as
the value. If the -e
option is given, the strings will be
concatenated (separated by spaces) and the resulting string will be
evaluated (in the same way as it is done by the eval
builtin
command) when the style is looked up. In this case the parameter
‘reply
’ must be assigned to set the strings returned after the
evaluation. Before evaluating the value, reply
is unset, and
if it is still unset after the evaluation, the style is treated as if
it were not set.
zstyle -d
[ pattern [ style ... ] ]Delete style definitions. Without arguments all definitions are deleted, with a pattern all definitions for that pattern are deleted and if any styles are given, then only those styles are deleted for the pattern.
zstyle -g
name [ pattern [ style ] ]Retrieve a style definition. The name is used as the name of an array in which the results are stored. Without any further arguments, all patterns defined are returned. With a pattern the styles defined for that pattern are returned and with both a pattern and a style, the value strings of that combination is returned.
The other forms can be used to look up or test styles for a given context.
zstyle -s
context style name [ sep ]The parameter name is set to the value of the style interpreted as a string. If the value contains several strings they are concatenated with spaces (or with the sep string if that is given) between them.
Return 0
if the style is set, 1
otherwise.
zstyle -b
context style nameThe value is stored in name as a boolean, i.e. as the string
‘yes
’ if the value has only one string and that string is equal to one
of ‘yes
’, ‘true
’, ‘on
’, or ‘1
’. If the value is any other
string or has more than one string, the parameter is set to ‘no
’.
Return 0
if name is set to ‘yes
’, 1
otherwise.
zstyle -a
context style nameThe value is stored in name as an array. If name is declared as an associative array, the first, third, etc. strings are used as the keys and the other strings are used as the values.
Return 0
if the style is set, 1
otherwise.
zstyle -t
context style [ string ... ]zstyle -T
context style [ string ... ]Test the value of a style, i.e. the -t
option only returns a status
(sets $?
). Without any string the return status is zero if the
style is defined for at least one matching pattern, has only one string in
its value, and that is equal to one of ‘true
’, ‘yes
’, ‘on
’ or
‘1
’. If any strings are given the status is zero if and only if
at least one of the strings is equal to at least one of the strings
in the value. If the style is defined but doesn’t match, the return status
is 1
. If the style is not defined, the status is 2
.
The -T
option tests the values of the style like -t
, but it
returns status zero (rather than 2
) if the style is not defined for any
matching pattern.
zstyle -m
context style patternMatch a value. Returns status zero if the pattern matches at least one of the strings in the value.
zformat -f
param format spec ... ¶zformat -F
param format spec ...zformat -a
array sep spec ...This builtin provides different forms of formatting. The first form
is selected with the -f
option. In this case the format
string will be modified by replacing sequences starting with a percent
sign in it with strings from the specs. Each spec should be
of the form ‘char:
string’ which will cause every
appearance of the sequence ‘%
char’ in format to be replaced
by the string. The ‘%
’ sequence may also contain optional
minimum and maximum field width specifications between the ‘%
’ and
the ‘char’ in the form ‘%
min.
maxc
’,
i.e. the minimum field width is given first and if the maximum field
width is used, it has to be preceded by a dot. Specifying a minimum field
width makes the result be padded with spaces to the right if the
string is shorter than the requested width. Padding to the left
can be achieved by giving a negative minimum field width. If a maximum
field width is specified, the string will be truncated after that
many characters. After all ‘%
’ sequences for the given specs
have been processed, the resulting string is stored in the parameter
param.
The %
-escapes also understand ternary expressions in the form used by
prompts. The %
is followed by a ‘(
’ and then an ordinary
format specifier character as described above. There may be a set of
digits either before or after the ‘(
’; these specify a test
number, which defaults to zero. Negative numbers are also allowed. An
arbitrary delimiter character follows the format specifier, which is
followed by a piece of ‘true’ text, the delimiter character again, a piece
of ‘false’ text, and a closing parenthesis. The complete expression
(without the digits) thus looks like
‘%(
X.
text1.
text2)
’, except that
the ‘.
’ character is arbitrary. The value given for the format
specifier in the char:
string expressions is evaluated as a
mathematical expression, and compared with the test number. If they are
the same, text1 is output, else text2 is output. A parenthesis
may be escaped in text2 as %)
. Either of text1 or
text2 may contain nested %
-escapes.
For example:
zformat -f REPLY "The answer is '%3(c.yes.no)'." c:3
outputs "The answer is ’yes’." to REPLY
since the value for the format
specifier c
is 3, agreeing with the digit argument to the ternary
expression.
With -F
instead of -f
, ternary expressions choose between the
‘true’ or ‘false’ text on the basis of whether the format specifier is
present and non-empty. A test number indicates a minimum width for the
value given in the format specifier. Negative numbers reverse this,
so the test is for whether the value exceeds a maximum width.
The form, using the -a
option, can be used for aligning
strings. Here, the specs are of the form
‘left:
right’ where ‘left’ and ‘right’ are
arbitrary strings. These strings are modified by replacing the colons
by the sep string and padding the left strings with spaces
to the right so that the sep strings in the result (and hence the
right strings after them) are all aligned if the strings are
printed below each other. All strings without a colon are left
unchanged and all strings with an empty right string have the
trailing colon removed. In both cases the lengths of the strings
are not used to determine how the other strings are to be aligned.
A colon in the left string can be escaped with a backslash.
The resulting strings are stored in the array.
zregexparse
¶This implements some internals of the _regex_arguments
function.
zparseopts
[ -D
-E
-F
-K
-M
] [ -a
array ] [ -A
assoc ] [ -
] spec ... ¶This builtin simplifies the parsing of options in positional parameters,
i.e. the set of arguments given by $*
. Each spec describes one
option and must be of the form ‘opt[=
array]’. If an option
described by opt is found in the positional parameters it is copied
into the array specified with the -a
option; if the optional
‘=
array’ is given, it is instead copied into that array, which
should be declared as a normal array and never as an associative array.
Note that it is an error to give any spec without an
‘=
array’ unless one of the -a
or -A
options is used.
Unless the -E
option is given, parsing stops at the first string
that isn’t described by one of the specs. Even with -E
,
parsing always stops at a positional parameter equal to ‘-
’ or
‘-
-
’. See also -F
.
The opt description must be one of the following. Any of the special characters can appear in the option name provided it is preceded by a backslash.
+
The name is the name of the option without the leading ‘-
’. To
specify a GNU-style long option, one of the usual two leading ‘-
’ must
be included in name; for example, a ‘-
-file
’ option is
represented by a name of ‘-file
’.
If a ‘+
’ appears after name, the option is appended to array
each time it is found in the positional parameters; without the ‘+
’
only the last occurrence of the option is preserved.
If one of these forms is used, the option takes no argument, so parsing
stops if the next positional parameter does not also begin with ‘-
’
(unless the -E
option is used).
:
:-
::
If one or two colons are given, the option takes an argument; with one colon, the argument is mandatory and with two colons it is optional. The argument is appended to the array after the option itself.
An optional argument is put into the same array element as the option name
(note that this makes empty strings as arguments indistinguishable). A
mandatory argument is added as a separate element unless the ‘:-
’ form
is used, in which case the argument is put into the same element.
A ‘+
’ as described above may appear between the name and the
first colon.
In all cases, option-arguments must appear either immediately following the
option in the same positional parameter or in the next one. Even an optional
argument may appear in the next parameter, unless it begins with a ‘-
’.
There is no special handling of ‘=
’ as with GNU-style argument parsers;
given the spec ‘-foo:
’, the positional parameter ‘-
-foo=bar
’
is parsed as ‘-
-foo
’ with an argument of ‘=bar
’.
When the names of two options that take no arguments overlap, the longest one
wins, so that parsing for the specs ‘-foo -foobar
’ (for example) is
unambiguous. However, due to the aforementioned handling of option-arguments,
ambiguities may arise when at least one overlapping spec takes an
argument, as in ‘-foo: -foobar
’. In that case, the last matching
spec wins.
The options of zparseopts
itself cannot be stacked because, for
example, the stack ‘-DEK
’ is indistinguishable from a spec for
the GNU-style long option ‘-
-DEK
’. The options of zparseopts
itself are:
-a
arrayAs described above, this names the default array in which to store the recognised options.
-A
assocIf this is given, the options and their values are also put into an associative array with the option names as keys and the arguments (if any) as the values.
-D
If this option is given, all options found are removed from the positional
parameters of the calling shell or shell function, up to but not including
any not described by the specs. If the first such parameter is ‘-
’
or ‘-
-
’, it is removed as well. This is similar to using the
shift
builtin.
-E
This changes the parsing rules to not stop at the first string
that isn’t described by one of the specs. It can be used to test
for or (if used together with -D
) extract options and their
arguments, ignoring all other options and arguments that may be in the
positional parameters. As indicated above, parsing still stops at the
first ‘-
’ or ‘-
-
’ not described by a spec, but it is not
removed when used with -D
.
-F
If this option is given, zparseopts
immediately stops at the first
option-like parameter not described by one of the specs, prints an
error message, and returns status 1. Removal (-D
) and extraction
(-E
) are not performed, and option arrays are not updated. This
provides basic validation for the given options.
Note that the appearance in the positional parameters of an option without its required argument always aborts parsing and returns an error as described above regardless of whether this option is used.
-K
With this option, the arrays specified with the -a
option and with the
‘=
array’ forms are kept unchanged when none of the specs for
them is used. Otherwise the entire array is replaced when any of the
specs is used. Individual elements of associative arrays specified
with the -A
option are preserved by -K
. This allows assignment of
default values to arrays before calling zparseopts
.
-M
This changes the assignment rules to implement a map among equivalent
option names. If any spec uses the ‘=
array’ form, the
string array is interpreted as the name of another spec,
which is used to choose where to store the values. If no other spec
is found, the values are stored as usual. This changes only the way the
values are stored, not the way $*
is parsed, so results may be
unpredictable if the ‘name+
’ specifier is used inconsistently.
For example,
set -- -a -bx -c y -cz baz -cend zparseopts a=foo b:=bar c+:=bar
will have the effect of
foo=(-a) bar=(-b x -c y -c z)
The arguments from ‘baz
’ on will not be used.
As an example for the -E
option, consider:
set -- -a x -b y -c z arg1 arg2 zparseopts -E -D b:=bar
will have the effect of
bar=(-b y) set -- -a x -c z arg1 arg2
I.e., the option -b
and its arguments are taken from the
positional parameters and put into the array bar
.
The -M
option can be used like this:
set -- -a -bx -c y -cz baz -cend zparseopts -A bar -M a=foo b+: c:=b
to have the effect of
foo=(-a) bar=(-a {No value for `dsq'} -b xyz)
The shell is supplied with a series of functions to replace and enhance the
traditional Unix calendar
programme, which warns the user of imminent
or future events, details of which are stored in a text file (typically
calendar
in the user’s home directory). The version provided here
includes a mechanism for alerting the user when an event is due.
In addition functions age
, before
and after
are provided
that can be used in a glob qualifier; they allow files to be selected
based on their modification times.
The format of the calendar
file and the dates used there in and in
the age
function are described first, then the functions that can
be called to examine and modify the calendar
file.
The functions here depend on the availability of the zsh/datetime
module which is usually installed with the shell. The library function
strptime()
must be available; it is present on most recent
operating systems.
The calendar file is by default ~/calendar
. This can be configured
by the calendar-file
style, see
Styles. The basic format consists
of a series of separate lines, with no indentation, each including
a date and time specification followed by a description of the event.
Various enhancements to this format are supported, based on the syntax
of Emacs calendar mode. An indented line indicates a continuation line
that continues the description of the event from the preceding line
(note the date may not be continued in this way). An initial ampersand
(&
) is ignored for compatibility.
An indented line on which the first non-whitespace character is #
is not displayed with the calendar entry, but is still scanned for
information. This can be used to hide information useful to the
calendar system but not to the user, such as the unique identifier
used by calendar_add
.
The Emacs extension that a date with no description may refer to a number of succeeding events at different times is not supported.
Unless the done-file
style has been altered, any events which
have been processed are appended to the file with the same name as the
calendar file with the suffix .done
, hence ~/calendar.done
by
default.
An example is shown below.
The format of the date and time is designed to allow flexibility without admitting ambiguity. (The words ‘date’ and ‘time’ are both used in the documentation below; except where specifically noted this implies a string that may include both a date and a time specification.) Note that there is no localization support; month and day names must be in English and separator characters are fixed. Matching is case insensitive, and only the first three letters of the names are significant, although as a special case a form beginning "month" does not match "Monday". Furthermore, time zones are not handled; all times are assumed to be local.
It is recommended that, rather than exploring the intricacies of the system, users find a date format that is natural to them and stick to it. This will avoid unexpected effects. Various key facts should be noted.
/
day/
year and
day/
month/
year when the month is numeric; these
formats should be avoided if at all possible. Many alternatives are
available.
The following give some obvious examples; users finding here a format they like and not subject to vagaries of style may skip the full description. As dates and times are matched separately (even though the time may be embedded in the date), any date format may be mixed with any format for the time of day provide the separators are clear (whitespace, colons, commas).
2007/04/03 13:13 2007/04/03:13:13 2007/04/03 1:13 pm 3rd April 2007, 13:13 April 3rd 2007 1:13 p.m. Apr 3, 2007 13:13 Tue Apr 03 13:13:00 2007 13:13 2007/apr/3
More detailed rules follow.
Times are parsed and extracted before dates. They must use colons to separate hours and minutes, though a dot is allowed before seconds if they are present. This limits time formats to the following:
:
MM[:
SS[.
FFFFF]] [am
|pm
|a.m.
|p.m.
]
:
MM.
SS[.
FFFFF] [am
|pm
|a.m.
|p.m.
]
Here, square brackets indicate optional elements, possibly with
alternatives. Fractions of a second are recognised but ignored. For
absolute times (the normal format require by the calendar
file and the
age
, before
and after
functions) a date is mandatory but a
time of day is not; the time returned is at the start of the date. One
variation is allowed: if a.m.
or p.m.
or one of their variants
is present, an hour without a minute is allowed, e.g. 3 p.m.
.
Time zones are not handled, though if one is matched following a time specification it will be removed to allow a surrounding date to be parsed. This only happens if the format of the timezone is not too unusual. The following are examples of forms that are understood:
+0100 GMT GMT-7 CET+1CDT
Any part of the timezone that is not numeric must have exactly three capital letters in the name.
Dates suffer from the ambiguity between DD/
MM/
YYYY
and MM/
DD/
YYYY. It is recommended this form is
avoided with purely numeric dates, but use of ordinals,
eg. 3rd/04/2007
, will resolve the ambiguity as the ordinal is always
parsed as the day of the month. Years must be four digits (and the first
two must be 19
or 20
); 03/04/08
is not recognised. Other
numbers may have leading zeroes, but they are not required. The following
are handled:
/
MM/
DD
-
MM-
DD
/
MNM/
DD
-
MNM-
DD
th
|st
|rd
] MNM[,
] [ YYYY ]
th
|st
|rd
][,
] [ YYYY ]
th
|st
|rd
]/
MM[,
] YYYY
th
|st
|rd
]/
MM/
YYYY
/
DD[th
|st
|rd
][,
] YYYY
/
DD[th
|st
|rd
]/
YYYY
Here, MNM is at least the first three letters of a month name, matched case-insensitively. The remainder of the month name may appear but its contents are irrelevant, so janissary, febrile, martial, apricot, maybe, junta, etc. are happily handled.
Where the year is shown as optional, the current year is assumed. There
are only two such cases, the form Jun 20
or 14 September
(the only
two commonly occurring forms, apart from a "the" in some forms of English,
which isn’t currently supported). Such dates will of course become
ambiguous in the future, so should ideally be avoided.
Times may follow dates with a colon, e.g. 1965/07/12:09:45
; this is in
order to provide a format with no whitespace. A comma and whitespace are
allowed, e.g. 1965/07/12, 09:45
. Currently the order of these
separators is not checked, so illogical formats such as 1965/07/12, :
,09:45
will also be matched. For simplicity such variations are not shown
in the list above. Otherwise, a time is only recognised as being
associated with a date if there is only whitespace in between, or if the
time was embedded in the date.
Days of the week are not normally scanned, but will be ignored if they
occur at the start of the date pattern only. However, in contexts where it
is useful to specify dates relative to today, days of the week with no
other date specification may be given. The day is assumed to be either
today or within the past week. Likewise, the words yesterday
,
today
and tomorrow
are handled. All matches are case-insensitive.
Hence if today is Monday, then Sunday
is equivalent to yesterday
,
Monday
is equivalent to today
, but Tuesday
gives a date six
days ago. This is not generally useful within the calendar file.
Dates in this format may be combined with a time specification; for
example Tomorrow, 8 p.m.
.
For example, the standard date format:
Fri Aug 18 17:00:48 BST 2006
is handled by matching HH:
MM:
SS and removing it
together with the matched (but unused) time zone. This leaves the following:
Fri Aug 18 2006
Fri
is ignored and the rest is matched according to the standard rules.
In certain places relative times are handled. Here, a date is not allowed; instead a combination of various supported periods are allowed, together with an optional time. The periods must be in order from most to least significant.
In some cases, a more accurate calculation is possible when there is an anchor date: offsets of months or years pick the correct day, rather than being rounded, and it is possible to pick a particular day in a month as ‘(1st Friday)’, etc., as described in more detail below.
Anchors are available in the following cases. If one or two times are
passed to the function calendar
, the start time acts an anchor for the
end time when the end time is relative (even if the start time is
implicit). When examining calendar files, the scheduled event being
examined anchors the warning time when it is given explicitly by means of
the WARN
keyword; likewise, the scheduled event anchors a repetition
period when given by the RPT
keyword, so that specifications such as
RPT 2 months, 3rd Thursday
are handled properly. Finally, the -R
argument to calendar_scandate
directly provides an anchor for relative
calculations.
The periods handled, with possible abbreviations are:
years
, yrs
, ys
, year
, yr
, y
, yearly
.
A year is 365.25 days unless there is an anchor.
months
, mons
, mnths
, mths
, month
, mon
,
mnth
, mth
, monthly
. Note that m
, ms
, mn
, mns
are ambiguous and are not handled. A month is a period
of 30 days rather than a calendar month unless there is an anchor.
weeks
, wks
, ws
, week
, wk
, w
, weekly
days
, dys
, ds
, day
, dy
, d
, daily
hours
, hrs
, hs
, hour
, hr
, h
, hourly
minutes
, mins
, minute
, min
, but not m
,
ms
, mn
or mns
seconds
, secs
, ss
, second
, sec
, s
Spaces between the numbers are optional, but are required between items, although a comma may be used (with or without spaces).
The forms yearly
to hourly
allow the number to be omitted; it is
assumed to be 1. For example, 1 d
and daily
are equivalent. Note
that using those forms with plurals is confusing; 2 yearly
is the same
as 2 years
, not twice yearly, so it is recommended they only
be used without numbers.
When an anchor time is present, there is an extension to handle regular
events in the form of the nth someday of the month. Such a
specification must occur immediately after any year and month
specification, but before any time of day, and must be in the form
n(th
|st
|rd
) day, for example 1st Tuesday
or
3rd Monday
. As in other places, days are matched case insensitively,
must be in English, and only the first three letters are significant except
that a form beginning ‘month’ does not match ‘Monday’. No attempt is made
to sanitize the resulting date; attempts to squeeze too many occurrences
into a month will push the day into the next month (but in the obvious
fashion, retaining the correct day of the week).
Here are some examples:
30 years 3 months 4 days 3:42:41 14 days 5 hours Monthly, 3rd Thursday 4d,10hr
Here is an example calendar file. It uses a consistent date format, as recommended above.
Feb 1, 2006 14:30 Pointless bureaucratic meeting Mar 27, 2006 11:00 Mutual recrimination and finger pointing Bring water pistol and waterproofs Mar 31, 2006 14:00 Very serious managerial pontification # UID 12C7878A9A50 Apr 10, 2006 13:30 Even more pointless blame assignment exercise WARN 30 mins May 18, 2006 16:00 Regular moaning session RPT monthly, 3rd Thursday
The second entry has a continuation line. The third entry has a
continuation line that will not be shown when the entry is displayed, but
the unique identifier will be used by the calendar_add
function when
updating the event. The fourth entry will produce a warning 30 minutes
before the event (to allow you to equip yourself appropriately). The fifth
entry repeats after a month on the 3rd Thursday, i.e. June 15, 2006, at the
same time.
This section describes functions that are designed to be called directly by the user. The first part describes those functions associated with the user’s calendar; the second part describes the use in glob qualifiers.
calendar
[ -abdDsv
] [ -C
calfile ] [ -n
num ] [ -S
showprog ]
[ [ start ] end ]calendar -r
[ -abdDrsv
] [ -C
calfile ] [ -n
num ] [ -S
showprog ]
[ start ]Show events in the calendar.
With no arguments, show events from the start of today until the end of the next working day after today. In other words, if today is Friday, Saturday, or Sunday, show up to the end of the following Monday, otherwise show today and tomorrow.
If end is given, show events from the start of today up to the time and date given, which is in the format described in the previous section. Note that if this is a date the time is assumed to be midnight at the start of the date, so that effectively this shows all events before the given date.
end may start with a +
, in which case the remainder of the
specification is a relative time format as described in the previous
section indicating the range of time from the start time that is to
be included.
If start is also given, show events starting from that time and date.
The word now
can be used to indicate the current time.
To implement an alert when events are due, include calendar -s
in your
~/.zshrc
file.
Options:
-a
Show all items in the calendar, regardless of the start
and
end
.
-b
Brief: don’t display continuation lines (i.e. indented lines following the line with the date/time), just the first line.
-B
linesBrief: display at most the first lines lines of the calendar
entry. ‘-B 1
’ is equivalent to ‘-b
’.
-C
calfileExplicitly specify a calendar file instead of the value of
the calendar-file
style or the default ~/calendar
.
-d
Move any events that have passed from the calendar file to the
"done" file, as given by the done-file
style or the default
which is the calendar file with .done
appended. This option
is implied by the -s
option.
-D
Turns off the option -d
, even if the -s
option is also present.
-n
num, -
numShow at least num events, if present in the calendar file, regardless
of the start
and end
.
-r
Show all the remaining options in the calendar, ignoring the given end time. The start time is respected; any argument given is treated as a start time.
-s
Use the shell’s sched
command to schedule a timed event that
will warn the user when an event is due. Note that the sched
command
only runs if the shell is at an interactive prompt; a foreground task
blocks the scheduled task from running until it is finished.
The timed event usually runs the programme calendar_show
to show
the event, as described in
Utility functions.
By default, a warning of the event is shown five minutes before it is due.
The warning period can be configured by the style warn-time
or
for a single calendar entry by including WARN
reltime in the first
line of the entry, where reltime is one of the usual relative time
formats.
A repeated event may be indicated by including RPT
reldate in the
first line of the entry. After the scheduled event has been displayed
it will be re-entered into the calendar file at a time reldate
after the existing event. Note that this is currently the only use
made of the repeat count, so that it is not possible to query the schedule
for a recurrence of an event in the calendar until the previous event
has passed.
If RPT
is used, it is also possible to specify that certain
recurrences of an event are rescheduled or cancelled. This is
done with the OCCURRENCE
keyword, followed by whitespace and the
date and time of the occurrence in the regular sequence, followed by
whitespace and either the date and time of the rescheduled event or
the exact string CANCELLED
. In this case the date and time must
be in exactly the "date with local time" format used by the
text/calendar
MIME type (RFC 2445),
<YYYY><MM><DD>T
<hh><mm><ss> (note the presence of the literal
character T
). The first word (the regular recurrence) may be
something other than a proper date/time to indicate that the event
is additional to the normal sequence; a convention that retains
the formatting appearance is XXXXXXXXTXXXXXX
.
Furthermore, it is useful to record the next regular recurrence
(as then the displayed date may be for a rescheduled event so cannot
be used for calculating the regular sequence). This is specified by
RECURRENCE
and a time or date in the same format. calendar_add
adds such an indication when it encounters a recurring event that does not
include one, based on the headline date/time.
If calendar_add
is used to update occurrences the UID
keyword
described there should be present in both the existing entry and the added
occurrence in order to identify recurring event sequences.
For example,
Thu May 6, 2010 11:00 Informal chat RPT 1 week # RECURRENCE 20100506T110000 # OCCURRENCE 20100513T110000 20100513T120000 # OCCURRENCE 20100520T110000 CANCELLED
The event that occurs at 11:00 on 13th May 2010 is rescheduled an hour
later. The event that occurs a week later is cancelled. The occurrences
are given on a continuation line starting with a #
character so will
not usually be displayed as part of the event. As elsewhere, no account of
time zones is taken with the times. After the next event occurs the headline
date/time will be ‘Thu May 13, 2010 12:00
’ while the RECURRENCE
date/time will be ‘20100513T110000
’ (note that cancelled and
moved events are not taken account of in the RECURRENCE
, which
records what the next regular recurrence is, but they are accounted for in
the headline date/time).
It is safe to run calendar -s
to reschedule an existing event
(if the calendar file has changed, for example), and also to have it
running in multiples instances of the shell since the calendar file
is locked when in use.
By default, expired events are moved to the "done" file; see the -d
option. Use -D
to prevent this.
-S
showprogExplicitly specify a programme to be used for showing events instead
of the value of the show-prog
style or the default calendar_show
.
-v
Verbose: show more information about stages of processing. This is useful for confirming that the function has successfully parsed the dates in the calendar file.
calendar_add
[ -BL
] event ... ¶Adds a single event to the calendar in the appropriate location.
The event can contain multiple lines, as described in
File and Date Formats.
Using this function ensures that the calendar file is sorted in date
and time order. It also makes special arrangements for locking
the file while it is altered. The old calendar is left in a file
with the suffix .old
.
The option -B
indicates that backing up the calendar file will be
handled by the caller and should not be performed by calendar_add
. The
option -L
indicates that calendar_add
does not need to lock the
calendar file as it is already locked. These options will not usually be
needed by users.
If the style reformat-date
is true, the date and time of the
new entry will be rewritten into the standard date format: see
the descriptions of this style and the style date-format
.
The function can use a unique identifier stored with each event to ensure
that updates to existing events are treated correctly. The entry
should contain the word UID
, followed by whitespace, followed by
a word consisting entirely of hexadecimal digits of arbitrary length
(all digits are significant, including leading zeroes). As the UID
is not directly useful to the user, it is convenient to hide it on
an indented continuation line starting with a #
, for example:
Aug 31, 2007 09:30 Celebrate the end of the holidays # UID 045B78A0
The second line will not be shown by the calendar
function.
It is possible to specify the RPT
keyword followed by CANCELLED
instead of a relative time. This causes any matched event or series
of events to be cancelled (the original event does not have to be marked
as recurring in order to be cancelled by this method). A UID
is
required in order to match an existing event in the calendar.
calendar_add
will attempt to manage recurrences and occurrences of
repeating events as described for event scheduling by calendar -s
above. To reschedule or cancel a single event calendar_add
should be
called with an entry that includes the correct UID
but does not
include the RPT
keyword as this is taken to mean the entry applies to a
series of repeating events and hence replaces all existing information.
Each rescheduled or cancelled occurrence must have an OCCURRENCE
keyword in the entry passed to calendar_add
which will be merged into
the calendar file. Any existing reference to the occurrence is replaced.
An occurrence that does not refer to a valid existing event is added as a
one-off occurrence to the same calendar entry.
calendar_edit
¶This calls the user’s editor to edit the calendar file. If
there are arguments, they are taken as the editor to use (the file name
is appended to the commands); otherwise, the editor is given by the
variable VISUAL
, if set, else the variable EDITOR
.
If the calendar scheduler was running, then after editing the file
calendar -s
is called to update it.
This function locks out the calendar system during the edit. Hence it should be used to edit the calendar file if there is any possibility of a calendar event occurring meanwhile. Note this can lead to another shell with calendar functions enabled hanging waiting for a lock, so it is necessary to quit the editor as soon as possible.
calendar_parse
calendar-entry ¶This is the internal function that analyses the parts of a calendar
entry, which is passed as the only argument. The function returns
status 1 if the argument could not be parsed as a calendar entry
and status 2 if the wrong number of arguments were passed; it also sets the
parameter reply
to an empty associative array. Otherwise,
it returns status 0 and sets elements of the associative
array reply
as follows:
time
The time as a string of digits in the same units as
$EPOCHSECONDS
schedtime
The regularly scheduled time. This may differ from
the actual event time time
if this is a recurring event and the next
occurrence has been rescheduled. Then time
gives the actual time
and schedtime
the time of the regular recurrence before modification.
text1
The text from the line not including the date and time of the
event, but including any WARN
or RPT
keywords and values.
warntime
Any warning time given by the WARN
keyword as a string
of digits containing the time at which to warn in the same units as
$EPOCHSECONDS
. (Note this is an absolute time, not the relative time
passed down.) Not set no WARN
keyword and value were
matched.
warnstr
The raw string matched after the WARN
keyword, else unset.
rpttime
Any recurrence time given by the RPT
keyword as a string
of digits containing the time of the recurrence in the same units
as $EPOCHSECONDS
. (Note this is an absolute time.) Not set if
no RPT
keyword and value were matched.
schedrpttime
The next regularly scheduled occurrence of a recurring
event before modification. This may differ from rpttime
, which is the
actual time of the event that may have been rescheduled from the regular
time.
rptstr
The raw string matched after the RPT
keyword, else unset.
text2
The text from the line after removal of the date and any keywords and values.
calendar_showdate
[ -r
] [ -f
fmt ] date-spec ... ¶The given date-spec is interpreted and the corresponding date and
time printed. If the initial date-spec begins with a +
or
-
it is treated as relative to the current time; date-specs after
the first are treated as relative to the date calculated so far and
a leading +
is optional in that case. This allows one to
use the system as a date calculator. For example, calendar_showdate '+1
month, 1st Friday'
shows the date of the first Friday of next month.
With the option -r
nothing is printed but the value of the date and
time in seconds since the epoch is stored in the parameter REPLY
.
With the option -f
fmt the given date/time conversion format
is passed to strftime
; see notes on the date-format
style below.
In order to avoid ambiguity with negative relative date specifications,
options must occur in separate words; in other words, -r
and -f
should not be combined in the same word.
calendar_sort
¶Sorts the calendar file into date and time order. The old calendar is
left in a file with the suffix .old
.
age
¶The function age
can be autoloaded and use separately from
the calendar system, although it uses the function calendar_scandate
for date formatting. It requires the zsh/stat
builtin, but uses
only the builtin zstat
.
age
selects files having a given modification time for use
as a glob qualifier. The format of the date is the same as that
understood by the calendar system, described in
File and Date Formats.
The function can take one or two arguments, which can be supplied either directly as command or arguments, or separately as shell parameters.
print *(e:age 2006/10/04 2006/10/09:)
The example above matches all files modified between the start of those
dates. The second argument may alternatively be a relative time
introduced by a +
:
print *(e:age 2006/10/04 +5d:)
The example above is equivalent to the previous example.
In addition to the special use of days of the week, today
and
yesterday
, times with no date may be specified; these apply to today.
Obviously such uses become problematic around midnight.
print *(e-age 12:00 13:30-)
The example above shows files modified between 12:00 and 13:00 today.
print *(e:age 2006/10/04:)
The example above matches all files modified on that date. If the second argument is omitted it is taken to be exactly 24 hours after the first argument (even if the first argument contains a time).
print *(e-age 2006/10/04:10:15 2006/10/04:10:45-)
The example above supplies times. Note that whitespace within the time and
date specification must be quoted to ensure age
receives the correct
arguments, hence the use of the additional colon to separate the date and
time.
AGEREF=2006/10/04:10:15 AGEREF2=2006/10/04:10:45 print *(+age)
This shows the same example before using another form of argument
passing. The dates and times in the parameters AGEREF
and AGEREF2
stay in effect until unset, but will be overridden if any argument is
passed as an explicit argument to age. Any explicit argument
causes both parameters to be ignored.
Instead of an explicit date and time, it’s possible to use the modification time of a file as the date and time for either argument by introducing the file name with a colon:
print *(e-age :file1-)
matches all files created on the same day (24 hours starting from
midnight) as file1
.
print *(e-age :file1 :file2-)
matches all files modified no earlier than file1
and
no later than file2
; precision here is to the nearest second.
after
¶before
The functions after
and before
are simpler versions of age
that take just one argument. The argument is parsed similarly to an
argument of age
; if it is not given the variable AGEREF
is
consulted. As the names of the functions suggest, a file matches if its
modification time is after or before the time and date specified. If
a time only is given the date is today.
The two following examples are therefore equivalent:
print *(e-after 12:00-) print *(e-after today:12:00-)
The zsh style mechanism using the zstyle
command is describe in
The zsh/zutil Module. This is the same mechanism
used in the completion system.
The styles below are all examined in the context
:datetime:
function:
, for example :datetime:calendar:
.
calendar-file
¶The location of the main calendar. The default is ~/calendar
.
date-format
¶A strftime
format string (see strftime(3)) with the zsh
extensions providing various numbers with no leading zero or space
if the number is a single digit as described for the
%D{
string}
prompt format in
Prompt Expansion.
This is used for outputting dates in calendar
, both to support
the -v
option and when adding recurring events back to the calendar
file, and in calendar_showdate
as the final output format.
If the style is not set, the default used is similar the standard system
format as output by the date
command (also known as ‘ctime format’):
‘%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %Z %Y
’.
done-file
¶The location of the file to which events which have passed are appended.
The default is the calendar file location with the suffix .done
.
The style may be set to an empty string in which case a "done" file
will not be maintained.
reformat-date
¶Boolean, used by calendar_add
. If it is true, the date and time
of new entries added to the calendar will be reformatted to the format
given by the style date-format
or its default. Only the date and
time of the event itself is reformatted; any subsidiary dates and times
such as those associated with repeat and warning times are left alone.
show-prog
¶The programme run by calendar
for showing events. It will
be passed the start time and stop time of the events requested in seconds
since the epoch followed by the event text. Note that calendar -s
uses
a start time and stop time equal to one another to indicate alerts
for specific events.
The default is the function calendar_show
.
warn-time
¶The time before an event at which a warning will be displayed, if the
first line of the event does not include the text EVENT
reltime.
The default is 5 minutes.
calendar_lockfiles
¶Attempt to lock the files given in the argument. To prevent
problems with network file locking this is done in an ad hoc fashion
by attempting to create a symbolic link to the file with the name
file.lockfile
. No other system level functions are used
for locking, i.e. the file can be accessed and modified by any
utility that does not use this mechanism. In particular, the user is not
prevented from editing the calendar file at the same time unless
calendar_edit
is used.
Three attempts are made to lock the file before giving up. If the module
zsh/zselect
is available, the times of the attempts are jittered so that
multiple instances of the calling function are unlikely to retry at the
same time.
The files locked are appended to the array lockfiles
, which should
be local to the caller.
If all files were successfully locked, status zero is returned, else status one.
This function may be used as a general file locking function, although this will only work if only this mechanism is used to lock files.
calendar_read
¶This is a backend used by various other functions to parse the
calendar file, which is passed as the only argument. The array
calendar_entries
is set to the list of events in the file; no
pruning is done except that ampersands are removed from the start of
the line. Each entry may contain multiple lines.
calendar_scandate
¶This is a generic function to parse dates and times that may be
used separately from the calendar system. The argument is a date
or time specification as described in
File and Date Formats. The parameter REPLY
is set to the number of seconds since the epoch corresponding to that date
or time. By default, the date and time may occur anywhere within the given
argument.
Returns status zero if the date and time were successfully parsed, else one.
Options:
-a
The date and time are anchored to the start of the argument; they will not be matched if there is preceding text.
-A
The date and time are anchored to both the start and end of the argument; they will not be matched if the is any other text in the argument.
-d
Enable additional debugging output.
-m
Minus. When -R
anchor_time is also given the relative time is
calculated backwards from anchor_time.
-r
The argument passed is to be parsed as a relative time.
-R
anchor_timeThe argument passed is to be parsed as a relative time. The time is relative to anchor_time, a time in seconds since the epoch, and the returned value is the absolute time corresponding to advancing anchor_time by the relative time given. This allows lengths of months to be correctly taken into account. If the final day does not exist in the given month, the last day of the final month is given. For example, if the anchor time is during 31st January 2007 and the relative time is 1 month, the final time is the same time of day during 28th February 2007.
-s
In addition to setting REPLY
, set REPLY2
to the remainder of
the argument after the date and time have been stripped. This is
empty if the option -A
was given.
-t
Allow a time with no date specification. The date is assumed to be today. The behaviour is unspecified if the iron tongue of midnight is tolling twelve.
calendar_show
¶The function used by default to display events. It accepts a start time and end time for events, both in epoch seconds, and an event description.
The event is always printed to standard output. If the command line editor is active (which will usually be the case) the command line will be redisplayed after the output.
If the parameter DISPLAY
is set and the start and end times are
the same (indicating a scheduled event), the function uses the
command xmessage
to display a window with the event details.
As the system is based entirely on shell functions (with a little support
from the zsh/datetime
module) the mechanisms used are not as robust as
those provided by a dedicated calendar utility. Consequently the user
should not rely on the shell for vital alerts.
There is no calendar_delete
function.
There is no localization support for dates and times, nor any support for the use of time zones.
Relative periods of months and years do not take into account the variable number of days.
The calendar_show
function is currently hardwired to use xmessage
for displaying alerts on X Window System displays. This should be
configurable and ideally integrate better with the desktop.
calendar_lockfiles
hangs the shell while waiting for a lock on a file.
If called from a scheduled task, it should instead reschedule the event
that caused it.
A module zsh/net/tcp
is provided to provide network I/O over
TCP/IP from within the shell; see its description in
Zsh Modules. This manual page describes a function suite based on the module.
If the module is installed, the functions are usually installed at the
same time, in which case they will be available for
autoloading in the default function search path. In addition to the
zsh/net/tcp
module, the zsh/zselect
module is used to implement
timeouts on read operations. For troubleshooting tips, consult the
corresponding advice for the zftp
functions described in
Zftp Function System.
There are functions corresponding to the basic I/O operations open, close,
read and send, named tcp_open
etc., as well as a function
tcp_expect
for pattern match analysis of data read as input. The
system makes it easy to receive data from and send data to multiple named
sessions at once. In addition, it can be linked with the shell’s line
editor in such a way that input data is automatically shown at the
terminal. Other facilities available including logging, filtering and
configurable output prompts.
To use the system where it is available, it should be enough to
‘autoload -U tcp_open
’ and run tcp_open
as documented below to
start a session. The tcp_open
function will autoload the remaining
functions.
tcp_open
[ -qz
] host port [ sess ] ¶tcp_open
[ -qz
] [ -s
sess | -l
sess[,
...] ] ...tcp_open
[ -qz
] [ -a
fd | -f
fd ] [ sess ]Open a new session. In the first and simplest form, open a TCP connection to host host at port port; numeric and symbolic forms are understood for both.
If sess is given, this becomes the name of the session which can be used to refer to multiple different TCP connections. If sess is not given, the function will invent a numeric name value (note this is not the same as the file descriptor to which the session is attached). It is recommended that session names not include ‘funny’ characters, where funny characters are not well-defined but certainly do not include alphanumerics or underscores, and certainly do include whitespace.
In the second case, one or more sessions to be opened are given by name.
A single session name is given after -s
and a comma-separated list
after -l
; both options may be repeated as many times as necessary.
A failure to open any session causes tcp_open
to abort.
The host and port are read from the file .ztcp_sessions
in the same
directory as the user’s zsh initialisation files, i.e. usually the home
directory, but $ZDOTDIR
if that is set. The file consists of lines
each giving a session name and the corresponding host and port, in that
order (note the session name comes first, not last), separated by
whitespace.
The third form allows passive and fake TCP connections. If the option
-a
is used, its argument is a file descriptor open for listening for
connections. No function front-end is provided to open such a file
descriptor, but a call to ‘ztcp -l
port’ will create one with the
file descriptor stored in the parameter $REPLY
. The listening port can
be closed with ‘ztcp -c
fd’. A call to ‘tcp_open -a
fd’
will block until a remote TCP connection is made to port on the local
machine. At this point, a session is created in the usual way and is
largely indistinguishable from an active connection created with one of the
first two forms.
If the option -f
is used, its argument is a file descriptor which is
used directly as if it were a TCP session. How well the remainder of the
TCP function system copes with this depends on what actually underlies this
file descriptor. A regular file is likely to be unusable; a FIFO (pipe) of
some sort will work better, but note that it is not a good idea for two
different sessions to attempt to read from the same FIFO at once.
If the option -q
is given with any of the three forms, tcp_open
will not print informational messages, although it will in any case exit
with an appropriate status.
If the line editor (zle) is in use, which is typically the case if the
shell is interactive, tcp_open
installs a handler inside zle which
will check for new data at the same time as it checks for keyboard input.
This is convenient as the shell consumes no CPU time while waiting; the
test is performed by the operating system. Giving the option -z
to
any of the forms of tcp_open
prevents the handler from being
installed, so data must be read explicitly. Note, however, this is not
necessary for executing complete sets of send and read commands from a
function, as zle is not active at this point. Generally speaking, the
handler is only active when the shell is waiting for input at a command
prompt or in the vared
builtin. The option has no effect if zle is not
active; ‘[[ -o zle]]
’ will test for this.
The first session to be opened becomes the current session and subsequent
calls to tcp_open
do not change it. The current session is stored
in the parameter $TCP_SESS
; see below for more detail about the
parameters used by the system.
The function tcp_on_open
, if defined, is called when a session
is opened. See the description below.
tcp_close
[ -qn
] [ -a
| -l
sess[,
...] | sess ... ] ¶Close the named sessions, or the current session if none is given,
or all open sessions if -a
is given. The options -l
and -s
are
both handled for consistency with tcp_open
, although the latter is
redundant.
If the session being closed is the current one, $TCP_SESS
is unset,
leaving no current session, even if there are other sessions still open.
If the session was opened with tcp_open -f
, the file descriptor is
closed so long as it is in the range 0 to 9 accessible directly from the
command line. If the option -n
is given, no attempt will be made to
close file descriptors in this case. The -n
option is not used for
genuine ztcp
session; the file descriptors are always closed with the
session.
If the option -q
is given, no informational messages will be printed.
tcp_read
[ -bdq
] [ -t
TO ] [ -T
TO ]
[ -a
| -u
fd[,
...] | -l
sess[,
...] | -s
sess ... ]Perform a read operation on the current session, or on a list of
sessions if any are given with -u
, -l
or -s
, or all open
sessions if the option -a
is given. Any of the -u
, -l
or
-s
options may be repeated or mixed together. The -u
option
specifies a file descriptor directly (only those managed by this system
are useful), the other two specify sessions as described for
tcp_open
above.
The function checks for new data available on all the sessions listed.
Unless the -b
option is given, it will not block waiting for new data.
Any one line of data from any of the available sessions will be read,
stored in the parameter $TCP_LINE
, and displayed to standard output
unless $TCP_SILENT
contains a non-empty string. When printed to
standard output the string $TCP_PROMPT
will be shown at the start of
the line; the default form for this includes the name of the session being
read. See below for more information on these parameters. In this mode,
tcp_read
can be called repeatedly until it returns status 2 which
indicates all pending input from all specified sessions has been handled.
With the option -b
, equivalent to an infinite timeout, the function
will block until a line is available to read from one of the specified
sessions. However, only a single line is returned.
The option -d
indicates that all pending input should be drained. In
this case tcp_read
may process multiple lines in the manner given
above; only the last is stored in $TCP_LINE
, but the complete set is
stored in the array $tcp_lines
. This is cleared at the start of each
call to tcp_read
.
The options -t
and -T
specify a timeout in seconds, which may be a
floating point number for increased accuracy. With -t
the timeout is
applied before each line read. With -T
, the timeout applies to the
overall operation, possibly including multiple read operations if the
option -d
is present; without this option, there is no distinction
between -t
and -T
.
The function does not print informational messages, but if the option
-q
is given, no error message is printed for a non-existent session.
A return status of 2 indicates a timeout or no data to read. Any other non-zero return status indicates some error condition.
See tcp_log
for how to control where data is sent by tcp_read
.
tcp_send
[ -cnq
] [ -s
sess | -l
sess[,
...] ] data ... ¶tcp_send
[ -cnq
] -a
data ...Send the supplied data strings to all the specified sessions in turn. The
underlying operation differs little from a ‘print -r
’ to the session’s
file descriptor, although it attempts to prevent the shell from dying owing
to a SIGPIPE
caused by an attempt to write to a defunct session.
The option -c
causes tcp_send
to behave like cat
. It reads
lines from standard input until end of input and sends them in turn to the
specified session(s) exactly as if they were given as data
arguments to individual tcp_send
commands.
The option -n
prevents tcp_send
from putting a newline at the end
of the data strings.
The remaining options all behave as for tcp_read
.
The data arguments are not further processed once they have been passed to
tcp_send
; they are simply passed down to print -r
.
If the parameter $TCP_OUTPUT
is a non-empty string and logging is
enabled then the data sent to each session will be echoed to the log
file(s) with $TCP_OUTPUT
in front where appropriate, much
in the manner of $TCP_PROMPT
.
tcp_alias
[ -q
] alias=
sess ... ¶tcp_alias
[ -q
] [ alias ... ]tcp_alias
-d
[ -q
] alias ...This function is not particularly well tested.
The first form creates an alias for a session name; alias can then be used to refer to the existing session sess. As many aliases may be listed as required.
The second form lists any aliases specified, or all aliases if none.
The third form deletes all the aliases listed. The underlying sessions are not affected.
The option -q
suppresses an inconsistently chosen subset of error
messages.
tcp_log
[ -asc
] [ -n
| -N
] [ logfile ] ¶With an argument logfile, all future input from tcp_read
will be
logged to the named file. Unless -a
(append) is given, this file will
first be truncated or created empty. With no arguments, show the current
status of logging.
With the option -s
, per-session logging is enabled. Input from
tcp_read
is output to the file logfile.
sess. As the
session is automatically discriminated by the filename, the contents are
raw (no $TCP_PROMPT
). The option -a
applies as above.
Per-session logging and logging of all data in one file are not mutually
exclusive.
The option -c
closes all logging, both complete and per-session logs.
The options -n
and -N
respectively turn off or restore output of
data read by tcp_read
to standard output; hence ‘tcp_log -cn
’ turns
off all output by tcp_read
.
The function is purely a convenient front end to setting the parameters
$TCP_LOG
, $TCP_LOG_SESS
, $TCP_SILENT
, which are described below.
tcp_rename
old new ¶Rename session old to session new. The old name becomes invalid.
tcp_sess
[ sess [ command [ arg ... ] ] ] ¶With no arguments, list all the open sessions and associated file
descriptors. The current session is marked with a star. For use in
functions, direct access to the parameters $tcp_by_name
, $tcp_by_fd
and $TCP_SESS
is probably more convenient; see below.
With a sess argument, set the current session to sess.
This is equivalent to changing $TCP_SESS
directly.
With additional arguments, temporarily set the current session while
executing ‘command arg ...’. command is re-evaluated
so as to expand aliases etc., but the remaining args are passed
through as that appear to tcp_sess
. The original session is restored
when tcp_sess
exits.
tcp_command
send-option ... send-argument ... ¶This is a convenient front-end to tcp_send
. All arguments are passed
to tcp_send
, then the function pauses waiting for data. While data is
arriving at least every $TCP_TIMEOUT
(default 0.3) seconds, data is
handled and printed out according to the current settings. Status 0 is
always returned.
This is generally only useful for interactive use, to prevent the display becoming fragmented by output returned from the connection. Within a programme or function it is generally better to handle reading data by a more explicit method.
tcp_expect
[ -q
] [ -p
var | -P
var ] [ -t
TO | -T
TO ]
[ -a
| -s
sess | -l
sess[,
...] ] pattern ...Wait for input matching any of the given patterns from any of the
specified sessions. Input is ignored until an input line matches one of
the given patterns; at this point status zero is returned, the matching
line is stored in $TCP_LINE
, and the full set of lines read during the
call to tcp_expect
is stored in the array $tcp_expect_lines
.
Sessions are specified in the same way as tcp_read
: the default is to
use the current session, otherwise the sessions specified by -a
,
-s
, or -l
are used.
Each pattern is a standard zsh extended-globbing pattern; note that it
needs to be quoted to avoid it being expanded immediately by filename
generation. It must match the full line, so to match a substring there
must be a ‘*
’ at the start and end. The line matched against includes
the $TCP_PROMPT
added by tcp_read
. It is possible to include the
globbing flags ‘#b
’ or ‘#m
’ in the patterns to make backreferences
available in the parameters $MATCH
, $match
, etc., as described in
the base zsh documentation on pattern matching.
Unlike tcp_read
, the default behaviour of tcp_expect
is to block
indefinitely until the required input is found. This can be modified by
specifying a timeout with -t
or -T
; these function as in
tcp_read
, specifying a per-read or overall timeout, respectively, in
seconds, as an integer or floating-point number. As tcp_read
, the
function returns status 2 if a timeout occurs.
The function returns as soon as any one of the patterns given match. If
the caller needs to know which of the patterns matched, the option -p
var can be used; on return, $var
is set to the number of the
pattern using ordinary zsh indexing, i.e. the first is 1, and so on. Note
the absence of a ‘$
’ in front of var. To avoid clashes, the
parameter cannot begin with ‘_expect
’. The index -1 is used if
there is a timeout and 0 if there is no match.
The option -P
var works similarly to -p
, but instead of
numerical indexes the regular arguments must begin with a prefix
followed by a colon: that prefix is then used as a tag to which var
is set when the argument matches. The tag timeout
is used if there
is a timeout and the empty string if there is no match. Note it is
acceptable for different arguments to start with the same prefix if the
matches do not need to be distinguished.
The option -q
is passed directly down to tcp_read
.
As all input is done via tcp_read
, all the usual rules about output of
lines read apply. One exception is that the parameter $tcp_lines
will
only reflect the line actually matched by tcp_expect
; use
$tcp_expect_lines
for the full set of lines read during the function
call.
tcp_proxy
¶This is a simple-minded function to accept a TCP connection and execute a command with I/O redirected to the connection. Extreme caution should be taken as there is no security whatsoever and this can leave your computer open to the world. Ideally, it should only be used behind a firewall.
The first argument is a TCP port on which the function will listen.
The remaining arguments give a command and its arguments to execute with standard input, standard output and standard error redirected to the file descriptor on which the TCP session has been accepted. If no command is given, a new zsh is started. This gives everyone on your network direct access to your account, which in many cases will be a bad thing.
The command is run in the background, so tcp_proxy
can then accept new
connections. It continues to accept new connections until interrupted.
tcp_spam
[ -ertv
] [ -a
| -s
sess | -l
sess[,
...] ] cmd [ arg ... ] ¶Execute ‘cmd [ arg ... ]’ for each session in turn. Note this executes
the command and arguments; it does not send the command line as data
unless the -t
(transmit) option is given.
The sessions may be selected explicitly with the standard -a
, -s
or
-l
options, or may be chosen implicitly. If none of the three options
is given the rules are: first, if the array $tcp_spam_list
is set, this
is taken as the list of sessions, otherwise all sessions are taken.
Second, any sessions given in the array $tcp_no_spam_list
are removed
from the list of sessions.
Normally, any sessions added by the ‘-a
’ flag or when all sessions are
chosen implicitly are spammed in alphabetic order; sessions given by the
$tcp_spam_list
array or on the command line are spammed in the order
given. The -r
flag reverses the order however it was arrived it.
The -v
flag specifies that a $TCP_PROMPT
will be output before each
session. This is output after any modification to TCP_SESS
by the
user-defined tcp_on_spam
function described below. (Obviously that
function is able to generate its own output.)
If the option -e
is present, the line given as ‘cmd [ arg ... ]’ is executed
using eval
, otherwise it is executed without any further processing.
tcp_talk
¶This is a fairly simple-minded attempt to force input to the line editor to
go straight to the default TCP_SESS
.
An escape string, $TCP_TALK_ESCAPE
, default ‘:
’, is used to allow
access to normal shell operation. If it is on its own at the start of the
line, or followed only by whitespace, the line editor returns to normal
operation. Otherwise, the string and any following whitespace are skipped
and the remainder of the line executed as shell input without any change of
the line editor’s operating mode.
The current implementation is somewhat deficient in terms of use of the
command history. For this reason, many users will prefer to use some form
of alternative approach for sending data easily to the current session.
One simple approach is to alias some special character (such as ‘%
’) to
‘tcp_command -
-
’.
tcp_wait
¶The sole argument is an integer or floating point number which gives the
seconds to delay. The shell will do nothing for that period except wait
for input on all TCP sessions by calling tcp_read -a
. This is similar
to the interactive behaviour at the command prompt when zle handlers are
installed.
tcp_point
porttcp_shoot
host portThis pair of functions provide a simple way to transfer a file between
two hosts within the shell. Note, however, that bulk data transfer is
currently done using cat
. tcp_point
reads any data arriving at
port and sends it to standard output; tcp_shoot
connects to
port on host and sends its standard input. Any unused port
may be used; the standard mechanism for picking a port is to think of a
random four-digit number above 1024 until one works.
To transfer a file from host woodcock
to host springes
, on
springes
:
tcp_point 8091 >output_file
and on woodcock
:
tcp_shoot springes 8091 <input_file
As these two functions do not require tcp_open
to set up a TCP
connection first, they may need to be autoloaded separately.
Certain functions, if defined by the user, will be called by the function
system in certain contexts. This facility depends on the module
zsh/parameter
, which is usually available in interactive shells as the
completion system depends on it. None of the functions need be defined;
they simply provide convenient hooks when necessary.
Typically, these are called after the requested action has been taken, so that the various parameters will reflect the new state.
tcp_on_alias
alias fd ¶When an alias is defined, this function will be called with two arguments: the name of the alias, and the file descriptor of the corresponding session.
tcp_on_awol
sess fd ¶If the function tcp_fd_handler
is handling input from the line
editor and detects that the file descriptor is no longer reusable,
by default it removes it from the list of file descriptors handled
by this method and prints a message. If the function tcp_on_awol
is defined it is called immediately before this point. It may
return status 100, which indicates that the normal handling should
still be performed; any other return status indicates that no further
action should be taken and the tcp_fd_handler
should return
immediately with the given status. Typically the action of tcp_on_awol
will be to close the session.
The variable TCP_INVALIDATE_ZLE
will be a non-empty string if it is
necessary to invalidate the line editor display using ‘zle -I
’ before
printing output from the function.
(‘AWOL’ is military jargon for ‘absent without leave’ or some variation. It has no pre-existing technical meaning known to the author.)
tcp_on_close
sess fd ¶This is called with the name of a session being closed and the file descriptor which corresponded to that session. Both will be invalid by the time the function is called.
tcp_on_open
sess fd ¶This is called after a new session has been defined with the session name
and file descriptor as arguments. If it returns a non-zero status,
opening the session is assumed to fail and the session is closed
again; however, tcp_open
will continue to attempt to open any
remaining sessions given on the command line.
tcp_on_rename
oldsess fd newsess ¶This is called after a session has been renamed with the three arguments old session name, file descriptor, new session name.
tcp_on_spam
sess command ... ¶This is called once for each session spammed, just before a command is
executed for a session by tcp_spam
. The arguments are the session name
followed by the command list to be executed. If tcp_spam
was called
with the option -t
, the first command will be tcp_send
.
This function is called after $TCP_SESS
is set to reflect the session
to be spammed, but before any use of it is made. Hence it is possible to
alter the value of $TCP_SESS
within this function. For example, the
session arguments to tcp_spam
could include extra information to be
stripped off and processed in tcp_on_spam
.
If the function sets the parameter $REPLY
to ‘done
’, the command
line is not executed; in addition, no prompt is printed for the -v
option to tcp_spam
.
tcp_on_unalias
alias fd ¶This is called with the name of an alias and the corresponding session’s file descriptor after an alias has been deleted.
The following functions are used by the TCP function system but will rarely if ever need to be called directly.
tcp_fd_handler
¶This is the function installed by tcp_open
for handling input from
within the line editor, if that is required. It is in the format
documented for the builtin ‘zle -F
’ in
Zle Builtins
.
While active, the function sets the parameter TCP_HANDLER_ACTIVE
to 1.
This allows shell code called internally (for example, by setting
tcp_on_read
) to tell if is being called when the shell is otherwise
idle at the editor prompt.
tcp_output
[ -q
] -P
prompt -F
fd -S
sess ¶This function is used for both logging and handling output to standard
output, from within tcp_read
and (if $TCP_OUTPUT
is set)
tcp_send
.
The prompt to use is specified by -P
; the default is the empty
string. It can contain:
%c
Expands to 1 if the session is the current session, otherwise 0. Used
with ternary expressions such as ‘%(c.-.+)
’ to
output ‘+
’ for the current session and ‘-
’ otherwise.
%f
Replaced by the session’s file descriptor.
%s
Replaced by the session name.
%%
Replaced by a single ‘%
’.
The option -q
suppresses output to standard output, but not to any log
files which are configured.
The -S
and -F
options are used to pass in the session name and file
descriptor for possible replacement in the prompt.
Parameters follow the usual convention that uppercase is used for scalars and integers, while lowercase is used for normal and associative array. It is always safe for user code to read these parameters. Some parameters may also be set; these are noted explicitly. Others are included in this group as they are set by the function system for the user’s benefit, i.e. setting them is typically not useful but is benign.
It is often also useful to make settable parameters local to a function.
For example, ‘local TCP_SILENT=1
’ specifies that data read during the
function call will not be printed to standard output, regardless of the
setting outside the function. Likewise, ‘local TCP_SESS=
sess’
sets a session for the duration of a function, and ‘local
TCP_PROMPT=
’ specifies that no prompt is used for input during the
function.
tcp_expect_lines
¶Array. The set of lines read during the last call to tcp_expect
,
including the last ($TCP_LINE
).
tcp_filter
¶Array. May be set directly. A set of extended globbing patterns which,
if matched in tcp_output
, will cause the line not to be printed to
standard output. The patterns should be defined as described for the
arguments to tcp_expect
. Output of line to log files is not affected.
TCP_HANDLER_ACTIVE
¶Scalar. Set to 1 within tcp_fd_handler
to indicate to functions
called recursively that they have been called during an editor session.
Otherwise unset.
TCP_LINE
¶The last line read by tcp_read
, and hence also tcp_expect
.
TCP_LINE_FD
¶The file descriptor from which $TCP_LINE
was read.
${tcp_by_fd[$TCP_LINE_FD]}
will give the corresponding session name.
tcp_lines
¶Array. The set of lines read during the last call to tcp_read
,
including the last ($TCP_LINE
).
TCP_LOG
¶May be set directly, although it is also controlled by tcp_log
.
The name of a file to which output from all sessions will be sent.
The output is proceeded by the usual $TCP_PROMPT
. If it is not an
absolute path name, it will follow the user’s current directory.
TCP_LOG_SESS
¶May be set directly, although it is also controlled by tcp_log
.
The prefix for a set of files to which output from each session separately
will be sent; the full filename is ${TCP_LOG_SESS}.
sess.
Output to each file is raw; no prompt is added. If it is not an absolute
path name, it will follow the user’s current directory.
tcp_no_spam_list
¶Array. May be set directly. See tcp_spam
for how this is used.
TCP_OUTPUT
¶May be set directly. If a non-empty string, any data sent to a session by
tcp_send
will be logged. This parameter gives the prompt to be used
in a file specified by $TCP_LOG
but not in a file generated from
$TCP_LOG_SESS
. The prompt string has the same format as
TCP_PROMPT
and the same rules for its use apply.
TCP_PROMPT
¶May be set directly. Used as the prefix for data read by tcp_read
which is printed to standard output or to the log file given by
$TCP_LOG
, if any. Any ‘%s
’, ‘%f
’ or ‘%%
’ occurring in the
string will be replaced by the name of the session, the session’s
underlying file descriptor, or a single ‘%
’, respectively. The
expression ‘%c
’ expands to 1 if the session being read is the current
session, else 0; this is most useful in ternary expressions such as
‘%(c.-.+)
’ which outputs ‘+
’ if the session is
the current one, else ‘-
’.
If the prompt starts with %P
, this is stripped and the complete
result of the previous stage is passed through standard prompt %
-style
formatting before being output.
TCP_READ_DEBUG
¶May be set directly. If this has non-zero length, tcp_read
will give
some limited diagnostics about data being read.
TCP_SECONDS_START
¶This value is created and initialised to zero by tcp_open.
The functions tcp_read
and tcp_expect
use the shell’s
SECONDS
parameter for their own timing purposes. If that parameter
is not of floating point type on entry to one of the functions, it will
create a local parameter SECONDS
which is floating point and set the
parameter TCP_SECONDS_START
to the previous value of $SECONDS
.
If the parameter is already floating point, it is used without a local
copy being created and TCP_SECONDS_START
is not set. As the global
value is zero, the shell elapsed time is guaranteed to be the sum of
$SECONDS
and $TCP_SECONDS_START
.
This can be avoided by setting SECONDS
globally to a floating point
value using ‘typeset -F SECONDS
’; then the TCP functions will never
make a local copy and never set TCP_SECONDS_START
to a non-zero value.
TCP_SESS
¶May be set directly. The current session; must refer to one of the
sessions established by tcp_open
.
TCP_SILENT
¶May be set directly, although it is also controlled by tcp_log
.
If of non-zero length, data read by tcp_read
will not be written to
standard output, though may still be written to a log file.
tcp_spam_list
¶Array. May be set directly. See the description of the function
tcp_spam
for how this is used.
TCP_TALK_ESCAPE
¶May be set directly. See the description of the function tcp_talk
for
how this is used.
TCP_TIMEOUT
¶May be set directly. Currently this is only used by the function
tcp_command
, see above.
The following parameters are not set by the function system, but have a special effect if set by the user.
tcp_on_read
¶This should be an associative array; if it is not, the behaviour is
undefined. Each key is the name of a shell function or other command,
and the corresponding value is a shell pattern (using EXTENDED_GLOB
).
Every line read from a TCP session directly or indirectly using
tcp_read
(which includes lines read by tcp_expect
) is compared
against the pattern. If the line matches, the command given in the key is
called with two arguments: the name of the session from which the line was
read, and the line itself.
If any function called to handle a line returns a non-zero status, the
line is not output. Thus a tcp_on_read
handler containing only
the instruction ‘return 1
’ can be used to suppress output of
particular lines (see, however, tcp_filter
above). However, the line
is still stored in TCP_LINE
and tcp_lines
; this occurs after all
tcp_on_read
processing.
These parameters are controlled by the function system; they may be read directly, but should not usually be set by user code.
tcp_aliases
¶Associative array. The keys are the names of sessions established with
tcp_open
; each value is a space-separated list of aliases which refer
to that session.
tcp_by_fd
¶Associative array. The keys are session file descriptors; each value is the name of that session.
tcp_by_name
¶Associative array. The keys are the names of sessions; each value is the file descriptor associated with that session.
Here is a trivial example using a remote calculator.
To create a calculator server on port 7337 (see the dc
manual page for
quite how infuriating the underlying command is):
tcp_proxy 7337 dc
To connect to this from the same host with a session also named ‘dc
’:
tcp_open localhost 7337 dc
To send a command to the remote session and wait a short while for output
(assuming dc
is the current session):
tcp_command 2 4 + p
To close the session:
tcp_close
The tcp_proxy
needs to be killed to be stopped. Note this will not
usually kill any connections which have already been accepted, and also
that the port is not immediately available for reuse.
The following chunk of code puts a list of sessions into an xterm header, with the current session followed by a star.
print -n "\033]2;TCP:" ${(k)tcp_by_name:/$TCP_SESS/$TCP_SESS\*} "\a"
The function tcp_read
uses the shell’s normal read
builtin. As
this reads a complete line at once, data arriving without a terminating
newline can cause the function to block indefinitely.
Though the function suite works well for interactive use and for data arriving in small amounts, the performance when large amounts of data are being exchanged is likely to be extremely poor.
This describes the set of shell functions supplied with the source
distribution as an interface to the zftp
builtin command, allowing you
to perform FTP operations from the shell command line or within functions
or scripts. The interface is similar to a traditional FTP client (e.g. the
ftp
command itself, see ftp(1)), but as it is entirely done
within the shell all the familiar completion, editing and globbing features,
and so on, are present, and macros are particularly simple to write as they
are just ordinary shell functions.
The prerequisite is that the zftp
command, as described in
The zsh/zftp Module
, must be available in the
version of zsh
installed at your site. If the shell is configured to
load new commands at run time, it probably is: typing ‘zmodload zsh/zftp
’
will make sure (if that runs silently, it has worked). If this is not the
case, it is possible zftp
was linked into the shell anyway: to test
this, type ‘which zftp
’ and if zftp
is available you will get the
message ‘zftp: shell built-in command
’.
Commands given directly with zftp
builtin may be interspersed between
the functions in this suite; in a few cases, using zftp
directly may
cause some of the status information stored in shell parameters to become
invalid. Note in particular the description of the variables
$ZFTP_TMOUT
, $ZFTP_PREFS
and $ZFTP_VERBOSE
for zftp
.
You should make sure all the functions from the Functions/Zftp
directory of the source distribution are available; they all begin with the
two letters ‘zf
’. They may already have been installed on your system;
otherwise, you will need to find them and copy them. The directory should
appear as one of the elements of the $fpath
array (this should already
be the case if they were installed), and at least the function zfinit
should be autoloaded; it will autoload the rest. Finally, to initialize
the use of the system you need to call the zfinit
function. The
following code in your .zshrc
will arrange for this; assume the
functions are stored in the directory ~/myfns
:
fpath=(~/myfns $fpath) autoload -U zfinit zfinit
Note that zfinit
assumes you are using the zmodload
method to
load the zftp
command. If it is already built into the shell, change
zfinit
to zfinit -n
. It is helpful (though not essential) if the
call to zfinit
appears after any code to initialize the new completion
system, else unnecessary compctl
commands will be given.
The sequence of operations in performing a file transfer is essentially the
same as that in a standard FTP client. Note that, due to a quirk of the
shell’s getopts
builtin, for those functions that handle options you
must use ‘-
-
’ rather than ‘-
’ to ensure the remaining arguments
are treated literally (a single ‘-
’ is treated as an argument).
zfparams
[ host [ user [ password ... ] ] ] ¶Set or show the parameters for a future zfopen
with no arguments. If
no arguments are given, the current parameters are displayed (the password
will be shown as a line of asterisks). If a host is given, and either the
user or password is not, they will be prompted for; also, any
parameter given as ‘?
’ will be prompted for, and if the ‘?
’ is
followed by a string, that will be used as the prompt. As zfopen
calls
zfparams
to store the parameters, this usually need not be called
directly.
A single argument ‘-
’ will delete the stored parameters. This will
also cause the memory of the last directory (and so on) on the other host
to be deleted.
zfopen
[ -1
] [ host [ user [ password [ account ] ] ] ] ¶If host is present, open a connection to that host under username
user with password password (and, on the rare occasions when it
is necessary, account account). If a necessary parameter is missing or
given as ‘?
’ it will be prompted for. If host is not present, use
a previously stored set of parameters.
If the command was successful, and the terminal is compatible with
xterm
or is sun-cmd
, a summary will appear in the title bar,
giving the local host:directory
and the remote host:directory
;
this is handled by the function zftp_chpwd
, described below.
Normally, the host, user and password are internally
recorded for later re-opening, either by a zfopen
with no arguments, or
automatically (see below). With the option ‘-1
’, no information is
stored. Also, if an open command with arguments failed, the parameters
will not be retained (and any previous parameters will also be deleted).
A zfopen
on its own, or a zfopen -1
, never alters the stored
parameters.
Both zfopen
and zfanon
(but not zfparams
) understand URLs of
the form ftp://
host/path... as meaning to connect to the
host, then change directory to path (which must be a directory,
not a file). The ‘ftp://
’ can be omitted; the trailing ‘/
’ is enough
to trigger recognition of the path. Note prefixes other than
‘ftp:
’ are not recognized, and that all characters after the first
slash beyond host are significant in path.
zfanon
[ -1
] host ¶Open a connection host for anonymous FTP. The username used is
‘anonymous
’. The password (which will be reported the first time) is
generated as user@
host; this is then stored in the shell
parameter $EMAIL_ADDR
which can alternatively be set manually to a
suitable string.
zfcd
[ dir ] ¶zfcd -
zfcd
old newChange the current directory on the remote server: this is implemented to
have many of the features of the shell builtin cd
.
In the first form with dir present, change to the directory dir.
The command ‘zfcd ..
’ is treated specially, so is guaranteed to work on
non-UNIX servers (note this is handled internally by zftp
). If dir
is omitted, has the effect of ‘zfcd ~
’.
The second form changes to the directory previously current.
The third form attempts to change the current directory by replacing the first occurrence of the string old with the string new in the current directory.
Note that in this command, and indeed anywhere a remote filename is
expected, the string which on the local host corresponds to ‘~
’ is
converted back to a ‘~
’ before being passed to the remote machine.
This is convenient because of the way expansion is performed on the command
line before zfcd
receives a string. For example, suppose the command
is ‘zfcd ~/foo
’. The shell will expand this to a full path such as
‘zfcd /home/user2/pws/foo
’. At this stage, zfcd
recognises the
initial path as corresponding to ‘~
’ and will send the directory to
the remote host as ~/foo
, so that the ‘~
’ will be expanded by the
server to the correct remote host directory. Other named directories of
the form ‘~name
’ are not treated in this fashion.
zfhere
¶Change directory on the remote server to the one corresponding to the
current local directory, with special handling of ‘~
’ as in zfcd
.
For example, if the current local directory is ~/foo/bar
, then
zfhere
performs the effect of ‘zfcd ~/foo/bar
’.
zfdir
[ -rfd
] [ -
] [ dir-options ] [ dir ] ¶Produce a long directory listing. The arguments dir-options and
dir are passed directly to the server and their effect is
implementation dependent, but specifying a particular remote directory
dir is usually possible. The output is passed through a pager
given by the environment variable $PAGER
, or ‘more
’ if that is not
set.
The directory is usually cached for re-use. In fact, two caches are
maintained. One is for use when there is no dir-options or dir,
i.e. a full listing of the current remote directory; it is flushed
when the current remote directory changes. The other is
kept for repeated use of zfdir
with the same arguments; for example,
repeated use of ‘zfdir /pub/gnu
’ will only require the directory to be
retrieved on the first call. Alternatively, this cache can be re-viewed with
the -r
option. As relative directories will confuse
zfdir
, the -f
option can be used to force the cache to be flushed
before the directory is listed. The option -d
will delete both
caches without showing a directory listing; it will also delete the cache
of file names in the current remote directory, if any.
zfls
[ ls-options ] [ dir ] ¶List files on the remote server. With no arguments, this will produce a simple list of file names for the current remote directory. Any arguments are passed directly to the server. No pager and no caching is used.
zftype
[ type ] ¶With no arguments, show the type of data to be transferred, usually ASCII
or binary. With an argument, change the type: the types ‘A
’ or
‘ASCII
’ for ASCII data and ‘B
’ or ‘BINARY
’, ‘I
’ or
‘IMAGE
’ for binary data are understood case-insensitively.
zfstat
[ -v
] ¶Show the status of the current or last connection, as well as the status of
some of zftp
’s status variables. With the -v
option, a more
verbose listing is produced by querying the server for its version of
events, too.
The commands for retrieving files all take at least two options. -G
suppresses remote filename expansion which would otherwise be performed
(see below for a more detailed description of that). -t
attempts
to set the modification time of the local file to that of the remote file:
see the description of the function zfrtime
below for more information.
zfget
[ -Gtc
] file1 ... ¶Retrieve all the listed files file1 ... one at a time from the remote
server. If a file contains a ‘/
’, the full name is passed to the
remote server, but the file is stored locally under the name given by the
part after the final ‘/
’. The option -c
(cat) forces all files to
be sent as a single stream to standard output; in this case the -t
option has no effect.
zfuget
[ -Gvst
] file1 ... ¶As zfget
, but only retrieve files where the version on the remote
server is newer (has a later modification time), or where the local file
does not exist. If the remote file is older but the files have different
sizes, or if the sizes are the same but the remote file is newer, the user
will usually be queried. With the option -s
, the command runs silently
and will always retrieve the file in either of those two cases. With the
option -v
, the command prints more information about the files while it
is working out whether or not to transfer them.
zfcget
[ -Gt
] file1 ... ¶As zfget
, but if any of the local files exists, and is shorter than
the corresponding remote file, the command assumes that it is the result of
a partially completed transfer and attempts to transfer the rest of the
file. This is useful on a poor connection which keeps failing.
Note that this requires a commonly implemented, but non-standard, version of the FTP protocol, so is not guaranteed to work on all servers.
zfgcp
[ -Gt
] remote-file local-file ¶zfgcp
[ -Gt
] rfile1 ... ldirThis retrieves files from the remote server with arguments behaving
similarly to the cp
command.
In the first form, copy remote-file from the server to the local file local-file.
In the second form, copy all the remote files rfile1 ... into the local directory ldir retaining the same basenames. This assumes UNIX directory semantics.
zfput
[ -r
] file1 ... ¶Send all the file1 ... given separately to the remote server. If a
filename contains a ‘/
’, the full filename is used locally to find the
file, but only the basename is used for the remote file name.
With the option -r
, if any of the files are directories they are
sent recursively with all their subdirectories, including files beginning
with ‘.
’. This requires that the remote machine understand UNIX file
semantics, since ‘/
’ is used as a directory separator.
zfuput
[ -vs
] file1 ... ¶As zfput
, but only send files which are newer than their remote
equivalents, or if the remote file does not exist. The logic is the same
as for zfuget
, but reversed between local and remote files.
zfcput
file1 ... ¶As zfput
, but if any remote file already exists and is shorter than the
local equivalent, assume it is the result of an incomplete transfer and
send the rest of the file to append to the existing part. As the FTP
append command is part of the standard set, this is in principle more
likely to work than zfcget
.
zfpcp
local-file remote-file ¶zfpcp
lfile1 ... rdirThis sends files to the remote server with arguments behaving similarly to
the cp
command.
With two arguments, copy local-file to the server as remote-file.
With more than two arguments, copy all the local files lfile1 ... into the existing remote directory rdir retaining the same basenames. This assumes UNIX directory semantics.
A problem arises if you attempt to use zfpcp
lfile1 rdir,
i.e. the second form of copying but with two arguments, as the command has
no simple way of knowing if rdir corresponds to a directory or a
filename. It attempts to resolve this in various ways. First, if the
rdir argument is ‘.
’ or ‘..
’ or ends in a slash, it is assumed
to be a directory. Secondly, if the operation of copying to a remote file
in the first form failed, and the remote server sends back the expected
failure code 553 and a reply including the string ‘Is a directory
’,
then zfpcp
will retry using the second form.
zfsession
[ -lvod
] [ sessname ] ¶Allows you to manage multiple FTP sessions at once. By default,
connections take place in a session called ‘default
’; by giving the
command ‘zfsession
sessname’ you can change to a new or existing
session with a name of your choice. The new session remembers its own
connection, as well as associated shell parameters, and also the host/user
parameters set by zfparams
. Hence you can have different sessions set
up to connect to different hosts, each remembering the appropriate host,
user and password.
With no arguments, zfsession
prints the name of the current session;
with the option -l
it lists all sessions which currently exist, and
with the option -v
it gives a verbose list showing the host and
directory for each session, where the current session is marked with an
asterisk. With -o
, it will switch to the most recent previous session.
With -d
, the given session (or else the current one) is removed;
everything to do with it is completely forgotten. If it was the only
session, a new session called ‘default
’ is created and made current.
It is safest not to delete sessions while background commands using
zftp
are active.
zftransfer
sess1:
file1 sess2:
file2 ¶Transfer files between two sessions; no local copy is made. The file is read from the session sess1 as file1 and written to session sess2 as file file2; file1 and file2 may be relative to the current directories of the session. Either sess1 or sess2 may be omitted (though the colon should be retained if there is a possibility of a colon appearing in the file name) and defaults to the current session; file2 may be omitted or may end with a slash, in which case the basename of file1 will be added. The sessions sess1 and sess2 must be distinct.
The operation is performed using pipes, so it is required that the connections still be valid in a subshell, which is not the case under versions of some operating systems, presumably due to a system bug.
The two functions zfmark
and zfgoto
allow you to ‘bookmark’ the
present location (host, user and directory) of the current FTP connection
for later use. The file to be used for storing and retrieving bookmarks is
given by the parameter $ZFTP_BMFILE
; if not set when one of the two
functions is called, it will be set to the file .zfbkmarks
in the
directory where your zsh startup files live (usually ~
).
zfmark
[ bookmark ] ¶If given an argument, mark the current host, user and directory under the
name bookmark for later use by zfgoto
. If there is no connection
open, use the values for the last connection immediately before it was
closed; it is an error if there was none. Any existing bookmark
under the same name will be silently replaced.
If not given an argument, list the existing bookmarks and the points to
which they refer in the form user@
host:
directory;
this is the format in which they are stored, and the file may be edited
directly.
zfgoto
[ -n
] bookmark ¶Return to the location given by bookmark, as previously set by
zfmark
. If the location has user ‘ftp
’ or ‘anonymous
’, open
the connection with zfanon
, so that no password is required. If the
user and host parameters match those stored for the current session, if
any, those will be used, and again no password is required. Otherwise a
password will be prompted for.
With the option -n
, the bookmark is taken to be a nickname stored by
the ncftp
program in its bookmark file, which is assumed to be
~/.ncftp/bookmarks
. The function works identically in other ways.
Note that there is no mechanism for adding or modifying ncftp
bookmarks
from the zftp functions.
Mostly, these functions will not be called directly (apart from
zfinit
), but are described here for completeness. You may wish to
alter zftp_chpwd
and zftp_progress
, in particular.
zfinit
[ -n
] ¶As described above, this is used to initialize the zftp function system.
The -n
option should be used if the zftp command is already built into
the shell.
zfautocheck
[ -dn
] ¶This function is called to implement automatic reopening behaviour, as
described in more detail below. The options must appear in the first
argument; -n
prevents the command from changing to the old directory,
while -d
prevents it from setting the variable do_close
, which it
otherwise does as a flag for automatically closing the connection after a
transfer. The host and directory for the last session are stored in the
variable $zflastsession
, but the internal host/user/password parameters
must also be correctly set.
zfcd_match prefix suffix
¶This performs matching for completion of remote directory names. If the
remote server is UNIX, it will attempt to persuade the server to list the
remote directory with subdirectories marked, which usually works but is not
guaranteed. On other hosts it simply calls zfget_match
and hence
completes all files, not just directories. On some systems, directories
may not even look like filenames.
zfget_match prefix suffix
¶This performs matching for completion of remote filenames. It caches files
for the current directory (only) in the shell parameter $zftp_fcache
.
It is in the form to be called by the -K
option of compctl
, but
also works when called from a widget-style completion function with
prefix and suffix set appropriately.
zfrglob varname
¶Perform remote globbing, as describes in more detail below. varname is the name of a variable containing the pattern to be expanded; if there were any matches, the same variable will be set to the expanded set of filenames on return.
zfrtime
lfile rfile [ time ] ¶Set the local file lfile to have the same modification time as the
remote file rfile, or the explicit time time in FTP format
CCYYMMDDhhmmSS
for the GMT timezone. This uses the shell’s
zsh/datetime
module to perform the conversion from
GMT to local time.
zftp_chpwd
¶This function is called every time a connection is opened, or closed, or
the remote directory changes. This version alters the title bar of an
xterm
-compatible or sun-cmd
terminal emulator to reflect the
local and remote hostnames and current directories. It works best when
combined with the function chpwd
. In particular, a function of
the form
chpwd() { if [[ -n $ZFTP_USER ]]; then zftp_chpwd else # usual chpwd e.g put host:directory in title bar fi }
fits in well.
zftp_progress
¶This function shows the status of the transfer. It will not write anything
unless the output is going to a terminal; however, if you transfer files in
the background, you should turn off progress reports by hand using
‘zstyle ':zftp:*' progress none
’. Note also that if you alter it, any
output must be to standard error, as standard output may be a file
being received. The form of the progress meter, or whether it is used at
all, can be configured without altering the function, as described in the
next section.
zffcache
¶This is used to implement caching of files in the current directory for
each session separately. It is used by zfget_match
and zfrglob
.
Various styles are available using the standard shell style mechanism,
described in
The zsh/zutil Module. Briefly, the
command ‘zstyle ':zftp:*'
style value ...’.
defines the style to have value value; more than one value may be
given, although that is not useful in the cases described here. These
values will then be used throughout the zftp function system. For more
precise control, the first argument, which gives a pattern that matches contexts in which the
style applies, can be modified to include a particular function, as for
example ‘:zftp:zfget
’: the style will then have the given value only
in the zfget
function, and will override styles set under ‘:zftp:*
’.
Note that only the top level function name, as called by
the user, is used; calling of lower level functions is transparent to the
user. Hence modifications to the title bar in zftp_chpwd
use the
contexts :zftp:zfopen
, :zftp:zfcd
, etc., depending where it was
called from. The following styles are understood:
progress
¶Controls the way that zftp_progress
reports on the progress of a
transfer. If empty, unset, or ‘none
’, no progress report is made; if
‘bar
’ a growing bar of inverse video is shown; if ‘percent
’ (or any
other string, though this may change in future), the percentage of the file
transferred is shown. The bar meter requires that the width of the
terminal be available via the $COLUMNS
parameter (normally this is set
automatically). If the size of the file being transferred is not
available, bar
and percent
meters will simply show the number of
bytes transferred so far.
When zfinit
is run, if this style is not defined for the context
:zftp:*
, it will be set to ‘bar’.
update
¶Specifies the minimum time interval between updates of the progress meter
in seconds. No update is made unless new data has been received, so the
actual time interval is limited only by $ZFTP_TIMEOUT
.
As described for progress
, zfinit
will force this to default to 1.
remote-glob
¶If set to ‘1
’, ‘yes
’ or ‘true
’, filename generation (globbing) is
performed on the remote machine instead of by zsh itself; see below.
titlebar
¶If set to ‘1
’, ‘yes
’ or ‘true
’, zftp_chpwd
will put the remote host and
remote directory into the titlebar of terminal emulators such as xterm or
sun-cmd that allow this.
As described for progress
, zfinit
will force this to default to 1.
chpwd
¶If set to ‘1
’ ‘yes
’ or ‘true
’, zftp_chpwd
will call the function
chpwd
when a connection is closed. This is useful if the remote host
details were put into the terminal title bar by zftp_chpwd
and your
usual chpwd
also modifies the title bar.
When zfinit
is run, it will determine whether chpwd
exists and if
so it will set the default value for the style to 1 if none exists
already.
Note that there is also an associative array zfconfig
which contains
values used by the function system. This should not be modified or
overwritten.
The commands for retrieving files usually perform filename generation
(globbing) on their arguments; this can be turned off by passing the option
-G
to each of the commands. Normally this operates by retrieving a
complete list of files for the directory in question, then matching these
locally against the pattern supplied. This has the advantage that the full
range of zsh patterns (respecting the setting of the option
EXTENDED_GLOB
) can be used. However, it means that the directory part
of a filename will not be expanded and must be given exactly. If the
remote server does not support the UNIX directory semantics, directory
handling is problematic and it is recommended that globbing only be used
within the current directory. The list of files in the current directory,
if retrieved, will be cached, so that subsequent globs in the same
directory without an intervening zfcd
are much faster.
If the remote-glob
style (see above) is set, globbing is instead
performed on the remote host: the server is asked for a list of matching
files. This is highly dependent on how the server is implemented, though
typically UNIX servers will provide support for basic glob patterns. This
may in some cases be faster, as it avoids retrieving the entire list of
directory contents.
As described for the zfopen
command, a subsequent zfopen
with no
parameters will reopen the connection to the last host (this includes
connections made with the zfanon
command). Opened in this fashion, the
connection starts in the default remote directory and will remain open
until explicitly closed.
Automatic re-opening is also available. If a connection is not currently
open and a command requiring a connection is given, the last connection is
implicitly reopened. In this case the directory which was current when the
connection was closed again becomes the current directory (unless, of
course, the command given changes it). Automatic reopening will also take
place if the connection was close by the remote server for whatever reason
(e.g. a timeout). It is not available if the -1
option to zfopen
or zfanon
was used.
Furthermore, if the command issued is a file transfer, the connection will
be closed after the transfer is finished, hence providing a one-shot mode
for transfers. This does not apply to directory changing or listing
commands; for example a zfdir
may reopen a connection but will leave it
open. Also, automatic closure will only ever happen in the same command as
automatic opening, i.e a zfdir
directly followed by a zfget
will
never close the connection automatically.
Information about the previous connection is given by the zfstat
function. So, for example, if that reports:
Session: default Not connected. Last session: ftp.bar.com:/pub/textfiles
then the command zfget file.txt
will attempt to reopen a connection to
ftp.bar.com
, retrieve the file /pub/textfiles/file.txt
, and
immediately close the connection again. On the other hand, zfcd ..
will open the connection in the directory /pub
and leave it open.
Note that all the above is local to each session; if you return to a previous session, the connection for that session is the one which will be reopened.
Completion of local and remote files, directories, sessions and bookmarks
is supported. The older, compctl
-style completion is defined when
zfinit
is called; support for the new widget-based completion system is
provided in the function Completion/Zsh/Command/_zftp
, which should be
installed with the other functions of the completion system and hence
should automatically be available.
The Zsh source distribution includes a number of items contributed by the user community. These are not inherently a part of the shell, and some may not be available in every zsh installation. The most significant of these are documented here. For documentation on other contributed items such as shell functions, look for comments in the function source files.
The key sequence ESC h
is normally bound by ZLE to execute the
run-help
widget (see
Zsh Line Editor). This invokes the run-help
command with the command word from the
current input line as its argument. By default, run-help
is an alias
for the man
command, so this often fails when the command word is a
shell builtin or a user-defined function. By redefining the run-help
alias, one can improve the on-line help provided by the shell.
The helpfiles
utility, found in the Util
directory of the
distribution, is a Perl program that can be used to process the zsh manual
to produce a separate help file for each shell builtin and for many other
shell features as well. The autoloadable run-help
function, found in
Functions/Misc
, searches for these helpfiles and performs several
other tests to produce the most complete help possible for the command.
Help files are installed by default to a subdirectory of /usr/share/zsh
or /usr/local/share/zsh
.
To create your own help files with helpfiles
, choose or create a
directory where the individual command help files will reside. For
example, you might choose ~/zsh_help
. If you unpacked the zsh
distribution in your home directory, you would use the commands:
mkdir ~/zsh_help perl ~/zsh-5.9/Util/helpfiles ~/zsh_help
The HELPDIR
parameter tells run-help
where to look for the help
files. When unset, it uses the default installation path.
To use your own set of help files, set this to the appropriate path
in one of your startup files:
HELPDIR=~/zsh_help
To use the run-help
function, you need to add lines something
like the following to your .zshrc
or equivalent startup file:
unalias run-help autoload run-help
Note that in order for ‘autoload run-help
’ to work, the run-help
file must be in one of the directories named in your fpath
array (see
Parameters Used By The Shell). This should already be the case if you have a standard zsh
installation; if it is not, copy Functions/Misc/run-help
to an
appropriate directory.
If you frequently edit your zsh functions, or periodically update your zsh
installation to track the latest developments, you may find that function
digests compiled with the zcompile
builtin are frequently out of date
with respect to the function source files. This is not usually a problem,
because zsh always looks for the newest file when loading a function, but
it may cause slower shell startup and function loading. Also, if a digest
file is explicitly used as an element of fpath
, zsh won’t check whether
any of its source files has changed.
The zrecompile
autoloadable function, found in Functions/Misc
, can
be used to keep function digests up to date.
zrecompile
[ -qt
] [ name ... ] ¶zrecompile
[ -qt
] -p
arg ... [ -
-
arg ... ]This tries to find *.zwc
files and automatically re-compile them if at
least one of the original files is newer than the compiled file. This
works only if the names stored in the compiled files are full paths or are
relative to the directory that contains the .zwc
file.
In the first form, each name is the name of a compiled file or a
directory containing *.zwc
files that should be checked. If no
arguments are given, the directories and *.zwc
files in fpath
are
used.
When -t
is given, no compilation is performed, but a return status of
zero (true) is set if there are files that need to be re-compiled and
non-zero (false) otherwise. The -q
option quiets the chatty output
that describes what zrecompile
is doing.
Without the -t
option, the return status is zero if all files that
needed re-compilation could be compiled and non-zero if compilation for at
least one of the files failed.
If the -p
option is given, the args are interpreted as one
or more sets of arguments for zcompile
, separated by ‘-
-
’.
For example:
zrecompile -p \ -R ~/.zshrc -- \ -M ~/.zcompdump -- \ ~/zsh/comp.zwc ~/zsh/Completion/*/_*
This compiles ~/.zshrc
into ~/.zshrc.zwc
if that doesn’t exist or
if it is older than ~/.zshrc
. The compiled file will be marked for
reading instead of mapping. The same is done for ~/.zcompdump
and
~/.zcompdump.zwc
, but this compiled file is marked for mapping. The
last line re-creates the file ~/zsh/comp.zwc
if any of the files
matching the given pattern is newer than it.
Without the -p
option, zrecompile
does not create function digests
that do not already exist, nor does it add new functions to the digest.
The following shell loop is an example of a method for creating function
digests for all functions in your fpath
, assuming that you have write
permission to the directories:
for ((i=1; i <= $#fpath; ++i)); do dir=$fpath[i] zwc=${dir:t}.zwc if [[ $dir == (.|..) || $dir == (.|..)/* ]]; then continue fi files=($dir/*(N-.)) if [[ -w $dir:h && -n $files ]]; then files=(${${(M)files%/*/*}#/}) if ( cd $dir:h && zrecompile -p -U -z $zwc $files ); then fpath[i]=$fpath[i].zwc fi fi done
The -U
and -z
options are appropriate for functions in the default
zsh installation fpath
; you may need to use different options for your
personal function directories.
Once the digests have been created and your fpath
modified to refer to
them, you can keep them up to date by running zrecompile
with no
arguments.
The large number of possible combinations of keyboards, workstations,
terminals, emulators, and window systems makes it impossible for zsh to
have built-in key bindings for every situation. The zkbd
utility,
found in Functions/Misc
, can help you quickly create key bindings for your
configuration.
Run zkbd
either as an autoloaded function, or as a shell script:
zsh -f ~/zsh-5.9/Functions/Misc/zkbd
When you run zkbd
, it first asks you to enter your terminal type; if
the default it offers is correct, just press return. It then asks you to
press a number of different keys to determine characteristics of your
keyboard and terminal; zkbd
warns you if it finds anything out of the
ordinary, such as a Delete key that sends neither ^H
nor ^?
.
The keystrokes read by zkbd
are recorded as a definition for an
associative array named key
, written to a file in the subdirectory
.zkbd
within either your HOME
or ZDOTDIR
directory. The name
of the file is composed from the TERM
, VENDOR
and OSTYPE
parameters, joined by hyphens.
You may read this file into your .zshrc
or another startup file with
the ‘source
’ or ‘.
’ commands, then reference the key
parameter
in bindkey commands, like this:
source ${ZDOTDIR:-$HOME}/.zkbd/$TERM-$VENDOR-$OSTYPE [[ -n ${key[Left]} ]] && bindkey "${key[Left]}" backward-char [[ -n ${key[Right]} ]] && bindkey "${key[Right]}" forward-char # etc.
Note that in order for ‘autoload zkbd
’ to work, the zkdb
file must
be in one of the directories named in your fpath
array (see
Parameters Used By The Shell). This should already be the case if you have a standard zsh
installation; if it is not, copy Functions/Misc/zkbd
to an
appropriate directory.
Occasionally you may encounter what appears to be a bug in the shell, particularly if you are using a beta version of zsh or a development release. Usually it is sufficient to send a description of the problem to one of the zsh mailing lists (see Mailing Lists), but sometimes one of the zsh developers will need to recreate your environment in order to track the problem down.
The script named reporter
, found in the Util
directory of the
distribution, is provided for this purpose. (It is also possible to
autoload reporter
, but reporter
is not installed in fpath
by default.) This script outputs a detailed dump of the shell state,
in the form of another script that can be read with ‘zsh -f
’ to
recreate that state.
To use reporter
, read the script into your shell with the ‘.
’
command and redirect the output into a file:
. ~/zsh-5.9/Util/reporter > zsh.report
You should check the zsh.report
file for any sensitive information
such as passwords and delete them by hand before sending the script to the
developers. Also, as the output can be voluminous, it’s best to wait for
the developers to ask for this information before sending it.
You can also use reporter
to dump only a subset of the shell state.
This is sometimes useful for creating startup files for the first time.
Most of the output from reporter is far more detailed than usually is
necessary for a startup file, but the aliases
, options
, and
zstyles
states may be useful because they include only changes from
the defaults. The bindings
state may be useful if you have created
any of your own keymaps, because reporter
arranges to dump the keymap
creation commands as well as the bindings for every keymap.
As is usual with automated tools, if you create a startup file with
reporter
, you should edit the results to remove unnecessary commands.
Note that if you’re using the new completion system, you should not
dump the functions
state to your startup files with reporter
; use
the compdump
function instead (see
Completion System).
reporter
[ state ... ] ¶Print to standard output the indicated subset of the current shell state. The state arguments may be one or more of:
all
Output everything listed below.
aliases
Output alias definitions.
bindings
Output ZLE key maps and bindings.
completion
Output old-style compctl
commands.
New completion is covered by functions
and zstyles
.
functions
Output autoloads and function definitions.
limits
Output limit
commands.
options
Output setopt
commands.
styles
Same as zstyles
.
variables
Output shell parameter assignments, plus export
commands for any environment variables.
zstyles
Output zstyle
commands.
If the state is omitted, all
is assumed.
With the exception of ‘all
’, every state can be abbreviated by
any prefix, even a single letter; thus a
is the same as aliases
,
z
is the same as zstyles
, etc.
add-zsh-hook
[ -L
| -dD
] [ -Uzk
] hook function ¶Several functions are special to the shell, as described in the section
Special Functions, Functions,
in that they are automatically called at specific points during shell execution.
Each has an associated array consisting of names of functions to be
called at the same point; these are so-called ‘hook functions’.
The shell function add-zsh-hook
provides a simple way of adding or
removing functions from the array.
hook is one of chpwd
, periodic
, precmd
, preexec
,
zshaddhistory
, zshexit
, or zsh_directory_name
,
the special functions in question. Note that zsh_directory_name
is called in a different way from the other functions, but may
still be manipulated as a hook.
function is name of an ordinary shell function. If no options are given this will be added to the array of functions to be executed in the given context. Functions are invoked in the order they were added.
If the option -L
is given, the current values for the hook arrays
are listed with typeset
.
If the option -d
is given, the function is removed from
the array of functions to be executed.
If the option -D
is given, the function is treated as a pattern
and any matching names of functions are removed from the array of
functions to be executed.
The options -U
, -z
and -k
are passed as arguments to
autoload
for function. For functions contributed with zsh, the
options -Uz
are appropriate.
add-zle-hook-widget
[ -L
| -dD
] [ -Uzk
] hook widgetname ¶Several widget names are special to the line editor, as described in the section
Special Widgets, Zle Widgets,
in that they are automatically called at specific points during editing.
Unlike function hooks, these do not use a predefined array of other names
to call at the same point; the shell function add-zle-hook-widget
maintains a similar array and arranges for the special widget to invoke
those additional widgets.
hook is one of isearch-exit
, isearch-update
,
line-pre-redraw
, line-init
, line-finish
, history-line-set
,
or keymap-select
, corresponding to each of the special widgets
zle-isearch-exit
, etc. The special widget names are also accepted
as the hook argument.
widgetname is the name of a ZLE widget. If no options are given this is added to the array of widgets to be invoked in the given hook context. Widgets are invoked in the order they were added, with
zle
widgetname-Nw -f "nolast" -- "$@"
Note that this means that the ‘WIDGET
’ special parameter tracks the
widgetname when the widget function is called, rather than tracking
the name of the corresponding special hook widget.
If the option -d
is given, the widgetname is removed from
the array of widgets to be executed.
If the option -D
is given, the widgetname is treated as a pattern
and any matching names of widgets are removed from the array.
If widgetname does not name an existing widget when added to the
array, it is assumed that a shell function also named widgetname is
meant to provide the implementation of the widget. This name is therefore
marked for autoloading, and the options -U
, -z
and -k
are
passed as arguments to autoload
as with add-zsh-hook
. The
widget is also created with ‘zle -N
widgetname’ to cause the
corresponding function to be loaded the first time the hook is called.
The arrays of widgetname are currently maintained in zstyle
contexts, one for each hook context, with a style of ‘widgets
’.
If the -L
option is given, this set of styles is listed with
‘zstyle -L
’. This implementation may change, and the special widgets
that refer to the styles are created only if add-zle-hook-widget
is
called to add at least one widget, so if this function is used for any
hooks, then all hooks should be managed only via this function.
The function cdr
allows you to change the working directory to a
previous working directory from a list maintained automatically. It is
similar in concept to the directory stack controlled by the pushd
,
popd
and dirs
builtins, but is more configurable, and as it stores
all entries in files it is maintained across sessions and (by default)
between terminal emulators in the current session. Duplicates are
automatically removed, so that the list reflects the single most recent
use of each directory.
Note that the pushd
directory stack is not actually modified or used
by cdr
unless you configure it to do so as described in the
configuration section below.
The system works by means of a hook function that is called every time the
directory changes. To install the system, autoload the required functions
and use the add-zsh-hook
function described above:
autoload -Uz chpwd_recent_dirs cdr add-zsh-hook add-zsh-hook chpwd chpwd_recent_dirs
Now every time you change directly interactively, no matter which command you use, the directory to which you change will be remembered in most-recent-first order.
All direct user interaction is via the cdr
function.
The argument to cdr is a number N corresponding to the Nth most
recently changed-to directory. 1 is the immediately preceding directory;
the current directory is remembered but is not offered as a destination.
Note that if you have multiple windows open 1 may refer to a directory
changed to in another window; you can avoid this by having per-terminal
files for storing directory as described for the
recent-dirs-file
style below.
If you set the recent-dirs-default
style described below cdr
will behave the same as cd
if given a non-numeric argument, or more
than one argument. The recent directory list is updated just the same
however you change directory.
If the argument is omitted, 1 is assumed. This is similar to pushd
’s
behaviour of swapping the two most recent directories on the stack.
Completion for the argument to cdr
is available if compinit has been
run; menu selection is recommended, using:
zstyle ':completion:*:*:cdr:*:*' menu selection
to allow you to cycle through recent directories; the order is preserved, so the first choice is the most recent directory before the current one. The verbose style is also recommended to ensure the directory is shown; this style is on by default so no action is required unless you have changed it.
The behaviour of cdr
may be modified by the following options.
-l
lists the numbers and the corresponding directories in
abbreviated form (i.e. with ~
substitution reapplied), one per line.
The directories here are not quoted (this would only be an issue if a
directory name contained a newline). This is used by the completion
system.
-r
sets the variable reply
to the current set of directories. Nothing
is printed and the directory is not changed.
-e
allows you to edit the list of directories, one per line. The
list can be edited to any extent you like; no sanity checking is
performed. Completion is available. No quoting is necessary (except for
newlines, where I have in any case no sympathy); directories are in
unabbreviated form and contain an absolute path, i.e. they start with /
.
Usually the first entry should be left as the current directory.
-p '
pattern'
Prunes any items in the directory list that match the given extended glob
pattern; the pattern needs to be quoted from immediate expansion on the
command line. The pattern is matched against each completely expanded
file name in the list; the full string must match, so wildcards at the
end (e.g. '*removeme*'
) are needed to remove entries with a given
substring.
If output is to a terminal, then the function will print the new list
after pruning and prompt for confirmation by the user. This output and
confirmation step can be skipped by using -P
instead of -p
.
Configuration is by means of the styles mechanism that should be familiar
from completion; if not, see the description of the zstyle
command in
The zsh/zutil Module. The context for setting styles
should be ':chpwd:*'
in case the meaning of the context is extended in
future, for example:
zstyle ':chpwd:*' recent-dirs-max 0
sets the value of the recent-dirs-max
style to 0. In practice the
style name is specific enough that a context of ’*’ should be fine.
An exception is recent-dirs-insert
, which is used exclusively by the
completion system and so has the usual completion system context
(':completion:*'
if nothing more specific is needed), though again
'*'
should be fine in practice.
recent-dirs-default
If true, and the command is expecting a recent directory index, and either there is more than one argument or the argument is not an integer, then fall through to "cd". This allows the lazy to use only one command for directory changing. Completion recognises this, too; see recent-dirs-insert for how to control completion when this option is in use.
recent-dirs-file
The file where the list of directories is saved. The default
is ${ZDOTDIR:-$HOME}/.chpwd-recent-dirs
, i.e. this is in your
home directory unless you have set the variable ZDOTDIR
to point
somewhere else. Directory names are saved in $'
...'
quoted
form, so each line in the file can be supplied directly to the shell as an
argument.
The value of this style may be an array. In this case, the first
file in the list will always be used for saving directories while any
other files are left untouched. When reading the recent directory
list, if there are fewer than the maximum number of entries in the
first file, the contents of later files in the array will be appended
with duplicates removed from the list shown. The contents of the two
files are not sorted together, i.e. all the entries in the first file
are shown first. The special value +
can appear in the list to
indicate the default file should be read at that point. This allows
effects like the following:
zstyle ':chpwd:*' recent-dirs-file \ ~/.chpwd-recent-dirs-${TTY##*/} +
Recent directories are read from a file numbered according to the terminal. If there are insufficient entries the list is supplemented from the default file.
It is possible to use zstyle -e
to make the directory configurable
at run time:
zstyle -e ':chpwd:*' recent-dirs-file pick-recent-dirs-file pick-recent-dirs-file() { if [[ $PWD = ~/text/writing(|/*) ]]; then reply=(~/.chpwd-recent-dirs-writing) else reply=(+) fi }
In this example, if the current directory is ~/text/writing
or a
directory under it, then use a special file for saving recent
directories, else use the default.
recent-dirs-insert
Used by completion. If recent-dirs-default
is true, then setting
this to true
causes the actual directory, rather than its index, to
be inserted on the command line; this has the same effect as using
the corresponding index, but makes the history clearer and the line
easier to edit. With this setting, if part of an argument was
already typed, normal directory completion rather than recent
directory completion is done; this is because recent directory
completion is expected to be done by cycling through entries menu
fashion.
If the value of the style is always
, then only recent directories will
be completed; in that case, use the cd
command when you want to
complete other directories.
If the value is fallback
, recent directories will be tried first, then
normal directory completion is performed if recent directory completion
failed to find a match.
Finally, if the value is both
then both sets of completions are
presented; the usual tag mechanism can be used to distinguish results, with
recent directories tagged as recent-dirs
. Note that the recent
directories inserted are abbreviated with directory names where appropriate.
recent-dirs-max
The maximum number of directories to save to the file. If this is zero or negative there is no maximum. The default is 20. Note this includes the current directory, which isn’t offered, so the highest number of directories you will be offered is one less than the maximum.
recent-dirs-prune
This style is an array determining what directories should (or should not) be added to the recent list. Elements of the array can include:
parent
Prune parents (more accurately, ancestors) from the recent list. If present, changing directly down by any number of directories causes the current directory to be overwritten. For example, changing from ~pws to ~pws/some/other/dir causes ~pws not to be left on the recent directory stack. This only applies to direct changes to descendant directories; earlier directories on the list are not pruned. For example, changing from ~pws/yet/another to ~pws/some/other/dir does not cause ~pws to be pruned.
pattern:
patternGives a zsh pattern for directories that should not be
added to the recent list (if not already there). This element
can be repeated to add different patterns. For example,
'pattern:/tmp(|/*)'
stops /tmp
or its descendants
from being added. The EXTENDED_GLOB
option is always turned on
for these patterns.
recent-dirs-pushd
If set to true, cdr
will use pushd
instead of cd
to change the
directory, so the directory is saved on the directory stack. As the
directory stack is completely separate from the list of files saved
by the mechanism used in this file there is no obvious reason to do
this.
It is possible to refer to recent directories using the dynamic directory
name syntax by using the supplied function zsh_directory_name_cdr
a hook:
autoload -Uz add-zsh-hook add-zsh-hook -Uz zsh_directory_name zsh_directory_name_cdr
When this is done, ~[1]
will refer to the most recent
directory other than $PWD, and so on. Completion after ~[
...
also works.
This section is for the curious or confused; most users will not need to know this information.
Recent directories are saved to a file immediately and hence are preserved across sessions. Note currently no file locking is applied: the list is updated immediately on interactive commands and nowhere else (unlike history), and it is assumed you are only going to change directory in one window at once. This is not safe on shared accounts, but in any case the system has limited utility when someone else is changing to a different set of directories behind your back.
To make this a little safer, only directory changes instituted from the
command line, either directly or indirectly through shell function calls
(but not through subshells, evals, traps, completion functions and the
like) are saved. Shell functions should use cd -q
or pushd -q
to
avoid side effects if the change to the directory is to be invisible at the
command line. See the contents of the function chpwd_recent_dirs
for
more details.
The dynamic directory naming system is described in the subsection
Dynamic named directories of
Filename Expansion. In this, a reference to
~[
...]
is expanded by a function found by the hooks
mechanism.
The contributed function zsh_directory_name_generic
provides a
system allowing the user to refer to directories with only a limited
amount of new code. It supports all three of the standard interfaces
for directory naming: converting from a name to a directory, converting
in the reverse direction to find a short name, and completion of names.
The main feature of this function is a path-like syntax, combining abbreviations at multiple levels separated by ":". As an example, ~[g:p:s] might specify:
g
The top level directory for your git area. This first component has to match, or the function will return indicating another directory name hook function should be tried.
p
The name of a project within your git area.
s
The source area within that project.
This allows you to collapse references to long hierarchies to a very compact form, particularly if the hierarchies are similar across different areas of the disk.
Name components may be completed: if a description is shown at the top of the list of completions, it includes the path to which previous components expand, while the description for an individual completion shows the path segment it would add. No additional configuration is needed for this as the completion system is aware of the dynamic directory name mechanism.
To use the function, first define a wrapper function for your specific case. We’ll assume it’s to be autoloaded. This can have any name but we’ll refer to it as zdn_mywrapper. This wrapper function will define various variables and then call this function with the same arguments that the wrapper function gets. This configuration is described below.
Then arrange for the wrapper to be run as a zsh_directory_name hook:
autoload -Uz add-zsh-hook zsh_directory_name_generic zdn_mywrapper add-zsh-hook -U zsh_directory_name zdn_mywrapper
The wrapper function should define a local associative array zdn_top.
Alternatively, this can be set with a style called mapping
. The
context for the style is :zdn:
wrapper-name where
wrapper-name is the function calling zsh_directory_name_generic;
for example:
zstyle :zdn:zdn_mywrapper: mapping zdn_mywrapper_top
The keys in this associative array correspond to the first component of
the name. The values are matching directories. They may have an
optional suffix with a slash followed by a colon and the name of a
variable in the same format to give the next component. (The slash
before the colon is to disambiguate the case where a colon is needed in
the path for a drive. There is otherwise no syntax for escaping this,
so path components whose names start with a colon are not supported.) A
special component :default:
specifies a variable in the form
/:
var (the path section is ignored and so is usually empty)
that will be used for the next component if no variable is given for the
path. Variables referred to within zdn_top
have the same format as
zdn_top
itself, but contain relative paths.
For example,
local -A zdn_top=( g ~/git ga ~/alternate/git gs /scratch/$USER/git/:second2 :default: /:second1 )
This specifies the behaviour of a directory referred to as ~[g:...]
or ~[ga:...]
or ~[gs:...]
. Later path components are optional;
in that case ~[g]
expands to ~/git
, and so on. gs
expands
to /scratch/$USER/git
and uses the associative array second2
to
match the second component; g
and ga
use the associative array
second1
to match the second component.
When expanding a name to a directory, if the first component is not g
or
ga
or gs
, it is not an error; the function simply returns 1 so that a
later hook function can be tried. However, matching the first component
commits the function, so if a later component does not match, an error
is printed (though this still does not stop later hooks from being
executed).
For components after the first, a relative path is expected, but note that
multiple levels may still appear. Here is an example of second1
:
local -A second1=( p myproject s somproject os otherproject/subproject/:third )
The path as found from zdn_top
is extended with the matching
directory, so ~[g:p]
becomes ~/git/myproject
. The slash between
is added automatically (it’s not possible to have a later component
modify the name of a directory already matched). Only os
specifies
a variable for a third component, and there’s no :default:
, so it’s
an error to use a name like ~[g:p:x]
or ~[ga:s:y]
because
there’s nowhere to look up the x
or y
.
The associative arrays need to be visible within this function; the
generic function therefore uses internal variable names beginning
_zdn_
in order to avoid clashes. Note that the variable reply
needs to be passed back to the shell, so should not be local in the
calling function.
The function does not test whether directories assembled by component actually exist; this allows the system to work across automounted file systems. The error from the command trying to use a non-existent directory should be sufficient to indicate the problem.
Here is a full fictitious but usable autoloadable definition of the
example function defined by the code above. So ~[gs:p:s]
expands
to /scratch/$USER/git/myscratchproject/top/srcdir
(with $USER
also expanded).
local -A zdn_top=( g ~/git ga ~/alternate/git gs /scratch/$USER/git/:second2 :default: /:second1 ) local -A second1=( p myproject s somproject os otherproject/subproject/:third ) local -A second2=( p myscratchproject s somescratchproject ) local -A third=( s top/srcdir d top/documentation ) # autoload not needed if you did this at initialisation... autoload -Uz zsh_directory_name_generic zsh_directory_name_generic "$@
It is also possible to use global associative arrays, suitably named, and set the style for the context of your wrapper function to refer to this. Then your set up code would contain the following:
typeset -A zdn_mywrapper_top=(...) # ... and so on for other associative arrays ... zstyle ':zdn:zdn_mywrapper:' mapping zdn_mywrapper_top autoload -Uz add-zsh-hook zsh_directory_name_generic zdn_mywrapper add-zsh-hook -U zsh_directory_name zdn_mywrapper
and the function zdn_mywrapper
would contain only the following:
zsh_directory_name_generic "$@"
In a lot of cases, it is nice to automatically retrieve information from version control systems (VCSs), such as subversion, CVS or git, to be able to provide it to the user; possibly in the user’s prompt. So that you can instantly tell which branch you are currently on, for example.
In order to do that, you may use the vcs_info
function.
The following VCSs are supported, showing the abbreviated name by which they are referred to within the system:
bzr
)cdv
)cvs
)darcs
)fossil
)git
)tla
)hg
)mtn
)p4
)svn
)svk
)There is also support for the patch management system quilt
(https://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
). See
Quilt Support
below for details.
To load vcs_info
:
autoload -Uz vcs_info
It can be used in any existing prompt, because it does not require any
specific $psvar
entries to be available.
To get this feature working quickly (including colors), you can do the
following (assuming, you loaded vcs_info
properly - see above):
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' actionformats \ '%F{5}(%f%s%F{5})%F{3}-%F{5}[%F{2}%b%F{3}|%F{1}%a%F{5}]%f ' zstyle ':vcs_info:*' formats \ '%F{5}(%f%s%F{5})%F{3}-%F{5}[%F{2}%b%F{5}]%f ' zstyle ':vcs_info:(sv[nk]|bzr):*' branchformat '%b%F{1}:%F{3}%r' precmd () { vcs_info } PS1='%F{5}[%F{2}%n%F{5}] %F{3}%3~ ${vcs_info_msg_0_}%f%# '
Obviously, the last two lines are there for demonstration. You need to
call vcs_info
from your precmd
function. Once that is done you need
a single quoted '${vcs_info_msg_0_}'
in your prompt.
To be able to use '${vcs_info_msg_0_}'
directly in your prompt like
this, you will need to have the PROMPT_SUBST
option enabled.
Now call the vcs_info_printsys
utility from the command line:
% vcs_info_printsys ## list of supported version control backends: ## disabled systems are prefixed by a hash sign (#) bzr cdv cvs darcs fossil git hg mtn p4 svk svn tla ## flavours (cannot be used in the enable or disable styles; they ## are enabled and disabled with their master [git-svn -> git]) ## they *can* be used in contexts: ':vcs_info:git-svn:*'. git-p4 git-svn hg-git hg-hgsubversion hg-hgsvn
You may not want all of these because there is no point in running the code to detect systems you do not use. So there is a way to disable some backends altogether:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' disable bzr cdv darcs mtn svk tla
You may also pick a few from that list and enable only those:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' enable git cvs svn
If you rerun vcs_info_printsys
after one of these commands, you will
see the backends listed in the disable
style (or backends not in the
enable
style - if you used that) marked as disabled by a hash sign.
That means the detection of these systems is skipped completely. No
wasted time there.
The vcs_info
feature can be configured via zstyle
.
First, the context in which we are working:
:vcs_info:vcs-string:user-context:repo-root-name
is one of: git
, git-svn
, git-p4
, hg
, hg-git
,
hg-hgsubversion
, hg-hgsvn
, darcs
, bzr
, cdv
, mtn
,
svn
, cvs
, svk
, tla
, p4
or fossil
.
This is followed by ‘.quilt-
quilt-mode’ in Quilt mode
(see Quilt Support for details)
and by ‘+
hook-name’ while hooks are active
(see Hooks in vcs_info for details).
Currently, hooks in quilt mode don’t add the ‘.quilt-
quilt-mode’ information.
This may change in the future.
is a freely configurable string, assignable by
the user as the first argument to vcs_info
(see its description
below).
is the name of a repository in which you want a
style to match. So, if you want a setting specific to /usr/src/zsh
,
with that being a CVS checkout, you can set repo-root-name to
zsh
to make it so.
There are three special values for vcs-string: The first is named
-init-
, that is in effect as long as there was no decision what VCS
backend to use. The second is -preinit-
; it is used before
vcs_info
is run, when initializing the data exporting variables. The
third special value is formats
and is used by the vcs_info_lastmsg
for looking up its styles.
The initial value of repo-root-name is -all-
and it is replaced
with the actual name, as soon as it is known. Only use this part of the
context for defining the formats
, actionformats
or
branchformat
styles, as it is guaranteed that repo-root-name is
set up correctly for these only. For all other styles, just use '*'
instead.
There are two pre-defined values for user-context:
default
the one used if none is specified
command
used by vcs_info_lastmsg to lookup its styles
You can of course use ':vcs_info:*'
to match all VCSs in all
user-contexts at once.
This is a description of all styles that are looked up.
formats
¶A list of formats, used when actionformats is not used (which is most of the time).
actionformats
¶A list of formats, used if there is a special action going on in your current repository; like an interactive rebase or a merge conflict.
branchformat
¶Some backends replace %b
in the formats and
actionformats styles above, not only by a branch name but also by a
revision number. This style lets you modify how that string should look.
nvcsformats
¶These "formats" are set when we didn’t detect a version control system
for the current directory or vcs_info
was disabled. This is useful if
you want vcs_info
to completely take over the generation of your
prompt. You would do something like PS1='${vcs_info_msg_0_}'
to
accomplish that.
hgrevformat
¶hg
uses both a hash and a revision number to reference a specific
changeset in a repository. With this style you can format the revision
string (see branchformat
) to include either or both. It’s only
useful when get-revision
is true. Note, the full 40-character revision id
is not available (except when using the use-simple
option) because
executing hg more than once per prompt is too slow; you may customize this
behavior using hooks.
max-exports
¶Defines the maximum number of
vcs_info_msg_*_
variables vcs_info
will set.
enable
¶A list of backends you want to use. Checked in the -init-
context. If
this list contains an item called NONE
no backend is used at all and
vcs_info
will do nothing. If this list contains ALL
, vcs_info
will use all known backends. Only with ALL
in enable
will the
disable
style have any effect. ALL
and NONE
are case insensitive.
disable
¶A list of VCSs you don’t want vcs_info
to test for
repositories (checked in the -init-
context, too). Only used if
enable
contains ALL
.
disable-patterns
¶A list of patterns that are checked against $PWD
. If a pattern
matches, vcs_info
will be disabled. This style is checked in the
:vcs_info:-init-:*:-all-
context.
Say, ~/.zsh
is a directory under version control, in which you do
not want vcs_info
to be active, do:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' disable-patterns "${(b)HOME}/.zsh(|/*)"
use-quilt
¶If enabled, the quilt
support code is active in ‘addon’ mode.
See Quilt Support for details.
quilt-standalone
¶If enabled, ‘standalone’ mode detection is attempted if no VCS is active in a given directory. See Quilt Support for details.
quilt-patch-dir
¶Overwrite the value of the $QUILT_PATCHES
environment variable. See
Quilt Support for details.
quiltcommand
¶When quilt
itself is called in quilt support, the value of this style
is used as the command name.
check-for-changes
¶If enabled, this style causes the %c
and %u
format escapes to show
when the working directory has uncommitted changes. The strings displayed by
these escapes can be controlled via the stagedstr
and unstagedstr
styles. The only backends that currently support this option are git
,
hg
, and bzr
(the latter two only support unstaged).
For this style to be evaluated with the hg
backend, the get-revision
style needs to be set and the use-simple
style needs to be unset. The
latter is the default; the former is not.
With the bzr
backend, lightweight checkouts only honor this style if
the use-server
style is set.
Note, the actions taken if this style is enabled are potentially expensive (read: they may be slow, depending on how big the current repository is). Therefore, it is disabled by default.
check-for-staged-changes
¶This style is like check-for-changes
, but it never checks the worktree
files, only the metadata in the .${vcs}
dir. Therefore,
this style initializes only the %c
escape (with stagedstr
) but
not the %u
escape. This style is faster than check-for-changes
.
In the git
backend, this style checks for changes in the index.
Other backends do not currently implement this style.
This style is disabled by default.
stagedstr
¶This string will be used in the %c
escape if there are staged changes in
the repository.
unstagedstr
¶This string will be used in the %u
escape if there are unstaged changes
in the repository.
command
¶This style causes vcs_info
to use the supplied string as the command
to use as the VCS’s binary. Note, that setting this in ’:vcs_info:*
’ is
not a good idea.
If the value of this style is empty (which is the default), the used binary
name is the name of the backend in use (e.g. svn
is used in an svn
repository).
The repo-root-name
part in the context is always the default -all-
when this style is looked up.
For example, this style can be used to use binaries from non-default
installation directories. Assume, git
is installed in /usr/bin but
your sysadmin installed a newer version in /usr/local/bin. Instead of
changing the order of your $PATH
parameter, you can do this:
zstyle ':vcs_info:git:*:-all-' command /usr/local/bin/git
use-server
¶This is used by the Perforce backend (p4
) to decide if it should
contact the Perforce server to find out if a directory is managed
by Perforce. This is the only reliable way of doing this, but runs
the risk of a delay if the server name cannot be found. If the
server (more specifically, the host:
port pair describing the
server) cannot be contacted, its name is put into the associative array
vcs_info_p4_dead_servers
and is not contacted again during the session
until it is removed by hand. If you do not set this style, the p4
backend is only usable if you have set the environment variable
P4CONFIG
to a file name and have corresponding files in the root
directories of each Perforce client. See comments in the function
VCS_INFO_detect_p4
for more detail.
The Bazaar backend (bzr
) uses this to permit contacting the server
about lightweight checkouts, see the check-for-changes
style.
use-simple
¶If there are two different ways of gathering
information, you can select the simpler one by setting this style to true;
the default is to use the not-that-simple code, which is potentially a lot
slower but might be more accurate in all possible cases. This style is
used by the bzr
, hg
, and git
backends. In the case of hg
it will invoke
the external hexdump program to parse the binary dirstate cache file; this
method will not return the local revision number.
get-revision
¶If set to true, vcs_info goes the extra mile to figure out the revision of
a repository’s work tree (currently for the git
and hg
backends,
where this kind of information is not always vital). For git
, the
hash value of the currently checked out commit is available via the %i
expansion. With hg
, the local revision number and the corresponding
global hash are available via %i
.
get-mq
¶If set to true, the hg
backend will look for a Mercurial Queue (mq
)
patch directory. Information will be available via the ‘%m
’ replacement.
get-bookmarks
¶If set to true, the hg
backend will try to get a list of current
bookmarks. They will be available via the ‘%m
’ replacement.
The default is to generate a comma-separated list of all bookmark names that refer to the currently checked out revision. If a bookmark is active, its name is suffixed an asterisk and placed first in the list.
use-prompt-escapes
¶Determines if we assume that the assembled
string from vcs_info
includes prompt escapes. (Used by
vcs_info_lastmsg
.)
debug
¶Enable debugging output to track possible problems. Currently this style
is only used by vcs_info
’s hooks system.
hooks
¶A list style that defines hook-function names. See Hooks in vcs_info below for details.
patch-format
¶nopatch-format
This pair of styles format the patch information used by the %m
expando in
formats and actionformats for the git
and hg
backends. The value is
subject to certain %
-expansions described below.
The expanded value is made available in the global backend_misc
array as
${backend_misc[patches]}
(also if a set-patch-format
hook is used).
get-unapplied
¶This boolean style controls whether a backend should attempt to gather a list of unapplied patches (for example with Mercurial Queue patches).
Used by the quilt
, hg
, and git
backends.
The default values for these styles in all contexts are:
formats
" (%s)-[%b]%u%c-"
actionformats
" (%s)-[%b|%a]%u%c-"
branchformat
"%b:%r" (for bzr, svn, svk and hg)
nvcsformats
""
hgrevformat
"%r:%h"
max-exports
2
enable
ALL
disable
(empty list)
disable-patterns
(empty list)
check-for-changes
false
check-for-staged-changes
false
stagedstr
(string: "S")
unstagedstr
(string: "U")
command
(empty string)
use-server
false
use-simple
false
get-revision
false
get-mq
true
get-bookmarks
false
use-prompt-escapes
true
debug
false
hooks
(empty list)
use-quilt
false
quilt-standalone
false
quilt-patch-dir
empty - use $QUILT_PATCHES
quiltcommand
quilt
patch-format
backend dependent
nopatch-format
backend dependent
get-unapplied
false
In normal formats
and actionformats
the following replacements are
done:
%s
The VCS in use (git, hg, svn, etc.).
%b
Information about the current branch.
%a
An identifier that describes the action. Only makes sense in
actionformats
.
%i
The current revision number or identifier. For hg
the hgrevformat
style may be used to customize the output.
%c
The string from the stagedstr
style if there are staged
changes in the repository.
%u
The string from the unstagedstr
style if there are
unstaged changes in the repository.
%R
The base directory of the repository.
%r
The repository name. If %R
is /foo/bar/repoXY
, %r
is repoXY
.
%S
A subdirectory within a repository. If $PWD
is
/foo/bar/repoXY/beer/tasty
, %S
is beer/tasty
.
%m
A "misc" replacement. It is at the discretion of the backend to decide what this replacement expands to.
The hg
and git
backends use this expando to display patch information.
hg
sources patch information from the mq
extensions; git
from in-progress
rebase
and cherry-pick
operations and from the stgit
extension. The patch-format
and nopatch-format
styles control the generated string. The former is used
when at least one patch from the patch queue has been applied, and the latter
otherwise.
The hg
backend displays bookmark information in this expando (in addition
to mq
information). See the get-mq
and get-bookmarks
styles. Both
of these styles may be enabled at the same time. If both are enabled, both
resulting strings will be shown separated by a semicolon (that cannot currently
be customized).
The quilt
‘standalone’ backend sets this expando to the same value as the
%Q
expando.
%Q
Quilt series information.
When quilt is used (either in ‘addon’ mode or as a ‘standalone’ backend),
this expando is set to the quilt series’ patch-format
string.
The set-patch-format
hook and nopatch-format
style are honoured.
See Quilt Support below for details.
In branchformat
these replacements are done:
%b
The branch name. For hg
, the branch name can include a
topic name.
%r
The current revision number or the hgrevformat
style for
hg
.
In hgrevformat
these replacements are done:
%r
The current local revision number.
%h
The current global revision identifier.
In patch-format
and nopatch-format
these replacements are done:
%p
The name of the top-most applied patch; may be overridden by the applied-string
hook.
%u
The number of unapplied patches; may be overridden by the unapplied-string
hook.
%n
The number of applied patches.
%c
The number of unapplied patches.
%a
The number of all patches (%a = %n + %c
).
%g
The names of active mq
guards (hg
backend).
%G
The number of active mq
guards (hg
backend).
Not all VCS backends have to support all replacements. For nvcsformats
no replacements are performed at all, it is just a string.
If you want to use the %b
(bold off) prompt expansion in formats
,
which expands %b
itself, use %%b
. That will cause the vcs_info
expansion to replace %%b
with %b
, so that zsh’s prompt expansion
mechanism can handle it. Similarly, to hand down %b
from
branchformat
, use %%%%b
. Sorry for this inconvenience, but it
cannot be easily avoided. Luckily we do not clash with a lot of prompt
expansions and this only needs to be done for those.
When one of the gen-applied-string
, gen-unapplied-string
, and
set-patch-format
hooks is defined,
applying %
-escaping (‘foo=${foo//'%'/%%}
’) to the interpolated values
for use in the prompt is the responsibility of those hooks (jointly);
when neither of those hooks is defined, vcs_info
handles escaping by itself.
We regret this coupling, but it was required for backwards compatibility.
Quilt is not a version control system, therefore this is not implemented as a backend. It can help keeping track of a series of patches. People use it to keep a set of changes they want to use on top of software packages (which is tightly integrated into the package build process - the Debian project does this for a large number of packages). Quilt can also help individual developers keep track of their own patches on top of real version control systems.
The vcs_info
integration tries to support both ways of using quilt by
having two slightly different modes of operation: ‘addon’ mode and
‘standalone’ mode).
Quilt integration is off by default; to enable it, set the use-quilt
style,
and add %Q
to your formats
or actionformats
style:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' use-quilt true
Styles looked up from the Quilt support code include ‘.quilt-
quilt-mode’
in the vcs-string part of the context, where quilt-mode is either
addon
or standalone
.
Example: :vcs_info:git.quilt-addon:default:
repo-root-name.
For ‘addon’ mode to become active vcs_info
must have already detected a
real version control system controlling the directory. If that is the case,
a directory that holds quilt’s patches needs to be found. That directory is
configurable via the ‘QUILT_PATCHES
’ environment variable. If that
variable exists its value is used, otherwise the value ‘patches
’ is
assumed. The value from $QUILT_PATCHES
can be overwritten using the
‘quilt-patch-dir
’ style. (Note: you can use vcs_info
to keep the value
of $QUILT_PATCHES
correct all the time via the post-quilt
hook).
When the directory in question is found, quilt is assumed to be active. To
gather more information, vcs_info
looks for a directory called ‘.pc’;
Quilt uses that directory to track its current state. If this directory does
not exist we know that quilt has not done anything to the working directory
(read: no patches have been applied yet).
If patches are applied, vcs_info
will try to find out which. If you want
to know which patches of a series are not yet applied, you need to activate
the get-unapplied
style in the appropriate context.
vcs_info
allows for very detailed control over how the gathered
information is presented (see
Configuration and Hooks in vcs_info),
all of which are documented below. Note there are a number of
other patch tracking systems that work on top of a certain version control
system (like stgit
for git, or mq
for hg); the configuration
for systems like that are generally configured the same way as the quilt
support.
If the quilt support is working in ‘addon’ mode, the produced string is
available as a simple format replacement (%Q
to be precise), which can
be used in formats
and actionformats
; see below for details).
If, on the other hand, the support code is working in ‘standalone’ mode,
vcs_info
will pretend as if quilt
were an actual version control
system. That means that the version control system identifier (which
otherwise would be something like ‘svn’ or ‘cvs’) will be set to
‘-quilt-
’. This has implications on the used style context where this
identifier is the second element. vcs_info
will have filled in a proper
value for the "repository’s" root directory and the string containing the
information about quilt’s state will be available as the ‘misc’ replacement
(and %Q
for compatibility with ‘addon’ mode).
What is left to discuss is how ‘standalone’ mode is detected. The detection
itself is a series of searches for directories. You can have this detection
enabled all the time in every directory that is not otherwise under version
control. If you know there is only a limited set of trees where you would
like vcs_info
to try and look for Quilt in ‘standalone’ mode to minimise
the amount of searching on every call to vcs_info
, there are a number of
ways to do that:
Essentially, ‘standalone’ mode detection is controlled by a style called
‘quilt-standalone
’. It is a string style and its value can have different
effects. The simplest values are: ‘always
’ to run detection every time
vcs_info
is run, and ‘never
’ to turn the detection off entirely.
If the value of quilt-standalone
is something else, it is interpreted
differently. If the value is the name of a scalar variable the value of that
variable is checked and that value is used in the same ‘always’/‘never’ way
as described above.
If the value of quilt-standalone
is an array, the elements of that array
are used as directory names under which you want the detection to be active.
If quilt-standalone
is an associative array, the keys are taken as
directory names under which you want the detection to be active, but only if
the corresponding value is the string ‘true
’.
Last, but not least, if the value of quilt-standalone
is the name of a
function, the function is called without arguments and the return value
decides whether detection should be active. A ‘0’ return value is true; a
non-zero return value is interpreted as false.
Note, if there is both a function and a variable by the name of
quilt-standalone
, the function will take precedence.
vcs_info
[user-context] ¶The main function, that runs all backends and assembles all data into
${vcs_info_msg_*_}
. This is the function you want to call from
precmd
if you want to include up-to-date information in your prompt (see
Variable Description
below). If an argument is given, that string will be
used instead of default
in the user-context field of the style
context.
vcs_info_hookadd
¶Statically registers a number of functions to a given hook. The hook needs
to be given as the first argument; what follows is a list of hook-function
names to register to the hook. The ‘+vi-
’ prefix needs to be left out
here. See Hooks in vcs_info
below for details.
vcs_info_hookdel
¶Remove hook-functions from a given hook. The hook needs to be given as the
first non-option argument; what follows is a list of hook-function
names to un-register from the hook. If ‘-a
’ is used as the first
argument, all
occurrences of the functions are unregistered. Otherwise
only the last occurrence is removed (if a function was registered to a hook
more than once). The ‘+vi-
’ prefix needs to be left out here.
See Hooks in vcs_info
below for details.
vcs_info_lastmsg
¶Outputs the current values of ${vcs_info_msg_*_}
.
Takes into account the value of the use-prompt-escapes
style in
':vcs_info:formats:command:-all-'
. It also only prints max-exports
values.
vcs_info_printsys
[user-context] ¶Prints a list of all
supported version control systems. Useful to find out possible contexts
(and which of them are enabled) or values for the disable
style.
vcs_info_setsys
¶Initializes vcs_info
’s internal list of
available backends. With this function, you can add support for new VCSs
without restarting the shell.
All functions named VCS_INFO_*
are for internal use only.
${vcs_info_msg_
N_}
(Note the trailing underscore)Where N is an integer, e.g., vcs_info_msg_0_
. These variables
are the storage for the informational message the last vcs_info
call
has assembled. These are strongly connected to the formats
,
actionformats
and nvcsformats
styles described above. Those styles
are lists. The first member of that list gets expanded into
${vcs_info_msg_0_}
, the second into ${vcs_info_msg_1_}
and the Nth into ${vcs_info_msg_N-1_}
. (See the max-exports
style above.)
All variables named VCS_INFO_*
are for internal use only.
Hooks are places in vcs_info
where you can run your own code. That
code can communicate with the code that called it and through that,
change the system’s behaviour.
For configuration, hooks change the style context:
:vcs_info:vcs-string+hook-name:user-context:repo-root-name
To register functions to a hook, you need to list them in the hooks
style in the appropriate context.
Example:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*+foo:*' hooks bar baz
This registers functions to the hook ‘foo’ for all backends. In order to
avoid namespace problems, all registered function names are prepended by
a ‘+vi-
’, so the actual functions called for the ‘foo’ hook are
‘+vi-bar
’ and ‘+vi-baz
’.
If you would like to register a function to a hook regardless of the
current context, you may use the vcs_info_hookadd
function. To remove
a function that was added like that, the vcs_info_hookdel
function
can be used.
If something seems weird, you can enable the ‘debug’ boolean style in the proper context and the hook-calling code will print what it tried to execute and whether the function in question existed.
When you register more than one function to a hook, all functions are
executed one after another until one function returns non-zero or until
all functions have been called. Context-sensitive hook functions are
executed before
statically registered ones (the ones added by
vcs_info_hookadd
).
You may pass data between functions via an associative array, user_data
.
For example:
+vi-git-myfirsthook(){ user_data[myval]=$myval } +vi-git-mysecondhook(){ # do something with ${user_data[myval]} }
There are a number of variables that are special in hook contexts:
ret
The return value that the hooks system will return to the caller. The
default is an integer ‘zero’. If and how a changed ret
value changes
the execution of the caller depends on the specific hook. See the hook
documentation below for details.
hook_com
An associated array which is used for bidirectional communication from the caller to hook functions. The used keys depend on the specific hook.
context
The active context of the hook. Functions that wish to change this variable should make it local scope first.
vcs
The current VCS after it was detected. The same values as in the
enable/disable style are used. Available in all hooks except start-up
.
Finally, the full list of currently available hooks:
start-up
Called after starting vcs_info
but before the VCS in this directory is
determined. It can be used to deactivate vcs_info
temporarily if
necessary. When ret
is set to 1
, vcs_info
aborts and does
nothing; when set to 2
, vcs_info
sets up everything as if no
version control were active and exits.
pre-get-data
Same as start-up
but after the VCS was detected.
gen-hg-bookmark-string
Called in the Mercurial backend when a bookmark string is generated; the
get-revision
and get-bookmarks
styles must be true.
This hook gets the names of the Mercurial bookmarks that
vcs_info
collected from ‘hg’.
If a bookmark is active, the key ${hook_com[hg-active-bookmark]}
is
set to its name. The key is otherwise unset.
When setting ret
to non-zero, the string in
${hook_com[hg-bookmark-string]}
will be used in the %m
escape in
formats
and actionformats
and will be available in the global
backend_misc
array as ${backend_misc[bookmarks]}
.
gen-applied-string
Called in the git
(with stgit
or during rebase or merge), and hg
(with mq
) backends and in quilt
support when the applied-string
is generated; the use-quilt
zstyle must be true for quilt
(the mq
and stgit
backends are active by default).
The arguments to this hook describe applied patches in the opposite order, which means that the first argument is the top-most patch and so forth.
When the patches’ log messages can be extracted, those are embedded
within each argument after a space, so each argument is of the form
‘patch-name first line of the log message’, where patch-name
contains no whitespace. The mq
backend passes arguments of
the form ‘patch name’, with possible embedded spaces, but without
extracting the patch’s log message.
When setting ret
to non-zero, the string in
${hook_com[applied-string]}
will be
available as %p
in the patch-format
and nopatch-format
styles.
This hook is, in concert with set-patch-format
, responsible for
%
-escaping that value for use in the prompt.
(See Oddities.)
The quilt
backend passes to this hook the inputs
${hook_com[quilt-patches-dir]}
and, if it has been
determined, ${hook_com[quilt-pc-dir]}
.
gen-unapplied-string
Called in the git
(with stgit
or during rebase), and hg
(with
mq
) backend and in quilt
support when the unapplied-string
is
generated; the get-unapplied
style must be true.
This hook gets the names of all unapplied patches which vcs_info
in order, which means that the first argument is
the patch next-in-line to be applied and so forth.
The format of each argument is as for gen-applied-string
, above.
When setting ret
to non-zero, the string in
${hook_com[unapplied-string]}
will be available as %u
in the
patch-format
and nopatch-format
styles.
This hook is, in concert with set-patch-format
, responsible for
%
-escaping that value for use in the prompt.
(See Oddities.)
The quilt
backend passes to this hook the inputs
${hook_com[quilt-patches-dir]}
and, if it has been
determined, ${hook_com[quilt-pc-dir]}
.
gen-mqguards-string
Called in the hg
backend when guards-string
is generated; the
get-mq
style must be true (default).
This hook gets the names of any active mq
guards.
When setting ret
to non-zero, the string in
${hook_com[guards-string]}
will be used in the %g
escape in the
patch-format
and nopatch-format
styles.
no-vcs
This hooks is called when no version control system was detected.
The ‘hook_com
’ parameter is not used.
post-backend
Called as soon as the backend has finished collecting information.
The ‘hook_com
’ keys available are as for the set-message
hook.
post-quilt
Called after the quilt
support is done. The following information
is passed as arguments to the hook: 1. the quilt-support mode (‘addon’ or
‘standalone’); 2. the directory that contains the patch series; 3. the
directory that holds quilt’s status information (the ‘.pc’ directory) or
the string "-nopc-"
if that directory wasn’t found.
The ‘hook_com’ parameter is not used.
set-branch-format
Called before ‘branchformat
’ is set. The only argument to the
hook is the format that is configured at this point.
The ‘hook_com
’ keys considered are ‘branch
’ and ‘revision
’.
They are set to the values figured out so far by vcs_info
and any
change will be used directly when the actual replacement is done.
If ret
is set to non-zero, the string in
${hook_com[branch-replace]}
will be used unchanged as the
‘%b
’ replacement in the variables set by vcs_info
.
set-hgrev-format
Called before a ‘hgrevformat
’ is set. The only argument to the
hook is the format that is configured at this point.
The ‘hook_com
’ keys considered are ‘hash
’ and ‘localrev
’.
They are set to the values figured out so far by vcs_info
and any
change will be used directly when the actual replacement is done.
If ret
is set to non-zero, the string in
${hook_com[rev-replace]}
will be used unchanged as the
‘%i
’ replacement in the variables set by vcs_info
.
pre-addon-quilt
This hook is used when vcs_info
’s quilt functionality is active in "addon"
mode (quilt used on top of a real version control system). It is activated
right before any quilt specific action is taken.
Setting the ‘ret
’ variable in this hook to a non-zero value avoids any
quilt specific actions from being run at all.
set-patch-format
This hook is used to control some of the possible expansions in
patch-format
and nopatch-format
styles with patch queue systems such as
quilt, mqueue and the like.
This hook is used in the git
, hg
and quilt
backends.
The hook allows the control of the %p
(${hook_com[applied]}
) and %u
(${hook_com[unapplied]}
) expansion in all backends that use the hook. With
the mercurial backend, the %g
(${hook_com[guards]}
) expansion is
controllable in addition to that.
If ret
is set to non-zero, the string in ${hook_com[patch-replace]}
will be used unchanged instead of an expanded format from patch-format
or
nopatch-format
.
This hook is, in concert with the gen-applied-string
or
gen-unapplied-string
hooks if they are defined, responsible for
%
-escaping the final patch-format
value for use in the prompt.
(See Oddities.)
The quilt
backend passes to this hook the inputs
${hook_com[quilt-patches-dir]}
and, if it has been
determined, ${hook_com[quilt-pc-dir]}
.
set-message
Called each time before a ‘vcs_info_msg_
N_
’ message is set.
It takes two arguments; the first being the ‘N’ in the message
variable name, the second is the currently configured formats
or
actionformats
.
There are a number of ‘hook_com
’ keys, that are used here:
‘action
’, ‘branch
’, ‘base
’, ‘base-name
’, ‘subdir
’,
‘staged
’, ‘unstaged
’, ‘revision
’, ‘misc
’, ‘vcs
’
and one ‘miscN
’ entry for each backend-specific data field (N
starting at zero). They are set to the values figured out so far by
vcs_info
and any change will be used directly when the actual
replacement is done.
Since this hook is triggered multiple times (once for each configured
formats
or actionformats
), each of the ‘hook_com
’ keys mentioned
above (except for the miscN
entries) has an ‘_orig
’ counterpart,
so even if you changed a value to your liking you can still get the
original value in the next run. Changing the ‘_orig
’ values is
probably not a good idea.
If ret
is set to non-zero, the string in
${hook_com[message]}
will be used unchanged as the message by
vcs_info
.
If all of this sounds rather confusing, take a look at
Examples
and also in the Misc/vcs_info-examples
file in the Zsh source.
They contain some explanatory code.
Don’t use vcs_info
at all (even though it’s in your prompt):
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' enable NONE
Disable the backends for bzr
and svk
:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' disable bzr svk
Disable everything but bzr
and svk
:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*' enable bzr svk
Provide a special formats for git
:
zstyle ':vcs_info:git:*' formats ' GIT, BABY! [%b]' zstyle ':vcs_info:git:*' actionformats ' GIT ACTION! [%b|%a]'
All %x
expansion in all sorts of formats (formats
, actionformats
,
branchformat
, you name it) are done using the ‘zformat
’ builtin from
the ‘zsh/zutil
’ module. That means you can do everything with these
%x
items what zformat supports. In particular, if you want something
that is really long to have a fixed width, like a hash in a mercurial
branchformat, you can do this: %12.12i
. That’ll shrink the 40 character
hash to its 12 leading characters. The form is actually
‘%
min.
maxx
’. More is possible.
See The zsh/zutil Module for details.
Use the quicker bzr
backend
zstyle ':vcs_info:bzr:*' use-simple true
If you do use use-simple
, please report if it does ‘the-right-thing[tm]’.
Display the revision number in yellow for bzr
and svn
:
zstyle ':vcs_info:(svn|bzr):*' \ branchformat '%b%%F{yellow}:%r'
The doubled percent sign is explained in Oddities.
Alternatively, one can use the raw colour codes directly:
zstyle ':vcs_info:(svn|bzr):*' \ branchformat '%b%{'${fg[yellow]}'%}:%r'
Normally when a variable is interpolated into a format string, the variable
needs to be %
-escaped. In this example we skipped that because we assume
the value of ${fg[yellow]}
doesn’t contain any %
signs.
Make sure you enclose the color codes in %{
...%}
if you want to use the string provided by vcs_info
in prompts.
Here is how to print the VCS information as a command (not in a prompt):
vcsi() { vcs_info interactive; vcs_info_lastmsg }
This way, you can even define different formats for output via
vcs_info_lastmsg
in the ’:vcs_info:*:interactive:*
’ namespace.
Now as promised, some code that uses hooks:
say, you’d like to replace the string ‘svn’ by ‘subversion’ in
vcs_info
’s %s
formats
replacement.
First, we will tell vcs_info
to call a function when populating
the message variables with the gathered information:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*+set-message:*' hooks svn2subversion
Nothing happens. Which is reasonable, since we didn’t define the actual
function yet. To see what the hooks subsystem is trying to do, enable the
‘debug
’ style:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*+*:*' debug true
That should give you an idea what is going on. Specifically, the function
that we are looking for is ‘+vi-svn2subversion
’. Note, the ‘+vi-
’
prefix. So, everything is in order, just as documented. When you are done
checking out the debugging output, disable it again:
zstyle ':vcs_info:*+*:*' debug false
Now, let’s define the function:
function +vi-svn2subversion() { [[ ${hook_com[vcs_orig]} == svn ]] && hook_com[vcs]=subversion }
Simple enough. And it could have even been simpler, if only we had
registered our function in a less generic context. If we do it only in
the ‘svn
’ backend’s context, we don’t need to test which the active
backend is:
zstyle ':vcs_info:svn+set-message:*' hooks svn2subversion
function +vi-svn2subversion() { hook_com[vcs]=subversion }
And finally a little more elaborate example, that uses a hook to create
a customised bookmark string for the hg
backend.
Again, we start off by registering a function:
zstyle ':vcs_info:hg+gen-hg-bookmark-string:*' hooks hgbookmarks
And then we define the ‘+vi-hgbookmarks
’ function:
function +vi-hgbookmarks() { # The default is to connect all bookmark names by # commas. This mixes things up a little. # Imagine, there's one type of bookmarks that is # special to you. Say, because it's *your* work. # Those bookmarks look always like this: "sh/*" # (because your initials are sh, for example). # This makes the bookmarks string use only those # bookmarks. If there's more than one, it # concatenates them using commas. # The bookmarks returned by `hg' are available in # the function's positional parameters. local s="${(Mj:,:)@:#sh/*}" # Now, the communication with the code that calls # the hook functions is done via the hook_com[] # hash. The key at which the `gen-hg-bookmark-string' # hook looks is `hg-bookmark-string'. So: hook_com[hg-bookmark-string]=$s # And to signal that we want to use the string we # just generated, set the special variable `ret' to # something other than the default zero: ret=1 return 0 }
Some longer examples and code snippets which might be useful are available in the examples file located at Misc/vcs_info-examples in the Zsh source directory.
This concludes our guided tour through zsh’s vcs_info
.
You should make sure all the functions from the Functions/Prompts
directory of the source distribution are available; they all begin with
the string ‘prompt_
’ except for the special function ‘promptinit
’.
You also need the ‘colors
’ and ‘add-zsh-hook
’ functions from
Functions/Misc
.
All these functions may already be installed on your system; if not,
you will need to find them and copy them. The directory should appear as
one of the elements of the fpath
array (this should already be the
case if they were installed), and at least the function promptinit
should be autoloaded; it will autoload the rest. Finally, to initialize
the use of the system you need to call the promptinit
function. The
following code in your .zshrc
will arrange for this; assume the
functions are stored in the directory ~/myfns
:
fpath=(~/myfns $fpath) autoload -U promptinit promptinit
Use the prompt
command to select your preferred theme. This command
may be added to your .zshrc
following the call to promptinit
in
order to start zsh with a theme already selected.
prompt
[ -c
| -l
]prompt
[ -p
| -h
] [ theme ... ]prompt
[ -s
] theme [ arg ... ]Set or examine the prompt theme. With no options and a theme
argument, the theme with that name is set as the current theme. The
available themes are determined at run time; use the -l
option to see
a list. The special theme ‘random
’ selects at random one of the
available themes and sets your prompt to that.
In some cases the theme may be modified by one or more arguments, which should be given after the theme name. See the help for each theme for descriptions of these arguments.
Options are:
-c
Show the currently selected theme and its parameters, if any.
-l
List all available prompt themes.
-p
Preview the theme named by theme, or all themes if no theme is given.
-h
Show help for the theme named by theme, or for the
prompt
function if no theme is given.
-s
Set theme as the current theme and save state.
prompt_
theme_setup
Each available theme has a setup function which is called by the
prompt
function to install that theme. This function may define
other functions as necessary to maintain the prompt, including functions
used to preview the prompt or provide help for its use. You should not
normally call a theme’s setup function directly.
prompt off
The theme ‘off
’ sets all the prompt variables to minimal values with
no special effects.
prompt default
The theme ‘default
’ sets all prompt variables to the same state as
if an interactive zsh was started with no initialization files.
prompt restore
The special theme ‘restore
’ erases all theme settings and sets prompt
variables to their state before the first time the ‘prompt
’ function
was run, provided each theme has properly defined its cleanup (see below).
Note that you can undo ‘prompt off
’ and ‘prompt default
’ with
‘prompt restore
’, but a second restore does not undo the first.
The first step for adding your own theme is to choose a name for it,
and create a file ‘prompt_name_setup
’ in a directory in your
fpath
, such as ~/myfns
in the example above. The file should
at minimum contain assignments for the prompt variables that your
theme wishes to modify. By convention, themes use PS1
, PS2
,
RPS1
, etc., rather than the longer PROMPT
and RPROMPT
.
The file is autoloaded as a function in the current shell context, so it may contain any necessary commands to customize your theme, including defining additional functions. To make some complex tasks easier, your setup function may also do any of the following:
prompt_opts
The array prompt_opts
may be assigned any of "bang"
, "cr"
,
"percent"
, "sp"
, and/or "subst"
as values. The corresponding
setopts (promptbang
, etc.) are turned on, all other prompt-related
options are turned off. The prompt_opts
array preserves setopts even
beyond the scope of localoptions
, should your function need that.
Use of add-zsh-hook
and add-zle-hook-widget
is recommended (see
the Manipulating Hook Functions section above).
All hooks that follow the naming pattern prompt_
theme_
hook
are automatically removed when the prompt theme changes or is disabled.
If your function makes any other changes that should be undone when the theme is disabled, your setup function may call
prompt_cleanup command
where command should be suitably quoted. If your theme is ever
disabled or replaced by another, command is executed with eval
.
You may declare more than one such cleanup hook.
Define or autoload a function prompt_
name_preview
to display
a simulated version of your prompt. A simple default previewer is
defined by promptinit
for themes that do not define their own.
This preview function is called by ‘prompt -p
’.
Define or autoload a function prompt_
name_help
to display
documentation or help text for your theme.
This help function is called by ‘prompt -h
’.
These functions all implement user-defined ZLE widgets (see
Zsh Line Editor) which can be bound to keystrokes in interactive shells. To use them,
your .zshrc
should contain lines of the form
autoload function zle -N function
followed by an appropriate bindkey
command to associate the function
with a key sequence. Suggested bindings are described below.
If you are looking for functions to implement moving over and editing words in the manner of bash, where only alphanumeric characters are considered word characters, you can use the functions described in the next section. The following is sufficient:
autoload -U select-word-style select-word-style bash
forward-word-match
, backward-word-match
¶kill-word-match
, backward-kill-word-match
transpose-words-match
, capitalize-word-match
up-case-word-match
, down-case-word-match
delete-whole-word-match
, select-word-match
select-word-style
, match-word-context
, match-words-by-style
The first eight ‘-match
’ functions are drop-in replacements for the
builtin widgets without the suffix. By default they behave in a similar
way. However, by the use of styles and the function select-word-style
,
the way words are matched can be altered. select-word-match
is intended
to be used as a text object in vi mode but with custom word styles. For
comparison, the widgets described in Text Objects use fixed definitions of words, compatible
with the vim
editor.
The simplest way of configuring the functions is to use
select-word-style
, which can either be called as a normal function with
the appropriate argument, or invoked as a user-defined widget that will
prompt for the first character of the word style to be used. The first
time it is invoked, the first eight -match
functions will automatically
replace the builtin versions, so they do not need to be loaded explicitly.
The word styles available are as follows. Only the first character is examined.
bash
Word characters are alphanumeric characters only.
normal
As in normal shell operation: word characters are alphanumeric characters
plus any characters present in the string given by the parameter
$WORDCHARS
.
shell
Words are complete shell command arguments, possibly including complete quoted strings, or any tokens special to the shell.
whitespace
Words are any set of characters delimited by whitespace.
default
Restore the default settings; this is usually the same as ‘normal
’.
All but ‘default
’ can be input as an upper case character, which has
the same effect but with subword matching turned on. In this case, words
with upper case characters are treated specially: each separate run of
upper case characters, or an upper case character followed by any number of
other characters, is considered a word. The style subword-range
can supply an alternative character range to the default ‘[:upper:]
’;
the value of the style is treated as the contents of a ‘[
...]
’
pattern (note that the outer brackets should not be supplied, only
those surrounding named ranges).
More control can be obtained using the zstyle
command, as described in
The zsh/zutil Module. Each style is looked up in the
context :zle:
widget where widget is the name of the
user-defined widget, not the name of the function implementing it, so in
the case of the definitions supplied by select-word-style
the
appropriate contexts are :zle:forward-word
, and so on. The function
select-word-style
itself always defines styles for the context
‘:zle:*
’ which can be overridden by more specific (longer) patterns as
well as explicit contexts.
The style word-style
specifies the rules to use. This may have the
following values.
normal
Use the standard shell rules, i.e. alphanumerics and $WORDCHARS
, unless
overridden by the styles word-chars
or word-class
.
specified
Similar to normal
, but only the specified characters, and not also
alphanumerics, are considered word characters.
unspecified
The negation of specified. The given characters are those which will not be considered part of a word.
shell
Words are obtained by using the syntactic rules for generating shell
command arguments. In addition, special tokens which are never command
arguments such as ‘()
’ are also treated as words.
whitespace
Words are whitespace-delimited strings of characters.
The first three of those rules usually use $WORDCHARS
, but the value
in the parameter can be overridden by the style word-chars
, which works
in exactly the same way as $WORDCHARS
. In addition, the style
word-class
uses character class syntax to group characters and takes
precedence over word-chars
if both are set. The word-class
style
does not include the surrounding brackets of the character class; for
example, ‘-:[:alnum:]
’ is a valid word-class
to include all
alphanumerics plus the characters ‘-
’ and ‘:
’. Be careful
including ‘]
’, ‘^
’ and ‘-
’ as these are special inside
character classes.
word-style
may also have ‘-subword
’ appended to its value to
turn on subword matching, as described above.
The style skip-chars
is mostly useful for
transpose-words
and similar functions. If set, it gives a count of
characters starting at the cursor position which will not be considered
part of the word and are treated as space, regardless of what they actually
are. For example, if
zstyle ':zle:transpose-words' skip-chars 1
has been set, and transpose-words-match
is called with the cursor on
the X of foo
Xbar
, where X can be any character, then
the resulting expression is bar
Xfoo
.
Finer grained control can be obtained by setting the style word-context
to an array of pairs of entries. Each pair of entries consists of a
pattern and a subcontext. The shell argument the cursor is on is
matched against each pattern in turn until one matches; if it does,
the context is extended by a colon and the corresponding subcontext.
Note that the test is made against the original word on the line, with no
stripping of quotes. Special handling is done between words: the current
context is examined and if it contains the string between
the word
is set to a single space; else if it is contains the string back
,
the word before the cursor is considered, else the word after cursor is
considered. Some examples are given below.
The style skip-whitespace-first
is only used with the
forward-word
widget. If it is set to true, then forward-word
skips any non-word-characters, followed by any non-word-characters:
this is similar to the behaviour of other word-orientated widgets,
and also that used by other editors, however it differs from the
standard zsh behaviour. When using select-word-style
the widget
is set in the context :zle:*
to true
if the word style is
bash
and false
otherwise. It may be overridden by setting it in
the more specific context :zle:forward-word*
.
It is possible to create widgets with specific behaviour by defining
a new widget implemented by the appropriate generic function, then
setting a style for the context of the specific widget. For example,
the following defines a widget backward-kill-space-word
using
backward-kill-word-match
, the generic widget implementing
backward-kill-word
behaviour, and ensures that the new widget
always implements space-delimited behaviour.
zle -N backward-kill-space-word backward-kill-word-match zstyle :zle:backward-kill-space-word word-style space
The widget backward-kill-space-word
can now be bound to a key.
Here are some further examples of use of the styles, actually taken from the
simplified interface in select-word-style
:
zstyle ':zle:*' word-style standard zstyle ':zle:*' word-chars {No value for `dsq'}
Implements bash-style word handling for all widgets, i.e. only
alphanumerics are word characters; equivalent to setting
the parameter WORDCHARS
empty for the given context.
style ':zle:*kill*' word-style space
Uses space-delimited words for widgets with the word ‘kill’ in the name.
Neither of the styles word-chars
nor word-class
is used in this case.
Here are some examples of use of the word-context
style to extend
the context.
zstyle ':zle:*' word-context \ "*/*" filename "[[:space:]]" whitespace zstyle ':zle:transpose-words:whitespace' word-style shell zstyle ':zle:transpose-words:filename' word-style normal zstyle ':zle:transpose-words:filename' word-chars {No value for `dsq'}
This provides two different ways of using transpose-words
depending on
whether the cursor is on whitespace between words or on a filename, here
any word containing a /
. On whitespace, complete arguments as defined
by standard shell rules will be transposed. In a filename, only
alphanumerics will be transposed. Elsewhere, words will be transposed
using the default style for :zle:transpose-words
.
The word matching and all the handling of zstyle
settings is actually
implemented by the function match-words-by-style
. This can be used to
create new user-defined widgets. The calling function should set the local
parameter curcontext
to :zle:
widget, create the local
parameter matched_words
and call match-words-by-style
with no
arguments. On return, matched_words
will be set to an array with the
elements: (1) the start of the line (2) the word before the cursor (3) any
non-word characters between that word and the cursor (4) any non-word
character at the cursor position plus any remaining non-word characters
before the next word, including all characters specified by the
skip-chars
style, (5) the word at or following the cursor (6) any
non-word characters following that word (7) the remainder of the line. Any
of the elements may be an empty string; the calling function should test
for this to decide whether it can perform its function.
If the variable matched_words
is defined by the caller to
match-words-by-style
as an associative array (local -A
matched_words
), then the seven values given above should be retrieved
from it as elements named start
, word-before-cursor
,
ws-before-cursor
, ws-after-cursor
, word-after-cursor
,
ws-after-word
, and end
. In addition the element
is-word-start
is 1 if the cursor is on the start of a word or
subword, or on white space before it (the cases can be distinguished by
testing the ws-after-cursor
element) and 0 otherwise. This form is
recommended for future compatibility.
It is possible to pass options with arguments to match-words-by-style
to override the use of styles. The options are:
-w
word-style
-s
skip-chars
-c
word-class
-C
word-chars
-r
subword-range
For example, match-words-by-style -w shell -c 0
may be used to
extract the command argument around the cursor.
The word-context
style is implemented by the function
match-word-context
. This should not usually need to be called
directly.
bracketed-paste-magic
¶The bracketed-paste
widget (see Miscellaneous in Standard Widgets)
inserts pasted text literally into the editor buffer rather than interpret
it as keystrokes. This disables some common usages where the self-insert
widget is replaced in order to accomplish some extra processing. An
example is the contributed url-quote-magic
widget described below.
The bracketed-paste-magic
widget is meant to replace bracketed-paste
with a wrapper that re-enables these self-insert actions, and other
actions as selected by zstyles. Therefore this widget is installed with
autoload -Uz bracketed-paste-magic zle -N bracketed-paste bracketed-paste-magic
Other than enabling some widget processing, bracketed-paste-magic
attempts to replicate bracketed-paste
as faithfully as possible.
The following zstyles may be set to control processing of pasted text.
All are looked up in the context ‘:bracketed-paste-magic
’.
active-widgets
A list of patterns matching widget names that should be activated during
the paste. All other key sequences are processed as self-insert-unmeta.
The default is ‘self-*
’ so any user-defined widgets named with that
prefix are active along with the builtin self-insert.
If this style is not set (explicitly deleted) or set to an empty value,
no widgets are active and the pasted text is inserted literally. If the
value includes ‘undefined-key
’, any unknown sequences are discarded
from the pasted text.
inactive-keys
The inverse of active-widgets
, a list of key sequences that always use
self-insert-unmeta
even when bound to an active widget. Note that
this is a list of literal key sequences, not patterns.
paste-init
A list of function names, called in widget context (but not as widgets).
The functions are called in order until one of them returns a non-zero
status. The parameter ‘PASTED
’ contains the initial state of the
pasted text. All other ZLE parameters such as ‘BUFFER
’ have their
normal values and side-effects, and full history is available, so for
example paste-init
functions may move words from BUFFER
into
PASTED
to make those words visible to the active-widgets
.
A non-zero return from a paste-init
function does not prevent the
paste itself from proceeding.
Loading bracketed-paste-magic
defines backward-extend-paste
, a
helper function for use in paste-init
.
zstyle :bracketed-paste-magic paste-init \ backward-extend-paste
When a paste would insert into the middle of a word or append text to a
word already on the line, backward-extend-paste
moves the prefix
from LBUFFER
into PASTED
so that the active-widgets
see the
full word so far. This may be useful with url-quote-magic
.
paste-finish
Another list of function names called in order until one returns non-zero.
These functions are called after the pasted text has been processed
by the active-widgets
, but before it is inserted into ‘BUFFER
’.
ZLE parameters have their normal values and side-effects.
A non-zero return from a paste-finish
function does not prevent
the paste itself from proceeding.
Loading bracketed-paste-magic
also defines quote-paste
, a helper
function for use in paste-finish
.
zstyle :bracketed-paste-magic paste-finish \ quote-paste zstyle :bracketed-paste-magic:finish quote-style \ qqq
When the pasted text is inserted into BUFFER
, it is quoted per the
quote-style
value. To forcibly turn off the built-in numeric prefix
quoting of bracketed-paste
, use:
zstyle :bracketed-paste-magic:finish quote-style \ none
Important: During active-widgets
processing of the paste (after
paste-init
and before paste-finish
), BUFFER
starts empty and
history is restricted, so cursor motions, etc., may not pass outside of
the pasted content. Text assigned to BUFFER
by the active widgets
is copied back into PASTED
before paste-finish
.
copy-earlier-word
¶This widget works like a combination of insert-last-word
and
copy-prev-shell-word
. Repeated invocations of the widget retrieve
earlier words on the relevant history line. With a numeric argument
N, insert the Nth word from the history line; N may be
negative to count from the end of the line.
If insert-last-word
has been used to retrieve the last word on a
previous history line, repeated invocations will replace that word with
earlier words from the same line.
Otherwise, the widget applies to words on the line currently being edited.
The widget
style can be set to the name of another widget that should
be called to retrieve words. This widget must accept the same three
arguments as insert-last-word
.
cycle-completion-positions
¶After inserting an unambiguous string into the command line, the new function based completion system may know about multiple places in this string where characters are missing or differ from at least one of the possible matches. It will then place the cursor on the position it considers to be the most interesting one, i.e. the one where one can disambiguate between as many matches as possible with as little typing as possible.
This widget allows the cursor to be easily moved to the other interesting spots. It can be invoked repeatedly to cycle between all positions reported by the completion system.
delete-whole-word-match
¶This is another function which works like the -match
functions
described immediately above, i.e. using styles to decide the word
boundaries. However, it is not a replacement for any existing function.
The basic behaviour is to delete the word around the cursor. There is no
numeric argument handling; only the single word around the cursor is
considered. If the widget contains the string kill
, the removed text
will be placed in the cutbuffer for future yanking. This can be obtained
by defining kill-whole-word-match
as follows:
zle -N kill-whole-word-match delete-whole-word-match
and then binding the widget kill-whole-word-match
.
up-line-or-beginning-search
, down-line-or-beginning-search
¶These widgets are similar to the builtin functions up-line-or-search
and down-line-or-search
: if in a multiline buffer they move up or
down within the buffer, otherwise they search for a history line matching
the start of the current line. In this case, however, they search for
a line which matches the current line up to the current cursor position, in
the manner of history-beginning-search-backward
and -forward
, rather
than the first word on the line.
edit-command-line
¶Edit the command line using your visual editor, as in ksh
.
bindkey -M vicmd v edit-command-line
The editor to be used can also be specified using the editor
style in
the context of the widget. It is specified as an array of command and
arguments:
zstyle :zle:edit-command-line editor gvim -f
expand-absolute-path
¶Expand the file name under the cursor to an absolute path, resolving symbolic links. Where possible, the initial path segment is turned into a named directory or reference to a user’s home directory.
history-search-end
¶This function implements the widgets
history-beginning-search-backward-end
and
history-beginning-search-forward-end
. These commands work by first
calling the corresponding builtin widget (see
History Control) and then moving the cursor to the end of the line. The original cursor
position is remembered and restored before calling the builtin widget a
second time, so that the same search is repeated to look farther through
the history.
Although you autoload
only one function, the commands to use it are
slightly different because it implements two widgets.
zle -N history-beginning-search-backward-end \ history-search-end zle -N history-beginning-search-forward-end \ history-search-end bindkey '\e^P' history-beginning-search-backward-end bindkey '\e^N' history-beginning-search-forward-end
history-beginning-search-menu
¶This function implements yet another form of history searching. The
text before the cursor is used to select lines from the history,
as for history-beginning-search-backward
except that all matches are
shown in a numbered menu. Typing the appropriate digits inserts the
full history line. Note that leading zeroes must be typed (they are only
shown when necessary for removing ambiguity). The entire history is
searched; there is no distinction between forwards and backwards.
With a numeric argument, the search is not anchored to the start of the line; the string typed by the use may appear anywhere in the line in the history.
If the widget name contains ‘-end
’ the cursor is moved to the end of
the line inserted. If the widget name contains ‘-space
’ any space
in the text typed is treated as a wildcard and can match anything (hence
a leading space is equivalent to giving a numeric argument). Both
forms can be combined, for example:
zle -N history-beginning-search-menu-space-end \ history-beginning-search-menu
history-pattern-search
¶The function history-pattern-search
implements widgets which prompt
for a pattern with which to search the history backwards or forwards. The
pattern is in the usual zsh format, however the first character may be
^
to anchor the search to the start of the line, and the last character
may be $
to anchor the search to the end of the line. If the
search was not anchored to the end of the line the cursor is positioned
just after the pattern found.
The commands to create bindable widgets are similar to those in the example immediately above:
autoload -U history-pattern-search zle -N history-pattern-search-backward history-pattern-search zle -N history-pattern-search-forward history-pattern-search
incarg
¶Typing the keystrokes for this widget with the cursor placed on or to the
left of an integer causes that integer to be incremented by one. With a
numeric argument, the number is incremented by the amount of the
argument (decremented if the numeric argument is negative). The shell
parameter incarg
may be set to change the default increment to
something other than one.
bindkey '^X+' incarg
incremental-complete-word
¶This allows incremental completion of a word. After starting this
command, a list of completion choices can be shown after every character
you type, which you can delete with ^H
or DEL
. Pressing return
accepts the completion so far and returns you to normal editing (that is,
the command line is not immediately executed). You can hit TAB
to
do normal completion, ^G
to abort back to the state when you started,
and ^D
to list the matches.
This works only with the new function based completion system.
bindkey '^Xi' incremental-complete-word
insert-composed-char
¶This function allows you to compose characters that don’t appear on the
keyboard to be inserted into the command line. The command is followed by
two keys corresponding to ASCII characters (there is no prompt). For
accented characters, the two keys are a base character followed by a code
for the accent, while for other special characters the two characters
together form a mnemonic for the character to be inserted. The
two-character codes are a subset of those given by RFC 1345 (see for
example http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1345.html
).
The function may optionally be followed by up to two characters which
replace one or both of the characters read from the keyboard; if both
characters are supplied, no input is read. For example,
insert-composed-char a:
can be used within a widget to insert an a with
umlaut into the command line. This has the advantages over use of a
literal character that it is more portable.
For best results zsh should have been built with support for multibyte
characters (configured with --enable-multibyte
); however, the function
works for the limited range of characters available in single-byte
character sets such as ISO-8859-1.
The character is converted into the local representation and inserted into the command line at the cursor position. (The conversion is done within the shell, using whatever facilities the C library provides.) With a numeric argument, the character and its code are previewed in the status line
The function may be run outside zle in which case it prints the character (together with a newline) to standard output. Input is still read from keystrokes.
See insert-unicode-char
for an alternative way of inserting Unicode
characters using their hexadecimal character number.
The set of accented characters is reasonably complete up to Unicode
character U+0180, the set of special characters less so. However, it
is very sporadic from that point. Adding new characters is easy,
however; see the function define-composed-chars
. Please send any
additions to zsh-workers@zsh.org
.
The codes for the second character when used to accent the first are as follows. Note that not every character can take every accent.
!
Grave.
'
Acute.
>
Circumflex.
?
Tilde. (This is not ~
as RFC 1345 does not assume that
character is present on the keyboard.)
-
Macron. (A horizontal bar over the base character.)
(
Breve. (A shallow dish shape over the base character.)
.
Dot above the base character, or in the case of i
no dot,
or in the case of L
and l
a centered dot.
:
Diaeresis (Umlaut).
c
Cedilla.
_
Underline, however there are currently no underlined characters.
/
Stroke through the base character.
"
Double acute (only supported on a few letters).
;
Ogonek. (A little forward facing hook at the bottom right of the character.)
<
Caron. (A little v over the letter.)
0
Circle over the base character.
2
Hook over the base character.
9
Horn over the base character.
The most common characters from the Arabic, Cyrillic, Greek and Hebrew
alphabets are available; consult RFC 1345 for the appropriate sequences.
In addition, a set of two letter codes not in RFC 1345 are available for
the double-width characters corresponding to ASCII characters from !
to ~
(0x21 to 0x7e) by preceding the character with ^
, for
example ^A
for a double-width A
.
The following other two-character sequences are understood.
These are already present on most keyboards:
<(
Left square bracket
//
Backslash (solidus)
)>
Right square bracket
(!
Left brace (curly bracket)
!!
Vertical bar (pipe symbol)
!)
Right brace (curly bracket)
'?
Tilde
Characters found in various variants of the Latin alphabet:
ss
Eszett (scharfes S)
D-
, d-
Eth
TH
, th
Thorn
kk
Kra
'n
’n
NG
, ng
Ng
OI
, oi
Oi
yr
yr
ED
ezh
Ct
Cent
Pd
Pound sterling (also lira and others)
Cu
Currency
Ye
Yen
Eu
Euro (N.B. not in RFC 1345)
References to "right" quotes indicate the shape (like a 9 rather than 6) rather than their grammatical use. (For example, a "right" low double quote is used to open quotations in German.)
!I
Inverted exclamation mark
BB
Broken vertical bar
SE
Section
Co
Copyright
-a
Spanish feminine ordinal indicator
<<
Left guillemet
-
-
Soft hyphen
Rg
Registered trade mark
PI
Pilcrow (paragraph)
-o
Spanish masculine ordinal indicator
>>
Right guillemet
?I
Inverted question mark
-1
Hyphen
-N
En dash
-M
Em dash
-3
Horizontal bar
:3
Vertical ellipsis
.3
Horizontal midline ellipsis
!2
Double vertical line
=2
Double low line
'6
Left single quote
'9
Right single quote
.9
"Right" low quote
9'
Reversed "right" quote
"6
Left double quote
"9
Right double quote
:9
"Right" low double quote
9"
Reversed "right" double quote
/-
Dagger
/=
Double dagger
DG
Degree
-2
, +-
, -+
- sign, +/- sign, -/+ sign
2S
Superscript 2
3S
Superscript 3
1S
Superscript 1
My
Micro
.M
Middle dot
14
Quarter
12
Half
34
Three quarters
*X
Multiplication
-:
Division
%0
Per mille
FA
, TE
, /0
For all, there exists, empty set
dP
, DE
, NB
Partial derivative, delta (increment), del (nabla)
(-
, -)
Element of, contains
*P
, +Z
Product, sum
*-
, Ob
, Sb
Asterisk, ring, bullet
RT
, 0(
, 00
Root sign, proportional to, infinity
cS
, cH
, cD
, cC
Card suits: spades, hearts, diamonds, clubs
Md
, M8
, M2
, Mb
, Mx
, MX
Musical notation: crotchet (quarter note), quaver (eighth note), semiquavers (sixteenth notes), flag sign, natural sign, sharp sign
Fm
, Ml
Female, male
'>
Circumflex (same as caret, ^
)
'!
Grave (same as backtick, `
)
',
Cedilla
':
Diaeresis (Umlaut)
'm
Macron
''
Acute
insert-files
¶This function allows you type a file pattern, and see the results of the expansion at each step. When you hit return, all expansions are inserted into the command line.
bindkey '^Xf' insert-files
insert-unicode-char
¶When first executed, the user inputs a set of hexadecimal digits.
This is terminated with another call to insert-unicode-char
.
The digits are then turned into the corresponding Unicode character.
For example, if the widget is bound to ^XU
, the character sequence
‘^XU 4 c ^XU
’ inserts L
(Unicode U+004c).
See insert-composed-char
for a way of inserting characters
using a two-character mnemonic.
narrow-to-region
[ -p
pre ] [ -P
post ]
[ -S
statepm | -R
statepm | [ -l
lbufvar ] [ -r
rbufvar ] ]
[ -n
] [ start end ]narrow-to-region-invisible
Narrow the editable portion of the buffer to the region between the cursor and the mark, which may be in either order. The region may not be empty.
narrow-to-region
may be used as a widget or called as a function from a
user-defined widget; by default, the text outside the editable area remains
visible. A recursive-edit
is performed and the original widening
status is then restored. Various options and arguments are available when
it is called as a function.
The options -p
pretext and -P
posttext may be
used to replace the text before and after the display for the duration of
the function; either or both may be an empty string.
If the option -n
is also given, pretext or posttext will only
be inserted if there is text before or after the region respectively which
will be made invisible.
Two numeric arguments may be given which will be used instead of the cursor and mark positions.
The option -S
statepm is used to narrow according to the other
options while saving the original state in the parameter with name
statepm, while the option -R
statepm is used to restore the
state from the parameter; note in both cases the name of the parameter
is required. In the second case, other options and arguments are
irrelevant. When this method is used, no recursive-edit
is performed;
the calling widget should call this function with the option -S
,
perform its own editing on the command line or pass control to the user
via ‘zle recursive-edit
’, then call this function with the option
-R
. The argument statepm must be a suitable name for an ordinary
parameter, except that parameters beginning with the prefix _ntr_
are
reserved for use within narrow-to-region
. Typically the parameter will
be local to the calling function.
The options -l
lbufvar and -r
rbufvar may be used to
specify parameters where the widget will store the resulting text from
the operation. The parameter lbufvar will contain LBUFFER
and rbufvar will contain RBUFFER
. Neither of these two options
may be used with -S
or -R
.
narrow-to-region-invisible
is a simple widget which calls
narrow-to-region
with arguments which replace any text outside the
region with ‘...
’. It does not take any arguments.
The display is restored (and the widget returns) upon any zle command which would usually cause the line to be accepted or aborted. Hence an additional such command is required to accept or abort the current line.
The return status of both widgets is zero if the line was accepted, else non-zero.
Here is a trivial example of a widget using this feature.
local state narrow-to-region -p $'Editing restricted region\n' \ -P {No value for `dsq'} -S state zle recursive-edit narrow-to-region -R state
predict-on
¶This set of functions implements predictive typing using history search.
After predict-on
, typing characters causes the editor to look backward
in the history for the first line beginning with what you have typed so
far. After predict-off
, editing returns to normal for the line found.
In fact, you often don’t even need to use predict-off
, because if the
line doesn’t match something in the history, adding a key performs
standard completion, and then inserts itself if no completions were found.
However, editing in the middle of a line is liable to confuse prediction;
see the toggle
style below.
With the function based completion system (which is needed for this), you
should be able to type TAB
at almost any point to advance the cursor
to the next {No value for ‘dsbq’}interesting{No value for ‘dsq’} character position (usually the end of the
current word, but sometimes somewhere in the middle of the word). And of
course as soon as the entire line is what you want, you can accept with
return, without needing to move the cursor to the end first.
The first time predict-on
is used, it creates several additional
widget functions:
delete-backward-and-predict
Replaces the backward-delete-char
widget. You do not need to bind this yourself.
insert-and-predict
Implements predictive typing by replacing the
self-insert
widget. You do not need to bind this yourself.
predict-off
Turns off predictive typing.
Although you autoload
only the predict-on
function, it is
necessary to create a keybinding for predict-off
as well.
zle -N predict-on zle -N predict-off bindkey '^X^Z' predict-on bindkey '^Z' predict-off
read-from-minibuffer
¶This is most useful when called as a function from inside a widget, but will
work correctly as a widget in its own right. It prompts for a value
below the current command line; a value may be input using all of the
standard zle operations (and not merely the restricted set available
when executing, for example, execute-named-cmd
). The value is then
returned to the calling function in the parameter $REPLY
and the
editing buffer restored to its previous state. If the read was aborted
by a keyboard break (typically ^G
), the function returns status 1
and $REPLY
is not set.
If one argument is supplied to the function it is taken as a prompt,
otherwise ‘?
’ is used. If two arguments are supplied, they are the
prompt and the initial value of $LBUFFER
, and if a third argument is
given it is the initial value of $RBUFFER
. This provides a default
value and starting cursor placement. Upon return the entire buffer is the
value of $REPLY
.
One option is available: ‘-k
num’ specifies that num
characters are to be read instead of a whole line. The line editor is not
invoked recursively in this case, so depending on the terminal settings
the input may not be visible, and only the input keys are placed in
$REPLY
, not the entire buffer. Note that unlike the read
builtin
num must be given; there is no default.
The name is a slight misnomer, as in fact the shell’s own minibuffer is
not used. Hence it is still possible to call executed-named-cmd
and
similar functions while reading a value.
replace-argument
, replace-argument-edit
¶The function replace-argument
can be used to replace a command
line argument in the current command line or, if the current command
line is empty, in the last command line executed (the new command line
is not executed). Arguments are as delimited by standard shell syntax,
If a numeric argument is given, that specifies the argument to be replaced. 0 means the command name, as in history expansion. A negative numeric argument counts backward from the last word.
If no numeric argument is given, the current argument is replaced; this is the last argument if the previous history line is being used.
The function prompts for a replacement argument.
If the widget contains the string edit
, for example is defined as
zle -N replace-argument-edit replace-argument
then the function presents the current value of the argument for editing, otherwise the editing buffer for the replacement is initially empty.
replace-string
, replace-pattern
¶replace-string-again
, replace-pattern-again
The function replace-string
implements three widgets.
If defined under the same name as the function, it prompts for two
strings; the first (source) string will be replaced by the second
everywhere it occurs in the line editing buffer.
If the widget name contains the word ‘pattern
’, for example by
defining the widget using the command ‘zle -N replace-pattern
replace-string
’, then the matching is performed using zsh patterns. All
zsh extended globbing patterns can be used in the source string; note
that unlike filename generation the pattern does not need to match an
entire word, nor do glob qualifiers have any effect. In addition, the
replacement string can contain parameter or command substitutions.
Furthermore, a ‘&
’ in the replacement string will be replaced with
the matched source string, and a backquoted digit ‘\
N’ will be
replaced by the Nth parenthesised expression matched. The form
‘\{
N}
’ may be used to protect the digit from following
digits.
If the widget instead contains the word ‘regex
’ (or ‘regexp
’),
then the matching is performed using regular expressions, respecting
the setting of the option RE_MATCH_PCRE
(see the description of the
function regexp-replace
below). The special replacement facilities
described above for pattern matching are available.
By default the previous source or replacement string will not be offered
for editing. However, this feature can be activated by setting the style
edit-previous
in the context :zle:
widget (for example,
:zle:replace-string
) to true
. In addition, a positive
numeric argument forces the previous values to be offered, a negative or
zero argument forces them not to be.
The function replace-string-again
can be used to repeat the previous
replacement; no prompting is done. As with replace-string
, if the name
of the widget contains the word ‘pattern
’ or ‘regex
’, pattern or
regular expression matching is performed, else a literal string
replacement. Note that the previous source and replacement text are the
same whether pattern, regular expression or string matching is used.
In addition, replace-string
shows the previous replacement above
the prompt, so long as there was one during the current session; if the
source string is empty, that replacement will be repeated without
the widget prompting for a replacement string.
For example, starting from the line:
print This line contains fan and fond
and invoking replace-pattern
with the source string
‘f(?)n
’ and
the replacement string ‘c\1r
’ produces the not very useful line:
print This line contains car and cord
The range of the replacement string can be limited by using the
narrow-to-region-invisible
widget. One limitation of the current
version is that undo
will cycle through changes to the replacement
and source strings before undoing the replacement itself.
send-invisible
¶This is similar to read-from-minibuffer in that it may be called as a
function from a widget or as a widget of its own, and interactively reads
input from the keyboard. However, the input being typed is concealed and
a string of asterisks (‘*
’) is shown instead. The value is saved in
the parameter $INVISIBLE
to which a reference is inserted into the
editing buffer at the restored cursor position. If the read was aborted
by a keyboard break (typically ^G
) or another escape from editing such
as push-line
, $INVISIBLE
is set to empty and the original buffer
is restored unchanged.
If one argument is supplied to the function it is taken as a prompt,
otherwise ‘Non-echoed text:
’ is used (as in emacs). If a second and
third argument are supplied they are used to begin and end the reference
to $INVISIBLE
that is inserted into the buffer. The default is to
open with ${
, then INVISIBLE
, and close with }
, but many
other effects are possible.
smart-insert-last-word
¶This function may replace the insert-last-word
widget, like so:
zle -N insert-last-word smart-insert-last-word
With a numeric argument, or when passed command line arguments in a call
from another widget, it behaves like insert-last-word
, except that
words in comments are ignored when INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS
is set.
Otherwise, the rightmost {No value for ‘dsbq’}interesting{No value for ‘dsq’} word from the previous command is
found and inserted. The default definition of {No value for ‘dsbq’}interesting{No value for ‘dsq’} is that the
word contains at least one alphabetic character, slash, or backslash.
This definition may be overridden by use of the match
style. The
context used to look up the style is the widget name, so usually the
context is :insert-last-word
. However, you can bind this function to
different widgets to use different patterns:
zle -N insert-last-assignment smart-insert-last-word zstyle :insert-last-assignment match '[[:alpha:]][][[:alnum:]]#=*' bindkey '\e=' insert-last-assignment
If no interesting word is found and the auto-previous
style is set to
a true value, the search continues upward through the history. When
auto-previous
is unset or false (the default), the widget must be
invoked repeatedly in order to search earlier history lines.
transpose-lines
¶Only useful with a multi-line editing buffer; the lines here are lines within the current on-screen buffer, not history lines. The effect is similar to the function of the same name in Emacs.
Transpose the current line with the previous line and move the cursor to the start of the next line. Repeating this (which can be done by providing a positive numeric argument) has the effect of moving the line above the cursor down by a number of lines.
With a negative numeric argument, requires two lines above the cursor. These two lines are transposed and the cursor moved to the start of the previous line. Using a numeric argument less than -1 has the effect of moving the line above the cursor up by minus that number of lines.
url-quote-magic
¶This widget replaces the built-in self-insert
to make it easier to
type URLs as command line arguments. As you type, the input character is
analyzed and, if it may need quoting, the current word is checked for a
URI scheme. If one is found and the current word is not already in
quotes, a backslash is inserted before the input character.
Styles to control quoting behavior:
url-metas
This style is looked up in the context ‘:url-quote-magic:
scheme’
(where scheme is that of the current URL, e.g. "ftp
"). The value
is a string listing the characters to be treated as globbing
metacharacters when appearing in a URL using that scheme. The default is
to quote all zsh extended globbing characters, excluding ’<
’ and
’>
’ but including braces (as in brace expansion). See also
url-seps
.
url-seps
Like url-metas
, but lists characters that should be considered command
separators, redirections, history references, etc. The default is to
quote the standard set of shell separators, excluding those that overlap
with the extended globbing characters, but including ’<
’ and
’>
’ and the first character of $histchars
.
url-globbers
This style is looked up in the context ‘:url-quote-magic
’. The values
form a list of command names that are expected to do their own globbing
on the URL string. This implies that they are aliased to use the
‘noglob
’ modifier. When the first word on the line matches one of the
values and the URL refers to a local file (see url-local-schema
),
only the url-seps
characters are quoted; the url-metas
are left
alone, allowing them to affect command-line parsing, completion, etc. The
default values are a literal ‘noglob
’ plus (when the zsh/parameter
module is available) any commands aliased to the helper function
‘urlglobber
’ or its alias ‘globurl
’.
url-local-schema
This style is always looked up in the context ‘:urlglobber
’, even
though it is used by both url-quote-magic and urlglobber. The values form
a list of URI schema that should be treated as referring to local files by
their real local path names, as opposed to files which are specified
relative to a web-server-defined document root. The defaults are
"ftp
" and "file
".
url-other-schema
Like url-local-schema
, but lists all other URI schema upon which
urlglobber
and url-quote-magic
should act. If the URI on the
command line does not have a scheme appearing either in this list or in
url-local-schema
, it is not magically quoted. The default values are
"http
", "https
", and "ftp
". When a scheme appears both here
and in url-local-schema
, it is quoted differently depending on whether
the command name appears in url-globbers
.
Loading url-quote-magic
also defines a helper function ‘urlglobber
’
and aliases ‘globurl
’ to ‘noglob urlglobber
’. This function takes
a local URL apart, attempts to pattern-match the local file portion of the
URL path, and then puts the results back into URL format again.
vi-pipe
¶This function reads a movement command from the keyboard and then prompts for an external command. The part of the buffer covered by the movement is piped to the external command and then replaced by the command’s output. If the movement command is bound to vi-pipe, the current line is used.
The function serves as an example for reading a vi movement command from within a user-defined widget.
which-command
¶This function is a drop-in replacement for the builtin widget
which-command
. It has enhanced behaviour, in that it correctly
detects whether or not the command word needs to be expanded as an
alias; if so, it continues tracing the command word from the expanded
alias until it reaches the command that will be executed.
The style whence
is available in the context :zle:$WIDGET
; this
may be set to an array to give the command and options that will be used to
investigate the command word found. The default is whence -c
.
zcalc-auto-insert
¶This function is useful together with the zcalc
function described in
Mathematical Functions.
It should be bound to a key representing a binary operator such
as ‘+
’, ‘-
’, ‘*
’ or ‘/
’. When running in zcalc,
if the key occurs at the start of the line or immediately following
an open parenthesis, the text "ans "
is inserted before the
representation of the key itself. This allows easy use of the
answer from the previous calculation in the current line. The
text to be inserted before the symbol typed can be modified by setting
the variable ZCALC_AUTO_INSERT_PREFIX
.
Hence, for example, typing ‘+12
’ followed by return adds 12
to the previous result.
If zcalc is in RPN mode (-r
option) the effect of this binding is
automatically suppressed as operators alone on a line are meaningful.
When not in zcalc, the key simply inserts the symbol itself.
These functions are useful in constructing widgets. They
should be loaded with ‘autoload -U
function’ and called
as indicated from user-defined widgets.
split-shell-arguments
¶This function splits the line currently being edited into shell arguments
and whitespace. The result is stored in the array reply
. The array
contains all the parts of the line in order, starting with any whitespace
before the first argument, and finishing with any whitespace after the last
argument. Hence (so long as the option KSH_ARRAYS
is not set)
whitespace is given by odd indices in the array and arguments by
even indices. Note that no stripping of quotes is done; joining together
all the elements of reply
in order is guaranteed to produce the
original line.
The parameter REPLY
is set to the index of the word in reply
which
contains the character after the cursor, where the first element has index
1. The parameter REPLY2
is set to the index of the character under the
cursor in that word, where the first character has index 1.
Hence reply
, REPLY
and REPLY2
should all be made local to
the enclosing function.
See the function modify-current-argument
, described below, for
an example of how to call this function.
modify-current-argument
[ expr-using-$ARG
| func ] ¶This function provides a simple method of allowing user-defined widgets to modify the command line argument under the cursor (or immediately to the left of the cursor if the cursor is between arguments).
The argument can be an expression which when evaluated operates on the shell
parameter ARG
, which will have been set to the command line argument
under the cursor. The expression should be suitably quoted to prevent
it being evaluated too early.
Alternatively, if the argument does not contain the string ARG
, it
is assumed to be a shell function, to which the current command line
argument is passed as the only argument. The function should set the
variable REPLY
to the new value for the command line argument.
If the function returns non-zero status, so does the calling function.
For example, a user-defined widget containing the following code converts the characters in the argument under the cursor into all upper case:
modify-current-argument '${(U)ARG}'
The following strips any quoting from the current word (whether backslashes or one of the styles of quotes), and replaces it with single quoting throughout:
modify-current-argument '${(qq)${(Q)ARG}}'
The following performs directory expansion on the command line argument and replaces it by the absolute path:
expand-dir() { REPLY=${~1} REPLY=${REPLY:a} } modify-current-argument expand-dir
In practice the function expand-dir
would probably not be defined
within the widget where modify-current-argument
is called.
The behavior of several of the above widgets can be controlled by the use
of the zstyle
mechanism. In particular, widgets that interact with
the completion system pass along their context to any completions that
they invoke.
break-keys
¶This style is used by the incremental-complete-word
widget. Its value
should be a pattern, and all keys matching this pattern will cause the
widget to stop incremental completion without the key having any further
effect. Like all styles used directly by
incremental-complete-word
, this style is looked up using the
context ‘:incremental
’.
completer
¶The incremental-complete-word
and insert-and-predict
widgets set
up their top-level context name before calling completion. This allows
one to define different sets of completer functions for normal completion
and for these widgets. For example, to use completion, approximation and
correction for normal completion, completion and correction for
incremental completion and only completion for prediction one could use:
zstyle ':completion:*' completer \ _complete _correct _approximate zstyle ':completion:incremental:*' completer \ _complete _correct zstyle ':completion:predict:*' completer \ _complete
It is a good idea to restrict the completers used in prediction, because
they may be automatically invoked as you type. The _list
and
_menu
completers should never be used with prediction. The
_approximate
, _correct
, _expand
, and _match
completers may
be used, but be aware that they may change characters anywhere in the word
behind the cursor, so you need to watch carefully that the result is what
you intended.
cursor
¶The insert-and-predict
widget uses this style, in the context
‘:predict
’, to decide where to place the cursor after completion has
been tried. Values are:
complete
The cursor is left where it was when completion finished, but only if
it is after a character equal to the one just inserted by the user. If
it is after another character, this value is the same as ‘key
’.
key
The cursor is left after the nth occurrence of the character just inserted, where n is the number of times that character appeared in the word before completion was attempted. In short, this has the effect of leaving the cursor after the character just typed even if the completion code found out that no other characters need to be inserted at that position.
Any other value for this style unconditionally leaves the cursor at the position where the completion code left it.
list
¶When using the incremental-complete-word
widget, this style says
if the matches should be listed on every key press (if they fit on the
screen). Use the context prefix ‘:completion:incremental
’.
The insert-and-predict
widget uses this style to decide if the
completion should be shown even if there is only one possible completion.
This is done if the value of this style is the string always
. In this
case the context is ‘:predict
’ (not ‘:completion:predict
’).
match
¶This style is used by smart-insert-last-word
to provide a pattern
(using full EXTENDED_GLOB
syntax) that matches an interesting word.
The context is the name of the widget to which smart-insert-last-word
is bound (see above). The default behavior of smart-insert-last-word
is equivalent to:
zstyle :insert-last-word match '*[[:alpha:]/\\]*'
However, you might want to include words that contain spaces:
zstyle :insert-last-word match '*[[:alpha:][:space:]/\\]*'
Or include numbers as long as the word is at least two characters long:
zstyle :insert-last-word match '*([[:digit:]]?|[[:alpha:]/\\])*'
The above example causes redirections like "2>" to be included.
prompt
¶The incremental-complete-word
widget shows the value of this
style in the status line during incremental completion. The string
value may contain any of the following substrings in the manner of
the PS1
and other prompt parameters:
%c
Replaced by the name of the completer function that generated the matches (without the leading underscore).
%l
When the list
style is set,
replaced by ‘...
’ if the list of matches is too long to fit on the
screen and with an empty string otherwise. If the list
style is
‘false’ or not set, ‘%l
’ is always removed.
%n
Replaced by the number of matches generated.
%s
Replaced by ‘-no match-
’, ‘-no prefix-
’, or an empty string
if there is no completion matching the word on the line, if the
matches have no common prefix different from the word on the line, or
if there is such a common prefix, respectively.
%u
Replaced by the unambiguous part of all matches, if there is any, and if it is different from the word on the line.
Like ‘break-keys
’, this uses the ‘:incremental
’ context.
stop-keys
¶This style is used by the incremental-complete-word
widget. Its value
is treated similarly to the one for the break-keys
style (and uses
the same context: ‘:incremental
’). However, in
this case all keys matching the pattern given as its value will stop
incremental completion and will then execute their usual function.
toggle
¶This boolean style is used by predict-on
and its related widgets in
the context ‘:predict
’. If set to one of the standard ‘true’ values,
predictive typing is automatically toggled off in situations where it is
unlikely to be useful, such as when editing a multi-line buffer or after
moving into the middle of a line and then deleting a character. The
default is to leave prediction turned on until an explicit call to
predict-off
.
verbose
¶This boolean style is used by predict-on
and its related widgets in
the context ‘:predict
’. If set to one of the standard ‘true’ values,
these widgets display a message below the prompt when the predictive state
is toggled. This is most useful in combination with the toggle
style.
The default does not display these messages.
widget
¶This style is similar to the command
style: For widget functions that
use zle
to call other widgets, this style can sometimes be used to
override the widget which is called. The context for this style is the
name of the calling widget (not the name of the calling function,
because one function may be bound to multiple widget names).
zstyle :copy-earlier-word widget smart-insert-last-word
Check the documentation for the calling widget or function to determine
whether the widget
style is used.
Two functions are provided to enable zsh to provide exception handling in a form that should be familiar from other languages.
throw
exception ¶The function throw
throws the named exception. The name is
an arbitrary string and is only used by the throw
and catch
functions. An exception is for the most part treated the same as a
shell error, i.e. an unhandled exception will cause the shell to abort all
processing in a function or script and to return to the top level in an
interactive shell.
catch
exception-patternThe function catch
returns status zero if an exception was thrown and
the pattern exception-pattern matches its name. Otherwise it
returns status 1. exception-pattern is a standard
shell pattern, respecting the current setting of the EXTENDED_GLOB
option. An alias catch
is also defined to prevent the argument to the
function from matching filenames, so patterns may be used unquoted. Note
that as exceptions are not fundamentally different from other shell errors
it is possible to catch shell errors by using an empty string as the
exception name. The shell variable CAUGHT
is set by catch
to the
name of the exception caught. It is possible to rethrow an exception by
calling the throw
function again once an exception has been caught.
The functions are designed to be used together with the always
construct
described in
Complex Commands. This is important as only this
construct provides the required support for exceptions. A typical example
is as follows.
{ # "try" block # ... nested code here calls "throw MyExcept" } always { # "always" block if catch MyExcept; then print "Caught exception MyExcept" elif catch {No value for `dsq'}; then print "Caught a shell error. Propagating..." throw {No value for `dsq'} fi # Other exceptions are not handled but may be caught further # up the call stack. }
If all exceptions should be caught, the following idiom might be preferable.
{ # ... nested code here throws an exception } always { if catch *; then case $CAUGHT in (MyExcept) print "Caught my own exception" ;; (*) print "Caught some other exception" ;; esac fi }
In common with exception handling in other languages, the exception may be thrown by code deeply nested inside the ‘try’ block. However, note that it must be thrown inside the current shell, not in a subshell forked for a pipeline, parenthesised current-shell construct, or some form of command or process substitution.
The system internally uses the shell variable EXCEPTION
to record the
name of the exception between throwing and catching. One drawback of this
scheme is that if the exception is not handled the variable EXCEPTION
remains set and may be incorrectly recognised as the name of an exception
if a shell error subsequently occurs. Adding unset EXCEPTION
at the
start of the outermost layer of any code that uses exception handling will
eliminate this problem.
Three functions are available to provide handling of files recognised by
extension, for example to dispatch a file text.ps
when executed as a
command to an appropriate viewer.
zsh-mime-setup
[ -fv
] [ -l
[ suffix ... ] ] ¶zsh-mime-handler
[ -l
] command argument ...These two functions use the files ~/.mime.types
and /etc/mime.types
,
which associate types and extensions, as well as ~/.mailcap
and
/etc/mailcap
files, which associate types and the programs that
handle them. These are provided on many systems with the Multimedia
Internet Mail Extensions.
To enable the system, the function zsh-mime-setup
should be
autoloaded and run. This allows files with extensions to be treated
as executable; such files be completed by the function completion system.
The function zsh-mime-handler
should not need to be called by the
user.
The system works by setting up suffix aliases with ‘alias -s
’.
Suffix aliases already installed by the user will not be overwritten.
For suffixes defined in lower case, upper case variants will also
automatically be handled (e.g. PDF
is automatically handled if
handling for the suffix pdf
is defined), but not vice versa.
Repeated calls to zsh-mime-setup
do not override the existing
mapping between suffixes and executable files unless the option -f
is given. Note, however, that this does not override existing suffix
aliases assigned to handlers other than zsh-mime-handler
.
Calling zsh-mime-setup
with the option -l
lists the existing
mappings without altering them. Suffixes to list (which may contain
pattern characters that should be quoted from immediate interpretation
on the command line) may be given as additional arguments, otherwise
all suffixes are listed.
Calling zsh-mime-setup
with the option
-v
causes verbose output to be shown during the setup operation.
The system respects the mailcap
flags needsterminal
and
copiousoutput
; see mailcap(4) or mailcap(5)
(the man page’s name varies across platforms).
The functions use the following styles, which are defined with the
zstyle
builtin command (The zsh/zutil Module). They should be defined
before zsh-mime-setup
is run. The contexts used all
start with :mime:
, with additional components in some cases.
It is recommended that a trailing *
(suitably quoted) be appended
to style patterns in case the system is extended in future. Some
examples are given below.
For files that have multiple suffixes, e.g. .pdf.gz
, where the
context includes the suffix it will be looked up starting with the
longest possible suffix until a match for the style is found.
For example, if .pdf.gz
produces a match for the handler, that
will be used; otherwise the handler for .gz
will be used. Note
that, owing to the way suffix aliases work, it is always required that
there be a handler for the shortest possible suffix, so in this example
.pdf.gz
can only be handled if .gz
is also handled (though
not necessarily in the same way). Alternatively, if no handling
for .gz
on its own is needed, simply adding the command
alias -s gz=zsh-mime-handler
to the initialisation code is sufficient; .gz
will not be handled
on its own, but may be in combination with other suffixes.
current-shell
¶If this boolean style is true, the mailcap handler for the context in
question is run using the eval
builtin instead of by starting a new
sh
process. This is more efficient, but may not work in the occasional
cases where the mailcap handler uses strict POSIX syntax.
disown
¶If this boolean style is true, mailcap handlers started in the background will be disowned, i.e. not subject to job control within the parent shell. Such handlers nearly always produce their own windows, so the only likely harmful side effect of setting the style is that it becomes harder to kill jobs from within the shell.
execute-as-is
¶This style gives a list of patterns to be matched against files
passed for execution with a handler program. If the file matches
the pattern, the entire command line is executed in its current form,
with no handler. This is useful for files which might have suffixes
but nonetheless be executable in their own right. If the style
is not set, the pattern *(*) *(/)
is used;
hence executable files are executed directly and not passed to a
handler, and the option AUTO_CD
may be used to change to directories
that happen to have MIME suffixes.
execute-never
¶This style is useful in combination with execute-as-is
. It is
set to an array of patterns corresponding to full paths to files that
should never be treated as executable, even if the file passed to
the MIME handler matches execute-as-is
. This is useful for file
systems that don’t handle execute permission or that contain executables
from another operating system. For example, if /mnt/windows
is a
Windows mount, then
zstyle ':mime:*' execute-never '/mnt/windows/*'
will ensure that any files found in that area will be executed as MIME
types even if they are executable. As this example shows, the complete
file name is matched against the pattern, regardless of how the file
was passed to the handler. The file is resolved to a full path using
the :P
modifier described in
Modifiers;
this means that symbolic links are resolved where possible, so that
links into other file systems behave in the correct fashion.
file-path
¶Used if the style find-file-in-path
is true for the same context.
Set to an array of directories that are used for searching for the
file to be handled; the default is the command path given by the
special parameter path
. The shell option PATH_DIRS
is respected;
if that is set, the appropriate path will be searched even if the
name of the file to be handled as it appears on the command line contains
a ‘/
’.
The full context is :mime:.
suffix:
, as described for the style
handler
.
find-file-in-path
¶If set, allows files whose names do not contain absolute paths
to be searched for in the command path or the path specified by the
file-path
style. If the file is not found in the path, it is looked
for locally (whether or not the current directory is in the path); if it is
not found locally, the handler will abort unless the handle-nonexistent
style is set. Files found in the path are tested as described for
the style execute-as-is
.
The full context is :mime:.
suffix:
, as described for the style
handler
.
flags
¶Defines flags to go with a handler; the context is as for the
handler
style, and the format is as for the flags in mailcap
.
handle-nonexistent
¶By default, arguments that don’t correspond to files are not passed
to the MIME handler in order to prevent it from intercepting commands found
in the path that happen to have suffixes. This style may be set to
an array of extended glob patterns for arguments that will be passed to the
handler even if they don’t exist. If it is not explicitly set it
defaults to [[:alpha:]]#:/*
which allows URLs to be passed to the MIME
handler even though they don’t exist in that format in the file system.
The full context is :mime:.
suffix:
, as described for the style
handler
.
handler
¶Specifies a handler for a suffix; the suffix is given by the context as
:mime:.
suffix:
, and the format of the handler is exactly
that in mailcap
. Note in particular the ‘.
’ and trailing colon
to distinguish this use of the context. This overrides any handler
specified by the mailcap
files. If the handler requires a terminal,
the flags
style should be set to include the word needsterminal
,
or if the output is to be displayed through a pager (but not if the
handler is itself a pager), it should include copiousoutput
.
mailcap
¶A list of files in the format of ~/.mailcap
and
/etc/mailcap
to be read during setup, replacing the default list
which consists of those two files. The context is :mime:
.
A +
in the list will be replaced by the default files.
mailcap-priorities
¶This style is used to resolve multiple mailcap entries for the same MIME type. It consists of an array of the following elements, in descending order of priority; later entries will be used if earlier entries are unable to resolve the entries being compared. If none of the tests resolve the entries, the first entry encountered is retained.
files
The order of files (entries in the mailcap
style) read. Earlier
files are preferred. (Note this does not resolve entries in the same file.)
priority
The priority flag from the mailcap entry. The priority is an integer from 0 to 9 with the default value being 5.
flags
The test given by the mailcap-prio-flags
option is used to resolve
entries.
place
Later entries are preferred; as the entries are strictly ordered, this test always succeeds.
Note that as this style is handled during initialisation, the context
is always :mime:
, with no discrimination by suffix.
mailcap-prio-flags
¶This style is used when the keyword flags
is encountered in the
list of tests specified by the mailcap-priorities
style.
It should be set to a list of patterns, each of which is tested against
the flags specified in the mailcap entry (in other words, the sets of
assignments found with some entries in the mailcap file). Earlier
patterns in the list are preferred to later ones, and matched patterns
are preferred to unmatched ones.
mime-types
¶A list of files in the format of ~/.mime.types
and
/etc/mime.types
to be read during setup, replacing the default list
which consists of those two files. The context is :mime:
.
A +
in the list will be replaced by the default files.
never-background
¶If this boolean style is set, the handler for the given context is always run in the foreground, even if the flags provided in the mailcap entry suggest it need not be (for example, it doesn’t require a terminal).
pager
¶If set, will be used instead of $PAGER
or more
to handle
suffixes where the copiousoutput
flag is set. The context is
as for handler
, i.e. :mime:.
suffix:
for handling
a file with the given suffix.
Examples:
zstyle ':mime:*' mailcap ~/.mailcap /usr/local/etc/mailcap zstyle ':mime:.txt:' handler less %s zstyle ':mime:.txt:' flags needsterminal
When zsh-mime-setup
is subsequently run, it will look for
mailcap
entries in the two files given. Files of suffix .txt
will be handled by running ‘less
file.txt’. The flag
needsterminal
is set to show that this program must run attached to a
terminal.
As there are several steps to dispatching a command, the following
should be checked if attempting to execute a file by extension
.
ext does not have the expected effect.
The command ‘alias -s
ext’ should show
‘ps=zsh-mime-handler
’. If it shows something else, another suffix
alias was already installed and was not overwritten. If it shows
nothing, no handler was installed: this is most likely because no
handler was found in the .mime.types
and mailcap
combination for
.ext
files. In that case, appropriate handling should be added to
~/.mime.types
and mailcap
.
If the extension is handled by zsh-mime-handler
but the file is
not opened correctly, either the handler defined for the type is
incorrect, or the flags associated with it are in appropriate. Running
zsh-mime-setup -l
will show the handler and, if there are any, the
flags. A %s
in the handler is replaced by the file (suitably quoted
if necessary). Check that the handler program listed lists and can
be run in the way shown. Also check that the flags needsterminal
or
copiousoutput
are set if the handler needs to be run under a
terminal; the second flag is used if the output should be sent to a pager.
An example of a suitable mailcap
entry for such a program is:
text/html; /usr/bin/lynx '%s'; needsterminal
Running ‘zsh-mime-handler -l
command line’ prints the command
line that would be executed, simplified to remove the effect of any
flags, and quoted so that the output can be run as a complete zsh
command line. This is used by the completion system to decide how to
complete after a file handled by zsh-mime-setup
.
pick-web-browser
¶This function is separate from the two MIME functions described above and can be assigned directly to a suffix:
autoload -U pick-web-browser alias -s html=pick-web-browser
It is provided as an intelligent front end to dispatch a web browser. It may be run as either a function or a shell script. The status 255 is returned if no browser could be started.
Various styles are available to customize the choice of browsers:
browser-style
The value of the style is an array giving preferences in decreasing order for the type of browser to use. The values of elements may be
running
Use a GUI browser that is already running when an X Window display is
available. The browsers listed in the x-browsers
style are tried
in order until one is found; if it is, the file will be displayed in
that browser, so the user may need to check whether it has appeared.
If no running browser is found, one is not started. Browsers other than
Firefox, Opera and Konqueror are assumed to understand the Mozilla
syntax for opening a URL remotely.
x
Start a new GUI browser when an X Window display is available. Search for
the availability of one of the browsers listed in the x-browsers
style
and start the first one that is found. No check is made for an already
running browser.
tty
Start a terminal-based browser. Search for the availability of one
of the browsers listed in the tty-browsers
style and start the
first one that is found.
If the style is not set the default running x tty
is used.
x-browsers
An array in decreasing order
of preference of browsers to use when running under the X Window System.
The array consists of the command name under which to start the
browser. They are looked up in the context :mime:
(which may
be extended in future, so appending ‘*
’ is recommended). For
example,
zstyle ':mime:*' x-browsers opera konqueror firefox
specifies that pick-web-browser
should first look for a running
instance of Opera, Konqueror or Firefox, in that order, and if it
fails to find any should attempt to start Opera. The default is
firefox mozilla netscape opera konqueror
.
tty-browsers
An array similar to x-browsers
, except that it gives browsers to
use when no X Window display is available. The default is
elinks links lynx
.
command
If it is set this style is used to pick the command
used to open a page for a browser. The context is
:mime:browser:new:$browser:
to start a new browser or
:mime:browser:running:$browser:
to open a URL in a browser already
running on the current X display, where $browser
is the value matched
in the x-browsers
or tty-browsers
style. The escape sequence
%b
in the style’s value will be replaced by the browser, while %u
will be replaced by the URL. If the style is not set, the default for all
new instances is equivalent to %b %u
and the defaults for using running
browsers are equivalent to the values kfmclient openURL %u
for
Konqueror, firefox -new-tab %u
for Firefox, opera -newpage %u
for Opera, and %b -remote "openUrl(%u)"
for all others.
zcalc
[ -erf
] [ expression ... ] ¶A reasonably powerful calculator based on zsh’s arithmetic evaluation facility. The syntax is similar to that of formulae in most programming languages; see Arithmetic Evaluation for details.
Non-programmers should note that, as in many other programming
languages, expressions involving only integers (whether constants
without a ‘.
’, variables containing such constants as strings, or
variables declared to be integers) are by default evaluated using
integer arithmetic, which is not how an ordinary desk calculator
operates. To force floating point operation, pass the option -f
;
see further notes below.
If the file ~/.zcalcrc
exists it will be sourced inside the function
once it is set up and about to process the command line. This
can be used, for example, to set shell options; emulate -L zsh
and setopt extendedglob
are in effect at this point. Any
failure to source the file if it exists is treated as fatal.
As with other initialisation files, the directory $ZDOTDIR
is used
instead of $HOME
if it is set.
The mathematical library zsh/mathfunc
will be loaded if it is
available; see
The zsh/mathfunc Module. The mathematical functions
correspond to the raw system libraries, so trigonometric functions are
evaluated using radians, and so on.
Each line typed is evaluated as an expression. The prompt shows a number,
which corresponds to a positional parameter where the result of that
calculation is stored. For example, the result of the calculation on the
line preceded by ‘4>
’ is available as $4
. The last value
calculated is available as ans
. Full command line editing, including
the history of previous calculations, is available; the history is saved in
the file ~/.zcalc_history
. To exit, enter a blank line or type ‘:q
’
on its own (‘q
’ is allowed for historical compatibility).
A line ending with a single backslash is treated in the same fashion
as it is in command line editing: the backslash is removed, the
function prompts for more input (the prompt is preceded by ‘...
’
to indicate this), and the lines are combined into one to get the final
result. In addition, if the input so far contains more open than
close parentheses zcalc
will prompt for more input.
If arguments are given to zcalc
on start up, they are used to prime the
first few positional parameters. A visual indication of this is given when
the calculator starts.
The constants PI
(3.14159...) and E
(2.71828...) are provided.
Parameter assignment is possible, but note that all parameters will be
put into the global namespace unless the :local
special command is
used. The function creates local variables whose names start with
_
, so users should avoid doing so. The variables ans
(the last
answer) and stack
(the stack in RPN mode) may be referred to
directly; stack
is an array but elements of it are numeric. Various
other special variables are used locally with their standard meaning,
for example compcontext
, match
, mbegin
, mend
, psvar
.
The output base can be initialised by passing the option ‘-#
base’,
for example ‘zcalc -#16
’ (the ‘#
’ may have to be quoted, depending
on the globbing options set).
If the option ‘-e
’ is set, the function runs non-interactively:
the arguments are treated as expressions to be evaluated as if entered
interactively line by line.
If the option ‘-f
’ is set, all numbers are treated as floating
point, hence for example the expression ‘3/4
’ evaluates to 0.75
rather than 0. Options must appear in separate words.
If the option ‘-r
’ is set, RPN (Reverse Polish Notation) mode is
entered. This has various additional properties:
Evaluated values are maintained in a stack; this is contained in
an array named stack
with the most recent value in ${stack[1]}
.
If the line entered matches an operator (+
, -
, *
,
/
, **
, ^
, |
or &
) or a function supplied by the
zsh/mathfunc
library, the bottom element or elements of the stack
are popped to use as the argument or arguments. The higher elements
of stack (least recent) are used as earlier arguments. The result is
then pushed into ${stack[1]}
.
Other expressions are evaluated normally, printed, and added to the stack as numeric values. The syntax within expressions on a single line is normal shell arithmetic (not RPN).
If an integer follows the option -r
with no space, then
on every evaluation that many elements of the stack, where available,
are printed instead of just the most recent result. Hence, for example,
zcalc -r4
shows $stack[4]
to $stack[1]
each time results
are printed.
=
The pseudo-operator =
causes the most recent element of
the stack to be duplicated onto the stack.
pop
The pseudo-function pop
causes the most recent element of
the stack to be popped. A ‘>
’ on its own has the same effect.
>
identThe expression >
followed (with no space) by a shell identifier
causes the most recent element of the stack to be popped and
assigned to the variable with that name. The variable is
local to the zcalc
function.
<
identThe expression <
followed (with no space) by a shell identifier
causes the value of the variable with that name to be pushed
onto the stack. ident may be an integer, in which
case the previous result with that number (as shown before
the >
in the standard zcalc
prompt) is put on the stack.
xy
The pseudo-function xy
causes the most recent two elements of
the stack to be exchanged. ‘<>
’ has the same effect.
The prompt is configurable via the parameter ZCALCPROMPT
, which
undergoes standard prompt expansion. The index of the current entry is
stored locally in the first element of the array psvar
, which can be
referred to in ZCALCPROMPT
as ‘%1v
’. The default prompt is
‘%1v>
’.
The variable ZCALC_ACTIVE
is set within the function and can
be tested by nested functions; it has the value rpn
if RPN mode is
active, else 1.
A few special commands are available; these are introduced by a colon.
For backward compatibility, the colon may be omitted for certain
commands. Completion is available if compinit
has been run.
The output precision may be specified within zcalc by special commands familiar from many calculators.
:norm
The default output format. It corresponds to the printf %g
specification. Typically this shows six decimal digits.
:sci
digitsScientific notation, corresponding to the printf %g
output format with
the precision given by digits. This produces either fixed point or
exponential notation depending on the value output.
:fix
digitsFixed point notation, corresponding to the printf %f
output format with
the precision given by digits.
:eng
digitsExponential notation, corresponding to the printf %E
output format with
the precision given by digits.
:raw
Raw output: this is the default form of the output from a math evaluation. This may show more precision than the number actually possesses.
Other special commands:
:!
line...Execute line... as a normal shell command line. Note that it
is executed in the context of the function, i.e. with local variables.
Space is optional after :!
.
:local
arg ...Declare variables local to the function. Other variables may be used, too, but they will be taken from or put into the global scope.
:function
name [ body ]Define a mathematical function or (with no body) delete it.
:function
may be abbreviated to :func
or simply :f
.
The name may contain the same characters as a shell function name.
The function is defined using zmathfuncdef
, see below.
Note that zcalc
takes care of all quoting. Hence for example:
:f cube $1 * $1 * $1
defines a function to cube the sole argument. Functions so defined, or
indeed any functions defined directly or indirectly using functions
-M
, are available to execute by typing only the name on the line in RPN
mode; this pops the appropriate number of arguments off the stack
to pass to the function, i.e. 1 in the case of the example cube
function. If there are optional arguments only the mandatory
arguments are supplied by this means.
[#
base]
This is not a special command, rather part of normal arithmetic
syntax; however, when this form appears on a line by itself the default
output radix is set to base. Use, for example, ‘[#16]
’ to display
hexadecimal output preceded by an indication of the base, or ‘[##16]
’
just to display the raw number in the given base. Bases themselves are
always specified in decimal. ‘[#]
’ restores the normal output format.
Note that setting an output base suppresses floating point output; use
‘[#]
’ to return to normal operation.
$
varPrint out the value of var literally; does not affect the calculation.
To use the value of var, omit the leading ‘$
’.
See the comments in the function for a few extra tips.
min(
arg, ...)
¶max(
arg, ...)
sum(
arg, ...)
zmathfunc
The function zmathfunc
defines the three mathematical functions
min
, max
, and sum
. The functions min
and max
take
one or more arguments. The function sum
takes zero or more arguments.
Arguments can be of different types (ints and floats).
Not to be confused with the zsh/mathfunc
module, described in
The zsh/mathfunc Module.
zmathfuncdef
[ mathfunc [ body ] ] ¶A convenient front end to functions -M
.
With two arguments, define a mathematical function named mathfunc
which can be used in any form of arithmetic evaluation. body
is a mathematical expression to implement the function. It may
contain references to position parameters $1
, $2
, ...
to refer to mandatory parameters and ${1:-
defvalue}
...
to refer to optional parameters. Note that the forms must be
strictly adhered to for the function to calculate the correct number
of arguments. The implementation is held in a shell function named
zsh_math_func_
mathfunc; usually the user will not need
to refer to the shell function directly. Any existing function
of the same name is silently replaced.
With one argument, remove the mathematical function mathfunc as well as the shell function implementation.
With no arguments, list all mathfunc functions in a form
suitable for restoring the definition.
The functions have not necessarily been defined by zmathfuncdef
.
The zsh/newuser
module comes with a function to aid in configuring
shell options for new users. If the module is installed, this function can
also be run by hand. It is available even if the module’s default
behaviour, namely running the function for a new user logging in without
startup files, is inhibited.
zsh-newuser-install
[ -f
]The function presents the user with various options for customizing
their initialization scripts. Currently only ~/.zshrc
is handled.
$ZDOTDIR/.zshrc
is used instead if the parameter ZDOTDIR
is
set; this provides a way for the user to configure a file without
altering an existing .zshrc
.
By default the function exits immediately if it finds any of the files
.zshenv
, .zprofile
, .zshrc
, or .zlogin
in the appropriate
directory. The option -f
is required in order to force the function
to continue. Note this may happen even if .zshrc
itself does not
exist.
As currently configured, the function will exit immediately if the user has root privileges; this behaviour cannot be overridden.
Once activated, the function’s behaviour is supposed to be self-explanatory. Menus are present allowing the user to alter the value of options and parameters. Suggestions for improvements are always welcome.
When the script exits, the user is given the opportunity to save the new
file or not; changes are not irreversible until this point. However,
the script is careful to restrict changes to the file only to a group
marked by the lines ‘# Lines configured by zsh-newuser-install
’ and
‘# End of lines configured by zsh-newuser-install
’. In addition,
the old version of .zshrc
is saved to a file with the suffix
.zni
appended.
If the function edits an existing .zshrc
, it is up to the user
to ensure that the changes made will take effect. For example, if
control usually returns early from the existing .zshrc
the lines
will not be executed; or a later initialization file may override
options or parameters, and so on. The function itself does not attempt to
detect any such conflicts.
There are a large number of helpful functions in the Functions/Misc
directory of the zsh distribution. Most are very simple and do not
require documentation here, but a few are worthy of special mention.
colors
¶This function initializes several associative arrays to map color names to
(and from) the ANSI standard eight-color terminal codes. These are used
by the prompt theme system (Prompt Themes). You seldom should need to run
colors
more than once.
The eight base colors are: black
, red
, green
, yellow
,
blue
, magenta
, cyan
, and white
. Each of these has codes for
foreground and background. In addition there are seven intensity attributes:
bold
, faint
, standout
, underline
, blink
, reverse
,
and conceal
. Finally, there are seven codes used to negate attributes:
none
(reset all attributes to the defaults), normal
(neither bold nor faint), no-standout
, no-underline
, no-blink
,
no-reverse
, and no-conceal
.
Some terminals do not support all combinations of colors and intensities.
The associative arrays are:
color
colour
Map all the color names to their integer codes, and integer codes to the
color names. The eight base names map to the foreground color codes, as
do names prefixed with ‘fg-
’, such as ‘fg-red
’. Names prefixed
with ‘bg-
’, such as ‘bg-blue
’, refer to the background codes. The
reverse mapping from code to color yields base name for foreground codes
and the bg-
form for backgrounds.
Although it is a misnomer to call them ‘colors’, these arrays also map the other fourteen attributes from names to codes and codes to names.
fg
fg_bold
fg_no_bold
Map the eight basic color names to ANSI terminal escape sequences that set
the corresponding foreground text properties. The fg
sequences change
the color without changing the eight intensity attributes.
bg
bg_bold
bg_no_bold
Map the eight basic color names to ANSI terminal escape sequences that set
the corresponding background properties. The bg
sequences change the
color without changing the eight intensity attributes.
In addition, the scalar parameters reset_color
and bold_color
are
set to the ANSI terminal escapes that turn off all attributes and turn on
bold intensity, respectively.
fned
[ -x
num ] name ¶Same as zed -f
. This function does not appear in the zsh
distribution, but can be created by linking zed
to the name fned
in some directory in your fpath
.
histed
[ [ name ] size ] ¶Same as zed -h
. This function does not appear in the zsh
distribution, but can be created by linking zed
to the name histed
in some directory in your fpath
.
is-at-least
needed [ present ] ¶Perform a greater-than-or-equal-to comparison of two strings having the
format of a zsh version number; that is, a string of numbers and text with
segments separated by dots or dashes. If the present string is not
provided, $ZSH_VERSION
is used. Segments are paired left-to-right in
the two strings with leading non-number parts ignored. If one string has
fewer segments than the other, the missing segments are considered zero.
This is useful in startup files to set options and other state that are not available in all versions of zsh.
is-at-least 3.1.6-15 && setopt NO_GLOBAL_RCS is-at-least 3.1.0 && setopt HIST_REDUCE_BLANKS is-at-least 2.6-17 || print "You can't use is-at-least here."
nslookup
[ arg ... ] ¶This wrapper function for the nslookup
command requires the
zsh/zpty
module (see
The zsh/zpty Module). It behaves exactly like the standard nslookup
except that it provides customizable prompts (including a right-side
prompt) and completion of nslookup commands, host names, etc. (if you use
the function-based completion system). Completion styles may be set with
the context prefix ‘:completion:nslookup
’.
See also the pager
, prompt
and rprompt
styles below.
regexp-replace
var regexp replace ¶Use regular expressions to perform a global search and replace operation
on a variable. POSIX extended regular expressions (ERE) are used,
unless the option RE_MATCH_PCRE
has been set, in which case
Perl-compatible regular expressions are used
(this requires the shell to be linked against the pcre
library).
var is the name of the variable containing the string to be matched.
The variable will be modified directly by the function. The
variables MATCH
, MBEGIN
, MEND
, match
, mbegin
, mend
should be avoided as these are used by the regular expression code.
regexp is the regular expression to match against the string.
replace is the replacement text. This can contain parameter, command
and arithmetic expressions which will be replaced: in particular, a
reference to $MATCH
will be replaced by the text matched by the pattern.
The return status is 0 if at least one match was performed, else 1.
Note that if using POSIX EREs, the ^
or word boundary operators
(where available) may not work properly.
run-help
cmd ¶This function is designed to be invoked by the run-help
ZLE widget,
in place of the default alias. See ‘Accessing On-Line Help’
(Utilities) for setup instructions.
In the discussion which follows, if cmd is a file system path, it is first reduced to its rightmost component (the file name).
Help is first sought by looking for a file named cmd in the directory
named by the HELPDIR
parameter. If no file is found, an assistant
function, alias, or command named run-help-cmd
is sought. If
found, the assistant is executed with the rest of the current command line
(everything after the command name cmd) as its arguments. When
neither file nor assistant is found, the external command
‘man
cmd’ is run.
An example assistant for the "ssh" command:
run-help-ssh() { emulate -LR zsh local -a args # Delete the "-l username" option zparseopts -D -E -a args l: # Delete other options, leaving: host command args=(${@:#-*}) if [[ ${#args} -lt 2 ]]; then man ssh else run-help $args[2] fi }
Several of these assistants are provided in the Functions/Misc
directory. These must be autoloaded, or placed as executable scripts in
your search path, in order to be found and used by run-help
.
run-help-btrfs
¶run-help-git
run-help-ip
run-help-openssl
run-help-p4
run-help-sudo
run-help-svk
run-help-svn
Assistant functions for the
btrfs
,
git
,
ip
,
openssl
,
p4
,
sudo
,
svk
,
and
svn
,
commands.
tetris
Zsh was once accused of not being as complete as Emacs, because it lacked a Tetris game. This function was written to refute this vicious slander.
This function must be used as a ZLE widget:
autoload -U tetris zle -N tetris bindkey keys tetris
To start a game, execute the widget by typing the keys. Whatever command
line you were editing disappears temporarily, and your keymap is also
temporarily replaced by the Tetris control keys. The previous editor state
is restored when you quit the game (by pressing ‘q
’) or when you lose.
If you quit in the middle of a game, the next invocation of the tetris
widget will continue where you left off. If you lost, it will start a new
game.
tetriscurses
This is a port of the above to zcurses. The input handling is improved a bit so that moving a block sideways doesn’t automatically advance a timestep, and the graphics use unicode block graphics.
This version does not save the game state between invocations, and is not invoked as a widget, but rather as:
autoload -U tetriscurses tetriscurses
zargs
[ option ... -
-
] [ input ... ] [ -
-
command [ arg ... ] ] ¶This function has a similar purpose to GNU xargs. Instead of reading lines of arguments from the standard input, it takes them from the command line. This is useful because zsh, especially with recursive glob operators, often can construct a command line for a shell function that is longer than can be accepted by an external command.
The option list represents options of the zargs
command itself,
which are the same as those of xargs
. The input list is the
collection of strings (often file names) that become the arguments of the
command
, analogous to the standard input of xargs
. Finally, the
arg list consists of those arguments (usually options) that are
passed to the command each time it runs. The arg list precedes
the elements from the input
list in each run. If no command is
provided, then no arg list may be provided, and in that event the
default command is ‘print
’ with arguments ‘-r -
-
’.
For example, to get a long ls
listing of all non-hidden plain files
in the current directory or its subdirectories:
autoload -U zargs zargs -- **/*(.) -- ls -ld --
The first and third occurrences of ‘-
-
’ are used to mark the end
of options for zargs
and ls
respectively to guard against
filenames starting with ‘-
’, while the second is used to separate the
list of files from the command to run (‘ls -ld --
’).
The first ‘-
-
’ would also be needed if there was a chance the
list might be empty as in:
zargs -r -- ./*.back(#qN) -- rm -f
In the event that the string ‘-
-
’ is or may be an input, the
-e
option may be used to change the end-of-inputs marker. Note that
this does not change the end-of-options marker. For example, to use
‘..
’ as the marker:
zargs -e.. -- **/*(.) .. ls -ld --
This is a good choice in that example because no plain file can be named
‘..
’, but the best end-marker depends on the circumstances.
The options -i
, -I
, -l
, -L
, and -n
differ slightly
from their usage in xargs
. There are no input lines for zargs
to
count, so -l
and -L
count through the input list, and -n
counts the number of arguments passed to each execution of command,
including any arg list. Also, any time -i
or -I
is used,
each input is processed separately as if by ‘-L
1
’.
For details of the other zargs
options, see the xargs(1) man page (but note
the difference in function between zargs
and xargs
) or run
zargs
with the -
-help
option.
zed
[ -f
[ -x
num ] ] name ¶zed
[ -h
[ name ] size ]zed -b
This function uses the ZLE editor to edit a file or function.
Only one name argument is allowed.
If the -f
option is given, the name is taken to be that of
a function; if the function is marked for autoloading, zed
searches
for it in the fpath
and loads it. Note that functions edited this way
are installed into the current shell, but not written back to the
autoload file. In this case the -x
option specifies that leading
tabs indenting the function according to syntax should be converted into
the given number of spaces; ‘-x 2
’ is consistent with the layout
of functions distributed with the shell.
Without -f
, name is the path name of the file to edit, which need
not exist; it is created on write, if necessary. With -h
, the file is
presumed to contain history events.
When no file name is provided for -h
the current shell history is edited
in place. The history is renumbered when zed exits successfully.
When editing history, multi-line events must have a trailing backslash on every line before the last.
While editing, the function sets the main keymap to zed
and the
vi command keymap to zed-vicmd
. These will be copied from the existing
main
and vicmd
keymaps if they do not exist the first time zed
is run. They can be used to provide special key bindings used only in zed.
If it creates the keymap, zed
rebinds the return key to insert a line
break and ‘^X^W
’ to accept the edit in the zed
keymap, and binds
‘ZZ
’ to accept the edit in the zed-vicmd
keymap.
The bindings alone can be installed by running ‘zed -b
’. This is
suitable for putting into a startup file. Note that, if rerun,
this will overwrite the existing zed
and zed-vicmd
keymaps.
Completion is available, and styles may be set with the context prefix
‘:completion:zed:
’.
A zle widget zed-set-file-name
is available. This can be called
by name from within zed using ‘\ex zed-set-file-name
’ or can be
bound to a key in either of the zed
or zed-vicmd
keymaps after
‘zed -b
’ has been run. When the widget is called, it prompts for
a new name for the file being edited. When zed exits the file will be
written under that name and the original file will be left alone. The
widget has no effect when invoked from ‘zed -f
’. The completion
context is changed to ‘:completion:zed-set-file-name:
’. When editing
the current history with ‘zed -h
’, the history is first updated and
then the file is written, but the global setting of HISTFILE
is not
altered.
While zed-set-file-name
is running, zed uses the keymap
zed-normal-keymap
, which is linked from the main keymap in effect
at the time zed initialised its bindings. (This is to make the return key
operate normally.) The result is that if the main keymap has been changed,
the widget won’t notice. This is not a concern for most users.
zcp
[ -finqQvwW
] srcpat dest ¶zln
[ -finqQsvwW
] srcpat destSame as zmv -C
and zmv -L
, respectively. These functions do not
appear in the zsh distribution, but can be created by linking zmv
to
the names zcp
and zln
in some directory in your fpath
.
zkbd
See ‘Keyboard Definition’ (Utilities).
zmv
[ -finqQsvwW
] [ -C
| -L
| -M
| -{p
|P
} program ] [ -o
optstring ]
srcpat destMove (usually, rename) files matching the pattern srcpat to
corresponding files having names of the form given by dest, where
srcpat contains parentheses surrounding patterns which will be
replaced in turn by $1
, $2
, ... in dest. For example,
zmv '(*).lis' '$1.txt'
renames ‘foo.lis
’ to ‘foo.txt
’, ‘my.old.stuff.lis
’ to
‘my.old.stuff.txt
’, and so on.
The pattern is always treated as an EXTENDED_GLOB
pattern. Any file
whose name is not changed by the substitution is simply ignored. Any
error (a substitution resulted in an empty string, two substitutions gave
the same result, the destination was an existing regular file and -f
was not given) causes the entire function to abort without doing
anything.
In addition to pattern replacement, the variable $f
can be referred
to in the second (replacement) argument. This makes it possible to
use variable substitution to alter the argument; see examples below.
Options:
-f
Force overwriting of destination files. Not currently
passed down to the mv
/cp
/ln
command due to vagaries of
implementations (but you can use -o-f
to do that).
-i
Interactive: show each line to be executed and ask the user
whether to execute it. ‘Y
’ or ‘y
’ will execute it, anything else will
skip it. Note that you just need to type one character.
-n
No execution: print what would happen, but don’t do it.
-q
Turn bare glob qualifiers off: now assumed by default, so this has no effect.
-Q
Force bare glob qualifiers on. Don’t turn this on unless you are actually using glob qualifiers in a pattern.
-s
Symbolic, passed down to ln
; only works with -L
.
-v
Verbose: print each command as it’s being executed.
-w
Pick out wildcard parts of the pattern, as described above, and implicitly add parentheses for referring to them.
-W
Just like -w
, with the addition of turning wildcards in
the replacement pattern into sequential ${1}
.. ${N}
references.
-C
-L
-M
Force cp
, ln
or mv
, respectively, regardless of
the name of the function.
-p
programCall program instead of cp
, ln
or
mv
. Whatever it does, it should at least understand the form
program-
-
oldname newname
where oldname and newname are filenames generated by zmv
.
program will be split into words, so might be e.g. the name
of an archive tool plus a copy or rename subcommand.
-P
programAs -p
program, except that
program does not accept a following -
-
to indicate the
end of options. In this case filenames must already be in a sane
form for the program in question.
-o
optstringThe optstring is split into words and
passed down verbatim to the cp
, ln
or mv
command called to
perform the work. It should probably begin with a ‘-
’.
Further examples:
zmv -v '(* *)' '${1// /_}'
For any file in the current directory with at least one space in the name, replace every space by an underscore and display the commands executed.
zmv -v '* *' '${f// /_}'
This does exactly the same by referring to the file name stored in $f
.
For more complete examples and other implementation details, see the
zmv
source file, usually located in one of the directories named in
your fpath
, or in Functions/Misc/zmv
in the zsh distribution.
zrecompile
See ‘Recompiling Functions’ (Utilities).
zstyle+
context style value [ +
subcontext style value ... ] ¶This makes defining styles a bit simpler by using a single ‘+
’ as a
special token that allows you to append a context name to the previously
used context name. Like this:
zstyle+ ':foo:bar' style1 value1 \ +':baz' style2 value2 \ +':frob' style3 value3
This defines style1 with value1 for the context :foo:bar
as usual,
but it also defines style2 with value2 for the context
:foo:bar:baz
and style3 with value3 for :foo:bar:frob
. Any
subcontext may be the empty string to re-use the first context
unchanged.
insert-tab
¶The zed
function sets this style in context ‘:completion:zed:*
’
to turn off completion when TAB
is typed at the beginning of a line.
You may override this by setting your own value for this context and style.
pager
¶The nslookup
function looks up this style in the context
‘:nslookup
’ to determine the program used to display output that does
not fit on a single screen.
prompt
¶rprompt
The nslookup
function looks up this style in the context
‘:nslookup
’ to set the prompt and the right-side prompt, respectively.
The usual expansions for the PS1
and RPS1
parameters may be used
(see
Prompt Expansion).